Ludus literarius: or, the grammar schoole shewing how to proceede from the first entrance into learning, to the highest perfection required in the grammar schooles, with ease, certainty and delight both to masters and schollars; onely according to our common grammar, and ordinary classical authours: begun to be sought out at the desire of some worthy fauourers of learning, by searching the experiments of sundry most profitable schoolemasters and other learned, and confirmed by tryall: intended for the helping of the younger sort of teachers, and of all schollars ...
         Brinsley, John, fl. 1581-1624.
      
       
         
           1612
        
      
       Approx. 807 KB of XML-encoded text transcribed from 187 1-bit group-IV TIFF page images.
       
         Text Creation Partnership,
         Ann Arbor, MI ; Oxford (UK) :
         2004-03 (EEBO-TCP Phase 1).
         A16865
         STC 3768
         ESTC S106596
         99842309
         99842309
         6954
         
           
            This keyboarded and encoded edition of the work described above is co-owned by the institutions providing financial support to the Early English Books Online Text Creation Partnership. This Phase I text is available for reuse, according to the terms of
             Creative Commons 0 1.0 Universal
            . The text can be copied, modified, distributed and performed, even for commercial purposes, all without asking permission.
          
        
      
       
         Early English books online.
      
       
         (EEBO-TCP ; phase 1, no. A16865)
         Transcribed from: (Early English Books Online ; image set 6954)
         Images scanned from microfilm: (Early English books, 1475-1640 ; 829:02)
      
       
         
           
             Ludus literarius: or, the grammar schoole shewing how to proceede from the first entrance into learning, to the highest perfection required in the grammar schooles, with ease, certainty and delight both to masters and schollars; onely according to our common grammar, and ordinary classical authours: begun to be sought out at the desire of some worthy fauourers of learning, by searching the experiments of sundry most profitable schoolemasters and other learned, and confirmed by tryall: intended for the helping of the younger sort of teachers, and of all schollars ...
             Brinsley, John, fl. 1581-1624.
          
           [28], 339, [1] p.
           
             Printed [by Humphrey Lownes] for Thomas Man,
             London :
             1612.
          
           
             Dedication signed: Io. Brinsley.
             Printer's name from STC.
             Running title reads: The grammar schoole.
             Reproduction of the original in the Henry E. Huntington Library and Art Gallery.
          
        
      
    
     
       
         Created by converting TCP files to TEI P5 using tcp2tei.xsl, TEI @ Oxford.
         Re-processed by University of Nebraska-Lincoln and Northwestern, with changes to facilitate morpho-syntactic tagging. Gap elements of known extent have been transformed into placeholder characters or elements to simplify the filling in of gaps by user contributors.
      
       
         EEBO-TCP is a partnership between the Universities of Michigan and Oxford and the publisher ProQuest to create accurately transcribed and encoded texts based on the image sets published by ProQuest via their Early English Books Online (EEBO) database (http://eebo.chadwyck.com). The general aim of EEBO-TCP is to encode one copy (usually the first edition) of every monographic English-language title published between 1473 and 1700 available in EEBO.
         EEBO-TCP aimed to produce large quantities of textual data within the usual project restraints of time and funding, and therefore chose to create diplomatic transcriptions (as opposed to critical editions) with light-touch, mainly structural encoding based on the Text Encoding Initiative (http://www.tei-c.org).
         The EEBO-TCP project was divided into two phases. The 25,363 texts created during Phase 1 of the project have been released into the public domain as of 1 January 2015. Anyone can now take and use these texts for their own purposes, but we respectfully request that due credit and attribution is given to their original source.
         Users should be aware of the process of creating the TCP texts, and therefore of any assumptions that can be made about the data.
         Text selection was based on the New Cambridge Bibliography of English Literature (NCBEL). If an author (or for an anonymous work, the title) appears in NCBEL, then their works are eligible for inclusion. Selection was intended to range over a wide variety of subject areas, to reflect the true nature of the print record of the period. In general, first editions of a works in English were prioritized, although there are a number of works in other languages, notably Latin and Welsh, included and sometimes a second or later edition of a work was chosen if there was a compelling reason to do so.
         Image sets were sent to external keying companies for transcription and basic encoding. Quality assurance was then carried out by editorial teams in Oxford and Michigan. 5% (or 5 pages, whichever is the greater) of each text was proofread for accuracy and those which did not meet QA standards were returned to the keyers to be redone. After proofreading, the encoding was enhanced and/or corrected and characters marked as illegible were corrected where possible up to a limit of 100 instances per text. Any remaining illegibles were encoded as <gap>s. Understanding these processes should make clear that, while the overall quality of TCP data is very good, some errors will remain and some readable characters will be marked as illegible. Users should bear in mind that in all likelihood such instances will never have been looked at by a TCP editor.
         The texts were encoded and linked to page images in accordance with level 4 of the TEI in Libraries guidelines.
         Copies of the texts have been issued variously as SGML (TCP schema; ASCII text with mnemonic sdata character entities); displayable XML (TCP schema; characters represented either as UTF-8 Unicode or text strings within braces); or lossless XML (TEI P5, characters represented either as UTF-8 Unicode or TEI g elements).
         
          Keying and markup guidelines are available at the
           Text Creation Partnership web site
          .
        
      
       
         
         
      
    
     
       
         eng
      
       
         
           Education -- Early works to 1800.
           Teaching -- Early works to 1800.
        
      
    
     
        2003-10 TCP
        Assigned for keying and markup
      
        2003-10 Aptara
        Keyed and coded from ProQuest page images
      
        2003-11 Olivia Bottum
        Sampled and proofread
      
        2003-11 Olivia Bottum
        Text and markup reviewed and edited
      
        2003-12 pfs
        Batch review (QC) and XML conversion
      
    
  
   
     
       
         
         
         
           LVDVS
           LITERARIVS
           :
           OR
           ,
           THE
           GRAMMAR
           SCHOOLE
           ;
           
             SHEWING
             HOW
             TO
             PROceede
          
           from
           the
           first
           entrance
           into
           learning
           ,
           to
           the
           highest
           perfection
           required
           in
           the
           GRAMMAR
           SCHOOLES
           ,
           with
           ease
           ,
           certainty
           and
           delight
           both
           to
           Masters
           and
           Schollars
           ;
           onely
           according
           to
           our
           common
           Grammar
           ,
           and
           ordinary
           Classicall
           Authours
           :
        
         
           BEGVN
           TO
           BE
           SOVGHT
           OVT
           AT
           THE
           desire
           of
           some
           worthy
           fauourers
           of
           learning
           ,
           by
           searching
           the
           experiments
           of
           sundry
           most
           profitable
           Schoolemasters
           and
           other
           learned
           ,
           and
           confirmed
           by
           tryall
           :
        
         
           Intended
           for
           the
           helping
           of
           the
           younger
           sort
           of
           Teachers
           ,
           and
           of
           all
           Schollars
           ,
           with
           all
           other
           desirous
           of
           learning
           ;
           for
           the
           perpetuall
           benefit
           of
           Church
           and
           Common-wealth
           .
        
         
           It
           offereth
           it selfe
           to
           all
           to
           whom
           it
           may
           doe
           good
           ,
           or
           of
           whom
           it
           may
           receiue
           good
           to
           bring
           it
           towards
           perfection
           .
        
         
           
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
          
           
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
          
           
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
          
           
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
          
           
             Theognis
             .
          
        
         
           Nullum
           munus
           Reipub.
           affere
           maius
           meliúsue
           possumus
           ,
           quam
           sidoceamus
           atque
           erudimus
           iuuentutem
           .
           
             Cic.
             3.
             de
             Diuin
             .
          
        
         
           Quaerendi
           defatigatio
           turpis
           est
           ,
           cum
           id
           quod
           quaeritur
           sit
           pulcherrimum
           .
           
             2.
             de
             Finibus
             .
          
        
         
           LONDON
           ,
           Printed
           for
           THOMAS
           MAN.
           1612.
           
        
      
       
         
         
         
           TO
           THE
           HIGH
           AND
           MIGHTY
           PRINCE
           ,
           Henry
           ,
           Prince
           of
           Wales
           ;
           and
           to
           the
           most
           Noble
           and
           excellent
           Duke
           ,
           Charles
           ,
           Duke
           of
           Yorke
           ;
           I.
           B.
           vnfainedly
           wisheth
           all
           grace
           and
           glory
           ,
           and
           humbly
           commendeth
           the
           Patronage
           of
           his
           Labours
           .
        
         
           SEeing
           that
           all
           of
           vs
           of
           this
           Nation
           (
           
             most
             Gratious
             and
             Excellent
          
           )
           doe
           aboue
           all
           people
           ,
           owe
           vnto
           the
           Highest
           ,
           our
           liues
           and
           Religion
           ,
           with
           all
           our
           blessings
           ;
           and
           next
           vnder
           him
           ,
           to
           his
           Anoynted
           ,
           your
           most
           royall
           Father
           ,
           our
           drad
           Soueraigne
           ;
           to
           whom
           he
           hath
           giuen
           vs
           ,
           by
           whose
           hand
           he
           hath
           so
           miraculously
           saued
           vs
           ,
           and
           doth
           still
           preserue
           vs
           aliue
           in
           the
           midst
           of
           our
           enemies
           :
           we
           are
           therfore
           euery
           one
           alwaies
           
           bound
           (
           in
           what
           thing
           soeuer
           he
           shall
           inable
           vs
           thereunto
           )
           to
           testifie
           our
           acknowledgement
           .
           Pardon
           then
           the
           desire
           of
           your
           deuoted
           and
           most
           affectionate
           poore
           seruant
           ,
           if
           he
           shall
           endeauour
           in
           all
           humility
           ,
           to
           witness
           his
           thankefulnesse
           vnto
           the
           Lord
           of
           heauen
           ,
           and
           to
           his
           Annoynted
           ,
           by
           seeking
           to
           adde
           somewhat
           vnto
           the
           Honour
           ,
           and
           deserts
           of
           his
           royall
           progenie
           :
           euen
           of
           you
           ,
           who
           are
           the
           rich
           gifts
           of
           the
           heauenly
           bountie
           ,
           and
           the
           flourishing
           branches
           ,
           of
           that
           happy
           spreading
           Cedar
           .
           And
           what
           is
           it
           ,
           which
           might
           still
           more
           aduance
           you
           in
           the
           eyes
           and
           hearts
           of
           all
           the
           people
           of
           your
           most
           noble
           Fathers
           Dominions
           ;
           then
           if
           now
           from
           your
           first
           yeares
           ,
           you
           might
           beginne
           to
           be
           the
           blessed
           instruments
           of
           the
           Almighty
           ,
           of
           an
           euerlasting
           benefite
           to
           the
           present
           and
           all
           succeeding
           generations
           ?
           whereby
           you
           might
           knit
           all
           hearts
           more
           surely
           vnto
           the
           holy
           God
           ,
           and
           his
           supreame
           deputy
           here
           amongst
           vs
           ;
           as
           also
           to
           your selues
           his
           Regall
           issue
           ,
           and
           vnto
           yours
           for
           euer
           .
           Accept
           therefore
           ,
           to
           this
           purpose
           (
           I
           beseech
           you
           )
           this
           weake
           labour
           thus
           begun
           ,
           of
           searching
           out
           ,
           and
           inquiring
           of
           all
           the
           speediest
           ,
           surest
           and
           most
           easie
           entrance
           and
           way
           to
           all
           good
           learning
           in
           our
           
           Grammar
           schooles
           .
           To
           the
           end
           ,
           that
           those
           rare
           helpes
           of
           knowledge
           ,
           which
           the
           Lord
           hath
           graunted
           to
           this
           last
           Age
           (
           some
           of
           the
           principall
           wherof
           haue
           been
           scarce
           knowen
           ,
           or
           very
           little
           practiced
           ,
           so
           farre
           as
           I
           can
           find
           ;
           and
           most
           of
           the
           rest
           haue
           bin
           only
           knowen
           amongst
           some
           few
           )
           might
           by
           your
           Princely
           fauours
           ,
           be
           made
           common
           vnto
           all
           ,
           for
           the
           publique
           good
           of
           the
           present
           Age
           ,
           and
           of
           all
           times
           to
           come
           .
           The
           Lord
           God
           hath
           giuen
           vnto
           your
           Highnesse
           and
           Excellency
           ,
           to
           be
           born
           ,
           and
           to
           liue
           in
           the
           time
           of
           most
           glorious
           light
           ,
           and
           knowledge
           ;
           in
           which
           ,
           if
           the
           experiments
           of
           sundry
           of
           the
           learnedest
           ,
           &
           most
           happily
           experienced
           Schoolemasters
           and
           others
           ,
           were
           gathered
           into
           one
           short
           sum
           ,
           all
           good
           learning
           (
           which
           is
           the
           chiefest
           glory
           of
           a
           nation
           )
           would
           daily
           flourish
           more
           &
           more
           ,
           and
           be
           conueyed
           to
           all
           places
           &
           times
           ;
           that
           not
           only
           this
           age
           present
           ,
           but
           also
           al
           posterity
           should
           haue
           iust
           cause
           euermore
           to
           magnifie
           the
           God
           of
           glory
           for
           you
           :
           for
           how
           must
           this
           needes
           oblige
           all
           sorts
           ,
           if
           this
           heauenly
           gift
           of
           learning
           ,
           might
           thorough
           you
           be
           attained
           with
           much
           more
           ease
           ,
           delight
           ,
           &
           certainty
           ;
           and
           also
           in
           shorter
           time
           ,
           with
           lesse
           charges
           to
           Parents
           ,
           without
           that
           extreame
           
           sharpnes
           vsed
           ordinarily
           in
           schools
           amongst
           the
           poore
           children
           ?
           How
           shall
           it
           increase
           your
           lasting
           comfort
           &
           honour
           ,
           if
           by
           your
           Highnesses
           fauours
           ,
           the
           work
           thus
           entred
           into
           ,
           shall
           soone
           come
           to
           an
           happy
           end
           !
           For
           as
           some
           very
           learned
           and
           of
           much
           experience
           ,
           haue
           begun
           already
           to
           help
           herein
           ;
           so
           others
           of
           the
           chiefest
           gifts
           and
           imploiments
           in
           this
           kind
           ,
           shall
           not
           disdaine
           to
           lay-to
           their
           hands
           to
           bring
           it
           in
           time
           to
           some
           perfection
           .
           Why
           should
           wee
           the
           liege
           subiects
           of
           IESVS
           CHRIST
           ,
           and
           of
           this
           renowned
           kingdome
           ,
           be
           ouergone
           herein
           ,
           by
           the
           seruants
           of
           Antichrist
           ?
           many
           of
           whom
           bend
           all
           their
           wittes
           and
           ioine
           their
           studies
           ,
           for
           the
           greatest
           aduantage
           of
           their
           learning
           ,
           euen
           in
           the
           Grammar
           schooles
           ,
           onely
           to
           the
           aduancement
           of
           Babylon
           ,
           with
           the
           ouerthrow
           of
           this
           glorious
           nation
           ,
           and
           of
           all
           parts
           of
           the
           Church
           of
           Christ
           ;
           to
           bring
           vs
           vnder
           that
           yoake
           againe
           ,
           or
           else
           to
           vtter
           confusion
           .
           Or
           why
           should
           we
           omit
           any
           time
           or
           opportunity
           ,
           which
           the
           Lord
           offereth
           hereunto
           ?
           The
           hope
           therfore
           of
           your
           poore
           seruant
           is
           ,
           that
           your
           Highness
           and
           Excellency
           will
           not
           impute
           anie
           presumption
           to
           this
           indeuor
           ,
           (
           though
           thus
           vndertaken
           by
           me
           the
           vnablest
           of
           many
           thousands
           )
           
           but
           that
           you
           will
           accept
           it
           ,
           according
           to
           the
           desire
           that
           hath
           bin
           in
           me
           ,
           to
           do
           good
           thereby
           to
           this
           Church
           and
           Nation
           .
           And
           the
           rather
           ,
           for
           the
           vndoubted
           assurance
           of
           the
           exceeding
           benefit
           ,
           which
           must
           needs
           come
           in
           time
           ,
           by
           the
           best
           courses
           once
           found
           out
           and
           made
           publick
           :
           and
           for
           that
           though
           such
           a
           work
           haue
           bin
           long
           talked
           of
           and
           wished
           ,
           yet
           it
           is
           still
           generally
           neglected
           .
           The
           experience
           also
           which
           the
           Lord
           hath
           shewed
           ,
           
           in
           the
           readinesse
           of
           sundrie
           very
           learned
           ,
           in
           a
           worke
           of
           not
           much
           lesse
           difficulty
           ,
           to
           helpe
           most
           louingly
           ,
           with
           their
           best
           aduices
           ,
           to
           bring
           still
           to
           better
           perfection
           ,
           dooth
           giue
           your
           seruant
           certain
           hope
           of
           the
           like
           cheerfull
           assistance
           herein
           .
           Howsoeuer
           ;
           yet
           it
           shall
           remaine
           for
           a
           further
           testimony
           of
           duety
           to
           the
           heauenly
           Majesty
           ,
           of
           thankfulnesse
           and
           loyall
           affection
           towardes
           our
           Liege
           Soueraigne
           ,
           and
           you
           his
           Royall
           Progenie
           .
           That
           as
           you
           are
           the
           worthy
           sons
           of
           a
           Father
           most
           renowned
           of
           all
           the
           Kings
           of
           the
           earth
           ,
           for
           singular
           learning
           ,
           and
           for
           holding
           vp
           ,
           and
           aduauncing
           by
           all
           meanes
           the
           glorious
           light
           therof
           ;
           and
           as
           you
           are
           not
           inferior
           to
           anie
           of
           the
           Princes
           of
           the
           world
           in
           your
           education
           and
           first
           yeeres
           :
           so
           all
           sorts
           may
           thorough
           
           you
           receiue
           an
           increase
           of
           the
           same
           shining
           light
           ,
           and
           all
           hearts
           may
           be
           still
           more
           firmly
           bound
           by
           your
           perpetual
           benefits
           .
           To
           you
           thrice
           happy
           Prince
           ,
           I
           offer
           it
           most
           humbly
           ,
           as
           the
           poore
           Widowes
           mite
           ,
           amongst
           the
           great
           gifts
           presented
           vnto
           your
           Highnesse
           :
           And
           to
           you
           right
           noble
           Duke
           ,
           the
           study
           of
           your
           seruant
           ,
           if
           he
           might
           but
           in
           any
           one
           thing
           further
           you
           in
           that
           sweet
           and
           pleasant
           way
           of
           learning
           ,
           wherin
           you
           are
           so
           graciously
           proceeding
           .
           Finally
           ,
           I
           trust
           that
           it
           shal
           euer
           stand
           as
           a
           true
           witnesse
           of
           an
           vnfained
           desire
           towardes
           the
           perpetuall
           flourishing
           of
           this
           Nation
           ,
           with
           all
           the
           Church
           of
           CHRIST
           .
           And
           in
           this
           humble
           desire
           ,
           I
           commend
           your
           Highnesse
           and
           Excellency
           vnto
           him
           who
           aduaunceth
           and
           setteth
           vp
           Kings
           in
           their
           throne
           ,
           and
           hath
           sayde
           that
           he
           will
           honor
           those
           who
           honor
           him
           .
           The
           whole
           successe
           I
           commit
           to
           that
           Supreame
           Grace
           ,
           who
           looketh
           at
           the
           heart
           ,
           and
           accepts
           the
           will
           :
           whom
           you
           desiring
           to
           follow
           shall
           reigne
           with
           him
           in
           that
           most
           blessed
           light
           eternally
           .
        
         
           
             Your
             Highnesse
             &
             Graces
             humbly
             deuoted
             in
             all
             loyall
             and
             faithfull
             obseruance
             ,
             
               IO.
               BRINSL●
            
             .
          
        
      
       
         
         
           A
           COMMENDATORY
           Preface
           .
        
         
           ARts
           are
           the
           only
           helpes
           towards
           humane
           perfection
           .
           Those
           therfore
           which
           are
           the
           helps
           towards
           the
           easinesse
           ,
           maturitie
           ,
           perfection
           of
           Arts
           ,
           deserue
           best
           of
           mankinde
           .
           Whence
           it
           is
           ,
           that
           God
           would
           not
           suffer
           the
           first
           deuisers
           ,
           so
           much
           as
           of
           shepheards
           tents
           ,
           of
           musical
           instruments
           ,
           of
           Iron-works
           ,
           to
           be
           vnknown
           to
           the
           world
           :
           
           the
           last
           wherof
           euen
           heathen
           Antiquitie
           hath
           in
           common
           iudgement
           continued
           ,
           without
           much
           difference
           of
           name
           ,
           till
           this
           daie
           ;
           although
           I
           cannot
           beleeue
           that
           anie
           of
           the
           heathen
           gods
           were
           so
           ancient
           .
           Yea
           ,
           hence
           it
           is
           ,
           that
           the
           holy
           Ghost
           challengeth
           the
           faculty
           euen
           of
           manuary
           skill
           ,
           to
           his
           owne
           gifte
           ;
           as
           beeing
           too
           good
           for
           Nature
           ,
           and
           too
           meritorious
           of
           men
           .
           That
           Bezaleel
           and
           Aholiab
           can
           worke
           curiously
           in
           siluer
           and
           golde
           ,
           for
           the
           materiall
           Tabernacle
           ,
           is
           from
           Gods
           spirit
           ,
           and
           not
           theirs
           :
           How
           much
           more
           is
           this
           true
           ,
           in
           those
           sciences
           which
           are
           so
           essentiall
           to
           the
           spirituall
           house
           of
           God
           ?
           As
           Arts
           are
           to
           perfection
           of
           knowledge
           ;
           so
           is
           Grammar
           to
           all
           Artes.
           Man
           differs
           but
           in
           speech
           and
           reason
           (
           that
           is
           ,
           Grammar
           and
           Logicke
           )
           from
           
           beasts
           :
           wherof
           reason
           is
           of
           Nature
           ;
           speech
           (
           in
           respect
           of
           the
           present
           variation
           )
           is
           of
           humane
           institution
           .
           Neither
           is
           it
           vnsafe
           to
           say
           ,
           that
           this
           later
           is
           the
           more
           necessary
           of
           the
           two
           :
           For
           we
           both
           haue
           ,
           and
           can
           vse
           our
           reason
           alone
           ;
           our
           speech
           we
           cannot
           ,
           without
           a
           guide
           I
           subscribe
           therfore
           to
           the
           iudgement
           of
           them
           ,
           that
           think
           God
           was
           the
           first
           Author
           of
           letters
           (
           which
           are
           the
           simples
           of
           this
           Art
           )
           whether
           by
           the
           hand
           of
           Moses
           ;
           as
           Clement
           of
           Alexandria
           reports
           from
           Eupolemus
           :
           or
           rather
           of
           the
           ancienter
           Progeny
           of
           Seth
           in
           the
           first
           wotld
           ;
           as
           Iosephus
           .
           Hee
           that
           gaue
           man
           the
           faculty
           of
           speech
           ,
           gaue
           him
           this
           meanes
           ,
           to
           teach
           his
           speech
           :
           And
           if
           he
           were
           so
           carefull
           to
           giue
           man
           this
           helpe
           ,
           while
           all
           the
           world
           was
           of
           one
           lip
           (
           as
           the
           Hebrews
           speak
           )
           how
           much
           more
           ,
           after
           that
           miserable
           confusion
           of
           tongues
           ?
           wherein
           euery
           man
           was
           a
           Grammar
           to
           himselfe
           ;
           &
           needed
           a
           new
           Grammar
           ,
           to
           be
           vnderstood
           of
           others
           .
           It
           is
           not
           therfore
           vnworthy
           of
           obseruatiō
           ,
           that
           God
           (
           knowing
           languages
           to
           be
           the
           carryage
           of
           knowledge
           )
           as
           in
           his
           iudgement
           he
           diuided
           the
           tongues
           of
           those
           presumptuous
           builders
           ;
           so
           contrarily
           hee
           sent
           his
           spirit
           in
           clouen
           tongues
           vpon
           the
           heads
           of
           those
           master-builders
           of
           his
           Church
           .
           What
           they
           were
           suddainly
           taught
           of
           God
           ,
           we
           with
           much
           leasure
           and
           industry
           learne
           of
           men
           ;
           knowing
           the
           tongues
           so
           necessarie
           for
           all
           knowledge
           ,
           that
           it
           is
           well
           ,
           if
           but
           our
           younger
           yeeres
           be
           spent
           in
           this
           study
           .
           How
           seruiceable
           therfore
           is
           this
           labor
           ,
           which
           is
           here
           vndertaken
           ,
           and
           how
           beneficial
           ,
           to
           make
           the
           way
           vnto
           all
           learning
           ,
           both
           short
           ,
           and
           faire
           !
           Our
           Grandfathers
           were
           so
           long
           vnder
           the
           ferule
           ,
           till
           their
           beards
           were
           growen
           as
           long
           as
           their
           pens
           :
           this
           age
           hath
           descried
           
           a
           neerer
           way
           ;
           yet
           not
           without
           much
           difficulty
           ,
           both
           to
           the
           schollars
           ,
           and
           teacher
           :
           Now
           ,
           time
           ,
           experience
           ,
           and
           painfulnesse
           (
           which
           are
           the
           meanes
           to
           bring
           all
           things
           to
           their
           height
           )
           haue
           taught
           this
           author
           yet
           further
           ,
           how
           to
           spare
           both
           time
           and
           paines
           this
           way
           vnto
           others
           ;
           and
           (
           that
           which
           is
           most
           to
           bee
           approoued
           )
           without
           any
           change
           of
           the
           receiued
           groūds
           .
           It
           is
           the
           cōmon
           enuy
           of
           men
           ,
           by
           how
           much
           richer
           treasure
           they
           haue
           found
           ,
           so
           much
           more
           carefully
           to
           cōceale
           it
           .
           How
           commendable
           is
           the
           ingenuity
           of
           those
           spirits
           ,
           which
           cannot
           ingrosse
           good
           experiments
           to
           their
           priuate
           aduantage
           ?
           which
           had
           rather
           doe
           then
           haue
           good
           :
           who
           can
           be
           content
           to
           cast
           at
           once
           into
           the
           common
           Bank
           of
           the
           world
           ,
           what
           the
           studious
           obseruation
           ,
           inquisition
           ,
           reading
           ,
           practice
           of
           many
           yeeres
           haue
           inriched
           them
           withall
           :
           That
           ,
           which
           this
           Author
           hath
           so
           freely
           done
           ;
           as
           one
           that
           feares
           not
           ,
           least
           knowledge
           should
           be
           made
           too
           easie
           ,
           or
           too
           vulgar
           .
           The
           Iesuites
           haue
           won
           much
           of
           their
           reputation
           ,
           and
           stollen
           many
           hearts
           with
           their
           diligence
           in
           this
           kinde
           .
           How
           happie
           shall
           it
           be
           for
           the
           Chnrch
           and
           vs
           ,
           if
           we
           excite
           our selues
           at
           least
           to
           imitate
           this
           their
           forwardness
           ?
           We
           may
           out-strip
           them
           ,
           if
           wee
           want
           not
           to
           our selues
           :
           Behold
           here
           ,
           not
           feete
           but
           wings
           ,
           offered
           to
           vs.
           Neither
           are
           these
           directions
           of
           meere
           speculation
           ,
           whose
           promises
           are
           commonly
           as
           large
           ,
           as
           the
           performance
           defectiue
           ;
           but
           such
           as
           (
           for
           the
           most
           part
           )
           to
           the
           knowledge
           of
           my selfe
           ,
           and
           manie
           abler
           Iudges
           ,
           haue
           been
           ,
           and
           are
           daily
           answered
           in
           his
           experience
           ,
           and
           practice
           ,
           with
           more
           then
           vsuall
           successe
           .
           What
           remaines
           therefore
           ,
           but
           that
           the
           thankfull
           acceptation
           of
           men
           ,
           and
           his
           effectuall
           
           labors
           should
           mutually
           reflect
           vpon
           each-other
           ?
           that
           he
           may
           be
           in
           couraged
           by
           the
           one
           ,
           and
           they
           by
           the
           other
           benefited
           :
           that
           ,
           what
           hath
           been
           vndertaken
           and
           furthered
           by
           the
           graue
           counsell
           of
           many
           ,
           and
           wise
           ;
           and
           performed
           by
           the
           studious
           indeuours
           of
           one
           so
           well
           deseruing
           ;
           may
           be
           both
           vsed
           and
           perfected
           to
           the
           common
           good
           of
           all
           ,
           and
           to
           the
           glorie
           of
           him
           which
           giueth
           ,
           and
           blesseth
           all
           .
        
         
           
             IOS
             .
             HALL
             .
             Dr.
             
               of
               Diuin
            
             .
          
        
      
       
         
         
           THE
           CONTENTS
           IN
           GENERALL
           ,
           OF
           the
           chiefe
           points
           aimed
           at
           ,
           and
           hoped
           to
           be
           effected
           by
           this
           WORKE
           .
        
         
           
             1
             TO
             teach
             schollars
             how
             to
             be
             able
             to
             reade
             well
             ,
             and
             write
             true
             Orthography
             ,
             in
             a
             short
             space
             .
          
           
             2
             To
             make
             them
             ready
             ,
             in
             all
             points
             of
             Accedence
             and
             Grammar
             ,
             to
             answere
             any
             necessary
             question
             therein
             .
          
           
             3
             To
             say
             without
             book
             all
             the
             vsual
             and
             necessary
             rules
             ,
             to
             construe
             the
             Grammar
             rules
             ,
             to
             giue
             the
             meaning
             ,
             vse
             ,
             and
             order
             of
             the
             rules
             ;
             to
             shew
             the
             examples
             ,
             and
             to
             apply
             them
             :
             which
             being
             wel
             perfomed
             ,
             will
             make
             all
             other
             learning
             easie
             and
             pleasant
             .
          
           
             4
             In
             the
             seuerall
             fourmes
             and
             Authours
             to
             construe
             truely
             ,
             and
             in
             propriety
             of
             wordes
             and
             sense
             ,
             to
             parse
             of
             themselues
             ,
             and
             to
             giue
             a
             right
             reason
             of
             euery
             word
             why
             it
             must
             be
             so
             ,
             and
             not
             otherwise
             ;
             and
             to
             reade
             the
             English
             of
             the
             Lectures
             perfectly
             out
             of
             the
             Latine
             .
          
           
             
             5
             Out
             of
             an
             English
             Grammaticall
             translation
             of
             their
             Authours
             ,
             to
             make
             and
             to
             construe
             any
             part
             of
             the
             Latine
             ,
             which
             they
             haue
             learned
             ;
             to
             proue
             that
             it
             must
             be
             so
             :
             and
             so
             to
             reade
             the
             Latine
             out
             of
             the
             English
             ,
             first
             in
             the
             plaine
             Grammaticall
             order
             ;
             after
             as
             the
             wordes
             are
             placed
             in
             the
             Authour
             ,
             or
             in
             other
             good
             composition
             .
             Also
             to
             parse
             in
             Latine
             ,
             looking
             only
             vpon
             the
             Translation
             .
          
           
             6
             To
             take
             their
             Lectures
             of
             themselues
             ,
             except
             in
             the
             very
             lowest
             fourmes
             ,
             and
             first
             enterers
             into
             construction
             ;
             or
             to
             do
             it
             with
             very
             little
             helpe
             ,
             in
             some
             more
             difficult
             things
             .
          
           
             7
             To
             enter
             surely
             in
             making
             Latine
             ,
             without
             danger
             of
             making
             false
             Latine
             ,
             or
             vsing
             any
             barbarous
             phrase
             .
          
           
             8
             To
             make
             true
             Latine
             ,
             and
             pure
             Tullies
             phrase
             ,
             and
             to
             proue
             it
             to
             be
             true
             and
             pure
             .
             To
             doe
             this
             in
             ordinary
             morall
             matters
             ,
             by
             that
             time
             that
             they
             haue
             bin
             but
             two
             yeares
             in
             construction
             .
          
           
             9
             To
             make
             Epistles
             imitating
             Tully
             ,
             short
             and
             pithy
             ,
             in
             Tullies
             Latine
             and
             familiar
             .
          
           
             10
             To
             translate
             into
             English
             ,
             according
             to
             propriety
             both
             of
             wordes
             and
             sense
             :
             and
             out
             of
             the
             English
             to
             reade
             the
             Latine
             againe
             ,
             to
             proue
             it
             ,
             and
             giue
             a
             reason
             of
             euery
             thing
             .
          
           
             11
             To
             take
             a
             peece
             of
             Tully
             ,
             or
             of
             any
             other
             familiar
             ,
             easie
             Authour
             ,
             Grammatically
             translated
             ,
             and
             in
             propriety
             of
             wordes
             ,
             and
             to
             turne
             the
             same
             out
             of
             the
             translation
             into
             good
             Latine
             ,
             and
             very
             neere
             vnto
             the
             wordes
             of
             the
             Authour
             ;
             so
             as
             in
             most
             you
             shall
             hardly
             discerne
             ,
             whether
             it
             be
             the
             Authours
             Latin
             ,
             or
             the
             schollars
             .
          
           
             
             12
             To
             correct
             their
             faults
             of
             themselues
             ,
             when
             they
             are
             but
             noted
             out
             vnto
             them
             ,
             or
             a
             question
             is
             asked
             of
             them
             .
          
           
             13
             To
             be
             able
             in
             each
             fourme
             (
             at
             any
             time
             whensoeuer
             they
             shall
             be
             apposed
             of
             a
             sudden
             ,
             in
             any
             part
             of
             their
             Authors
             ,
             which
             the
             haue
             learned
             )
             to
             construe
             ,
             parse
             ,
             reade
             into
             English
             ,
             and
             forth
             of
             the
             translation
             to
             construe
             and
             to
             reade
             into
             the
             Latine
             of
             their
             Authours
             ;
             first
             into
             the
             naturall
             order
             ,
             then
             into
             the
             order
             of
             the
             Authour
             ,
             or
             neere
             vnto
             it
             .
          
           
             14
             In
             Virgilor
             Horace
             to
             resolue
             any
             peece
             ,
             for
             all
             these
             points
             of
             learning
             ,
             and
             to
             doe
             it
             in
             good
             Latine
             ;
          
           
             
               
                 In
                 
                   
                     Construing
                     to
                     giue
                     propriety
                     of
                     wordes
                     and
                     sense
                     .
                  
                   
                     Scanning
                     the
                     verses
                     ,
                     and
                     giuing
                     a
                     reason
                     thereof
                     .
                  
                   
                     Shewing
                     the
                     difficulties
                     of
                     Grammar
                     .
                  
                   
                     Obseruing
                     the
                     elegancies
                     in
                     tropes
                     and
                     figures
                     .
                  
                   
                     Noting
                     phrases
                     and
                     Epithets
                     .
                  
                
              
            
          
           
             15
             So
             to
             reade
             ouer
             most
             of
             the
             chiefe
             Latine
             Poets
             ,
             as
             Virgil
             ,
             Horace
             ,
             Persius
             ,
             &c.
             by
             that
             time
             that
             by
             reason
             of
             their
             yeares
             ,
             they
             be
             in
             any
             measure
             thought
             fit
             for
             their
             discretion
             ,
             to
             goe
             vnto
             the
             Vniuersity
             :
             yea
             to
             goe
             through
             the
             rest
             of
             themselues
             ,
             by
             ordinary
             helpes
             .
          
           
             16
             In
             the
             Greeke
             Testament
             to
             construe
             perfectly
             ,
             and
             parse
             as
             in
             the
             Latine
             ;
             to
             reade
             the
             Greeke
             backe
             againe
             out
             of
             a
             translation
             Latine
             or
             English
             :
             also
             to
             construe
             ,
             parse
             ,
             and
             to
             proue
             it
             out
             of
             the
             same
             .
             To
             doe
             the
             like
             in
             Isocrates
             ,
             or
             any
             familiar
             pure
             Greeke
             Authour
             ;
             as
             also
             in
             Theognis
             ,
             Hesiod
             ,
             or
             Homer
             ,
             and
             to
             resolue
             as
             in
             Virgil
             or
             Horace
             .
          
           
             
             17
             In
             the
             Hebrew
             to
             construe
             perfectly
             ,
             and
             to
             resolue
             as
             in
             the
             Greeke
             Testament
             ;
             and
             to
             reade
             the
             Hebrew
             also
             out
             of
             the
             translation
             .
             Which
             practice
             of
             daily
             reading
             somewhat
             out
             of
             the
             translations
             into
             the
             Originals
             ,
             must
             needes
             make
             them
             both
             very
             cunning
             in
             the
             tongues
             ,
             and
             also
             perfect
             in
             the
             textes
             of
             the
             Originals
             themselues
             ,
             if
             it
             be
             obserued
             constantly
             ;
             like
             as
             it
             is
             in
             daily
             reading
             Latine
             out
             of
             the
             translation
             .
          
           
             18
             To
             answere
             most
             of
             the
             difficulties
             in
             all
             Classicall
             schoole
             Authours
             ;
             as
             ,
             in
             Terence
             ,
             Virgil
             ,
             Horace
             ,
             Persius
             ,
             &c.
             
          
           
             19
             To
             oppose
             schollarlike
             in
             Latine
             ,
             of
             any
             Grammar
             question
             necessary
             ,
             in
             a
             good
             forme
             of
             wordes
             ;
             both
             what
             may
             be
             obiected
             against
             Lillies
             rules
             ,
             and
             how
             to
             defend
             them
             .
          
           
             20
             To
             write
             Theames
             full
             of
             good
             matter
             ,
             in
             pure
             Latine
             ,
             and
             with
             iudgement
             .
          
           
             21
             To
             enter
             to
             make
             a
             verse
             with
             delight
             ,
             without
             any
             bodging
             at
             all
             ;
             and
             to
             furnish
             with
             copie
             of
             Poeticall
             phrase
             ,
             out
             of
             Ouid
             ,
             Virgil
             ,
             and
             other
             the
             best
             Poets
             .
          
           
             22
             So
             to
             imitate
             and
             expresse
             Ouid
             or
             Virgil
             ,
             as
             you
             shall
             hardly
             discerne
             ,
             vnlesse
             you
             know
             the
             places
             ,
             whether
             the
             verses
             be
             the
             Authours
             or
             the
             schollars
             :
             and
             to
             write
             verses
             
               ex
               tempore
            
             of
             any
             ordinary
             Theame
             .
          
           
             23
             To
             pronounce
             naturally
             and
             sweetly
             ,
             without
             vaine
             affectation
             ;
             and
             to
             begin
             to
             doe
             it
             from
             the
             lowest
             fourmes
             .
          
           
             24
             To
             make
             right
             vse
             of
             the
             matter
             of
             their
             Authours
             ,
             besides
             the
             Latine
             ;
             euen
             from
             the
             first
             beginners
             :
             as
             
             of
             Sententiae
             and
             Confabulatiunculae
             Pueriles
             ,
             Cato
             ,
             Esops
             fables
             ,
             Tullies
             Epistles
             ,
             Tullies
             Offices
             ,
             Ouids
             Metamorphosis
             ,
             &
             so
             on
             to
             the
             highest
             .
             To
             help
             to
             furnish
             them
             ,
             with
             varietie
             of
             the
             best
             morall
             matter
             ,
             and
             with
             vnderstanding
             ,
             wisedome
             and
             precepts
             of
             vertue
             ,
             as
             they
             growe
             ;
             and
             withall
             to
             imprint
             the
             Latine
             so
             in
             their
             minds
             thereby
             ,
             as
             hardly
             to
             be
             forgotten
             .
          
           
             25
             To
             answere
             concerning
             the
             matter
             contained
             in
             their
             Lectures
             ,
             in
             the
             Latine
             of
             their
             Authors
             ,
             from
             the
             lowest
             fourmes
             and
             so
             vpward
             .
          
           
             26
             To
             construe
             any
             ordinary
             Author
             
               ex
               tempore
            
             .
          
           
             27
             To
             come
             to
             that
             facilitie
             and
             ripenesse
             ,
             as
             not
             onely
             to
             translate
             leasurely
             ,
             &
             with
             some
             meditation
             ,
             both
             into
             English
             and
             Latine
             ,
             as
             before
             in
             the
             Sect.
             or
             
               Article
               ,
               10.
            
             and
             11
             ;
             but
             more
             also
             ,
             to
             reade
             any
             easie
             Author
             forth
             of
             Latine
             into
             English
             ,
             and
             out
             of
             a
             translation
             of
             the
             same
             Grammatically
             translated
             ,
             to
             reade
             it
             into
             Latine
             againe
             .
             As
             ,
             Corderius
             ,
             Terence
             ,
             Tullies
             Offices
             ,
             Tullie
             
               de
               natura
               Deorum
            
             ,
             Apthonius
             .
             To
             doe
             this
             in
             Authors
             and
             places
             which
             they
             are
             not
             acquainted
             with
             ,
             and
             almost
             as
             fast
             as
             they
             are
             able
             to
             reade
             the
             Author
             alone
             .
          
           
             28
             To
             write
             fayre
             in
             Secretary
             ,
             Romane
             ,
             Greeke
             ,
             Hebrue
             ;
             as
             they
             grow
             in
             knowledge
             of
             the
             tongues
             .
          
           
             29
             To
             know
             all
             the
             principall
             and
             necessarie
             Radices
             ,
             Greeke
             and
             Hebrue
             ;
             and
             to
             be
             able
             to
             preceede
             in
             all
             the
             learned
             tongues
             of
             themselues
             ,
             thorow
             ordinarie
             helps
             ,
             and
             much
             more
             by
             the
             worthy
             helps
             &
             meanes
             ,
             to
             be
             had
             in
             the
             Vniuersities
             .
          
           
             30
             To
             be
             acquainted
             with
             the
             grounds
             of
             Religion
             ,
             and
             the
             chiefe
             Histories
             of
             the
             Bible
             .
             To
             take
             all
             the
             substance
             of
             the
             Sermons
             ,
             for
             Doctrines
             ,
             proofes
             ,
             vses
             ,
             
             if
             they
             be
             plainely
             and
             orderly
             deliuered
             :
             and
             to
             set
             them
             downe
             afterwards
             in
             a
             good
             Latine
             stile
             ,
             or
             to
             reade
             them
             
               ex
               tempore
            
             into
             Latine
             ,
             out
             of
             the
             English
             :
             To
             conceiue
             and
             answere
             the
             seuerall
             points
             of
             the
             Sermons
             ,
             and
             to
             make
             a
             briefe
             repetition
             of
             the
             whole
             Sermon
             without
             booke
             .
          
           
             31
             To
             be
             set
             in
             the
             high
             way
             ,
             and
             to
             haue
             the
             rules
             and
             grounds
             ,
             how
             to
             attaine
             to
             the
             puritie
             and
             perfection
             of
             the
             Latine
             tongue
             ,
             by
             their
             further
             labour
             and
             practice
             in
             the
             Vniuersitie
             .
          
           
             32
             To
             grow
             in
             our
             owne
             English
             tongue
             ,
             according
             to
             their
             ages
             and
             growthes
             in
             other
             learning
             :
             To
             vtter
             their
             minds
             in
             the
             same
             both
             in
             proprietie
             and
             puritie
             ;
             and
             so
             to
             be
             fitted
             for
             diuinitie
             ,
             lawe
             ,
             or
             what
             other
             calling
             or
             faculty
             soeuer
             they
             shall
             bee
             after
             imployed
             in
             .
          
           
             33
             Finally
             ,
             thus
             to
             proceede
             togither
             with
             the
             tongues
             in
             the
             vnderstanding
             and
             knowledge
             of
             the
             learning
             ,
             or
             matter
             contained
             in
             the
             same
             .
             To
             become
             alike
             expert
             ,
             in
             all
             good
             learning
             meete
             for
             their
             yeares
             and
             studies
             ;
             that
             so
             proceeding
             still
             ,
             after
             they
             are
             gone
             from
             the
             Grammar
             schooles
             ,
             they
             may
             become
             most
             exquisite
             in
             all
             kinds
             of
             good
             learning
             to
             which
             they
             shall
             be
             applied
             .
          
        
         
           These
           things
           may
           be
           effected
           in
           good
           sort
           ,
           thorough
           Gods
           blessing
           ,
           in
           the
           seuerall
           formes
           ,
           as
           the
           schollars
           proceede
           ,
           by
           so
           many
           in
           each
           forme
           as
           are
           apt
           and
           industrious
           ,
           onely
           by
           the
           directions
           following
           ,
           if
           they
           be
           constantly
           obserued
           ;
           If
           the
           Maisters
           being
           of
           any
           competent
           sufficiencie
           ,
           will
           take
           meet
           paines
           ;
           and
           if
           the
           schollars
           being
           set
           to
           schoole
           so
           soone
           as
           they
           shall
           be
           meete
           ,
           may
           bee
           kept
           to
           learning
           ordinarily
           ,
           hauing
           
           bookes
           and
           other
           necessary
           helps
           &
           encouragements
           .
           That
           so
           all
           schollars
           of
           any
           towardlnesse
           and
           diligence
           may
           be
           made
           absolute
           Grammarians
           ,
           and
           euery
           way
           fit
           for
           the
           Vniuersitie
           ,
           by
           fifteen
           yeares
           of
           age
           ;
           or
           by
           that
           time
           that
           they
           shall
           bee
           meete
           by
           discretion
           and
           gouernment
           .
           And
           all
           this
           to
           bee
           done
           with
           delight
           and
           certaintie
           ,
           both
           to
           maisters
           and
           schollars
           ,
           with
           strife
           and
           contention
           amongst
           the
           schollars
           themselues
           ;
           without
           that
           vsual
           terrour
           and
           cruelty
           ,
           which
           hath
           beene
           practiced
           in
           many
           places
           ,
           and
           without
           somuch
           as
           seueritie
           amongst
           good
           natures
           .
        
         
           How
           greatly
           all
           this
           vvould
           tend
           to
           the
           furtherance
           of
           the
           publique
           good
           ,
           euery
           one
           may
           iudge
           ;
           which
           yet
           it
           will
           doe
           so
           much
           the
           more
           ,
           as
           the
           Lord
           shal
           vouchsafe
           a
           further
           supply
           ,
           to
           the
           seuerall
           meanes
           and
           courses
           that
           are
           thus
           begun
           ,
           by
           adioining
           dayly
           the
           helps
           and
           experiments
           of
           many
           moe
           learned
           men
           ,
           of
           whom
           wee
           conceiue
           good
           hope
           ,
           that
           they
           will
           bee
           ready
           to
           lend
           their
           helping
           hands
           ,
           to
           the
           perfiting
           of
           so
           good
           a
           Worke.
           
        
      
       
         
         
         
           To
           the
           louing
           Reader
           .
        
         
           CVrteous
           Reader
           ,
           who
           tenderest
           the
           poore
           Countrey
           schooles
           ,
           for
           which
           this
           labour
           hath
           beene
           vndertaken
           ,
           or
           didst
           euer
           feele
           or
           know
           the
           wants
           in
           many
           of
           them
           ,
           accept
           my
           vvilling
           minde
           for
           their
           good
           .
           And
           take
           this
           first
           impression
           as
           not
           set
           forth
           :
           but
           chiefely
           to
           the
           end
           ,
           to
           haue
           store
           of
           copies
           ,
           to
           goe
           to
           many
           learned
           wel-willers
           to
           the
           Worke
           ,
           for
           their
           help
           :
           like
           as
           it
           hath
           heretofore
           ,
           to
           sundry
           much
           reuerenced
           for
           their
           learning
           and
           wisedome
           .
           Of
           all
           whome
           ,
           I
           humbly
           intreat
           their
           kinde
           assistance
           ,
           for
           amending
           that
           which
           is
           amisse
           ;
           by
           adding
           what
           is
           vvanting
           ,
           cutting
           off
           whatsoeuer
           is
           superfluous
           ,
           changing
           what
           is
           vnbefitting
           ,
           and
           reducing
           euery
           thing
           into
           the
           right
           order
           :
           That
           it
           may
           speedily
           come
           forth
           more
           plaine
           and
           perfect
           ;
           and
           thereby
           ,
           if
           not
           themselues
           ,
           yet
           their
           friends
           may
           reape
           some
           benefit
           of
           their
           labours
           .
           For
           the
           liberty
           and
           boldnesse
           vsed
           in
           it
           ,
           consider
           that
           it
           is
           but
           a
           Dialogue
           to
           incite
           and
           encourage
           others
           ;
           as
           ,
           I
           tooke
           it
           ,
           farre
           more
           profitable
           and
           delightsom
           to
           reade
           ,
           then
           a
           
           bare
           narration
           .
           All
           who
           are
           friendly
           and
           vnfained
           fauourers
           of
           good
           learning
           ,
           will
           I
           hope
           thinke
           so
           of
           it
           .
           It
           shall
           wrong
           no
           man
           willingly
           :
           farre
           be
           that
           from
           mee
           .
           I
           will
           right
           them
           againe
           ,
           so
           soon
           as
           I
           know
           it
           .
           Be
           the
           faults
           neuer
           so
           many
           ,
           thorough
           my
           weaknesse
           and
           want
           of
           meete
           leasure
           (
           as
           they
           must
           needs
           bee
           the
           moe
           ,
           by
           my
           absence
           from
           the
           Presse
           )
           yet
           time
           ,
           I
           trust
           will
           reforme
           them
           .
           In
           the
           meane
           while
           ,
           let
           my
           trauell
           and
           the
           good
           things
           weigh
           against
           the
           rest
           .
           For
           the
           length
           of
           it
           ,
           remember
           for
           whome
           I
           write
           ,
           euen
           the
           meanest
           teachers
           and
           learners
           :
           with
           whom
           though
           I
           sometime
           vse
           repetitions
           ,
           I
           cannot
           bee
           ouer-plaine
           ;
           sith
           they
           commonly
           get
           so
           little
           of
           short
           Treatises
           ,
           be
           they
           neuer
           so
           learned
           .
           Consider
           also
           that
           I
           would
           hide
           nothing
           ,
           which
           GOD
           hath
           vouchsafed
           mee
           in
           my
           search
           :
           that
           out
           of
           all
           ,
           the
           most
           profitable
           may
           be
           selected
           ,
           and
           in
           the
           meane
           time
           the
           best
           onely
           vsed
           .
           And
           for
           the
           matter
           of
           the
           Dialogue
           ,
           take
           it
           as
           that
           which
           is
           desired
           to
           be
           effected
           in
           time
           ;
           and
           which
           I
           hope
           all
           shall
           finde
           ,
           when
           once
           the
           helpes
           belonging
           hereunto
           ,
           shall
           bee
           supplied
           and
           perfected
           .
        
         
           Account
           this
           ,
           but
           as
           a
           meere
           entrance
           into
           the
           worke
           :
           which
           if
           seuen
           yeares
           shall
           bring
           to
           perfection
           fully
           to
           accomplish
           that
           which
           is
           wished
           ,
           I
           shall
           thinke
           my
           paines
           most
           happily
           bestowed
           ,
           if
           GOD
           so
           farre
           forth
           prolong
           my
           daies
           .
           I
           seeke
           not
           my self
           :
           if
           I
           may
           do
           some
           little
           seruice
           to
           God
           and
           my
           Countrey
           ,
           I
           haue
           enough
           .
           I
           oppose
           my selfe
           to
           none
           .
           Shew
           my
           ouersight
           in
           loue
           ,
           and
           I
           will
           amend
           it
           .
           I
           prescribe
           to
           none
           :
           no
           ,
           not
           the
           meanest
           ;
           but
           onely
           desire
           to
           learne
           of
           all
           the
           learned
           ,
           to
           help
           the
           vnlearned
           .
           
           In
           the
           worke
           I
           take
           nothing
           to
           my selfe
           ,
           but
           the
           wants
           .
           What
           I
           receiued
           of
           others
           ,
           I
           receiued
           to
           this
           ende
           ;
           after
           full
           triall
           made
           of
           them
           to
           publish
           them
           for
           the
           common
           good
           .
           This
           I
           haue
           professed
           from
           the
           beginning
           of
           my
           trauell
           .
           I
           would
           also
           giue
           euery
           one
           his
           due
           particularly
           ,
           what
           I
           haue
           had
           of
           him
           ;
           and
           will
           ,
           if
           it
           shall
           bee
           thought
           meete
           .
           I
           haue
           promised
           nothing
           but
           my
           labour
           :
           that
           I
           haue
           and
           doe
           desire
           to
           performe
           to
           my
           abilitie
           and
           aboue
           .
           The
           vveaker
           I
           am
           ,
           the
           fitter
           shall
           I
           bee
           to
           apply
           my selfe
           to
           the
           simplest
           :
           and
           the
           more
           honour
           God
           shall
           haue
           ,
           if
           hee
           shall
           giue
           that
           blessing
           vnto
           it
           ,
           which
           I
           doe
           humbly
           begge
           .
           If
           any
           man
           shall
           oppose
           ,
           and
           detract
           from
           these
           my
           labours
           ;
           forasmuch
           ,
           as
           hee
           shall
           therein
           (
           as
           I
           take
           it
           )
           shew
           himselfe
           an
           enemie
           to
           the
           common
           good
           of
           the
           present
           Age
           ,
           and
           of
           all
           posteritie
           (
           the
           benefite
           whereof
           ,
           as
           God
           is
           my
           witnesse
           ,
           I
           haue
           intended
           principally
           in
           these
           my
           endeauours
           )
           I
           can
           but
           be
           sory
           ,
           and
           pray
           for
           him
           .
        
         
           
             Thine
             in
             Christ
             ,
             
               I.
               B.
            
             
          
        
      
       
         
         
           FOr
           the
           manner
           of
           proceeding
           vsed
           in
           this
           worke
           ,
           it
           is
           prescribed
           in
           the
           Preface
           to
           the
           Reader
           ,
           which
           is
           set
           before
           our
           common
           Grammar
           :
           where
           it
           ,
           hauing
           shewed
           the
           inconuenience
           of
           the
           diuersitie
           of
           Grammars
           and
           teaching
           ,
           doth
           direct
           thus
           ;
        
         
           Wherefore
           it
           is
           not
           amisse
           ,
           if
           one
           seeing
           by
           triall
           an
           easier
           and
           readierway
           ,
           then
           the
           common
           sort
           of
           Teachers
           doe
           ,
           would
           say
           that
           he
           hath
           proued
           it
           ,
           and
           for
           the
           commoditie
           allowed
           it
           ;
           that
           others
           not
           knowing
           the
           same
           ,
           might
           by
           experience
           proue
           the
           like
           ,
           and
           them
           by
           proofe
           reasonable
           iudge
           the
           like
           :
           not
           hereby
           excluding
           the
           better
           way
           when
           it
           is
           found
           ;
           but
           in
           the
           meane
           season
           forbidding
           the
           worse
           .
        
      
       
         
         
           OF
           GRAMMATICALL
           Translations
           .
        
         
           THere
           is
           a
           way
           (
           saith
           Mr.
           Askame
           )
           touched
           in
           the
           first
           booke
           of
           
             Cicero
             de
             Oratore
          
           ,
           
           which
           wisely
           brought
           into
           Schooles
           ,
           truely
           taught
           ,
           &
           constantly
           vsed
           would
           not
           onely
           take
           wholly
           away
           that
           butcherly
           feare
           in
           making
           Latines
           ,
           but
           would
           also
           with
           ease
           and
           pleasure
           ,
           and
           in
           short
           time
           as
           I
           know
           by
           good
           experience
           ,
           worke
           a
           true
           choise
           and
           placing
           of
           words
           ,
           a
           right
           ordering
           of
           sentences
           ,
           an
           easie
           vnderstanding
           of
           the
           tongues
           ,
           a
           readinesse
           to
           speake
           ,
           a
           facilitie
           to
           write
           ,
           a
           true
           iudgement
           both
           of
           his
           owne
           ,
           and
           other
           mens
           doings
           ,
           what
           tongue
           so
           euer
           he
           doth
           vse
           .
        
         
           This
           way
           ,
           as
           he
           sheweth
           ,
           is
           by
           causing
           the
           Schollar
           first
           to
           vnderstand
           the
           matter
           which
           he
           learneth
           :
           secondly
           ,
           to
           construe
           truely
           :
           thirdly
           ,
           to
           parse
           exactly
           :
           fourthly
           ,
           to
           translate
           into
           English
           plainely
           :
           fiftly
           ,
           to
           translate
           out
           of
           the
           English
           into
           the
           Latine
           of
           the
           
           Author
           againe
           :
           and
           so
           after
           to
           compare
           with
           the
           Author
           how
           neere
           he
           came
           vnto
           it
           .
           Finally
           ,
           by
           much
           translating
           both
           wayes
           ,
           chiefely
           out
           of
           the
           English
           into
           Latine
           ,
           as
           hee
           setteth
           downe
           in
           the
           beginning
           of
           his
           second
           booke
           ;
           and
           hereby
           hee
           saw
           those
           strange
           experiments
           of
           the
           increase
           of
           learning
           ,
           which
           hee
           reporteth
           of
           Mr.
           
             Iohn
             Whitney
          
           ,
           and
           others
           .
           Now
           ,
           whereas
           these
           things
           are
           very
           hard
           to
           bee
           performed
           in
           the
           common
           schooles
           ;
           especially
           for
           lacke
           of
           time
           to
           trie
           and
           compare
           euery
           schollars
           translation
           ,
           and
           euer
           giuing
           them
           new
           peeces
           to
           translate
           ,
           and
           those
           such
           as
           are
           meete
           for
           euery
           forme
           ;
           by
           the
           meanes
           of
           these
           translations
           of
           our
           first
           schoole
           Authors
           ,
           all
           these
           things
           may
           bee
           performed
           in
           euery
           Author
           and
           forme
           ,
           most
           certainely
           and
           constantly
           ,
           and
           with
           much
           ease
           and
           delight
           both
           to
           Maister
           and
           Schollars
           ;
           as
           I
           trust
           will
           be
           found
           .
           The
           manner
           hereof
           I
           haue
           set
           downe
           in
           the
           8.
           
           Chapter
           ,
           and
           others
           following
           .
           Therfore
           since
           the
           time
           that
           God
           made
           these
           knowne
           vnto
           mee
           (
           which
           was
           about
           some
           foure
           yeares
           agoe
           or
           not
           much
           aboue
           ,
           vpon
           the
           occasion
           of
           a
           late
           worthy
           experiment
           related
           vnto
           mee
           ,
           confirming
           the
           testimonie
           of
           Mr.
           Askam
           )
           I
           haue
           laboured
           in
           these
           translations
           aboue
           all
           other
           things
           ,
           First
           ,
           to
           finde
           out
           the
           Grammar
           rule
           of
           construing
           truely
           and
           perfectly
           ,
           whereby
           to
           guide
           these
           translations
           ,
           and
           wherevpon
           they
           chiefely
           depend
           :
           Secondly
           ,
           to
           finde
           out
           the
           parricular
           vses
           and
           benefits
           of
           them
           :
           Thirdly
           ,
           to
           finde
           out
           and
           set
           downe
           such
           directions
           ,
           as
           whereby
           to
           frame
           the
           translations
           to
           serue
           for
           all
           the
           vses
           most
           plainely
           :
           Fourthly
           ,
           to
           translate
           so
           many
           of
           our
           first
           Authors
           after
           the
           same
           manner
           ,
           as
           since
           that
           time
           I
           
           haue
           had
           occasion
           for
           my
           schollars
           in
           each
           forme
           to
           reade
           :
           Fiftly
           ,
           to
           haue
           certaine
           triall
           and
           experience
           of
           euery
           thing
           ,
           so
           much
           as
           in
           this
           time
           I
           could
           ;
           and
           vpon
           triall
           to
           commend
           them
           to
           Schooles
           ,
           to
           help
           hereby
           to
           bring
           into
           Schooles
           that
           excellent
           way
           of
           learning
           ,
           which
           hee
           so
           highly
           commendeth
           ,
           and
           whereof
           I
           haue
           very
           great
           hope
           ;
           and
           so
           by
           them
           a
           perpetuall
           benefit
           to
           all
           schooles
           and
           good
           learning
           :
           which
           I
           vnfainedly
           wish
           and
           pray
           for
           .
           (
           ⸫
           )
        
      
       
         
           Aduertisement
           by
           the
           Printer
           .
        
         
           CVrteous
           Reader
           ,
           whereas
           in
           the
           later
           end
           of
           this
           Booke
           it
           is
           signified
           in
           what
           forwardness
           the
           Authors
           translation
           of
           
             Sententiae
             Pueriles
          
           and
           Cato
           ,
           are
           ;
           take
           notice
           also
           that
           his
           booke
           entituled
           ,
           
             The
             Poasing
             of
             the
             Accedence
          
           ,
           is
           since
           come
           to
           my
           hands
           ,
           and
           likely
           to
           come
           forth
           at
           the
           same
           time
           with
           Cato
           .
        
      
    
     
       
         
         
         
           Ludus
           Literarius
           :
           OR
           The
           Grammar
           Schoole
           .
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             1.
             
          
           
             A
             Discourse
             between
             two
             Schoolemasters
             ,
             concerning
             their
             function
             .
             In
             the
             end
             ,
             determining
             a
             conference
             about
             the
             best
             way
             of
             teaching
             ,
             and
             the
             manner
             of
             their
             proceeding
             in
             the
             same
             .
          
           
             SPOVDEVS
             .
             PHILOPONVS
             .
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               GOd
               saue
               you
               ,
               good
               Sir
               :
               I
               am
               glad
               to
               see
               you
               in
               health
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               What
               mine
               old
               acquaintance
               ,
               M.
               Spoudaeus
               ?
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               The
               very
               same
               ,
               sir.
               
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               Now
               ,
               I
               am
               as
               right
               glad
               to
               see
               you
               well
               :
               you
               are
               heartily
               welcome
               to
               this
               my
               poore
               house
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               Sir
               ,
               I
               giue
               you
               many
               thanks
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               But
               how
               haue
               you
               done
               these
               many
               yeares
               ?
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               I
               thank
               God
               I
               haue
               had
               good
               health
               ,
               
               euer
               since
               wee
               liued
               in
               the
               Colledge
               together
               :
               but
               for
               my
               time
               ,
               I
               haue
               spent
               it
               in
               a
               fruitlesse
               ,
               wearisom
               ,
               and
               an
               vnthankfull
               office
               ;
               in
               teaching
               a
               poore
               country
               schoole
               ,
               as
               I
               haue
               heard
               ,
               that
               your
               
               selfe
               haue
               also
               beene
               imployed
               in
               the
               same
               kinde
               of
               life
               ;
               and
               am
               therefore
               perswaded
               ,
               that
               you
               haue
               had
               some
               experience
               of
               my
               griefe
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               Experience
               ,
               say
               you
               ?
               yea
               indeed
               I
               haue
               had
               so
               much
               experience
               of
               that
               whereof
               you
               now
               complaine
               ,
               that
               if
               all
               other
               things
               were
               according
               thereunto
               ,
               I
               might
               bee
               able
               to
               teach
               very
               many
               .
               But
               I
               pray
               you
               sir
               ,
               what
               good
               occasion
               hath
               brought
               you
               into
               these
               parts
               ?
               It
               is
               a
               wonder
               to
               see
               you
               in
               this
               countrey
               .
               I
               should
               hardly
               haue
               knowen
               you
               (
               it
               is
               so
               long
               since
               we
               liued
               together
               ,
               now
               aboue
               twentie
               yeeres
               ,
               and
               also
               for
               that
               you
               seeme
               to
               me
               so
               aged
               )
               but
               that
               I
               did
               better
               remember
               your
               voice
               then
               your
               fauour
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               Sir
               ,
               you
               see
               the
               Prouerbe
               verefied
               in
               me
               ;
               
                 Cura
                 facit
                 canos
              
               .
               
               Cares
               and
               troubles
               haue
               made
               me
               aged
               long
               before
               my
               time
               .
               As
               for
               my
               iourney
               ,
               a
               very
               great
               and
               necessary
               occasion
               hath
               driuen
               me
               into
               these
               quarters
               ,
               to
               come
               euen
               vnto
               you
               ,
               to
               seeke
               your
               helpe
               and
               direction
               ,
               in
               matter
               wherein
               (
               I
               hope
               )
               you
               may
               exceedingly
               pleasure
               me
               ,
               without
               hurt
               any
               way
               ,
               or
               so
               much
               as
               the
               least
               preiudice
               vnto
               your selfe
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               You
               might
               thinke
               mee
               very
               vnkinde
               ,
               and
               forgetfull
               of
               our
               auncient
               loue
               ,
               if
               I
               should
               not
               be
               readie
               to
               shew
               you
               anie
               kindnesse
               ;
               especially
               sith
               you
               haue
               taken
               so
               long
               a
               iourney
               vnto
               me
               .
               
               But
               I
               pray
               what
               is
               the
               matter
               ?
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               The
               matter
               (
               if
               you
               will
               giue
               mee
               leaue
               )
               is
               this
               .
               I
               haue
               heard
               that
               you
               haue
               long
               taken
               great
               pains
               in
               teaching
               ;
               and
               that
               of
               late
               yeares
               ▪
               you
               haue
               set
               your selfe
               wholly
               to
               this
               happy
               kinde
               of
               trauell
               ;
               to
               finde
               out
               the
               most
               plaine
               ,
               easie
               ,
               and
               sure
               waies
               of
               teaching
               ,
               for
               the
               benefit
               both
               of
               your selfe
               and
               others
               :
               whereby
               you
               haue
               attained
               much
               happy
               knowledge
               in
               this
               behalfe
               .
               Now
               my
               long
               iourney
               hath
               bin
               for
               this
               same
               very
               purpose
               ,
               to
               desire
               some
               conference
               with
               you
               ,
               and
               to
               intreat
               your
               louing
               fauour
               and
               helpe
               .
               I
               should
               thinke
               my selfe
               for
               eu●r
               bound
               vnto
               you
               ,
               if
               you
               would
               vouchsafe
               to
               impart
               vnto
               me
               some
               of
               those
               experiments
               ,
               which
               I
               haue
               beene
               certainely
               informed
               ,
               that
               by
               your
               trauels
               you
               haue
               obtained
               .
               For
               ,
               I
               my selfe
               haue
               so
               long
               laboured
               in
               this
               moyling
               and
               drudging
               life
               ,
               without
               any
               fruite
               to
               speake
               of
               ,
               and
               with
               so
               
               many
               discouragements
               and
               vexations
               insteede
               of
               any
               true
               comfort
               ,
               
               that
               I
               waxe
               vtterly
               wearie
               of
               my
               place
               ,
               and
               my
               life
               is
               a
               continuall
               burden
               vnto
               me
               .
               Insomuch
               as
               that
               it
               causeth
               me
               to
               feare
               ,
               that
               God
               neuer
               called
               me
               to
               this
               function
               ,
               because
               I
               see
               his
               blessing
               so
               little
               vpon
               my
               labors
               ;
               neyther
               can
               I
               finde
               any
               delight
               therein
               :
               whereas
               ,
               notwithstanding
               ,
               I
               heare
               of
               some
               others
               ,
               and
               euen
               of
               our
               old
               acquaintance
               ,
               whom
               GOD
               blesseth
               greatly
               in
               this
               calling
               ;
               though
               such
               bee
               verie
               rare
               ,
               
               some
               one
               or
               two
               spoken
               of
               almost
               in
               a
               whole
               countrey
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               Indeede
               I
               haue
               trauelled
               in
               this
               too
               vnthankefull
               a
               calling
               (
               as
               you
               doe
               most
               iustly
               complaine
               )
               and
               that
               in
               all
               this
               time
               ,
               since
               we
               liued
               together
               ▪
               In
               the
               greatest
               part
               whereof
               ,
               I
               haue
               beene
               well
               acquainted
               with
               your
               griefes
               and
               vexations
               ;
               which
               are
               no
               other
               then
               doe
               ordinarily
               waite
               vpon
               this
               our
               function
               :
               yet
               this
               I
               thankefully
               acknowledge
               (
               according
               to
               your
               former
               speech
               ,
               and
               to
               giue
               you
               likewise
               some
               reuiuing
               )
               that
               now
               of
               late
               ,
               since
               I
               set
               my selfe
               more
               conscionably
               and
               earnestly
               to
               seeke
               out
               the
               best
               waies
               of
               teaching
               ,
               by
               inquiring
               ,
               conferring
               and
               practicing
               constantly
               all
               the
               most
               likely
               courses
               ,
               which
               I
               could
               heare
               or
               deuise
               ,
               God
               hath
               graunted
               vnto
               mee
               ,
               to
               finde
               so
               great
               contentation
               and
               ioy
               of
               this
               same
               labour
               in
               my
               schoole
               ,
               that
               it
               hath
               swallowed
               vp
               the
               remembrance
               of
               all
               my
               former
               grieuances
               .
               For
               I
               doe
               plainely
               see
               such
               a
               change
               ,
               
               that
               now
               I
               doe
               not
               only
               labour
               in
               my
               place
               vsually
               without
               griefe
               ,
               or
               any
               wearinesse
               at
               all
               ,
               but
               that
               I
               can
               take
               ordinarilie
               more
               true
               delight
               and
               pleasure
               in
               following
               my
               children
               (
               by
               obseruing
               the
               earnest
               strife
               and
               emulation
               which
               is
               amongst
               them
               ,
               which
               of
               them
               shall
               doe
               the
               best
               ,
               and
               in
               the
               sensible
               increase
               of
               their
               learning
               and
               towardnesse
               )
               then
               anie
               one
               can
               take
               in
               following
               hawkes
               and
               hounds
               ,
               or
               in
               any
               other
               the
               pleasantest
               recreation
               ,
               
               as
               I
               verely
               perswade
               my selfe
               .
               And
               the
               rather
               because
               after
               my
               labour
               ended
               ,
               my
               chiefest
               delight
               is
               in
               the
               remembrance
               thereof
               ;
               and
               in
               the
               consideration
               of
               the
               certaine
               good
               ,
               that
               I
               knowe
               shall
               come
               thereby
               ,
               both
               vnto
               Church
               and
               Common-wealth
               :
               
               and
               also
               that
               my
               labour
               and
               seruice
               is
               acceptable
               to
               the
               Lord
               ,
               though
               all
               men
               should
               be
               vnthankfull
               .
               So
               that
               now
               I
               am
               neuer
               so
               well
               ,
               as
               when
               I
               am
               most
               diligent
               in
               my
               place
               .
               Yea
               I
               do
               seeme
               to
               my selfe
               to
               finde
               withall
               so
               great
               a
               blessing
               vpon
               my
               labours
               ,
               
               aboue
               all
               former
               times
               ,
               that
               if
               I
               had
               knowen
               the
               same
               courses
               from
               the
               beginning
               ,
               I
               doe
               assure
               my selfe
               that
               I
               had
               done
               ten
               times
               more
               good
               ,
               and
               my
               whole
               life
               had
               beene
               full
               of
               much
               sweete
               contentment
               ,
               in
               regard
               of
               that
               which
               it
               hath
               bin
               .
               Although
               my
               labours
               haue
               neuer
               been
               vtterly
               vnprofitable
               ,
               but
               that
               I
               haue
               still
               sent
               forth
               for
               euery
               yeere
               ,
               some
               vnto
               the
               Vniuersities
               ,
               and
               they
               approoued
               amongst
               the
               better
               sort
               of
               those
               which
               haue
               come
               thither
               :
               yet
               this
               hath
               been
               nothing
               to
               that
               good
               which
               I
               might
               vndoubtedly
               haue
               done
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               Sir
               ,
               
               I
               am
               perswaded
               that
               you
               speake
               as
               you
               thinke
               :
               and
               therefore
               I
               doe
               grow
               into
               greater
               hope
               ,
               that
               you
               hauing
               had
               so
               much
               experience
               of
               the
               griefe
               in
               the
               one
               ,
               and
               ioy
               in
               the
               other
               ,
               will
               be
               more
               compassionate
               of
               me
               ,
               and
               more
               ready
               also
               to
               impart
               your
               experiments
               with
               me
               ,
               to
               make
               me
               partaker
               of
               your
               comfort
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               For
               communicating
               vnto
               you
               ,
               for
               your
               helpe
               and
               comfort
               ,
               what
               God
               hath
               made
               knowne
               vnto
               me
               ,
               I
               take
               it
               to
               be
               my
               dutie
               .
               
               We
               all
               of
               vs
               know
               the
               danger
               of
               hiding
               our
               talent
               ,
               or
               keeping
               backe
               our
               debt
               ,
               when
               the
               Lord
               hauing
               giuen
               vs
               abilitie
               ,
               doth
               call
               vpon
               vs
               to
               paie
               it
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               I
               thank
               God
               vnfainedly
               (
               good
               sir
               )
               for
               this
               harty
               affection
               ,
               which
               I
               doe
               finde
               in
               you
               ,
               and
               for
               this
               readinesse
               to
               communicate
               with
               mee
               the
               fruites
               of
               your
               trauells
               .
               
               You
               shall
               see
               .
               I
               hope
               ,
               that
               I
               shall
               receiue
               them
               ,
               with
               like
               alacritie
               and
               thankfulnesse
               ,
               and
               bee
               as
               ready
               to
               employ
               them
               to
               the
               best
               ,
               to
               doe
               my
               vttermost
               seruice
               in
               my
               place
               and
               calling
               hereafter
               .
               So
               that
               although
               my
               first
               beginnings
               haue
               been
               small
               ,
               through
               ignorance
               of
               better
               courses
               ,
               yet
               I
               trust
               my
               after
               fruits
               shall
               much
               increase
               .
               Hereby
               my
               last
               dayes
               shall
               prooue
               my
               best
               ,
               and
               make
               some
               amends
               for
               that
               which
               is
               past
               :
               and
               also
               my
               newe
               comforts
               shall
               sweeten
               all
               the
               remainder
               of
               my
               life
               ,
               and
               make
               mee
               likewise
               to
               forget
               the
               
               daies
               that
               are
               past
               .
               How
               true
               is
               that
               Prouerbe
               of
               wise
               Salomon
               ,
               that
               heauinesse
               in
               the
               heart
               of
               man
               doth
               bring
               it
               down
               ,
               but
               a
               good
               word
               doth
               reioice
               it
               ?
               You
               haue
               reuiued
               my
               heart
               ,
               and
               put
               new
               spirits
               into
               mee
               ,
               by
               that
               which
               you
               haue
               alreadie
               saide
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               The
               Lord
               will
               reuiue
               you
               ,
               
               I
               hope
               ,
               and
               all
               of
               vs
               also
               who
               labour
               in
               this
               toyling
               kinde
               ;
               by
               causing
               vs
               to
               finde
               more
               ●ound
               fruit
               ,
               and
               pleasant
               content
               in
               our
               teaching
               ,
               then
               euer
               yet
               we
               felt
               ;
               if
               wee
               will
               but
               set
               our selues
               to
               seeke
               of
               him
               ,
               and
               readily
               impart
               our
               seuerall
               experiments
               for
               the
               good
               of
               all
               :
               if
               withall
               we
               will
               receiue
               thankfully
               ,
               and
               cheerefully
               put
               in
               practice
               those
               gracious
               helpes
               of
               so
               many
               learned
               men
               ,
               which
               he
               in
               this
               last
               age
               of
               the
               world
               hath
               afforded
               aboundently
               ,
               aboue
               all
               former
               times
               ,
               very
               many
               whereof
               lie
               vtterly
               hid
               and
               vnknowne
               to
               the
               greatest
               sort
               ,
               
               vnto
               this
               day
               .
               And
               that
               partly
               thorow
               lacke
               of
               care
               and
               conscience
               ,
               to
               doe
               that
               good
               which
               we
               might
               ,
               and
               ought
               in
               our
               places
               ;
               partly
               thorow
               extreame
               vnthankfulnesse
               ,
               neglecting
               the
               rich
               giftes
               of
               the
               Lord
               ,
               so
               plentifully
               powred
               downe
               from
               heauen
               vpon
               vs
               ,
               to
               leaue
               the
               world
               more
               without
               excuse
               .
               But
               as
               for
               mine
               own
               selfe
               ,
               all
               that
               I
               can
               promise
               is
               ,
               onely
               my
               studie
               and
               desire
               ,
               to
               doe
               you
               and
               all
               other
               the
               greatest
               good
               that
               euer
               I
               shall
               be
               able
               ;
               and
               hereunto
               we
               haue
               all
               bound
               our selues
               .
               If
               I
               knowe
               anie
               thing
               wherein
               I
               haue
               ,
               or
               you
               may
               receiue
               benefit
               ,
               I
               acknowledge
               it
               wholly
               where
               it
               is
               due
               ,
               euen
               to
               him
               who
               giueth
               liberally
               to
               all
               who
               seeke
               him
               aright
               ,
               and
               casteth
               no
               man
               in
               the
               teeth
               .
               And
               resting
               vpon
               his
               rich
               bounty
               for
               a
               further
               supply
               ,
               if
               you
               shall
               propound
               in
               order
               the
               particular
               points
               ,
               wherein
               you
               would
               wish
               my
               aduise
               ,
               I
               shall
               very
               willingly
               goe
               on
               with
               you
               ;
               and
               acquaint
               you
               with
               all
               things
               which
               hitherto
               I
               haue
               learned
               in
               all
               my
               search
               ,
               and
               more
               hereafter
               as
               his
               wisdome
               shall
               adde
               vnto
               me
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               I
               reioice
               in
               your
               confidence
               and
               wish
               that
               so
               it
               may
               bee
               .
               In
               the
               meane
               time
               I
               like
               well
               of
               your
               motion
               ,
               of
               going
               through
               in
               order
               the
               principall
               matters
               of
               difficultie
               .
               If
               therfore
               you
               shall
               thinke
               meete
               ,
               I
               shall
               reduce
               all
               to
               certaine
               heads
               ,
               which
               a
               friend
               of
               mine
               shewed
               vnto
               me
               of
               late
               ,
               set
               
               downe
               in
               a
               certaine
               Table
               ,
               which
               it
               may
               bee
               that
               your selfe
               haue
               seene
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               Let
               mee
               heare
               what
               was
               contained
               in
               it
               ,
               and
               then
               I
               shall
               soone
               answere
               you
               ,
               vvhether
               I
               haue
               seene
               it
               or
               no.
               
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               There
               was
               contained
               ,
               in
               it
               ,
               a
               briefe
               summe
               of
               sundrie
               particular
               benefits
               ,
               which
               may
               bee
               brought
               to
               Grammar
               Schooles
               ,
               to
               make
               schollars
               very
               perfect
               in
               euerie
               part
               of
               good
               learning
               meet
               for
               their
               yeeres
               ;
               and
               that
               all
               both
               Masters
               and
               Schollars
               may
               proceede
               with
               ease
               ,
               certaintie
               and
               delight
               ,
               to
               fit
               all
               apt
               Schollars
               for
               the
               Vniuersitie
               euerie
               waie
               ,
               by
               fifteene
               yeeres
               of
               age
               .
               Concerning
               which
               seuerall
               heads
               ,
               although
               it
               were
               a
               most
               happie
               worke
               if
               they
               could
               be
               attained
               vnto
               (
               all
               of
               them
               beeing
               in
               my
               minde
               verie
               excellent
               ,
               and
               indeede
               the
               whole
               ,
               such
               a
               worke
               as
               must
               needes
               bring
               a
               perpetuall
               benefit
               ,
               both
               to
               Church
               ,
               and
               Common-wealth
               ,
               and
               that
               not
               onely
               to
               the
               present
               but
               to
               all
               succeeding
               ages
               )
               yet
               that
               I
               may
               speake
               freely
               ,
               what
               I
               conceiue
               of
               them
               ,
               many
               of
               them
               seeme
               very
               strange
               vnto
               me
               .
               And
               ,
               although
               I
               will
               not
               say
               that
               they
               are
               vtterly
               impossible
               :
               yet
               indeede
               I
               take
               them
               to
               be
               altogether
               vnlikely
               ;
               considering
               the
               continuall
               paines
               and
               vexation
               that
               my selfe
               haue
               vndergone
               ,
               and
               yet
               could
               neuer
               come
               in
               many
               of
               them
               ,
               neere
               vnto
               the
               least
               part
               thereof
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               By
               that
               little
               which
               you
               haue
               mentioned
               ,
               I
               take
               it
               that
               I
               haue
               seene
               the
               very
               same
               :
               and
               for
               them
               I
               do
               not
               onely
               thinke
               it
               ,
               
               but
               also
               do
               know
               assuredly
               ,
               that
               by
               the
               Lords
               gracious
               assistance
               and
               blessing
               ,
               through
               constant
               diligence
               they
               may
               be
               all
               effected
               ;
               for
               that
               I
               haue
               knowne
               so
               much
               trial
               of
               al
               of
               them
               ,
               as
               is
               sufficient
               to
               induce
               any
               man
               therunto
               :
               besides
               that
               they
               do
               all
               stand
               vpon
               plain
               &
               sure
               grounds
               ,
               as
               I
               trust
               I
               am
               able
               to
               make
               euident
               demōstration
               in
               each
               particular
               ,
               
               so
               as
               any
               man
               of
               vnderstanding
               may
               perceiue
               cleerly
               ,
               that
               they
               may
               be
               done
               .
               Neither
               doe
               I
               doubt
               but
               to
               satisfie
               you
               in
               euery
               point
               ,
               and
               to
               cause
               you
               to
               yeelde
               vnto
               the
               euidence
               hereof
               ,
               before
               wee
               part
               ,
               if
               you
               will
               but
               onely
               aske
               and
               still
               shewe
               mee
               wherein
               you
               are
               not
               satisfied
               .
               Moreouer
               ,
               I
               am
               so
               verie
               confident
               herein
               ,
               not
               onely
               vpon
               mine
               owne
               reason
               
               and
               experience
               ,
               but
               because
               I
               haue
               knowne
               the
               iudgements
               of
               sundrie
               verie
               learned
               and
               experienced
               both
               Schoolemasters
               and
               others
               ,
               who
               haue
               beene
               acquainted
               with
               these
               selfe-same
               heads
               ,
               which
               you
               haue
               mentioned
               :
               who
               ,
               though
               at
               the
               first
               reading
               of
               them
               ,
               they
               haue
               beene
               of
               your
               iudgement
               ,
               and
               haue
               thought
               as
               you
               doe
               ,
               yet
               within
               a
               quarter
               of
               an
               hower
               after
               that
               they
               haue
               taken
               a
               little
               triall
               ,
               in
               some
               of
               the
               most
               vnlikely
               ,
               and
               seene
               the
               reason
               of
               them
               ,
               haue
               rested
               fully
               satisfied
               and
               assured
               of
               the
               whole
               ,
               that
               all
               might
               bee
               done
               ,
               as
               standing
               on
               the
               like
               grounds
               .
               And
               therefore
               I
               haue
               no
               cause
               to
               distrust
               the
               like
               successe
               with
               your selfe
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               Sir
               ,
               if
               you
               shall
               doe
               this
               for
               mee
               ,
               I
               shall
               acknowledge
               my selfe
               to
               haue
               receiued
               a
               very
               great
               benefit
               ,
               and
               be
               thankfull
               vnto
               the
               Lord
               ,
               and
               to
               your selfe
               as
               his
               instrument
               ;
               and
               do
               my
               vttermost
               indeauour
               to
               put
               them
               all
               constantly
               in
               practice
               ,
               that
               I
               may
               confirme
               them
               by
               mine
               owne
               experience
               ,
               and
               finde
               the
               same
               happie
               comfort
               ,
               that
               your selfe
               haue
               done
               .
            
             
               I
               will
               therefore
               begin
               in
               order
               according
               vnto
               those
               heads
               ,
               &
               so
               propound
               the
               questions
               ,
               how
               each
               thing
               may
               be
               done
               ,
               and
               desire
               your
               answere
               vnto
               them
               seuerally
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               Nay
               rather
               ,
               
               for
               the
               manner
               of
               proceeding
               ,
               I
               take
               this
               to
               be
               far
               more
               easie
               and
               commodious
               to
               vs
               both
               ,
               and
               whereby
               God
               may
               direct
               this
               conference
               so
               ,
               as
               to
               profit
               manie
               others
               besides
               our selues
               :
               To
               go
               through
               all
               the
               whole
               course
               of
               learning
               ,
               from
               the
               first
               step
               ,
               beginning
               at
               the
               verie
               first
               Elements
               ,
               euen
               at
               the
               A.
               B.
               C.
               &
               so
               to
               ascend
               to
               the
               highest
               top
               of
               learning
               ,
               which
               can
               be
               required
               in
               Grammar
               schooles
               ;
               to
               make
               a
               schollar
               each
               way
               fit
               for
               the
               Vniuersity
               .
               Thus
               to
               run
               through
               all
               the
               necessarie
               points
               appertaining
               to
               the
               same
               ,
               as
               neere
               as
               we
               can
               remember
               ;
               To
               make
               hereby
               the
               whole
               waie
               easie
               and
               readie
               to
               all
               good
               learning
               ,
               and
               to
               ranke
               euery
               head
               in
               the
               right
               order
               and
               proper
               place
               ,
               according
               to
               the
               due
               manner
               of
               proceeding
               in
               Schooles
               .
               So
               wee
               may
               insert
               these
               points
               which
               you
               haue
               spoken
               of
               ;
               diuiding
               the
               whole
               into
               s●uerall
               chapters
               ,
               for
               the
               full
               distinguishing
               &
               plain
               setting
               down
               of
               euery
               matter
               .
               To
               the
               end
               therfore
               that
               I
               may
               be
               
               the
               better
               guided
               and
               occasioned
               to
               impart
               all
               things
               vnto
               you
               ,
               I
               shall
               request
               you
               ,
               first
               to
               propound
               all
               the
               seuerall
               points
               of
               learning
               in
               order
               ,
               from
               point
               to
               point
               as
               we
               proceed
               .
               Secondly
               ,
               in
               the
               propounding
               of
               them
               ,
               to
               shewe
               me
               in
               euery
               one
               ,
               what
               course
               you
               your selfe
               haue
               taken
               ,
               wherein
               you
               haue
               found
               so
               little
               fruite
               or
               comfort
               ,
               as
               you
               complaine
               ,
               and
               which
               you
               thinke
               to
               be
               most
               ordinarie
               in
               the
               countrey
               schooles
               .
               Wherein
               you
               shall
               faile
               in
               omitting
               any
               necessary
               head
               or
               chapter
               ,
               or
               in
               misplacing
               any
               ,
               I
               shall
               afford
               you
               my
               best
               direction
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               I
               will
               accomplish
               your
               desire
               so
               well
               as
               I
               can
               .
               I
               doubt
               not
               of
               your
               patience
               ,
               seeing
               you
               take
               me
               thus
               of
               a
               suddaine
               ;
               and
               that
               you
               who
               haue
               better
               thought
               of
               these
               things
               ,
               will
               guide
               me
               continually
               ,
               vntill
               wee
               haue
               gone
               thorow
               the
               whole
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               I
               trust
               you
               are
               so
               perswaded
               of
               me
               .
               Therefore
               I
               pray
               you
               begin
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             II.
             
          
           
             When
             the
             Schollar
             should
             first
             be
             set
             to
             the
             Schoole
             .
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               THat
               I
               may
               begin
               at
               the
               very
               first
               entrance
               of
               the
               Schoole
               :
               
               let
               me
               inquire
               this
               of
               you
               ,
               how
               soon
               you
               would
               haue
               your
               childe
               set
               vnto
               the
               Schoole
               ;
               for
               I
               thinke
               that
               worthie
               to
               be
               first
               knowen
               ,
               if
               so
               bee
               ,
               that
               you
               purpose
               to
               haue
               your
               schollar
               fitted
               for
               the
               vniuersitie
               by
               fifteene
               yeeres
               of
               age
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               I
               like
               your
               reason
               well
               ,
               to
               enter
               there
               .
               But
               to
               the
               intent
               that
               I
               may
               more
               fully
               make
               knowen
               vnto
               you
               ,
               what
               I
               thinke
               and
               haue
               found
               in
               this
               behalfe
               ,
               let
               mee
               heare
               first
               of
               you
               ,
               as
               I
               wished
               in
               generall
               ,
               at
               what
               age
               you
               vse
               in
               your
               countrey
               ,
               to
               set
               your
               children
               to
               begin
               to
               learne
               .
            
          
           
             
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               For
               the
               time
               of
               their
               entrance
               with
               vs
               ,
               in
               our
               countrey
               schooles
               ,
               
               it
               is
               commonly
               about
               7.
               or
               8.
               yeeres
               olde
               :
               six
               is
               very
               soone
               .
               If
               any
               begin
               so
               early
               ,
               they
               are
               rather
               sent
               to
               the
               schoole
               to
               keepe
               them
               from
               troubling
               the
               house
               at
               home
               ,
               and
               from
               danger
               ,
               and
               shrewd
               turnes
               ,
               then
               for
               any
               great
               hope
               and
               desire
               their
               friends
               haue
               that
               they
               should
               learne
               anything
               in
               effect
               .
               
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               I
               finde
               that
               therein
               first
               is
               a
               very
               great
               want
               generally
               ;
               for
               that
               the
               childe
               if
               hee
               be
               of
               any
               ordinary
               towardnesse
               and
               capacity
               ,
               should
               begin
               at
               fiue
               yeere
               olde
               at
               the
               vttermost
               ,
               or
               sooner
               rather
               .
               My
               reasons
               are
               these
               :
            
             
               1
               Because
               that
               then
               children
               will
               begin
               to
               conceiue
               of
               instruction
               ,
               
               and
               to
               vnderstand
               ;
               and
               bee
               able
               not
               onely
               to
               knowe
               their
               letters
               ,
               to
               spell
               and
               to
               reade
               ,
               but
               also
               to
               take
               a
               delight
               therein
               ,
               and
               to
               striue
               to
               goe
               before
               their
               fellowes
               .
               Experience
               heerein
               will
               quickely
               teach
               euery
               one
               ,
               who
               shall
               make
               triall
               of
               it
               ,
               if
               so
               be
               that
               they
               doe
               follow
               a
               right
               course
               .
            
             
               2
               Verie
               reason
               must
               needes
               perswade
               euery
               one
               of
               this
               .
               
               For
               ,
               if
               they
               bee
               apt
               much
               before
               fiue
               yeeres
               of
               age
               ,
               to
               learne
               shrewdnesse
               ,
               and
               those
               things
               which
               are
               hurtfull
               ,
               which
               they
               must
               ●ee
               taught
               to
               vnlearne
               againe
               ;
               why
               are
               they
               not
               as
               well
               fit
               to
               learne
               those
               things
               which
               are
               good
               and
               profitable
               for
               them
               ,
               if
               they
               bee
               entred
               and
               drawen
               on
               in
               such
               a
               manner
               ,
               as
               they
               may
               take
               a
               delight
               and
               finde
               a
               kinde
               of
               sport
               and
               plaie
               in
               the
               same
               .
               This
               delight
               may
               and
               ought
               to
               bee
               in
               all
               their
               progresse
               ,
               and
               most
               of
               all
               in
               the
               first
               entrance
               ,
               to
               make
               them
               the
               better
               to
               loue
               the
               Schoole
               ,
               and
               learning
               ,
               as
               wee
               shall
               see
               after
               .
            
             
               3
               Many
               of
               them
               ,
               
               doe
               learne
               so
               much
               vntowardnesse
               and
               n●ughtinesse
               amongst
               other
               rude
               children
               ,
               in
               that
               time
               before
               they
               come
               to
               schoole
               ,
               that
               they
               are
               worse
               for
               it
               continually
               after
               :
               and
               also
               they
               feele
               such
               a
               sweetnesse
               in
               play
               and
               idlenesse
               ,
               as
               they
               can
               hardly
               bee
               framed
               to
               leaue
               it
               ,
               and
               to
               take
               a
               delight
               in
               their
               bookes
               without
               verie
               much
               adoe
               .
            
             
             
               4
               This
               first
               age
               ,
               
               is
               that
               wherein
               they
               are
               most
               plant
               ,
               and
               may
               bee
               bended
               and
               fashioned
               most
               easily
               to
               any
               good
               course
               .
               And
               being
               thus
               accustomed
               to
               good
               things
               from
               their
               infancie
               ,
               and
               kept
               so
               much
               as
               may
               bee
               ,
               from
               all
               practice
               and
               sight
               of
               euill
               ,
               custome
               becomes
               vnto
               them
               another
               nature
               .
               So
               great
               a
               thing
               it
               is
               (
               according
               to
               the
               old
               prouerbe
               )
               to
               accustome
               children
               ,
               euen
               from
               their
               render
               yeeres
               ;
               and
               so
               vndoubtedly
               true
               is
               that
               common
               verse
               ,
               
                 Quo
                 s●mel
                 est
                 imbuta
                 recens
                 seruabit
                 odorem
                 testa
                 diû
              
            
             
               5
               Aboue
               all
               these
               ,
               
               this
               is
               a
               principall
               benefit
               ,
               that
               by
               this
               meanes
               two
               or
               three
               yeeres
               may
               well
               be
               gained
               ,
               to
               fit
               your
               Schollar
               so
               much
               sooner
               for
               the
               Vniuersity
               or
               for
               any
               honest
               trade
               or
               calling
               .
               So
               that
               a
               child
               thus
               entred
               rightly
               ,
               shall
               doe
               much
               more
               at
               eight
               yeeres
               olde
               ,
               then
               an
               other
               so
               neglected
               can
               doe
               at
               tenne
               ,
               or
               it
               may
               bee
               at
               eleuen
               or
               twelue
               .
               Also
               many
               such
               shall
               bee
               meete
               for
               trades
               and
               like
               imployments
               ,
               when
               they
               haue
               no
               learning
               to
               fit
               them
               thereunto
               .
               This
               must
               needes
               bee
               a
               great
               griefe
               to
               the
               Parents
               of
               such
               ,
               whose
               children
               haue
               so
               lost
               their
               time
               ,
               as
               it
               is
               a
               ioy
               to
               others
               whose
               children
               haue
               been
               so
               well
               brought
               vp
               ,
               when
               they
               see
               their
               children
               compared
               together
               .
            
             
               6
               Lastly
               ,
               
               our
               time
               being
               so
               short
               ▪
               it
               much
               concerneth
               euery
               parent
               ,
               to
               see
               their
               children
               to
               haue
               the
               best
               education
               and
               instruction
               ,
               which
               is
               the
               chiefe
               patrimonie
               ,
               and
               the
               greatest
               comfort
               &
               hope
               both
               of
               the
               Parents
               and
               children
               ,
               and
               also
               of
               their
               houses
               and
               posteritie
               .
               And
               this
               so
               soone
               as
               euer
               may
               be
               ,
               to
               fit
               them
               for
               some
               profitable
               imploiment
               for
               Church
               or
               Common-wealth
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               But
               they
               will
               say
               with
               vs
               ,
               
               that
               it
               will
               hinder
               the
               growth
               of
               their
               children
               to
               bee
               set
               to
               schoole
               so
               young
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               Let
               the
               schoole
               be
               made
               vnto
               them
               a
               place
               of
               play
               :
               
               and
               the
               children
               drawne
               on
               by
               that
               pleasant
               delight
               which
               ought
               to
               be
               ,
               it
               can
               then
               no
               more
               hinder
               their
               growth
               then
               their
               play
               doth
               ,
               but
               rather
               further
               it
               ,
               when
               they
               sit
               at
               their
               ease
               ;
               besides
               that
               continuall
               experience
               doth
               confute
               this
               errour
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               Bee
               it
               so
               as
               you
               say
               :
               
               yet
               this
               is
               a
               receiued
               opinion
               ,
               
               that
               it
               will
               cause
               them
               to
               hate
               the
               schoole
               ,
               when
               they
               should
               be
               set
               to
               it
               in
               good
               earnest
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               Nay
               rather
               it
               is
               clean
               contrarie
               :
               
               for
               being
               acquainted
               with
               the
               schoole
               so
               young
               ,
               and
               with
               the
               sport
               and
               pleasure
               which
               they
               finde
               amongst
               other
               children
               there
               ;
               and
               also
               being
               kept
               from
               feeling
               the
               ouer
               much
               sweetnesse
               in
               play
               ,
               it
               shall
               cause
               them
               to
               loue
               &
               to
               delight
               in
               the
               schoole
               continually
               ,
               and
               to
               goe
               on
               without
               any
               repining
               ,
               or
               so
               much
               as
               thinking
               of
               being
               away
               from
               the
               schoole
               :
               wheras
               they
               being
               nuzled
               vp
               in
               play
               abroad
               ,
               are
               very
               hardly
               reclaimed
               and
               weaned
               from
               it
               ,
               to
               sticke
               to
               their
               bookes
               indeede
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               But
               yet
               it
               is
               thought
               that
               they
               can
               get
               but
               little
               learning
               then
               ,
               
               being
               so
               very
               young
               ,
               and
               therefore
               there
               is
               the
               smaller
               losse
               of
               a
               yeere
               or
               two
               ,
               at
               that
               time
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               The
               losse
               will
               bee
               found
               in
               the
               end
               ,
               although
               it
               be
               indeed
               in
               the
               beginning
               .
               
               For
               looke
               how
               many
               yeeres
               they
               lose
               in
               the
               beginning
               if
               they
               bee
               apt
               ,
               so
               many
               in
               the
               end
               they
               will
               be
               shorter
               ,
               of
               such
               of
               their
               fellowes
               ,
               who
               are
               but
               of
               their
               owne
               age
               ,
               and
               applied
               all
               alike
               being
               of
               like
               capacitie
               .
               Therefore
               ,
               as
               wee
               will
               not
               let
               them
               lose
               a
               day
               ,
               when
               they
               growe
               towards
               the
               Vniuersitie
               ,
               so
               neither
               should
               wee
               when
               they
               are
               young
               ;
               but
               preuent
               this
               losse
               ,
               and
               take
               the
               time
               in
               the
               beginning
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               We
               see
               notwithstanding
               some
               very
               long
               ere
               euer
               they
               begin
               ,
               
               who
               then
               goe
               forward
               with
               it
               the
               fastest
               of
               all
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               It
               is
               true
               in
               some
               pregant
               wits
               ,
               and
               who
               are
               industrious
               :
               
               but
               you
               shall
               ●●●ue
               others
               as
               blockish
               and
               dull
               .
               Also
               ,
               for
               those
               ,
               if
               they
               goe
               so
               fas●
               in
               the
               rudiments
               and
               first
               grounds
               ,
               how
               much
               more
               would
               they
               doe
               so
               at
               the
               same
               time
               in
               better
               studies
               ?
               Neither
               can
               they
               haue
               halfe
               that
               learning
               in
               all
               things
               ,
               which
               others
               of
               like
               age
               and
               aptnesse
               haue
               ,
               who
               haue
               been
               well
               applyed
               from
               their
               first
               yeeres
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               I
               yeelde
               to
               all
               which
               you
               haue
               saide
               in
               this
               behalfe
               ;
               and
               I
               doe
               see
               plainely
               the
               exceeding
               benefites
               ,
               that
               must
               needes
               come
               hereby
               ,
               especially
               in
               gaining
               of
               time
               ;
               if
               they
               may
               bee
               entred
               in
               that
               playing
               manner
               ,
               and
               go
               forwarde
               
               with
               alacritie
               and
               contention
               ;
               and
               moreouer
               so
               ,
               that
               they
               be
               not
               any
               way
               ouerloaded
               or
               discouraged
               ,
               nor
               yet
               in
               dangered
               ,
               by
               the
               ouer
               charging
               of
               their
               wits
               and
               memories
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               For
               that
               take
               you
               no
               feare
               ;
               you
               shall
               (
               God
               willing
               )
               see
               the
               euidence
               of
               that
               ,
               and
               a
               plaine
               direction
               in
               euerie
               Chapter
               how
               to
               proceede
               in
               that
               easie
               and
               playing
               kinde
               .
               Therefore
               ,
               if
               you
               be
               satisfied
               in
               this
               ,
               let
               vs
               come
               vnto
               the
               next
               point
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               Very
               gladly
               sir
               :
               for
               I
               long
               to
               heare
               this
               ,
               how
               you
               would
               teach
               your
               childe
               being
               so
               young
               to
               read
               so
               soone
               and
               readily
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               I
               like
               the
               point
               well
               :
               proceed
               according
               to
               your
               order
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             III.
             
          
           
             How
             the
             Schollar
             may
             be
             taught
             to
             reade
             English
             speedily
             ,
             to
             fit
             him
             the
             sooner
             and
             better
             for
             the
             Grammar
             schoole
             .
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               BEfore
               we
               enter
               into
               this
               question
               ,
               yet
               let
               me
               put
               you
               in
               minde
               of
               one
               thing
               ,
               
               which
               doth
               much
               trouble
               mee
               concerning
               this
               very
               matter
               .
               That
               it
               seemeth
               to
               mee
               an
               vnreasonable
               thing
               that
               the
               Grammar
               schooles
               should
               bee
               troubled
               with
               teaching
               A.
               B.
               C.
               seeing
               it
               is
               so
               great
               a
               hinderance
               ,
               to
               those
               paines
               which
               wee
               should
               take
               with
               our
               Grammar
               schollars
               ,
               for
               whom
               wee
               are
               appointed
               :
               Because
               it
               dooth
               take
               vp
               almost
               one
               halfe
               of
               our
               time
               ,
               and
               thereby
               dooth
               depriue
               vs
               of
               a
               chiefe
               part
               of
               the
               fruite
               of
               our
               labours
               ;
               especially
               when
               our
               mindes
               are
               so
               distracted
               ,
               and
               our
               thoughts
               carried
               so
               manie
               wayes
               ,
               to
               doe
               good
               to
               all
               .
               The
               very
               little
               ones
               in
               a
               towne
               ,
               in
               most
               countrey
               townes
               which
               are
               of
               any
               bignesse
               ,
               
               would
               require
               a
               whole
               man
               ,
               of
               themselues
               ,
               to
               be
               alwaies
               hearing
               ▪
               poasing
               and
               following
               them
               ,
               so
               as
               they
               ought
               to
               bee
               applyed
               :
               for
               continuall
               applying
               in
               a
               right
               course
               ,
               
               is
               in
               this
               and
               all
               other
               parts
               of
               learning
               ,
               aboue
               all
               other
               meanes
               .
               And
               young
               ones
               ,
               by
               a
               little
               slaking
               our
               hands
               ,
               run
               faster
               backe
               ,
               then
               euer
               they
               went
               forward
               ;
               as
               boates
               going
               vp
               the
               streame
               .
            
             
               Besides
               ,
               it
               is
               an
               extreame
               vexation
               ,
               that
               wee
               must
               bee
               toyled
               amongst
               such
               little
               pettyes
               ,
               and
               in
               teaching
               such
               matters
               ,
               whereof
               we
               can
               get
               no
               profit
               ,
               nor
               take
               any
               delight
               in
               our
               labours
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               I
               am
               well
               inured
               with
               this
               grieuance
               ,
               which
               you
               speake
               of
               ,
               and
               doe
               knowe
               by
               long
               experience
               your
               complaint
               to
               bee
               too
               iust
               in
               this
               behalfe
               .
               I
               my selfe
               haue
               complained
               of
               it
               manie
               a
               time
               .
               For
               it
               were
               much
               to
               be
               wished
               ,
               that
               none
               might
               be
               admitted
               to
               the
               Grammar
               schooles
               ,
               vntill
               they
               were
               able
               to
               reade
               English
               :
               as
               namely
               that
               they
               could
               reade
               the
               new
               Testament
               perfectly
               ,
               and
               that
               they
               were
               in
               their
               Accidences
               or
               meet
               to
               enter
               into
               them
               .
               
               There
               might
               bee
               some
               other
               schoole
               in
               the
               towne
               ,
               for
               these
               little
               ones
               to
               enter
               them
               .
               It
               would
               help
               some
               poore
               man
               or
               woman
               ,
               who
               knew
               not
               how
               to
               liue
               otherwise
               ,
               and
               who
               might
               do
               that
               well
               ,
               if
               they
               were
               rightly
               directed
               .
               Also
               it
               would
               be
               such
               an
               ease
               to
               all
               Grammar
               Schoolemasters
               ,
               as
               they
               might
               doe
               much
               more
               good
               in
               their
               places
               .
               
               Wherefore
               ,
               all
               such
               Schoolemasters
               who
               are
               incumbred
               with
               this
               inconuenience
               ,
               are
               not
               onely
               to
               wish
               ,
               but
               also
               to
               labour
               to
               haue
               it
               reformed
               in
               their
               seuerall
               schooles
               .
               
               Yet
               notwithstanding
               ,
               where
               it
               cannot
               be
               redressed
               ,
               it
               must
               be
               borne
               with
               wisdome
               and
               patience
               as
               an
               heauy
               burden
               .
               Patience
               shall
               make
               it
               much
               more
               light
               .
               And
               therefore
               euery
               one
               is
               to
               doe
               his
               best
               indeauour
               ,
               to
               know
               how
               to
               make
               it
               most
               easie
               ,
               if
               it
               do
               lie
               vpon
               him
               .
               Moreouer
               ,
               seeing
               we
               purpose
               ,
               God
               willing
               ,
               to
               goe
               through
               all
               the
               whole
               course
               of
               learning
               ,
               and
               also
               sith
               our
               labour
               is
               to
               finde
               out
               the
               meanes
               ,
               whereby
               to
               make
               the
               way
               plaine
               ,
               to
               traine
               vp
               euerie
               childe
               from
               the
               verie
               first
               entraunce
               into
               learning
               ,
               (
               as
               was
               sayde
               )
               
               vntill
               wee
               haue
               brought
               him
               vnto
               the
               Vniuersitie
               ,
               we
               cannot
               omit
               any
               point
               ,
               which
               may
               tend
               vnto
               the
               same
               ,
               much
               lesse
               the
               first
               steppe
               of
               all
               .
               For
               ,
               a
               child
               well
               entred
               is
               halfe
               made
               :
               
               according
               to
               that
               Prouerbe
               ,
               
                 Principium
                 ,
                 dimidium
                 totius
              
               .
               The
               foundation
               well
               layd
               ,
               the
               building
               must
               needs
               goe
               forward
               much
               more
               happily
               .
               This
               is
               specially
               true
               in
               learning
               ;
               wherein
               children
               feeling
               a
               sweetnesse
               in
               the
               beginning
               ,
               are
               very
               much
               incouraged
               ,
               as
               daily
               experience
               will
               manifest
               to
               euery
               one
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               I
               see
               well
               the
               necessitie
               of
               vndergoing
               this
               burden
               ,
               in
               those
               places
               where
               remedie
               cannot
               be
               had
               ,
               without
               greater
               inconueniences
               .
               And
               therefore
               ,
               sith
               that
               necessity
               hath
               no
               lawe
               ,
               nor
               for
               my selfe
               I
               knowe
               no
               meanes
               h●w
               to
               be
               freed
               from
               it
               ;
               I
               pray
               you
               let
               vs
               returne
               againe
               vnto
               the
               point
               ,
               and
               let
               mee
               still
               intreat
               of
               you
               your
               best
               direction
               ,
               to
               make
               this
               burden
               so
               light
               as
               may
               bee
               .
               
               This
               is
               a
               thing
               worth
               the
               diligence
               of
               all
               ,
               who
               must
               be
               imploied
               amongst
               little
               ones
               :
               to
               wit
               ,
               to
               teach
               children
               how
               to
               read
               well
               ,
               and
               to
               pronounce
               their
               letters
               truly
               ;
               as
               also
               to
               spell
               right
               ,
               and
               to
               knowe
               how
               to
               write
               true
               Orthography
               in
               a
               short
               space
               .
               For
               (
               that
               I
               may
               acknowledge
               the
               truth
               ,
               and
               which
               hath
               bit
               no
               small
               discredit
               vnto
               me
               in
               this
               behalfe
               )
               I
               haue
               had
               some
               who
               haue
               beene
               with
               me
               ,
               two
               or
               three
               yeeres
               ,
               before
               they
               could
               reade
               well
               .
               
               And
               that
               which
               hath
               yet
               bin
               much
               more
               grieuous
               to
               mee
               ,
               I
               haue
               sometimes
               been
               so
               abashed
               and
               ashamed
               ,
               that
               I
               haue
               not
               knowen
               what
               to
               say
               ,
               when
               some
               being
               a
               little
               discontented
               ,
               or
               taking
               occasion
               to
               quarrell
               about
               paying
               my
               stipend
               ,
               haue
               cast
               this
               in
               my
               teeth
               ,
               that
               their
               children
               haue
               been
               vnder
               me
               sixe
               or
               seauen
               yeere
               ,
               and
               yet
               haue
               not
               learned
               to
               reade
               english
               well
               .
               I
               my selfe
               haue
               also
               knowen
               ,
               that
               their
               complaints
               haue
               been
               true
               in
               part
               ;
               though
               I
               haue
               taken
               all
               the
               paines
               with
               them
               that
               euer
               I
               could
               deuise
               .
               Therefore
               good
               sir
               ,
               set
               downe
               as
               plainly
               and
               shortly
               as
               you
               can
               ,
               how
               this
               may
               be
               helped
               .
               Both
               my selfe
               &
               many
               others
               shall
               be
               much
               beholden
               for
               your
               direction
               in
               this
               first
               entrance
               .
               For
               my
               maner
               of
               en●●ing
               them
               ,
               it
               is
               that
               which
               I
               take
               to
               be
               euery
               where
               :
               to
               teach
               &
               heare
               them
               
               so
               oft
               ouer
               vntill
               they
               can
               say
               a
               lesson
               ,
               and
               so
               to
               a
               new
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               I
               likewise
               h●ue
               been
               well
               acquainted
               with
               this
               your
               trouble
               :
               and
               therfore
               I
               will
               indeuor
               ,
               to
               afford
               you
               so
               much
               as
               I
               haue
               yet
               learned
               ,
               how
               to
               auoide
               these
               clamors
               ;
               and
               how
               any
               poore
               man
               who
               will
               imploy
               his
               paines
               ,
               may
               learn
               to
               teach
               children
               to
               read
               well
               in
               a
               short
               time
               ,
               though
               this
               may
               seeme
               vnbefitting
               our
               profession
               .
            
             
               First
               the
               ch●●de
               is
               to
               be
               taught
               ,
               
               how
               to
               call
               euery
               letter
               ,
               pronouncing
               each
               of
               them
               plainely
               ,
               fully
               and
               distinctly
               ;
               I
               mean
               in
               a
               distinct
               and
               differing
               sound
               ,
               each
               from
               others
               ,
               and
               also
               naturally
               ,
               from
               the
               very
               first
               entrance
               to
               learning
               .
               More
               specially
               to
               bee
               carefull
               ,
               for
               the
               right
               pronouncing
               the
               fiue
               vowels
               ,
               
               in
               the
               first
               place
               ,
               as
               
                 a
                 ,
                 e
                 ,
                 i
                 ,
                 o
                 ,
                 u.
              
               Because
               these
               are
               first
               and
               most
               naturall
               ,
               and
               doe
               make
               a
               perfect
               sound
               ,
               so
               that
               they
               may
               bee
               pronounced
               fully
               of
               themselues
               ;
               and
               they
               being
               rightly
               vttered
               ,
               all
               the
               rest
               are
               more
               plaine
               .
               After
               these
               vowels
               ▪
               to
               teach
               them
               to
               pronounce
               euery
               other
               letter
               :
               
               which
               are
               therefore
               called
               Consonants
               ,
               because
               they
               cannot
               make
               a
               perfect
               sound
               of
               themselues
               ,
               without
               a
               vowell
               .
            
             
               This
               may
               be
               done
               ,
               
               and
               also
               the
               teaching
               of
               children
               to
               spell
               any
               syllable
               ,
               before
               the
               childe
               do
               knowe
               any
               letter
               on
               the
               booke
               ;
               and
               that
               ,
               some
               wise
               and
               experienced
               do
               holde
               the
               surest
               and
               best
               course
               .
               But
               they
               are
               ,
               at
               least
               ,
               to
               be
               taught
               to
               pronounce
               their
               letters
               thus
               ,
               as
               they
               doe
               learne
               them
               ;
               to
               preuent
               the
               griefe
               and
               wearisomnesse
               of
               teaching
               them
               to
               forget
               euill
               customes
               in
               pronouncing
               ,
               which
               they
               took●
               vp
               in
               their
               first
               ill
               learning
               .
               And
               so
               euer
               in
               teaching
               to
               read
               ,
               the
               teachers
               are
               to
               continue
               the
               like
               care
               of
               sweete
               and
               naturall
               pronun●ia●ion
               .
            
             
               Secondly
               ,
               
               for
               the
               knowing
               of
               the
               letters
               (
               besides
               that
               common
               manner
               practiced
               in
               Schooles
               ,
               which
               is
               by
               oft
               reading
               ouer
               all
               the
               letters
               forwards
               and
               backwards
               vntill
               they
               can
               say
               them
               )
               they
               may
               be
               much
               furthered
               thus
               ;
               That
               is
               ,
               
               by
               causing
               the
               childe
               to
               finde
               out
               ,
               and
               to
               shew
               you
               which
               is
               a
               ,
               which
               b
               ,
               which
               c
               ,
               which
               f
               ,
               and
               so
               any
               other
               letter
               .
               First
               to
               finde
               them
               in
               the
               Alphabet
               ,
               then
               in
               any
               other
               place
               .
               
               Or
               if
               you
               will
               let
               them
               learne
               but
               one
               letter
               at
               once
               ,
               
               vntill
               they
               can
               readily
               know
               or
               finde
               out
               that
               letter
               in
               any
               place
               ,
               and
               after
               that
               an
               other
               in
               the
               same
               manner
               ;
               This
               is
               holden
               the
               surer
               and
               more
               easie
               waie
               :
               But
               this
               at
               your
               owne
               iudgement
               .
            
             
               3
               You
               may
               helpe
               them
               to
               spell
               thus
               ,
               
               besides
               that
               course
               which
               is
               vsuall
               .
               Let
               so
               many
               as
               are
               beginners
               ,
               or
               who
               cannot
               reade
               perfectly
               ,
               stand
               together
               ,
               and
               then
               poase
               them
               without
               booke
               ,
               one
               by
               one
               .
               First
               in
               syllables
               of
               two
               letters
               ,
               as
               they
               are
               set
               downe
               in
               their
               A.
               B.
               C.
               and
               where
               one
               misseth
               let
               his
               next
               fellow
               tell
               ,
               
               if
               he
               cannot
               then
               som
               other
               .
               Then
               examine
               them
               in
               syllables
               of
               three
               letters
               ,
               after
               in
               moe
               .
               And
               euer
               what
               syllable
               they
               misse
               ,
               marke
               it
               with
               a
               dent
               with
               the
               nayle
               ,
               or
               a
               pricke
               with
               a
               pen
               ,
               or
               the
               like
               :
               and
               when
               you
               haue
               marked
               out
               those
               wherein
               they
               so
               misse
               ,
               poase
               them
               oft
               ouer
               ,
               not
               forgetting
               due
               praise
               to
               them
               who
               do
               best
               .
               One
               halfe
               howre
               would
               be
               spent
               daily
               in
               this
               kinde
               of
               examining
               ,
               
               vntill
               they
               bee
               perfect
               in
               any
               syllable
               or
               worde
               .
               To
               make
               children
               to
               take
               a
               delight
               in
               spelling
               ,
               let
               them
               spell
               many
               syllables
               together
               ,
               which
               differ
               but
               onely
               in
               one
               letter
               ,
               as
               hand
               ,
               band
               ,
               land
               ,
               sand
               ,
               &c.
               
               These
               syllables
               and
               words
               following
               ,
               I
               haue
               obserued
               ,
               to
               be
               of
               the
               hardest
               for
               children
               to
               spel
               :
               I
               will
               set
               you
               them
               downe
               together
               in
               this
               short
               briefe
               .
               They
               may
               serue
               for
               spelling
               ,
               reading
               ,
               or
               writing
               ,
               and
               may
               soone
               be
               gotten
               by
               being
               often
               poased
               ,
               read
               or
               written
               ouer
               .
            
             
               Ac
               ,
               
               ec
               ,
               ca
               ,
               ce
               ,
               ci
               ,
               co
               ,
               cu
               ,
               ag
               ,
               eg
               ,
               ah
               ,
               az
               ,
               ae
               ,
               ai
               ,
               au
               ,
               ga
               ,
               ge
               ,
               gi
               ,
               go
               ,
               gu
               ,
               va
               ,
               wa
               ,
               we
               ,
               wee
               ,
               bac
               ,
               bace
               ,
               bag
               ,
               bage
               ,
               gage
               ,
               badge
               ,
               bau
               ,
               baye
               ,
               dawe
               ,
               dewe
               ,
               iawe
               ,
               rac
               ,
               race
               ,
               rosse
               ,
               rose
               ,
               yell
               ,
               you
               ,
               gua
               ,
               cha
               ,
               cla
               ,
               dwa
               ,
               gla
               ,
               pha
               ,
               tha
               ,
               sca
               ,
               sha
               ,
               swa
               ,
               wra
               ,
               chra
               ,
               phra
               ,
               spha
               ,
               thra
               ,
               twa
               ,
               thwa
               ,
               able
               ,
               abs
               ,
               ach
               ,
               adge
               ,
               afle
               ,
               apt
               ,
               ath
               ,
               own
               ,
               blowe
               ,
               browe
               ,
               chrou
               ,
               dregg
               ,
               dredge
               ,
               dwarfe
               ,
               frogg
               ,
               gnash
               ,
               gnaw
               ,
               plowe
               ,
               snowe
               ,
               stewe
               ,
               slugge
               ,
               they
               ,
               thom
               ,
               throne
               ,
               twaine
               ,
               twigge
               ,
               schoole
               ,
               cockle
               ,
               puddle
               ,
               pegle
               ,
               good
               ,
               golde
               ,
               gogle
               ,
               balme
               ,
               fallen
               ,
               stolne
               ,
               scalpe
               ,
               false
               ,
               thumbe
               ,
               couple
               ,
               pearce
               ,
               charme
               ,
               chapt
               ,
               moth
               ,
               mouth
               ,
               nymphes
               ,
               vnkle
               ,
               tenth
               ,
               strength
               ,
               height
               ,
               depth
               ,
               breadth
               ,
               weight
               ,
               ioint
               ,
               laude
               ,
               
               beautie
               ,
               deede
               ,
               language
               ,
               guide
               ,
               feede
               ,
               feude
               ,
               vowe
               ,
               braue
               ,
               dou
               ,
               dove
               ,
               knife
               ,
               kniues
               ,
               yeoman
               ,
               ynough
               ,
               ayre
               ,
               heyre
               ,
               doubting
               ,
               Island
               ,
               yle
               ,
               buye
               ,
               league
               ,
               hatchet
               ,
               laugh
               ,
               yeugh
               ,
               bough
               ▪
               publique
               ,
               quishon
               .
            
             
               These
               are
               some
               of
               the
               hardest
               syllables
               ,
               
               as
               I
               sayde
               :
               your selfe
               may
               adde
               moe
               as
               you
               meet
               with
               them
               .
               Also
               this
               is
               to
               be
               obserued
               in
               spelling
               ;
               that
               before
               (
               on
               )
               you
               spell
               or
               write
               commonly
               (
               ti
               )
               not
               (
               ci
               )
               as
               saluation
               not
               saluacion
               ,
               though
               we
               pronounce
               it
               as
               (
               ci
               .
               )
               But
               this
               is
               to
               be
               knowen
               chieflie
               ,
               by
               the
               latine
               words
               from
               whence
               they
               come
               .
            
             
               Right
               pronuntiation
               of
               words
               ,
               
               &
               continuall
               practice
               in
               spelling
               ,
               are
               the
               surest
               way
               to
               come
               to
               spell
               truely
               .
            
             
               If
               you
               pronounce
               the
               word
               false
               ,
               which
               you
               would
               haue
               your
               childe
               to
               spell
               ,
               hee
               spelleth
               it
               false
               :
               for
               hee
               spelleth
               according
               as
               it
               is
               pronounced
               to
               him
               ,
               or
               as
               he
               vseth
               to
               pronounce
               .
               As
               for
               example
               ;
               aske
               the
               childe
               how
               he
               spelles
               a
               strea
               ,
               (
               as
               in
               many
               places
               the
               countrey
               manner
               is
               to
               pronounce
               it
               )
               hee
               will
               spell
               strea
               or
               stre
               :
               but
               aske
               him
               how
               hee
               spels
               a
               strawe
               and
               so
               pronounce
               it
               ,
               and
               he
               will
               spell
               strawe
               .
            
             
               To
               direct
               further
               how
               to
               come
               to
               perfection
               in
               spelling
               or
               writing
               right
               ,
               
               I
               shall
               haue
               occasion
               to
               speake
               after
               .
            
             
               In
               ioining
               syllables
               together
               ,
               
               they
               must
               bee
               taught
               ,
               to
               vtter
               euerie
               syllable
               by
               it selfe
               ,
               truly
               ,
               plainly
               ,
               fully
               ,
               and
               distinctly
               ,
               as
               we
               heard
               of
               the
               letters
               before
               ;
               and
               so
               also
               as
               that
               others
               who
               heare
               may
               vnderstand
               ;
               
               euer
               sounding
               out
               the
               last
               syllable
               :
               as
               sal-ua-ti-on
               .
            
             
               Thus
               they
               may
               goe
               through
               their
               Abcie
               ,
               
               and
               Primer
               .
               And
               if
               they
               reade
               them
               twise
               ouer
               ,
               that
               they
               may
               bee
               very
               perfect
               in
               them
               ,
               it
               will
               bee
               the
               better
               for
               them
               .
               For
               ,
               the
               second
               reading
               of
               any
               booke
               dooth
               much
               incourage
               children
               ,
               
               because
               it
               seemeth
               to
               bee
               so
               easie
               then
               ;
               and
               also
               it
               doth
               imprint
               it
               the
               more
               .
               Besides
               that
               they
               will
               run
               it
               ouer
               so
               fast
               at
               the
               second
               time
               ,
               as
               it
               will
               be
               no
               losse
               of
               time
               at
               all
               vnto
               them
               .
            
             
               After
               these
               they
               may
               reade
               ouer
               other
               English
               bookes
               .
               
               Amongst
               which
               ,
               the
               Psalms
               in
               metre
               would
               be
               one
               ,
               because
               children
               wil
               learne
               that
               booke
               with
               most
               readinesse
               and
               delight
               
               through
               the
               running
               of
               the
               metre
               ,
               as
               it
               is
               found
               by
               experience
               .
               
               Then
               the
               Testament
               ,
               in
               which
               the
               discreete
               Master
               may
               keepe
               his
               schollar
               lesse
               or
               more
               ,
               vntil
               he
               think
               him
               meet
               to
               enter
               into
               the
               Accidence
               .
            
             
               If
               any
               require
               any
               other
               little
               booke
               meet
               to
               enter
               children
               ;
               
               
                 the
                 Schoole
                 of
                 Vertue
              
               is
               one
               of
               the
               principall
               ,
               and
               easiest
               for
               the
               first
               enterers
               ,
               being
               full
               of
               precepts
               of
               ciuilitie
               ,
               and
               such
               as
               children
               will
               soone
               learne
               and
               take
               a
               delight
               in
               ,
               thorow
               the
               roundnesse
               of
               the
               metre
               ,
               as
               was
               sayde
               before
               of
               the
               singing
               Psalmes
               :
               And
               after
               it
               
                 the
                 Schoole
                 of
                 good
                 manners
              
               ,
               
               called
               ,
               
                 the
                 new
                 Schoole
                 of
                 Vertue
              
               ,
               leading
               the
               childe
               as
               by
               the
               hand
               ,
               in
               the
               way
               of
               all
               good
               manners
               .
            
             
               By
               these
               meanes
               ,
               
               children
               if
               they
               be
               well
               applied
               ,
               and
               continually
               kept
               vnto
               it
               ,
               may
               be
               taught
               so
               to
               read
               within
               a
               yeere
               or
               little
               more
               ,
               as
               they
               may
               be
               meet
               to
               enter
               into
               their
               Accidence
               ,
               by
               that
               time
               that
               they
               bee
               six
               yeere
               olde
               at
               the
               vttermost
               ;
               especially
               if
               they
               bee
               in
               any
               measure
               apt
               ,
               and
               much
               practiced
               in
               spelling
               the
               hardest
               syllables
               .
            
             
               For
               diuiding
               or
               distinguishing
               of
               syllables
               this
               one
               obseruation
               is
               to
               be
               remembred
               ;
               
               That
               what
               consonants
               are
               vsually
               ioined
               in
               the
               beginnings
               of
               words
               ,
               those
               are
               not
               to
               be
               disioined
               and
               separate
               in
               the
               middest
               of
               words
               ,
               except
               in
               Compound
               words
               .
               But
               of
               this
               wee
               shall
               speake
               more
               fitly
               after
               .
               And
               thus
               much
               may
               suffice
               for
               the
               present
               ,
               for
               the
               speedy
               reading
               of
               English
               ;
               for
               heereof
               I
               haue
               had
               much
               certaine
               experience
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               I
               cannot
               iustly
               dislike
               of
               any
               thing
               which
               you
               haue
               sayd
               herein
               ,
               it
               standeth
               all
               with
               so
               great
               reason
               :
               chiefly
               ,
               to
               make
               children
               so
               perfect
               in
               the
               hardest
               syllables
               .
               For
               ,
               they
               being
               perfect
               in
               these
               must
               needs
               attaine
               all
               the
               rest
               in
               a
               short
               space
               .
               Except
               onely
               one
               thing
               which
               you
               vttered
               ;
               which
               indeede
               seemes
               a
               strange
               Paradox
               to
               me
               :
               Namely
               ,
               that
               some
               wise
               &
               experienced
               ,
               would
               haue
               children
               taught
               to
               call
               and
               pronounce
               all
               their
               letters
               ,
               and
               to
               spell
               any
               syllable
               before
               they
               know
               a
               letter
               on
               the
               booke
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               This
               is
               very
               true
               which
               you
               say
               ;
               it
               may
               seeme
               a
               Paradox
               to
               them
               who
               haue
               not
               tryed
               it
               .
               I
               my selfe
               was
               of
               
               your
               minde
               when
               I
               heard
               it
               first
               .
               
               Yet
               setting
               my selfe
               to
               make
               some
               triall
               of
               it
               ,
               for
               the
               reuerence
               I
               bare
               to
               him
               of
               whom
               I
               heard
               it
               ,
               and
               for
               that
               he
               shewed
               me
               experience
               of
               it
               in
               a
               child
               not
               fowre
               yeeres
               olde
               ;
               I
               found
               it
               the
               easiest
               ,
               pleasantest
               and
               shortest
               way
               of
               all
               ,
               where
               one
               would
               begin
               in
               a
               priuate
               house
               with
               little
               ones
               playing
               .
               The
               manner
               is
               thus
               ▪
               1.
               
               You
               must
               teach
               them
               ,
               as
               I
               sayde
               ,
               to
               call
               their
               fiue
               vowels
               ,
               and
               to
               pronounce
               them
               right
               :
               Which
               they
               will
               presently
               learne
               ,
               
               if
               you
               do
               but
               only
               cause
               them
               to
               repeat
               them
               oft
               ouer
               ,
               after
               you
               ,
               distinctly
               together
               thus
               ;
               
                 a
                 ,
                 e
                 ,
                 i
                 ,
                 o
                 ,
                 u.
              
               after
               the
               manner
               of
               fiue
               bels
               ,
               or
               as
               we
               say
               ;
               one
               ,
               two
               ,
               three
               ,
               fowre
               ,
               fiue
               .
            
             
               2
               Then
               teach
               them
               to
               put
               the
               consonants
               in
               order
               before
               euery
               vowell
               ,
               
               and
               to
               repeate
               them
               oft
               ouer
               together
               ;
               as
               thus
               :
               to
               begin
               with
               b
               ,
               and
               to
               say
               ba
               ,
               be
               ,
               bi
               ,
               bo
               ,
               bu
               .
               So
               d.
               da
               ,
               de
               ,
               di
               ,
               do
               ,
               du
               .
               f.
               fa
               ,
               fe
               ,
               fi
               ,
               fo
               ,
               fu
               .
               Thus
               teach
               them
               to
               say
               all
               the
               rest
               ,
               as
               it
               were
               singing
               them
               together
               ,
               la
               ,
               le
               ,
               li
               ,
               lo
               ,
               lu
               ;
               The
               hardest
               to
               the
               last
               ,
               as
               ca
               ,
               ce
               ,
               ci
               ,
               co
               ,
               cu.
               and
               ga
               ,
               ge
               ,
               gi
               ,
               go
               ,
               gu
               .
               In
               which
               the
               sound
               is
               a
               little
               changed
               in
               the
               second
               and
               third
               syllables
               .
               When
               they
               can
               do
               all
               these
               ,
               then
               teach
               them
               to
               spell
               them
               in
               order
               ,
               
               thus
               ;
               What
               spels
               b-a
               ?
               If
               the
               child
               cannot
               tell
               ,
               teach
               him
               to
               say
               thus
               ;
               b-a
               ,
               ba
               :
               so
               putting
               first
               b.
               before
               euery
               vowell
               ▪
               to
               say
               b-a
               ba
               ,
               b-e
               be
               ,
               b-i
               bi
               ,
               b-o
               bo
               ,
               b-u
               bu
               .
               Then
               aske
               him
               againe
               what
               spels
               b-a
               ,
               and
               he
               will
               tell
               you
               ;
               so
               all
               the
               rest
               in
               order
               .
               By
               oft
               repeating
               before
               him
               he
               will
               certainly
               do
               it
               .
               After
               this
               if
               you
               aske
               him
               ,
               how
               he
               spels
               b-a
               ,
               he
               will
               answere
               b-a
               ba.
               So
               in
               all
               others
               .
            
             
               Next
               these
               teach
               them
               to
               put
               the
               vowels
               first
               ,
               as
               to
               say
               ,
               ab
               ,
               eb
               ,
               ib
               ,
               ob
               ,
               ub
               .
               Then
               thus
               ,
               a-b
               ab
               ,
               e-b
               eb
               ,
               i-b
               ib
               ,
               o-b
               ob
               ,
               u-b
               ub
               .
               After
               ;
               what
               spelles
               a-b
               ,
               e-b
               ,
               &c.
               Thus
               to
               goe
               with
               them
               backward
               and
               forward
               ,
               crosse
               ,
               in
               and
               out
               vntill
               they
               can
               spell
               any
               word
               of
               two
               letters
               .
               Then
               you
               may
               adioine
               those
               of
               three
               letters
               :
               Afterwards
               ,
               all
               the
               hard
               syllables
               ,
               to
               tell
               what
               any
               of
               them
               spels
               ,
               til
               they
               be
               perfect
               in
               al
               ,
               or
               as
               you
               shall
               thinke
               meete
               .
               
               By
               this
               meanes
               ,
               and
               by
               a
               little
               repeating
               of
               the
               letters
               of
               the
               Alphabet
               ouer
               before
               them
               ,
               by
               three
               or
               fowre
               letters
               together
               ,
               as
               they
               stand
               in
               order
               ,
               so
               as
               
               they
               may
               best
               sound
               in
               the
               childrens
               eares
               ,
               they
               will
               soone
               learne
               to
               say
               all
               the
               letters
               of
               the
               A.
               B.
               C.
               if
               you
               will.
               As
               to
               repeat
               them
               thus
               .
               A.
               b.
               c.
               d.
               e.
               f.
               g.
               h.
               i.
               k.
               l.
               m.
               n.
               o.
               p.
               q.
               r.
               s.
               t.
               u.
               w.
               x.
               y.
               z.
               &
               .
               To
               say
               them
               thus
               by
               roat
               will
               nothing
               hinder
               but
               further
               them
               .
            
             
               Then
               they
               may
               presently
               be
               taught
               to
               know
               the
               letters
               vpon
               the
               booke
               ,
               
               either
               one
               by
               one
               ,
               finding
               first
               which
               is
               a
               ,
               in
               the
               Alphabet
               ;
               and
               after
               in
               any
               other
               place
               .
               Then
               to
               finde
               which
               is
               b
               ,
               and
               so
               through
               all
               the
               rest
               as
               you
               will.
               
            
             
               Then
               when
               they
               are
               cunning
               in
               their
               letters
               ,
               and
               spelling
               ,
               
               if
               you
               make
               them
               to
               vnderstand
               the
               matter
               which
               they
               learne
               ,
               by
               questions
               ,
               for
               a
               little
               at
               the
               first
               ,
               they
               will
               goe
               on
               in
               reading
               ,
               as
               fast
               as
               you
               will
               desire
               .
               The
               easier
               and
               more
               familiar
               the
               matter
               is
               to
               them
               ,
               the
               faster
               they
               learne
               .
            
             
               Thus
               may
               any
               poore
               man
               or
               woman
               enter
               the
               little
               ones
               in
               a
               towne
               together
               ;
               
               and
               make
               an
               honest
               poore
               liuing
               of
               it
               ,
               or
               get
               somwhat
               towards
               helping
               the
               same
               .
               Also
               the
               Parents
               who
               haue
               any
               learning
               ,
               may
               enter
               their
               little
               ones
               playing
               with
               them
               ,
               at
               dinners
               and
               suppers
               ,
               or
               as
               they
               sit
               by
               the
               fire
               ,
               and
               finde
               it
               very
               pleasant
               delight
               .
            
             
               So
               they
               may
               helpe
               to
               gaine
               their
               children
               a
               yeere
               or
               two
               in
               learning
               at
               the
               beginning
               ,
               and
               also
               the
               Grammar
               Schooles
               of
               this
               labour
               and
               hinderance
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               You
               haue
               perswaded
               me
               very
               much
               concerning
               this
               doubt
               also
               .
               Surely
               sir
               howsoeuer
               thus
               may
               seeme
               but
               a
               toye
               ,
               yet
               all
               tender
               parents
               will
               much
               reioice
               in
               it
               ,
               and
               acknowledge
               it
               an
               exceeding
               benefit
               ,
               to
               haue
               their
               children
               so
               entered
               ;
               and
               this
               time
               beeing
               got●en
               in
               the
               beginning
               ,
               will
               bee
               found
               in
               the
               end
               as
               you
               truely
               sayde
               .
               Yet
               there
               is
               another
               matter
               that
               comes
               vnto
               my
               remembraunce
               ,
               about
               which
               I
               haue
               taken
               no
               small
               griefe
               and
               discouragement
               manie
               a
               time
               ,
               concerning
               this
               point
               of
               reading
               English
               .
               I
               will
               mention
               it
               here
               ,
               and
               desire
               your
               iudgement
               how
               to
               redresse
               it
               ,
               although
               it
               might
               happely
               come-in-fitter
               afterwards
               .
            
             
               The
               trouble
               is
               this
               .
               That
               when
               as
               my
               children
               doe
               first
               enter
               into
               Latine
               ,
               manie
               of
               them
               will
               forget
               to
               reade
               
               English
               ,
               
               and
               some
               of
               them
               bee
               worse
               two
               or
               three
               yeeres
               after
               that
               they
               haue
               been
               in
               construction
               ,
               then
               when
               they
               began
               it
               .
            
             
               Now
               if
               you
               could
               teach
               me
               how
               to
               helpe
               this
               likewise
               ,
               that
               they
               might
               as
               well
               goe
               forward
               still
               in
               reading
               English
               as
               in
               Latine
               ,
               I
               should
               account
               this
               a
               very
               great
               benefit
               .
               For
               ,
               some
               of
               their
               Parents
               ,
               who
               vse
               me
               the
               kindliest
               ,
               will
               bee
               at
               mee
               that
               their
               children
               may
               euerie
               daie
               reade
               some
               Chapters
               of
               the
               Bible
               ,
               to
               helpe
               their
               reading
               of
               English.
               Now
               this
               I
               cannot
               possibly
               doe
               ,
               but
               they
               must
               needes
               bee
               hindred
               in
               their
               latine
               ,
               in
               some
               lessons
               or
               necessarie
               exercises
               ;
               and
               eyther
               be
               behinde
               their
               fellowes
               ,
               or
               else
               trouble
               all
               their
               fellowes
               very
               much
               ,
               that
               they
               cannot
               goe
               so
               fast
               forward
               as
               they
               should
               ,
               but
               stay
               for
               these
               readers
               .
               Others
               being
               more
               ignorant
               or
               malitious
               ,
               vpon
               euery
               light
               occasion
               ,
               are
               readie
               to
               rage
               and
               raile
               at
               me
               ,
               for
               that
               their
               children
               as
               they
               say
               ,
               doe
               get
               no
               good
               vnder
               mee
               ,
               but
               are
               worse
               and
               worse
               .
               For
               ,
               wheras
               they
               could
               haue
               read
               English
               perfectly
               (
               it
               may
               be
               )
               when
               they
               came
               to
               mee
               ,
               now
               they
               haue
               forgotten
               to
               do
               it
               .
               Thus
               am
               I
               grieued
               on
               euery
               side
               ,
               and
               vexed
               daily
               ,
               let
               mee
               labour
               neuer
               so
               much
               ,
               and
               spend
               my
               heart
               amongst
               them
               for
               to
               doe
               them
               good
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               Sir
               ,
               herein
               I
               can
               say
               ,
               as
               she
               in
               the
               Poet
               ;
               
                 Haud
                 ignara
                 mali
                 miseris
                 succurrere
                 disco
                 .
              
               For
               I
               haue
               tasted
               deeply
               of
               the
               same
               griefe
               vntill
               verie
               lately
               ,
               within
               this
               yeere
               or
               two
               .
               Yet
               now
               I
               seeme
               to
               my selfe
               ,
               to
               find
               as
               sensible
               and
               continuall
               a
               growth
               amongst
               all
               my
               Schollars
               ,
               in
               their
               English
               tongue
               as
               in
               the
               Latine
               .
               And
               not
               only
               for
               the
               reading
               of
               it
               ,
               but
               also
               for
               vnderstanding
               it
               ,
               and
               abilitie
               to
               vtter
               their
               minde●
               of
               any
               matter
               ,
               wherewith
               they
               are
               acquainted
               ,
               or
               which
               they
               learne
               in
               Latine
               ;
               and
               also
               how
               to
               express
               the
               meaning
               of
               the
               latine
               in
               prop●iety
               ▪
               and
               puritie
               of
               our
               owne
               tongue
               :
               
               so
               that
               I
               am
               quite
               d●●uered
               from
               that
               clamor
               .
            
             
               But
               to
               tell
               you
               what
               I
               thinke
               ,
               wherein
               there
               seemes
               vnto
               mee
               ,
               to
               be
               a
               verie
               maine
               want
               in
               all
               our
               Grammar
               ,
               schooles
               generally
               ,
               or
               in
               the
               most
               of
               them
               ;
               whereof
               
               I
               haue
               heard
               som
               great
               learned
               men
               to
               complain
               ;
               That
               there
               is
               no
               care
               had
               in
               respect
               ,
               to
               train
               vp
               schollars
               so
               ,
               as
               they
               may
               be
               able
               to
               expresse
               their
               minds
               purely
               and
               readily
               in
               our
               owne
               tongue
               ,
               
               and
               to
               increase
               in
               the
               practice
               of
               it
               ,
               as
               well
               as
               in
               the
               Latine
               or
               Greeke
               ;
               whereas
               our
               chiefe
               indeuour
               should
               bee
               for
               it
               ,
               and
               that
               for
               these
               reasons
               .
               
               1.
               
               Because
               that
               language
               which
               all
               sorts
               and
               conditions
               of
               men
               amongst
               vs
               are
               to
               haue
               most
               vse
               of
               ,
               both
               in
               speech
               &
               writing
               ,
               is
               our
               owne
               natiue
               tongue
               .
               2.
               
               The
               purity
               and
               elegancie
               of
               our
               owne
               language
               is
               to
               be
               esteemed
               a
               chiefe
               part
               of
               the
               honour
               of
               our
               nation
               :
               which
               we
               all
               ought
               to
               aduance
               as
               much
               as
               in
               vs
               lieth
               .
               As
               when
               Greece
               and
               Rome
               and
               other
               nations
               haue
               most
               florished
               ,
               their
               languages
               also
               haue
               beene
               most
               pure
               :
               and
               from
               those
               times
               of
               Greece
               &
               Rome
               ,
               wee
               fetch
               our
               chiefest
               patterns
               ,
               for
               the
               learning
               of
               their
               tongues
               .
               3.
               
               Because
               of
               those
               which
               are
               for
               a
               time
               trained
               vp
               in
               schooles
               ,
               there
               are
               very
               fewe
               which
               proceede
               in
               learning
               ,
               in
               comparison
               of
               them
               that
               follow
               other
               callings
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               This
               complaint
               is
               notwithout
               iust
               cause
               :
               
               for
               I
               do
               not
               know
               any
               schoole
               ▪
               wherein
               there
               is
               regard
               had
               hereof
               to
               anie
               purpose
               ;
               notwithstanding
               the
               generall
               necessitie
               and
               vse
               of
               it
               ,
               and
               also
               the
               great
               cōmendation
               which
               it
               brings
               to
               them
               who
               haue
               attained
               it
               :
               but
               I
               thinke
               euery
               minute
               an
               howre
               ,
               vntill
               I
               heare
               this
               of
               you
               ,
               how
               my
               trouble
               &
               shame
               may
               be
               auoided
               ,
               and
               how
               I
               may
               obtaine
               this
               facultie
               to
               direct
               my
               children
               ,
               how
               they
               may
               goe
               thus
               forward
               ,
               not
               onely
               in
               reading
               English
               perfitly
               ,
               but
               also
               in
               the
               proprietie
               ,
               puritie
               and
               copie
               of
               our
               English
               tongue
               ,
               so
               as
               they
               may
               vtter
               their
               mindes
               commendably
               of
               any
               matter
               which
               may
               concerne
               them
               ,
               according
               to
               their
               age
               and
               place
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               I
               will
               but
               name
               the
               meanes
               vnto
               you
               now
               :
               for
               I
               shal
               haue
               occasion
               to
               shew
               them
               all
               more
               particularly
               hereafter
               .
            
             
               Besides
               the
               daily
               vse
               of
               distinct
               reading
               ouer
               their
               English
               parts
               to
               get
               them
               perfectly
               ,
               
               and
               of
               right
               reading
               all
               other
               things
               which
               they
               learn
               in
               latine
               ,
               as
               your self
               do
               know
               ;
               these
               means
               following
               ,
               by
               the
               blessing
               of
               God
               wil
               accōplish
               your
               desire
               .
            
             
             
               1
               The
               continuall
               vse
               of
               the
               bookes
               of
               construing
               of
               Lillies
               rules
               ,
               
               by
               causing
               them
               to
               learne
               to
               construe
               ,
               and
               to
               keepe
               their
               Grammar
               rules
               ,
               onely
               by
               the
               helpe
               of
               those
               translations
               .
               This
               I
               find
               one
               very
               good
               vse
               of
               these
               books
               ,
               besides
               some
               other
               which
               I
               shall
               mention
               after
               .
            
             
               2
               The
               daily
               vse
               ,
               
               and
               practise
               of
               Grammaticall
               translation
               in
               English
               ,
               of
               all
               the
               Schoole
               Authours
               ,
               which
               the
               yonger
               sort
               doe
               learne
               ;
               causing
               them
               each
               day
               out
               of
               those
               to
               construe
               and
               repeate
               ,
               whatsoeuer
               they
               learne
               .
               This
               I
               also
               haue
               proued
               by
               happy
               experience
               ,
               to
               be
               a
               rare
               helpe
               to
               make
               young
               Schollars
               to
               grow
               very
               much
               ,
               both
               in
               English
               and
               Latine
               .
               But
               of
               all
               these
               ,
               for
               the
               manner
               ,
               benefites
               ,
               and
               vse
               of
               them
               ,
               I
               shall
               haue
               occasion
               to
               speake
               at
               large
               .
            
             
               3
               Besides
               these
               ,
               
               they
               would
               haue
               euery
               day
               some
               practice
               of
               writing
               English
               heedily
               ,
               in
               true
               Orthography
               ;
               as
               also
               of
               translating
               into
               English
               ;
               or
               ,
               of
               writing
               Epistles
               ,
               or
               familiar
               Letters
               to
               their
               friends
               ,
               as
               wel
               in
               English
               as
               in
               Latine
               .
               Amongst
               some
               of
               them
               ,
               the
               reporting
               of
               a
               Fable
               in
               English
               ,
               or
               the
               like
               matter
               ,
               trying
               who
               can
               make
               the
               best
               report
               ,
               doth
               much
               further
               them
               in
               this
               .
               And
               generally
               ,
               amongst
               all
               those
               that
               can
               write
               ,
               the
               taking
               of
               notes
               of
               Sermons
               ,
               and
               deliuering
               them
               againe
               ,
               or
               making
               repetitions
               ,
               is
               a
               speciall
               meanes
               .
               Also
               striuing
               to
               expresse
               whatsoeuer
               they
               construe
               ,
               not
               onely
               in
               propriety
               ,
               but
               in
               variety
               of
               the
               finest
               phrase
               ,
               who
               can
               giue
               the
               best
               .
               This
               chiefly
               in
               the
               higher
               fourmes
               :
               So
               reading
               forth
               of
               Latine
               into
               English
               ;
               first
               in
               propriety
               ,
               then
               in
               puritie
               .
               By
               these
               ,
               and
               some
               vse
               of
               the
               History
               of
               the
               Bible
               ,
               and
               the
               like
               ,
               which
               I
               shall
               be
               occasioned
               to
               mention
               after
               ;
               you
               may
               finde
               their
               growth
               ,
               according
               to
               your
               desire
               ,
               and
               much
               aboue
               your
               expectation
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               Vndoubtedly
               sir
               ,
               these
               must
               needs
               be
               very
               auaileable
               ;
               because
               schollars
               may
               haue
               hereby
               ,
               so
               much
               vse
               of
               the
               English
               euery
               daie
               ,
               aboue
               that
               which
               is
               practiced
               in
               anie
               Schoole
               which
               I
               haue
               knowne
               .
               But
               for
               anie
               such
               translations
               of
               the
               Schoole
               Authors
               ,
               I
               haue
               not
               heard
               of
               them
               ,
               
               Onely
               I
               haue
               seen
               the
               bookes
               of
               construing
               Lillies
               rules
               ,
               and
               some
               of
               my
               children
               haue
               them
               ,
               though
               I
               feared
               that
               it
               would
               rather
               make
               them
               idle
               ,
               being
               but
               a
               truants
               booke
               .
               Indeed
               I
               neuer
               conceiued
               so
               much
               of
               them
               as
               you
               say
               :
               I
               shal
               better
               thinke
               of
               the
               vse
               thereof
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               There
               is
               not
               the
               best
               thing
               but
               it
               may
               bee
               abused
               .
               But
               for
               that
               booke
               as
               the
               others
               ,
               I
               shall
               shewe
               and
               proue
               vnto
               you
               the
               cōmodities
               of
               them
               ,
               aboue
               all
               that
               you
               would
               imagine
               .
               
               Experience
               makes
               me
               confident
               :
               Yet
               to
               returne
               vnto
               your selfe
               ,
               concerning
               the
               complaint
               of
               the
               Parents
               ,
               for
               their
               children
               going
               backward
               in
               reading
               English
               ,
               when
               they
               first
               learne
               latine
               ;
               the
               chiefe
               fault
               in
               truth
               is
               in
               the
               Parents
               themselues
               ;
               although
               we
               poore
               schoolemasters
               must
               be
               sure
               to
               beare
               all
               .
               For
               if
               such
               murmuring
               Parents
               ,
               would
               would
               but
               cause
               their
               children
               ,
               euery
               day
               after
               dinner
               or
               supper
               ,
               or
               both
               ,
               to
               reade
               a
               Chapter
               of
               the
               Bible
               ,
               or
               a
               peece
               of
               a
               Chapter
               ,
               as
               leasure
               would
               permit
               ,
               and
               to
               doe
               it
               constantly
               ;
               therby
               to
               shew
               their
               loue
               to
               the
               Lord
               ,
               and
               his
               word
               ,
               and
               their
               desire
               to
               haue
               the
               word
               dwell
               plentifully
               in
               their
               houses
               ,
               to
               haue
               their
               children
               trained
               vp
               in
               it
               ,
               as
               young
               Timothy
               was
               ;
               then
               I
               say
               ,
               this
               complaint
               would
               soon
               be
               at
               an
               end
               :
               for
               they
               should
               either
               seethen
               ,
               their
               children
               to
               increase
               in
               this
               ,
               or
               else
               they
               should
               discerne
               the
               fault
               to
               be
               in
               their
               childrens
               dulnesse
               ,
               and
               not
               in
               our
               neglect
               .
               Notwithstanding
               ,
               sith
               that
               they
               are
               so
               very
               fewe
               of
               whome
               wee
               can
               hope
               ,
               that
               they
               haue
               any
               care
               of
               this
               duetie
               in
               their
               houses
               ,
               in
               respect
               of
               all
               the
               rest
               who
               omit
               it
               ,
               and
               yet
               all
               the
               blame
               must
               surely
               rest
               on
               vs
               ,
               it
               concerneth
               vs
               so
               much
               as
               we
               can
               to
               redresse
               it
               ;
               and
               therefore
               vse
               all
               good
               meanes
               ,
               to
               cut
               off
               all
               occasions
               of
               clamours
               ,
               and
               of
               discrediting
               our selues
               ,
               and
               our
               schooles
               ,
               and
               to
               contend
               for
               the
               greatest
               profiting
               of
               our
               children
               ,
               aswell
               in
               this
               ,
               as
               in
               any
               other
               part
               of
               learning
               ;
               the
               vse
               of
               this
               being
               ,
               as
               we
               heard
               ,
               most
               generall
               and
               perpetuall
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               You
               haue
               directed
               mee
               very
               rightly
               how
               to
               aunswere
               such
               Parents
               :
               now
               I
               shall
               be
               able
               to
               shew
               them
               where
               the
               fault
               is
               ,
               and
               bee
               calling
               vpon
               them
               to
               redresse
               this
               at
               
               home
               .
               I
               shall
               also
               indeuor
               to
               put
               all
               this
               in
               vre
               ,
               and
               more
               as
               you
               make
               the
               particulars
               more
               fully
               known
               vnto
               me
               ;
               and
               as
               I
               shall
               finde
               by
               triall
               the
               fruit
               heereof
               .
               But
               now
               ,
               that
               you
               haue
               thus
               satisfied
               me
               in
               all
               these
               my
               doubts
               ;
               I
               cannot
               but
               demand
               yet
               one
               other
               point
               ,
               wherein
               I
               finde
               another
               great
               want
               ,
               though
               not
               comparable
               to
               the
               former
               ;
               because
               there
               is
               not
               so
               much
               vse
               of
               it
               :
               which
               is
               about
               the
               ordinary
               numbers
               or
               numbring
               .
               For
               I
               am
               much
               troubled
               about
               this
               ,
               that
               my
               readers
               and
               others
               aboue
               them
               ,
               are
               much
               to
               seeke
               in
               all
               matters
               of
               numbers
               ,
               whether
               in
               figures
               or
               in
               letters
               .
               Insomuch
               ,
               as
               whē
               they
               heare
               the
               chapters
               named
               in
               the
               church
               ,
               many
               of
               them
               cannot
               turn
               to
               them
               ,
               much
               less
               to
               the
               verse
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               This
               likewise
               is
               a
               very
               ordinary
               defect
               ,
               
               &
               yet
               might
               easily
               be
               helped
               by
               common
               means
               ,
               in
               an
               howr
               or
               two
               .
               I
               call
               it
               ordinary
               ,
               because
               you
               shall
               haue
               schollars
               ,
               almost
               ready
               to
               goe
               to
               the
               Vniuersity
               ,
               who
               yet
               can
               hardly
               tell
               you
               the
               number
               of
               pages
               ,
               sections
               ,
               chapters
               ,
               or
               other
               diuisions
               in
               their
               books
               ,
               to
               find
               what
               they
               should
               .
               And
               it
               is
               as
               you
               say
               ,
               a
               great
               &
               a
               fowle
               want
               ;
               because
               ,
               without
               the
               perfect
               knowledge
               of
               these
               numbers
               ,
               schollars
               cannot
               help
               themselues
               by
               the
               Indices
               ,
               or
               Tables
               of
               such
               books
               ,
               as
               they
               should
               vse
               ,
               for
               turning
               to
               any
               thing
               of
               a
               sodaine
               :
               although
               it
               be
               a
               matter
               wherof
               they
               should
               haue
               vse
               all
               their
               life
               long
               .
               And
               to
               conclude
               ,
               it
               is
               a
               great
               neglect
               ,
               because
               it
               is
               a
               thing
               so
               easie
               ,
               as
               that
               it
               may
               be
               learned
               in
               so
               short
               a
               time
               ,
               only
               by
               most
               vsuall
               meanes
               ,
               as
               by
               these
               following
               .
               For
               numbers
               by
               letters
               ,
               vse
               but
               only
               to
               appose
               them
               ,
               
               according
               to
               the
               direction
               in
               the
               latine
               Grammar
               at
               Orthographia
               ,
               &
               they
               will
               do
               them
               presently
               .
               As
               if
               you
               aske
               what
               I.
               stands
               for
               ,
               what
               V.
               what
               X.
               what
               L.
               &c.
               
               And
               back
               againe
               ,
               what
               letter
               stands
               for
               one
               ,
               so
               what
               for
               fiue
               ,
               or
               forten
               .
               But
               specially
               if
               you
               desire
               to
               haue
               them
               very
               ready
               herein
               ,
               cause
               them
               to
               haue
               these
               written
               ,
               &
               then
               to
               practice
               to
               read
               them
               ouer
               often
               ,
               vntil
               that
               they
               can
               answer
               any
               of
               them
               perfectly
               .
               Warn
               them
               also
               to
               remember
               alwaies
               ▪
               that
               any
               number
               set
               after
               a
               greater
               ,
               or
               after
               the
               same
               nūber
               ,
               doth
               add
               so
               many
               mo
               ,
               as
               the
               value
               of
               that
               later
               nūber
               is
               .
               As
               ,
               I.
               set
               after
               X.
               thus
               ,
               XI
               .
               doth
               make
               eleuen
               .
               XV.
               fifteen
               ▪
               
               XX.
               twentie
               .
               But
               being
               set
               before
               ,
               they
               doe
               take
               away
               so
               ▪
               many
               as
               they
               are
               :
               as
               I.
               before
               X.
               thus
               ,
               IX
               .
               nine
               .
            
             
               If
               you
               wish
               an
               example
               more
               at
               large
               this
               may
               serue
               ;
               let
               each
               of
               them
               that
               should
               learne
               haue
               a
               briefe
               of
               these
               ,
               after
               this
               maner
               ,
               to
               shew
               them
               all
               the
               chiefe
               numbers
               .
               I.
               one
               ,
               II.
               two
               ,
               III.
               three
               ,
               IIII.
               or
               IV.
               fowre
               ,
               V.
               fiue
               ,
               VI.
               six
               ,
               VII
               .
               seauen
               ,
               VIII
               .
               eight
               ,
               IX
               .
               nine
               ,
               X.
               tenne
               ,
               XI
               .
               eleuen
               ▪
               XII
               .
               twelue
               ,
               XIII
               .
               thirteene
               ,
               XIIII
               .
               fourteene
               ,
               XV.
               fifteene
               ,
               XVI
               .
               XVII
               .
               XVIII
               .
               XIX
               .
               XX.
               XXI
               .
               XXV
               .
               twenty
               fiue
               ,
               XXX
               .
               thirtie
               ,
               XL.
               fortie
               ,
               L
               fifty
               ,
               XC
               .
               ninetie
               ,
               C.
               a
               hundreth
               ,
               D.
               fiue
               hundreth
               ,
               M.
               a
               thousand
               .
               And
               thus
               much
               shortly
               for
               numbring
               by
               letters
               .
            
             
               For
               the
               numbers
               by
               figures
               ,
               
               this
               rule
               must
               also
               be
               obserued
               ;
               That
               the
               figures
               do
               signifie
               in
               the
               first
               place
               so
               much
               o●ly
               ,
               as
               if
               they
               were
               alone
               ,
               or
               one
               time
               so
               many
               .
               In
               the
               2.
               place
               tennes
               ,
               or
               tenne
               times
               so
               many
               .
               In
               the
               third
               place
               ,
               hundreths
               ,
               or
               a
               hundreth
               times
               so
               many
               .
               In
               the
               fourth
               place
               thousands
               ,
               or
               a
               thousand
               times
               so
               many
               .
               In
               the
               fift
               place
               ten
               thousands
               .
               In
               the
               sixt
               place
               hundreth
               thousands
               ;
               the
               places
               being
               reconed
               from
               the
               right
               hand
               to
               the
               le●t
               .
               As
               for
               example
               ,
               1.
               2.
               3.
               4.
               5.
               6.
               7.
               8.
               9.
               10.
               11.
               12.
               13.
               14.
               15.
               16.
               17.
               18.
               19.
               20.
               twentie
               .
               21.
               22.
               23.
               
               &c.
               30.
               thirtie
               .
               31.
               32.
               40.
               fortie
               ,
               41.
               &c.
               50.
               fiftie
               51.
               60.
               sixtie
               ,
               70.
               seauentie
               .
               80.
               eighty
               .
               90.
               ninetie
               100.
               a
               hundreth
               .
               101.
               a
               hundreth
               &
               one
               ,
               102.
               110.
               
               a
               hundreth
               and
               ten
               .
               120.
               a
               hundreth
               &
               twenty
               .
               130
               ,
               &c.
               200.
               two
               hundreth
               ,
               &c.
               
               1000.
               a
               thousand
               .
               10000.
               ten
               thousand
               .
               100000.
               a
               hundreth
               thousand
               .
            
             
               These
               beeing
               learned
               backewards
               and
               forwards
               ,
               so
               that
               your
               schollar
               be
               able
               to
               know
               each
               of
               them
               ,
               to
               call
               them
               or
               name
               them
               right
               ,
               &
               to
               find
               them
               out
               ,
               as
               the
               child
               should
               finde
               any
               letter
               which
               he
               is
               to
               learne
               :
               in
               a
               word
               ,
               to
               tell
               what
               any
               of
               these
               numbers
               stand
               for
               ,
               or
               how
               to
               set
               downe
               any
               of
               them
               ;
               will
               performe
               fully
               so
               much
               as
               is
               needfull
               for
               your
               ordinarie
               Grammar
               schollar
               .
               If
               you
               do
               require
               more
               for
               any
               ;
               you
               must
               seeke
               Records
               Arithmetique
               ,
               or
               other
               like
               Authors
               and
               set
               them
               to
               the
               Cyphering
               schoole
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               This
               is
               a
               defect
               that
               I
               see
               is
               most
               easily
               supplyed
               
               by
               a
               very
               little
               paine
               and
               care
               in
               examining
               .
               I
               haue
               troubled
               you
               ouerlong
               in
               this
               ,
               beeing
               in
               it selfe
               so
               very
               a
               trifle
               ,
               though
               the
               want
               generally
               be
               to
               bee
               blamed
               .
               Now
               therefore
               let
               vs
               hasten
               vnto
               our
               profession
               for
               the
               Grammar
               Schoolemaster
               .
               For
               I
               desire
               earnestly
               to
               be
               in
               our
               owne
               element
               ,
               as
               more
               befitting
               and
               beseeming
               our
               place
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               I
               am
               very
               willing
               to
               make
               all
               the
               haste
               that
               we
               can
               :
               
               for
               this
               I
               see
               ,
               that
               though
               wee
               neither
               vse
               digressions
               ,
               nor
               needlesse
               words
               ;
               yet
               this
               our
               conference
               will
               proue
               verie
               long
               ,
               before
               that
               I
               can
               make
               my
               mind
               plain
               vnto
               you
               .
               Vnlesse
               I
               should
               be
               so
               short
               ,
               as
               either
               to
               be
               obscure
               ,
               or
               to
               omit
               many
               things
               which
               I
               take
               to
               be
               very
               necessarie
               :
               But
               yet
               before
               we
               come
               to
               make
               entrance
               into
               the
               Latine
               ,
               if
               we
               doe
               keepe
               order
               ,
               wee
               are
               to
               goe
               through
               the
               way
               of
               writing
               ,
               as
               being
               more
               generall
               ,
               and
               which
               chiefly
               appertaineth
               also
               to
               our
               English
               tongue
               ;
               in
               respect
               of
               our
               more
               frequent
               vse
               of
               it
               :
               I
               meane
               chiefely
               for
               the
               writing
               of
               our
               ordinarie
               hand
               called
               the
               Secretarie
               hand
               ,
               which
               is
               almost
               wholly
               in
               vse
               amongst
               vs.
               
            
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             IIII.
             
          
           
             How
             the
             Master
             may
             direct
             his
             Schollars
             to
             write
             verie
             faire
             ,
             though
             himselfe
             be
             no
             good
             Pen-man
             .
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               TO
               come
               therfore
               vnto
               writing
               ,
               
               and
               the
               manner
               of
               teaching
               it
               ;
               That
               which
               you
               affirm
               may
               be
               done
               herein
               ,
               cannot
               but
               bee
               a
               very
               great
               benefit
               ,
               and
               a
               notable
               grace
               to
               schooles
               ,
               and
               also
               to
               all
               learning
               ,
               if
               it
               can
               be
               so
               effected
               .
               That
               all
               Schollars
               in
               generall
               ,
               may
               be
               directed
               to
               write
               cōmendably
               ,
               and
               a
               great
               part
               of
               them
               which
               are
               more
               apt
               to
               write
               very
               faire
               ;
               and
               that
               in
               the
               seuerall
               
               hands
               of
               the
               learned
               tongues
               ,
               as
               they
               doe
               proceed
               in
               euery
               one
               of
               them
               .
               For
               many
               of
               the
               best
               Schollars
               ,
               haue
               beene
               wont
               to
               write
               very
               ill
               ;
               
               in
               so
               much
               ,
               as
               it
               hath
               beene
               a
               receiued
               opinion
               ,
               as
               you
               know
               ,
               amongst
               very
               many
               ,
               That
               a
               good
               Schollar
               can
               hardly
               be
               a
               good
               pen-man
               .
               Moreouer
               you
               shall
               finde
               very
               fewe
               good
               writers
               in
               Grammar
               Schooles
               ;
               vnlesse
               eyther
               they
               haue
               been
               taught
               by
               Scriueners
               ,
               or
               be
               themselues
               maruellous
               apt
               hereunto
               ,
               and
               very
               rare
               ,
               or
               where
               the
               Master
               doth
               apply
               himself
               chiefly
               to
               teach
               to
               write
               .
            
             
               The
               want
               of
               this
               ,
               hath
               bin
               another
               part
               of
               my
               griefe
               :
               for
               besides
               the
               complaint
               and
               grudging
               of
               the
               Parents
               ;
               
               I
               haue
               also
               seen
               ,
               after
               they
               haue
               bin
               a
               great
               while
               with
               me
               ,
               that
               they
               haue
               not
               bin
               able
               to
               write
               so
               ,
               as
               to
               be
               fit
               for
               any
               trade
               ;
               but
               they
               must
               after
               be
               set
               to
               learne
               of
               the
               Scriuener
               :
               much
               lesse
               haue
               they
               bin
               able
               to
               write
               a
               letter
               to
               their
               friends
               ,
               or
               to
               perform
               any
               such
               business
               with
               their
               pen
               ,
               in
               any
               commendable
               maner
               .
               You
               shall
               therefore
               do
               me
               no
               lesse
               a
               pleasure
               ,
               then
               in
               the
               former
               ,
               if
               you
               can
               direct
               me
               ,
               how
               to
               help
               all
               these
               euils
               ,
               and
               to
               attaine
               to
               that
               dexterity
               ,
               whereof
               you
               speake
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               I
               hope
               to
               satisfie
               you
               herein
               also
               .
               But
               first
               relate
               vnto
               me
               ,
               what
               courses
               yourselfe
               haue
               taken
               ,
               to
               teach
               your
               Schollars
               to
               write
               ;
               whereof
               you
               haue
               found
               so
               little
               profit
               :
               and
               after
               I
               shall
               adde
               ,
               as
               in
               the
               former
               ,
               what
               I
               haue
               learned
               ,
               to
               the
               better
               effecting
               hereof
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               Surely
               I
               haue
               done
               this
               :
               
               I
               haue
               daily
               set
               them
               copies
               ,
               so
               well
               as
               I
               could
               ;
               which
               hath
               bin
               no
               small
               toile
               vnto
               me
               :
               or
               else
               I
               haue
               caused
               some
               of
               my
               Schollars
               ,
               or
               some
               others
               to
               doe
               it
               .
               Also
               I
               haue
               made
               them
               now
               &
               then
               to
               write
               some
               copies
               ;
               and
               it
               may
               be
               ,
               I
               haue
               corrected
               them
               for
               writing
               so
               badly
               ,
               or
               guided
               some
               of
               their
               hands
               ,
               or
               shewed
               them
               how
               to
               amend
               their
               letters
               .
               This
               I
               take
               to
               be
               the
               most
               that
               is
               done
               in
               Schooles
               ordinarily
               ;
               vnlesse
               any
               doe
               procure
               Scriueners
               ,
               to
               teach
               in
               their
               townes
               :
               whereof
               we
               finde
               no
               small
               inconueniences
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               I
               take
               it
               to
               be
               as
               you
               say
               ,
               that
               this
               is
               all
               which
               is
               done
               in
               most
               Schooles
               :
               and
               hence
               so
               many
               of
               vs
               haue
               experience
               ,
               
               of
               the
               like
               murmurings
               against
               vs.
               Now
               I
               will
               let
               you
               see
               plainly
               and
               as
               familiarly
               as
               I
               can
               ,
               how
               to
               helpe
               this
               euill
               ,
               and
               to
               attaine
               this
               so
               great
               a
               benefit
               .
            
             
               1.
               
               The
               Schollar
               should
               be
               set
               to
               write
               ,
               
               when
               he
               enters
               into
               his
               Accidence
               ;
               so
               euery
               day
               to
               spend
               an
               houre
               in
               writing
               ,
               or
               very
               neere
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               There
               must
               be
               speciall
               care
               ,
               
               that
               euery
               one
               who
               is
               to
               write
               ,
               haue
               all
               necessaries
               belonging
               thereunto
               ;
               as
               penne
               ,
               inke
               ,
               paper
               ,
               rular
               ,
               plummet
               ,
               ruling-pen
               ,
               pen-knife
               ,
               &c.
               
            
             
               3.
               
               The
               like
               care
               must
               be
               ,
               
               that
               their
               inke
               be
               thin
               ,
               blacke
               ,
               cleere
               ;
               which
               wil
               not
               run
               abroad
               ,
               nor
               blot
               :
               their
               paper
               good
               ;
               that
               is
               ,
               such
               as
               is
               white
               ,
               smooth
               ,
               and
               which
               will
               beare
               inke
               ,
               &
               also
               that
               it
               be
               made
               in
               a
               book
               .
               
               Their
               writing
               books
               would
               be
               kept
               faire
               strait
               ruled
               ,
               &
               each
               to
               haue
               a
               blotting
               paper
               to
               keep
               their
               books
               for̄
               soyling
               ,
               or
               marring
               vnder
               their
               hands
               .
            
             
               4.
               
               Cause
               euery
               one
               of
               them
               to
               make
               his
               own
               pen
               ;
               otherwise
               the
               making
               ,
               
               and
               mending
               of
               pens
               ,
               will
               be
               a
               very
               great
               hinderance
               ,
               both
               to
               the
               Masters
               and
               to
               the
               Schollars
               .
               Besides
               that
               ,
               when
               they
               are
               away
               from
               their
               Masters
               (
               if
               they
               haue
               not
               a
               good
               pen
               made
               before
               )
               they
               wil
               write
               naught
               ;
               because
               they
               know
               not
               how
               to
               make
               their
               pens
               themselues
               .
            
             
               The
               best
               manner
               of
               making
               the
               pen
               ,
               
               is
               thus
               :
            
             
               1.
               
               Choose
               the
               quil
               of
               the
               best
               and
               strongest
               of
               the
               wing
               ,
               which
               is
               somewhat
               harder
               ,
               and
               will
               cleaue
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               Make
               it
               cleane
               with
               the
               backe
               of
               the
               pen-knife
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               Cleaue
               it
               strait
               vp
               the
               backe
               ;
               first
               with
               a
               cleft
               ,
               
               made
               with
               your
               pen-knife
               :
               after
               with
               another
               quill
               put
               into
               it
               ,
               riue
               it
               further
               by
               little
               and
               little
               ,
               till
               you
               see
               the
               cleft
               to
               be
               very
               cleane
               :
               so
               you
               may
               make
               your
               pen
               of
               the
               best
               of
               the
               quil
               ,
               &
               where
               you
               see
               the
               cleft
               to
               be
               the
               cleanest
               ,
               &
               without
               teeth
               .
               If
               it
               doe
               not
               cleaue
               without
               teeth
               ,
               cleaue
               it
               with
               your
               pen-knife
               in
               another
               place
               ,
               still
               neerer
               the
               backe
               :
               for
               if
               it
               be
               nor
               strait
               vp
               the
               backe
               ,
               it
               will
               very
               seldome
               run
               right
               .
               After
               ,
               make
               the
               nebbe
               and
               cleft
               both
               about
               one
               length
               ,
               somewhat
               aboue
               a
               barley
               corne
               breadth
               ,
               &
               small
               ;
               so
               as
               it
               may
               let
               downe
               the
               inke
               ,
               
               and
               write
               cleane
               .
               Cut
               the
               nebbe
               first
               slant
               downewards
               to
               make
               it
               thinne
               ,
               and
               after
               strait
               
               ouerthwart
               .
               Make
               both
               sides
               of
               equall
               bignesse
               ,
               vnlesse
               you
               bee
               conning
               to
               cut
               that
               side
               ,
               which
               lieth
               vpon
               the
               long
               finger
               ,
               thinner
               and
               shorter
               ;
               yet
               so
               little
               ,
               as
               the
               difference
               can
               hardly
               be
               discerned
               .
               But
               both
               of
               equall
               length
               is
               accounted
               the
               surest
               .
            
             
               The
               speediest
               and
               surest
               way
               to
               learne
               to
               make
               the
               pen
               ,
               
               is
               this
               .
               When
               your
               Shollar
               shall
               naue
               a
               good
               pen
               fit
               for
               his
               hand
               ,
               and
               well
               fashioned
               ;
               then
               to
               viewe
               and
               mark
               that
               well
               ,
               and
               to
               trie
               to
               make
               one
               in
               all
               things
               like
               vnto
               it
               .
               It
               were
               good
               for
               the
               learner
               to
               procure
               such
               a
               penne
               made
               ,
               and
               to
               keepe
               it
               for
               a
               patterne
               ,
               to
               make
               others
               by
               vntill
               he
               be
               very
               perfect
               in
               it
               .
               A
               childe
               may
               soone
               learne
               to
               make
               his
               pen
               ;
               yet
               ,
               fewe
               of
               age
               do
               know
               how
               to
               make
               their
               owne
               pennes
               well
               ,
               although
               they
               haue
               written
               long
               and
               very
               much
               :
               neither
               can
               any
               attaine
               to
               write
               faire
               without
               that
               skill
               .
            
             
               Next
               vnto
               this
               ,
               
               cause
               your
               schollar
               to
               holde
               his
               penne
               right
               ,
               as
               neere
               vnto
               the
               nebbe
               as
               hee
               can
               ,
               his
               thumbe
               and
               two
               fore-fingers
               ,
               almost
               closed
               together
               ,
               round
               about
               the
               neb
               ,
               like
               vnto
               a
               cats
               foote
               ,
               as
               some
               of
               the
               Scriueners
               doe
               terme
               it
               .
            
             
               Then
               let
               him
               learne
               to
               carry
               his
               pen
               as
               lightly
               as
               he
               can
               ,
               
               to
               glide
               or
               swimme
               vpon
               the
               paper
               .
               So
               hee
               shall
               write
               the
               cleanest
               ,
               fayrest
               ,
               and
               fastest
               ,
               and
               also
               his
               pen
               shall
               last
               the
               longe
               .
            
             
               Insteede
               of
               setting
               of
               copies
               and
               to
               saue
               that
               endlesse
               toyle
               ,
               
               let
               euery
               one
               haue
               a
               little
               copie
               booke
               fastened
               to
               the
               top
               of
               his
               writing
               booke
               ,
               with
               a
               strong
               thread
               of
               a
               spanne
               long
               ,
               or
               thereabout
               ;
               that
               alwaies
               when
               he
               writeth
               ,
               he
               may
               lay
               his
               copie
               booke
               close
               before
               him
               ,
               and
               that
               the
               side
               of
               the
               copie
               ,
               may
               almost
               touch
               the
               line
               where
               he
               writeth
               ,
               that
               his
               eye
               may
               be
               vpon
               the
               copie
               ,
               and
               vpon
               his
               letter
               both
               together
               .
               And
               also
               ,
               to
               the
               end
               that
               euer
               when
               he
               hath
               done
               writing
               ,
               he
               may
               put
               his
               copie
               booke
               into
               his
               writing
               booke
               againe
               ;
               so
               that
               the
               copie
               may
               neuer
               bee
               out
               of
               the
               waie
               ,
               nor
               the
               Schollar
               write
               without
               it
               .
            
             
               The
               fittest
               volume
               for
               their
               writing
               a
               booke
               is
               ,
               to
               haue
               them
               in
               quarto
               .
            
             
             
               Moreouer
               ,
               the
               copie
               bookes
               would
               be
               made
               thus
               .
               
               Not
               aboue
               two
               inches
               in
               bredth
               ;
               fowre
               or
               six
               copies
               in
               a
               booke
               ,
               halfe
               secretarie
               ,
               halfe
               Roman
               .
               The
               copie
               bookes
               might
               be
               made
               thus
               most
               fitly
               as
               I
               take
               it
               .
            
             
               1
               One
               line
               of
               small
               letters
               ,
               of
               each
               letter
               one
               ,
               except
               in
               those
               which
               haue
               letters
               of
               diuers
               kinds
               ,
               and
               therin
               both
               kinds
               to
               be
               set
               downe
               :
               as
               i.
               j.
               s.
               8.
               u
               ,
               v.
               
            
             
               Vnder
               the
               line
               of
               small
               letters
               ,
               would
               be
               set
               a
               line
               of
               great
               letters
               ,
               after
               the
               same
               manner
               ;
               and
               vnder
               them
               both
               a
               line
               or
               two
               of
               ioyning
               hand
               ,
               containing
               all
               the
               letters
               in
               them
               .
            
             
               Examples
               of
               both
               sorts
               for
               the
               present
               vntill
               better
               can
               bee
               found
               may
               be
               these
               .
               I
               meane
               copies
               both
               of
               Secretary
               and
               Roman
               ,
               containing
               all
               the
               letters
               in
               them
               .
            
             
               For
               Secretary
               thus
               :
            
             
               Exercise
               thy selfe
               much
               in
               Gods
               booke
               ,
               
               with
               zealous
               and
               feruent
               prayers
               and
               requests
               .
            
             
               For
               Roman
               thus
               :
            
             
               Aequore
               cur
               gelido
               zephyrus
               fert
               xenia
               kymbis
               ?
            
             
               Respect
               not
               the
               verse
               ,
               but
               the
               vse
               .
            
             
               Vnder
               all
               these
               ,
               may
               be
               fitly
               set
               in
               very
               little
               room
               those
               characters
               or
               letters
               ,
               out
               of
               which
               all
               the
               rest
               of
               the
               letters
               may
               be
               framed
               :
               as
               in
               the
               small
               letters
               in
               Secretarie
               ,
               m.
               i.
               t.
               v.
               z.
               s.
               In
               the
               great
               letters
               ,
               〈◊〉
               .
               So
               vnder
               the
               Roman
               copies
               after
               the
               same
               manner
               .
            
             
               In
               the
               end
               of
               the
               copie
               bookes
               ,
               in
               a
               page
               or
               two
               ,
               might
               be
               set
               down
               all
               the
               hard
               syllables
               mentioned
               before
               .
               
               That
               by
               oft
               writing
               them
               ouer
               they
               might
               be
               helped
               to
               spel
               ,
               &
               to
               write
               true
               Orthographie
               .
               And
               after
               those
               ,
               the
               numbers
               mentioned
               ,
               to
               be
               able
               to
               write
               or
               totel
               any
               of
               them
               vpō
               the
               book
               without
               it
               .
               Then
               what
               schollar
               so
               euer
               were
               not
               able
               to
               tell
               any
               of
               them
               ,
               after
               a
               little
               poasing
               ,
               
               were
               well
               worthy
               to
               be
               corrected
               .
               If
               such
               copie
               books
               were
               finely
               printed
               ,
               being
               grauen
               by
               som
               cunning
               workman
               ,
               &
               those
               of
               the
               most
               perfect
               and
               plaine
               forms
               of
               letters
               ,
               that
               could
               possibly
               be
               procured
               ,
               in
               a
               strong
               and
               very
               white
               paper
               ,
               one
               book
               or
               two
               of
               them
               would
               serue
               a
               schollar
               neere
               all
               his
               time
               ,
               that
               hee
               should
               neuer
               need
               to
               change
               his
               hand
               .
            
             
             
               The
               often
               change
               &
               following
               of
               diuerse
               hands
               ,
               
               doth
               asmuch
               hinder
               writing
               ,
               as
               often
               change
               of
               schoolemasters
               doth
               hinder
               learning
               .
               Therfore
               ,
               the
               best
               is
               to
               be
               chosen
               at
               the
               first
               ,
               and
               euer
               to
               be
               stucke
               vnto
               without
               alteration
               ,
               if
               it
               may
               be
               .
            
             
               In
               the
               meane
               time
               ,
               
               vntill
               such
               copies
               can
               be
               had
               ,
               some
               would
               be
               procured
               of
               the
               master
               ,
               to
               be
               written
               by
               the
               best
               Scriuener
               who
               can
               be
               gotten
               ,
               after
               the
               manner
               aforesayde
               ,
               for
               each
               schollar
               to
               haue
               one
               to
               fasten
               to
               his
               booke
               ,
               and
               to
               vse
               as
               before
               .
            
             
               Otherwise
               when
               for
               lacke
               heereof
               ,
               
               the
               Master
               ,
               or
               Vsher
               ,
               or
               some
               other
               Schollar
               is
               compelled
               euery
               day
               ,
               to
               write
               each
               schollar
               a
               new
               copy
               ;
               it
               is
               both
               an
               endlesse
               toile
               ,
               and
               also
               an
               extreame
               losse
               of
               time
               :
               besides
               the
               inconuenience
               mentioned
               ,
               of
               change
               of
               hands
               ,
               and
               that
               few
               Masters
               or
               Vshers
               are
               fit
               pen
               men
               ,
               to
               write
               such
               copies
               as
               were
               necessary
               .
            
             
               Lastly
               ,
               because
               thorough
               want
               of
               such
               copies
               ,
               schollars
               do
               write
               ordinarily
               without
               direction
               or
               pattern
               ,
               in
               all
               their
               exercises
               ;
               whereby
               they
               either
               grow
               to
               very
               bad
               hands
               ,
               or
               do
               profit
               in
               writing
               ,
               
               little
               or
               not
               at
               all
               .
            
             
               This
               exercise
               of
               writing
               faire
               ,
               would
               be
               practiced
               by
               all
               the
               Schollars
               thorow
               the
               Schoole
               ,
               at
               least
               once
               everie
               day
               ,
               for
               an
               howres
               space
               or
               neere
               ;
               and
               that
               about
               one
               of
               the
               clocke
               :
               for
               then
               commonly
               their
               hands
               are
               warmest
               and
               nimblest
               .
            
             
               Now
               those
               that
               write
               exercises
               ,
               may
               take
               the
               opportunitie
               of
               that
               time
               ,
               
               to
               write
               them
               so
               faire
               as
               they
               can
               .
            
             
               In
               al
               writing
               this
               general
               rule
               would
               be
               obserued
               streightly
               ,
               to
               cause
               them
               to
               striue
               to
               make
               euerie
               letter
               ,
               as
               like
               to
               the
               copie
               letter
               in
               all
               proportion
               ,
               as
               the
               one
               hand
               is
               to
               the
               other
               .
               And
               that
               they
               neuer
               thinke
               a
               letter
               good
               ,
               vntill
               no
               difference
               can
               bee
               found
               betweene
               it
               and
               the
               copie
               letter
               ;
               
               that
               it
               cannot
               be
               discerned
               whether
               is
               the
               better
               .
            
             
               Great
               care
               would
               bee
               had
               withall
               ,
               to
               make
               euery
               writer
               to
               keepe
               euen
               compasse
               in
               the
               height
               ,
               greatnesse
               ,
               and
               breadth
               of
               his
               letters
               ;
               that
               no
               one
               letter
               stand
               either
               
               too
               high
               or
               too
               lowe
               ,
               be
               ouer
               long
               ,
               or
               ouer
               short
               ,
               nor
               anie
               way
               too
               bigge
               ,
               or
               too
               little
               ,
               too
               wide
               ,
               or
               too
               narrow
               .
            
             
               To
               the
               end
               ,
               
               that
               they
               may
               write
               of
               euen
               height
               ;
               cause
               them
               to
               rule
               their
               bookes
               with
               a
               ruling
               pen
               ,
               and
               then
               that
               they
               make
               the
               body
               of
               each
               letter
               ,
               to
               touch
               their
               rules
               on
               both
               sides
               ,
               I
               meane
               both
               at
               the
               tops
               and
               bottomes
               of
               the
               letters
               ;
               but
               not
               to
               go
               one
               hair
               bredth
               higher
               or
               lower
               .
               Thus
               by
               practice
               the
               schollar
               will
               in
               time
               attaine
               to
               write
               very
               faire
               of
               himselfe
               without
               any
               ruling
               pen.
               
            
             
               That
               euery
               one
               may
               rule
               their
               bookes
               thus
               ,
               
               cause
               them
               to
               haue
               each
               his
               ruling
               pen
               ,
               made
               of
               a
               quill
               ,
               somwhat
               like
               vnto
               a
               pen
               ;
               but
               onely
               that
               it
               is
               to
               be
               made
               with
               a
               nocke
               in
               the
               neb
               or
               point
               of
               it
               ,
               like
               the
               nocke
               of
               an
               arrow
               ,
               the
               nebs
               of
               the
               nocke
               standing
               iust
               of
               the
               bredth
               of
               their
               copie
               letters
               asunder
               ,
               that
               they
               may
               rule
               their
               rules
               meete
               of
               the
               same
               compasse
               with
               their
               copies
               .
            
             
               The
               points
               of
               the
               nebs
               of
               the
               ruling
               pennes
               ,
               
               must
               not
               be
               made
               ouer
               sharpe
               ,
               nor
               pressed
               downe
               ouer
               hard
               in
               ruling
               ;
               because
               they
               wil
               then
               race
               the
               paper
               ,
               and
               make
               it
               that
               it
               will
               not
               beare
               inke
               .
               They
               are
               moreouer
               to
               rule
               but
               a
               few
               lines
               at
               once
               :
               because
               the
               lines
               being
               drawen
               but
               lightly
               ,
               will
               soone
               go
               out
               ,
               and
               not
               be
               seene
               before
               that
               the
               learners
               come
               to
               write
               in
               them
               .
            
             
               Also
               this
               care
               must
               be
               had
               in
               ruling
               ,
               to
               cary
               the
               ruling
               pen
               so
               euen
               and
               straight
               forward
               ,
               
               that
               both
               the
               lines
               which
               are
               drawen
               by
               it
               ,
               may
               be
               seene
               together
               ;
               or
               els
               to
               drawe
               the
               lines
               so
               oft
               ouer
               with
               the
               same
               ,
               vntil
               that
               both
               the
               lines
               may
               be
               well
               seene
               .
               
               This
               would
               be
               obserued
               carefully
               ,
               vntill
               that
               time
               that
               they
               can
               begin
               to
               write
               euen
               &
               streight
               of
               themselues
               :
               for
               the
               euen
               compasse
               doth
               especially
               grace
               a
               hand
               ,
               and
               the
               faire
               shew
               of
               it
               will
               cause
               children
               to
               take
               a
               delight
               in
               writing
               faire
               .
            
             
               Euery
               schollar
               who
               writeth
               Latine
               should
               haue
               two
               of
               these
               ruling
               pens
               :
               one
               for
               Secretarie
               ,
               and
               an
               other
               for
               Roman
               ;
               or
               else
               to
               haue
               one
               made
               of
               iron
               or
               brass
               ,
               the
               one
               end
               for
               the
               one
               ,
               the
               other
               end
               for
               the
               other
               .
            
             
               Moreouer
               ,
               the
               bookes
               of
               all
               the
               new
               beginners
               or
               enterers
               ,
               
               whilst
               they
               write
               letters
               ,
               would
               be
               ruled
               wel
               with
               crosse
               lines
               ,
               with
               the
               ruling
               pens
               on
               this
               manner
               :
               It
               is
               found
               to
               direct
               them
               very
               much
               .
               
            
             
             
               Thus
               their
               bookes
               shall
               be
               kept
               faire
               .
               
               The
               compasse
               or
               the
               space
               within
               the
               crosse
               lines
               ,
               serues
               to
               keep
               &
               guide
               the
               body
               of
               each
               letter
               to
               make
               it
               of
               a
               iust
               proportion
               .
               The
               straight
               lines
               direct
               and
               guide
               the
               childe
               to
               make
               euery
               stroke
               straight
               forward
               ,
               or
               vp
               and
               downe
               ,
               and
               also
               how
               to
               frame
               the
               head
               and
               taile
               of
               each
               letter
               .
            
             
               Thus
               much
               for
               the
               compasse
               of
               the
               letters
               ;
               
               chiefly
               in
               the
               tops
               and
               bottoms
               of
               the
               letters
               .
            
             
               Now
               that
               the
               letters
               may
               not
               be
               ouer
               bigge
               or
               ouer
               little
               ,
               set
               too
               neere
               one
               another
               or
               far
               off
               ,
               this
               may
               bee
               one
               good
               direction
               ;
            
             
               Cause
               your
               schollar
               to
               drawe
               his
               lines
               ,
               on
               which
               hee
               wil
               write
               his
               copies
               ,
               of
               the
               very
               same
               length
               with
               the
               length
               of
               the
               line
               of
               his
               copie
               :
               and
               then
               if
               he
               write
               iust
               so
               much
               in
               his
               line
               as
               is
               in
               the
               copie
               ,
               it
               is
               very
               like
               that
               he
               makes
               his
               letters
               of
               a
               good
               proportion
               ,
               not
               too
               bigge
               nor
               too
               little
               ,
               and
               the
               compasse
               euen
               ,
               not
               one
               ouer
               neere
               ,
               or
               far
               off
               from
               an
               other
               .
               But
               if
               hee
               write
               more
               in
               a
               shorter
               space
               ,
               then
               is
               in
               like
               space
               in
               the
               copie
               ,
               he
               either
               makes
               his
               letters
               too
               little
               ,
               or
               sets
               them
               too
               neere
               one
               another
               ;
               letters
               ,
               or
               words
               ,
               or
               both
               .
               And
               so
               on
               the
               other
               side
               ,
               if
               he
               write
               lesse
               in
               a
               line
               ,
               then
               is
               in
               his
               copie
               in
               the
               same
               space
               ,
               and
               length
               ,
               then
               hee
               makes
               his
               letters
               too
               bigge
               ,
               or
               too
               wide
               asunder
               .
            
             
               The
               letters
               would
               bee
               ioined
               in
               euery
               word
               :
               yet
               so
               as
               no
               one
               be
               set
               ouer
               neere
               another
               ,
               but
               iust
               as
               the
               copie
               ,
               obseruing
               
               blacks
               and
               whites
               ,
               as
               the
               Scriuener
               tearmeth
               them
               .
               And
               each
               word
               in
               a
               sentence
               ,
               would
               be
               set
               about
               the
               bredth
               of
               an
               a
               ,
               or
               an
               o
               ,
               from
               one
               another
               .
            
             
               For
               writing
               straight
               without
               lines
               (
               after
               that
               they
               haue
               practiced
               this
               a
               good
               while
               ,
               
               to
               write
               with
               double
               lines
               ,
               ruled
               with
               the
               ruling
               pen
               ,
               and
               after
               with
               single
               lines
               )
               this
               may
               helpe
               to
               guide
               them
               wel
               ;
               
               to
               cause
               them
               to
               hold
               their
               elbow
               so
               close
               to
               their
               side
               and
               so
               steadily
               ,
               as
               they
               can
               conueniently
               :
               for
               the
               elbow
               so
               stayd
               ,
               will
               guide
               the
               hand
               as
               a
               rule
               ,
               especially
               in
               writing
               fast
               .
               Afterwards
               ,
               looking
               at
               the
               end
               of
               the
               line
               ,
               as
               we
               vse
               to
               trie
               the
               straightnes
               of
               an
               arrowe
               ,
               they
               shal
               see
               easily
               where
               it
               is
               crooked
               .
               Practice
               wil
               bring
               facility
            
             
               These
               also
               may
               bee
               speciall
               furtherances
               for
               the
               first
               enterers
               :
               
               When
               the
               young
               schollar
               cannot
               frame
               his
               hand
               to
               fashion
               any
               letter
               ;
               besides
               the
               guiding
               of
               his
               hand
               ,
               and
               also
               the
               shewing
               where
               to
               begin
               each
               letter
               and
               how
               to
               draw
               it
               ,
               some
               do
               vse
               to
               drawe
               before
               them
               the
               proportion
               of
               their
               letters
               ,
               with
               a
               peece
               of
               chawke
               vpon
               a
               board
               ,
               or
               table
               ,
               or
               with
               a
               peece
               of
               blacke
               lead
               vpon
               a
               paper
               ;
               and
               then
               let
               the
               childe
               trie
               how
               he
               himselfe
               can
               draw
               the
               like
               vpon
               it
               ;
               and
               after
               this
               to
               let
               him
               to
               do
               it
               with
               his
               pen
               ,
               following
               the
               letter
               of
               his
               booke
               .
            
             
               Or
               thus
               ;
               
               Let
               him
               take
               a
               drie
               pen
               ,
               that
               cannot
               blot
               his
               booke
               ,
               and
               therewith
               cause
               him
               to
               follow
               that
               letter
               in
               his
               copie
               ,
               which
               he
               cannot
               make
               ,
               drawing
               vpon
               the
               copie
               letter
               very
               lightly
               ,
               &
               a
               little
               turning
               the
               side
               of
               the
               pen
               ,
               where
               the
               letter
               is
               smal
               ;
               but
               leaning
               harder
               vpon
               it
               where
               it
               is
               ful
               ,
               and
               there
               also
               turning
               the
               broad
               part
               of
               the
               pen.
               Onely
               warne
               him
               to
               be
               carefull
               ,
               that
               hee
               doe
               not
               hurt
               the
               letter
               in
               the
               copy
               ,
               by
               his
               hard
               leaning
               vpon
               his
               pen
               ,
               or
               by
               the
               ouermuch
               sharpness
               of
               it
               ▪
               Thus
               let
               him
               follow
               his
               copie
               letter
               ,
               drawing
               his
               pen
               so
               oft
               vpon
               it
               ,
               vntill
               he
               think
               his
               hand
               will
               goe
               like
               vnto
               it
               .
               Then
               direct
               him
               ,
               to
               trie
               with
               another
               pen
               with
               inke
               ,
               whether
               he
               can
               make
               one
               like
               to
               that
               of
               his
               copie
               .
               If
               he
               cannot
               ,
               let
               him
               goe
               to
               it
               with
               his
               drie
               pen
               again
               ,
               vntill
               that
               he
               can
               fashion
               one
               like
               vnto
               it
               .
            
             
               This
               also
               is
               a
               speciall
               obseruation
               :
               That
               the
               more
               leasurely
               
               the
               childe
               draweth
               at
               the
               beginning
               ,
               
               as
               the
               Painter
               doth
               ,
               and
               the
               more
               lightly
               ,
               the
               sooner
               a
               great
               deale
               he
               shall
               learne
               to
               frame
               his
               hand
               to
               write
               faire
               .
            
             
               This
               likewise
               some
               good
               Scriueners
               obserue
               ;
               
               to
               suffer
               the
               child
               to
               learne
               to
               make
               but
               one
               kind
               of
               letter
               at
               once
               ,
               vntill
               they
               can
               make
               that
               in
               some
               good
               sort
               ,
               then
               another
               :
               as
               first
               a
               ,
               then
               b.
               But
               especially
               to
               beginne
               with
               those
               letters
               ,
               out
               of
               which
               all
               the
               rest
               may
               be
               framed
               ,
               to
               make
               them
               perfectly
               ,
               as
               
                 m
                 ,
                 c
                 ,
                 t
                 ,
                 v
                 ,
                 z.
              
               For
               so
               all
               the
               rest
               will
               bee
               the
               easier
               .
            
             
               To
               helpe
               to
               write
               cleane
               ,
               
               fast
               and
               faire
               together
               ,
               call
               oft
               on
               your
               schollars
               to
               exercise
               their
               hands
               in
               making
               of
               f
               strokes
               ,
               that
               is
               ,
               dashes
               of
               f
               ,
               and
               s
               thus
               〈◊〉
               ;
               and
               the
               stroake
               of
               the
               great
               C
               ,
               and
               B
               ,
               thus
               ,
               〈◊〉
            
             
               Also
               some
               vse
               to
               cause
               the
               learners
               ,
               
               to
               practice
               their
               hands
               to
               run
               vpon
               the
               paper
               ,
               either
               with
               inke
               or
               without
               ,
               vntill
               they
               be
               very
               nimble
               and
               cunning
               to
               glide
               vpon
               the
               paper
               ;
               and
               namely
               ,
               to
               make
               certaine
               rude
               florishes
               .
            
             
             
               Call
               on
               them
               in
               all
               exercises
               ,
               
               to
               bee
               carefull
               to
               obserue
               the
               graces
               of
               letters
               :
               as
               the
               keeping
               of
               great
               letters
               ,
               accents
               ,
               points
               ,
               as
               comma
               ,
               colon
               ,
               period
               ,
               parenthesis
               ,
               and
               whatsoeuer
               may
               serue
               for
               the
               adorning
               of
               writing
               ;
               and
               euermore
               to
               take
               a
               delight
               in
               writing
               faire
               :
               which
               delight
               is
               in
               each
               art
               the
               one
               halfe
               of
               the
               skill
               ;
               
               but
               to
               flie
               all
               long
               tailes
               of
               letters
               ,
               and
               to
               make
               all
               their
               letters
               so
               plaine
               as
               they
               can
               :
               
               the
               plainer
               the
               better
               .
               Beware
               that
               you
               suffer
               no
               one
               to
               learne
               a
               bad
               hand
               ,
               
               or
               to
               make
               any
               bad
               letter
               ,
               so
               neere
               as
               you
               are
               able
               to
               preuent
               it
               .
               
               For
               it
               will
               be
               found
               much
               harder
               to
               teach
               such
               to
               forget
               their
               bad
               letters
               and
               hands
               ,
               then
               to
               teach
               other
               which
               neuer
               learned
               ,
               to
               write
               the
               good
               .
            
             
             
               So
               that
               if
               you
               teach
               such
               ,
               a
               better
               hand
               ,
               after
               that
               they
               haue
               learned
               and
               been
               long
               inured
               to
               the
               worse
               ;
               although
               they
               seeme
               to
               haue
               learned
               to
               write
               well
               ,
               yet
               vnlesse
               they
               be
               holden
               continually
               to
               practice
               their
               good
               hand
               each
               day
               a
               little
               ,
               they
               will
               fall
               vnto
               their
               bad
               hand
               againe
               :
               so
               great
               force
               hath
               any
               euill
               custome
               .
            
             
               This
               therefore
               must
               be
               our
               wisedome
               ,
               
               to
               procure
               from
               the
               beginning
               the
               most
               excellent
               copies
               ,
               
               for
               our
               schollars
               ,
               whatsoeuer
               they
               cost
               ;
               and
               to
               keepe
               them
               constantly
               to
               them
               :
               they
               will
               soone
               quite
               the
               cost
               both
               to
               Master
               and
               Schollar
               .
            
             
               To
               the
               end
               that
               any
               Master
               may
               bee
               the
               better
               able
               to
               teach
               thus
               ;
               
               let
               him
               eyther
               trie
               to
               attaine
               this
               faculty
               of
               writing
               faire
               (
               which
               much
               commends
               a
               Master
               )
               or
               at
               least
               ,
               let
               him
               labour
               to
               be
               well
               acquainted
               with
               these
               directions
               ,
               or
               the
               like
               :
               and
               also
               let
               him
               cause
               his
               Schollars
               to
               obserue
               them
               constantly
               ;
               or
               so
               many
               of
               them
               ,
               as
               neede
               shall
               require
               .
            
             
               And
               to
               this
               end
               ,
               
               let
               him
               vse
               to
               walke
               amongst
               his
               Schollars
               as
               they
               write
               all
               together
               ;
               
               and
               see
               that
               they
               do
               practice
               these
               things
               duely
               :
               but
               chiefly
               that
               euery
               one
               haue
               his
               copie
               booke
               layed
               close
               before
               him
               ;
               and
               to
               marke
               well
               wherin
               any
               one
               of
               them
               misseth
               in
               any
               letter
               or
               stroke
               ,
               that
               it
               is
               not
               like
               to
               the
               copie
               ,
               there
               to
               point
               him
               to
               the
               copie
               ,
               and
               to
               shew
               him
               where
               they
               differ
               ,
               or
               to
               cause
               him
               to
               compare
               them
               himselfe
               :
               so
               to
               appoint
               them
               to
               bee
               mending
               their
               faults
               ,
               vntill
               their
               letters
               be
               in
               all
               things
               like
               the
               copie
               letters
               .
               And
               what
               letters
               they
               make
               the
               worst
               ,
               
               to
               make
               them
               so
               oft
               ouer
               ,
               in
               some
               voyde
               place
               of
               their
               booke
               ,
               or
               some
               waste
               paper
               ,
               vntill
               those
               be
               as
               good
               as
               any
               of
               the
               rest
               ,
               and
               like
               the
               copie
               ,
               as
               was
               said
               .
               Amongst
               others
               ,
               to
               look
               specially
               to
               these
               three
               letters
               together
               ,
               
                 f.
                 g.
                 h.
              
               and
               to
               m.
               which
               being
               well
               made
               ,
               do
               grace
               all
               the
               rest
               ,
               &
               yet
               are
               commonly
               made
               the
               worst
               of
               all
               .
            
             
               Thus
               any
               one
               of
               the
               schollars
               ,
               
               chiefly
               one
               of
               them
               who
               write
               the
               best
               ,
               may
               helpe
               the
               Master
               to
               direct
               the
               rest
               .
            
             
               By
               these
               meanes
               the
               Schoole-master
               may
               bring
               many
               of
               
               his
               Schollars
               to
               be
               very
               good
               pen-men
               ,
               
               and
               all
               generally
               to
               some
               competent
               sufficiencie
               ,
               to
               the
               credite
               of
               the
               Schoole
               ,
               the
               good
               contentment
               of
               the
               parents
               ,
               and
               the
               great
               benefit
               of
               the
               Schollars
               ,
               though
               he
               cannot
               write
               well
               himselfe
               ,
               if
               hee
               can
               but
               onely
               thus
               farre
               forth
               direct
               ,
               as
               to
               cause
               his
               Schollars
               to
               follow
               these
               obseruations
               .
            
             
               Hereby
               the
               Schooles
               also
               may
               be
               freed
               from
               hauing
               any
               need
               of
               the
               Scriueners
               ,
               which
               go
               about
               the
               country
               ;
               at
               least
               ,
               which
               go
               vnder
               the
               names
               of
               Scriueners
               ,
               
               and
               take
               vpon
               them
               to
               teach
               to
               write
               ;
               &
               do
               ofttimes
               very
               much
               hurt
               in
               the
               places
               where
               they
               come
               .
               For
               they
               draw
               away
               the
               mindes
               of
               many
               of
               the
               Schollars
               from
               their
               bookes
               ;
               euen
               of
               all
               such
               as
               cannot
               indure
               to
               take
               paines
               ,
               nor
               haue
               any
               great
               loue
               of
               learning
               and
               cause
               many
               ,
               of
               good
               hope
               to
               leaue
               the
               school
               vtterly
               .
               Besides
               that
               ,
               very
               often
               ,
               so
               soone
               as
               euer
               these
               Scriueners
               are
               gone
               ,
               the
               Schollars
               whom
               they
               haue
               taught
               ,
               doe
               forget
               what
               they
               seemed
               to
               haue
               gotten
               by
               them
               ,
               vnlesse
               they
               be
               kept
               to
               practice
               their
               writing
               daily
               .
            
             
               So
               that
               all
               that
               cost
               and
               time
               is
               commonly
               lost
               ;
               besides
               the
               former
               inconueniences
               ,
               that
               sundry
               by
               them
               lose
               all
               the
               learning
               which
               they
               had
               gotten
               .
               Also
               most
               of
               the
               younger
               sort
               ,
               who
               seeme
               to
               write
               faire
               ,
               and
               so
               leaue
               the
               Schoole
               in
               a
               conceit
               of
               that
               which
               they
               haue
               gotten
               by
               the
               Scriuener
               ;
               yet
               doe
               write
               so
               false
               Orthography
               ,
               as
               is
               loathsome
               to
               see
               ,
               and
               ridiculous
               to
               reade
               .
            
             
               For
               these
               properties
               should
               be
               ioyned
               together
               in
               euery
               pen-man
               ,
               
               who
               would
               haue
               any
               approbation
               ;
               to
               be
               able
               as
               well
               to
               write
               a
               good
               stile
               (
               I
               meane
               to
               indite
               ,
               and
               to
               expresse
               his
               mind
               in
               some
               good
               forme
               of
               words
               ,
               and
               true
               Orthographie
               )
               as
               to
               write
               faire
               .
            
             
               As
               for
               the
               vse
               of
               Scriueners
               in
               the
               common
               schooles
               ,
               it
               would
               be
               this
               (
               if
               any
               )
               ;
               
               eyther
               to
               make
               euery
               schollar
               his
               booke
               of
               copies
               ,
               to
               vse
               after
               the
               manner
               prescribed
               ,
               vntill
               such
               printed
               ones
               can
               be
               had
               :
               or
               else
               to
               set
               all
               the
               schollars
               in
               a
               good
               way
               of
               writing
               for
               right
               framing
               their
               letters
               ,
               and
               the
               like
               .
               To
               do
               it
               onely
               at
               such
               times
               as
               the
               Master
               shall
               appoint
               ;
               that
               it
               may
               be
               without
               any
               great
               hinderance
               to
               the
               
               schollars
               for
               their
               learning
               ,
               &
               warily
               preuenting
               al
               the
               former
               inconueniences
               .
               For
               schooles
               and
               good
               learning
               being
               such
               a
               singular
               benefit
               ,
               and
               so
               great
               a
               gift
               of
               God
               to
               Church
               &
               Common-wealth
               ,
               all
               hinderances
               would
               be
               wisely
               foreseene
               ,
               and
               heedfully
               preuented
               .
            
             
               These
               are
               the
               speciall
               helps
               ,
               which
               hitherto
               I
               haue
               learned
               ,
               for
               the
               direction
               of
               schollars
               in
               writing
               :
               and
               by
               these
               I
               am
               assured
               vpon
               triall
               ,
               that
               what
               is
               promised
               in
               this
               behalfe
               ,
               may
               bee
               effected
               through
               Gods
               blessing
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               Sir
               ,
               these
               must
               needs
               be
               very
               profitable
               :
               yet
               my
               memory
               being
               weake
               ,
               and
               they
               many
               ,
               I
               shall
               hardly
               thinke
               of
               them
               to
               put
               them
               in
               practice
               .
               I
               pray
               you
               therfore
               repeat
               vnto
               me
               againe
               in
               a
               word
               or
               two
               ,
               which
               of
               them
               you
               take
               to
               be
               the
               principall
               and
               of
               most
               continuall
               vse
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               These
               I
               take
               to
               be
               the
               principall
               ,
               
               &
               almost
               the
               sum
               of
               all
               ;
               
               &
               which
               would
               euer
               be
               had
               in
               memory
               :
               that
               the
               schollars
               haue
               good
               pens
               ,
               thin
               inke
               ,
               faire
               &
               good
               copie
               books
               ;
               &
               those
               made
               fast
               to
               their
               bookes
               ,
               to
               haue
               them
               euer
               laid
               close
               before
               thē
               when
               they
               are
               to
               write
               fair
               ;
               which
               wold
               be
               once
               euery
               day
               ;
               &
               then
               all
               of
               them
               together
               .
               That
               they
               haue
               their
               books
               ruled
               strait
               &
               lightly
               ,
               &
               that
               with
               ruling
               pens
               amongst
               al
               the
               yonger
               sort
               :
               and
               that
               therein
               a
               care
               be
               had
               ,
               that
               they
               euer
               touch
               both
               the
               lines
               of
               the
               ruling
               pen
               with
               the
               bodies
               of
               their
               letters
               .
               Also
               that
               they
               haue
               their
               faults
               shewed
               them
               ,
               by
               pointing
               them
               to
               the
               copie
               letters
               ;
               and
               where
               their
               letters
               are
               vnlike
               to
               the
               copie
               ,
               thereto
               cause
               them
               to
               be
               amending
               them
               continually
               ,
               vntill
               they
               attain
               to
               write
               as
               faire
               as
               it
               .
               To
               call
               on
               them
               euer
               to
               haue
               an
               eye
               to
               the
               copie
               ,
               &
               to
               haue
               the
               fashions
               of
               the
               letters
               in
               their
               minds
               .
               To
               take
               a
               delight
               in
               writing
               ;
               striuing
               who
               shall
               do
               the
               best
               :
               to
               this
               end
               ,
               to
               let
               their
               hands
               glide
               lightly
               on
               the
               paper
               ;
               to
               striue
               to
               write
               very
               clean
               ;
               to
               make
               minimes
               ,
               and
               such
               like
               letters
               sharp
               at
               tops
               &
               bottoms
               ,
               or
               iust
               to
               the
               proportiō
               of
               their
               copies
               :
               to
               hold
               their
               pens
               very
               low
               :
               their
               elbow
               somthing
               neer
               their
               side
               :
               to
               keep
               their
               copies
               &
               books
               fair
               ,
               vnblotted
               &
               vnscrauled
               :
               to
               haue
               void
               places
               or
               waste
               papers
               for
               assaies
               ,
               &c.
               
            
             
               Most
               shortly
               ,
               these
               three
               are
               almost
               all
               in
               all
               ;
               good
               copies
               ,
               continual
               eying
               them
               wel
               ,
               a
               delight
               in
               writing
               :
               although
               
               I
               thinke
               it
               very
               necessary
               ,
               that
               you
               bee
               acquainted
               with
               all
               the
               former
               directions
               ,
               as
               they
               are
               set
               downe
               at
               large
               ,
               to
               vse
               them
               as
               neede
               shall
               require
               .
               You
               may
               soone
               attaine
               the
               knowledge
               of
               them
               ,
               when
               you
               haue
               them
               written
               downe
               :
               the
               labour
               of
               learning
               them
               will
               be
               nothing
               to
               you
               in
               regard
               of
               the
               benefit
               ;
               and
               much
               lesse
               in
               regard
               of
               the
               long
               search
               and
               obseruation
               ,
               which
               I
               haue
               vsed
               to
               finde
               them
               out
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               It
               is
               true
               indeede
               ;
               and
               I
               am
               the
               more
               beholden
               vnto
               you
               :
               but
               giue
               me
               leaue
               this
               one
               word
               ;
               that
               which
               you
               said
               euen
               now
               ,
               may
               seeme
               to
               make
               very
               much
               against
               the
               Scriueners
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               Not
               at
               all
               ;
               
               it
               onlely
               helpeth
               to
               redresse
               the
               great
               abuse
               by
               som
               shifters
               ,
               who
               go
               vnder
               the
               name
               of
               Scriueners
               :
               for
               all
               good
               Scriueners
               haue
               their
               callings
               and
               imployments
               ,
               wherein
               to
               serue
               to
               the
               profite
               and
               good
               of
               the
               Common-wealth
               ,
               and
               not
               vnto
               the
               hurt
               thereof
               .
               This
               onely
               may
               teach
               vs
               to
               preuent
               and
               auoyde
               those
               intollerable
               abuses
               ,
               &
               hurts
               to
               schooles
               mentioned
               ;
               whereof
               there
               hath
               beene
               ,
               and
               is
               daily
               ,
               so
               much
               experience
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               Sir
               ,
               I
               cannot
               but
               like
               of
               your
               answer
               ;
               I
               my selfe
               haue
               had
               some
               experience
               of
               the
               truth
               of
               the
               complaint
               :
               it
               is
               very
               necessary
               that
               such
               euils
               should
               be
               preuented
               .
               Now
               therefore
               that
               you
               haue
               thus
               shewed
               me
               how
               to
               make
               my
               schollars
               good
               pen-men
               ,
               and
               that
               they
               may
               grow
               therein
               ,
               as
               in
               their
               schoole
               learning
               ;
               and
               thus
               prepared
               the
               way
               to
               our
               Grammar
               schoole
               :
               let
               vs
               at
               length
               come
               to
               that
               which
               hath
               beene
               the
               speciall
               end
               of
               my
               iourney
               ,
               and
               wherin
               our
               chiefe
               trauell
               and
               imployment
               lieth
               .
               A
               first
               let
               vs
               begin
               with
               the
               rudiments
               of
               the
               Grammar
               ,
               I
               meane
               the
               Accedence
               ;
               wherein
               our
               first
               entrance
               is
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               Very
               willingly
               :
               but
               first
               let
               me
               acquaint
               you
               with
               certaine
               generall
               obseruations
               ,
               which
               concerne
               our
               whole
               course
               of
               teaching
               ,
               and
               whereof
               we
               shall
               haue
               almost
               continuall
               vse
               ;
               lest
               we
               be
               troubled
               with
               repeating
               them
               often
               after
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               It
               is
               well
               aduised
               ,
               that
               wee
               may
               doe
               all
               things
               the
               most
               shortly
               ,
               and
               in
               the
               best
               and
               easiest
               order
               that
               wee
               can
               :
               I
               pray
               you
               therefore
               shew
               vnto
               me
               what
               those
               generall
               obseruations
               be
               .
            
          
        
         
           
           
             CHAP.
             V.
             
          
           
             Of
             certaine
             generall
             Obseruations
             to
             be
             knowen
             of
             Schoole
             masters
             ,
             and
             practiced
             carefully
             in
             all
             Grammar
             learning
             chiefely
             .
             And
             first
             of
             causing
             all
             things
             to
             be
             done
             with
             vnderstanding
             .
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               FOr
               the
               generall
               Obseruations
               the
               first
               may
               be
               this
               .
               
               1.
               
               That
               Schollars
               be
               taught
               to
               do
               all
               things
               with
               vnderstanding
               ;
               and
               to
               be
               able
               to
               giue
               a
               reason
               of
               euery
               matter
               which
               they
               learne
               .
               And
               so
               in
               euery
               lecture
               which
               they
               learne
               in
               any
               tongue
               ,
               first
               to
               vnderstand
               the
               matter
               of
               it
               ,
               and
               the
               lesson
               will
               bee
               learned
               presently
               .
            
             
               But
               before
               I
               speake
               any
               more
               of
               this
               ,
               I
               pray
               you
               let
               mee
               heare
               of
               you
               what
               course
               you
               haue
               taken
               in
               this
               point
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               This
               first
               obseruation
               seemeth
               strange
               vnto
               me
               ,
               
               at
               the
               very
               naming
               of
               it
               .
               I
               my selfe
               haue
               vsed
               onely
               this
               course
               ,
               and
               I
               thinke
               it
               to
               bee
               all
               that
               is
               done
               in
               most
               of
               our
               countrey
               schooles
               ;
               To
               giue
               Lectures
               to
               the
               seuerall
               formes
               ,
               or
               cause
               some
               schollar
               to
               doe
               it
               .
               And
               therin
               first
               to
               reade
               them
               ouer
               their
               Lecture
               ,
               then
               to
               construe
               them
               ,
               and
               in
               the
               lower
               formes
               to
               parse
               them
               .
               So
               when
               they
               come
               to
               say
               ;
               to
               heare
               them
               whether
               they
               can
               read
               ,
               say
               without
               book
               ,
               construe
               and
               parse
               .
               More
               as
               I
               take
               it
               ,
               is
               not
               much
               vsed
               ,
               for
               the
               vnderstanding
               and
               making
               vse
               of
               them
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               I
               know
               it
               to
               be
               as
               you
               say
               ;
               and
               do
               hold
               it
               to
               bee
               a
               verie
               great
               defect
               in
               schooles
               generally
               :
               
               yea
               a
               farre
               greater
               hinderance
               to
               learning
               ,
               then
               that
               of
               letting
               them
               to
               lose
               so
               many
               yeeres
               ,
               before
               they
               begin
               to
               learne
               .
               For
               this
               is
               a
               matter
               which
               of
               all
               other
               concerneth
               the
               credite
               of
               schooles
               ,
               and
               furthereth
               learning
               wonderfully
               ;
               to
               teach
               schollars
               to
               vnderstand
               whatsoeuer
               they
               learn
               ,
               &
               to
               be
               able
               
               to
               giue
               a
               reason
               of
               euery
               thing
               why
               it
               is
               so
               ;
               and
               to
               doe
               this
               from
               the
               lowest
               to
               the
               highest
               .
               My
               reasons
               are
               these
               :
            
             
               1
               Because
               if
               it
               were
               rightly
               knowen
               ,
               
               &
               constantly
               practiced
               in
               schooles
               ,
               it
               would
               bring
               forth
               very
               neere
               double
               so
               much
               good
               and
               sound
               learning
               ,
               as
               is
               now
               gotten
               cōmonly
               .
            
             
               2
               It
               would
               bring
               withall
               ,
               so
               much
               ease
               ,
               pleasure
               and
               delight
               ,
               both
               to
               all
               teachers
               &
               learners
               and
               also
               so
               much
               certainty
               ,
               &
               cause
               them
               to
               go
               forward
               with
               such
               cheerfulness
               ,
               boldness
               and
               contention
               ,
               as
               will
               hardly
               be
               beleeued
               vntil
               it
               be
               tried
               by
               experience
               .
               In
               a
               word
               ;
               It
               would
               cause
               at
               things
               to
               be
               gotten
               much
               more
               speedily
               ,
               layed
               vp
               more
               safely
               ,
               and
               kept
               more
               surely
               in
               memory
               .
               Therefore
               ,
               that
               olde
               rule
               is
               true
               ;
               
                 Legere
                 &
                 non
                 intelligere
                 negligere
                 est
                 .
              
            
             
               To
               read
               and
               not
               to
               vnderstand
               what
               wee
               read
               ,
               
               or
               not
               to
               know
               how
               to
               make
               vse
               of
               it
               ,
               is
               nothing
               else
               but
               a
               neglect
               of
               all
               good
               learning
               ;
               and
               a
               meere
               abuse
               of
               the
               means
               &
               helps
               to
               attaine
               the
               same
               .
               It
               is
               no
               other
               thing
               but
               a
               very
               losse
               of
               our
               pretious
               time
               ,
               and
               of
               all
               our
               labour
               and
               cost
               bestowed
               therin
               ,
               in
               regard
               of
               that
               which
               is
               read
               with
               vnderstanding
               .
            
             
               We
               may
               see
               triall
               hereof
               sundry
               waies
               .
            
             
               1
               Let
               children
               be
               examined
               together
               ;
               
               I
               meane
               such
               as
               of
               whom
               one
               of
               them
               alone
               hath
               beene
               taught
               to
               do
               all
               things
               by
               reason
               &
               with
               vnderstanding
               ;
               so
               that
               he
               is
               able
               to
               giue
               you
               a
               plaine
               reason
               ,
               and
               make
               the
               right
               vse
               of
               euerie
               thing
               ,
               which
               he
               hath
               learned
               :
               the
               other
               haue
               learned
               only
               to
               say
               without
               booke
               ,
               to
               construe
               and
               parse
               ;
               then
               mark
               the
               difference
               .
               Although
               all
               these
               learn
               one
               and
               the
               same
               Author
               ;
               yet
               when
               they
               come
               to
               the
               triall
               ,
               you
               would
               thinke
               that
               one
               to
               haue
               all
               learning
               ,
               when
               you
               heare
               him
               to
               giue
               a
               reason
               of
               euery
               thing
               ,
               and
               that
               he
               can
               make
               vse
               of
               al
               things
               ;
               all
               the
               rest
               to
               haue
               almost
               nothing
               at
               all
               ,
               or
               at
               least
               nothing
               in
               regard
               of
               that
               one
               so
               taught
               .
            
             
               2
               Proue
               it
               thus
               in
               getting
               learning
               :
               
            
             
               Teach
               your
               schollar
               one
               lesson
               which
               you
               cause
               him
               to
               vnderstand
               perfectly
               before
               ;
               another
               of
               the
               same
               matter
               ,
               whereof
               hee
               vnderstandeth
               little
               or
               nothing
               :
               and
               then
               trie
               
               whether
               he
               will
               not
               doe
               that
               ,
               whereof
               he
               vnderstandeth
               the
               meaning
               and
               reasons
               ,
               almost
               in
               half
               the
               time
               ,
               which
               the
               other
               will
               require
               .
               And
               this
               also
               so
               ,
               as
               you
               may
               euidently
               discerne
               it
               ,
               that
               hee
               will
               doe
               it
               with
               much
               more
               ease
               ,
               certainty
               and
               boldnesse
               ,
               then
               he
               can
               do
               the
               other
               .
            
             
               3
               Wee
               our selues
               may
               make
               triall
               of
               it
               by
               our
               owne
               experience
               ,
               
               in
               construing
               any
               difficult
               peece
               of
               Latine
               ,
               Greek
               ,
               or
               Hebrewe
               ,
               or
               committing
               any
               thing
               to
               memorie
               ;
               whether
               if
               so
               be
               that
               we
               doe
               but
               vnderstand
               the
               matter
               of
               it
               before
               perfectly
               ,
               wee
               shall
               not
               do
               it
               in
               halfe
               the
               time
               and
               with
               one
               halfe
               of
               the
               labour
               ,
               that
               otherwise
               it
               would
               require
               .
            
             
               Or
               if
               we
               would
               write
               or
               speake
               of
               any
               thing
               ,
               let
               vs
               proue
               it
               but
               thus
               :
               If
               we
               first
               vnderstand
               the
               matter
               wel
               and
               haue
               it
               perfectly
               in
               our
               head
               ,
               whether
               words
               to
               expresse
               our
               mindes
               will
               not
               follow
               as
               of
               themselues
               .
            
             
               To
               this
               very
               purpose
               ,
               for
               confirming
               the
               truth
               hereof
               ,
               and
               to
               keepe
               a
               continuall
               remembrance
               of
               this
               point
               ;
               these
               three
               verses
               of
               Horace
               were
               worthie
               to
               be
               written
               in
               letters
               of
               golde
               ,
               and
               to
               be
               imprinted
               in
               the
               memorie
               of
               euery
               one
               who
               is
               desirous
               to
               get
               the
               best
               learning
               :
               for
               so
               they
               would
               indeed
               proue
               golden
               verses
               ,
               and
               make
               vndoubtedly
               golden
               times
               ;
               
                 
                   Scribendirectè
                   sapere
                   est
                   &
                   principium
                   &
                   fons
                   :
                
                 
                   Rem
                   tibi
                   Socraticae
                   poterunt
                   ostendere
                   char●ae
                   ;
                
                 
                   Verbaque
                   prouisam
                   rem
                   non
                   inuita
                   sequentur
                   .
                
              
            
             
               The
               meaning
               of
               the
               verses
               ,
               I
               take
               it
               to
               be
               this
               :
               To
               attaine
               to
               this
               facultie
               ,
               to
               bee
               able
               to
               write
               or
               speake
               of
               anie
               matter
               ,
               and
               so
               to
               come
               to
               all
               excellent
               learning
               ,
               the
               verie
               first
               and
               chiefe
               fountaine
               ,
               and
               that
               which
               is
               all
               in
               all
               ,
               is
               to
               vnderstand
               the
               matter
               wel
               in
               the
               first
               place
               .
               As
               for
               store
               of
               matter
               ,
               the
               writings
               of
               learned
               men
               (
               such
               as
               Socrates
               was
               )
               will
               furnish
               you
               aboundantly
               therewith
               .
            
             
               And
               when
               you
               haue
               the
               matter
               throughly
               in
               your
               head
               ,
               words
               will
               follow
               ,
               as
               waters
               out
               of
               a
               fountaine
               ,
               euen
               almost
               naturally
               ,
               to
               expresse
               your
               mind
               in
               any
               tongue
               ,
               which
               you
               studie
               in
               any
               right
               order
               .
            
             
             
               This
               will
               be
               found
               to
               be
               true
               in
               Latine
               ,
               Greeke
               ,
               Hebrew
               ,
               and
               by
               a
               like
               reason
               in
               euery
               other
               tongue
               ,
               and
               in
               euery
               facultie
               :
               whether
               wee
               would
               write
               ,
               speake
               ,
               learne
               ,
               resolue
               ,
               or
               remember
               and
               lay
               vp
               for
               euer
               .
            
             
               This
               was
               a
               principall
               cause
               that
               made
               Tully
               ,
               
               Ouid
               ,
               Virgil
               ,
               and
               some
               others
               so
               to
               flowe
               in
               eloquence
               ;
               and
               especially
               Virgil
               ,
               whom
               men
               worthily
               account
               the
               chiefe
               of
               all
               latine
               Poets
               ,
               because
               they
               did
               vnderstand
               so
               fully
               whatsoeuer
               they
               writ
               of
               .
               I
               might
               instance
               this
               also
               in
               Preachers
               ,
               by
               our
               daily
               experience
               ;
               of
               whom
               some
               are
               better
               able
               to
               preach
               powerfully
               in
               two
               daies
               warning
               ,
               and
               hauing
               words
               at
               will
               ,
               then
               other
               in
               two
               moneths
               ;
               and
               all
               because
               the
               one
               sort
               are
               so
               full
               of
               vnderstanding
               and
               matter
               ,
               the
               other
               are
               so
               barren
               thereof
               .
            
             
               Thus
               in
               all
               these
               examples
               ,
               euery
               man
               may
               see
               a
               plaine
               demōstration
               of
               the
               truth
               of
               these
               verses
               of
               Horace
               ,
               which
               he
               no
               doubt
               did
               write
               vpon
               his
               owne
               experience
               ,
               as
               euerie
               man
               shall
               find
               ,
               who
               will
               set
               himself
               to
               make
               triall
               .
               Proue
               &
               confirme
               what
               tong
               soeuer
               your
               schollar
               learns
               ,
               
               euen
               from
               the
               first
               reading
               of
               English
               ,
               if
               he
               can
               repeat
               you
               the
               matter
               ,
               or
               the
               sum
               of
               it
               ,
               or
               haue
               it
               in
               his
               head
               ,
               trie
               whether
               hee
               will
               not
               haue
               the
               words
               presently
               .
               The
               plentifull
               experience
               which
               I
               haue
               seene
               ,
               
               of
               the
               sweete
               delight
               and
               fruite
               of
               this
               course
               ,
               of
               causing
               children
               to
               doe
               all
               things
               with
               vnderstanding
               and
               reason
               ,
               compared
               with
               the
               fruitlesse
               toiles
               and
               griefes
               of
               former
               times
               ,
               do
               make
               me
               not
               only
               confident
               for
               the
               thing
               ,
               but
               also
               desirous
               to
               make
               all
               other
               partakers
               of
               the
               benefit
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               I
               do
               fully
               see
               the
               euidence
               of
               all
               that
               which
               you
               haue
               said
               ,
               and
               therfore
               I
               must
               needs
               be
               perswaded
               of
               it
               .
               I
               do
               heartily
               thank
               God
               for
               it
               ,
               and
               will
               indeuor
               my selfe
               to
               put
               it
               in
               practice
               continually
               .
               
               Only
               here
               is
               the
               difficulty
               ,
               how
               a
               schoolemaster
               may
               do
               this
               ,
               to
               teach
               his
               schollar
               so
               to
               proceed
               with
               vnderstanding
               ,
               and
               how
               to
               giue
               a
               reason
               of
               euery
               matter
               which
               they
               learne
               ,
               to
               make
               vse
               of
               all
               their
               learning
               .
            
             
               Aboue
               all
               ,
               how
               hee
               may
               beginne
               to
               fraught
               young
               
               Schollars
               with
               all
               store
               of
               matter
               ,
               as
               they
               goe
               on
               :
               this
               very
               much
               passeth
               my
               skill
               .
               I
               should
               thinke
               my selfe
               most
               happy
               ,
               to
               obtaine
               this
               knowledge
               ,
               if
               it
               possibly
               can
               be
               done
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               Attend
               to
               those
               things
               which
               I
               shall
               relate
               ,
               and
               I
               haue
               no
               doubt
               ,
               but
               I
               shall
               very
               much
               accomplish
               your
               desire
               in
               this
               :
               for
               our
               whole
               conference
               ,
               doth
               tend
               chiefly
               to
               this
               end
               .
               As
               all
               learning
               is
               grounded
               on
               reason
               :
               so
               in
               euery
               Chapter
               ,
               I
               shall
               endeaur
               my selfe
               to
               manifest
               the
               reasons
               of
               euery
               thing
               ,
               and
               how
               you
               may
               teach
               others
               ;
               so
               farre
               forth
               ,
               as
               hitherto
               the
               Lord
               hath
               made
               them
               knowne
               vnto
               me
               .
               And
               more
               hereafter
               ,
               as
               I
               shall
               learne
               more
               .
               The
               principall
               meanes
               for
               their
               vnderstanding
               ,
               is
               ,
               by
               asking
               short
               questions
               of
               the
               matter
               :
               for
               so
               they
               will
               vnderstand
               and
               any
               thing
               ,
               which
               they
               are
               to
               learne
               .
               But
               of
               that
               more
               hereafter
               in
               the
               particular
               examples
               ;
               and
               chiefly
               ,
               Chapt.
               24.
               
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               If
               you
               haue
               done
               then
               with
               this
               ,
               let
               vs
               goe
               forward
               to
               your
               next
               generall
               obseruation
               ;
               and
               so
               through
               them
               all
               ,
               as
               briefly
               as
               you
               can
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               My
               next
               obseruation
               is
               this
               :
               
               that
               as
               I
               would
               haue
               them
               to
               doe
               all
               things
               with
               vnderstanding
               ;
               so
               to
               learne
               only
               such
               bookes
               and
               matters
               ,
               as
               whereof
               they
               may
               haue
               the
               best
               vse
               ,
               
               and
               that
               perpetually
               in
               all
               their
               learning
               ,
               or
               in
               their
               whole
               life
               .
               For
               this
               is
               well
               knowne
               to
               euery
               one
               ;
               that
               things
               well
               learned
               in
               youth
               ,
               will
               bee
               kept
               most
               surely
               all
               the
               life
               long
               ;
               because
               in
               that
               age
               they
               are
               most
               easily
               imprinted
               ,
               and
               sticke
               the
               longest
               in
               fresh
               memory
               .
               And
               for
               that
               cause
               ,
               children
               should
               spend
               no
               time
               vnfruitfully
               ,
               in
               such
               books
               ,
               as
               whereof
               they
               cannot
               haue
               both
               very
               good
               and
               continuall
               vse
               .
               This
               cannot
               be
               but
               a
               great
               folly
               ,
               to
               mis-spend
               our
               pretious
               time
               in
               such
               studies
               ,
               whereof
               neither
               our selues
               nor
               others
               can
               haue
               benefite
               after
               ;
               or
               else
               in
               such
               ,
               as
               the
               knowledge
               whereof
               will
               vanish
               for
               want
               of
               practice
               :
               and
               much
               more
               in
               those
               ,
               which
               will
               corrupt
               and
               hurt
               in
               stead
               of
               doing
               good
               .
               
               And
               therefore
               all
               filthy
               places
               in
               the
               Poets
               would
               be
               wisely
               passed
               ouer
               ,
               or
               warily
               expounded
               .
               It
               were
               well
               if
               there
               were
               an
               
                 Index
                 Expurgatorius
              
               ,
               to
               purge
               out
               all
               the
               filth
               out
               of
               these
               ,
               by
               leauing
               it
               out
               ,
               or
               changing
               it
               .
            
             
             
               Third
               rule
               ,
               
               and
               that
               generall
               for
               all
               Students
               ,
               is
               this
               :
               that
               whatsoeuer
               difficult
               words
               ,
               or
               matters
               of
               speciall
               obseruation
               ,
               they
               doe
               reade
               in
               any
               Author
               ,
               be
               marked
               out
               ;
               I
               meane
               all
               such
               words
               or
               things
               ,
               as
               eyther
               are
               hard
               to
               them
               in
               the
               learning
               of
               them
               ,
               or
               which
               are
               of
               some
               speciall
               excellency
               ,
               or
               vse
               ,
               worthy
               the
               noting
               :
               or
               which
               ,
               after
               that
               they
               haue
               beene
               a
               certaine
               time
               in
               construction
               ,
               they
               haue
               not
               eyther
               learned
               ,
               or
               at
               least
               they
               knowe
               not
               where
               they
               haue
               learned
               them
               .
               
               For
               the
               marking
               of
               them
               ,
               to
               doe
               it
               with
               little
               lines
               vnder
               them
               ,
               or
               aboue
               them
               ,
               or
               against
               such
               partes
               of
               the
               word
               wherein
               the
               difficulty
               lieth
               ,
               or
               by
               some
               prickes
               ,
               or
               whatsoeuer
               letter
               or
               marke
               may
               best
               helpe
               to
               cal
               the
               knowledge
               of
               the
               thing
               to
               remembrance
               ;
               yet
               so
               much
               as
               may
               be
               ,
               without
               marring
               of
               their
               books
               .
               To
               doe
               this
               ,
               to
               the
               end
               that
               they
               may
               oft-times
               reade
               ouer
               these
               ,
               or
               examine
               and
               meditate
               of
               them
               more
               seriously
               ,
               vntill
               that
               they
               be
               as
               perfect
               in
               them
               ,
               as
               in
               any
               of
               the
               rest
               of
               their
               bookes
               :
               for
               hauing
               these
               then
               haue
               they
               all
               .
            
             
               This
               would
               be
               vniuersall
               ,
               
               in
               getting
               all
               kind
               of
               learning
               ;
               after
               that
               children
               do
               grow
               to
               any
               discretion
               to
               marke
               such
               things
               rightly
               :
               you
               will
               maruel
               (
               if
               you
               haue
               not
               made
               triall
               of
               it
               )
               how
               much
               they
               will
               go
               through
               ,
               &
               what
               sound
               knowledge
               they
               will
               come
               vnto
               in
               any
               kinde
               of
               study
               ;
               and
               how
               soone
               by
               this
               helpe
               ,
               more
               then
               they
               can
               do
               without
               it
               .
               And
               when
               they
               haue
               once
               gotten
               it
               they
               may
               as
               easily
               keepe
               it
               ,
               &
               as
               surely
               ,
               by
               oft-times
               running
               ouer
               those
               things
               ,
               which
               are
               so
               noted
               ,
               aboue
               all
               the
               rest
               .
               This
               is
               the
               reason
               that
               you
               shall
               haue
               the
               choysest
               bookes
               of
               most
               great
               learned
               men
               ,
               
               &
               the
               notablest
               students
               all
               marked
               through
               thus
               ,
               in
               all
               matters
               eyther
               obscure
               ,
               or
               of
               principall
               &
               most
               necessary
               vse
               .
               And
               this
               is
               one
               chiefe
               meanes
               ,
               whereby
               Schollars
               may
               haue
               the
               difficultest
               things
               in
               their
               Authours
               so
               perfectly
               ,
               as
               that
               whensoeuer
               they
               shall
               be
               examined
               of
               a
               sudden
               ,
               they
               shall
               be
               very
               ready
               ,
               to
               their
               great
               praise
               ,
               and
               to
               the
               iust
               commendation
               of
               the
               Schoole
               .
               
               For
               the
               manner
               of
               noting
               ,
               it
               is
               best
               to
               note
               all
               schoole
               books
               with
               inke
               ;
               &
               also
               all
               others
               ,
               which
               you
               would
               haue
               gotten
               advnguem
               ,
               as
               we
               vse
               to
               say
               ,
               or
               wherof
               
               we
               would
               haue
               daily
               or
               long
               practice
               ;
               because
               inke
               will
               indure
               :
               neither
               wil
               such
               books
               be
               the
               worse
               for
               their
               noting
               ,
               but
               the
               better
               ,
               
               they
               be
               noted
               with
               iudgement
               .
               But
               for
               all
               other
               bookes
               ,
               which
               you
               would
               haue
               faire
               againe
               at
               your
               pleasure
               ;
               note
               them
               with
               a
               pensil
               of
               black
               lead
               :
               for
               that
               you
               may
               rub
               out
               againe
               when
               you
               will
               ,
               
               with
               the
               crums
               of
               new
               wheate
               bread
               .
            
             
               The
               very
               little
               ones
               ,
               which
               reade
               but
               English
               ,
               may
               make
               some
               secret
               markes
               thus
               at
               euery
               hard
               word
               ;
               though
               but
               with
               some
               little
               dint
               with
               their
               naile
               :
               so
               that
               they
               doe
               not
               marre
               their
               bookes
               .
            
             
               Of
               this
               I
               shall
               speake
               more
               particularly
               in
               the
               manner
               of
               parsing
               ,
               Chapt.
               9.
               
            
             
               A
               fourth
               obseruation
               ,
               
               is
               this
               :
               That
               whatsoeuer
               books
               or
               matter
               Schollars
               doe
               learne
               ,
               after
               they
               beginne
               to
               learne
               without
               booke
               ;
               that
               they
               learne
               them
               so
               perfectly
               ,
               and
               holde
               them
               so
               surely
               ,
               by
               daily
               repetition
               and
               examination
               ,
               that
               they
               may
               haue
               in
               their
               mindes
               such
               an
               absolute
               knowledge
               of
               al
               the
               words
               ,
               and
               matters
               which
               they
               haue
               learned
               ;
               as
               wheresoeuer
               they
               shall
               meete
               with
               the
               same
               againe
               ,
               or
               shall
               haue
               occasion
               to
               vse
               them
               ,
               they
               may
               not
               neede
               to
               bee
               driuen
               to
               learne
               them
               anew
               ;
               but
               that
               they
               may
               tell
               of
               a
               sudden
               where
               they
               haue
               learned
               them
               ,
               or
               can
               repeat
               the
               place
               :
               and
               so
               make
               their
               vse
               and
               benefit
               of
               them
               .
            
             
               To
               teach
               the
               same
               things
               twise
               ,
               
               or
               thrise
               ,
               is
               a
               double
               labour
               and
               griefe
               :
               but
               to
               haue
               all
               things
               which
               they
               haue
               learned
               ,
               euer
               in
               readinesse
               is
               a
               singular
               benefit
               ,
               and
               a
               rare
               commendation
               .
               For
               besides
               the
               preuenting
               of
               all
               losse
               of
               labour
               and
               time
               ,
               it
               shall
               be
               to
               the
               great
               delight
               of
               all
               who
               heare
               them
               tried
               ,
               and
               the
               exceeding
               furtherance
               of
               their
               continuall
               growth
               in
               all
               good
               learning
               .
            
             
               And
               to
               effect
               this
               yet
               more
               fully
               ;
               
               acquaint
               them
               in
               all
               their
               Lectures
               and
               exercises
               ,
               some
               one
               of
               them
               or
               other
               ,
               who
               can
               tell
               first
               ,
               to
               repeat
               where
               they
               haue
               learned
               euery
               hard
               word
               :
               and
               that
               chiefly
               in
               their
               Grammar
               ,
               if
               they
               haue
               learned
               it
               there
               ,
               to
               haue
               that
               exceeding
               perfect
               ;
               and
               to
               marke
               surely
               euery
               new
               word
               ,
               according
               to
               the
               direction
               which
               I
               haue
               before
               giuen
               .
            
             
             
               A
               fift
               generall
               obseruation
               ,
               
               and
               which
               is
               not
               inferiour
               to
               any
               of
               the
               former
               ,
               for
               the
               good
               both
               of
               Masters
               and
               Schollars
               ,
               and
               the
               very
               great
               benefite
               of
               Schooles
               ,
               is
               this
               :
               that
               the
               whole
               Schoole
               be
               diuided
               into
               so
               few
               fourmes
               as
               may
               be
               ,
               of
               so
               many
               as
               can
               any
               way
               bee
               fitted
               to
               goe
               together
               :
               though
               they
               be
               sixteene
               ,
               or
               twenty
               ,
               yea
               ,
               forty
               in
               a
               fourme
               ,
               it
               is
               not
               the
               worse
               .
            
             
               The
               reasons
               of
               it
               are
               most
               cleere
               .
            
             
               1.
               
               In
               most
               things
               it
               is
               almost
               the
               same
               labour
               ,
               
               to
               teach
               twenty
               ,
               
               as
               to
               teach
               two
               :
               as
               in
               reading
               all
               Lectures
               and
               rules
               vnto
               them
               ,
               in
               examining
               all
               partes
               and
               Lectures
               .
               Like
               as
               it
               is
               in
               Sermons
               ,
               and
               Catechisings
               ,
               where
               it
               is
               the
               same
               labour
               to
               teach
               one
               ,
               that
               it
               is
               to
               teach
               a
               thousand
               ,
               if
               all
               can
               heare
               alike
               .
               This
               is
               very
               generall
               ,
               except
               in
               exercises
               of
               writing
               ;
               wherin
               also
               great
               aduantage
               may
               be
               gotten
               by
               this
               means
               ,
               if
               right
               order
               be
               obserued
               ,
               as
               we
               shall
               shew
               after
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               Secondly
               ,
               
               the
               fewer
               fourmes
               there
               are
               ,
               the
               more
               time
               may
               be
               spent
               in
               each
               fourme
               ;
               and
               more
               labour
               may
               be
               bestowed
               in
               examining
               euery
               title
               necessary
               .
               Which
               worke
               of
               continuall
               examination
               ,
               is
               a
               notable
               quickner
               and
               nourisher
               of
               all
               good
               learning
               ;
               helping
               maruellously
               vnderstanding
               ,
               audacity
               ,
               memory
               ,
               and
               prouoking
               emulation
               of
               the
               Schollars
               :
               
               and
               therfore
               a
               principall
               part
               of
               the
               Masters
               labour
               ,
               and
               of
               the
               time
               in
               the
               Schoole
               ,
               would
               be
               imployed
               in
               this
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               By
               this
               meanes
               ,
               
               euery
               one
               of
               a
               fourme
               shall
               some
               way
               prouoke
               ,
               or
               incourage
               the
               rest
               of
               their
               fellowes
               .
               If
               they
               be
               but
               dull
               ,
               the
               rest
               will
               thinke
               to
               goe
               before
               them
               ;
               but
               if
               they
               be
               more
               pregnant
               and
               witty
               ,
               or
               more
               painfull
               and
               diligent
               ,
               they
               shall
               put
               spirits
               into
               all
               the
               rest
               ,
               and
               be
               as
               a
               spurre
               vnto
               them
               .
               For
               there
               is
               in
               our
               nature
               an
               inbred
               desire
               to
               ayme
               at
               the
               best
               ,
               and
               to
               wish
               to
               equalize
               them
               in
               each
               commendable
               quality
               ;
               if
               there
               be
               right
               meanes
               of
               direction
               and
               incouragement
               thereunto
               .
            
             
               Also
               euery
               one
               of
               a
               fourme
               may
               some
               way
               helpe
               the
               rest
               :
               
               for
               none
               are
               so
               dull
               ,
               but
               they
               may
               happely
               remember
               some
               thing
               ,
               which
               none
               of
               the
               rest
               did
               .
            
             
             
               This
               I
               haue
               seene
               by
               experience
               ,
               
               to
               be
               the
               very
               best
               way
               ;
               euen
               for
               those
               who
               but
               reade
               the
               Accedence
               ,
               to
               put
               so
               many
               of
               them
               into
               a
               fourm
               together
               ,
               as
               may
               be
               :
               they
               wil
               both
               further
               one
               another
               very
               much
               ,
               in
               reading
               it
               quickly
               (
               each
               helping
               and
               teaching
               others
               )
               and
               also
               they
               may
               sooner
               be
               heard
               ,
               when
               euery
               one
               need
               but
               to
               reade
               his
               piece
               of
               the
               same
               lesson
               ,
               the
               rest
               helping
               .
               Thus
               they
               will
               goe
               through
               very
               fast
               ,
               and
               be
               all
               ready
               to
               enter
               without
               booke
               together
               .
               Trie
               ,
               and
               finding
               the
               benefite
               ,
               you
               will
               not
               alter
               .
            
             
               6
               A
               sixt
               generall
               obseruation
               ,
               
               and
               of
               no
               lesse
               worth
               then
               any
               of
               the
               former
               ,
               may
               be
               this
               :
               That
               there
               be
               most
               heedfull
               care
               ,
               chiefly
               amongst
               all
               the
               youngest
               ,
               that
               not
               one
               of
               them
               be
               any
               way
               discouraged
               ,
               eyther
               by
               bitternesse
               of
               speech
               ,
               or
               by
               taunting
               disgrace
               ;
               or
               else
               by
               seuerity
               of
               correction
               ,
               to
               cause
               them
               to
               hate
               the
               Schoole
               before
               they
               knowe
               it
               ,
               or
               to
               distast
               good
               learning
               before
               they
               haue
               felt
               the
               sweetnesse
               of
               it
               :
               
               but
               in
               stead
               heereof
               ,
               that
               all
               things
               in
               Schooles
               be
               done
               by
               emulation
               ,
               and
               honest
               contention
               ,
               through
               a
               wise
               commending
               in
               them
               euery
               thing
               ,
               which
               any
               way
               deserueth
               prayse
               ,
               and
               by
               giuing
               preeminence
               in
               place
               ,
               or
               such
               like
               rewards
               .
               For
               that
               adage
               is
               not
               so
               auncient
               as
               true
               ;
               
                 Laus
                 excitat
                 ingenium
              
               .
            
             
               There
               is
               no
               such
               a
               Whet-stone
               ,
               
               to
               set
               an
               edge
               vpon
               a
               good
               wit
               ,
               or
               to
               incourage
               an
               ingenuous
               nature
               to
               learning
               as
               praise
               is
               ,
               as
               our
               learned
               Master
               Askam
               doth
               most
               rightly
               affirme
               .
            
             
               To
               this
               purpose
               that
               sentence
               of
               Tully
               were
               worthy
               to
               be
               written
               in
               euery
               Schoole
               ,
               
               and
               to
               be
               set
               vp
               in
               such
               places
               ,
               where
               it
               might
               euer
               stand
               in
               the
               Masters
               eye
               ,
               if
               it
               were
               possible
               ;
               that
               so
               euery
               teacher
               might
               at
               length
               be
               brought
               to
               the
               continuall
               practice
               ,
               of
               the
               good
               policy
               contained
               in
               it
               :
               to
               wit
               ,
               to
               bend
               all
               his
               endeauours
               to
               prouoke
               all
               his
               Schollars
               ,
               to
               striue
               incessantly
               ,
               which
               of
               them
               shall
               carry
               away
               the
               worthiest
               praise
               &
               commendation
               .
               The
               sentence
               is
               this
               ;
            
             
               Pueriefferuntur
               laetitiacum
               vicerint
               ,
               
               &
               pudet
               victos
               :
               vt
               tamse
               accusari
               nolunt
               ,
               quam
               cupiunt
               laudari
               :
               quos
               illi
               labores
               non
               perferunt
               vt
               aequaliumprincipes
               sint
               ?
            
             
             
               Besides
               this
               also
               ,
               
               this
               same
               strift
               for
               these
               Masteries
               ,
               and
               for
               rewards
               of
               learning
               ,
               is
               the
               most
               commendable
               play
               ,
               and
               the
               very
               high
               way
               to
               make
               the
               Schoole-house
               to
               bee
               
                 Ludus
                 literarius
              
               ,
               indeed
               a
               Schoole
               of
               play
               and
               pleasure
               (
               as
               was
               said
               )
               and
               not
               of
               feare
               and
               bondage
               :
               although
               there
               must
               bee
               alwaies
               a
               meete
               and
               louing
               feare
               ,
               furthered
               by
               wise
               seueritie
               ,
               to
               maintaine
               authority
               ,
               and
               to
               make
               it
               also
               
                 Ludus
                 à
                 non
                 ludēdo
              
               ,
               a
               place
               voyd
               of
               al
               fruitless
               play
               &
               loytering
               ,
               the
               better
               to
               be
               able
               to
               effect
               al
               this
               good
               which
               we
               desire
               .
            
             
               7.
               
               To
               the
               end
               that
               euery
               thing
               in
               the
               Schoole
               may
               be
               thus
               done
               ,
               
               by
               emulation
               and
               contention
               for
               praise
               ;
               there
               would
               be
               a
               carefull
               sorting
               ,
               and
               matching
               euery
               one
               with
               him
               ,
               who
               is
               next
               vnto
               him
               in
               learning
               :
               for
               this
               is
               also
               a
               most
               true
               prouerbe
               ;
               
                 Marcet
                 sine
                 aduersario
                 virtus
              
               :
               Vertue
               looseth
               the
               vigour
               and
               decayeth
               ,
               where
               it
               hath
               no
               aduersarie
               .
               So
               they
               would
               be
               placed
               as
               aduersaries
               ,
               that
               they
               may
               contend
               in
               all
               things
               ,
               whether
               of
               them
               shall
               doe
               the
               better
               ,
               and
               beare
               the
               bell
               away
               .
               Thus
               the
               whole
               fourmes
               through
               the
               Schoole
               ,
               should
               be
               diuided
               also
               into
               two
               equall
               partes
               ;
               to
               striue
               alwaies
               ,
               whether
               side
               of
               the
               fourme
               should
               get
               the
               victorie
               :
               like
               as
               it
               is
               in
               games
               ,
               at
               shooting
               ,
               or
               the
               like
               .
               Experience
               sheweth
               how
               this
               will
               prouoke
               them
               ,
               to
               be
               preparing
               and
               fitting
               for
               the
               victory
               .
               Euen
               as
               Archers
               will
               prepare
               themselues
               by
               exercising
               ,
               getting
               the
               best
               bowes
               &
               arrowes
               ;
               and
               then
               making
               first
               their
               choyse
               so
               equall
               as
               they
               can
               ,
               afterwards
               directing
               their
               fellows
               ;
               thus
               striuing
               by
               all
               means
               ,
               whether
               side
               shal
               beat
               :
               so
               will
               it
               be
               here
               .
               But
               of
               this
               I
               shall
               haue
               more
               fit
               occasion
               ,
               to
               tell
               what
               I
               thinke
               ,
               when
               we
               shall
               speake
               of
               the
               manner
               of
               diuiding
               of
               the
               fourmes
               .
            
             
               8.
               
               That
               we
               vse
               euer
               to
               appose
               the
               worst
               and
               most
               negligent
               of
               each
               fourme
               aboue
               all
               the
               rest
               ;
               
               though
               euery
               one
               somthing
               ,
               yet
               them
               principally
               .
               This
               wil
               make
               them
               more
               carefull
               ,
               &
               cause
               all
               to
               come
               on
               together
               in
               some
               good
               sort
               .
            
             
               9.
               
               That
               from
               the
               first
               entrance
               they
               be
               taught
               to
               pronounce
               euery
               thing
               audibly
               ,
               
               leasurely
               ,
               distinctly
               ,
               &
               naturally
               ;
               sounding
               out
               specially
               the
               last
               syllable
               ,
               that
               each
               word
               may
               be
               fully
               vnderstood
               .
               But
               of
               this
               wee
               haue
               spoken
               
               somwhat
               ;
               &
               shal
               speake
               more
               in
               the
               due
               place
               ,
               what
               a
               grace
               sweete
               pronunciation
               giues
               vnto
               all
               learning
               ,
               and
               how
               the
               want
               of
               it
               doth
               altogether
               mar
               ,
               or
               much
               deforme
               the
               most
               excellent
               speech
               .
            
             
               10.
               
               That
               they
               haue
               daily
               some
               speciall
               exercise
               of
               the
               memory
               ▪
               by
               repearing
               somewhat
               without
               booke
               ;
               
               as
               a
               part
               in
               their
               rules
               the
               foure
               first
               daies
               in
               the
               weeke
               ,
               the
               Lectures
               of
               the
               weeke
               ,
               or
               some
               part
               of
               them
               on
               the
               Friday
               ,
               al
               the
               rules
               of
               the
               weeke
               on
               the
               Saturday
               :
               besides
               matters
               of
               reports
               as
               Apologues
               or
               fables
               ,
               theames
               ,
               disputations
               ,
               and
               the
               like
               .
            
             
               The
               reason
               is
               ,
               because
               the
               daily
               practice
               hereof
               ,
               is
               the
               only
               means
               to
               make
               excellent
               memoryes
               ;
               
               so
               that
               the
               memory
               be
               not
               ouerloaden
               .
               But
               for
               this
               matter
               of
               saying
               without
               booke
               ,
               how
               farre
               it
               is
               to
               be
               vsed
               ,
               and
               what
               helpe
               may
               be
               had
               to
               preuent
               the
               ouertoyling
               ,
               &
               terrifying
               of
               Schollars
               with
               it
               ,
               and
               to
               supply
               some
               things
               better
               otherwise
               ;
               I
               hope
               I
               shall
               take
               a
               fitter
               place
               to
               speake
               of
               it
               hereafter
               .
            
             
               11.
               
               That
               for
               whatsoeuer
               exercises
               they
               are
               to
               learne
               ,
               
               they
               haue
               the
               best
               patternes
               to
               follow
               ,
               which
               can
               be
               procured
               :
               as
               in
               writing
               so
               for
               all
               kinde
               of
               learning
               ,
               how
               to
               do
               euery
               thing
               ;
               because
               all
               learning
               is
               principally
               gotten
               by
               a
               kinde
               of
               imitation
               ,
               and
               arte
               doth
               imitate
               the
               most
               excellent
               nature
               .
               The
               patternes
               being
               singular
               ,
               so
               shall
               their
               work
               proue
               in
               time
               ,
               eyther
               to
               expresse
               their
               patterne
               very
               liuely
               ,
               or
               happely
               to
               go
               beyond
               it
               .
               Of
               this
               also
               we
               shall
               haue
               occasion
               after
               to
               speake
               .
            
             
               12.
               
               The
               Masters
               to
               be
               alwayes
               vigilant
               ,
               
               as
               good
               leaders
               ;
               to
               labour
               to
               a
               liuely
               cheerfulnes
               ,
               to
               put
               life
               &
               spirit
               into
               the
               children
               ;
               &
               to
               incourage
               themselues
               in
               wel
               doing
               ,
               by
               amending
               whatsoeuer
               is
               amisse
               ,
               &
               supplying
               each
               thing
               ,
               wherein
               they
               are
               defectiue
               (
               obseruing
               the
               daily
               growth
               of
               their
               Schollars
               ,
               remembring
               stil
               that
               worthy
               counsel
               ,
               
                 Tu
                 ne
                 cede
                 malis
                 ,
                 sed
                 contra
                 audentiorito
              
               ;
               and
               also
               euer
               calling
               to
               minde
               whom
               they
               serue
               ,
               and
               how
               their
               reward
               is
               with
               the
               Lord.
               
            
             
               13.
               
               Constancy
               in
               good
               orders
               ,
               
               &
               exercises
               ought
               euer
               to
               be
               kept
               inuiolable
               ;
               with
               continual
               demonstration
               of
               loue
               in
               the
               Masters
               towards
               the
               Schollars
               ,
               &
               a
               desire
               to
               do
               them
               
               the
               vttermost
               good
               .
               This
               shall
               ouercome
               the
               most
               froward
               in
               time
               ;
               and
               vsed
               with
               the
               rest
               ,
               shal
               vndoubtedly
               bring
               forth
               the
               fruit
               of
               their
               desires
               .
            
             
               Though
               many
               moe
               directions
               might
               be
               added
               ,
               yet
               we
               will
               content
               ourselues
               with
               these
               for
               the
               present
               ;
               as
               being
               most
               generall
               and
               belonging
               to
               all
               which
               follow
               .
               Others
               we
               shall
               adde
               ,
               as
               we
               shall
               finde
               the
               fittest
               occasions
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               Certainly
               Sir
               ,
               these
               rules
               doe
               very
               much
               affect
               and
               delight
               me
               ,
               at
               this
               hearing
               of
               them
               ;
               neyther
               can
               I
               easily
               discerne
               which
               of
               them
               is
               most
               to
               bee
               preferred
               .
               If
               you
               had
               giuen
               mee
               so
               many
               crownes
               ,
               you
               could
               not
               haue
               gratified
               mee
               more
               :
               I
               purpose
               to
               put
               them
               in
               practice
               presently
               ,
               that
               I
               may
               finde
               that
               sweete
               and
               pleasant
               fruite
               of
               them
               ,
               which
               I
               fully
               conceiue
               may
               bee
               attained
               by
               them
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               If
               you
               take
               so
               much
               delight
               in
               the
               hearing
               of
               them
               ,
               I
               trust
               you
               shall
               doe
               much
               more
               in
               the
               proofe
               :
               and
               therefore
               hauing
               finished
               these
               ,
               we
               will
               now
               at
               length
               come
               vnto
               the
               Accedence
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             VI.
             
          
           
             How
             to
             make
             children
             perfect
             in
             the
             ACCEDENCE
             .
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               FOR
               the
               Accidence
               then
               ,
               I
               pray
               you
               acquaint
               mee
               what
               you
               haue
               learned
               ,
               how
               children
               may
               get
               it
               most
               speedily
               ;
               and
               how
               they
               may
               be
               made
               so
               very
               perfect
               in
               it
               ,
               as
               to
               answere
               so
               readily
               to
               any
               question
               thereof
               ,
               as
               you
               did
               affirme
               that
               they
               may
               ;
               and
               to
               make
               the
               right
               vse
               of
               it
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               You
               must
               euer
               first
               let
               me
               heare
               of
               you
               ,
               what
               course
               
               you
               haue
               taken
               ,
               and
               what
               you
               thinke
               to
               bee
               ordinarie
               in
               Schooles
               ,
               and
               then
               I
               will
               supply
               whatsoeuer
               I
               haue
               learned
               ;
               for
               that
               all
               shall
               be
               the
               better
               conceiued
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               For
               reading
               ouer
               their
               Accedence
               ,
               
               this
               is
               all
               that
               I
               haue
               vsed
               ;
               To
               let
               them
               reade
               it
               ouer
               euery
               one
               by
               himselfe
               by
               lessons
               ,
               as
               in
               reading
               other
               English
               :
               and
               so
               to
               heare
               them
               one
               by
               one
               ,
               as
               they
               can
               say
               .
               In
               the
               harder
               lessons
               to
               reade
               it
               ouer
               before
               them
               .
               Thus
               I
               make
               them
               to
               reade
               ouer
               their
               Accedence
               once
               or
               twise
               within
               the
               book
               ,
               before
               they
               doe
               get
               it
               without
               booke
               .
            
             
               Secondly
               ,
               
               for
               getting
               it
               without
               booke
               ,
               I
               cause
               them
               to
               doe
               likewise
               ,
               and
               to
               say
               as
               oft
               as
               they
               can
               .
               To
               keepe
               that
               which
               they
               haue
               learned
               ,
               by
               weekely
               repetitions
               ,
               and
               by
               saying
               parts
               .
               And
               for
               the
               meaning
               ,
               to
               teach
               it
               after
               by
               practise
               .
               Now
               I
               pray
               you
               shew
               me
               your
               iudgement
               ,
               and
               vouchsafe
               me
               your
               help
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               My
               iudgement
               is
               ,
               according
               to
               my
               experience
               ,
               that
               though
               this
               be
               the
               ordinary
               course
               ,
               
               yet
               it
               may
               be
               done
               with
               farre
               greater
               ease
               ,
               in
               lesse
               time
               and
               with
               much
               more
               profit
               ,
               to
               effect
               your
               desire
               :
               yea
               ,
               to
               teach
               ten
               or
               twelue
               as
               soon
               and
               readily
               as
               you
               shall
               teach
               one
               .
               Also
               to
               make
               them
               more
               full
               of
               vnderstanding
               ,
               that
               they
               shall
               be
               able
               to
               make
               right
               vse
               of
               their
               rules
               ,
               to
               enter
               into
               construction
               ,
               and
               goe
               forward
               readily
               together
               in
               construing
               ,
               parsing
               &
               making
               Latine
               .
               Whereas
               otherwise
               they
               must
               be
               taught
               the
               vnderstanding
               and
               vse
               of
               it
               after
               :
               which
               shall
               be
               another
               labour
               ,
               and
               bee
               as
               if
               they
               had
               not
               learned
               it
               at
               all
               before
               .
               Now
               th●
               meanes
               how
               all
               this
               may
               be
               effected
               are
               these
               :
            
             
               1
               For
               reading
               the
               Accedence
               .
            
             
               So
               soone
               as
               they
               enter
               into
               the
               Accedence
               ,
               
               put
               so
               many
               of
               them
               into
               a
               fourm
               as
               you
               can
               well
               ,
               to
               enter
               together
               ;
               as
               was
               shewed
               before
               .
               And
               therein
               first
               ,
               reade
               them
               ouer
               their
               lesson
               ,
               telling
               them
               the
               meaning
               shortly
               ,
               to
               make
               them
               a
               little
               to
               vnderstand
               it
               :
               and
               so
               they
               will
               learne
               it
               much
               sooner
               .
               Then
               let
               them
               one
               helpe
               another
               ,
               as
               they
               will
               doe
               learning
               together
               ,
               
               and
               euery
               one
               will
               draw
               on
               another
               ;
               one
               of
               them
               euer
               reading
               ouer
               the
               lesson
               ,
               that
               all
               the
               rest
               may
               
               heare
               ,
               and
               the
               rest
               telling
               where
               he
               misseth
               ;
               and
               so
               neuer
               idle
               till
               all
               can
               read
               it
               .
               When
               they
               come
               to
               say
               ,
               cause
               euerie
               one
               of
               the
               fourm
               to
               read
               his
               peece
               in
               order
               ,
               in
               like
               manner
               the
               rest
               to
               help
               where
               he
               sticks
               .
            
             
               By
               this
               meanes
               there
               will
               not
               bee
               much
               more
               labour
               with
               twelue
               ,
               then
               with
               one
               alone
               .
               Experience
               also
               wil
               shew
               ,
               that
               they
               will
               all
               goe
               forwarde
               more
               fast
               and
               surely
               then
               any
               other
               way
               .
               And
               although
               that
               they
               goe
               faster
               forward
               ,
               and
               not
               so
               very
               perfectly
               as
               they
               thus
               read
               it
               first
               ,
               yet
               they
               will
               soone
               reade
               most
               readily
               ,
               when
               they
               come
               to
               get
               without
               booke
               .
            
             
               When
               they
               haue
               once
               gone
               through
               it
               within
               booke
               ,
               
               let
               them
               begin
               to
               learne
               it
               without
               booke
               .
               
               Or
               else
               if
               they
               can
               reade
               well
               before
               ,
               you
               may
               let
               them
               learne
               to
               reade
               thus
               ,
               as
               they
               get
               without
               booke
               ,
               and
               so
               doe
               both
               vnder
               one
               .
               But
               then
               some
               howre
               or
               two
               would
               bee
               spent
               daily
               in
               the
               afternoon
               in
               reading
               ,
               
               or
               som
               day
               of
               the
               week
               separate
               therto
               :
               els
               they
               will
               somewhat
               forget
               to
               read
               ,
               because
               they
               reade
               but
               so
               little
               on
               a
               day
               ;
               which
               must
               be
               carefully
               preuēted
               .
               Therfore
               it
               will
               not
               bee
               amisse
               to
               reade
               it
               ouer
               speedily
               once
               or
               twise
               before
               .
               When
               they
               learne
               without
               book
               ;
               let
               them
               vse
               this
               Caueat
               especially
               ;
               That
               they
               take
               but
               little
               at
               a
               time
               ,
               so
               as
               they
               may
               be
               able
               to
               get
               it
               quickly
               and
               well
               ,
               and
               so
               go
               on
               to
               a
               new
               lesson
               :
               for
               this
               will
               harten
               them
               exceedingly
               to
               take
               paines
               ,
               in
               reioicing
               how
               many
               lessons
               they
               haue
               learned
               and
               how
               soone
               they
               haue
               learned
               each
               lesson
               ;
               Wheras
               giuing
               them
               ouermuch
               ,
               it
               will
               put
               them
               out
               of
               heart
               ,
               so
               that
               they
               will
               either
               doe
               nothing
               at
               all
               ,
               or
               with
               no
               life
               .
            
             
               2
               Before
               they
               goe
               in
               hand
               with
               a
               lesson
               ,
               doe
               what
               you
               can
               to
               make
               them
               to
               vnderstand
               the
               summe
               of
               the
               lesson
               first
               ,
               and
               the
               meaning
               of
               it
               :
               thus
               .
               1.
               
               Reade
               them
               ouer
               their
               lesson
               .
               
               2.
               
               Then
               shewe
               them
               the
               plaine
               meaning
               of
               euerie
               thing
               so
               easily
               ,
               
               shortly
               and
               familiarly
               ,
               as
               possibly
               you
               can
               ,
               and
               as
               you
               thinke
               that
               they
               can
               conceiue
               .
               After
               propound
               all
               vnto
               them
               in
               short
               questions
               ,
               and
               ask
               the
               questions
               directly
               in
               order
               as
               they
               lie
               in
               the
               book
               answering
               them
               first
               your selfe
               .
               Then
               if
               you
               will
               you
               may
               aske
               them
               
               the
               same
               questions
               ,
               
               and
               let
               them
               answere
               them
               as
               you
               did
               before
               ,
               
               still
               looking
               vpon
               their
               bookes
               ,
               when
               they
               aunswere
               .
            
             
               To
               require
               them
               to
               aunswere
               so
               ,
               will
               much
               incourage
               them
               ;
               because
               they
               shal
               find
               themselues
               able
               to
               doe
               it
               .
               The
               moe
               the
               questions
               are
               ,
               the
               shorter
               and
               plainer
               arising
               naturally
               out
               of
               the
               words
               of
               the
               book
               ,
               the
               sooner
               a
               great
               deale
               will
               your
               children
               vnderstand
               them
               .
            
             
               And
               therefore
               any
               long
               question
               is
               to
               be
               diuided
               into
               as
               many
               short
               ones
               as
               you
               may
               ,
               according
               to
               the
               parts
               of
               the
               question
               .
               Hereby
               the
               dullest
               capacities
               will
               come
               to
               conceiue
               the
               hardest
               questions
               in
               time
               ,
               and
               proceed
               with
               more
               facility
               ;
               so
               that
               the
               masters
               doe
               enter
               them
               thus
               from
               the
               beginning
               ,
               stil
               causing
               them
               to
               vnderstand
               as
               they
               learne
               .
            
             
               Here
               the
               masters
               must
               not
               be
               ashamed
               ,
               
               nor
               weary
               ,
               to
               do
               as
               the
               nurse
               with
               the
               child
               ,
               as
               it
               were
               stammering
               and
               playing
               with
               them
               ,
               to
               seeke
               by
               all
               meanes
               to
               breede
               in
               the
               little
               ones
               a
               loue
               of
               their
               masters
               ,
               with
               delight
               in
               their
               bookes
               ,
               and
               a
               ioy
               that
               they
               can
               vnderstand
               ;
               and
               also
               to
               the
               end
               to
               nourish
               in
               them
               that
               emulation
               mentioned
               ,
               to
               striue
               who
               shall
               doe
               best
               .
               Neither
               is
               the
               wise
               master
               to
               stand
               with
               the
               children
               about
               amending
               the
               Accedence
               ,
               if
               he
               thinke
               anie
               thing
               faulty
               or
               defectiue
               ;
               but
               only
               to
               make
               them
               to
               vnderstand
               the
               rules
               ,
               as
               they
               are
               set
               downe
               in
               the
               booke
               :
               for
               this
               they
               wil
               keep
               .
               
               To
               make
               this
               plain
               by
               example
               .
               To
               begin
               at
               In
               Speech
               be
               ,
               &c.
               
               First
               ,
               read
               them
               over
               the
               words
               :
               Then
               tell
               them
               for
               the
               meaning
               after
               this
               manner
               ,
               or
               the
               like
               as
               you
               please
               .
               The
               meaning
               is
               this
               ;
               That
               in
               Speech
               which
               men
               vtter
               ,
               there
               is
               nothing
               but
               words
               to
               cal
               or
               know
               things
               by
               ,
               and
               setting
               or
               ioyning
               of
               words
               together
               .
               Like
               as
               it
               is
               in
               our
               English
               tongue
               ,
               so
               in
               the
               latine
               ,
               &
               so
               in
               other
               tongues
               .
               And
               of
               these
               words
               which
               make
               this
               speech
               ,
               are
               not
               manie
               parts
               or
               kindes
               ,
               but
               onely
               eight
               parts
               of
               speech
               .
               For
               whatsoeuer
               can
               be
               spoken
               belongeth
               to
               one
               of
               these
               eight
               parts
               .
               They
               are
               either
               Nownes
               ,
               or
               Pronowns
               ,
               or
               Verbs
               ,
               or
               one
               of
               the
               rest
               .
               More
               shortly
               thus
               ;
               There
               is
               not
               any
               word
               in
               any
               language
               whatsoeuer
               ,
               but
               it
               is
               either
               a
               Nown
               or
               a
               Pronown
               ,
               Verbe
               ,
               &c.
               
            
             
             
               Also
               of
               these
               eight
               parts
               ,
               the
               fowre
               first
               onely
               are
               such
               as
               may
               be
               declined
               .
               That
               is
               ,
               such
               as
               each
               of
               them
               may
               bee
               turned
               or
               framed
               diuerse
               waies
               ,
               and
               haue
               diuers
               endings
               :
               as
               
                 Magister
                 ,
                 magistri
                 ,
                 magistro
                 .
                 Amo
                 ,
                 amas
                 ,
                 amat
                 .
              
               The
               other
               fowre
               last
               are
               vndeclined
               ;
               that
               is
               ,
               such
               as
               cannot
               bee
               so
               turned
               ,
               and
               haue
               but
               onely
               one
               ending
               :
               as
               ,
               
                 Hodie
                 ,
                 cras
                 ,
                 &c.
              
               
            
             
               Then
               ask
               them
               questions
               according
               to
               the
               same
               ,
               
               following
               the
               words
               of
               the
               book
               ,
               in
               this
               manner
               of
               the
               like
               ,
               as
               you
               thinke
               good
               .
            
             
               Q.
               How
               many
               parts
               of
               speech
               haue
               you
               ?
               Or
               how
               many
               parts
               are
               there
               in
               Speech
               ?
            
             
               A.
               Eight
               .
            
             
               Q.
               Of
               these
               how
               many
               are
               declined
               ,
               how
               many
               vndeclined
               ?
               So
               ,
               which
               are
               declined
               ,
               which
               vndeclined
               ?
            
             
               Afterwards
               to
               aske
               the
               same
               questions
               backe
               againe
               ,
               the
               last
               first
               .
               As
               ,
               which
               parts
               of
               speech
               are
               vndeclined
               ?
               Or
               how
               many
               are
               vndeclined
               ?
               So
               in
               the
               next
               .
            
             
               Q.
               What
               is
               a
               Nowne
               ?
            
             
               A.
               A
               Nowne
               is
               the
               name
               of
               a
               thing
               .
            
             
               Q.
               Of
               what
               thing
               ?
            
             
               A.
               Of
               such
               a
               thing
               as
               may
               bee
               seene
               ,
               selt
               ,
               heard
               ,
               or
               vnderstood
               .
            
             
               Q.
               Giue
               me
               some
               examples
               of
               some
               such
               things
               ?
            
             
               A.
               A
               hand
               ,
               a
               house
               ,
               goodnesse
               .
            
             
               Q.
               What
               is
               the
               name
               of
               a
               hand
               in
               Latine
               ?
               Or
               what
               is
               latine
               for
               a
               hand
               ?
               what
               is
               latine
               for
               a
               house
               ?
               and
               so
               forth
               .
            
             
               Then
               aske
               the
               questions
               as
               it
               were
               backward
               thus
               :
            
             
               Q.
               What
               part
               of
               speech
               is
               that
               which
               is
               the
               name
               of
               a
               thing
               ,
               which
               may
               be
               seene
               ,
               felt
               ,
               heard
               ,
               or
               vnderstood
               ?
            
             
               A.
               A
               Nowne
               ,
               &c.
               
            
             
               Thus
               to
               goe
               forward
               in
               euery
               rule
               .
               1.
               
               Reading
               it
               ouer
               to
               the
               children
               .
               2.
               
               Shewing
               the
               plaine
               meaning
               in
               as
               fewe
               words
               as
               you
               can
               .
               3.
               
               Propounding
               euery
               peece
               of
               it
               in
               a
               short
               question
               ,
               following
               the
               words
               of
               the
               booke
               ,
               and
               answering
               it
               your selfe
               out
               of
               the
               words
               of
               the
               booke
               .
               4.
               
               Asking
               the
               same
               questions
               of
               them
               ,
               and
               trying
               how
               themselues
               
               can
               aunswere
               them
               ,
               still
               looking
               vpon
               their
               bookes
               .
               Then
               let
               them
               goe
               in
               hand
               with
               getting
               it
               amongst
               themselues
               ,
               vntill
               they
               can
               say
               and
               answer
               the
               questions
               without
               booke
               readily
               ;
               the
               highest
               of
               the
               fourmes
               poasing
               the
               rest
               vntil
               they
               can
               say
               .
               By
               this
               means
               it
               wil
               seem
               so
               easie
               to
               them
               ,
               that
               they
               will
               go
               to
               it
               most
               cheerfully
               ,
               and
               get
               it
               much
               sooner
               then
               you
               would
               imagine
               ,
               both
               the
               vnderstanding
               and
               the
               words
               :
               for
               the
               vnderstanding
               of
               the
               matter
               will
               presently
               bring
               the
               words
               ,
               as
               we
               sayd
               .
            
             
               As
               they
               go
               forward
               ,
               
               striue
               to
               make
               them
               most
               perfect
               in
               these
               things
               specially
               :
               
            
             
               1
               In
               knowing
               a
               Nowne
               ,
               and
               how
               to
               discerne
               the
               Substantiue
               from
               the
               Adiectiue
               .
               After
               in
               the
               signes
               of
               the
               Cases
               .
            
             
               Then
               in
               declining
               the
               Articles
               ,
               
                 Hic
                 ,
                 haec
                 ,
                 hoc
              
               ;
               euerie
               Article
               by
               it selfe
               :
               as
               
                 Nom
                 ,
                 hic
                 ,
                 Gen.
                 huius
                 .
                 Dat
                 ,
                 huic
                 .
                 Accus
                 .
                 hunc
                 .
                 Ablat
                 .
                 hoc
                 .
                 &c.
              
               So
               in
               the
               Feminines
               .
               
                 Nom.
                 haec
                 .
                 Accus
                 .
                 hanc
                 .
                 Abl.
                 hac
                 .
                 &c.
                 
              
            
             
               By
               beeing
               perfect
               in
               these
               Articles
               thus
               ,
               
               they
               shall
               both
               bee
               able
               to
               decline
               any
               Nowne
               much
               sooner
               ,
               and
               to
               know
               the
               right
               Gender
               for
               making
               Latine
               .
            
             
               Also
               let
               them
               learne
               to
               decline
               both
               Latine
               and
               English
               together
               ;
               
               I
               meane
               Latine
               before
               English
               ,
               and
               English
               before
               Latine
               ,
               both
               in
               the
               Articles
               ,
               and
               other
               examples
               of
               Nownes
               ,
               Pronownes
               and
               Verbes
               .
               As
               in
               the
               Articles
               thus
               :
               Hic
               this
               Masculine
               ,
               haec
               this
               Feminine
               ,
               hoc
               this
               Neuter
               .
               
                 Gen.
                 huius
              
               of
               this
               Masculine
               ,
               Feminine
               ,
               Neuter
               .
               
                 Dat.
                 hui●
              
               ,
               to
               this
               Masculine
               ,
               Feminine
               ,
               Neuter
               .
               
                 Accus
                 .
                 hunc
              
               this
               Masculine
               ,
               hanc
               this
               Feminine
               ,
               hoc
               this
               Neuter
               ,
               
                 Voc.
                 caret
                 .
                 Ablat
                 .
                 ab
                 hoc
              
               from
               this
               Masculine
               ,
               
                 ab
                 hac
              
               from
               this
               Feminine
               ,
               
                 ab
                 hoc
              
               from
               this
               Neuter
               .
               Or
               hic
               this
               Male
               ,
               haec
               this
               Female
               ,
               hoc
               this
               Neuter
               ,
               &c.
               or
               hoc
               this
               thing
               .
            
             
               So
               the
               English
               before
               ,
               if
               you
               will
               :
               Though
               in
               these
               Articles
               it
               may
               suffice
               to
               decline
               the
               Latine
               first
               ▪
               so
               as
               before
               ,
               and
               in
               
                 (
                 is
              
               )
               and
               
                 (
                 qui
              
               )
               or
               the
               like
               .
               
               This
               kinde
               of
               declining
               in
               all
               examples
               following
               ,
               
               will
               be
               found
               such
               a
               helpe
               ,
               as
               it
               will
               hardly
               be
               thought
               ,
               vntill
               it
               be
               tryed
               ,
               both
               to
               speedie
               construing
               ,
               
               parsing
               ,
               and
               making
               Latine
               ,
               howsoeuer
               it
               may
               seem
               at
               first
               childish
               ,
               or
               but
               a
               toy
               ,
               and
               of
               no
               moment
               .
               The
               Latine
               before
               the
               English
               for
               construing
               .
               The
               English
               before
               the
               Latine
               ,
               
               for
               making
               Latine
               true
               .
               Then
               make
               them
               as
               p●rfect
               in
               their
               Genders
               forwards
               and
               backwards
               .
               As
               what
               Gender
               is
               hic
               ,
               and
               hic
               what
               Gender
               ?
               or
               what
               is
               the
               Article
               of
               the
               Masculine
               Gender
               ?
               so
               in
               the
               rest
               .
            
             
               After
               these
               ,
               
               make
               them
               as
               ready
               in
               their
               Declensions
               ,
               not
               onely
               to
               knowe
               what
               Declension
               euery
               word
               is
               of
               ;
               
               but
               also
               the
               seueral
               terminations
               of
               ●uery
               case
               in
               euery
               Declension
               ,
               both
               as
               they
               learn
               thē
               one
               by
               one
               ,
               according
               to
               the
               booke
               ,
               and
               after
               to
               giue
               them
               together
               ,
               when
               they
               haue
               learned
               them
               all
               ,
               and
               that
               in
               this
               manner
               as
               followeth
               .
            
             
               The
               Genitiue
               case
               singular
               of
               the
               first
               in
               ae
               dipthong●as
               ,
               musae
               ,
               the
               second
               in
               i
               ,
               as
               Magistri
               ,
               the
               third
               in
               is
               ,
               as
               
                 lapidis
                 &c.
              
               so
               thorough
               :
               and
               backward
               ;
               the
               Gen.
               of
               the
               fift
               in
               ëi
               ,
               as
               meridiëi
               ,
               of
               the
               fourth
               in
               us
               ,
               as
               manus
               ;
               the
               third
               in
               is
               ,
               as
               
                 lapidis
                 ,
                 &c.
              
               
            
             
               Then
               to
               decline
               perfectly
               euery
               example
               in
               each
               Declension
               ,
               
               in
               manner
               as
               the
               Articles
               :
               as
               for
               example
               ;
            
             
               Musa
               a
               song
               ,
               musae
               of
               a
               song
               ,
               musae
               to
               a
               song
               ,
               musam
               the
               song
               ,
               
                 ô
                 musa
              
               ô
               song
               ,
               
                 ab
                 hac
                 musa
              
               from
               a
               song
               ,
               or
               from
               this
               song
               .
               So
               in
               the
               Plurall
               number
               ,
               musae
               songs
               ,
               musarum
               of
               songs
               ,
               &c.
               
            
             
               After
               ,
               English
               first
               .
               A
               song
               musa
               ,
               of
               a
               song
               musae
               ,
               to
               a
               song
               
                 musae
                 .
                 &c.
              
               To
               giue
               them
               these
               signes
               ,
               because
               they
               signifie
               thus
               most
               commonly
               ,
               though
               not
               alwaies
               .
               Then
               appose
               them
               vntill
               they
               can
               giue
               readily
               any
               case
               either
               English
               to
               Latine
               ,
               
               or
               Latine
               to
               English
               :
               which
               they
               will
               soone
               doe
               .
               So
               in
               each
               Declension
               .
               
               After
               you
               may
               acquaint
               them
               to
               decline
               all
               the
               examples
               of
               the
               Declensions
               together
               ,
               putting
               in
               Regnum
               also
               ,
               because
               it
               differeth
               from
               Magister
               ;
               as
               
                 Nominatiuo
                 Musa
                 ,
                 Magister
                 ,
                 Regnum
                 ,
                 Lapis
                 ,
                 Manus
                 ,
                 Meridies
                 :
                 Gen.
                 musae
                 ,
                 magistri
                 ,
                 regni
                 ,
                 lapidis
                 ,
                 manus
                 ,
                 meridi●●
                 ,
                 &c.
                 
              
               This
               will
               helpe
               them
               presently
               to
               ioine
               anie
               Substantiues
               as
               they
               fall
               in
               the
               same
               case
               ,
               or
               the
               Substantiues
               and
               Adiectiues
               together
               .
            
             
             
               So
               if
               you
               please
               ,
               you
               may
               cause
               them
               to
               decline
               them
               so
               with
               the
               English
               adioined
               ,
               either
               before
               the
               latine
               or
               after
               .
               The
               moe
               waies
               they
               are
               thus
               declined
               ,
               to
               make
               them
               each
               way
               perfect
               ,
               
               the
               better
               they
               wil
               be
               learned
               ,
               if
               time
               wil
               permit
               .
            
             
               Of
               all
               other
               this
               is
               the
               shortest
               ,
               and
               wherby
               they
               may
               be
               most
               easily
               kept
               by
               them
               ,
               who
               haue
               anie
               vnderstanding
               ,
               to
               giue
               the
               bare
               terminations
               alone
               together
               ,
               as
               thus
               .
               Terminations
               of
               the
               Genitiue
               singular
               .
               
                 ae
                 .
                 i.
                 is
                 .
                 us
                 .
                 ei
                 .
              
               Datiue
               .
               
                 ae
                 .
                 o.
                 i.
                 ui
                 .
                 ei
                 .
                 &c.
                 
              
            
             
               And
               those
               vsuall
               signes
               of
               the
               cases
               ,
               as
               a
               ,
               of
               ,
               to
               ,
               the
               ,
               ô
               ,
               from
               .
               Thus
               to
               plie
               continual
               poasing
               ,
               each
               day
               a
               little
               ,
               vntill
               they
               can
               giue
               you
               any
               termination
               ,
               or
               ●ase
               in
               these
               examples
               .
               English
               to
               Latine
               ,
               or
               Latine
               to
               English.
               
            
             
               After
               to
               doe
               the
               like
               in
               bonus
               ;
               
               thus
               :
               Bonus
               a
               good
               Masculine
               ,
               bona
               a
               good
               Feminine
               ,
               bonum
               a
               good
               Neuter
               ,
               &c.
               
               We
               may
               English
               it
               after
               this
               manner
               ,
               for
               the
               better
               vnderstanding
               of
               the
               children
               :
               Or
               as
               wee
               can
               finde
               any
               more
               easie
               waie
               .
            
             
               After
               all
               these
               when
               they
               wex
               perfect
               in
               them
               ;
               
               the
               declining
               of
               Substantiues
               and
               Adiectiues
               ,
               of
               all
               sorts
               together
               ,
               is
               of
               very
               great
               profit
               ,
               either
               Latine
               alone
               together
               ,
               or
               Latine
               and
               English
               both
               together
               if
               you
               will.
               
            
             
               And
               first
               the
               examples
               of
               the
               booke
               .
               As
               
                 musa
                 bona
              
               a
               good
               muse
               ,
               
                 musae
                 bonae
              
               of
               a
               good
               muse
               ,
               
                 musae
                 bonae
              
               to
               a
               good
               muse
               ,
               &c.
               
            
             
               So
               Magister
               bonus
               ,
               Magistri
               boni
               ,
               &c.
               So
               Regnum
               bonum
               .
               And
               lapis
               bonus
               ,
               
                 a
                 good
                 stone
              
               ,
               lapidis
               boni
               ,
               
                 of
                 a
                 good
                 stone
                 ▪
                 or
              
               lapis
               durus
               ,
               lapidis
               duri
               ,
               &c.
               So
               manus
               foelix
               ,
               manus
               foelicis
               ,
               manui
               foelici●
               ,
               manum
               foelicem
               .
            
             
               Or
               meridies
               tristis
               ,
               meridiei
               tristis
               ,
               meridiei
               tristi
               ,
               meridiem
               tristem
               .
               &c.
               
            
             
               And
               in
               which
               you
               obserue
               them
               to
               miss
               most
               ply
               those
               vntill
               all
               be
               perfect
               .
            
             
               When
               they
               are
               very
               cunning
               in
               these
               ,
               then
               they
               are
               to
               be
               acquainted
               with
               declining
               other
               words
               like
               their
               examples
               ,
               still
               keeping
               them
               to
               those
               patterns
               ,
               where
               they
               miss
               .
               And
               first
               the
               words
               set
               downe
               in
               the
               margents
               of
               their
               books
               against
               each
               example
               .
            
             
             
               Then
               other
               Substantiues
               and
               Adiectiues
               together
               .
               As
               
                 sylua
                 s●nans
                 ,
                 syluae
                 sonantis
                 ,
                 syluae
                 sonanti
                 ,
                 &c.
                 
              
            
             
               
                 L●o
                 magnus
              
               ,
               a
               great
               lion
               ,
               
                 Leonis
                 magni
              
               of
               a
               great
               Lion
               ,
               
                 Leoni
                 magno
              
               ,
               to
               a
               great
               lion
               ,
               &c.
               
            
             
               Or
               English
               before
               .
               A
               great
               lion
               ,
               
                 Leo
                 magnus
              
               ,
               of
               a
               great
               Lion
               ,
               
                 Leonis
                 magni
              
               ,
               &c.
               
            
             
               Vnto
               these
               adioine
               the
               daily
               forming
               of
               comparisons
               :
               as
               
                 Gratus
                 ,
                 gratior
                 ,
                 gratissimus
                 .
                 Bonus
                 ,
                 melior
                 ,
                 optimus
                 .
              
               So
               ,
               
                 Foelix
                 ,
                 foelicior
                 ,
                 foelicissimus
              
               :
               first
               regular
               ,
               then
               irregular
               or
               out
               of
               rule
               .
            
             
               Then
               do
               the
               like
               in
               the
               Pronownes
               ,
               
               to
               make
               them
               to
               be
               able
               to
               decline
               and
               giue
               them
               readily
               ,
               English
               to
               Latine
               ,
               and
               Latine
               to
               English
               ;
               like
               as
               the
               Nownes
               .
               As
               Ego
               ,
               I.
               mei
               of
               mee
               ,
               &c.
               So
               backe
               againe
               .
               I
               ,
               Ego
               .
               of
               mee
               ,
               mei
               .
               to
               me
               ,
               
                 mihi
                 .
                 Tu
              
               thou
               ,
               tui
               of
               thee
               ,
               and
               thou
               tu
               ,
               of
               thee
               
                 tui
                 ,
                 &c.
                 
                 Sui
              
               of
               himselfe
               or
               of
               themselues
               ,
               sibi
               to
               himselfe
               ,
               or
               to
               themselues
               ,
               se
               himselfe
               or
               themselues
               .
               Is
               he
               ,
               ea
               shee
               ,
               id
               that
               thing
               ,
               eius
               of
               that
               man
               ,
               of
               that
               woman
               ,
               of
               that
               thing
               ,
               or
               that
               matter
               .
            
             
               Qui
               which
               man
               ,
               quae
               which
               woman
               ,
               quod
               which
               thing
               ,
               cuius
               of
               which
               man
               ,
               of
               which
               woman
               ,
               of
               which
               thing
               ;
               like
               as
               you
               may
               say
               ,
               hic
               this
               man
               ,
               haec
               this
               woman
               ,
               hoc
               this
               thing
               &c.
               or
               hic
               this
               Masculine
               ,
               &c.
               
            
             
               In
               these
               two
               and
               
                 (
                 hic
              
               )
               it
               may
               suffice
               onely
               to
               decline
               Latine
               before
               ,
               as
               was
               sayd
               .
            
             
               So
               to
               be
               very
               readie
               in
               the
               persons
               of
               the
               Pronouns
               ,
               
               both
               to
               shewe
               what
               person
               euerie
               one
               is
               of
               :
               and
               to
               giue
               euerie
               one
               both
               English
               to
               Latine
               ,
               and
               Latine
               to
               English.
               As
               when
               I
               say
               ,
               giue
               your
               first
               person
               singular
               ,
               Latine
               and
               English
               ;
               The
               child
               answereth
               Ego
               ,
               I.
               or
               I
               ,
               
                 Ego
                 .
                 &c.
              
               so
               what
               person
               euerie
               one
               is
               .
            
             
               But
               in
               the
               Verbes
               aboue
               all
               ,
               is
               your
               diligence
               to
               be
               shewed
               in
               making
               them
               not
               only
               perfect
               in
               declining
               euery
               example
               to
               be
               able
               to
               decline
               any
               Verb
               by
               thē
               ;
               but
               more
               specially
               in
               coniugating
               ,
               and
               being
               readie
               to
               giue
               you
               the
               Latine
               to
               the
               English
               ,
               and
               English
               to
               the
               Latine
               in
               any
               person
               ,
               of
               any
               Moode
               ,
               or
               Tense
               .
            
             
             
               To
               effect
               this
               most
               speedily
               ,
               
               teach
               them
               to
               say
               first
               the
               first
               persons
               of
               one
               cōiugation
               alone
               ,
               throgh
               the
               Actiue
               voyce
               ,
               both
               Latine
               before
               English
               ,
               &
               English
               before
               Latin
               ,
               thus
               :
               Amo
               I
               loue
               amabam
               I
               loued
               or
               did
               loue
               ,
               amaui
               I
               haue
               loued
               ;
               so
               through
               the
               Indicatiue
               mood
               .
               Then
               English
               first
               ,
               thus
               :
               I
               loue
               ,
               Amo
               :
               I
               loued
               or
               did
               loue
               ,
               
                 amabam
                 &c.
              
               
            
             
               And
               after
               withall
               to
               be
               able
               to
               run
               the
               terminations
               in
               euery
               tense
               :
               as
               in
               
                 amo
                 ,
                 o
                 ,
                 as
                 ,
                 at
                 ,
                 amus
                 ,
                 atis
                 ,
                 ant
                 .
              
               In
               
                 Amabam
                 ,
                 bam
                 ,
                 bas
                 ,
                 bat
                 ,
                 bamus
                 ,
                 batis
                 ,
                 bant
                 .
              
               And
               likewise
               the
               persons
               in
               English
               ,
               I
               ,
               thou
               ,
               he
               ,
               we
               ,
               yee
               ,
               they
               ,
               according
               to
               the
               terminations
               ;
               and
               then
               by
               apposing
               ,
               they
               will
               presently
               answere
               any
               of
               them
               .
            
             
               As
               thus
               ;
               aske
               the
               childe
               ,
               I
               loue
               :
               he
               answereth
               amo
               :
               then
               aske
               ,
               they
               loue
               ;
               he
               cannot
               tell
               .
               Bid
               him
               to
               runne
               the
               terminations
               of
               Amo
               ;
               he
               answereth
               
                 o
                 ,
                 as
                 ,
                 at
                 ,
                 amus
                 ,
                 atis
                 ,
                 ant
                 :
              
               then
               I
               say
               ,
               giue
               now
               they
               loue
               :
               he
               answereth
               amant
               :
               so
               yee
               loue
               ,
               or
               we
               loue
               ,
               &c.
               
            
             
               So
               aske
               ,
               I
               loued
               or
               did
               loue
               ;
               he
               answereth
               Amabam
               :
               then
               we
               loued
               or
               did
               loue
               :
               if
               he
               cannot
               tell
               ,
               bid
               him
               to
               runne
               his
               terminations
               ,
               and
               he
               will
               answere
               ,
               
                 bam
                 ,
                 bas
                 ,
                 bat
                 ,
                 bamus
                 ,
                 batis
                 ,
                 bant
                 .
              
               Then
               aske
               ,
               How
               say
               you
               ,
               we
               loued
               or
               did
               loue
               :
               he
               answereth
               Amabamus
               .
               Afterwards
               in
               Doceo
               :
               so
               in
               the
               rest
               .
            
             
               When
               they
               come
               at
               the
               Passiue
               ,
               let
               them
               doe
               the
               like
               :
               and
               when
               they
               haue
               learned
               it
               through
               ,
               then
               let
               them
               practice
               to
               repeate
               Actiue
               and
               Passiue
               together
               thus
               :
               I
               loue
               ,
               Amo
               :
               I
               am
               loued
               ,
               Amo●
               :
               I
               loued
               or
               did
               loue
               ,
               Amabam
               :
               I
               was
               loued
               ,
               Amabar
               :
               I
               haue
               loued
               ,
               Amaui
               :
               I
               haue
               beene
               loued
               ,
               
                 amat
                 us
                 sum
                 vel
                 fui
                 ,
                 &c.
                 
              
            
             
               Then
               by
               posing
               the
               first
               persons
               ,
               and
               running
               the
               terminations
               ,
               they
               will
               very
               soone
               giue
               any
               of
               the
               verbes
               in
               any
               person
               .
            
             
               They
               will
               by
               this
               meanes
               goe
               through
               all
               the
               coniugations
               ,
               and
               with
               this
               perfect
               readinesse
               ,
               as
               soone
               as
               they
               will
               learne
               to
               say
               them
               without
               booke
               ,
               without
               any
               vnderstanding
               at
               al
               if
               not
               sooner
               ;
               so
               that
               they
               be
               wel
               applied
               .
               Yet
               if
               this
               preuaile
               not
               as
               you
               desire
               ,
               you
               may
               exercise
               them
               
               to
               repeat
               al
               the
               persons
               through
               euery
               moode
               ,
               
               and
               person
               ,
               by
               themselues
               ,
               but
               chiefly
               the
               first
               persons
               :
               as
               ,
               
                 Amo
                 ,
                 amabam
                 ,
                 amaui
                 ,
                 amaueram
                 ,
                 amabo
                 :
                 Am●m
                 ,
                 amarem
                 ,
                 amauerim
                 ,
                 amauissem
                 ,
                 amauero
                 :
                 amare
                 ,
                 amauisse
                 ,
                 amaturum
                 esse
                 :
                 amandi
                 ,
                 amando
                 ,
                 amandum
                 ,
                 &c.
                 
              
            
             
               So
               in
               the
               second
               persons
               ,
               
                 Amas
                 ,
                 amabas
                 ,
                 &c.
              
               
            
             
               Or
               thus
               to
               coniugate
               those
               tenses
               together
               ,
               which
               doe
               come
               one
               of
               another
               :
               as
               
                 Amo
                 ,
                 amabam
                 ,
                 amabo
                 ,
                 amem
                 ,
                 amarem
                 ,
                 amare
                 .
              
            
             
               So
               ,
               Amaui
               ,
               amaueram
               ,
               amauerim
               ,
               amauero
               ,
               amauissem
               ,
               amauisse
               .
            
             
               This
               is
               accounted
               the
               speediest
               way
               ;
               in
               examining
               here
               ,
               to
               appose
               the
               same
               tenses
               ,
               
               of
               the
               seuerall
               moodes
               together
               :
               as
               the
               present
               tenses
               ,
               I
               loue
               ,
               Amo
               :
               Graunt
               I
               loue
               ,
               
                 Vtt●am
                 amem
              
               :
               I
               may
               or
               can
               loue
               ,
               amem
               :
               when
               I
               loue
               ,
               
                 cum
                 am●m
              
               .
            
             
               So
               in
               the
               Preterimperfect
               tenses
               .
            
             
               To
               make
               them
               most
               perfect
               in
               this
               ,
               practice
               them
               that
               they
               can
               giue
               readily
               ,
               
               the
               terminations
               of
               the
               first
               persons
               ,
               first
               in
               the
               Indicatiue
               moode
               ,
               in
               each
               tense
               ;
               then
               how
               the
               same
               tenses
               differ
               in
               the
               rest
               of
               the
               moodes
               ,
               
               except
               the
               Imperatiue
               ,
               together
               with
               the
               signes
               of
               the
               tenses
               in
               English.
               As
               for
               example
               :
               the
               termination
               o
               ,
               in
               the
               Indicatiue
               mood
               present
               tense
               ,
               is
               in
               the
               three
               other
               moodes
               turned
               into
               em
               or
               am
               ;
               as
               amo
               is
               made
               
                 amem
                 ,
                 doceo
                 doceam
                 lego
                 legam
                 ,
                 audio
                 audiam
                 .
              
               In
               the
               Preterimperfect
               tense
               ,
               bam
               is
               turned
               into
               rem
               :
               Preterperfect
               tense
               ,
               i
               into
               rim
               :
               Preterpluperfect
               tense
               ,
               ram
               into
               sem
               :
               Future
               tense
               bo
               ,
               or
               am
               ,
               into
               ro
               .
            
             
               So
               in
               the
               Indicatiue
               moode
               ,
               the
               terminations
               are
               these
               :
               
                 o
                 ,
                 bam
                 ,
                 i
                 ,
                 ram
                 ,
                 bo
              
               or
               am
               .
               In
               the
               other
               three
               are
               these
               answerable
               ;
               em
               or
               
                 am
                 ,
                 rem
                 ,
                 rim
                 ,
                 sem
                 ,
                 ro
                 .
              
            
             
               Though
               these
               be
               not
               one
               formed
               of
               another
               ;
               yet
               comparing
               them
               thus
               together
               ,
               wil
               make
               the
               children
               to
               learne
               them
               sooner
               by
               much
               .
            
             
               Generall
               signes
               of
               the
               fiue
               tenses
               actiue
               ,
               are
               ;
               Doe
               ,
               Did
               ,
               Haue
               ,
               Shall
               or
               will.
               
            
             
               Of
               the
               Passiue
               present
               tense
               ,
               Am
               ,
               Is
               ,
               Are
               or
               Art.
               Imperfect
               tense
               ,
               Was
               ,
               Were
               ,
               Wert
               .
               Preterperfect
               tense
               ,
               Haue
               beene
               .
               
               Preterpluperfect
               tense
               ,
               Had
               beene
               .
               Future
               tense
               ,
               Shall
               or
               Will
               be
               .
            
             
               Signes
               of
               the
               moodes
               are
               set
               downe
               in
               the
               booke
               ;
               the
               Indicatiue
               hauing
               no
               signe
               :
               the
               other
               three
               hauing
               their
               seuerall
               signes
               in
               English.
               
            
             
               
                 
                   This
                   little
                   Table
                   well
                   thought
                   on
                   ,
                   makes
                   all
                   most
                   easie
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     Actiue
                     voyce
                     .
                  
                   
                     Passiue
                     voyce
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                      
                  
                   
                     Signes
                     of
                     the
                     tēses
                     in
                     English
                     .
                  
                   
                     Terminations
                     in
                     latine
                     without
                     a
                     signe
                     .
                  
                   
                     Terminations
                     with
                     a
                     signe
                     .
                  
                   
                     Signes
                     of
                     the
                     tenses
                     in
                     English
                     .
                  
                   
                     Terminatiōs
                     in
                     lat
                     .
                     wthout
                     a
                     sign
                     .
                  
                   
                     Terminations
                     in
                     latin
                     with
                     a
                     sign
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     Present
                     tense
                     .
                  
                   
                     Do.
                     
                  
                   
                     o.
                     
                  
                   
                     em
                     or
                     am
                     .
                  
                   
                     Am
                     ,
                     is
                     ,
                     are
                     ,
                     art
                     .
                  
                   
                     or
                     .
                  
                   
                     er
                     ,
                     (
                     or
                     )
                     ar
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     Preterimperfect
                     tense
                     .
                  
                   
                     Did.
                     
                  
                   
                     bam
                     .
                  
                   
                     rem
                     .
                  
                   
                     Was
                     ,
                     were
                     ,
                     wert
                     .
                  
                   
                     bar
                     .
                  
                   
                     rer
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     Preterperfect
                     tense
                     .
                  
                   
                     Haue
                     .
                  
                   
                     i.
                     
                  
                   
                     rim
                     .
                  
                   
                     Haue
                     beene
                     .
                  
                   
                     sū
                     vel
                     fui
                     .
                  
                   
                     sim
                     vel
                     fu●rim
                     ,
                  
                
                 
                   
                     Preterpluperfect
                     tense
                     .
                  
                   
                     Had.
                     
                  
                   
                     ram
                     .
                  
                   
                     sem
                     .
                  
                   
                     Had
                     been
                     .
                  
                   
                     rā
                     vel
                     fuerā
                     .
                  
                   
                     essem
                     vel
                     fuissem
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     Future
                     tense
                     .
                  
                   
                     Shall
                     or
                     will.
                     
                  
                   
                     bo
                     am
                     .
                  
                   
                     ro
                     .
                  
                   
                     Shall
                     or
                     will
                     be
                     .
                  
                   
                     ber
                     .
                     ar
                     .
                  
                   
                     crov●i
                     fuero
                     .
                  
                
              
            
             
               For
               to
               make
               the
               childe
               to
               vnderstand
               this
               Table
               ,
               
               first
               shew
               him
               these
               things
               vpon
               his
               booke
               ,
               by
               comparing
               the
               Actiue
               voyce
               with
               the
               Passiue
               ,
               and
               the
               Indicatiue
               moode
               in
               both
               ,
               with
               the
               other
               moodes
               .
               After
               pose
               thus
               :
            
             
               Q.
               Do
               ,
               without
               a
               signe
               of
               the
               moode
               ,
               how
               must
               it
               end
               in
               Latine
               ?
            
             
               A.
               In
               o.
               
            
             
               Q.
               Do
               ,
               with
               a
               signe
               ,
               how
               ?
            
             
               A.
               In
               em
               or
               am
               .
            
             
               For
               example
               :
            
             
             
               Q.
               I
               doe
               loue
               ,
               or
               I
               loue
               ?
            
             
               A.
               Amo.
               
            
             
               Q.
               Graunt
               I
               loue
               .
            
             
               A.
               Vtinam
               amem
               .
            
             
               Q.
               I
               may
               or
               can
               loue
               ?
            
             
               A.
               Amem
               .
            
             
               Q.
               When
               I
               loue
               ?
            
             
               A.
               Cum
               amem
               .
            
             
               So
               in
               the
               Preterimperfect
               tense
               .
            
             
               Q.
               How
               say
               you
               Did
               ,
               without
               a
               signe
               ?
            
             
               A.
               bam
               .
            
             
               Q.
               With
               a
               signe
               .
            
             
               A.
               rem
               ,
               as
               Amabam
               ,
               amarem
               :
               Docebam
               ,
               docerem
               .
               
                 Haue
                 ,
                 without
                 a
                 singe
              
               .
               i.
               
                 With
                 a
                 signe
              
               ,
               rim
               ;
               as
               Amaui
               ,
               amauerim
               :
               Docui
               ,
               docuerim
               ,
               &c.
               
            
             
               The
               shortest
               way
               of
               all
               ,
               
               and
               most
               easie
               for
               all
               of
               vnderstanding
               ,
               
               is
               ,
               oft
               to
               repeat
               the
               bare
               signes
               and
               terminations
               ;
               specially
               at
               such
               times
               ,
               as
               when
               the
               younger
               sort
               are
               to
               make
               Latine
               :
               and
               this
               daily
               then
               ,
               vntill
               they
               be
               perfect
               ,
               or
               as
               shal
               be
               requisite
               ,
               thus
               :
               Actiue
               signes
               ,
               Do
               ,
               Did
               ,
               Haue
               ,
               Had
               ,
               Shall
               or
               will.
               Passiue
               ,
               Am
               ,
               Is
               ,
               Art
               ,
               Was
               ,
               Were
               ,
               Wert
               ,
               Haue
               bin
               ,
               Had
               bin
               ,
               Shall
               or
               will
               be
               .
            
             
               Terminations
               in
               Latine
               Indicat
               .
               or
               terminat
               .
               without
               a
               signe
               ,
               
                 o
                 ,
                 bam
                 ,
                 i
                 ,
                 ram
                 ,
                 bo
              
               and
               am
               .
               
                 
                   Termin
                   .
                   with
                   a
                   signe
                   ,
                   
                     
                       em
                       .
                    
                     
                       am
                       .
                    
                     
                       rem
                       ,
                       rim
                       ,
                       sem
                       ,
                       ro
                       .
                    
                  
                
              
            
             
               So
               Actiue
               and
               Passiue
               together
               .
               
                 
                   o
                   ,
                   or
                   .
                   bam
                   ,
                   bar
                   .
                   i
                   ,
                   sum
                   vel
                   fui
                   .
                   ram
                   ,
                   eram
                   vel
                   fueram
                   .
                   
                     
                       bo
                       ,
                       bor
                       .
                    
                     
                       am
                       ,
                       ar
                       .
                    
                  
                
              
               
                 
                   Em
                   ,
                   er
                   .
                
                 
                   Am
                   ,
                   ar
                   .
                
                 
                   rem
                   ,
                   rer
                   .
                   rim
                   .
                   sim
                   vel
                   fuerim
                   .
                   sem
                   ,
                   essem
                   vel
                   futissem
                   .
                   ro
                   ,
                   crouel
                   fuero
                   .
                
              
            
             
               These
               gotten
               ,
               all
               will
               be
               plaine
               ;
               if
               you
               vse
               withall
               to
               cause
               them
               to
               runne
               the
               tenses
               ,
               as
               was
               said
               ,
               with
               the
               signes
               of
               the
               persons
               ,
               thus
               :
               I
               ,
               thou
               ,
               he
               ,
               we
               ,
               ye
               ,
               they
               :
               
                 o
                 ,
                 as
                 ,
                 at
                 ,
                 amus
                 ,
                 at
                 is
                 ,
                 
                 ant
                 .
                 bam
                 ,
                 bas
                 ,
                 bat
                 ,
                 bamus
                 ,
                 batis
                 ,
                 bant
                 :
              
               so
               in
               any
               .
               And
               withall
               to
               remember
               in
               what
               letters
               ,
               or
               syllables
               euery
               person
               ends
               ,
               both
               in
               the
               Actiue
               and
               Passiue
               :
               as
               the
               first
               persons
               Actiue
               ,
               signifying
               (
               I
               )
               doe
               end
               commonly
               in
               
                 o
                 ,
                 am
                 ,
                 em
                 ;
                 im
                 ,
              
               or
               i.
               as
               
                 amo
                 ,
                 amabam
                 ,
                 amem
                 ,
                 amaui
                 ,
                 amauerim
                 .
              
               The
               second
               persons
               (
               or
               thou
               )
               in
               
                 as
                 ,
                 es
                 ,
                 is
              
               ,
               or
               sti
               :
               as
               
                 amas
                 ,
                 doces
                 ,
                 legis
                 ,
                 amauisti
                 .
              
               (
               hee
               )
               in
               
                 at
                 ,
                 et
                 ,
                 it
              
               .
               (
               wee
               )
               in
               mus
               .
               (
               yee
               )
               
                 in
                 t
                 is
              
               .
               (
               they
               )
               in
               nt
               .
            
             
               So
               in
               the
               Passiue
               ,
               (
               I
               )
               in
               
                 or
                 ,
                 ar
                 ,
                 er
              
               ,
               (
               thou
               )
               in
               ris
               ,
               or
               like
               the
               Actiue
               .
               (
               he
               )
               in
               tur
               .
               (
               we
               )
               in
               mur.
               (
               ye
               )
               in
               mini
               .
               (
               they
               )
               in
               ntur
               .
            
             
               By
               these
               the
               learners
               may
               haue
               a
               great
               light
               :
               and
               though
               some
               of
               them
               be
               both
               in
               the
               Actiue
               and
               Passiue
               ,
               and
               the
               Imperatiue
               moode
               doe
               differ
               so
               as
               no
               certaine
               rules
               can
               be
               giuen
               :
               yet
               they
               may
               be
               soone
               discerned
               and
               knowne
               .
               And
               the
               perfect
               knowledge
               of
               the
               Terminations
               beeing
               the
               speediest
               way
               to
               the
               getting
               the
               full
               vnderstanding
               ,
               both
               of
               Nounes
               and
               Verbs
               in
               euery
               tongue
               ;
               these
               would
               be
               learned
               first
               ,
               and
               euer
               kept
               most
               surely
               .
            
             
               The
               benefite
               also
               of
               this
               exquisite
               perfection
               in
               Nounes
               and
               Verbes
               ,
               
               is
               so
               singular
               ,
               for
               the
               speedy
               attayning
               of
               the
               Latine
               tongue
               ,
               as
               no
               paines
               in
               them
               can
               be
               too
               great
               .
            
             
               First
               ,
               the
               very
               difficulty
               of
               the
               Latine
               tongue
               ,
               is
               in
               these
               .
            
             
               Secondly
               ,
               these
               examples
               set
               downe
               in
               the
               booke
               ,
               are
               such
               liuely
               patternes
               of
               all
               Nounes
               and
               Verbes
               ;
               that
               Schollars
               being
               perfect
               in
               these
               ,
               will
               soone
               be
               perfect
               in
               any
               other
               .
               And
               for
               the
               other
               parts
               of
               speech
               ,
               the
               very
               words
               are
               most
               of
               them
               set
               downe
               in
               the
               Accedence
               ;
               as
               Pronounes
               ,
               Aduerbes
               ,
               Coniunctions
               ,
               Prepositions
               :
               Participles
               ,
               like
               the
               Adiectiues
               .
            
             
               So
               that
               these
               being
               gotten
               perfectly
               ,
               the
               Latine
               tongue
               may
               soone
               be
               attained
               in
               good
               maner
               ;
               euen
               by
               the
               meanes
               following
               :
               whereas
               without
               this
               perfection
               it
               is
               very
               difficult
               .
               So
               that
               the
               learners
               shall
               still
               goe
               incertainly
               and
               fearefully
               .
            
             
               Also
               by
               these
               meanes
               and
               helpes
               named
               ,
               this
               readinesse
               in
               them
               may
               be
               very
               speedily
               obtained
               ;
               whereas
               
               onely
               to
               be
               able
               to
               say
               them
               without
               booke
               ,
               without
               this
               vnderstanding
               ,
               is
               to
               little
               purpose
               :
               and
               to
               learne
               them
               by
               practice
               in
               construction
               ,
               and
               in
               writing
               exercises
               alone
               ,
               is
               most
               long
               ,
               hard
               and
               wearisome
               ,
               both
               to
               Master
               and
               Schollar
               .
            
             
               My
               former
               toyle
               and
               griefe
               in
               these
               ,
               aboue
               all
               other
               things
               in
               Grammar
               (
               though
               I
               tried
               all
               wayes
               which
               I
               could
               heare
               or
               deuise
               )
               with
               the
               ease
               and
               benefite
               in
               this
               way
               ,
               maketh
               me
               confident
               .
               For
               I
               haue
               found
               more
               profite
               by
               this
               course
               in
               a
               moneth
               ,
               then
               by
               all
               other
               in
               halfe
               a
               yeare
               .
               By
               this
               practice
               also
               ,
               it
               is
               most
               soone
               recouered
               when
               it
               is
               lost
               ,
               and
               most
               easily
               kept
               .
            
             
               Yet
               my
               meaning
               is
               not
               to
               haue
               Schollars
               to
               stay
               ouerlong
               to
               be
               so
               exquisite
               in
               them
               ,
               
               before
               they
               go
               any
               further
               ;
               but
               to
               go
               on
               so
               fast
               as
               they
               can
               well
               ,
               and
               to
               make
               them
               so
               ready
               by
               daily
               practice
               ;
               spending
               each
               day
               a
               quarter
               of
               an
               houre
               ,
               or
               more
               ,
               in
               them
               ,
               vntill
               they
               come
               to
               perfection
               .
            
             
               This
               were
               not
               amisse
               ,
               to
               be
               practiced
               sometimes
               also
               amongst
               the
               elder
               schollars
               ,
               which
               are
               not
               ready
               in
               them
               ;
               as
               also
               those
               comming
               from
               other
               Schooles
               ,
               till
               they
               grow
               perfect
               :
               here
               should
               be
               the
               beginning
               .
            
             
               If
               yet
               a
               shorter
               way
               can
               be
               found
               out
               ,
               we
               shall
               haue
               more
               cause
               to
               reioyce
               thereof
               .
            
             
               In
               the
               Participles
               ,
               the
               chiefe
               care
               would
               be
               to
               make
               them
               perfect
               ▪
               
               to
               know
               the
               seuerall
               tenses
               by
               their
               signes
               ,
               and
               endings
               English
               and
               Latine
               ,
               as
               they
               are
               in
               the
               booke
               :
               for
               declining
               ,
               they
               are
               the
               same
               with
               the
               Nounes
               .
            
             
               In
               the
               Aduerbs
               ,
               Coniunctions
               ,
               Prepositions
               &
               Interiections
               ,
               
               they
               would
               be
               made
               so
               ready
               ,
               as
               to
               giue
               English
               to
               Latine
               ,
               &
               Latine
               to
               English
               ,
               and
               to
               tell
               of
               what
               kinds
               they
               are
               ;
               and
               also
               to
               what
               cases
               each
               preposition
               serueth
               :
               and
               these
               specially
               .
            
             
               Here
               it
               were
               to
               be
               wished
               (
               as
               I
               take
               it
               )
               that
               all
               the
               rest
               of
               the
               Aduerbs
               ,
               
               Coniunctions
               ,
               &
               Interiections
               were
               also
               set
               down
               in
               the
               Accedences
               ;
               except
               only
               such
               Aduerbes
               as
               are
               deriued
               of
               other
               words
               :
               by
               which
               words
               they
               may
               be
               knowne
               ,
               or
               by
               their
               accents
               or
               terminations
               .
            
             
             
               Also
               that
               some
               rules
               were
               set
               downe
               for
               framing
               of
               these
               deriued
               Aduerbes
               ;
               
               and
               that
               all
               the
               rest
               of
               the
               Aduerbes
               and
               Coniunctions
               ,
               with
               all
               other
               wordes
               and
               sentences
               through
               the
               Accedence
               ,
               were
               Englished
               ,
               like
               as
               the
               Prepositions
               are
               .
            
             
               Hereby
               all
               these
               Latine
               wordes
               would
               soone
               bee
               learned
               perfectly
               ,
               and
               proue
               a
               very
               great
               helpe
               ,
               when
               children
               come
               to
               construction
               :
               for
               then
               they
               should
               haue
               but
               onely
               Nounes
               and
               Verbes
               to
               trouble
               them
               withall
               ,
               as
               was
               said
               ;
               and
               those
               most
               easie
               to
               be
               knowne
               ,
               by
               the
               meanes
               aboue
               mentioned
               ,
               and
               after
               .
            
             
               For
               the
               English
               rules
               great
               care
               would
               bee
               had
               likewise
               ,
               
               to
               make
               Schollars
               very
               ready
               in
               them
               :
               for
               these
               rules
               of
               themselues
               with
               a
               few
               other
               ,
               
               might
               serue
               for
               construction
               ,
               or
               making
               Latine
               .
               The
               perfect
               knowledge
               of
               them
               also
               ,
               will
               make
               the
               Latine
               rules
               easie
               ,
               when
               your
               Schollars
               come
               at
               them
               .
            
             
               In
               teaching
               these
               rules
               ,
               these
               two
               things
               would
               be
               obserued
               generally
               :
               
               first
               ,
               That
               the
               Schollars
               learne
               to
               construe
               each
               ensample
               ;
               and
               that
               without
               booke
               .
               Experience
               teacheth
               ,
               that
               those
               which
               art
               apt
               ,
               wil
               construe
               almost
               as
               soone
               without
               the
               booke
               ,
               
               as
               vpon
               the
               booke
               ,
               or
               as
               they
               will
               learne
               them
               construed
               :
               here
               by
               they
               shal
               get
               so
               much
               Latin
               ;
               beside
               that
               it
               wil
               be
               a
               great
               helpe
               to
               the
               perfect
               vnderstanding
               ,
               and
               applying
               of
               them
               .
               
               The
               second
               is
               ,
               to
               marke
               out
               with
               some
               speciall
               markes
               ,
               those
               wordes
               in
               which
               the
               force
               of
               the
               examples
               doth
               lie
               ;
               as
               the
               words
               agreeing
               ,
               or
               the
               word
               gouerning
               ,
               and
               the
               word
               gouerned
               ,
               and
               to
               cause
               the
               children
               to
               be
               able
               to
               tell
               them
               :
               
               and
               so
               euer
               in
               saying
               their
               rules
               without
               book
               ,
               to
               repeat
               ouer
               those
               wordes
               againe
               ,
               in
               all
               the
               longer
               examples
               .
               The
               rules
               or
               examples
               otherwise
               shall
               doe
               them
               little
               good
               ,
               because
               they
               know
               not
               how
               to
               make
               vse
               of
               them
               .
            
             
               But
               hereby
               they
               shall
               haue
               perpetuall
               and
               sure
               patternes
               and
               warrants
               for
               parsing
               ,
               making
               and
               trying
               Latine
               .
               I
               shall
               shew
               this
               more
               plainly
               ,
               when
               we
               come
               to
               the
               Syntax
               in
               Latine
               .
            
             
             
               These
               two
               things
               being
               obserued
               ,
               
               haue
               a
               chiefe
               regard
               in
               the
               rules
               ,
               first
               ,
               to
               make
               them
               perfect
               in
               the
               rule
               of
               finding
               out
               the
               principall
               Verbe
               ;
               secondly
               ,
               in
               the
               Concords
               ,
               as
               being
               of
               continuall
               vse
               ;
               thirdly
               ,
               in
               the
               rules
               of
               gouernement
               .
            
             
               And
               amongst
               those
               ,
               to
               looke
               specially
               to
               the
               two
               first
               rules
               ,
               
               of
               the
               case
               of
               the
               Relatiue
               Qui
               :
               and
               namely
               ,
               the
               latter
               of
               them
               ,
               viz.
               But
               when
               there
               commeth
               a
               Nom.
               case
               ;
               for
               in
               it
               Schollars
               most
               faile
               .
            
             
               Also
               in
               all
               rules
               of
               gouernment
               ,
               to
               make
               them
               able
               to
               tell
               you
               presently
               where
               any
               rule
               is
               ,
               
               and
               what
               cases
               such
               wordes
               gouerne
               :
               as
               ,
               Where
               beginnes
               the
               construction
               of
               Substantiues
               ?
               What
               cases
               they
               gouerne
               ?
               How
               many
               rules
               there
               are
               of
               them
               ?
               Or
               asking
               thus
               ;
               What
               case
               must
               your
               latter
               of
               two
               Substantiues
               be
               ?
               What
               case
               will
               such
               a
               word
               gouerne
               ?
               As
               Opus
               or
               Vsus
               ,
               What
               cases
               doe
               they
               gouerne
               ?
               Where
               is
               the
               rule
               ?
               So
               in
               the
               rules
               of
               the
               Adiectiues
               ,
               and
               all
               the
               rest
               throughout
               .
            
             
               In
               posing
               ,
               remember
               that
               which
               was
               first
               directed
               :
               to
               marke
               carefully
               the
               drift
               of
               the
               whole
               rule
               ,
               and
               so
               to
               propound
               your
               question
               ;
               or
               else
               to
               propound
               the
               whole
               rule
               in
               a
               question
               .
               As
               thus
               :
               when
               two
               Substantiues
               come
               together
               ,
               betokening
               diuers
               things
               ;
               what
               case
               must
               the
               latter
               be
               ?
               and
               why
               ?
               or
               by
               what
               rule
               ?
            
             
               Furthermore
               ,
               to
               the
               end
               to
               make
               your
               Schollars
               so
               very
               ready
               in
               the
               Accedence
               ,
               
               and
               to
               keepe
               it
               perfectly
               ;
               besides
               the
               learning
               all
               things
               so
               well
               as
               may
               be
               ,
               there
               must
               be
               also
               ,
               first
               ,
               daily
               repetitions
               and
               examinations
               ;
               because
               of
               the
               weaknesse
               of
               childrens
               memories
               :
               
               that
               so
               by
               long
               custome
               all
               may
               be
               imprinted
               in
               them
               .
            
             
               Heerein
               cause
               your
               first
               enterers
               to
               repeate
               ouer
               euery
               day
               ,
               all
               that
               they
               haue
               learned
               ;
               as
               they
               proceede
               to
               learne
               more
               ,
               
               to
               diuide
               it
               into
               partes
               ,
               to
               goe
               ouer
               all
               so
               oft
               as
               time
               will
               permit
               .
               For
               them
               who
               haue
               learned
               all
               their
               Accedence
               ,
               I
               holde
               it
               best
               (
               according
               to
               the
               manner
               of
               most
               Schooles
               )
               to
               diuide
               it
               into
               foure
               equall
               partes
               ,
               except
               the
               examples
               of
               the
               Verbes
               ;
               and
               
               to
               cause
               them
               to
               say
               a
               part
               euery
               of
               the
               fowre
               first
               dayes
               of
               the
               weeke
               ,
               to
               say
               ouer
               the
               vvhole
               each
               weeke
               once
               :
               for
               the
               Verbes
               ,
               how
               they
               specially
               would
               be
               parsed
               daily
               ,
               I
               spake
               before
               .
            
             
               In
               hearing
               parts
               ,
               
               aske
               them
               first
               the
               chiefe
               question
               or
               questions
               of
               each
               rule
               in
               order
               ;
               then
               make
               them
               euery
               one
               say
               his
               rule
               or
               rules
               ;
               and
               in
               all
               rules
               of
               construction
               ,
               to
               answere
               you
               in
               what
               words
               the
               force
               of
               the
               example
               lyeth
               ,
               both
               gouernour
               and
               gouerned
               ;
               saying
               the
               gouernour
               first
               .
               Where
               helpe
               is
               wanting
               ,
               to
               doe
               it
               only
               in
               the
               hardest
               and
               most
               necessary
               rules
               and
               questions
               ,
               or
               where
               we
               know
               them
               most
               defectiue
               :
               Or
               else
               only
               to
               repeate
               the
               rules
               and
               examples
               in
               such
               sort
               as
               was
               shewed
               ,
               without
               further
               examination
               .
            
             
               Though
               ,
               where
               there
               is
               helpe
               and
               time
               enough
               ,
               it
               is
               far
               the
               surest
               ,
               to
               cause
               them
               to
               repeate
               the
               whole
               part
               ,
               and
               to
               examine
               each
               peece
               of
               it
               daily
               ,
               though
               they
               say
               the
               lesse
               at
               a
               time
               .
               
               Secondly
               ,
               the
               spending
               of
               one
               moneth
               or
               two
               ,
               after
               they
               haue
               first
               learned
               ouer
               their
               Accedence
               ,
               to
               make
               them
               perfect
               thus
               euery
               way
               ,
               will
               be
               time
               as
               well
               bestowed
               as
               they
               can
               bestowe
               any
               ;
               to
               preuent
               both
               the
               griefe
               and
               anger
               of
               the
               Master
               after
               ,
               and
               also
               the
               feare
               and
               punishment
               of
               the
               Schollar
               .
               
               Thirdly
               ,
               euerie
               daie
               some
               time
               would
               bee
               separate
               ,
               to
               the
               examining
               Nownes
               and
               Verbes
               ;
               chiefely
               the
               Verbes
               ,
               vntill
               they
               could
               not
               be
               set
               in
               declining
               ,
               coniugating
               ,
               giuing
               any
               termination
               ,
               case
               or
               person
               .
            
             
               This
               continuall
               practice
               of
               parsing
               ,
               
               would
               bee
               constantly
               kept
               as
               neede
               shall
               require
               ,
               vntill
               by
               long
               vse
               children
               growe
               to
               perfection
               and
               surenesse
               :
               Because
               the
               Accedence
               thus
               gotten
               perfectly
               ;
               and
               after
               in
               like
               maner
               the
               rules
               of
               Nownes
               and
               Verbes
               in
               
                 Propria
                 qua
                 maribus
              
               ,
               Heteroclits
               and
               in
               
                 As
                 in
                 praesenti
              
               ;
               the
               difficulty
               of
               learning
               is
               past
               :
               so
               that
               verie
               children
               ,
               with
               a
               little
               practice
               ,
               will
               goe
               forvvard
               vvith
               much
               cheerefulnesse
               ,
               in
               construing
               ,
               parsing
               ,
               making
               and
               proouing
               Latine
               ,
               by
               the
               helps
               following
               .
            
             
               Thus
               haue
               I
               set
               you
               downe
               so
               plainely
               as
               I
               can
               ,
               how
               
               the
               Accedence
               may
               be
               gotten
               most
               speedily
               and
               profitably
               ,
               to
               make
               all
               learning
               a
               play
               .
               Trie
               ,
               and
               you
               will
               acknowledge
               Gods
               blessing
               herein
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               I
               acknowledge
               your
               kindnesse
               :
               I
               can
               make
               no
               doubt
               of
               the
               courses
               ;
               because
               ,
               besides
               your
               experience
               ,
               I
               see
               so
               euident
               reason
               in
               euery
               part
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               Put
               them
               in
               vre
               ,
               and
               so
               you
               shall
               haue
               more
               full
               assurance
               ,
               and
               daily
               be
               helping
               to
               find
               out
               better
               ,
               or
               to
               confirme
               the
               pricipall
               of
               these
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             VII
             .
          
           
             How
             to
             make
             Schollars
             perfect
             in
             the
             Grammar
             .
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               I
               Intend
               to
               put
               them
               in
               practice
               forthwith
               :
               but
               in
               the
               meane
               time
               as
               you
               haue
               thus
               louingly
               gone
               with
               mee
               ,
               to
               direct
               me
               ,
               how
               to
               make
               the
               Accedence
               so
               plaine
               and
               easie
               to
               my
               little
               ones
               ;
               so
               I
               intreat
               you
               to
               point
               me
               out
               the
               way
               ,
               how
               they
               may
               proceed
               in
               the
               Grammar
               with
               like
               happy
               successe
               .
               
               As
               for
               mine
               owne
               selfe
               ,
               I
               haue
               onely
               vsed
               to
               cause
               my
               schollars
               to
               learne
               it
               without
               booke
               ,
               and
               a
               little
               to
               construe
               it
               ;
               and
               after
               ,
               to
               make
               it
               as
               perfect
               as
               I
               can
               ,
               by
               oft
               saying
               Parts
               :
               Finally
               ,
               in
               parsing
               their
               lectures
               to
               giue
               the
               rules
               .
               This
               hath
               been
               all
               that
               I
               haue
               done
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               I
               knowe
               that
               which
               you
               mention
               ,
               to
               bee
               the
               most
               that
               is
               done
               ordinarily
               :
               but
               to
               say
               without
               booke
               and
               construe
               a
               little
               ,
               
               are
               smally
               auaileable
               ,
               vnlesse
               your
               schollar
               be
               able
               to
               shew
               the
               meaning
               and
               vse
               of
               his
               rules
               .
               Yea
               ,
               it
               is
               very
               requisite
               ,
               that
               here
               also
               they
               should
               bee
               able
               to
               giue
               the
               seuerall
               examples
               ,
               and
               in
               what
               words
               the
               force
               of
               each
               example
               lyeth
               ;
               and
               so
               to
               apply
               the
               examples
               to
               the
               rules
               ,
               to
               the
               end
               that
               they
               may
               doe
               the
               like
               by
               them
               ,
               in
               parsing
               ,
               or
               making
               Latine
               .
               And
               moreouer
               ,
               in
               Nownes
               and
               Verbes
               ,
               to
               
               bee
               able
               not
               onely
               to
               decline
               them
               ,
               and
               to
               giue
               English
               to
               the
               Latine
               words
               ;
               but
               the
               Latine
               words
               also
               to
               the
               English.
               Grammar
               being
               made
               perfect
               in
               this
               manner
               ,
               will
               make
               all
               other
               their
               learning
               more
               easie
               and
               delightsome
               ,
               and
               be
               as
               a
               Dictionary
               in
               their
               heads
               ,
               for
               many
               chiefe
               words
               :
               neither
               will
               there
               any
               losse
               of
               time
               in
               it
               ;
               especially
               this
               beeing
               done
               as
               they
               learne
               it
               ,
               and
               still
               gotten
               more
               perfectly
               by
               such
               continuall
               repetitions
               and
               examinations
               .
               I
               haue
               had
               experience
               in
               both
               .
            
             
               To
               the
               end
               that
               they
               may
               thus
               get
               the
               Grammar
               with
               most
               fruite
               and
               ease
               ;
               
            
             
               1
               Let
               them
               learne
               euery
               rule
               (
               I
               meane
               )
               those
               which
               are
               commonly
               read
               in
               Schooles
               ,
               
               and
               that
               perfectly
               as
               they
               goe
               forward
               ,
               together
               with
               the
               titles
               set
               before
               the
               rules
               ,
               and
               the
               summes
               of
               the
               rules
               which
               are
               set
               in
               the
               margents
               .
               
            
             
               The
               manner
               of
               it
               I
               finde
               to
               be
               most
               direct
               thus
               ,
               for
               all
               the
               younger
               sort
               of
               enterers
               :
               
            
             
               Where
               you
               haue
               time
               enough
               ,
               
               in
               giuing
               them
               rules
               ,
               do
               as
               in
               the
               Accedence
               .
            
             
               1.
               
               Reade
               them
               ouer
               their
               rule
               leasurely
               ,
               and
               distinctly
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               Construe
               it
               ,
               
               and
               then
               shew
               them
               the
               plaine
               meaning
               of
               it
               ,
               by
               applying
               the
               examples
               ,
               as
               teaching
               them
               to
               decline
               the
               words
               or
               the
               like
               .
               As
               I
               shall
               shewe
               after
               .
            
             
               Or
               else
               for
               most
               ease
               and
               speedinesse
               in
               construing
               ,
               
               and
               for
               lacke
               of
               leasure
               ,
               
               cause
               euery
               one
               of
               your
               Schollars
               to
               haue
               a
               booke
               of
               the
               construing
               of
               Lillies
               rules
               ,
               and
               each
               to
               reade
               ouer
               his
               rule
               ,
               so
               oft
               vpon
               that
               booke
               vntill
               he
               can
               construe
               without
               it
               ;
               
               or
               else
               after
               a
               time
               ,
               to
               trie
               how
               hee
               can
               beate
               it
               out
               of
               himselfe
               ,
               and
               be
               helped
               by
               that
               book
               where
               hee
               sticketh
               .
            
             
               By
               the
               helpe
               of
               these
               bookes
               ,
               I
               finde
               that
               they
               will
               learne
               to
               construe
               their
               rules
               much
               sooner
               ,
               then
               they
               can
               without
               ,
               
               I
               take
               it
               by
               almost
               one
               halfe
               of
               the
               time
               ;
               and
               thereby
               gaine
               so
               much
               time
               ,
               to
               bee
               imployed
               in
               other
               studies
               ,
               because
               they
               shall
               haue
               it
               euer
               before
               their
               eie
               without
               any
               asking
               or
               searching
               :
               
               wheras
               otherwise
               either
               their
               Master
               or
               some
               other
               must
               tell
               them
               euery
               word
               ,
               which
               
               they
               cannot
               tell
               ,
               or
               else
               they
               must
               turne
               to
               it
               in
               their
               Dictionaries
               ,
               
               vntill
               they
               can
               construe
               :
               and
               that
               so
               oft
               as
               they
               forget
               ;
               which
               ,
               what
               a
               toyle
               and
               hinderance
               it
               is
               to
               the
               Master
               ,
               and
               feare
               to
               the
               Schollar
               ,
               euery
               one
               knoweth
               .
               From
               all
               which
               they
               may
               bee
               freed
               hereby
               ;
               and
               when
               they
               haue
               forgot
               they
               may
               soonerecouer
               themselues
               againe
               .
               Finally
               ,
               they
               shall
               hereby
               increase
               daily
               in
               reading
               English
               ,
               and
               be
               furthered
               to
               write
               true
               Orthography
               in
               English
               ,
               as
               they
               grow
               in
               Latine
               .
               And
               so
               the
               Masters
               shall
               also
               be
               freed
               from
               feare
               of
               that
               mischiefe
               ,
               
               of
               these
               little
               ones
               forgetting
               to
               read
               English
               ,
               when
               they
               first
               learne
               latine
               ;
               and
               from
               the
               clamours
               and
               accusations
               of
               their
               Parents
               in
               this
               behalfe
               ,
               spoken
               of
               before
               .
            
             
               But
               here
               it
               were
               to
               be
               wished
               ,
               
               that
               those
               books
               of
               construing
               Lillies
               rules
               were
               translated
               euer
               Grammatically
               ;
               the
               manner
               of
               which
               translation
               I
               shall
               shew
               after
               ,
               with
               the
               benefits
               of
               them
               :
               And
               also
               that
               not
               onely
               the
               Substantiue
               and
               Adiectiue
               ,
               Preposition
               and
               his
               case
               were
               euer
               construed
               and
               set
               together
               ,
               wheresoeuer
               they
               are
               to
               be
               taken
               together
               ;
               
               but
               withal
               that
               euery
               word
               were
               Englished
               in
               the
               first
               ,
               proper
               ,
               natural
               ,
               and
               distinct
               signification
               .
               In
               which
               things
               they
               oft
               faile
               ,
               
               as
               in
               the
               Verbes
               chiefely
               :
               though
               of
               all
               other
               things
               ,
               that
               be
               more
               necessary
               ,
               for
               Schollars
               ,
               to
               know
               the
               first
               and
               naturall
               signification
               ;
               for
               the
               other
               then
               will
               soone
               be
               learned
               ,
               by
               reason
               and
               vse
               :
               or
               else
               som
               of
               the
               other
               most
               vsual
               significations
               might
               be
               put
               in
               ,
               in
               other
               letters
               ,
               or
               with
               notes
               to
               know
               them
               .
            
             
               Thus
               the
               childe
               might
               goe
               surely
               forwarde
               ,
               and
               haue
               a
               certaine
               direction
               for
               the
               right
               and
               proper
               vse
               of
               euery
               word
               ,
               to
               bee
               more
               sure
               to
               him
               then
               any
               Dictionarie
               ,
               all
               his
               life
               long
               ,
               either
               for
               construing
               or
               making
               Latine
               :
               Whereas
               beeing
               set
               downe
               in
               generall
               significations
               not
               distinct
               ,
               they
               shall
               euer
               goe
               doubtfully
               &
               abuse
               the
               words
               :
               as
               when
               
                 traho
                 ,
                 promo
                 ,
                 haurio
              
               ,
               are
               set
               downe
               euery
               one
               of
               them
               to
               draw
               ,
               without
               further
               distinction
               .
            
             
               The
               benefit
               would
               be
               much
               more
               ,
               if
               it
               were
               thus
               translated
               :
               for
               then
               they
               might
               learne
               thereby
               not
               only
               to
               construe
               
               truely
               ,
               to
               vnderstand
               and
               goe
               truly
               ;
               but
               also
               to
               make
               and
               speake
               the
               same
               Latine
               :
               I
               meane
               ,
               to
               answer
               easily
               to
               all
               the
               rules
               ,
               with
               the
               other
               benefits
               of
               Grammaticall
               translations
               .
            
             
               When
               they
               can
               construe
               in
               some
               good
               sort
               ,
               
               and
               vnderstand
               (
               as
               was
               sayde
               )
               then
               let
               them
               get
               without
               booke
               perfectly
               .
            
             
               In
               getting
               without
               book
               ,
               
               when
               they
               can
               read
               it
               perfectly
               ,
               
               they
               may
               bee
               much
               helped
               thus
               ,
               in
               all
               things
               which
               they
               learne
               in
               verse
               ;
               to
               reade
               them
               ouer
               in
               a
               kinde
               of
               singing
               voyce
               ,
               and
               after
               the
               manner
               of
               the
               running
               of
               the
               verse
               ;
               oft
               tuning
               over
               one
               verse
               vntil
               they
               can
               say
               that
               ,
               then
               another
               ;
               and
               so
               forward
               :
               which
               they
               will
               do
               presently
               ,
               if
               the
               Master
               do
               but
               reade
               them
               so
               before
               them
               .
            
             
               Also
               ,
               
               to
               say
               these
               rules
               at
               parts
               sometimes
               ,
               after
               the
               same
               manner
               of
               scanning
               ,
               or
               running
               as
               a
               verse
               ,
               shall
               make
               them
               both
               more
               easily
               kept
               ,
               and
               bee
               a
               good
               helpe
               for
               right
               pronuntiation
               of
               quantities
               ,
               and
               to
               prepare
               them
               the
               more
               easily
               to
               make
               a
               verse
               ,
               for
               authorities
               and
               the
               like
               .
            
             
               When
               they
               can
               say
               perfectly
               without
               book
               ,
               
               then
               (
               if
               you
               please
               )
               you
               may
               cause
               all
               those
               who
               are
               any
               thing
               apt
               and
               pregnant
               ,
               to
               learne
               to
               construe
               also
               without
               booke
               :
               which
               they
               will
               do
               very
               quickly
               ,
               with
               a
               little
               reading
               ouer
               and
               ouer
               ,
               vpon
               the
               construing
               booke
               ;
               and
               almost
               as
               soone
               as
               they
               will
               construe
               vpon
               the
               booke
               .
            
             
               By
               this
               meanes
               they
               will
               bee
               able
               presently
               to
               giue
               not
               onely
               the
               English
               to
               the
               Latine
               ,
               
               but
               also
               the
               Latine
               to
               the
               English
               ,
               of
               any
               word
               in
               the
               rule
               ,
               to
               be
               perfect
               thereby
               ,
               and
               to
               keep
               all
               more
               firmly
               .
            
             
               Or
               where
               leasure
               is
               wanting
               ,
               
               among
               the
               elder
               sort
               ,
               
               which
               
               are
               well
               entred
               in
               the
               rules
               ;
               they
               may
               first
               learne
               without
               booke
               ,
               then
               to
               construe
               ,
               both
               vpon
               the
               book
               and
               without
               :
               Or
               to
               construe
               first
               .
               It
               is
               not
               very
               materiall
               :
               but
               ,
               as
               themselues
               doe
               finde
               that
               they
               can
               get
               it
               most
               easily
               ,
               at
               the
               Masters
               discretion
               .
            
             
               Although
               for
               all
               the
               first
               enterers
               and
               younger
               sort
               ,
               
               I
               finde
               it
               the
               surest
               vvaie
               ,
               vvhere
               the
               Maisters
               leasure
               
               will
               serue
               ,
               to
               cause
               them
               first
               to
               vnderstand
               the
               rule
               and
               the
               meaning
               of
               it
               ,
               by
               a
               short
               opening
               or
               expressing
               the
               sum
               of
               it
               ,
               and
               then
               by
               questions
               in
               English
               ,
               as
               I
               directed
               before
               :
               All
               of
               the
               learners
               looking
               vpon
               their
               bookes
               as
               hee
               readeth
               vnto
               them
               ;
               that
               they
               may
               see
               the
               questions
               and
               answeres
               in
               their
               books
               ,
               eyther
               wholly
               ,
               or
               the
               most
               part
               therof
               .
            
             
               And
               when
               they
               can
               aunswere
               in
               English
               ,
               looking
               vpon
               their
               books
               ,
               or
               do
               vnderstand
               the
               rule
               ;
               then
               to
               learne
               to
               construe
               it
               of
               themselues
               ,
               and
               to
               get
               it
               without
               booke
               .
            
             
               After
               ,
               
               ar
               the
               saying
               of
               their
               rules
               ,
               when
               they
               haue
               sayde
               without
               booke
               and
               construed
               ;
               
               to
               labour
               especially
               to
               cause
               them
               to
               be
               able
               to
               aunswere
               ,
               without
               book
               ,
               each
               part
               of
               the
               rule
               ,
               and
               that
               both
               in
               English
               and
               Latine
               together
               ,
               after
               they
               are
               a
               little
               entered
               ;
               that
               with
               the
               meaning
               and
               English
               ,
               you
               may
               beate
               the
               Latine
               into
               their
               heads
               also
               ,
               to
               helpe
               to
               prepare
               them
               to
               speake
               and
               perse
               in
               latine
               .
            
             
               Let
               the
               manner
               of
               the
               appoasing
               be
               here
               ,
               
               as
               in
               the
               Accedence
               ,
               viz.
               by
               short
               questions
               ,
               propounded
               vnto
               them
               ,
               arising
               directly
               out
               of
               the
               words
               of
               the
               booke
               ,
               either
               out
               of
               the
               summe
               and
               title
               of
               the
               rule
               set
               before
               it
               ,
               or
               set
               in
               the
               margent
               euer
               against
               it
               ,
               or
               out
               of
               the
               very
               words
               of
               the
               rule
               ;
               and
               withall
               ,
               the
               examples
               of
               the
               rule
               ,
               and
               how
               to
               apply
               them
               to
               the
               seuerall
               rules
               .
            
             
               I
               will
               set
               you
               downe
               an
               example
               or
               two
               more
               at
               large
               ,
               
               that
               you
               or
               any
               may
               doe
               the
               like
               the
               more
               easily
               .
               To
               begin
               at
               
                 Propria
                 quae
                 maribus
              
               :
               
               first
               ,
               you
               haue
               the
               Title
               before
               
                 Regulae
                 generales
                 propriorum
              
               .
               Out
               of
               which
               ,
               you
               may
               shewe
               them
               thus
               ;
               
               That
               according
               to
               the
               order
               of
               their
               Accedence
               ,
               as
               the
               first
               part
               of
               speech
               is
               a
               Nowne
               ,
               so
               here
               are
               rules
               first
               of
               Nownes
               :
               And
               as
               their
               Accedence
               hath
               first
               the
               Substantiue
               then
               the
               Adiectiue
               ,
               so
               here
               begin
               rules
               first
               of
               the
               Substantiues
               ,
               after
               of
               the
               Adiectiues
               .
               Againe
               ,
               as
               the
               Substantiue
               is
               either
               Proper
               or
               Cōmon
               ;
               so
               here
               the
               rules
               of
               Proper
               Nowns
               are
               first
               set
               downe
               ,
               wherby
               to
               know
               the
               Genders
               of
               them
               ;
               and
               after
               of
               the
               Common
               Nowns
               called
               Appellatiues
               .
               You
               may
               also
               point
               them
               in
               their
               book
               ,
               where
               
               each
               of
               these
               begin
               :
               they
               will
               presently
               conceiue
               of
               them
               ,
               being
               first
               perfect
               in
               their
               Accedence
               .
            
             
               Then
               that
               the
               rules
               of
               Proper
               names
               ,
               are
               of
               Masculines
               ,
               or
               Feminines
               :
               Or
               all
               Proper
               Nownes
               are
               either
               of
               the
               Masculine
               or
               of
               the
               Feminine
               Gender
               ,
               vnlesse
               they
               be
               excepted
               .
            
             
               Also
               all
               Proper
               Nownes
               which
               goe
               vnder
               the
               names
               of
               Males
               or
               Hees
               (
               as
               wee
               call
               them
               )
               are
               the
               Masculine
               Gender
               .
               Then
               teach
               them
               according
               to
               the
               margent
               ,
               that
               of
               those
               there
               are
               fiue
               kindes
               ,
               which
               goe
               vnder
               the
               names
               of
               Males
               or
               Hees
               .
               As
               names
               of
               Gods
               ,
               men
               ,
               floods
               or
               riuers
               ,
               moneths
               ,
               windes
               .
            
             
               So
               all
               proper
               Nowns
               or
               names
               of
               Females
               or
               Shee
               s
               ,
               are
               the
               Feminine
               Gender
               .
               And
               of
               those
               are
               likewise
               fiue
               kinds
               :
               That
               is
               ;
               names
               of
               Goddesses
               ,
               Women
               ,
               Cities
               ,
               Regions
               or
               countreys
               ,
               Islands
               ,
               &c.
               
            
             
               Then
               appoase
               after
               the
               same
               manner
               ,
               
               keeping
               strictly
               the
               words
               of
               the
               booke
               ,
               as
               was
               sayd
               ;
               onely
               putting
               in
               here
               or
               there
               ,
               a
               word
               or
               two
               ,
               to
               make
               the
               question
               ;
               which
               by
               oft
               repeating
               ,
               they
               will
               easily
               vnderstand
               .
               As
               thus
               ,
               out
               of
               the
               words
               set
               before
               the
               rule
               :
               Or
               in
               the
               like
               manner
               ;
            
             
               Q.
               Where
               begin
               your
               generall
               rules
               of
               Proper
               Nownes
               ?
               
                 Vbi
                 incipiunt
                 regulae
                 generales
                 propriorum
              
               ?
            
             
               A.
               Propria
               quae
               maribus
               .
               
            
             
               Q.
               
               How
               many
               generall
               rules
               are
               there
               of
               proper
               Nowns
               ?
               
                 Quot
                 sunt
                 regulae
                 generales
                 propriorum
              
               ?
            
             
               A.
               Two
               :
               Duae
               .
            
             
               Q.
               What
               is
               your
               first
               rule
               ?
               
                 Quae
                 est
                 primaregula
              
               ?
            
             
               A.
               Propria
               quae
               maribus
               .
               &c.
               
            
             
               Then
               out
               of
               the
               margent
               thus
               :
            
             
               Q.
               How
               many
               kinds
               of
               Proper
               names
               are
               there
               of
               the
               Masculine
               gender
               ?
               
                 Quot
                 sunt
                 gener
                 a
                 propriorum
                 nominum
                 masculinigeneris
                 ?
              
            
             
               A.
               Quinque
               fiue
               :
               Diuorum
               ,
               virorum
               ,
               fluuiorum
               ,
               mensium
               ,
               ventorum
               .
               
               
                 Or
                 as
                 they
                 are
                 set
                 in
                 the
                 margent
                 .
              
               Mascula
               sunt
               nomina
               Diuorum
               ,
               virorum
               ,
               fluuiorum
               ,
               mensium
               ,
               ventorum
               .
               
                 Names
                 of
                 Gods
                 ,
                 men
                 ,
                 floods
                 or
                 riuers
                 ,
                 moneths
                 ,
                 winds
                 .
              
            
             
             
               After
               ,
               
               out
               of
               the
               words
               of
               the
               rule
               ,
               
                 Propria
                 quae
                 maribus
                 tribuuntur
                 ,
                 &c.
              
               you
               may
               propound
               your
               questions
               thus
               ;
            
             
               Q.
               Cuius
               generis
               dicas
               ,
               Propria
               quae
               maribus
               tribuuntur
               ?
               
                 What
                 Gender
                 are
                 all
                 Nownes
                 ,
                 or
                 names
                 of
                 Hees
                 ,
                 or
                 of
                 the
                 Male
                 kind
                 .
                 R.
              
               Mascula
               ,
               or
               masculini
               generis
               .
            
             
               Q.
               Cuius
               generis
               sunt
               nomina
               Diuorum
               ?
               R.
               Masculini
               .
            
             
               Q.
               
               
                 Quomodo
                 dicis
                 latinè
              
               ,
               The
               God
               of
               Battaile
               ?
            
             
               R.
               Mars
               ,
               hic
               Mars
               ,
               Martis
               .
            
             
               Q.
               
                 The
                 god
                 of
                 wine
              
               ,
               quomodo
               dicis
               ?
            
             
               R.
               Bacchus
               ,
               hic
               Bacchus
               Bacchi
               ,
               &c.
               
            
             
               Q.
               Per
               quam
               regulam
               ?
               R.
               Propria
               quae
               maribus
               .
            
             
               In
               the
               fewer
               words
               you
               can
               do
               it
               ,
               
               for
               breuitie
               ,
               is
               the
               better
               ,
               
               and
               that
               you
               may
               go
               ouer
               the
               more
               .
               Or
               if
               you
               think
               it
               to
               be
               too
               hard
               for
               children
               ,
               to
               answer
               in
               Latine
               at
               first
               ,
               and
               that
               it
               is
               best
               to
               do
               it
               only
               in
               English
               ;
               
               you
               may
               do
               it
               following
               the
               same
               order
               .
               
               As
               in
               the
               next
               rule
               ,
               
                 Propria
                 Foemineum
              
               ,
               onely
               asking
               thus
               ;
            
             
               Q.
               What
               gender
               are
               proper
               names
               of
               Females
               ,
               or
               Shee
               s
               ?
               How
               many
               kindes
               are
               there
               of
               them
               ?
               Where
               is
               the
               rule
               for
               them
               ?
               
               What
               exceptions
               are
               there
               from
               that
               generall
               rule
               ?
               Or
               ,
               how
               many
               Masculine
               Cities
               haue
               you
               ?
               How
               many
               Neuter
               Cities
               ?
               How
               many
               Masculine
               and
               Neuter
               Cities
               ?
            
             
               So
               in
               the
               next
               rule
               ,
               
               
                 Appellatiua
                 Arborum
              
               ,
               to
               ask
               thus
               or
               the
               like
               ;
            
             
               Where
               begin
               your
               rules
               of
               Appellatiues
               ,
               or
               Common
               Nownes
               ?
            
             
               How
               many
               kinds
               of
               Appellatiues
               haue
               you
               ?
               Or
               how
               many
               sorts
               of
               rules
               haue
               you
               for
               Appellatiues
               ?
               
                 
                   A.
                   Three
                   :
                   of
                   
                     
                       Trees
                       ,
                    
                     
                       Epicenes
                       ,
                    
                     
                       The
                       rest
                       .
                    
                  
                
              
            
             
               What
               gender
               are
               names
               of
               trees
               ?
               What
               exceptions
               ?
               Or
               how
               many
               Masculine
               trees
               haue
               you
               ?
               How
               many
               Newters
               ,
               trees
               ?
               So
               of
               Epicens
               .
            
             
               Where
               is
               your
               rule
               of
               words
               of
               the
               Epicene
               Gender
               ?
               How
               many
               kindes
               haue
               you
               of
               words
               ,
               or
               Names
               ,
               of
               the
               Epicene
               gender
               ?
               
                 
                 
                   A.
                   Three
                   :
                   of
                   
                     
                       Birds
                       ,
                    
                     
                       Beasts
                       ,
                    
                     
                       Fishes
                       .
                    
                  
                
              
            
             
               How
               know
               you
               the
               Gender
               in
               the
               Epicens
               ?
            
             
               What
               Gender
               is
               euery
               Noune
               that
               endeth
               in
               um
               ?
            
             
               How
               know
               you
               the
               Gender
               in
               all
               Appellatiues
               ?
            
             
               Then
               the
               speciall
               rules
               ,
               
               thus
               ,
               or
               the
               like
               :
               How
               many
               speciall
               rules
               of
               Nounes
               Appellatiues
               haue
               you
               ?
               Ans.
               Three
               :
               The
               first
               ,
               of
               Nounes
               not
               increasing
               ;
               the
               second
               ,
               of
               Nounes
               increasing
               acute
               ,
               commonly
               called
               long
               ;
               the
               third
               ,
               of
               Nounes
               increasing
               ,
               graue
               or
               short
               ,
               as
               wee
               call
               it
               .
            
             
               What
               Genders
               each
               of
               these
               are
               of
               ?
               Where
               are
               the
               rules
               for
               them
               ?
               What
               examples
               haue
               you
               of
               them
               ?
               So
               to
               giue
               the
               meaning
               ,
               and
               applye
               the
               examples
               .
               How
               many
               exceptions
               there
               are
               from
               euery
               one
               of
               these
               rules
               ?
               As
               ,
               how
               many
               rules
               of
               Masculines
               except
               ;
               so
               of
               Feminines
               or
               Neuters
               except
               .
               Or
               thus
               :
               Of
               what
               Genders
               are
               all
               Nounes
               ,
               not
               increasing
               in
               the
               Genitiue
               case
               ,
               as
               
                 Capra
                 ,
                 caprae
              
               :
               Or
               all
               Nounes
               like
               
                 Musa
                 ,
                 musae
              
               ?
               So
               what
               Genders
               are
               all
               Nounes
               of
               the
               second
               speciall
               rule
               ?
               or
               all
               Nounes
               increasing
               acute
               ,
               as
               
                 Pietas
                 ,
                 pietatis
              
               .
               What
               Gender
               are
               all
               Nounes
               increasing
               ,
               graue
               ,
               or
               flat
               ,
               or
               short
               ?
               as
               
                 Sanguis
                 ,
                 sangumis
              
               .
               And
               how
               many
               rules
               haue
               you
               of
               Masculines
               except
               from
               the
               first
               speciall
               rule
               ?
               or
               of
               Masculines
               not
               increasing
               in
               the
               Genitiue
               case
               ?
               How
               many
               rules
               haue
               you
               of
               long
               Masculines
               ,
               or
               Masculines
               increasing
               acute
               ,
               excepted
               from
               the
               second
               speciall
               rule
               ?
               Or
               of
               Feminines
               increasing
               short
               ,
               except
               from
               the
               thrid
               speciall
               rule
               ?
               Or
               yet
               more
               plainly
               thus
               :
               Where
               is
               your
               general
               rule
               of
               all
               like
               
                 Capra
                 ,
                 caprae
              
               :
               or
               
                 musa
                 ,
                 musae
              
               ?
               Or
               of
               all
               like
               
                 Magister
                 ,
                 magistri
              
               :
               or
               
                 Dominus
                 ,
                 domin
                 .
                 :
                 venter
                 ventris
                 .
              
               Or
               of
               wordes
               ending
               in
               
                 er
                 ,
                 os
                 ,
                 us
              
               ,
               not
               increasing
               .
               Or
               where
               is
               your
               rule
               of
               all
               like
               
                 Virtus
                 ,
                 virtutis
              
               ?
               Or
               like
               
                 Sanguis
                 ,
                 sanguinis
              
               ?
               And
               of
               what
               Genders
               they
               are
               of
               .
            
             
               For
               the
               exceptions
               ,
               
               you
               may
               appose
               thus
               :
               Where
               is
               your
               rule
               of
               Neuters
               not
               increasing
               ?
               Of
               Neuters
               increasing
               ,
               acute
               or
               long
               ?
               Of
               Neuters
               increasing
               ,
               flat
               or
               short
               ?
               Thus
               of
               Doubtfuls
               ,
               Commons
               .
            
             
             
               Or
               posing
               the
               examples
               ,
               
               to
               aske
               what
               is
               Latine
               for
               any
               word
               ,
               which
               is
               in
               any
               of
               the
               rules
               ;
               and
               then
               to
               cause
               them
               to
               decline
               the
               word
               ,
               the
               Nom.
               and
               Genit
               .
               case
               ,
               and
               to
               tell
               the
               rule
               ,
               as
               was
               shewed
               before
               :
               as
               ,
            
             
               What
               is
               Latine
               for
               a
               cloude
               ?
            
             
               A.
               Nubes
               ,
               haec
               nubes
               ,
               nubis
               ,
               &c.
               
            
             
               Q.
               By
               what
               rule
               ?
               
               What
               is
               the
               meaning
               of
               that
               rule
               ?
               
               Thus
               you
               shall
               receiue
               diuers
               benefits
               together
            
             
               Or
               thus
               only
               ;
               when
               they
               haue
               said
               any
               rule
               ,
               to
               aske
               them
               what
               is
               the
               meaning
               of
               that
               rule
               ,
               and
               to
               giue
               the
               examples
               .
            
             
               So
               in
               the
               Adiectiues
               ,
               to
               aske
               thus
               or
               the
               like
               :
               
            
             
               Where
               begin
               the
               rules
               of
               the
               Adiectiues
               ?
            
             
               Where
               is
               the
               rule
               of
               all
               like
               
                 Foelix
                 ?
                 Adiectiua
                 vnam
              
               .
               So
               of
               all
               like
               
                 Tristis
                 ?
                 Sub
                 gemina
                 ,
                 &c.
              
               Of
               all
               like
               
                 Bonus
                 ?
                 At
                 si
                 tres
              
               &c.
               Of
               Adiectiues
               of
               two
               Articles
               like
               Substantiues
               ?
               
                 At
                 sunt
                 quae
                 flexu
                 .
                 &c.
              
               Of
               Adiectiues
               of
               a
               strange
               declining
               ?
               
                 Haec
                 proprium
                 quendaem
                 &c.
              
               
            
             
               For
               all
               declining
               to
               make
               them
               very
               perfect
               in
               the
               Genitiue
               case
               ,
               
               you
               may
               practice
               them
               thus
               ;
               sometimes
               to
               repeate
               the
               Nominatiue
               &
               the
               Genitiue
               case
               together
               ;
               as
               in
               
                 Propria
                 qua
                 maribus
              
               to
               run
               ,
               thus
               :
               
                 Mars
                 ,
                 Martis
                 ,
                 Bacchus
                 ,
                 Bacchi
                 ,
                 Apollo
                 ,
                 Apollinis
                 ,
                 Cato
                 ,
                 Catonis
                 :
              
               So
               in
               euery
               rule
               when
               time
               will
               permit
               .
            
             
               And
               chiefly
               appose
               them
               often
               in
               the
               most
               difficult
               ,
               
               being
               noted
               with
               some
               marke
               :
               as
               ,
               
                 Opus
                 ,
                 Opuntis
                 ,
                 Persis
                 ,
                 Persidis
                 .
                 Barbiton
                 ,
                 Barbiti
                 .
                 Senex
                 ,
                 senis
                 .
                 Var
                 ,
                 viri
                 ,
                 Bes
                 ,
                 bessis
                 .
                 Cres.
                 Cretis
                 .
                 Pres
                 ,
                 predis
                 .
                 Semis
                 ,
                 semissis
                 ,
              
               and
               the
               like
               .
               The
               rest
               they
               will
               doe
               readily
               of
               themselues
               .
            
             
               In
               the
               Heteroclites
               to
               do
               the
               like
               ,
               
               first
               to
               shew
               them
               what
               they
               are
               ,
               viz.
               Nounes
               of
               another
               kinde
               of
               declining
               :
               and
               then
               the
               three
               seueral
               kinds
               of
               them
               according
               to
               the
               titles
               ,
               
                 
                   Variantiagenus
                   .
                
                 
                   Defectiua
                   .
                
                 
                   Redundantia
                   :
                
              
            
             
               Eyther
               such
               as
               change
               their
               declension
               ,
               or
               want
               some
               thing
               ,
               or
               haue
               too
               much
               .
               And
               so
               the
               seuerall
               rules
               of
               euery
               one
               .
            
             
             
               Then
               the
               seuerall
               rules
               to
               be
               examined
               particularly
               ;
               like
               as
               in
               
                 Propria
                 quae
                 maribus
              
               :
               to
               vnderstand
               euery
               peece
               :
               and
               in
               them
               speedily
               to
               looke
               to
               the
               Margents
               :
               to
               be
               able
               readily
               to
               giue
               the
               rules
               to
               them
               .
            
             
               And
               to
               make
               them
               able
               to
               repeate
               the
               Sums
               and
               Margents
               in
               order
               .
            
             
               So
               to
               giue
               any
               rule
               thereby
               :
               as
               when
               I
               aske
               ,
               Where
               is
               your
               rule●
               of
               
                 Ap●ots
                 ,
                 Monoptots
                 ,
                 Diptots
                 ,
                 Triptots
                 ?
              
               Of
               those
               which
               want
               the
               Vocatiue
               case
               ,
               or
               
                 Defecta
                 vocatiuo
              
               ,
               or
               
                 propria
                 defecta
                 plurali
              
               ?
               or
               the
               like
               .
            
             
               In
               the
               Verbes
               likewise
               shew
               them
               the
               order
               ,
               
               that
               the
               rules
               are
               of
               Preterperfect
               tenses
               and
               Supines
               :
               and
               those
               first
               of
               simple
               Verbes
               in
               o.
               Then
               compounds
               after
               of
               Verbs
               in
               or
               .
               Last
               ,
               of
               those
               that
               differ
               in
               their
               Preterperfect
               tenses
               ,
               or
               Supines
               .
            
             
               In
               the
               simple
               Verbes
               ,
               first
               are
               rules
               of
               the
               first
               Coniugation
               ,
               then
               the
               second
               ,
               so
               in
               order
               .
            
             
               After
               cause
               them
               to
               tell
               by
               the
               summes
               and
               Margents
               ,
               
               where
               euery
               rule
               standeth
               :
               as
               where
               are
               verbes
               of
               the
               first
               Coniugation
               ,
               so
               in
               the
               rest
               .
            
             
               Practice
               them
               also
               to
               answere
               thus
               :
               
               The
               Present
               tense
               ,
               Preterperfect
               tense
               ,
               Infinitiue
               moode
               and
               first
               Supine
               together
               .
               As
               if
               I
               aske
               ,
               How
               say
               you
               To
               swim
               ?
               he
               answereth
               ,
               
                 No.
                 No
                 ,
                 naui
                 ,
                 nare
                 ,
                 natum
                 .
              
               So
               To
               wash
               ,
               
                 Lauo
                 ,
                 laut
                 ,
                 lauare
                 ,
                 lautum
                 .
              
               Because
               these
               being
               known
               al
               the
               rest
               are
               presently
               known
               ;
               and
               to
               do
               it
               also
               for
               breuity
               sake
               :
               especially
               examine
               those
               Verbes
               often
               ,
               which
               haue
               two
               Preterperfect
               tenses
               ,
               or
               two
               Supines
               ,
               or
               moe
               ;
               and
               would
               therefore
               haue
               speciall
               marks
               :
               as
               
                 vello
                 ,
                 velli
                 ,
                 &
                 v●●lsi
                 vellere
                 ,
                 vulsum
                 .
              
            
             
               For
               the
               Syntax
               in
               Latine
               ,
               
               though
               the
               English
               rules
               ,
               with
               a
               few
               moe
               ad●ed
               to
               them
               ,
               
               might
               serue
               for
               resoluing
               any
               construction
               ,
               or
               for
               making
               Latin
               ;
               and
               so
               many
               do
               thinke
               them
               needlesse
               altogether
               ;
               others
               do
               vse
               to
               teach
               only
               the
               rules
               thereof
               ,
               and
               one
               example
               only
               in
               each
               rule
               ;
               yet
               there
               may
               be
               very
               good
               vse
               of
               them
               all
               ,
               rightly
               vnderstood
               ,
               and
               specially
               of
               the
               seuerall
               examples
               rightly
               applied
               :
               that
               Schollars
               by
               them
               may
               goe
               surely
               ,
               hauing
               seuerall
               examples
               
               to
               warrant
               almost
               euery
               thing
               in
               construction
               ;
               which
               by
               the
               bare
               rule
               ,
               and
               one
               example
               they
               could
               not
               but
               goe
               very
               doubtfully
               .
               Besides
               that
               ,
               therby
               they
               also
               get
               so
               much
               good
               Latine
               of
               the
               best
               Authours
               ,
               and
               be
               helped
               much
               for
               parsing
               by
               the
               wordes
               of
               the
               rule
               .
            
             
               In
               examining
               the
               Syntax
               ,
               
               it
               is
               the
               best
               to
               doe
               it
               in
               Latine
               :
               for
               by
               that
               time
               they
               will
               be
               well
               able
               to
               doe
               it
               so
               ,
               if
               they
               be
               rightly
               trained
               vp
               .
               
               And
               it
               will
               much
               helpe
               them
               ,
               as
               was
               said
               ,
               to
               speake
               and
               to
               parse
               in
               Latine
               :
               yet
               still
               asking
               the
               question
               also
               in
               English
               ,
               and
               answering
               both
               in
               English
               and
               Latine
               ,
               so
               farre
               as
               neeede
               is
               ;
               as
               thus
               ,
               out
               of
               the
               words
               :
            
             
               Q.
               Quot
               sunt
               Concordantiae
               ?
            
             
               R.
               Tres.
               
            
             
               Q.
               Quae
               est
               concordantia
               prima
               ?
            
             
               R.
               Nominatiui
               &
               verbi
               .
            
             
               Q.
               Verbum
               personale
               cum
               quo
               cohaeret
               ?
            
             
               R.
               Cum
               Nominatiuo
               .
            
             
               Q.
               In
               quibus
               cohaeret
               Verbum
               personale
               cum
               Nominatiuo
               ?
            
             
               R.
               Numero
               &
               persona
               .
            
             
               Q.
               Daexemplum
               .
            
             
               R.
               Nunquam
               sera
               est
               adbonos
               mores
               via
               .
            
             
               Q.
               Applica
               hoc
               exemplum
               :
               vel
               ,
               Ostende
               voces
               ,
               in
               quibus
               est
               vis
               regulae
               .
            
             
               R.
               Via
               est
               .
            
             
               Q.
               Da
               aliud
               exemplum
               .
            
             
               
                 R.
                 Fortuna
              
               nunquam
               perpetuò
               est
               bona
               .
            
             
               Q.
               Applica
               .
            
             
               R.
               Fortuna
               est
               .
            
             
               Q.
               Repete
               regulam
               .
            
             
               R.
               Verbum
               personale
               cohaeret
               cum
               Nominatiuo
               ,
               &c.
               
            
             
               Q.
               
                 Dic
                 Anglicè
                 .
                 R.
              
               A
               Verbe
               personall
               agreeth
               ,
               &c.
               
               In
               the
               next
               rule
               ,
               
                 Nominatiuus
                 primae
                 vel
                 secundae
                 personae
                 &c.
                 
              
            
             
               Q.
               Vtrum
               exprimitur
               Nominatiuus
               primae
               vel
               secundae
               personae
               ?
            
             
               R.
               Rarissimè
               .
            
             
               Q.
               Quibus
               de
               causis
               exprimitur
               ?
            
             
             
               R.
               Causa
               discretionis
               ,
               aut
               Emphasis
               gratia
               ,
            
             
               Q.
               Da
               xemplum
               vbi
               exprimitur
               causa
               discretionis
               .
            
             
               R
               Vos
               damnastis
               .
            
             
               Q.
               Quid
               intelligis
               per
               vos
               ?
            
             
               R.
               Vos
               damnastis
               ,
               &
               nemo
               praeterea
               ,
               &c.
               
            
             
               So
               likewise
               in
               the
               rules
               of
               gouernment
               :
               
               as
               at
               
                 Adiectiua
                 quae
                 desiderium
                 ,
                 &c.
              
               
            
             
               Q.
               Adiectiua
               quae
               significant
               desiderium
               ,
               notitiam
               ,
               memoriam
               ,
               &c.
               quem
               casum
               adsciscunt
               ?
            
             
               R.
               Genitiuum
               .
            
             
               Q.
               Da
               regulam
               .
            
             
               R.
               Adiectina
               quae
               desiderium
               ,
               &c.
               
            
             
               Q.
               Da
               exemplum
               .
            
             
               R.
               Est
               natura
               hominuus
               
                 nouitatis
                 avida
              
               .
            
             
               Q.
               Applica
               .
            
             
               R.
               Auida
               nouitatis
               .
            
             
               To
               helpe
               the
               examining
               the
               Syntax
               the
               better
               ,
               
               those
               wordes
               also
               (
               in
               euery
               example
               throughout
               the
               Grammar
               )
               would
               be
               marked
               ,
               in
               which
               the
               force
               of
               the
               example
               lieth
               ;
               as
               was
               aduised
               in
               the
               English
               rules
               ;
               The
               word
               gouerning
               ,
               or
               more
               principall
               ,
               with
               two
               marks
               ,
               or
               with
               a
               double
               mark
               :
               the
               word
               gouerned
               with
               one
               ;
               or
               at
               least
               the
               chiefe
               word
               or
               gouernor
               with
               some
               letter
               or
               marke
               distinct
               frō
               the
               gouerned
               .
               And
               then
               euer
               in
               saying
               the
               ensample
               ,
               
               to
               repeate
               again
               those
               wordes
               onely
               ,
               in
               which
               the
               force
               of
               the
               example
               lyeth
               ;
               the
               gouernour
               or
               principall
               first
               :
               as
               in
               the
               English
               rules
               ,
               so
               here
               .
               As
               thus
               ;
               in
               saying
               ,
               
                 Est
                 natura
                 hominum
              
               nouitatis
               auida
               ;
               to
               repeate
               againe
               ,
               auida
               nouitatis
               .
               Mens
               futuri
               praescia
               ;
               praescia
               futuri
               .
               Crescit
               amor
               nummi
               
                 quantum
                 ipsa
                 pecunia
                 crescit
              
               ;
               amor
               nummi
               ,
               &c.
               
            
             
               By
               this
               kinde
               of
               repeating
               ,
               
               or
               continuall
               apposing
               where
               they
               misse
               ,
               by
               asking
               thus
               ,
               
                 Da
                 exemplum
                 ,
                 vbi
                 est
                 vis
                 regulae
              
               ;
               They
               will
               become
               exceeding
               cunning
               to
               vnderstand
               and
               apply
               rightly
               any
               example
               of
               the
               Grammar
               ,
               so
               fast
               as
               they
               can
               repeate
               it
               ;
               or
               to
               apply
               any
               other
               thereunto
               ;
               or
               else
               to
               make
               the
               like
               :
               that
               so
               they
               may
               euer
               haue
               sure
               patternes
               for
               all
               parsing
               ,
               making
               and
               trying
               Latin.
               
            
             
             
               Though
               this
               may
               be
               though
               an
               easie
               matter
               ,
               
               and
               that
               euery
               Schollar
               can
               doe
               it
               ;
               yet
               trie
               it
               ,
               and
               it
               will
               be
               found
               cleane
               contrary
               almost
               throughout
               ,
               and
               to
               trouble
               many
               weake
               Masters
               to
               apply
               many
               of
               them
               aright
               .
               It
               is
               a
               matter
               most
               necessary
               :
               because
               the
               very
               life
               of
               the
               examples
               is
               in
               these
               ;
               and
               the
               profite
               will
               doubly
               counteruaile
               the
               paines
               .
            
             
               With
               a
               little
               practice
               ,
               they
               will
               almost
               as
               soone
               say
               their
               rules
               this
               way
               ,
               applying
               each
               example
               ,
               as
               without
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               I
               discerne
               euidently
               the
               great
               benefite
               and
               furtherance
               to
               Schollars
               ,
               to
               be
               able
               to
               repeate
               the
               examples
               of
               euery
               rule
               ,
               in
               such
               sort
               as
               you
               haue
               shewed
               ,
               for
               continuall
               vse
               both
               in
               parsing
               ,
               and
               in
               making
               and
               writing
               Latine
               surely
               ;
               as
               also
               to
               haue
               the
               summes
               of
               the
               rules
               which
               are
               in
               the
               Margents
               ,
               and
               before
               the
               rules
               ,
               perfectly
               :
               but
               children
               cannot
               possibly
               get
               these
               ,
               vnlesse
               their
               bookes
               bee
               marked
               so
               ,
               as
               you
               directed
               .
            
             
               And
               for
               the
               Masters
               to
               marke
               all
               their
               Grammars
               so
               ,
               it
               is
               an
               infinite
               toyle
               ,
               
               and
               hinderance
               to
               him
               :
               to
               marke
               some
               one
               ,
               and
               to
               cause
               the
               Schollars
               to
               marke
               theirs
               thereby
               ;
               they
               will
               doe
               them
               so
               falsly
               ,
               as
               will
               oft
               more
               hinder
               then
               further
               ,
               besides
               the
               trouble
               in
               it
               :
               also
               the
               summes
               of
               the
               Margents
               are
               very
               defectiue
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               For
               the
               supplying
               of
               all
               this
               ,
               
               and
               the
               auoyding
               of
               all
               these
               inconueniences
               ,
               and
               other
               like
               ,
               and
               for
               making
               our
               Grammar
               farre
               more
               easie
               and
               profitable
               to
               the
               Schollars
               ,
               without
               any
               alteration
               ;
               the
               Grammars
               are
               procured
               to
               bee
               so
               printed
               ,
               as
               to
               be
               most
               plaine
               herein
               :
               all
               the
               words
               wherin
               the
               force
               of
               the
               examples
               doth
               lie
               ,
               being
               printed
               in
               differing
               letters
               ;
               that
               the
               least
               childe
               may
               bee
               able
               to
               discerne
               them
               ,
               and
               so
               to
               apply
               and
               repeate
               them
               :
               and
               also
               the
               Margents
               made
               more
               perfect
               .
               What
               is
               missed
               or
               defectiue
               herein
               ,
               shall
               (
               as
               I
               hope
               )
               bee
               supplyed
               hereafter
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               Sir
               ,
               al
               Schooles
               must
               needs
               hereby
               receiue
               an
               exceeding
               benefit
               ;
               as
               I
               see
               plainly
               by
               that
               which
               you
               haue
               shewed
               for
               the
               vse
               of
               them
               .
               But
               I
               pray
               you
               proceede
               ,
               and
               let
               
               me
               heare
               what
               other
               helpes
               you
               haue
               ,
               for
               examining
               your
               Schollars
               ,
               so
               as
               they
               may
               fully
               vnderstand
               their
               rules
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               Other
               helpes
               for
               the
               examination
               and
               vnderstanding
               
               the
               rules
               ,
               
               are
               these
               ;
            
             
               1.
               
               Where
               they
               cannot
               vnderstand
               any
               question
               ,
               or
               answere
               ;
               remember
               that
               ,
               to
               teach
               them
               to
               vnderstand
               ,
               by
               repeating
               English
               and
               Latine
               together
               ,
               
               vntill
               they
               fully
               vnderstand
               it
               .
               For
               ,
               as
               was
               said
               before
               ,
               if
               they
               haue
               the
               meaning
               in
               their
               heads
               ,
               wordes
               ,
               with
               oft
               repeating
               ,
               will
               easily
               bee
               gotten
               to
               vtter
               their
               minds
               ,
               especially
               hauing
               them
               in
               their
               bookes
               .
            
             
               2
               Also
               this
               may
               further
               to
               vnderstanding
               ,
               
               to
               cause
               them
               to
               be
               able
               to
               giue
               the
               English
               rules
               ,
               answering
               to
               euery
               Latine
               rule
               ,
               of
               those
               which
               haue
               English
               rules
               ;
               to
               set
               markes
               vpon
               those
               Latine
               rules
               ,
               which
               haue
               no
               English
               :
               and
               to
               answere
               to
               them
               that
               they
               haue
               no
               rule
               ,
               but
               to
               be
               able
               to
               giue
               the
               meaning
               .
            
             
               3
               These
               meanes
               may
               also
               much
               profite
               to
               the
               easie
               getting
               ,
               
               full
               vnderstanding
               ,
               
               and
               perfect
               keeping
               of
               the
               rules
               ;
               oft
               to
               reade
               ouer
               ,
               and
               keepe
               perfectly
               the
               summes
               of
               the
               rules
               ,
               which
               are
               eyther
               set
               before
               them
               ,
               or
               in
               the
               margents
               ;
               as
               was
               noted
               so
               to
               repeate
               them
               in
               order
               .
               Thus
               to
               be
               able
               to
               report
               all
               the
               summe
               ;
               like
               as
               of
               the
               Accedence
               ,
               so
               of
               the
               Grammar
               ,
               as
               in
               a
               narration
               or
               continued
               speech
               ,
               as
               thus
               :
            
             
               Regulae
               generales
               propriorum
               ,
               Mascula
               sunt
               nomina
               Diuorum
               .
               Virorum
               ,
               Fluuiorum
               ,
               Mensium
               ,
               ventorum
               .
               Foeminina
               .
               Dearum
               ,
               Mulierū
               ,
               Vrbium
               ,
               Regionum
               ,
               Insularum
               .
               Exceptio
               .
               Regulae
               generales
               appellatiuorū
               .
               Arborū
               .
               Epicoena
               .
               Volncrum
               ,
               ferarum
               ,
               piscium
               .
               Exceptio
               generalis
               .
               Vsus
               trium
               regularum
               specialium
               .
               Prima
               regula
               specialis
               ,
               &c.
               
            
             
               So
               to
               know
               to
               giue
               readily
               the
               beginning
               of
               euery
               rule
               in
               order
               ;
               
               as
               ,
               
               
                 Propria
                 quae
                 maribus
                 .
                 Propria
                 foemineum
                 .
                 Excipienda
                 tamen
                 quaedam
                 sunt
                 ,
                 &c.
                 
                 Appellatiua
                 arborum
                 crunt
                 ,
                 &c.
                 
              
            
             
               By
               these
               meanes
               they
               will
               be
               able
               both
               to
               answere
               the
               questions
               in
               Latine
               ,
               with
               a
               very
               few
               other
               words
               :
               and
               also
               to
               giue
               any
               rule
               presently
               when
               but
               the
               sum
               is
               demaunded
               or
               any
               word
               belonging
               vnto
               it
               ,
               
               to
               tell
               where
               the
               rule
               is
               ,
               and
               to
               begin
               it
               .
            
             
             
               To
               hauean
               Idaea
               or
               generall
               notion
               of
               all
               in
               their
               heads
               ,
               
               as
               if
               it
               were
               before
               their
               faces
               ;
               which
               Idaea
               doth
               make
               any
               learning
               most
               easie
               ,
               eyther
               to
               be
               gotten
               or
               kept
               .
            
             
               Hereby
               also
               that
               shorter
               examination
               and
               repetition
               of
               parts
               ,
               
               may
               sometimes
               serue
               where
               time
               or
               helpe
               is
               wanting
               ;
               
               and
               in
               parsing
               their
               Lectures
               ,
               to
               rid
               twise
               so
               fast
               ,
               when
               they
               can
               in
               a
               word
               signifie
               a
               rule
               ,
               eyther
               by
               the
               word
               in
               the
               Margent
               ,
               or
               before
               the
               rule
               ,
               or
               by
               the
               beginning
               of
               the
               rule
               .
            
             
               As
               to
               say
               in
               parsing
               ,
               It
               is
               so
               ,
               by
               the
               rule
               of
               the
               first
               concord
               :
               or
               
                 per
                 concordantiam
                 Nominatiui
                 &
                 Verbi
                 &c.
                 Per
                 regulam
                 Accusatiui
                 ante
                 verbum
                 infinitum
                 ,
                 &c.
                 
              
               Or
               to
               repeate
               onely
               a
               word
               or
               two
               of
               the
               beginning
               of
               the
               rule
               ;
               as
               
                 Verba
                 infiniti
                 modi
                 ,
                 &c.
              
               or
               the
               like
               .
            
             
               To
               this
               end
               it
               were
               to
               be
               wished
               that
               the
               summes
               of
               the
               rules
               were
               set
               more
               perfectly
               in
               the
               margents
               ,
               
               in
               a
               word
               or
               two
               in
               all
               the
               Syntax
               ,
               
               as
               they
               are
               in
               the
               Nounes
               ,
               to
               haue
               some
               speciall
               name
               to
               be
               called
               by
               :
               as
               ,
               
                 Adiectiua
                 desiderij
                 ,
                 verbalia
                 in
                 ax
                 .
                 Nomina
                 ●artitiua
              
               ;
               &
               the
               like
               .
            
             
               In
               hearing
               parts
               in
               straights
               of
               time
               ,
               
               thus
               we
               may
               examine
               only
               in
               those
               places
               where
               we
               most
               suspect
               their
               negligence
               :
               
               asking
               first
               the
               summe
               of
               the
               rule
               ,
               with
               an
               example
               in
               it
               ;
               and
               then
               to
               cause
               him
               whom
               you
               examine
               ,
               to
               say
               that
               rule
               .
               Or
               to
               aske
               only
               an
               example
               of
               the
               rule
               ,
               and
               cause
               them
               to
               apply
               it
               ,
               and
               to
               giue
               the
               rule
               .
            
             
               I
               haue
               set
               down
               all
               these
               ,
               
               that
               we
               may
               take
               and
               vse
               which
               we
               finde
               most
               profitable
               .
               The
               shorter
               the
               better
               ,
               as
               was
               aduised
               ;
               so
               that
               we
               make
               sure
               that
               they
               doe
               fully
               vnderstand
               the
               rule
               ,
               and
               can
               make
               vse
               of
               it
               .
            
             
               One
               rule
               ,
               so
               learned
               with
               vnderstanding
               ,
               is
               more
               profitable
               ,
               
               then
               if
               they
               could
               say
               euery
               word
               in
               a
               hundreth
               ;
               and
               could
               but
               onely
               repeat
               them
               ouer
               as
               parats
               ,
               without
               any
               knowledge
               to
               make
               the
               right
               vse
               thereof
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               Sir
               ▪
               I
               do
               like
               very
               well
               of
               these
               things
               which
               you
               haue
               said
               ;
               yet
               for
               the
               helping
               of
               my
               memory
               and
               practice
               ,
               tell
               me
               againe
               shortly
               ,
               which
               you
               account
               to
               be
               the
               principall
               :
               wherein
               chiefe
               care
               would
               be
               had
               ,
               to
               the
               end
               to
               make
               all
               easie
               ;
               also
               to
               keepe
               all
               ,
               and
               to
               make
               right
               vse
               thereof
               .
            
          
           
             
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               This
               I
               account
               and
               finde
               the
               chiefe
               ;
               
               to
               haue
               them
               perfect
               in
               the
               order
               both
               of
               the
               whole
               ,
               
               and
               also
               of
               all
               the
               parts
               in
               Grammar
               ,
               as
               I
               shewed
               ;
               and
               also
               to
               be
               able
               to
               repeat
               the
               Titles
               ,
               with
               those
               margents
               which
               are
               necessary
               ;
               the
               beginnings
               of
               the
               rules
               ;
               and
               to
               haue
               the
               vnderstanding
               of
               them
               ,
               and
               examples
               ;
               and
               also
               to
               be
               able
               to
               apply
               the
               examples
               for
               the
               seuerall
               words
               wherein
               the
               force
               is
               :
               and
               so
               to
               giue
               any
               rule
               of
               a
               sodain
               ,
               either
               the
               beginning
               or
               the
               sum
               of
               it
               ;
               and
               the
               words
               wherein
               the
               force
               of
               the
               rule
               is
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               Oh
               ,
               but
               this
               is
               a
               matter
               ,
               that
               is
               most
               accounted
               of
               with
               vs
               ;
               to
               haue
               them
               very
               perfect
               in
               saying
               all
               their
               Grammar
               without
               booke
               ,
               euen
               euerie
               rule
               ;
               and
               wherein
               I
               haue
               found
               much
               griefe
               and
               vexation
               :
               because
               I
               haue
               not
               been
               able
               to
               cause
               my
               schollars
               to
               get
               their
               rules
               so
               perfectly
               ;
               and
               much
               lesse
               to
               keepe
               them
               :
               and
               hereby
               ,
               euer
               the
               saying
               parts
               hath
               been
               the
               greatest
               fretting
               to
               me
               and
               feare
               to
               my
               schollars
               ,
               for
               the
               negligence
               of
               most
               ,
               in
               them
               ;
               so
               that
               do
               I
               what
               I
               could
               ,
               yet
               I
               haue
               neuer
               been
               able
               to
               bring
               most
               to
               any
               commendable
               readinesse
               in
               them
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               To
               this
               I
               answere
               you
               ;
               
               that
               this
               indeede
               is
               one
               principall
               thing
               ,
               that
               makes
               our
               calling
               the
               more
               vncomfortable
               :
               and
               I
               doubt
               not
               ,
               but
               that
               the
               griefe
               ,
               which
               the
               best
               doe
               finde
               therin
               ,
               is
               a
               means
               to
               humble
               them
               ,
               and
               to
               keep
               them
               that
               they
               be
               not
               too
               much
               lift-vp
               in
               the
               rest
               .
               And
               indeed
               it
               were
               to
               be
               wished
               that
               the
               rules
               were
               much
               shorter
               :
               but
               sith
               we
               see
               not
               how
               that
               may
               possibly
               be
               helped
               ,
               without
               much
               greater
               inconuenience
               ;
               we
               must
               in
               this
               ,
               as
               in
               the
               rest
               of
               our
               inconueniences
               ,
               vse
               all
               the
               wisdome
               that
               wee
               can
               ,
               to
               make
               a
               benefit
               of
               necessity
               ,
               and
               the
               burden
               so
               light
               ,
               as
               we
               may
               .
               And
               that
               ,
               
               thus
               .
               1.
               
               Making
               our
               schollars
               to
               learn
               them
               so
               perfectly
               as
               we
               can
               .
               2.
               
               To
               keep
               chiefly
               the
               things
               last
               learned
               ,
               by
               oft
               repetition
               .
               3.
               
               Continuall
               care
               for
               parts
               ;
               and
               so
               much
               as
               may
               be
               ,
               to
               let
               them
               haue
               som
               little
               time
               ouer
               night
               ,
               to
               read
               them
               ouer
               ,
               against
               morning
               .
               4.
               to
               cause
               them
               at
               least
               where
               time
               wil
               not
               serue
               ,
               to
               repeat
               the
               summes
               of
               the
               rules
               :
               and
               by
               daily
               examining
               to
               make
               them
               able
               to
               giue
               you
               the
               sum
               or
               beginning
               of
               any
               rule
               ,
               with
               the
               meaning
               of
               it
               ,
               and
               to
               apply
               the
               examples
               .
            
          
           
           
             And
             therin
             to
             content
             our selues
             ,
             
             if
             we
             can
             but
             obtaine
             so
             much
             of
             many
             ,
             
             as
             to
             be
             able
             to
             vnderstand
             and
             make
             vse
             of
             the
             rules
             ,
             or
             to
             turn
             to
             them
             ,
             though
             they
             cannot
             say
             them
             readily
             :
             for
             we
             see
             most
             Schollars
             ,
             when
             they
             come
             to
             the
             Vniuersities
             ,
             to
             forget
             that
             perfectnesse
             in
             their
             Grammars
             ,
             and
             most
             learned
             men
             cannot
             say
             the
             rules
             ;
             yet
             so
             long
             as
             they
             haue
             a
             full
             vnderstanding
             and
             remembrance
             to
             make
             vse
             ,
             in
             resoluing
             ,
             writing
             ,
             or
             speaking
             ,
             this
             sufficeth
             .
          
           
             Lastly
             ,
             
             this
             shall
             much
             helpe
             ,
             to
             cause
             them
             in
             preparing
             their
             lectures
             in
             construction
             ,
             
             to
             turne
             to
             euerie
             hard
             rule
             as
             they
             parse
             ,
             and
             then
             to
             get
             these
             rules
             readily
             ;
             and
             so
             euer
             to
             come
             to
             say
             ,
             with
             their
             Grammars
             vnder
             their
             arms
             .
          
           
             And
             also
             in
             examining
             lectures
             ,
             to
             cause
             them
             to
             tell
             you
             where
             they
             haue
             learned
             the
             seuerall
             harder
             words
             ,
             at
             least
             in
             their
             Grammars
             .
             
             For
             this
             I
             find
             ,
             that
             the
             most
             ordinary
             words
             are
             in
             some
             part
             of
             their
             Grammar
             ,
             or
             the
             words
             whereof
             they
             come
             ,
             or
             some
             very
             neere
             vnto
             them
             ,
             wherby
             they
             may
             remember
             them
             .
          
           
             Thus
             may
             they
             becom
             very
             exquisite
             in
             the
             Grammar
             ,
             
             in
             time
             ;
             and
             haue
             it
             (
             as
             I
             said
             )
             as
             a
             Dictionary
             in
             their
             minds
             ,
             not
             to
             need
             to
             seek
             here
             or
             there
             for
             euery
             word
             .
          
           
             In
             the
             higher
             fourmes
             ,
             
             where
             daily
             repeating
             rules
             hindereth
             much
             other
             learning
             ,
             if
             they
             repeat
             them
             but
             sometimes
             ,
             and
             can
             answere
             in
             a
             word
             or
             two
             ,
             giuing
             the
             sum
             of
             each
             rule
             ,
             it
             may
             suffice
             ;
             although
             it
             is
             a
             great
             commendation
             to
             haue
             the
             Grammar
             
               ad
               vnguem
            
             ,
             and
             to
             giue
             an
             example
             of
             each
             thing
             belonging
             vnto
             Grammar
             .
          
           
             Thus
             haue
             I
             shewed
             you
             what
             I
             haue
             yet
             learned
             concerning
             making
             Schollars
             perfect
             in
             the
             Accedence
             ,
             
             &
             Grammar
             :
             wherin
             as
             you
             see
             ,
             I
             haue
             been
             much
             longer
             ;
             because
             I
             finde
             this
             by
             experience
             ,
             and
             therefore
             dare
             constantly
             affirme
             it
             ,
             that
             if
             this
             bee
             once
             archieued
             in
             a
             school
             ,
             to
             haue
             the
             schollars
             thus
             made
             perfect
             in
             Accedence
             &
             Grammar
             as
             they
             proceede
             ,
             the
             life
             of
             a
             Schoolemaster
             may
             be
             made
             as
             full
             of
             ioy
             and
             contenment
             ,
             without
             wearisomnesse
             ,
             only
             in
             obseruing
             the
             fruit
             of
             his
             labours
             ,
             as
             I
             touched
             ,
             as
             the
             life
             of
             any
             in
             any
             other
             calling
             whatsoeuer
             :
             whereas
             of
             the
             
             otherside
             ,
             much
             of
             our
             fretting
             toile
             ,
             ariseth
             only
             for
             want
             of
             this
             .
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               I
               would
               therefore
               thinke
               it
               a
               most
               profitable
               labour
               ,
               to
               set
               downe
               this
               maner
               of
               examining
               the
               Accedence
               and
               Grammar
               ,
               by
               Question
               and
               Answere
               particularly
               ;
               that
               not
               onely
               the
               weakest
               Schoolemaster
               amongst
               vs
               ,
               but
               euen
               our
               schollars
               themselues
               might
               bee
               able
               so
               to
               oppose
               and
               whet
               one
               another
               .
               I
               my selfe
               haue
               seene
               diuers
               books
               of
               questions
               of
               our
               Accedence
               and
               Grammar
               ,
               beeing
               gathered
               by
               learned
               men
               ;
               yet
               in
               none
               of
               them
               haue
               I
               obserued
               (
               so
               far
               as
               I
               remember
               )
               sundry
               of
               the
               principall
               of
               these
               points
               .
            
             
               Besides
               ,
               that
               no
               man
               can
               so
               wel
               examine
               the
               Accedence
               and
               Grammar
               by
               them
               ;
               because
               ,
               first
               the
               words
               of
               their
               Question
               and
               Aunswere
               ,
               doe
               not
               arise
               so
               out
               of
               the
               words
               of
               the
               rules
               as
               you
               direct
               :
               neither
               doe
               they
               euer
               keepe
               the
               order
               of
               the
               rules
               ;
               and
               they
               haue
               moreouer
               sundry
               other
               hard
               questions
               intermixed
               ,
               and
               sometimes
               many
               together
               ,
               that
               my
               schollars
               haue
               not
               beene
               able
               to
               make
               vse
               of
               them
               ,
               nor
               my selfe
               very
               little
               ,
               in
               regarde
               of
               that
               which
               I
               might
               if
               they
               had
               been
               so
               framed
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               I
               my selfe
               haue
               had
               experience
               of
               the
               same
               in
               them
               :
               insomuch
               as
               though
               I
               haue
               greatly
               desired
               and
               tried
               to
               vse
               some
               of
               them
               in
               my
               schoole
               ,
               in
               regard
               of
               the
               profit
               which
               I
               haue
               conceiued
               might
               come
               by
               them
               ;
               yet
               I
               haue
               not
               bin
               able
               without
               further
               inconuenience
               .
               And
               euer
               as
               new
               schollars
               haue
               come
               to
               any
               schoole
               ,
               so
               they
               haue
               beene
               alwaies
               to
               seeke
               in
               those
               new
               questions
               ,
               as
               that
               I
               haue
               been
               inforced
               to
               leaue
               them
               off
               vtterly
               .
               
               In
               consideration
               whereof
               ,
               and
               of
               the
               generall
               want
               herein
               ;
               as
               also
               of
               the
               publique
               benefit
               ,
               which
               I
               am
               certainly
               assured
               ,
               may
               come
               by
               such
               a
               labour
               as
               you
               speake
               of
               ;
               I
               haue
               indeauored
               by
               the
               helpe
               of
               all
               such
               bookes
               of
               Questions
               and
               Answeres
               ,
               of
               Accedence
               and
               Grammar
               ,
               as
               are
               extant
               ,
               which
               I
               could
               procure
               ;
               as
               likewise
               of
               some
               written
               ,
               togather
               one
               in
               this
               sort
               ,
               hauing
               all
               the
               Questions
               &
               Answers
               arising
               most
               directly
               out
               of
               the
               
               words
               of
               the
               rules
               .
               In
               which
               ,
               I
               haue
               chiefely
               followed
               the
               order
               of
               the
               Quest.
               of
               that
               auncient
               Schoolemaster
               ▪
               Master
               Brunsword
               ,
               of
               Maxfield
               ,
               in
               Cheshire
               ,
               so
               much
               commended
               for
               his
               order
               and
               Schollars
               ;
               who
               ,
               of
               al
               other
               ,
               commeth
               therein
               the
               neerest
               vnto
               the
               marke
               .
               This
               I
               haue
               studied
               to
               make
               so
               plaine
               ,
               as
               euery
               childe
               may
               by
               it
               both
               presently
               vnderstand
               the
               meaning
               of
               each
               rule
               ;
               and
               ,
               if
               he
               can
               say
               the
               rules
               ,
               may
               as
               soone
               be
               able
               to
               answere
               these
               questions
               :
               and
               wherby
               they
               may
               also
               poase
               one
               another
               (
               as
               you
               wish
               )
               to
               make
               all
               rules
               and
               parts
               most
               familiar
               .
               I
               haue
               in
               it
               tied
               my selfe
               strictly
               to
               the
               order
               and
               words
               of
               the
               rules
               ,
               as
               it
               may
               serue
               for
               continual
               poasing
               ,
               and
               speedy
               examining
               Parts
               :
               and
               that
               from
               what
               schoole
               soeuer
               they
               come
               ,
               if
               they
               can
               say
               the
               Accedence
               ,
               they
               may
               presently
               answere
               these
               questions
               .
               Other
               questions
               which
               I
               haue
               thought
               needful
               ,
               I
               haue
               set
               in
               the
               margents
               ,
               directly
               against
               the
               questions
               ,
               to
               be
               learned
               after
               ,
               if
               you
               will
               ,
               without
               troubling
               the
               learner
               ,
               and
               that
               nothing
               may
               be
               wanting
               .
               But
               ,
               for
               this
               book
               ,
               I
               referre
               you
               you
               to
               the
               Epistle
               Dedicatorie
               before
               it
               ,
               and
               the
               questions
               themselues
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               Sir
               ,
               I
               see
               well
               you
               haue
               spared
               no
               labour
               ,
               to
               seeke
               to
               draw-on
               the
               little
               ones
               with
               ease
               &
               delight
               ,
               and
               to
               make
               schollars
               most
               perfect
               Grammarians
               ;
               which
               all
               the
               learned
               do
               so
               highly
               commend
               .
               I
               trust
               I
               shall
               be
               partaker
               hereof
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               It
               is
               and
               hath
               been
               my
               desire
               ,
               to
               hide
               no
               part
               of
               my
               talent
               ;
               but
               to
               imploy
               all
               to
               the
               best
               ,
               and
               communicate
               it
               to
               euery
               one
               to
               whom
               it
               may
               doe
               good
               :
               and
               especially
               the
               little
               ones
               ,
               in
               whome
               is
               the
               chiefest
               hope
               of
               most
               of
               our
               countrey
               schooles
               ,
               and
               of
               the
               age
               to
               come
               .
            
          
        
         
           
           
             CHAP.
             VIII
             .
          
           
             Of
             Construction
             ;
             how
             to
             make
             all
             the
             waie
             thereof
             most
             easie
             and
             plaine
             .
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               WEll
               then
               (
               good
               sir
               )
               now
               that
               you
               haue
               thus
               farre
               forth
               directed
               mee
               ,
               how
               to
               lay
               so
               sure
               a
               foundation
               ,
               for
               my
               schollars
               to
               build
               vpon
               ;
               I
               doubt
               not
               but
               you
               can
               indeed
               guide
               me
               forward
               ,
               how
               they
               may
               build
               vpon
               it
               as
               speedily
               &
               happily
               ,
               both
               for
               their
               construing
               ,
               parsing
               ,
               and
               making
               Latine
               .
            
             
               To
               begin
               therfore
               with
               construction
               ,
               which
               is
               the
               first
               thing
               that
               our
               children
               enter
               into
               ,
               after
               their
               Accedence
               ,
               and
               Rules
               :
               I
               desire
               greatly
               to
               heare
               of
               you
               those
               things
               which
               you
               affirme
               may
               be
               done
               by
               schollars
               ;
               
               and
               wherby
               all
               the
               way
               of
               construction
               may
               be
               made
               so
               easie
               .
               As
               namely
               ,
               that
               children
               should
               bee
               able
               to
               take
               their
               lectures
               of
               themselues
               ,
               truely
               and
               perfectly
               ;
               and
               likewise
               with
               vnderstanding
               vpon
               sure
               grounds
               :
               or
               at
               least
               to
               do
               it
               with
               a
               very
               little
               help
               of
               their
               Masters
               ,
               in
               such
               places
               where
               they
               doubt
               .
               So
               the
               rest
               which
               were
               mentioned
               in
               the
               note
               :
               as
               that
               they
               should
               be
               able
               to
               construe
               ,
               both
               in
               propriety
               of
               words
               ,
               and
               also
               according
               to
               the
               right
               sense
               and
               meaning
               .
               To
               do
               this
               at
               any
               time
               ,
               in
               all
               that
               which
               they
               haue
               learned
               ,
               to
               construe
               out
               of
               a
               translation
               in
               English
               ,
               as
               out
               of
               the
               Latine
               it selfe
               .
               
            
             
               These
               things
               ,
               doe
               iustly
               seeme
               strange
               vnto
               mee
               ;
               because
               I
               am
               faine
               to
               giue
               euery
               lecture
               my selfe
               :
               or
               if
               I
               appoint
               the
               fourmes
               aboue
               to
               giue
               them
               ;
               yet
               I
               am
               compelled
               to
               heare
               the
               giuing
               of
               them
               .
               And
               so
               I
               haue
               as
               great
               a
               trouble
               ,
               
               when
               they
               construe
               false
               to
               direct
               them
               right
               ;
               That
               it
               were
               as
               much
               ease
               to
               mee
               to
               giue
               them
               ,
               myselfe
               ;
               and
               so
               I
               should
               bee
               freede
               from
               the
               griefe
               that
               I
               haue
               ,
               when
               they
               cannot
               doe
               it
               ,
               and
               from
               other
               inconueniences
               .
            
             
               Besides
               ,
               to
               reade
               the
               lectures
               in
               proprietie
               of
               words
               ,
               
               phrase
               ,
               and
               sense
               also
               ;
               this
               seemeth
               to
               mee
               a
               matter
               of
               some
               difficultie
               for
               many
               poore
               countrey
               Schoolemasters
               ;
               and
               not
               onely
               for
               the
               younger
               and
               weaker
               sort
               ,
               but
               also
               for
               some
               of
               the
               more
               ancient
               and
               experienced
               ;
               and
               requireth
               reading
               and
               iudgement
               ;
               that
               I
               do
               not
               see
               how
               schollars
               can
               possibly
               do
               it
               .
            
             
               Moreouer
               ,
               
               when
               I
               haue
               giuen
               my
               schollars
               their
               lectures
               or
               haue
               heard
               them
               giuen
               ,
               vnlesse
               they
               marke
               very
               well
               ;
               yet
               they
               w●ll
               commonly
               mis●e
               in
               some
               part
               of
               that
               which
               I
               haue
               read
               .
               And
               if
               the
               chiefe
               of
               the
               fourme
               mistake
               or
               goe
               false
               ,
               all
               the
               rest
               of
               the
               fourme
               likewise
               construe
               false
               ,
               because
               they
               depend
               on
               them
               :
               and
               so
               oft
               as
               they
               doubt
               I
               am
               sai●e
               to
               t●ll
               them
               ▪
               what
               businesse
               soeuer
               I
               haue
               ;
               which
               dooth
               exceedingly
               trouble
               mee
               .
               They
               also
               are
               afraide
               to
               aske
               mee
               so
               manie
               things
               ,
               and
               it
               may
               bee
               the
               same
               things
               againe
               and
               againe
               :
               wherby
               it
               commeth
               to
               passe
               that
               when
               they
               come
               to
               say
               ,
               fewe
               of
               them
               can
               construe
               ,
               or
               hardly
               any
               of
               them
               perfectly
               :
               which
               increaseth
               oft
               my
               passion
               ,
               and
               their
               feare
               .
            
             
               Finally
               ,
               this
               I
               account
               the
               worst
               of
               all
               ,
               that
               when
               I
               haue
               taken
               a
               great
               deale
               of
               paines
               ,
               
               and
               haue
               made
               my
               schollars
               very
               ready
               in
               construing
               &
               parsing
               ;
               yet
               come
               and
               examine
               them
               in
               those
               things
               a
               quarter
               of
               a
               yeer
               after
               ,
               they
               will
               be
               many
               of
               them
               as
               though
               they
               had
               neuer
               learned
               them
               ,
               and
               the
               best
               farre
               to
               seeke
               :
               whereby
               ,
               when
               gentlemen
               or
               others
               come
               in
               and
               examine
               them
               ,
               or
               their
               friends
               try
               them
               at
               home
               ,
               in
               the
               things
               which
               they
               learned
               a
               quarter
               ,
               or
               halfe
               a
               yeere
               b●fore
               ;
               they
               are
               ordinarily
               found
               so
               rawe
               ,
               and
               to
               haue
               so
               f●rgotten
               ,
               that
               I
               do
               receiue
               great
               reproach
               ,
               as
               though
               I
               had
               taken
               no
               paines
               with
               them
               ,
               or
               as
               they
               had
               profited
               nothing
               .
            
             
               And
               for
               that
               of
               beeing
               able
               to
               reade
               ,
               construe
               ,
               and
               
               parse
               lectures
               ,
               or
               whatsoeuer
               they
               haue
               learned
               ,
               out
               of
               an
               English
               translation
               ,
               I
               haue
               not
               made
               triall
               ;
               though
               I
               know
               they
               cannot
               doe
               it
               ,
               being
               harder
               ,
               then
               the
               construing
               and
               parsing
               of
               the
               Authors
               themselues
               :
               albeit
               it
               cannot
               be
               ,
               but
               a
               matter
               of
               exceeding
               profit
               ,
               and
               must
               needes
               helpe
               to
               make
               schollars
               very
               soone
               .
            
             
               Therefore
               ,
               if
               you
               can
               direct
               mee
               ,
               how
               to
               doe
               all
               these
               things
               ,
               which
               you
               haue
               mentioned
               in
               this
               behalfe
               ,
               so
               to
               construe
               and
               parse
               of
               themselues
               ,
               and
               that
               out
               of
               the
               bare
               English
               translation
               ,
               and
               also
               that
               they
               shall
               bee
               able
               to
               goe
               certainely
               ,
               and
               vppon
               sure
               grounds
               ;
               I
               must
               needes
               acknowledge
               my selfe
               to
               haue
               receiued
               an
               incomparable
               and
               a
               perpetuall
               benefit
               :
               and
               you
               shall
               indeede
               euen
               heer●in
               helpe
               to
               make
               my
               burden
               far
               more
               light
               ,
               and
               my
               whole
               life
               much
               more
               comfortable
               ;
               besides
               ,
               that
               my
               schollars
               shal
               be
               beholden
               vnto
               you
               ●or
               euer
               ,
               for
               deliuering
               them
               from
               so
               much
               feare
               ,
               and
               setting
               them
               to
               go
               so
               fast
               forwarde
               with
               such
               alacritie
               ,
               as
               should
               appeare
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               Surely
               ,
               sir
               ,
               all
               this
               may
               bee
               done
               ,
               by
               the
               perfect
               knowledge
               of
               their
               Accedence
               and
               Grammar
               rules
               first
               ,
               
               and
               then
               the
               practice
               of
               that
               golden
               rule
               of
               construing
               ,
               
               together
               with
               Grammaticall
               translations
               of
               the
               first
               ordinarie
               schoole
               Authours
               ,
               framed
               according
               to
               the
               same
               rule
               ,
               if
               they
               be
               translated
               rightly
               in
               propriety
               of
               words
               ,
               phrase
               and
               sense
               .
            
             
               By
               these
               I
               dare
               be
               hold
               to
               affirme
               vpon
               sure
               experience
               ,
               and
               the
               trials
               of
               many
               very
               learned
               ,
               that
               all
               these
               things
               may
               bee
               effected
               amongst
               th●se
               who
               are
               apt
               ,
               without
               any
               inconuenience
               at
               all
               ,
               if
               they
               be
               rightly
               vsed
               ▪
               as
               I
               shall
               direct
               you
               the
               manner
               after
               .
               But
               without
               them
               ,
               I
               cannot
               finde
               how
               possibly
               the
               inconueniences
               ,
               which
               you
               haue
               recited
               ,
               can
               be
               preuēted
               ,
               or
               these
               benefits
               can
               be
               attained
               in
               any
               like
               measure
               ;
               chiefly
               in
               the
               greater
               schooles
               ,
               where
               many
               schollars
               are
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               For
               that
               golden
               rule
               of
               construing
               and
               the
               Grammaticall
               transl●tions
               which
               you
               mention
               ,
               
               I
               knowe
               not
               vvhat
               you
               meane
               :
               N●yther
               haue
               I
               euer
               heard
               of
               
               any
               such
               .
               Haue
               you
               any
               other
               rule
               of
               construing
               ,
               then
               our
               Grammar
               teacheth
               ?
               or
               any
               such
               translations
               made
               according
               to
               it
               ,
               in
               this
               propriety
               which
               you
               speake
               of
               ?
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               Yes
               indeede
               sir
               ,
               there
               is
               a
               speciall
               rule
               ,
               and
               such
               translations
               also
               :
               by
               the
               constant
               practice
               whereof
               ,
               not
               onely
               the
               former
               euils
               may
               bee
               auoided
               ,
               and
               the
               benefites
               mentioned
               may
               bee
               obtained
               ;
               but
               also
               the
               way
               to
               all
               construing
               ,
               parsing
               ,
               examining
               ,
               making
               ,
               writing
               ,
               speaking
               ,
               and
               also
               trying
               Latine
               ,
               may
               be
               made
               most
               easie
               and
               plaine
               ;
               So
               ,
               as
               children
               may
               proceede
               vpon
               sure
               grounds
               ,
               and
               doe
               all
               things
               herein
               with
               vnderstanding
               ,
               and
               right
               reason
               ,
               and
               far
               more
               speedily
               ,
               and
               with
               more
               delight
               ,
               then
               vsually
               .
            
             
               And
               howsoeuer
               this
               rule
               bee
               vnknowen
               of
               most
               ,
               who
               neuer
               heard
               of
               any
               such
               particular
               rule
               of
               construing
               ,
               but
               only
               of
               such
               directions
               ,
               as
               may
               be
               gathered
               here
               and
               there
               ,
               out
               of
               our
               Accedence
               and
               Grammar
               ,
               where
               they
               are
               dispearsed
               thorough
               all
               ,
               
               very
               hardly
               to
               be
               discerned
               ;
               yet
               it
               is
               set
               downe
               by
               sundry
               learned
               Grammarians
               .
               As
               by
               Susenbrotus
               ,
               Crusius
               ,
               Cosarzus
               ,
               and
               our
               ancient
               Schoole
               master
               Master
               Leech
               ,
               in
               his
               little
               questions
               of
               the
               Accedence
               and
               others
               ,
               as
               also
               lately
               by
               learned
               Goclenius
               ;
               though
               in
               all
               of
               them
               imperfectly
               ,
               and
               differing
               somewhat
               each
               from
               other
               ,
               through
               the
               diuers
               exceptions
               in
               the
               Grammar
               rules
               and
               varietie
               of
               Grammars
               .
               Crusius
               hath
               also
               examples
               of
               the
               practice
               of
               the
               rule
               handled
               at
               large
               .
               It
               would
               be
               ouer-tedious
               to
               set
               them
               downe
               all
               ,
               or
               what
               each
               of
               them
               hath
               written
               thereof
               .
            
             
               Yet
               because
               the
               rule
               hath
               some
               difficulty
               ,
               and
               that
               wee
               may
               consider
               the
               better
               of
               it
               ,
               I
               will
               rehearse
               it
               briefly
               out
               of
               one
               or
               two
               of
               them
               .
               And
               seeing
               we
               are
               to
               deale
               for
               the
               first
               enterers
               into
               construction
               ,
               
               I
               will
               set
               it
               downe
               first
               ,
               as
               Master
               Leach
               hath
               it
               ,
               who
               is
               the
               plainest
               .
            
             
               His
               words
               are
               these
               ;
            
             
               Q.
               What
               order
               will
               you
               obserue
               in
               construing
               of
               asentence
               ?
            
             
               A.
               If
               there
               bee
               a
               Vocatiue
               case
               I
               must
               take
               that
               first
               :
               then
               I
               must
               seek
               out
               the
               principall
               Verbe
               &
               his
               Nominatiue
               
               case
               ,
               and
               construe
               first
               the
               Nominatiue
               case
               :
               and
               if
               there
               be
               an
               Adiectiue
               or
               Participle
               with
               him
               ,
               then
               I
               must
               English
               them
               next
               ,
               and
               such
               wordes
               as
               they
               gouerne
               ;
               then
               the
               Verbe
               :
               and
               if
               there
               follow
               an
               Infinitiue
               moode
               ,
               I
               must
               take
               that
               next
               ;
               then
               the
               Aduerbe
               ;
               then
               the
               case
               which
               the
               Verbe
               properly
               gouerneth
               :
               and
               lastly
               ,
               all
               the
               other
               cases
               in
               their
               order
               ;
               first
               the
               Genitiue
               ,
               secondly
               the
               Datiue
               ,
               &c.
               
            
             
               Q.
               What
               if
               there
               be
               not
               all
               these
               words
               ?
            
             
               A.
               Then
               I
               must
               take
               so
               many
               of
               them
               as
               be
               in
               the
               sentence
               ,
               and
               in
               this
               order
               .
            
             
               Q.
               Is
               this
               order
               euer
               to
               be
               obserued
               ?
            
             
               A.
               No
               :
               it
               may
               be
               altered
               by
               Interrogatiues
               .
               Relatiues
               ,
               Infinitiues
               ,
               Genitiues
               of
               partition
               ,
               and
               Coniunctions
               .
            
             
               Q.
               What
               speciall
               things
               must
               bee
               obserued
               in
               construing
               ?
            
             
               A.
               That
               the
               Nominatiue
               case
               be
               set
               before
               the
               Verbe
               ,
               the
               Accusatiue
               case
               after
               the
               Verbe
               ,
               the
               Infinitiue
               moode
               after
               another
               moode
               :
               the
               Substantiue
               and
               the
               Adiectiue
               must
               be
               construed
               together
               ;
               except
               the
               Adiectiue
               do
               passe
               ouer
               his
               signification
               vnto
               some
               other
               word
               ,
               which
               it
               gouerneth
               .
            
             
               The
               Accusatiue
               ,
               before
               an
               Infinitiue
               moode
               ,
               must
               haue
               the
               word
               (
               that
               )
               ioyned
               with
               it
               .
            
             
               The
               Preposition
               must
               be
               ioyned
               with
               his
               case
               .
            
             
               Afterwards
               he
               giues
               a
               short
               example
               hereof
               .
            
             
               Crusius
               ,
               
               from
               whom
               I
               receiued
               the
               first
               light
               heereof
               long
               agoe
               ,
               he
               hath
               it
               something
               otherwise
               ;
               though
               for
               the
               substance
               it
               be
               the
               same
               :
               whose
               wordes
               also
               ,
               because
               hee
               is
               but
               short
               ,
               I
               will
               set
               downe
               ;
               and
               the
               rather
               ,
               for
               that
               there
               are
               so
               many
               learned
               ,
               who
               haue
               not
               so
               much
               as
               heard
               of
               the
               rule
               .
               The
               words
               of
               Crusius
               are
               these
               :
            
          
           
             
               
                 
                   
                     De
                     ordine
                     verborum
                     in
                     construendo
                     &
                     interpretando
                     .
                     
                  
                   
                     QVotuplex
                     est
                     ordo
                     verborum
                     ?
                  
                   
                     Duplex
                     .
                     Naturalis
                     &
                     Artificiosus
                     .
                  
                   
                   
                     Quid
                     est
                     naturalis
                     ?
                  
                   
                     Est
                     Grammaticus
                     ordo
                     docens
                     quid
                     primo
                     ,
                     secundo
                     ,
                     aut
                     postremo
                     loco
                     ponendum
                     sit
                     .
                  
                   
                     Quid
                     artificiosus
                     ?
                  
                   
                     Quo
                     Oratores
                     ,
                     Historici
                     ,
                     Poëtae
                     &
                     Philosophivtuntur
                     .
                  
                   
                     Quid
                     est
                     ordo
                     verborum
                     naturalis
                     ?
                  
                   
                     1.
                     
                     Sumitur
                     Nominatiuus
                     Substantiuinominis
                     ,
                     qui
                     dicitur
                     subiectum
                     aut
                     quicquid
                     vim
                     Nominatiui
                     habet
                     .
                  
                   
                     Huic
                     additur
                     Adiectiuum
                     ,
                     aut
                     quicquid
                     Nominatiunm
                     explicat
                     .
                     Saepe
                     sententiam
                     inchoat
                     Vocatiuus
                     ,
                     aut
                     particulae
                     Qrationem
                     connectentes
                     ,
                     aut
                     Ablatiui
                     absoluti
                     ,
                     aut
                     Relatiua
                     .
                  
                   
                     2.
                     
                     Verbum
                     finitum
                     personale
                     ,
                     quod
                     vocatur
                     Praedicatum
                     .
                     Impersonalia
                     constructionem
                     sine
                     Nominatiuo
                     inchoant
                     .
                  
                   
                     3.
                     
                     Casus
                     obliqui
                     ,
                     inter
                     quos
                     dignior
                     praecedat
                     .
                  
                   
                     Saepe
                     Infinitinus
                     :
                     quem
                     antecedit
                     Accusatiuus
                     cum
                     adest
                     .
                  
                   
                     Saepe
                     Aduerbium
                     ,
                     aut
                     Nominatiui
                     gestuum
                     ac
                     similes
                     :
                     quae
                     statim
                     verbo
                     subijciuntur
                     .
                  
                   
                     Interdum
                     Gerundia
                     ,
                     aut
                     Ablatiui
                     absoluti
                     .
                  
                   
                     Praeterea
                     ,
                  
                   
                     Praepositiones
                     cum
                     suis
                     casibus
                     .
                  
                   
                     Denique
                     ,
                     Coniunctiones
                     quae
                     superioribus
                     alia
                     attexunt
                     ,
                     in
                     quibus
                     idem
                     ordo
                     seruandus
                     est
                     .
                  
                   
                     Sic
                     in
                     quauis
                     lingua
                     .
                  
                   
                     
                       Comprehende
                       ista
                       mihi
                       regula
                       quam
                       potes
                       breuissima
                       .
                    
                  
                   
                     DIctio
                     regens
                     praeponenda
                     est
                     ei
                     quae
                     regitur
                     :
                  
                   
                     Quae
                     declarant
                     postponenda
                     sunt
                     ijs
                     quae
                     declarantur
                     .
                     
                       Thus
                       farre
                    
                     Crusius
                     ,
                     
                       of
                       the
                       rule
                    
                     .
                  
                
              
            
          
           
             
               Sp●ud
               .
            
             
               I
               pray
               you
               expound
               it
               somewhat
               more
               at
               large
               ,
               
               that
               I
               may
               conceiue
               of
               it
               yet
               more
               fully
               .
               
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               I
               will
               endeauour
               to
               doe
               as
               you
               say
               ;
               although
               for
               the
               more
               curious
               handling
               of
               it
               ,
               I
               will
               leaue
               it
               to
               some
               other
               or
               else
               referre
               it
               to
               a
               farther
               time
               ,
               
               because
               of
               the
               difficulty
               of
               it
               ,
               through
               the
               manifold
               exceptions
               ,
               as
               I
               noted
               ,
               especially
               in
               the
               longer
               and
               more
               intricate
               sentences
               :
               wherin
               
               I
               take
               it
               very
               hard
               ,
               to
               set
               down
               any
               direct
               rule
               particularly
               .
            
             
               Therefore
               for
               the
               better
               vnderstanding
               of
               the
               rule
               ,
               
               we
               are
               to
               obserue
               ,
            
             
               1.
               
               That
               the
               Schollar
               must
               reade
               the
               sentence
               ,
               before
               he
               construe
               ;
               and
               in
               reading
               ,
               that
               he
               doe
               it
               distinctly
               ,
               reading
               to
               a
               Period
               or
               full
               point
               ,
               and
               there
               to
               stay
               .
               
            
             
               2.
               
               To
               marke
               the
               sentence
               well
               ,
               and
               to
               obserue
               all
               the
               points
               in
               it
               ,
               both
               Commaes
               and
               Colons
               ;
               or
               lesse
               distinctions
               ,
               
               and
               middle
               distinctions
               :
               that
               so
               hee
               may
               see
               and
               consider
               both
               the
               beginning
               ,
               middest
               ,
               and
               end
               of
               the
               sentence
               together
               ;
               and
               also
               each
               clause
               in
               it
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               That
               if
               there
               bee
               any
               wordes
               in
               the
               sentence
               ,
               
               beginning
               with
               great
               letters
               ,
               except
               the
               first
               wordes
               of
               all
               ;
               to
               remember
               that
               those
               are
               proper
               names
               :
               and
               also
               if
               there
               be
               any
               wordes
               included
               within
               a
               Parenthesis
               ,
               or
               two
               halfe
               Moones
               ,
               as
               they
               are
               tearmed
               ,
               that
               they
               are
               to
               be
               construed
               by
               themselues
               .
            
             
               4.
               
               That
               hee
               seeke
               to
               vnderstand
               what
               the
               matter
               is
               about
               :
               
               and
               so
               in
               continued
               speeches
               ,
               to
               marke
               what
               went
               before
               .
            
             
               5.
               
               To
               obserue
               if
               there
               be
               a
               Vocatiue
               case
               .
               
            
             
               6.
               
               To
               seeke
               out
               carefully
               the
               principall
               Verbe
               ,
               by
               the
               rule
               in
               the
               Grammar
               of
               finding
               out
               the
               principal
               Verb
               ,
               
               viz.
               If
               there
               be
               moe
               Verbes
               then
               one
               in
               a
               sentence
               ,
               the
               first
               is
               the
               principall
               except
               it
               be
               an
               infinitiue
               moode
               ;
               or
               haue
               before
               it
               a
               Relatiue
               ,
               or
               a
               Coniunction
               as
               
                 vt
                 ,
                 cum
                 .
                 si
                 ,
                 &c.
                 
              
               Which
               principall
               Verbe
               being
               found
               out
               ,
               doth
               commonly
               point
               out
               the
               right
               Nominatiue
               case
               :
               which
               Nominatiue
               case
               is
               that
               ,
               which
               agreeth
               with
               it
               in
               number
               &
               person
               ;
               and
               it
               doth
               also
               direct
               all
               the
               sentence
               very
               much
               .
               So
               that
               this
               may
               be
               accounted
               as
               the
               load-star
               ,
               guiding
               all
               .
            
             
               7.
               
               To
               marke
               the
               clauses
               which
               haue
               no
               Verbs
               in
               them
               ,
               
               to
               fit
               them
               with
               their
               owne
               right
               Verbes
               ,
               expressed
               or
               vnderstood
               :
               for
               no
               clause
               can
               be
               without
               a
               Verbe
               .
            
             
               8.
               
               To
               supply
               all
               such
               wordes
               as
               are
               wanting
               ,
               
               to
               make
               perfect
               sense
               and
               construction
               .
            
             
               9.
               
               To
               giue
               euery
               word
               his
               due
               signification
               and
               proper
               
               
               signe
               ,
               so
               farre
               as
               sense
               will
               beare
               .
            
             
               10.
               
               To
               ioyne
               the
               Substantiue
               and
               Adiectiue
               together
               in
               construing
               ,
               
               except
               the
               Adiectiue
               doe
               passe
               ouer
               his
               signification
               into
               some
               other
               word
               ,
               which
               is
               gouerned
               of
               it
               .
               Also
               to
               ioyne
               the
               Preposition
               with
               his
               case
               .
            
             
               11.
               
               To
               marke
               whether
               the
               sentence
               haue
               not
               an
               Interrogatiue
               point
               :
               
               then
               to
               reade
               it
               as
               asking
               a
               question
               ;
               and
               then
               the
               Nominatiue
               case
               is
               to
               come
               after
               the
               Verbe
               ,
               according
               to
               the
               rule
               of
               the
               Accedence
               :
               or
               otherwise
               to
               bee
               set
               directly
               before
               it
               ,
               if
               our
               English
               phrase
               will
               beare
               it
               .
            
             
               These
               things
               obserued
               ,
               then
               the
               order
               proceedeth
               thus
               vsually
               :
            
             
               1.
               
               If
               there
               be
               a
               Vocatiue
               case
               ,
               
               to
               take
               that
               first
               and
               whatsoeuer
               dependeth
               of
               it
               ,
               
               that
               is
               whatsoeuer
               agreeth
               with
               it
               ;
               or
               is
               gouerned
               of
               it
               to
               expresse
               it
               ;
               or
               in
               stead
               of
               a
               Vocatiue
               case
               ,
               an
               Interiection
               of
               Calling
               or
               Exclamation
               ,
               or
               an
               Aduerb
               of
               Calling
               ,
               Wishing
               ,
               Shewing
               ,
               Exhorting
               ,
               or
               Swearing
               ,
               Affirming
               ,
               or
               the
               like
               ;
               which
               haue
               the
               nature
               of
               Interiections
               ,
               if
               there
               be
               any
               such
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               The
               Nominatiue
               of
               the
               principall
               Verbe
               ,
               
               or
               whatsoeuer
               is
               put
               in
               stead
               of
               the
               Nominatiue
               case
               ,
               and
               such
               words
               as
               depend
               on
               it
               ;
               as
               namely
               ,
               an
               Adiectiue
               or
               Participle
               ,
               and
               such
               wordes
               as
               they
               gouerne
               :
               or
               a
               Substantiue
               ,
               being
               the
               latter
               of
               two
               Substantiues
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               The
               principall
               Verbe
               ,
               
               and
               whatsoeuer
               hangeth
               or
               dependeth
               on
               it
               :
               as
               if
               there
               follow
               an
               Infinitiue
               moode
               ,
               to
               take
               that
               next
               ,
               and
               the
               Aduerbe
               ,
               which
               is
               ioyned
               commonly
               to
               the
               Verbes
               ,
               to
               declare
               their
               signification
               .
            
             
               4.
               
               The
               case
               which
               the
               Verbe
               doth
               properly
               gouerne
               next
               vnto
               it selfe
               ,
               
               which
               is
               most
               commonly
               the
               Accusatiue
               case
               ,
               and
               whatsoeuer
               hangeth
               on
               it
               ;
               or
               an
               Accusatiue
               case
               before
               an
               Infinitiue
               moode
               in
               stead
               hereof
               .
            
             
               5.
               
               Then
               follow
               all
               the
               other
               cases
               in
               order
               ;
               
               first
               the
               Genitiue
               ,
               then
               the
               Datiue
               or
               Ablatiue
               ,
               with
               a
               Preposition
               ,
               or
               without
               .
            
             
               This
               is
               the
               sum
               of
               the
               rule
               ,
               as
               it
               is
               most
               generall
               and
               naturall
               .
            
             
             
               Yet
               here
               these
               things
               must
               be
               remembred
               :
               
            
             
               1.
               
               If
               all
               these
               words
               be
               not
               in
               the
               sentence
               which
               is
               to
               be
               construed
               ,
               
               to
               take
               so
               many
               of
               them
               as
               there
               are
               ,
               and
               in
               this
               order
               .
            
             
               2
               That
               the
               order
               is
               changed
               by
               the
               Relatiue
               
                 Qui
                 quae
              
               ,
               
               quod
               :
               also
               by
               Interrogatiues
               ,
               Indefinites
               ,
               Partitiues
               ;
               because
               these
               (
               according
               to
               the
               Grammar
               rule
               )
               follow
               the
               rule
               of
               the
               Relatiue
               ;
               going
               before
               the
               words
               wherof
               they
               are
               gouerned
               .
               So
               likewise
               Aduerbs
               of
               likenesse
               (
               as
               ,
               
                 Quemadmodum
                 ,
                 vt
                 ,
                 veluti
                 ,
                 sicut
              
               )
               when
               they
               haue
               sic
               or
               ita
               answering
               to
               them
               in
               the
               second
               part
               of
               the
               sentence
               ,
               doe
               vse
               to
               goe
               before
               .
               As
               also
               Coniunctions
               Copulatiues
               ,
               Rationals
               ,
               Aduersitiues
               ,
               hauing
               their
               Redditiues
               following
               ,
               answering
               vnto
               them
               :
               so
               Expletiues
               ,
               and
               certaine
               others
               :
            
             
               Finally
               ,
               all
               such
               wordes
               as
               these
               mentioned
               (
               which
               wee
               may
               call
               wordes
               of
               dependence
               ,
               because
               they
               depend
               on
               something
               going
               before
               or
               comming
               after
               in
               the
               same
               sentence
               )
               or
               else
               wordes
               of
               Connexion
               ,
               seruing
               to
               knit
               new
               sentences
               to
               the
               former
               (
               as
               these
               Coniunctions
               )
               are
               to
               bee
               placed
               next
               the
               Vocatiue
               case
               :
               or
               in
               the
               first
               place
               ,
               where
               there
               is
               no
               Vocatiue
               case
               .
            
             
               3
               That
               in
               stead
               of
               the
               Nominatiue
               case
               ,
               
               we
               take
               whatsoeuer
               is
               in
               place
               thereof
               ,
               as
               a
               whole
               sentence
               ,
               a
               peece
               of
               a
               sentence
               ,
               an
               Infinitiue
               moode
               ,
               an
               Aduerbe
               with
               a
               Genitiue
               case
               ,
               two
               Nominatiue
               cases
               singular
               or
               moe
               ,
               ioyned
               with
               a
               Verbe
               plurall
               ,
               or
               sometimes
               a
               letter
               set
               by
               it selfe
               ,
               or
               moe
               ,
               or
               any
               word
               put
               for
               it selfe
               ;
               which
               we
               call
               a
               word
               of
               arte
               :
               as
               
                 Amo
                 est
                 verbum
                 .
                 Amo
              
               is
               here
               taken
               for
               the
               Nominatiue
               case
               :
               for
               all
               such
               wordes
               or
               sentences
               are
               supposed
               to
               bee
               the
               Neuter
               Gender
               vndeclined
               .
            
             
               So
               whatsoeuer
               includeth
               the
               Nominatiue
               case
               ;
               as
               ,
               a
               Verbe
               Impersonall
               ,
               an
               Ablatiue
               case
               absolute
               ;
               Gerunds
               and
               Supines
               put
               absolutely
               with
               this
               Verbe
               est
               :
               as
               
                 Orandum
                 est
                 vt
                 sit
                 mens
                 sana
                 in
                 corpore
                 sano
                 .
                 I●um
                 est
                 in
                 viscera
                 terrae
                 :
              
               because
               these
               stand
               for
               Verbes
               Impersonals
               ,
               and
               haue
               the
               Nominatiue
               case
               included
               in
               them
               .
            
             
             
               4.
               
               The
               Participles
               with
               Gerunds
               and
               Supines
               follow
               the
               order
               of
               those
               Verbes
               wherof
               they
               come
               ,
               
               in
               gouerning
               thesame
               cases
               ,
               as
               in
               the
               rules
               .
               Also
               that
               Gerunds
               and
               Supines
               are
               commonly
               put
               for
               the
               Infinitiue
               moode
               .
            
             
               5.
               
               Coniunctions
               or
               other
               wordes
               of
               dependance
               in
               new
               clauses
               of
               the
               sentences
               ,
               
               serue
               to
               ioyne
               together
               the
               later
               parts
               of
               the
               sentences
               to
               the
               former
               ;
               wherein
               the
               same
               order
               must
               be
               kept
               againe
               as
               before
               .
            
             
               6.
               
               That
               the
               Aduerbs
               be
               placed
               before
               or
               after
               the
               Verb
               ;
               
               as
               the
               sense
               will
               most
               conueniently
               beare
               .
            
             
               7.
               
               That
               the
               Latinismes
               bee
               obserued
               ,
               
               to
               ioyne
               the
               whole
               phrases
               together
               ,
               so
               much
               as
               may
               be
               ,
               and
               to
               expresse
               them
               by
               as
               elegant
               and
               fit
               phrases
               as
               wee
               can
               in
               our
               tongue
               .
            
             
               The
               reason
               also
               of
               the
               rule
               ,
               that
               euery
               one
               may
               conceiue
               each
               thing
               ,
               
               is
               this
               :
            
             
               1
               That
               the
               wordes
               must
               bee
               placed
               in
               order
               ,
               
               as
               they
               should
               stand
               ;
               according
               to
               the
               plaine
               and
               proper
               nature
               of
               the
               speech
               ,
               in
               which
               they
               are
               vsed
               to
               expresse
               any
               matter
               :
               which
               is
               the
               very
               order
               which
               Grammar
               teacheth
               ,
               and
               as
               one
               gouerneth
               another
               .
            
             
               2
               The
               word
               gouerning
               or
               directing
               ,
               
               to
               be
               placed
               before
               those
               which
               it
               gouerneth
               or
               directeth
               .
            
             
               3
               Those
               words
               which
               do
               declare
               others
               ,
               
               are
               to
               be
               set
               after
               those
               which
               they
               doe
               declare
               or
               make
               plaine
               .
            
             
               So
               the
               principall
               word
               going
               before
               ,
               doth
               commonly
               direct
               the
               wordes
               following
               ;
               
               eyther
               in
               agreement
               or
               gouernement
               :
               that
               is
               ,
               it
               causeth
               the
               word
               following
               to
               agree
               with
               it
               ,
               or
               to
               be
               gouerned
               of
               it
               ;
               except
               in
               oblique
               cases
               of
               Interrogatiues
               ,
               Relatiues
               ,
               Indefinits
               ,
               Partitiues
               ,
               which
               doe
               commonly
               goe
               before
               together
               with
               the
               Substantiues
               or
               Antecedents
               ,
               with
               which
               they
               agree
               ;
               and
               are
               gouerned
               or
               guided
               by
               the
               word
               following
               after
               :
               as
               ,
               
                 Quem
                 librum
                 legis
                 ?
                 Quarum
                 rerum
                 vtram
                 minus
                 velim
                 non
                 facilè
                 possum
                 existimare
                 .
              
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               I
               perceiue
               the
               rule
               most
               plainely
               ,
               and
               doe
               see
               an
               euident
               reason
               of
               euery
               thing
               ;
               yet
               neuerthelesse
               I
               desire
               
               you
               further
               to
               giue
               me
               a
               little
               briefe
               of
               it
               ,
               as
               my
               schollars
               may
               best
               remember
               it
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               The
               summe
               is
               this
               ;
               
               to
               reade
               ouer
               the
               sentence
               distinctly
               to
               a
               full
               point
               ;
               obseruing
               carefully
               all
               the
               points
               and
               proper
               names
               ,
               with
               the
               drift
               and
               meaning
               ;
               but
               chiefely
               to
               marke
               the
               principall
               Verbe
               ,
               because
               that
               pointeth
               out
               the
               right
               Nominatiue
               case
               ,
               and
               directeth
               all
               the
               sentence
               :
               also
               to
               marke
               if
               there
               be
               any
               Vocatiue
               case
               .
               Then
               the
               order
               goeth
               thus
               :
            
          
           
             1
             If
             there
             be
             a
             Vocatiue
             case
             ,
             to
             construe
             that
             first
             ,
             with
             whatsoeuer
             agreeth
             with
             it
             ,
             or
             is
             gouerned
             of
             it
             ,
             or
             whatsoeuer
             is
             put
             in
             the
             place
             of
             it
             ;
             as
             an
             Interiection
             of
             Exclamation
             or
             calling
             ,
             or
             an
             Aduerbe
             of
             calling
             .
          
           
             2
             To
             take
             the
             Nominatiue
             case
             of
             the
             principal
             Verbe
             ,
             or
             whatsoeuer
             is
             put
             in
             steede
             of
             it
             ,
             and
             to
             adioyne
             to
             it
             whatsoeuer
             hangeth
             of
             it
             :
             as
             the
             Adiectiue
             or
             Participle
             ,
             and
             such
             words
             as
             they
             gouerne
             .
          
           
             3
             To
             take
             the
             principall
             Verbe
             ,
             and
             whatsoeuer
             hangeth
             on
             it
             ,
             each
             in
             the
             right
             order
             ;
             as
             if
             there
             follow
             an
             Infinitiue
             moode
             ,
             to
             take
             that
             next
             :
             then
             the
             Aduerbe
             ;
             after
             ,
             the
             case
             which
             the
             Verbe
             properly
             gouerneth
             (
             which
             is
             commonly
             the
             Accusatiue
             case
             )
             &
             whatsoeuer
             hangeth
             on
             that
             .
             Lastly
             ,
             all
             the
             other
             cases
             in
             order
             :
             first
             the
             Genitiue
             ,
             secondly
             the
             Datiue
             ,
             and
             lastly
             the
             Ablatiue
             .
          
           
             4
             If
             there
             be
             not
             all
             these
             Verbes
             ,
             to
             take
             so
             many
             of
             them
             as
             are
             in
             the
             sentence
             ,
             and
             in
             this
             order
             .
          
           
             5
             That
             this
             order
             is
             changed
             by
             Interr
             .
             Relat.
             Indefinites
             ,
             Partitiues
             ,
             &
             som
             Coniunctions
             with
             Aduerbs
             of
             likenesse
             :
             as
             
               Quemadmodum
               ,
               vt
               ,
               sicut
               &c.
            
             hauing
             sic
             ,
             or
             ita
             ,
             to
             answer
             them
             in
             the
             second
             part
             of
             the
             sentence
             ;
             because
             those
             wordes
             vse
             to
             goe
             before
             .
          
           
             Lastly
             ,
             to
             take
             the
             Substantiue
             and
             Adiectiue
             together
             ,
             vnlesse
             the
             Adiectiue
             passe
             ouer
             his
             signification
             vnto
             some
             other
             word
             ,
             which
             it
             gouerneth
             ;
             and
             so
             likewise
             the
             Preposition
             with
             his
             case
             .
          
           
             Most
             briefly
             thus
             :
             that
             the
             principal
             Verb
             be
             first
             sought
             out
             ;
             then
          
           
           
             1.
             
             Take
             the
             Vocatiue
             case
             ,
             
             or
             whatsoeuer
             is
             in
             stead
             of
             it
             ,
             or
             hangs
             vpon
             it
             seruing
             to
             make
             it
             plaine
             .
          
           
             2.
             
             The
             Nom.
             case
             of
             the
             principall
             Verbe
             ,
             or
             whatsoeuer
             is
             in
             stead
             of
             it
             ,
             or
             depends
             of
             it
             to
             make
             it
             plaine
             .
          
           
             3.
             
             Then
             the
             principall
             Verbe
             ,
             and
             whatsoeuer
             hangs
             of
             it
             ,
             seruing
             to
             expound
             it
             :
             as
             an
             Aduerbe
             ,
             or
             an
             Infinitiue
             mood
             .
          
           
             4.
             
             Lastly
             ,
             the
             case
             which
             the
             Verbe
             properly
             gouernes
             ,
             and
             all
             the
             other
             cases
             after
             it
             ,
             in
             order
             .
          
           
             Note
             that
             the
             order
             is
             changed
             by
             Interrog
             .
             Relat.
             Partit
             ,
             certain
             Aduerbs
             &
             Coniunctions
             :
             al
             which
             vse
             to
             go
             before
             .
          
           
             Obserue
             ,
             specially
             for
             the
             enterers
             ,
             to
             put
             them
             in
             minde
             of
             this
             often
             :
             the
             Nom.
             before
             the
             Verbe
             :
             the
             Accus
             .
             after
             the
             Verbe
             :
             the
             Substant
             .
             and
             Adiect
             .
             to
             goe
             together
             ;
             vnlesse
             the
             Adiect
             .
             passe
             his
             signification
             into
             some
             other
             word
             :
             the
             Preposition
             and
             his
             case
             together
             .
          
           
             This
             is
             the
             briefest
             ,
             plainest
             ,
             and
             most
             generall
             forme
             ,
             that
             (
             after
             long
             practice
             and
             considering
             of
             it
             )
             I
             can
             conceiue
             ,
             though
             it
             haue
             some
             exceptions
             ,
             as
             I
             said
             .
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               I
               pray
               you
               giue
               me
               an
               example
               hereof
               .
               
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               I
               will
               take
               the
               very
               example
               which
               Crusius
               hath
               set
               downe
               out
               of
               
                 Tully
                 de
                 Senectute
              
               .
            
             
               1.
               
               Aptissima
               omnino
               sunt
               ,
               
               Scipio
               &
               Laeli
               ,
               arma
               senectutis
               ,
               artes
               exercitationesque
               virtutū
               :
               quae
               in
               omni
               aetate
               cultae
               ,
               cum
               multum
               diuque
               vixeris
               ,
               mirificos
               afferunt
               fructus
               :
               non
               folum
               quia
               nunquam
               deserunt
               ,
               ne
               in
               extremo
               quidē
               tempore
               aetatis
               ,
               quanquam
               id
               maximum
               est
               :
               verum
               etiam
               quia
               conscientia
               benè
               ac●●
               vitae
               ,
               multorumque
               benefactorum
               recordatio
               ,
               iueundissima
               est
               .
               
                 This
                 is
                 Tullies
                 order
                 in
                 placing
                 this
                 sentence
                 .
              
            
             
               2.
               
               The
               naturall
               or
               Grammaticall
               order
               of
               it
               is
               this
               :
               
            
             
               Scipio
               et
               Laeli
               ,
               artes
               exercitationesque
               virtutum
               sunt
               omnin●
               arma
               aptissima
               senectutis
               :
               quae
               cultae
               afferunt
               fructus
               mirificos
               in
               aetate
               omni
               cum
               vixeris
               multum
               diuque
               :
               non
               solum
               quia
               deserunt
               nunquam
               ,
               ne
               quidem
               in
               tempore
               extremo
               aetatis
               ,
               quanquam
               ad
               est
               maximum
               :
               verum
               etiam
               quia
               conscientia
               vitae
               actae
               benè
               ,
               recordatioque
               bene
               factorum
               multorum
               est
               iucundissima
               .
            
             
             
               3.
               
               The
               Translation
               is
               after
               this
               Grammaticall
               order
               thus
               :
               
            
             
               
                 O
                 S●ipio
              
               &
               Lelius
               ,
               arts
               &
               exercises
               of
               vertues
               ,
               a
               are
               altogether
               the
               
                 (
                 verb
              
               )
               fittest
               weapons
               of
               old
               age
               :
               which
               being
               
                 (
                 verb
              
               )
               exercised
               in
               
                 (
                 verb
              
               )
               euery
               age
               do
               bring
               b
               maruellous
               fruites
               ,
               when
               you
               haue
               liued
               c
               much
               and
               long
               :
               not
               onely
               because
               they
               d
               forsake
               neuer
               ,
               e
               no
               truely
               f
               in
               the
               extreame
               time
               of
               age
               ,
               
               although
               that
               is
               g
               the
               greatest
               ;
               but
               also
               because
               h
               the
               conscience
               of
               a
               life
               well
               done
               [
               or
               well
               passed
               ouer
               ]
               and
               the
               
               remembrance
               of
               many
               good
               deeds
               is
               most
               pleasant
               .
            
             
               4.
               
               The
               construing
               is
               directly
               according
               to
               this
               translation
               .
               
               So
               that
               the
               translation
               leadeth
               the
               schollar
               as
               by
               the
               hand
               ,
               or
               insteed
               of
               his
               Master
               ;
               so
               ,
               as
               he
               cannot
               erre
               ,
               if
               he
               be
               of
               any
               vnderstanding
               :
               as
               thus
               ;
            
             
               Scipio
               ô
               Scipio
               ,
               et
               and
               ,
               Laeli
               ô
               Lelius
               ,
               artes
               arts
               ,
               exercitationesque
               and
               exercises
               ,
               virtutum
               of
               vertues
               ,
               sunt
               are
               ,
               omnino
               altogether
               ,
               
                 arma
                 aptissima
              
               the
               fittest
               weapons
               ,
               senectutis
               of
               old
               age
               :
               quae
               which
               ,
               cultae
               being
               exercised
               [
               or
               vsed
               ]
               
                 in
                 aetate
                 omni
              
               in
               euery
               age
               ,
               [
               or
               in
               all
               our
               life
               ]
               afferunt
               doe
               bring
               ,
               
                 fructus
                 mirificos
              
               maruellous
               fruits
               ,
               cum
               when
               ,
               vixeris
               you
               haue
               liued
               ,
               multum
               much
               ,
               diuque
               and
               long
               ,
               &c.
               
            
             
               5.
               
               This
               translation
               directeth
               to
               parse
               ,
               
               chiefely
               for
               all
               the
               Syntax
               ;
               Euery
               principall
               word
               in
               the
               Latine
               ,
               going
               before
               others
               ,
               commonly
               gouerning
               ,
               or
               directing
               &
               guiding
               some
               way
               that
               which
               followeth
               after
               .
               It
               helpeth
               very
               much
               for
               the
               Etymologie
               ;
               that
               children
               well
               entred
               ,
               shall
               goe
               very
               neere
               to
               tell
               by
               the
               English
               alone
               ,
               what
               part
               of
               speech
               euery
               word
               is
               :
               of
               which
               I
               shall
               speake
               after
               .
            
             
               The
               manner
               of
               parsing
               by
               it
               ,
               is
               thus
               shortly
               for
               the
               Syntaxe
               :
            
             
               Scipio
               ]
               is
               the
               first
               word
               to
               be
               parsed
               ,
               
               because
               it
               is
               the
               first
               in
               construing
               ;
               for
               that
               we
               begin
               commonly
               of
               a
               Vocatiue
               case
               if
               there
               be
               one
               .
               It
               is
               the
               Vocat
               ue
               case
               ,
               knowne
               by
               speaking
               to
               ,
               and
               by
               the
               Interiection
               O
               vnderstood
               ;
               gouerned
               of
               the
               Interiection
               O
               ,
               by
               the
               rule
               
                 O
                 Exclaman●is
                 Nominatiuo
                 ,
                 Accusatiuo
                 ,
                 &
                 Vocatiuo
                 ●ungitur
                 .
              
               In
               English
               ,
               Certaine
               a
               Vocatiue
               &c.
               
            
             
             
               Et
               ]
               the
               next
               word
               a
               Coniunction
               Copulatiue
               ,
               
               seruing
               to
               couple
               words
               or
               sentences
               ;
               here
               coupling
               Scipio
               and
               Laeli
               together
               .
            
             
               Laeli
               ]
               the
               next
               word
               ,
               
               the
               Vocatiue
               case
               knowen
               also
               by
               speaking
               to
               ,
               and
               put
               in
               the
               same
               case
               with
               Scipio
               by
               reason
               of
               the
               Coniunction
               et
               ;
               by
               the
               rule
               ,
               Coniunctions
               Copulatiues
               and
               Disiunctiues
               couple
               like
               cases
               ,
               &c.
               
            
             
               Artes
               ]
               is
               next
               ,
               
               in
               construing
               according
               to
               my
               rule
               of
               construing
               .
               The
               Nominatiue
               case
               ,
               comming
               before
               the
               principall
               Verbe
               sunt
               ,
               by
               the
               rule
               of
               the
               first
               Concord
               .
            
             
               Quae
               ]
               next
               ,
               
               a
               Coniunction
               Copulatiue
               ,
               coupling
               artes
               and
               exercitationes
               together
               .
            
             
               Exercitationes
               ]
               is
               the
               next
               ,
               
               the
               Nominatiue
               case
               coupled
               with
               artes
               ,
               by
               the
               Coniunction
               
                 Enclyticall
                 ,
                 que
              
               ,
               which
               is
               set
               after
               exercitationes
               in
               the
               booke
               ;
               by
               the
               rule
               of
               the
               Coniunctions
               Subiunctiues
               ,
               or
               which
               are
               put
               after
               .
            
             
               Virtutem
               ]
               followeth
               next
               ,
               
               the
               Genitiue
               case
               ,
               gouerned
               of
               the
               Substantiue
               exercitationes
               :
               and
               is
               the
               later
               of
               tvvo
               Substantiues
               ;
               by
               the
               rule
               ,
               When
               two
               Substantiues
               come
               together
               .
            
             
               Sunt
               ]
               is
               next
               ,
               
               agreeing
               with
               the
               Nominatiue
               case
               
                 artes
                 exercitationesque
              
               ;
               by
               
                 Verbum
                 personale
                 cohaeret
                 cum
                 Nominatiuo
                 &c.
                 
              
               It
               is
               expressed
               to
               the
               one
               Nominatiue
               case
               ,
               and
               vnderstood
               to
               the
               other
               ,
               by
               the
               figure
               Zeugma
               .
            
             
               Omninò
               ]
               the
               next
               word
               ,
               
               an
               Aduerbe
               ioined
               to
               the
               Verbe
               to
               declare
               the
               signification
               .
            
             
               Arma
               ]
               the
               Nominatiue
               following
               the
               verbe
               sunt
               .
               
               
                 Sum
                 ,
                 forem
                 ,
                 fio
                 &c.
                 
              
            
             
               Aptissimathe
               Nominatiue
               case
               of
               the
               Nowne
               Adiectiue
               ,
               
               agreeing
               in
               all
               things
               with
               arma
               ,
               by
               the
               rule
               of
               the
               second
               Concord
               .
               The
               Adiectiue
               whether
               it
               bee
               Nowne
               ,
               &c.
               
               It
               agreeth
               with
               arma
               ,
               because
               it
               expresseth
               the
               qualitie
               of
               
                 arma
                 ,
                 &c.
              
               
            
             
               Senectutis
               ]
               next
               ,
               
               the
               Genitiue
               case
               gouerned
               of
               arma
               ,
               because
               it
               expresseth
               arma
               ,
               the
               weapon
               of
               olde
               age
               ,
               the
               later
               of
               two
               Substantiues
               .
            
             
             
               And
               so
               forward
               ,
               in
               all
               things
               giuing
               the
               reason
               according
               to
               the
               rules
               of
               Grammar
               ,
               and
               this
               rule
               of
               construing
               compared
               ;
               the
               later
               word
               ,
               still
               declaring
               the
               former
               .
               So
               much
               shortly
               for
               parsing
               by
               this
               rule
               .
            
             
               6
               This
               translation
               directeth
               the
               schollar
               also
               for
               making
               Latine
               ,
               
               to
               proceede
               easily
               ;
               and
               likewise
               the
               master
               to
               teach
               and
               guide
               the
               schollar
               both
               to
               make
               true
               Latine
               and
               pure
               Tully
               ,
               or
               what
               Author
               he
               will
               follow
               :
               so
               that
               he
               cannot
               miss
               so
               long
               as
               he
               followeth
               this
               and
               looketh
               on
               the
               Author
               :
               also
               ,
               it
               guideth
               to
               giue
               a
               reason
               of
               euery
               thing
               ,
               or
               to
               prooue
               the
               Latine
               thus
               ,
               in
               the
               very
               same
               order
               as
               they
               parsed
               .
            
             
               As.
               the
               Master
               to
               aske
               thus
               according
               to
               the
               order
               of
               the
               translation
               :
            
             
               How
               say
               you
               Scipio
               ,
               or
               
                 ô
                 Scipio
              
               ?
            
             
               The
               Schollar
               answereth
               ;
               
               Scipio
               ,
               as
               it
               is
               in
               the
               booke
               .
            
             
               Aske
               why
               not
               Scipionis
               nor
               Scipioni
               but
               Scipio
               ;
               he
               answereth
               :
               because
               it
               must
               be
               the
               Vocatiue
               case
               ,
               knowen
               by
               speaking
               to
               ,
               and
               gouerned
               of
               o
               vnderstood
               ,
               as
               
                 o
                 Magister
              
               ,
               o
               Master
               .
            
             
               And
               ]
               et
               .
            
             
               Laelius
               ]
               Laeli.
               If
               it
               be
               asked
               ,
               why
               not
               Laelius
               ,
               nor
               Laelij
               ,
               nor
               Laelium
               ;
               he
               answereth
               ,
               because
               it
               must
               be
               the
               Vocatiue
               case
               ;
               and
               therfore
               Laeli
               :
               because
               ,
               when
               the
               Nominatiue
               endeth
               in
               ius
               ,
               the
               Vocatiue
               shall
               end
               in
               i.
               Also
               ,
               that
               it
               must
               be
               the
               Vocatiue
               case
               ,
               because
               et
               coupleth
               like
               cases
               .
            
             
               So
               in
               all
               things
               ,
               iust
               as
               the
               childe
               parsed
               ;
               but
               only
               asking
               the
               English
               first
               ,
               and
               making
               the
               childe
               to
               giue
               it
               in
               Latin
               ,
               and
               to
               giue
               a
               reason
               of
               euery
               thing
               more
               particularly
               .
            
             
               The
               causing
               the
               childe
               to
               construe
               and
               to
               parse
               ,
               
               looking
               vpon
               the
               English
               onely
               ;
               especially
               the
               parsing
               so
               ,
               is
               contitinuall
               making
               Latin
               ,
               and
               prouing
               it
               .
            
             
               So
               that
               we
               may
               see
               by
               this
               sentence
               ,
               
               how
               this
               translation
               serueth
               to
               direct
               the
               younger
               schollar
               :
               first
               ,
               to
               resolue
               or
               cast
               each
               sentence
               in
               Latine
               into
               the
               naturall
               or
               Grammaticall
               order
               :
               secondly
               ,
               to
               construe
               directly
               according
               to
               the
               same
               :
               thirdly
               ,
               to
               parse
               as
               it
               is
               construed
               ,
               by
               marking
               the
               last
               chiefe
               word
               :
               fourthly
               ,
               to
               make
               the
               same
               Latine
               as
               it
               
               was
               parsed
               ,
               and
               to
               proue
               it
               by
               reason
               and
               rule
               .
               Fiftly
               ,
               by
               comparing
               the
               order
               of
               the
               translation
               and
               the
               order
               of
               the
               Author
               ,
               to
               compose
               the
               Latine
               againe
               into
               the
               order
               of
               the
               Authour
               .
               And
               so
               by
               daily
               practicing
               these
               translations
               ,
               young
               schollars
               must
               needs
               come
               on
               very
               much
               ,
               for
               that
               it
               makes
               all
               the
               way
               to
               learning
               so
               plaine
               .
            
             
               One
               principall
               reason
               is
               ,
               
               for
               that
               this
               is
               nothing
               else
               but
               a
               continuall
               practice
               of
               Analysis
               and
               Genesis
               ;
               
               that
               is
               ,
               of
               resoluing
               and
               vnmaking
               the
               Latine
               of
               the
               Author
               ,
               and
               then
               making
               it
               againe
               iust
               after
               the
               same
               manner
               ,
               as
               it
               was
               vnmade
               .
               Or
               if
               we
               may
               so
               tearme
               it
               ,
               the
               vnwinding
               ,
               and
               winding
               it
               vp
               againe
               ;
               which
               is
               generally
               acknowledged
               to
               be
               the
               speediest
               way
               to
               all
               good
               learning
               .
               Now
               of
               either
               of
               these
               there
               may
               be
               three
               parts
               .
            
             
               1.
               
               Of
               the
               Analysis
               or
               resoluing
               a
               sentence
               ;
               first
               the
               resoluing
               it
               out
               of
               the
               Rhetoricall
               order
               of
               the
               Author
               ,
               
               into
               the
               first
               proper
               ,
               naturall
               and
               Grammaticall
               order
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               Construing
               ,
               turning
               or
               translating
               it
               into
               English
               ,
               according
               to
               thesame
               order
               ;
               giuing
               the
               true
               sense
               and
               force
               of
               each
               word
               and
               phrase
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               Parsing
               as
               we
               construe
               .
            
             
               So
               of
               the
               Genesis
               or
               making
               vp
               againe
               are
               three
               parts
               .
            
             
               1.
               
               The
               making
               thesame
               Latine
               againe
               ,
               according
               to
               the
               order
               of
               the
               translation
               and
               the
               words
               of
               the
               Author
               ;
               that
               they
               may
               goe
               surely
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               To
               proue
               it
               to
               bee
               true
               Latine
               ,
               after
               the
               manner
               of
               parsing
               ,
               by
               the
               same
               order
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               To
               compose
               all
               againe
               for
               the
               Rhetoricall
               placing
               of
               the
               words
               ,
               according
               to
               the
               order
               of
               the
               Author
               ,
               by
               the
               helpe
               of
               a
               fewe
               rules
               ,
               and
               by
               comparing
               with
               the
               Author
               ;
               that
               a
               childe
               may
               haue
               a
               confident
               boldnesse
               ,
               to
               stand
               against
               the
               most
               learned
               ,
               to
               iustifie
               that
               which
               hee
               hath
               done
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               This
               stands
               with
               all
               reason
               ,
               that
               if
               the
               way
               of
               vnmaking
               or
               resoluing
               be
               so
               plaine
               ,
               thorough
               this
               rule
               ;
               the
               waie
               of
               making
               vp
               againe
               must
               needes
               bee
               as
               plaine
               and
               readie
               :
               for
               there
               is
               the
               same
               waie
               from
               Cambridge
               to
               London
               ,
               
               which
               was
               from
               London
               to
               Cambridge
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               You
               say
               as
               it
               is
               :
               Hence
               you
               shall
               finde
               by
               experience
               ,
               that
               as
               children
               will
               soon
               learne
               to
               construe
               and
               parse
               their
               Authors
               thereby
               ;
               so
               they
               will
               as
               soone
               learne
               to
               make
               them
               into
               latine
               againe
               :
               yea
               they
               will
               come
               by
               daily
               practice
               ,
               to
               reade
               the
               Latine
               almost
               as
               fast
               out
               of
               the
               English
               translation
               ,
               as
               out
               of
               the
               Author
               it selfe
               ,
               and
               proue
               that
               it
               must
               bee
               so
               :
               and
               in
               short
               time
               to
               doe
               the
               same
               in
               things
               which
               they
               haue
               not
               learned
               ;
               especially
               ,
               where
               they
               shall
               haue
               occasion
               to
               vse
               the
               same
               phrase
               ,
               to
               doe
               it
               readily
               whether
               they
               shall
               write
               or
               speake
               .
            
          
           
             
               Particular
               benefits
               of
               the
               vse
               of
               Grammaticall
               translations
               ,
               and
               of
               the
               Rule
               .
            
             
               
                 Spoud
                 .
              
               
                 IT
                 is
                 apparant
                 by
                 that
                 which
                 you
                 haue
                 sayd
                 ,
                 
                 that
                 you
                 take
                 the
                 benefit
                 to
                 bee
                 very
                 great
                 ,
                 which
                 may
                 come
                 by
                 such
                 translations
                 rightly
                 vsed
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 Phil.
                 
              
               
                 I
                 do
                 indeed
                 ;
                 and
                 that
                 for
                 all
                 these
                 things
                 following
                 ,
                 which
                 seem
                 most
                 strange
                 and
                 hard
                 to
                 be
                 done
                 by
                 children
                 .
              
               
                 1
                 Teaching
                 to
                 resolue
                 Latine
                 Grammatically
                 :
                 
                 which
                 is
                 the
                 foundation
                 of
                 the
                 rest
                 .
              
               
                 2
                 In
                 construing
                 ,
                 
                 to
                 direct
                 to
                 do
                 it
                 artificially
                 by
                 rule
                 ,
                 and
                 also
                 in
                 propriety
                 of
                 words
                 ,
                 and
                 in
                 true
                 sense
                 .
              
               
                 3
                 For
                 parsing
                 to
                 do
                 it
                 of
                 themselues
                 :
                 
                 as
                 reading
                 a
                 lecture
                 without
                 any
                 question
                 asked
                 ,
                 vnlesse
                 some
                 which
                 they
                 omit
                 :
                 which
                 maner
                 of
                 parsing
                 gaineth
                 half
                 the
                 time
                 which
                 is
                 spent
                 therin
                 commonly
                 ,
                 when
                 otherwise
                 each
                 question
                 is
                 asked
                 and
                 stood
                 vpon
                 .
              
               
                 4
                 For
                 making
                 latine
                 ,
                 
                 to
                 be
                 able
                 to
                 make
                 the
                 very
                 same
                 latine
                 of
                 their
                 Authors
                 vpon
                 sure
                 grounds
                 ;
                 &
                 therby
                 to
                 be
                 incouraged
                 to
                 go
                 on
                 boldly
                 &
                 certainly
                 ,
                 with
                 cheerfulnes
                 and
                 confidence
                 :
                 when
                 little
                 children
                 shall
                 see
                 ,
                 that
                 they
                 are
                 able
                 to
                 make
                 the
                 same
                 latine
                 which
                 their
                 Authors
                 do
                 ,
                 as
                 was
                 said
                 ,
                 &
                 haue
                 also
                 the
                 Author
                 to
                 iustify
                 that
                 which
                 they
                 haue
                 don
                 .
              
               
                 5
                 For
                 prouing
                 latine
                 ,
                 
                 specially
                 for
                 the
                 Syntaxe
                 ,
                 when
                 
                 each
                 principall
                 word
                 going
                 before
                 ,
                 directs
                 th●se
                 which
                 follow
                 ,
                 except
                 in
                 some
                 few
                 .
              
               
                 6
                 For
                 composing
                 artificially
                 ,
                 
                 by
                 continuall
                 comparing
                 this
                 Grammaticall
                 order
                 ,
                 to
                 the
                 order
                 of
                 the
                 Author
                 ,
                 and
                 marking
                 why
                 the
                 Author
                 placed
                 otherwise
                 ;
                 and
                 by
                 being
                 helped
                 by
                 a
                 few
                 rules
                 ,
                 which
                 I
                 will
                 shew
                 after
                 .
              
               
                 7
                 To
                 helpe
                 the
                 younger
                 schollars
                 to
                 vnderstand
                 their
                 lectures
                 ,
                 
                 so
                 farre
                 as
                 need
                 is
                 ;
                 of
                 the
                 benefit
                 of
                 which
                 vnderstanding
                 we
                 haue
                 spoken
                 before
                 .
              
               
                 8
                 Also
                 to
                 take
                 their
                 lectures
                 for
                 most
                 part
                 of
                 themselues
                 ,
                 
                 as
                 was
                 sayd
                 ;
                 to
                 get
                 and
                 bring
                 their
                 lectures
                 more
                 surely
                 and
                 sooner
                 then
                 by
                 the
                 masters
                 teaching
                 alone
                 ,
                 as
                 a
                 little
                 experience
                 will
                 shewe
                 .
              
               
                 9
                 To
                 construe
                 and
                 parse
                 their
                 lectures
                 ,
                 
                 out
                 of
                 the
                 English
                 as
                 out
                 of
                 the
                 Latine
                 (
                 which
                 is
                 a
                 continuall
                 making
                 latine
                 ,
                 as
                 we
                 heard
                 )
                 and
                 so
                 to
                 read
                 their
                 lectures
                 first
                 in
                 the
                 naturall
                 order
                 ,
                 then
                 as
                 they
                 are
                 in
                 their
                 Authors
                 .
              
               
                 10
                 To
                 bee
                 able
                 to
                 correct
                 their
                 Authors
                 of
                 themselues
                 ,
                 
                 if
                 they
                 be
                 false
                 printed
                 .
              
               
                 11
                 To
                 keepe
                 all
                 which
                 they
                 haue
                 learned
                 in
                 their
                 Authors
                 so
                 perfectly
                 ,
                 
                 as
                 to
                 be
                 able
                 in
                 good
                 sort
                 to
                 construe
                 or
                 parse
                 at
                 any
                 time
                 ,
                 in
                 any
                 place
                 out
                 of
                 the
                 bare
                 translation
                 ,
                 onely
                 by
                 reading
                 them
                 oft
                 ouer
                 out
                 of
                 the
                 translation
                 .
              
               
                 12
                 To
                 saue
                 all
                 the
                 labour
                 of
                 learning
                 most
                 Authours
                 without
                 booke
                 ,
                 
                 as
                 all
                 Authors
                 in
                 prose
                 ;
                 which
                 labour
                 in
                 many
                 schooles
                 is
                 one
                 of
                 the
                 greatest
                 tortures
                 to
                 the
                 poore
                 schollars
                 ,
                 and
                 cause
                 of
                 impatience
                 and
                 too
                 much
                 seueritie
                 to
                 the
                 Masters
                 ,
                 though
                 with
                 very
                 little
                 good
                 for
                 most
                 part
                 :
                 to
                 be
                 able
                 as
                 it
                 were
                 by
                 playing
                 ,
                 only
                 reading
                 their
                 Authors
                 out
                 of
                 the
                 English
                 ouer
                 &
                 ouer
                 ,
                 
                 at
                 meet
                 times
                 ,
                 to
                 haue
                 them
                 much
                 better
                 for
                 all
                 true
                 vse
                 and
                 each
                 good
                 purpose
                 ,
                 then
                 by
                 all
                 saying
                 without
                 booke
                 ;
                 to
                 trouble
                 the
                 memorie
                 onely
                 with
                 getting
                 rules
                 of
                 Grammars
                 and
                 the
                 like
                 ,
                 and
                 such
                 other
                 of
                 most
                 necessary
                 vse
                 ,
                 as
                 the
                 Poets
                 :
                 which
                 also
                 are
                 exceedingly
                 furthered
                 hereby
                 .
              
               
                 13
                 To
                 helpe
                 to
                 proceed
                 as
                 well
                 in
                 our
                 English
                 tonge
                 as
                 in
                 the
                 latine
                 ,
                 
                 for
                 reading
                 ,
                 and
                 writing
                 true
                 orthographie
                 ;
                 to
                 
                 attaine
                 variety
                 and
                 copie
                 of
                 English
                 words
                 ,
                 to
                 expresse
                 their
                 mindes
                 easily
                 ,
                 and
                 vtter
                 any
                 matter
                 belonging
                 to
                 their
                 Authors
                 .
                 And
                 so
                 in
                 time
                 ,
                 to
                 come
                 to
                 proprietie
                 ,
                 choise
                 ,
                 and
                 puritie
                 ,
                 aswell
                 in
                 our
                 English
                 as
                 in
                 the
                 Latine
                 .
              
               
                 14
                 To
                 learne
                 the
                 propriety
                 of
                 the
                 Latine
                 tongue
                 ,
                 
                 as
                 they
                 goe
                 forward
                 ;
                 to
                 bee
                 able
                 to
                 iustifie
                 each
                 phrase
                 ,
                 and
                 in
                 time
                 to
                 remember
                 words
                 and
                 phrases
                 ,
                 for
                 almost
                 whatsoeuer
                 they
                 haue
                 learned
                 ,
                 and
                 where
                 .
                 Also
                 by
                 reading
                 Tully
                 ,
                 and
                 other
                 purer
                 Authors
                 constantly
                 out
                 of
                 such
                 translations
                 ,
                 first
                 Grammatically
                 ,
                 then
                 Rhetorically
                 ,
                 to
                 attaine
                 to
                 make
                 a
                 more
                 easie
                 entrance
                 ,
                 to
                 that
                 purity
                 of
                 the
                 Latine
                 tongue
                 ,
                 wherof
                 sundry
                 great
                 learned
                 men
                 haue
                 giuen
                 precepts
                 ,
                 then
                 by
                 precepts
                 alone
                 ;
                 and
                 much
                 more
                 by
                 ioining
                 precepts
                 and
                 this
                 practice
                 together
                 .
              
               
                 15
                 By
                 the
                 translations
                 of
                 the
                 Poets
                 ,
                 
                 as
                 of
                 Ouid
                 ,
                 and
                 Virgil
                 ,
                 to
                 haue
                 a
                 most
                 plain
                 way
                 into
                 the
                 first
                 entrance
                 into
                 versifying
                 ,
                 to
                 turne
                 the
                 prose
                 of
                 the
                 Poets
                 into
                 the
                 Poets
                 owne
                 verse
                 ,
                 with
                 delight
                 ,
                 certainty
                 and
                 speed
                 ,
                 without
                 any
                 bodging
                 ;
                 and
                 so
                 by
                 continuall
                 practice
                 to
                 grow
                 in
                 this
                 facilitie
                 ,
                 for
                 getting
                 the
                 phrase
                 and
                 veine
                 of
                 the
                 Poet.
                 
              
               
                 16
                 To
                 be
                 (
                 as
                 was
                 noted
                 )
                 not
                 only
                 insteed
                 of
                 Masters
                 ,
                 
                 or
                 Vshers
                 ,
                 to
                 giue
                 each
                 lower
                 lecture
                 perfectly
                 ,
                 for
                 all
                 the
                 substance
                 ;
                 but
                 also
                 to
                 be
                 after
                 insteed
                 of
                 their
                 owne
                 presence
                 ,
                 or
                 of
                 Dictionaries
                 in
                 euery
                 one
                 of
                 those
                 fourmes
                 continually
                 ,
                 to
                 direct
                 them
                 ,
                 vntill
                 euery
                 one
                 of
                 the
                 fourm
                 can
                 construe
                 ,
                 parse
                 ,
                 make
                 the
                 same
                 latine
                 ,
                 and
                 proue
                 it
                 .
                 Heereby
                 both
                 to
                 free
                 the
                 children
                 from
                 that
                 feare
                 which
                 they
                 will
                 haue
                 ordinarily
                 ,
                 
                 to
                 go
                 to
                 their
                 Masters
                 for
                 euery
                 word
                 ;
                 and
                 also
                 to
                 free
                 the
                 Masters
                 from
                 that
                 trouble
                 and
                 hindrance
                 to
                 tell
                 them
                 euery
                 word
                 ,
                 so
                 oft
                 as
                 they
                 forget
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 vexation
                 and
                 fretting
                 to
                 see
                 the
                 childrens
                 dulnesse
                 and
                 forgetfulnesse
                 .
                 For
                 the
                 helpe
                 of
                 the
                 Master
                 ,
                 or
                 Vsher
                 ,
                 in
                 the
                 meane
                 time
                 what
                 it
                 ought
                 to
                 bee
                 ,
                 wee
                 shall
                 see
                 after
                 in
                 the
                 vse
                 of
                 these
                 .
              
               
                 17
                 Hereby
                 schollars
                 hauing
                 been
                 well
                 entered
                 ,
                 
                 and
                 exercised
                 in
                 their
                 lower
                 Authors
                 ,
                 shall
                 be
                 able
                 to
                 proceede
                 to
                 their
                 higher
                 Authors
                 ,
                 
                   ex
                   tempore
                
                 ;
                 and
                 goe
                 on
                 with
                 ease
                 ,
                 by
                 
                 the
                 assistance
                 of
                 the
                 Master
                 ,
                 where
                 they
                 need
                 ,
                 and
                 by
                 the
                 helpe
                 of
                 Commentaries
                 ;
                 that
                 they
                 may
                 be
                 thus
                 inabled
                 to
                 construe
                 any
                 Author
                 ,
                 and
                 bee
                 fitted
                 for
                 the
                 studies
                 of
                 the
                 Vniuersitie
                 ,
                 at
                 their
                 first
                 entrance
                 thither
                 .
              
               
                 18
                 These
                 will
                 be
                 also
                 a
                 helpe
                 to
                 many
                 weaker
                 Schoolemasters
                 ,
                 
                 for
                 right
                 and
                 certaine
                 construction
                 ,
                 without
                 so
                 oft
                 seeking
                 Dictionaries
                 for
                 English
                 ,
                 and
                 proprietie
                 of
                 words
                 ;
                 and
                 so
                 for
                 parsing
                 ,
                 and
                 all
                 sorts
                 of
                 the
                 former
                 directions
                 .
              
               
                 19
                 A●so
                 ,
                 
                 weaker
                 schollars
                 in
                 the
                 Vniuersities
                 ,
                 who
                 haue
                 not
                 been
                 so
                 well
                 grounded
                 in
                 the
                 Grammar
                 schooles
                 ,
                 may
                 proceed
                 in
                 their
                 priuate
                 studies
                 ,
                 by
                 the
                 vse
                 of
                 some
                 of
                 these
                 translations
                 ,
                 either
                 one
                 alone
                 ,
                 or
                 two
                 or
                 three
                 together
                 ;
                 and
                 increase
                 both
                 for
                 construing
                 ,
                 vnderstanding
                 ,
                 and
                 writing
                 latine
                 .
                 Also
                 they
                 may
                 haue
                 continuall
                 vse
                 of
                 translating
                 both
                 into
                 English
                 ,
                 and
                 Latine
                 ;
                 whether
                 reading
                 out
                 of
                 the
                 Authour
                 into
                 the
                 translation
                 ,
                 or
                 out
                 of
                 the
                 translation
                 into
                 the
                 Author
                 ,
                 or
                 doing
                 it
                 by
                 pen
                 ;
                 and
                 euer
                 a
                 direction
                 to
                 trie
                 all
                 by
                 ,
                 and
                 as
                 a
                 priuate
                 helpe
                 :
                 which
                 continuall
                 translating
                 both
                 waies
                 is
                 a
                 most
                 speedy
                 way
                 to
                 learning
                 ,
                 as
                 M.
                 Askam
                 proueth
                 at
                 large
                 .
              
               
                 20
                 Likewise
                 ,
                 
                 any
                 who
                 haue
                 lost
                 the
                 knowledge
                 of
                 the
                 Latine
                 tongue
                 ,
                 may
                 recouer
                 it
                 hereby
                 within
                 a
                 short
                 time
                 ;
                 and
                 they
                 who
                 haue
                 had
                 but
                 a
                 smattering
                 ,
                 or
                 some
                 little
                 beginning
                 ,
                 may
                 soone
                 come
                 to
                 vnderstand
                 any
                 ordinary
                 Author
                 ,
                 and
                 proceed
                 with
                 pleasure
                 and
                 certaintie
                 .
              
               
                 21
                 Finally
                 ,
                 
                 hereby
                 schollars
                 may
                 haue
                 daily
                 much
                 sure
                 practice
                 both
                 of
                 Analysis
                 and
                 Genesis
                 ;
                 that
                 is
                 ,
                 resoluing
                 and
                 making
                 Latine
                 :
                 which
                 as
                 was
                 noted
                 ,
                 all
                 the
                 learned
                 doe
                 acknowledge
                 to
                 bee
                 almost
                 all
                 in
                 all
                 ,
                 in
                 getting
                 all
                 learning
                 :
                 for
                 all
                 this
                 practice
                 by
                 them
                 is
                 nothing
                 else
                 but
                 Analysis
                 and
                 Genesis
                 ,
                 as
                 we
                 shewed
                 before
                 .
              
            
          
           
             
             
               Things
               more
               specially
               obserued
               in
               the
               Translating
               of
               the
               Schoole
               Authours
               .
            
             
               
                 Spoud
                 .
              
               
                 THese
                 benefits
                 are
                 indeede
                 very
                 great
                 ,
                 and
                 worthy
                 the
                 labour
                 of
                 euery
                 childe
                 ,
                 or
                 other
                 who
                 would
                 attaine
                 them
                 ,
                 if
                 it
                 be
                 as
                 you
                 say
                 :
                 yet
                 by
                 your
                 fauour
                 ,
                 many
                 of
                 them
                 cannot
                 be
                 obtained
                 by
                 bare
                 Grammaticall
                 Translations
                 alone
                 ;
                 as
                 to
                 get
                 the
                 propriety
                 of
                 both
                 the
                 tongues
                 ,
                 both
                 of
                 Latine
                 and
                 English
                 together
                 ,
                 with
                 variety
                 of
                 phrase
                 ,
                 the
                 sense
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 like
                 .
                 Therefore
                 what
                 course
                 haue
                 you
                 obserued
                 in
                 your
                 Translations
                 ,
                 to
                 make
                 them
                 to
                 serue
                 to
                 all
                 these
                 purposes
                 ?
              
            
             
               
                 Phil.
                 
              
               
                 I
                 haue
                 obserued
                 these
                 things
                 following
                 ,
                 
                 so
                 neere
                 as
                 I
                 haue
                 beene
                 able
                 for
                 the
                 present
                 :
                 I
                 shall
                 amend
                 them
                 after
                 God
                 willing
                 .
              
               
                 1
                 This
                 naturall
                 or
                 Grammaticall
                 order
                 throughout
                 .
                 
              
               
                 2
                 That
                 the
                 English
                 Translation
                 is
                 set
                 downe
                 alone
                 ,
                 
                 without
                 the
                 Latine
                 adioyning
                 ,
                 to
                 auoyde
                 the
                 inconueniences
                 of
                 hauing
                 the
                 Latine
                 and
                 English
                 together
                 ;
                 as
                 of
                 making
                 Truant
                 ,
                 or
                 the
                 like
                 :
                 whereof
                 I
                 shall
                 speake
                 after
                 .
              
               
                 3
                 The
                 propriety
                 of
                 the
                 English
                 words
                 ,
                 
                 answering
                 to
                 the
                 Latine
                 ,
                 in
                 the
                 first
                 and
                 naturall
                 signification
                 ,
                 and
                 expressing
                 the
                 force
                 of
                 the
                 Latine
                 words
                 ,
                 so
                 neere
                 as
                 I
                 could
                 ,
                 is
                 set
                 down
                 in
                 the
                 first
                 place
                 .
                 
                 And
                 where
                 the
                 Latine
                 phrase
                 is
                 somewhat
                 hard
                 or
                 obscure
                 to
                 bee
                 expressed
                 in
                 our
                 English
                 tongue
                 ,
                 word
                 for
                 word
                 ;
                 there
                 I
                 haue
                 also
                 expressed
                 that
                 by
                 a
                 more
                 plaine
                 phrase
                 ,
                 sometimes
                 included
                 within
                 two
                 markes
                 ,
                 almost
                 like
                 a
                 Parenthesis
                 ,
                 with
                 [
                 or
                 ]
                 thus
                 .
                 Or
                 else
                 I
                 haue
                 set
                 it
                 euer
                 in
                 the
                 Margent
                 :
                 where
                 also
                 I
                 haue
                 oft
                 placed
                 the
                 meaning
                 ,
                 with
                 variety
                 of
                 other
                 phrases
                 ouer
                 against
                 the
                 word
                 ,
                 and
                 noted
                 them
                 with
                 a
                 character
                 or
                 letter
                 ,
                 answering
                 to
                 the
                 word
                 in
                 the
                 Text.
                 
              
               
                 Moreouer
                 ,
                 
                 where
                 any
                 phrase
                 is
                 ouer-harsh
                 in
                 our
                 English
                 tongue
                 ,
                 to
                 expresse
                 the
                 Latine
                 
                   verbatim
                   ,
                   viz.
                
                 word
                 for
                 word
                 ,
                 or
                 in
                 good
                 propriety
                 ;
                 that
                 harsh
                 phrase
                 is
                 also
                 placed
                 in
                 the
                 Margent
                 ,
                 ouer
                 against
                 the
                 Latine
                 phrase
                 ,
                 with
                 this
                 marke
                 ,
                 
                 
                   (
                   Verb
                
                 )
                 or
                 (
                 ver
                 .
                 (
                 or
                 v.
                 )
                 signifying
                 verbatim
                 ,
                 word
                 by
                 word
                 ,
                 or
                 word
                 for
                 word
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 more
                 easie
                 phrase
                 set
                 in
                 the
                 Text.
                 
              
               
                 Likewise
                 where
                 there
                 may
                 be
                 two
                 senses
                 or
                 constrctions
                 ,
                 
                 I
                 haue
                 commonly
                 expressed
                 both
                 :
                 the
                 more
                 likely
                 and
                 naturall
                 in
                 the
                 Text
                 ,
                 the
                 other
                 in
                 the
                 Margent
                 .
                 This
                 I
                 haue
                 done
                 ,
                 to
                 the
                 end
                 that
                 the
                 Schollar
                 may
                 see
                 both
                 construction
                 and
                 meaning
                 together
                 ;
                 with
                 the
                 propriety
                 of
                 the
                 tongue
                 ,
                 whereunto
                 I
                 haue
                 chiefly
                 laboured
                 .
              
               
                 So
                 that
                 there
                 is
                 no
                 varying
                 from
                 the
                 propriety
                 ,
                 
                 saue
                 where
                 necessity
                 inforced
                 ,
                 for
                 the
                 impropernesse
                 of
                 the
                 phrase
                 in
                 our
                 speech
                 ▪
                 or
                 in
                 some
                 few
                 places
                 ,
                 where
                 the
                 construction
                 is
                 easie
                 and
                 familiar
                 ;
                 and
                 there
                 is
                 set
                 in
                 the
                 Margent
                 
                   (
                   Verb
                
                 )
                 as
                 was
                 said
                 before
                 .
              
               
                 Lastly
                 ,
                 
                 where
                 in
                 the
                 Grammaticall
                 order
                 in
                 Latine
                 ,
                 the
                 Substantiue
                 goeth
                 before
                 the
                 Adiectiue
                 ,
                 the
                 gouernour
                 or
                 guider
                 first
                 ;
                 in
                 our
                 English
                 Dialect
                 ,
                 the
                 Adiectiue
                 is
                 most
                 commonly
                 set
                 before
                 :
                 as
                 
                   vir
                   bonus
                
                 ,
                 a
                 good
                 man
                 ;
                 not
                 a
                 man
                 good
                 :
                 vnlesse
                 the
                 Adiectiue
                 be
                 diuided
                 from
                 the
                 Substantiue
                 ;
                 as
                 where
                 it
                 passeth
                 the
                 signification
                 into
                 some
                 at●er
                 word
                 gouerned
                 of
                 it
                 :
                 as
                 
                   vir
                   praestans
                   ingenio
                
                 ,
                 a
                 man
                 excelling
                 in
                 wit.
                 
              
               
                 So
                 in
                 the
                 Aduerbe
                 Non
                 :
                 as
                 
                   Non
                   est
                
                 ,
                 It
                 is
                 not
                 ;
                 wee
                 doe
                 not
                 say
                 ,
                 Not
                 it
                 is
                 .
                 Also
                 in
                 the
                 Enclyticall
                 Conjunctio●
                 ●quen
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 like
                 ;
                 as
                 idque
                 ,
                 and
                 that
                 .
              
               
                 In
                 the
                 first
                 and
                 lowest
                 Authours
                 is
                 commonly
                 translated
                 Thou
                 ,
                 
                 Thee
                 ,
                 Not
                 you
                 ;
                 because
                 of
                 the
                 difficulty
                 for
                 children
                 ,
                 to
                 distinguish
                 betweene
                 Thou
                 ,
                 and
                 You.
                 
              
               
                 Thus
                 I
                 place
                 ordinarily
                 the
                 Accusatiue
                 case
                 before
                 the
                 Infinitiue
                 moode
                 ,
                 in
                 plaine
                 wordes
                 ,
                 for
                 the
                 ready
                 and
                 easie
                 making
                 the
                 Latine
                 out
                 of
                 it
                 :
                 as
                 
                   Multum
                   eum
                   praeuidisse
                   dicimus
                
                 ,
                 we
                 say
                 him
                 to
                 haue
                 foreseene
                 much
                 :
                 and
                 in
                 the
                 margent
                 vsually
                 thus
                 ;
                 We
                 say
                 ,
                 that
                 he
                 foresaw
                 much
                 :
                 according
                 to
                 our
                 English
                 phrase
                 .
              
            
          
           
             
             
               How
               to
               vse
               these
               Translations
               so
               ,
               as
               to
               attaine
               the
               former
               benefites
               .
            
             
               
                 Spoud
                 .
              
               
                 THese
                 things
                 diligently
                 obserued
                 ,
                 
                 must
                 needes
                 be
                 very
                 auaileable
                 to
                 the
                 purposes
                 ,
                 which
                 you
                 haue
                 mentioned
                 :
                 the
                 very
                 propriety
                 alone
                 ,
                 I
                 meane
                 the
                 knowledge
                 of
                 words
                 ,
                 in
                 their
                 first
                 and
                 proper
                 signification
                 ,
                 is
                 a
                 singular
                 helpe
                 to
                 learning
                 .
                 For
                 reason
                 will
                 commonly
                 teach
                 ,
                 both
                 the
                 change
                 of
                 the
                 signification
                 by
                 the
                 circumstances
                 of
                 the
                 place
                 ,
                 &
                 also
                 the
                 cause
                 of
                 the
                 change
                 .
                 But
                 I
                 pray
                 you
                 ,
                 how
                 might
                 my
                 Schollars
                 vse
                 these
                 Translations
                 so
                 ,
                 as
                 that
                 I
                 might
                 finde
                 the
                 benefits
                 of
                 them
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 Phil.
                 
              
               
                 You
                 may
                 cause
                 them
                 to
                 vse
                 them
                 after
                 these
                 directions
                 following
                 :
              
               
                 1
                 First
                 ,
                 
                 you
                 are
                 to
                 see
                 that
                 euery
                 one
                 who
                 is
                 to
                 vse
                 them
                 ,
                 can
                 repeate
                 the
                 rule
                 of
                 construing
                 ,
                 and
                 answere
                 the
                 questions
                 thereof
                 ,
                 according
                 to
                 the
                 briefest
                 forme
                 of
                 it
                 at
                 least
                 .
                 And
                 if
                 your
                 leasure
                 will
                 serue
                 ,
                 to
                 heare
                 your selfe
                 how
                 they
                 can
                 take
                 their
                 Lectures
                 of
                 themselues
                 ,
                 according
                 to
                 the
                 same
                 .
              
               
                 2
                 Where
                 your
                 leisure
                 will
                 not
                 well
                 permit
                 you
                 to
                 see
                 all
                 Lectures
                 giuen
                 ,
                 
                 you
                 may
                 appoint
                 at
                 the
                 taking
                 of
                 the
                 Lectures
                 ,
                 that
                 some
                 one
                 or
                 two
                 of
                 the
                 best
                 of
                 each
                 fourme
                 ,
                 doe
                 looke
                 vpon
                 the
                 Translation
                 ;
                 and
                 in
                 the
                 lower
                 fourmes
                 doe
                 first
                 reade
                 ouer
                 the
                 Translation
                 once
                 ,
                 onely
                 to
                 giue
                 them
                 some
                 light
                 ,
                 for
                 the
                 meaning
                 and
                 vnderstanding
                 of
                 their
                 Lectures
                 ;
                 the
                 rest
                 looking
                 on
                 their
                 Authours
                 ,
                 or
                 onely
                 harkening
                 to
                 the
                 meaning
                 :
                 although
                 in
                 the
                 higher
                 fourms
                 which
                 vse
                 them
                 ,
                 they
                 will
                 not
                 neede
                 so
                 much
                 as
                 once
                 reading
                 ouer
                 before
                 ,
                 vnlesse
                 in
                 some
                 difficult
                 places
                 :
                 onely
                 he
                 who
                 looketh
                 on
                 the
                 Translation
                 ,
                 may
                 reade
                 the
                 Translation
                 after
                 ,
                 for
                 their
                 more
                 full
                 vnderstanding
                 of
                 the
                 Lecture
                 ,
                 and
                 more
                 easie
                 remembrance
                 of
                 it
                 .
              
               
                 3
                 After
                 that
                 to
                 appoint
                 another
                 ,
                 
                 first
                 ,
                 to
                 reade
                 ouer
                 their
                 Lecture
                 in
                 the
                 Latine
                 distinctly
                 ,
                 as
                 it
                 is
                 in
                 the
                 Author
                 ,
                 and
                 to
                 trie
                 how
                 he
                 can
                 construe
                 ;
                 beating
                 it
                 out
                 according
                 
                 to
                 the
                 rule
                 .
                 
                 In
                 the
                 meane
                 time
                 cause
                 him
                 who
                 hath
                 the
                 Translation
                 ,
                 to
                 be
                 in
                 stead
                 of
                 your selfe
                 amongst
                 the
                 rest
                 ,
                 to
                 see
                 that
                 they
                 goe
                 right
                 ;
                 and
                 where
                 the
                 construer
                 sticketh
                 ,
                 or
                 goeth
                 amisse
                 ,
                 to
                 call
                 him
                 backe
                 to
                 the
                 rule
                 ,
                 and
                 wish
                 the
                 rest
                 to
                 helpe
                 to
                 finde
                 it
                 out
                 by
                 the
                 same
                 rule
                 .
              
               
                 And
                 when
                 al
                 the
                 fourme
                 are
                 at
                 a
                 stand
                 ,
                 
                 and
                 none
                 of
                 them
                 can
                 beat
                 it
                 out
                 ,
                 then
                 onely
                 he
                 who
                 hath
                 the
                 booke
                 ,
                 to
                 do
                 it
                 ;
                 as
                 the
                 cunning
                 Hunts-man
                 ,
                 to
                 helpe
                 a
                 little
                 at
                 the
                 default
                 ,
                 to
                 point
                 and
                 to
                 direct
                 them
                 where
                 to
                 take
                 it
                 :
                 and
                 thus
                 so
                 many
                 to
                 construe
                 ouer
                 ,
                 or
                 so
                 oft
                 ,
                 vntill
                 all
                 of
                 them
                 can
                 construe
                 .
              
               
                 In
                 the
                 mean
                 time
                 your selfe
                 or
                 Vsher
                 ,
                 
                 in
                 the
                 middest
                 ,
                 both
                 to
                 haue
                 an
                 eye
                 to
                 them
                 ,
                 
                 that
                 they
                 take
                 this
                 course
                 ;
                 and
                 also
                 to
                 helpe
                 yet
                 further
                 ,
                 where
                 neede
                 is
                 :
                 And
                 after
                 the
                 taking
                 of
                 the
                 Lecture
                 ,
                 to
                 note
                 out
                 vnto
                 them
                 al
                 the
                 difficult
                 or
                 new
                 wordes
                 in
                 their
                 Lecture
                 ,
                 to
                 examine
                 and
                 direct
                 them
                 ,
                 for
                 the
                 parsing
                 of
                 them
                 :
                 and
                 also
                 to
                 cause
                 each
                 of
                 the
                 fourme
                 to
                 marke
                 out
                 those
                 wordes
                 ,
                 to
                 take
                 speciall
                 paines
                 in
                 them
                 ;
                 to
                 make
                 them
                 perfect
                 aboue
                 all
                 the
                 rest
                 :
                 because
                 they
                 haue
                 learned
                 the
                 rest
                 before
                 ,
                 and
                 haue
                 but
                 so
                 many
                 new
                 wordes
                 to
                 get
                 in
                 that
                 Lecture
                 .
              
               
                 4
                 According
                 to
                 the
                 order
                 as
                 they
                 construe
                 ,
                 
                 cause
                 them
                 to
                 parse
                 ,
                 
                 as
                 we
                 shewed
                 ;
                 eyther
                 looking
                 vpon
                 the
                 Authour
                 ,
                 or
                 vpon
                 the
                 Translation
                 alone
                 .
                 But
                 I
                 finde
                 it
                 farre
                 the
                 surer
                 and
                 better
                 ,
                 in
                 al
                 who
                 are
                 able
                 ,
                 both
                 to
                 construe
                 and
                 parse
                 out
                 of
                 the
                 Translation
                 :
                 because
                 thereby
                 they
                 are
                 learning
                 continually
                 ,
                 both
                 to
                 make
                 and
                 proue
                 their
                 Latine
                 ;
                 and
                 so
                 doe
                 imprint
                 both
                 the
                 matter
                 and
                 Latine
                 ,
                 more
                 firmely
                 in
                 their
                 memory
                 .
                 So
                 also
                 all
                 of
                 ability
                 ,
                 to
                 construe
                 and
                 parse
                 onely
                 out
                 of
                 the
                 Translation
                 ,
                 when
                 they
                 come
                 to
                 say
                 ;
                 and
                 out
                 of
                 it
                 to
                 giue
                 the
                 reason
                 of
                 euery
                 thing
                 .
                 This
                 they
                 will
                 doe
                 most
                 readily
                 ,
                 with
                 a
                 little
                 practice
                 .
              
               
                 5
                 To
                 the
                 end
                 that
                 they
                 may
                 may
                 keepe
                 all
                 their
                 Authors
                 perfectly
                 ,
                 
                 which
                 they
                 haue
                 learned
                 (
                 which
                 is
                 thought
                 of
                 many
                 almost
                 impossible
                 ,
                 and
                 doth
                 indeed
                 so
                 much
                 incourage
                 young
                 Schollars
                 ,
                 and
                 grace
                 the
                 Schooles
                 when
                 they
                 can
                 doe
                 it
                 )
                 let
                 them
                 but
                 vse
                 this
                 practice
                 :
                 
                 Euery
                 day
                 
                 after
                 that
                 they
                 haue
                 said
                 their
                 Lectures
                 ,
                 
                 cause
                 each
                 fourme
                 which
                 vse
                 these
                 translations
                 ,
                 to
                 goe
                 immediately
                 to
                 construing
                 ouer
                 all
                 which
                 they
                 haue
                 learned
                 ,
                 each
                 day
                 a
                 peece
                 ,
                 euery
                 one
                 a
                 side
                 of
                 a
                 leafe
                 ,
                 or
                 the
                 like
                 in
                 order
                 ,
                 vntill
                 they
                 haue
                 gone
                 through
                 all
                 ;
                 construing
                 it
                 only
                 out
                 of
                 the
                 translation
                 :
                 to
                 spend
                 an
                 houre
                 or
                 more
                 therein
                 ,
                 as
                 time
                 will
                 permit
                 :
                 one
                 or
                 two
                 who
                 sit
                 next
                 vnto
                 the
                 construer
                 ,
                 to
                 looke
                 on
                 the
                 Translation
                 with
                 him
                 ,
                 
                 to
                 helpe
                 where
                 hee
                 sticketh
                 ;
                 the
                 rest
                 to
                 looke
                 on
                 their
                 Authours
                 .
                 Appoint
                 withall
                 some
                 of
                 the
                 Seniors
                 of
                 the
                 fourme
                 ,
                 to
                 examine
                 shortly
                 the
                 harde
                 wordes
                 of
                 each
                 page
                 as
                 they
                 goe
                 ;
                 I
                 meane
                 those
                 wordes
                 ,
                 which
                 they
                 marked
                 when
                 they
                 learned
                 them
                 .
              
               
                 And
                 when
                 they
                 become
                 perfect
                 in
                 construing
                 out
                 of
                 the
                 English
                 ,
                 
                 cause
                 them
                 for
                 more
                 speedy
                 dispatch
                 ,
                 but
                 onely
                 to
                 reade
                 their
                 Authours
                 into
                 Latine
                 ,
                 forth
                 of
                 the
                 Translation
                 ;
                 first
                 in
                 the
                 Grammaticall
                 order
                 :
                 after
                 as
                 they
                 are
                 in
                 the
                 Author
                 .
                 They
                 will
                 thus
                 soone
                 runne
                 ouer
                 all
                 which
                 they
                 haue
                 learned
                 ,
                 without
                 the
                 least
                 losse
                 of
                 time
                 :
                 for
                 this
                 will
                 be
                 found
                 the
                 best
                 bestowed
                 time
                 ,
                 to
                 keepe
                 perfectly
                 that
                 which
                 they
                 haue
                 gotten
                 .
                 And
                 what
                 they
                 can
                 so
                 construe
                 or
                 reade
                 out
                 of
                 the
                 English
                 into
                 Latine
                 ,
                 they
                 can
                 also
                 doe
                 it
                 out
                 of
                 the
                 Latine
                 into
                 English
                 ordinarily
                 .
              
               
                 Then
                 ,
                 
                 as
                 they
                 waxe
                 perfect
                 in
                 that
                 which
                 they
                 haue
                 learned
                 ,
                 and
                 grow
                 a
                 little
                 to
                 vnderstanding
                 ;
                 they
                 may
                 practice
                 of
                 themselues
                 by
                 the
                 same
                 meanes
                 ,
                 to
                 reade
                 ouer
                 the
                 rest
                 of
                 their
                 Authour
                 ,
                 which
                 they
                 learned
                 not
                 ,
                 or
                 some
                 easie
                 Authour
                 ,
                 which
                 they
                 haue
                 not
                 read
                 ;
                 as
                 first
                 Corderius
                 ,
                 or
                 the
                 like
                 ,
                 by
                 the
                 helpe
                 of
                 the
                 same
                 translations
                 :
                 first
                 to
                 construe
                 
                   ex
                   tempore
                
                 amongst
                 themselues
                 ,
                 after
                 to
                 reade
                 out
                 of
                 the
                 Translations
                 ;
                 according
                 to
                 the
                 same
                 manner
                 as
                 they
                 did
                 in
                 that
                 which
                 they
                 haue
                 learned
                 :
                 
                 wherein
                 they
                 will
                 do
                 more
                 then
                 you
                 will
                 easily
                 beleeue
                 ,
                 vntill
                 you
                 see
                 experience
                 .
                 
              
               
                 After
                 this
                 ,
                 as
                 they
                 come
                 to
                 higher
                 fourmes
                 ,
                 and
                 more
                 iudgement
                 ,
                 
                 they
                 may
                 be
                 appointed
                 likewise
                 to
                 reade
                 
                   ex
                   tempore
                
                 some
                 other
                 Authour
                 ,
                 whereof
                 they
                 haue
                 the
                 Translation
                 to
                 direct
                 them
                 ;
                 and
                 that
                 both
                 out
                 of
                 the
                 Authour
                 into
                 English
                 :
                 first
                 ,
                 after
                 the
                 Grammaticall
                 manner
                 ,
                 and
                 then
                 in
                 a
                 
                 good
                 English
                 stile
                 :
                 afterwards
                 out
                 of
                 the
                 English
                 into
                 Latine
                 ,
                 both
                 wayes
                 ,
                 both
                 in
                 Grammaticall
                 order
                 ,
                 and
                 after
                 in
                 Composition
                 ,
                 according
                 to
                 the
                 Authour
                 .
                 And
                 within
                 a
                 time
                 that
                 they
                 haue
                 beene
                 thus
                 exercised
                 ,
                 they
                 will
                 be
                 able
                 to
                 doe
                 this
                 ,
                 almost
                 as
                 easily
                 and
                 readily
                 ,
                 as
                 that
                 which
                 they
                 haue
                 learned
                 .
                 I
                 finde
                 Tullies
                 sentences
                 ,
                 and
                 
                   Tully
                   de
                   natura
                   Deorum
                
                 ,
                 with
                 
                   Terentius
                   Christianus
                
                 ,
                 to
                 be
                 singular
                 books
                 to
                 this
                 purpose
                 for
                 the
                 best
                 vses
                 .
              
               
                 By
                 this
                 meanes
                 it
                 must
                 come
                 to
                 passe
                 by
                 daily
                 practice
                 ,
                 
                 that
                 they
                 shall
                 attaine
                 to
                 the
                 phrase
                 ,
                 stile
                 &
                 Composition
                 of
                 any
                 Authour
                 which
                 they
                 vse
                 to
                 reade
                 oft
                 ouer
                 ,
                 &
                 to
                 make
                 it
                 their
                 owne
                 ;
                 euen
                 of
                 any
                 peece
                 of
                 Tully
                 himselfe
                 (
                 as
                 was
                 said
                 )
                 &
                 much
                 sooner
                 then
                 can
                 be
                 imagined
                 ,
                 vntill
                 triall
                 be
                 made
                 :
                 though
                 this
                 must
                 needes
                 require
                 meet
                 time
                 .
                 For
                 what
                 thing
                 of
                 any
                 worth
                 can
                 be
                 obtained
                 ,
                 but
                 by
                 time
                 ,
                 industry
                 ,
                 &
                 continuall
                 practice
                 ?
                 much
                 lesse
                 such
                 copy
                 ,
                 choyse
                 ,
                 propriety
                 ,
                 and
                 elegancy
                 ,
                 as
                 Tully
                 doth
                 affoord
                 .
              
            
          
           
             
               Obiections
               against
               the
               vse
               of
               Translations
               in
               Schooles
               answered
               .
            
             
               
                 Spoud
                 .
              
               
                 AS
                 you
                 haue
                 shewed
                 me
                 the
                 benefites
                 which
                 may
                 come
                 by
                 Grammaticall
                 Translations
                 ;
                 and
                 also
                 how
                 to
                 vse
                 them
                 ,
                 that
                 Schollars
                 may
                 attaine
                 the
                 same
                 :
                 so
                 giue
                 me
                 leaue
                 to
                 propound
                 what
                 doubts
                 I
                 may
                 suspect
                 concerning
                 the
                 same
                 for
                 the
                 present
                 ;
                 and
                 moe
                 hereafter
                 ,
                 as
                 I
                 shall
                 make
                 triall
                 of
                 them
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 Phil.
                 
              
               
                 Very
                 willingly
                 ;
                 for
                 I
                 doe
                 desire
                 to
                 finde
                 out
                 all
                 the
                 inconueniences
                 that
                 can
                 be
                 imagined
                 ,
                 which
                 may
                 comeby
                 by
                 them
                 :
                 but
                 for
                 mine
                 owne
                 part
                 ,
                 I
                 can
                 finde
                 none
                 ,
                 if
                 they
                 be
                 vsed
                 according
                 to
                 the
                 former
                 direction
                 ;
                 and
                 yet
                 I
                 haue
                 done
                 what
                 I
                 could
                 ,
                 to
                 finde
                 out
                 whatsoeuer
                 euils
                 might
                 be
                 to
                 follow
                 of
                 them
                 .
                 Obiect
                 whatsoeuer
                 you
                 can
                 ,
                 I
                 thinke
                 I
                 am
                 able
                 plainly
                 to
                 answere
                 it
                 ,
                 and
                 to
                 satisfie
                 you
                 fully
                 in
                 euery
                 point
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 Spoud
                 .
              
               
                 I
                 will
                 therefore
                 deale
                 plainly
                 with
                 you
                 ,
                 in
                 what
                 I
                 can
                 conceiue
                 for
                 the
                 present
                 .
              
            
             
               
               
                 Obiect
                 .
              
               
                 1.
                 
                 Translations
                 in
                 Schooles
                 haue
                 not
                 bin
                 found
                 to
                 bring
                 any
                 such
                 benefite
                 ,
                 but
                 rather
                 much
                 hurt
                 ;
                 and
                 therfore
                 the
                 best
                 and
                 wisest
                 Schoole-masters
                 haue
                 not
                 beene
                 wont
                 to
                 suffer
                 any
                 of
                 them
                 amongst
                 their
                 Schollars
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 Phil.
                 
              
               
                 I
                 will
                 first
                 answere
                 you
                 for
                 the
                 benefites
                 :
                 
                 That
                 it
                 is
                 true
                 indeede
                 ,
                 that
                 these
                 vses
                 and
                 benefites
                 cannot
                 bee
                 made
                 of
                 any
                 other
                 Translation
                 of
                 any
                 one
                 of
                 our
                 Schoole
                 Authours
                 .
                 The
                 reasons
                 are
                 euident
                 :
                 first
                 ,
                 because
                 none
                 of
                 the
                 Translators
                 haue
                 followed
                 ,
                 nor
                 so
                 much
                 as
                 propounded
                 to
                 themselues
                 to
                 follow
                 this
                 Grammaticall
                 rule
                 in
                 Translating
                 :
                 which
                 you
                 see
                 is
                 the
                 meane
                 foundation
                 of
                 all
                 true
                 construing
                 ,
                 parsing
                 ,
                 making
                 and
                 trying
                 Latine
                 :
                 and
                 of
                 all
                 these
                 benefites
                 ,
                 to
                 keepe
                 Schollars
                 to
                 goe
                 surely
                 .
                 Secondly
                 ,
                 none
                 of
                 them
                 which
                 I
                 know
                 ,
                 haue
                 laboured
                 to
                 expresse
                 the
                 propriety
                 and
                 force
                 of
                 the
                 Latine
                 ,
                 in
                 the
                 first
                 and
                 natiue
                 signification
                 ;
                 which
                 this
                 intendeth
                 continually
                 :
                 and
                 how
                 much
                 lieth
                 vpon
                 the
                 knowledge
                 of
                 the
                 propriety
                 of
                 the
                 wordes
                 for
                 the
                 certaine
                 getting
                 of
                 any
                 tongue
                 ,
                 euery
                 Schollar
                 knoweth
                 .
                 Thirdly
                 ,
                 none
                 of
                 them
                 haue
                 indeauoured
                 by
                 a
                 double
                 Translation
                 to
                 make
                 all
                 things
                 plaine
                 ,
                 as
                 these
                 do
                 euery
                 where
                 ;
                 labouring
                 to
                 expresse
                 with
                 the
                 wordes
                 ,
                 and
                 Grammar
                 ,
                 the
                 sense
                 and
                 meaning
                 also
                 in
                 all
                 obscure
                 places
                 ,
                 with
                 variety
                 of
                 English
                 wordes
                 or
                 phrase
                 :
                 to
                 the
                 end
                 to
                 teach
                 children
                 thereby
                 ,
                 Grammar
                 ,
                 propriety
                 ,
                 sense
                 with
                 variety
                 of
                 phrase
                 to
                 expresse
                 their
                 mindes
                 in
                 English
                 ,
                 as
                 wel
                 as
                 in
                 Latine
                 :
                 and
                 all
                 vnder
                 one
                 ,
                 that
                 nothing
                 bee
                 wanting
                 .
              
            
             
               The
               Translators
               haue
               seemed
               to
               ayme
               eyther
               onely
               or
               principally
               ,
               
               at
               the
               meaning
               and
               drift
               of
               the
               Authour
               ,
               
               which
               benefite
               alone
               they
               doe
               in
               some
               sort
               performe
               :
               but
               for
               the
               rest
               of
               the
               benefits
               and
               vses
               ,
               or
               for
               the
               most
               of
               them
               (
               as
               for
               true
               construing
               ▪
               parsing
               ,
               making
               and
               trying
               Latine
               ,
               which
               are
               the
               chiefe
               things
               here
               mentioned
               )
               they
               eyther
               set
               the
               learner
               at
               a
               
                 non
                 plus
              
               ,
               or
               carie
               him
               ordinarily
               cleane
               amisse
               .
               And
               therefore
               there
               is
               no
               maruell
               ,
               if
               in
               that
               respect
               they
               be
               vtterly
               disliked
               .
               Triall
               in
               any
               of
               them
               ,
               compared
               to
               the
               rule
               and
               the
               other
               limits
               ,
               and
               especially
               how
               in
               construing
               ,
               
               parsing
               ,
               and
               the
               like
               ,
               they
               carry
               the
               learner
               vtterly
               out
               of
               the
               way
               ,
               will
               presently
               shew
               the
               truth
               hereof
               ,
               and
               commonly
               in
               the
               very
               first
               sentence
               of
               them
               .
               I
               will
               set
               downe
               the
               words
               in
               one
               or
               two
               .
            
             
               Esops
               Fables
               construed
               thus
               :
            
             
               Dum
               whilst
               ,
               
               Gallinaceus
               the
               dunghill
               ,
               Gallus
               Cocke
               ,
               Ver●it
               scratched
               ,
               Stercorarium
               in
               the
               dunghill
               .
            
             
               Tullies
               Offices
               translated
               thus
               :
            
             
               Marci
               Tullij
               Ciceronis
               de
               officijs
               ad
               Marcum
               filium
               liber
               primus
               .
            
             
               
                 Marcus
                 Tullius
                 Ciceroes
              
               first
               booke
               of
               dueties
               to
               Marcus
               his
               sonne
               .
            
             
               Trie
               in
               any
               one
               of
               these
               ,
               whether
               a
               childe
               can
               construe
               one
               sentence
               right
               and
               surely
               ,
               
               according
               to
               Grammar
               ,
               or
               in
               any
               certainety
               of
               the
               propriety
               of
               the
               wordes
               ,
               or
               be
               able
               to
               parse
               or
               make
               Latine
               ,
               or
               the
               rest
               :
               though
               some
               of
               these
               Translatours
               were
               learned
               ▪
               and
               gaue
               the
               sense
               ;
               yet
               you
               may
               perceiue
               that
               they
               aimed
               not
               at
               these
               endes
               here
               mentioned
               ,
               or
               few
               of
               them
               .
            
             
               Thus
               you
               see
               what
               I
               haue
               answered
               concerning
               the
               benefites
               :
               now
               let
               vs
               heare
               what
               you
               say
               concerning
               the
               hurt
               comming
               by
               them
               .
            
             
               
                 Obiect
                 .
                 2.
                 
                 Spoud
                 .
              
               
                 Besides
                 that
                 they
                 leade
                 Schollars
                 amisse
                 very
                 ordinarily
                 in
                 construing
                 ,
                 almost
                 in
                 euery
                 sentence
                 ;
                 they
                 are
                 found
                 also
                 to
                 make
                 Schollars
                 Truants
                 ,
                 or
                 to
                 goe
                 by
                 rote
                 (
                 as
                 wee
                 commonly
                 call
                 it
                 )
                 which
                 is
                 worse
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 A.
                 Phil.
                 
              
               
                 For
                 the
                 first
                 part
                 ,
                 that
                 they
                 leade
                 Schollars
                 amisse
                 ,
                 I
                 haue
                 answered
                 ;
                 that
                 ,
                 that
                 is
                 onely
                 in
                 such
                 Translations
                 ,
                 which
                 respect
                 the
                 sense
                 alone
                 ,
                 but
                 doe
                 not
                 respect
                 the
                 Grammar
                 .
              
               
               
                 Secondly
                 ,
                 
                 for
                 making
                 truants
                 ,
                 I
                 aunswere
                 ;
                 that
                 these
                 Grammaticall
                 translations
                 being
                 thus
                 meerly
                 English
                 ,
                 and
                 separate
                 from
                 the
                 Latine
                 altogether
                 ,
                 can
                 neuer
                 indanger
                 any
                 waie
                 to
                 make
                 truants
                 ,
                 if
                 they
                 bee
                 vsed
                 according
                 to
                 the
                 directions
                 prescribed
                 .
                 For
                 first
                 ,
                 for
                 construing
                 latine
                 ,
                 there
                 can
                 bee
                 no
                 likelihood
                 hereof
                 ,
                 if
                 the
                 translation
                 bee
                 onely
                 vsed
                 ;
                 first
                 to
                 giue
                 some
                 light
                 and
                 vnderstanding
                 of
                 the
                 lecture
                 amongst
                 the
                 younger
                 ;
                 after
                 ,
                 to
                 bee
                 onely
                 in
                 place
                 of
                 the
                 Master
                 ,
                 where
                 he
                 cannot
                 be
                 himselfe
                 .
              
               
                 Also
                 ,
                 where
                 all
                 of
                 the
                 fourme
                 cannot
                 beat
                 out
                 the
                 construing
                 by
                 the
                 Grammaticall
                 rule
                 ,
                 there
                 to
                 direct
                 and
                 point
                 it
                 out
                 how
                 to
                 take
                 it
                 .
                 Likewise
                 ,
                 to
                 giue
                 propriety
                 of
                 English
                 ,
                 and
                 to
                 guide
                 the
                 schollars
                 in
                 place
                 of
                 the
                 Master
                 (
                 who
                 cannot
                 bee
                 alwaies
                 with
                 euery
                 one
                 )
                 to
                 the
                 end
                 ,
                 that
                 in
                 all
                 things
                 they
                 may
                 goe
                 surely
                 .
                 Secondly
                 ,
                 for
                 construing
                 and
                 making
                 the
                 Latine
                 out
                 of
                 the
                 translation
                 ,
                 it
                 chiefly
                 consists
                 vpon
                 vnderstanding
                 and
                 conceit
                 ;
                 and
                 shall
                 more
                 stirre
                 vp
                 the
                 wit
                 and
                 memory
                 to
                 get
                 propriety
                 and
                 copie
                 of
                 words
                 and
                 phrases
                 ,
                 then
                 all
                 getting
                 without
                 booke
                 can
                 possibly
                 doe
                 .
                 In
                 getting
                 without
                 book
                 alone
                 ,
                 words
                 and
                 sentences
                 may
                 bee
                 learned
                 ,
                 as
                 by
                 Parats
                 ,
                 without
                 any
                 vnderstanding
                 :
                 hereby
                 children
                 must
                 needes
                 vnderstand
                 them
                 :
                 For
                 ,
                 hauing
                 nothing
                 but
                 the
                 bare
                 translation
                 ,
                 they
                 must
                 be
                 driuen
                 of
                 necessitie
                 to
                 beate
                 out
                 the
                 latine
                 ,
                 by
                 learning
                 and
                 by
                 reason
                 ,
                 with
                 diligence
                 ;
                 and
                 so
                 stirre
                 vp
                 their
                 memories
                 continually
                 .
                 Also
                 ,
                 hereby
                 whensoeuer
                 they
                 shall
                 haue
                 againe
                 the
                 same
                 English
                 words
                 or
                 phrases
                 to
                 make
                 in
                 Latine
                 ,
                 to
                 write
                 or
                 to
                 speake
                 ;
                 the
                 verie
                 same
                 Latine
                 words
                 and
                 phrases
                 ,
                 which
                 they
                 learned
                 in
                 their
                 Authours
                 ,
                 doe
                 come
                 straight
                 wayes
                 to
                 their
                 memories
                 to
                 expresse
                 their
                 mindes
                 .
                 And
                 in
                 what
                 things
                 they
                 can
                 giue
                 Latine
                 to
                 the
                 English
                 ,
                 in
                 that
                 ,
                 as
                 was
                 sayd
                 ,
                 they
                 can
                 ordinarily
                 giue
                 English
                 to
                 the
                 Latine
                 .
              
               
                 Indeede
                 ,
                 
                 where
                 the
                 translation
                 is
                 ioined
                 with
                 the
                 Authour
                 ,
                 and
                 so
                 they
                 are
                 set
                 together
                 answerably
                 word
                 for
                 word
                 ,
                 eyther
                 as
                 the
                 Interlineal
                 set
                 ouer
                 the
                 head
                 ,
                 or
                 the
                 English
                 word
                 or
                 phrase
                 set
                 after
                 the
                 Latine
                 ;
                 there
                 the
                 eie
                 of
                 the
                 
                 childe
                 is
                 no
                 sooner
                 vpon
                 the
                 one
                 ,
                 but
                 it
                 will
                 be
                 vpon
                 the
                 other
                 :
                 and
                 so
                 the
                 memory
                 is
                 not
                 exercised
                 ,
                 neither
                 can
                 this
                 mischiefe
                 be
                 auoided
                 .
                 Yea
                 ,
                 where
                 the
                 Author
                 is
                 of
                 the
                 one
                 page
                 ,
                 the
                 translation
                 is
                 on
                 the
                 other
                 ouer
                 against
                 it
                 (
                 like
                 as
                 it
                 is
                 in
                 Theognis
                 ,
                 and
                 some
                 other
                 Greeke
                 Poets
                 )
                 there
                 must
                 be
                 much
                 discretion
                 for
                 the
                 right
                 vsing
                 of
                 them
                 ;
                 otherwise
                 many
                 inconueniences
                 must
                 needes
                 follow
                 amongst
                 children
                 .
                 But
                 in
                 these
                 bare
                 translations
                 so
                 by
                 themselues
                 ,
                 these
                 surmised
                 daungers
                 are
                 preuented
                 ;
                 if
                 they
                 bee
                 vsed
                 as
                 hath
                 been
                 shewed
                 .
                 Although
                 for
                 them
                 who
                 are
                 of
                 full
                 discretion
                 to
                 vse
                 them
                 (
                 as
                 those
                 who
                 would
                 study
                 priuately
                 for
                 the
                 reoouering
                 their
                 Latine
                 ,
                 or
                 increasing
                 therin
                 )
                 it
                 may
                 bee
                 the
                 most
                 profitable
                 of
                 all
                 ,
                 to
                 haue
                 the
                 translation
                 ouer-against
                 the
                 latine
                 ,
                 directly
                 on
                 the
                 other
                 page
                 ,
                 after
                 the
                 manner
                 as
                 Theognis
                 is
                 printed
                 ;
                 that
                 folding
                 the
                 booke
                 ,
                 they
                 may
                 looke
                 vpon
                 the
                 one
                 ,
                 when
                 they
                 would
                 finde
                 out
                 the
                 other
                 ;
                 and
                 yet
                 haue
                 the
                 other
                 euer
                 at
                 hand
                 ,
                 as
                 a
                 master
                 ,
                 to
                 helpe
                 in
                 an
                 instant
                 ,
                 where
                 they
                 need
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 3.
                 
                 Ob.
                 Sp.
                 
              
               
                 But
                 the
                 schollars
                 may
                 be
                 idle
                 ,
                 when
                 they
                 seem
                 to
                 be
                 construing
                 ,
                 when
                 as
                 one
                 only
                 construeth
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 rest
                 looke
                 on
                 their
                 bookes
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 A.
                 Phil.
                 
              
               
                 So
                 they
                 may
                 be
                 idle
                 in
                 whatsoeuer
                 exercise
                 they
                 do
                 amongst
                 themselues
                 ,
                 
                 vnlesse
                 the
                 Master
                 be
                 vigilant
                 :
                 but
                 let
                 the
                 master
                 vse
                 any
                 diligent
                 circumspection
                 ,
                 and
                 they
                 cannot
                 possibly
                 be
                 idle
                 in
                 this
                 ,
                 of
                 all
                 other
                 ;
                 no
                 not
                 one
                 in
                 any
                 fourme
                 .
                 For
                 ,
                 let
                 but
                 the
                 Master
                 or
                 Vsher
                 haue
                 an
                 eye
                 to
                 all
                 in
                 generall
                 ,
                 though
                 they
                 bee
                 in
                 hand
                 in
                 hearing
                 any
                 fourme
                 ;
                 and
                 where
                 they
                 do
                 marke
                 or
                 but
                 suspect
                 any
                 one
                 of
                 all
                 the
                 fourmes
                 to
                 bee
                 carelesse
                 ,
                 or
                 not
                 to
                 attend
                 ;
                 there
                 let
                 them
                 step
                 to
                 such
                 a
                 one
                 of
                 a
                 sodaine
                 ,
                 and
                 bid
                 him
                 set
                 his
                 finger
                 to
                 the
                 last
                 word
                 which
                 was
                 spoken
                 :
                 and
                 so
                 if
                 any
                 bee
                 idle
                 ,
                 he
                 may
                 bee
                 catched
                 presently
                 .
                 Prouided
                 alwaies
                 ,
                 that
                 no
                 one
                 keep
                 his
                 finger
                 at
                 the
                 book
                 ,
                 lest
                 by
                 them
                 the
                 truants
                 see
                 where
                 it
                 is
                 ;
                 but
                 euery
                 one
                 to
                 vse
                 only
                 his
                 eye
                 and
                 his
                 eare
                 .
                 Some
                 of
                 the
                 most
                 negligent
                 and
                 stubborne
                 so
                 ouertaken
                 now
                 and
                 then
                 ,
                 and
                 sharpely
                 corrected
                 for
                 ensample
                 ,
                 will
                 continually
                 keepe
                 all
                 the
                 rest
                 in
                 order
                 and
                 diligence
                 ,
                 at
                 this
                 
                 time
                 specially
                 .
                 This
                 practice
                 may
                 serue
                 for
                 whatsoeuer
                 they
                 construe
                 ,
                 
                 parse
                 ,
                 or
                 examine
                 together
                 ,
                 to
                 keepe
                 them
                 fro●
                 loytering
                 or
                 carelesnesse
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 4.
                 
                 Ob.
                 Spoud
                 .
              
               
                 Wel
                 :
                 you
                 seeme
                 to
                 haue
                 answered
                 the
                 euils
                 which
                 I
                 feared
                 for
                 the
                 schollars
                 ;
                 I
                 shall
                 thinke
                 further
                 of
                 them
                 .
                 But
                 there
                 may
                 bee
                 greater
                 inconueniences
                 in
                 them
                 concerning
                 the
                 Masters
                 :
                 as
                 1.
                 
                 These
                 may
                 bee
                 a
                 meanes
                 to
                 make
                 the
                 Master
                 idle
                 ,
                 by
                 freeing
                 them
                 from
                 giuing
                 lectures
                 ,
                 and
                 much
                 other
                 imployment
                 about
                 the
                 same
                 ,
                 which
                 they
                 are
                 wont
                 to
                 be
                 exercised
                 in
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 Phil.
                 
              
               
                 The
                 best
                 things
                 may
                 be
                 abused
                 some
                 waie
                 :
                 but
                 otherwise
                 there
                 cannot
                 be
                 any
                 such
                 danger
                 of
                 idlenesse
                 to
                 the
                 Master
                 ,
                 
                 who
                 makes
                 conscience
                 of
                 this
                 dutie
                 ,
                 or
                 hath
                 any
                 desire
                 to
                 see
                 his
                 schollars
                 to
                 profit
                 ;
                 but
                 an
                 incouragement
                 hereby
                 to
                 take
                 all
                 possible
                 paines
                 ,
                 by
                 seeing
                 the
                 ease
                 and
                 fruite
                 of
                 his
                 labours
                 .
                 Also
                 ,
                 besides
                 the
                 continuall
                 eye
                 that
                 hee
                 is
                 to
                 haue
                 ,
                 that
                 euery
                 one
                 be
                 painfully
                 exercised
                 by
                 them
                 in
                 euery
                 fourme
                 ,
                 and
                 his
                 marking
                 out
                 all
                 the
                 difficult
                 words
                 ,
                 that
                 they
                 may
                 labour
                 those
                 aboue
                 all
                 ,
                 and
                 helping
                 in
                 each
                 fourme
                 where
                 neede
                 is
                 ,
                 the
                 Master
                 may
                 bestowe
                 the
                 more
                 time
                 with
                 the
                 higher
                 fourms
                 ;
                 and
                 in
                 poasing
                 &
                 examining
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 the
                 life
                 of
                 all
                 learning
                 ,
                 as
                 hath
                 bin
                 &
                 shall
                 be
                 shewed
                 further
                 in
                 due
                 place
                 .
                 As
                 before
                 lectures
                 ,
                 he
                 may
                 spend
                 more
                 time
                 continually
                 in
                 examining
                 parts
                 ,
                 and
                 in
                 more
                 exquisite
                 reading
                 lectures
                 in
                 the
                 higher
                 formes
                 ,
                 or
                 hearing
                 them
                 to
                 reade
                 their
                 owne
                 lectures
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 farre
                 the
                 best
                 of
                 all
                 ;
                 or
                 taking
                 paines
                 with
                 the
                 first
                 enterers
                 for
                 euerie
                 tittle
                 :
                 so
                 in
                 examining
                 and
                 trying
                 exercises
                 and
                 lectures
                 after
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 Spoud
                 .
              
               
                 You
                 seeme
                 to
                 bee
                 maruellous
                 confident
                 in
                 all
                 things
                 ,
                 for
                 the
                 vse
                 and
                 benefit
                 of
                 these
                 translations
                 ;
                 and
                 to
                 make
                 a
                 principall
                 reckoning
                 of
                 them
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 Phil.
                 
              
               
                 I
                 do
                 indeed
                 make
                 a
                 principall
                 account
                 of
                 them
                 very
                 iustly
                 ;
                 
                 and
                 doe
                 acknowledge
                 my selfe
                 bound
                 vnto
                 God
                 chiefly
                 for
                 them
                 ,
                 aboue
                 al
                 other
                 things
                 which
                 he
                 hath
                 made
                 knowne
                 vnto
                 me
                 in
                 all
                 my
                 search
                 and
                 trauell
                 .
              
               
                 For
                 these
                 are
                 for
                 me
                 insteed
                 of
                 mine
                 owne
                 selfe
                 ,
                 hearing
                 
                 and
                 directing
                 in
                 euery
                 other
                 fourm
                 which
                 I
                 cannot
                 be
                 withall
                 ,
                 or
                 as
                 so
                 many
                 helpers
                 .
                 And
                 by
                 the
                 help
                 and
                 benefit
                 of
                 these
                 ,
                 all
                 my
                 younger
                 Schollars
                 doe
                 seeme
                 to
                 attaine
                 almost
                 double
                 learning
                 to
                 that
                 ,
                 that
                 by
                 mine
                 owne
                 paines
                 being
                 farre
                 greater
                 ,
                 and
                 my
                 griefe
                 much
                 more
                 ,
                 I
                 was
                 euer
                 able
                 to
                 bring
                 them
                 vnto
                 before
                 .
                 For
                 ,
                 before
                 the
                 time
                 that
                 I
                 came
                 to
                 the
                 knowledge
                 and
                 vse
                 of
                 these
                 ,
                 as
                 I
                 taught
                 at
                 one
                 end
                 ,
                 my
                 children
                 would
                 forget
                 at
                 an
                 other
                 ;
                 and
                 bee
                 as
                 rawe
                 in
                 that
                 which
                 was
                 learned
                 a
                 quarter
                 or
                 halfe
                 a
                 yeere
                 before
                 ,
                 as
                 if
                 they
                 either
                 had
                 not
                 learned
                 it
                 ,
                 or
                 neuer
                 learned
                 it
                 well
                 ;
                 which
                 was
                 no
                 small
                 griefe
                 vnto
                 mee
                 whensoeuer
                 they
                 were
                 examined
                 :
                 but
                 now
                 take
                 them
                 where
                 you
                 will
                 of
                 a
                 sodaine
                 ,
                 in
                 all
                 the
                 Authors
                 which
                 they
                 haue
                 learned
                 ;
                 and
                 they
                 shall
                 be
                 able
                 in
                 good
                 sort
                 ,
                 not
                 onely
                 to
                 construe
                 or
                 parse
                 ,
                 but
                 also
                 to
                 reade
                 out
                 of
                 the
                 English
                 into
                 the
                 Latine
                 and
                 proue
                 it
                 :
                 at
                 least
                 so
                 many
                 of
                 them
                 as
                 are
                 apt
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 rest
                 in
                 better
                 maner
                 then
                 I
                 could
                 haue
                 expected
                 of
                 them
                 ,
                 vnless
                 the
                 fault
                 be
                 in
                 my selfe
                 ;
                 and
                 that
                 without
                 any
                 losse
                 of
                 time
                 :
                 and
                 to
                 goe
                 faster
                 forwarde
                 in
                 their
                 Authors
                 then
                 euer
                 they
                 were
                 wont
                 to
                 do
                 ;
                 and
                 without
                 any
                 such
                 fretting
                 or
                 vexing
                 to
                 my selfe
                 ,
                 though
                 I
                 haue
                 but
                 some
                 one
                 written
                 copie
                 in
                 a
                 fourm
                 .
                 Now
                 trie
                 this
                 amongst
                 your
                 schollars
                 ,
                 whether
                 they
                 be
                 able
                 to
                 doe
                 the
                 like
                 at
                 any
                 time
                 of
                 a
                 sodaine
                 ,
                 by
                 all
                 your
                 labour
                 .
                 For
                 mine
                 owne
                 part
                 ,
                 I
                 could
                 neuer
                 by
                 all
                 meanes
                 attaine
                 vnto
                 it
                 in
                 any
                 measure
                 ,
                 especially
                 hauing
                 many
                 fourmes
                 :
                 neither
                 can
                 I
                 see
                 how
                 I
                 could
                 haue
                 done
                 it
                 ,
                 vnlesse
                 I
                 had
                 had
                 so
                 many
                 bodies
                 ,
                 or
                 so
                 many
                 to
                 haue
                 bin
                 continually
                 in
                 my
                 place
                 ,
                 in
                 each
                 fourme
                 one
                 .
              
               
                 A
                 small
                 triall
                 will
                 soone
                 make
                 this
                 euident
                 ;
                 
                 proouing
                 some
                 schollars
                 with
                 them
                 ,
                 others
                 learning
                 the
                 same
                 things
                 without
                 them
                 ,
                 in
                 some
                 quarter
                 or
                 halfe
                 yeeres
                 space
                 ,
                 whether
                 haue
                 learned
                 more
                 and
                 the
                 surelier
                 .
                 And
                 therefore
                 I
                 dare
                 bee
                 bolde
                 to
                 commend
                 this
                 vnto
                 you
                 vpon
                 most
                 vndoubted
                 experience
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 Spoud
                 .
              
               
                 I
                 do
                 not
                 doubt
                 then
                 ,
                 but
                 vpon
                 this
                 so
                 happy
                 an
                 experience
                 you
                 haue
                 thus
                 translated
                 many
                 of
                 our
                 schoole
                 Authors
                 .
              
            
             
               
               
                 Phil.
                 
              
               
                 I
                 haue
                 indeed
                 taken
                 paines
                 in
                 translating
                 so
                 many
                 of
                 them
                 ,
                 
                 as
                 I
                 haue
                 had
                 occasion
                 for
                 my
                 schollars
                 to
                 vse
                 ,
                 since
                 God
                 made
                 knowne
                 vnto
                 me
                 the
                 benefit
                 of
                 them
                 ;
                 and
                 haue
                 either
                 finished
                 them
                 wholly
                 ,
                 or
                 some
                 part
                 of
                 each
                 of
                 them
                 ;
                 and
                 hope
                 in
                 time
                 to
                 go
                 thorough
                 them
                 wholly
                 ,
                 if
                 the
                 Lord
                 vouchsafe
                 me
                 life
                 .
                 As
                 namely
                 ,
                 to
                 begin
                 at
                 the
                 lowest
                 :
                 
                   
                     Schoole
                     Authors
                     translated
                     or
                     in
                     hand
                     .
                  
                   
                     Pueriles
                     confabulatiunculae
                     .
                  
                   
                     Sententiae
                     pueriles
                     .
                  
                   
                     Cato
                     .
                  
                   
                     Corderius
                     dialogues
                     .
                  
                   
                     Esops
                     fables
                     .
                  
                   
                     Tullies
                     Epistles
                     gathered
                     by
                     Sturmius
                     .
                  
                   
                     Tullies
                     Offices
                     with
                     the
                     books
                     adioind
                     to
                     them
                     ;
                     
                       de
                       Amicitia
                       ,
                       Senectute
                       ,
                       Paradoxes
                       .
                    
                  
                   
                     Ouid
                     de
                     Tristibus
                     .
                  
                   
                     Ouids
                     Metamorphosis
                     .
                  
                   
                     Virgil.
                     
                  
                
              
               
                 Also
                 these
                 books
                 following
                 ,
                 
                 wherof
                 I
                 find
                 great
                 benefit
                 :
              
               
                 1
                 Tullies
                 Sentences
                 for
                 entring
                 schollars
                 ,
                 to
                 make
                 latine
                 truly
                 and
                 purely
                 in
                 steed
                 of
                 giuing
                 vulgars
                 ,
                 and
                 for
                 vse
                 of
                 daily
                 translating
                 into
                 latine
                 ,
                 to
                 furnish
                 with
                 variety
                 of
                 pure
                 latine
                 and
                 matter
                 .
              
               
                 2
                 Aphthonius
                 for
                 easie
                 entrance
                 into
                 Theames
                 ,
                 for
                 vnderstanding
                 ,
                 matter
                 and
                 order
                 .
              
               
                 3
                 Drax
                 his
                 phrases
                 ,
                 to
                 helpe
                 to
                 furnish
                 with
                 copie
                 of
                 phrase
                 both
                 english
                 and
                 latine
                 ,
                 and
                 to
                 attaine
                 to
                 propriety
                 in
                 both
                 .
              
               
                 4
                 
                   Flores
                   poëtarum
                
                 ,
                 to
                 prepare
                 for
                 versifying
                 ;
                 to
                 learn
                 to
                 versifie
                 ,
                 
                   ex
                   tempore
                
                 ,
                 of
                 any
                 ordinary
                 Theame
                 .
              
               
                 5
                 Tully
                 
                   de
                   Natura
                   Deorum
                
                 ;
                 for
                 purity
                 ,
                 easinesse
                 ,
                 variety
                 ,
                 to
                 helpe
                 to
                 fit
                 with
                 a
                 sweet
                 stile
                 for
                 their
                 disputations
                 in
                 the
                 Vniuersities
                 .
              
               
                 6
                 Terentius
                 Christianus
                 .
              
               
                 Of
                 the
                 further
                 vses
                 of
                 all
                 of
                 which
                 I
                 shall
                 speak
                 in
                 their
                 proper
                 places
                 :
                 
                 though
                 this
                 I
                 must
                 needs
                 confesse
                 vnto
                 you
                 ,
                 that
                 I
                 know
                 them
                 all
                 to
                 be
                 very
                 imperfect
                 ,
                 and
                 to
                 haue
                 many
                 defects
                 :
                 which
                 I
                 euery
                 day
                 obserue
                 ,
                 and
                 am
                 continually
                 amending
                 ,
                 
                 hoping
                 to
                 bring
                 them
                 to
                 much
                 more
                 perfection
                 ,
                 as
                 either
                 my selfe
                 ,
                 or
                 you
                 ,
                 or
                 any
                 other
                 good
                 friend
                 ,
                 to
                 whose
                 hands
                 they
                 shall
                 come
                 ,
                 shall
                 obserue
                 the
                 slips
                 ,
                 and
                 God
                 vouchsafe
                 life
                 &
                 his
                 gracious
                 assistance
                 .
                 In
                 the
                 meane
                 time
                 I
                 intreat
                 you
                 to
                 suspend
                 your
                 iudgement
                 ,
                 vntill
                 you
                 haue
                 seene
                 some
                 triall
                 ,
                 if
                 you
                 haue
                 any
                 further
                 doubt
                 concerning
                 the
                 benefit
                 of
                 them
                 ;
                 and
                 then
                 to
                 let
                 me
                 heare
                 plainly
                 as
                 you
                 finde
                 .
              
            
          
           
             
               Of
               construing
               ex
               tempore
               .
            
             
               
                 Spoud
                 .
              
               
                 I
                 Rest
                 in
                 these
                 your
                 answeres
                 ,
                 which
                 you
                 giue
                 vpon
                 your
                 experience
                 ,
                 for
                 the
                 doubts
                 which
                 may
                 bee
                 made
                 concerning
                 the
                 Grammaticall
                 translations
                 ,
                 and
                 so
                 for
                 the
                 vse
                 and
                 benefits
                 of
                 them
                 ;
                 and
                 also
                 for
                 the
                 construing
                 of
                 those
                 lower
                 Schoole
                 Authors
                 ,
                 which
                 are
                 so
                 translated
                 .
                 But
                 when
                 your
                 schollars
                 haue
                 gon
                 through
                 these
                 Authors
                 ,
                 what
                 helpes
                 may
                 they
                 vse
                 for
                 the
                 higher
                 Schoole
                 Authors
                 ?
                 
                 as
                 Horace
                 ,
                 Persius
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 like
                 ;
                 and
                 so
                 for
                 all
                 other
                 things
                 to
                 be
                 construed
                 
                   ex
                   tempore
                
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 Phil.
                 
              
               
                 By
                 this
                 time
                 they
                 will
                 do
                 very
                 much
                 in
                 construing
                 any
                 ordinary
                 Author
                 of
                 themselues
                 ,
                 
                   ex
                   tempore
                
                 ;
                 thorough
                 their
                 perfect
                 knowledge
                 and
                 continuall
                 practice
                 of
                 the
                 rule
                 of
                 construing
                 ,
                 
                 and
                 by
                 that
                 helpe
                 of
                 their
                 reading
                 in
                 the
                 lower
                 Authors
                 :
                 I
                 meane
                 the
                 help
                 of
                 the
                 matter
                 ,
                 words
                 and
                 phrase
                 which
                 they
                 are
                 well
                 acquainted
                 with
                 ,
                 and
                 of
                 being
                 able
                 to
                 cast
                 the
                 words
                 into
                 the
                 naturall
                 order
                 .
              
               
                 Yet
                 besides
                 these
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 assistance
                 of
                 the
                 Master
                 where
                 need
                 is
                 ,
                 they
                 may
                 vse
                 also
                 these
                 helpes
                 following
                 :
              
               
                 1
                 The
                 best
                 and
                 easiest
                 Commentaries
                 of
                 the
                 hardest
                 and
                 most
                 crabbed
                 Schoole
                 Authors
                 ;
                 
                 as
                 M.
                 Bonde
                 vpon
                 Horace
                 :
                 who
                 hath
                 by
                 his
                 paines
                 made
                 that
                 difficult
                 Poet
                 so
                 easie
                 ,
                 that
                 a
                 very
                 childe
                 which
                 hath
                 been
                 well
                 entred
                 ,
                 and
                 hath
                 read
                 the
                 former
                 Schoole
                 Authors
                 in
                 any
                 good
                 manner
                 may
                 go
                 thorough
                 it
                 with
                 facilitie
                 ,
                 
                 except
                 in
                 very
                 few
                 places
                 .
                 Of
                 him
                 ,
                 it
                 were
                 to
                 be
                 wished
                 ,
                 for
                 his
                 singular
                 dexteritie
                 in
                 making
                 that
                 difficult
                 Poet
                 plaine
                 in
                 so
                 few
                 words
                 ,
                 that
                 he
                 would
                 take
                 the
                 like
                 paines
                 in
                 the
                 rest
                 of
                 that
                 kinde
                 :
                 as
                 in
                 
                 Persius
                 and
                 Iuvenall
                 ,
                 for
                 the
                 great
                 benefit
                 of
                 Schooles
                 .
                 Or
                 that
                 som
                 other
                 would
                 do
                 it
                 ,
                 following
                 his
                 example
                 .
              
               
                 Next
                 vnto
                 him
                 ,
                 of
                 those
                 which
                 I
                 haue
                 seene
                 are
                 these
                 :
                 Murmelius
                 &
                 Buschius
                 vpon
                 Persius
                 ,
                 
                 a
                 double
                 Commentarie
                 ;
                 the
                 one
                 shortly
                 expressing
                 the
                 matter
                 ,
                 and
                 beating
                 out
                 the
                 sense
                 &
                 meaning
                 ,
                 the
                 other
                 the
                 words
                 .
                 Lubin
                 also
                 vpon
                 Persius
                 ,
                 and
                 Iuvenal
                 ,
                 
                 is
                 much
                 commended
                 .
                 For
                 short
                 comments
                 and
                 annotations
                 of
                 Virgil
                 ,
                 there
                 may
                 be
                 vsed
                 Ramus
                 vpon
                 the
                 Eclogues
                 &
                 Georgicks
                 .
                 Also
                 the
                 Virgils
                 printed
                 with
                 H.
                 Stephens
                 annotations
                 ;
                 and
                 with
                 Melancthons
                 .
              
               
                 2
                 Where
                 they
                 haue
                 no
                 help
                 but
                 the
                 bare
                 Author
                 ,
                 &
                 that
                 they
                 must
                 cōstrue
                 wholly
                 of
                 themselues
                 cal
                 vpon
                 them
                 oft
                 ,
                 to
                 labour
                 to
                 vnderstand
                 &
                 keep
                 in
                 fresh
                 memory
                 the
                 Argument
                 ,
                 matter
                 &
                 drift
                 of
                 the
                 place
                 ,
                 
                 which
                 they
                 are
                 to
                 cōstrue
                 :
                 which
                 matter
                 ,
                 
                 they
                 may
                 either
                 find
                 prefixed
                 generally
                 before
                 the
                 beginning
                 of
                 the
                 treatises
                 ,
                 or
                 chapters
                 ,
                 in
                 the
                 Argumēts
                 ,
                 or
                 else
                 they
                 are
                 to
                 demand
                 the
                 vnderstanding
                 in
                 general
                 ,
                 of
                 the
                 Master
                 or
                 examiner
                 ,
                 what
                 the
                 matter
                 of
                 the
                 place
                 is
                 ,
                 or
                 what
                 it
                 about
                 .
                 Otherwise
                 many
                 places
                 may
                 trouble
                 the
                 greatest
                 schollars
                 at
                 the
                 first
                 sight
                 .
                 
              
               
                 3.
                 
                 To
                 consider
                 wel
                 of
                 all
                 the
                 circumstances
                 of
                 each
                 place
                 ,
                 
                 which
                 are
                 cōprehended
                 most
                 of
                 them
                 in
                 this
                 plaine
                 verse
                 :
              
               
                 Quis
                 ,
                 cui
                 ,
                 causa
                 ,
                 locus
                 ,
                 quo
                 tempore
                 ,
                 prima
                 sequela
                 .
              
               
                 That
                 is
                 ,
                 who
                 speaks
                 in
                 that
                 place
                 ,
                 what
                 he
                 speaks
                 ,
                 to
                 whom
                 he
                 speakes
                 ,
                 
                 vpon
                 what
                 occasion
                 he
                 speaks
                 ,
                 or
                 to
                 what
                 end
                 ,
                 where
                 he
                 spake
                 ,
                 at
                 what
                 time
                 time
                 it
                 was
                 ,
                 what
                 went
                 before
                 in
                 the
                 sentences
                 next
                 ,
                 what
                 followeth
                 next
                 after
                 .
                 This
                 verse
                 I
                 would
                 haue
                 euery
                 such
                 schollar
                 to
                 haue
                 readily
                 ;
                 and
                 alwaies
                 to
                 thinke
                 of
                 it
                 in
                 his
                 construing
                 .
                 
                 It
                 is
                 a
                 very
                 principall
                 rule
                 for
                 the
                 vnderstanding
                 of
                 any
                 Author
                 or
                 matt●r
                 whatsoeuer
                 .
              
               
                 4
                 In
                 all
                 hard
                 words
                 or
                 phrases
                 let
                 them
                 first
                 call
                 to
                 remembrance
                 where
                 they
                 haue
                 learned
                 them
                 ,
                 or
                 the
                 primitiue
                 word
                 whereof
                 they
                 come
                 ,
                 
                 or
                 some
                 words
                 neere
                 vnto
                 them
                 :
                 or
                 otherwise
                 to
                 search
                 them
                 out
                 by
                 inquiring
                 of
                 the
                 Master
                 ,
                 Vsher
                 ,
                 or
                 som
                 follow
                 ;
                 or
                 of
                 the
                 Dictionaries
                 ,
                 which
                 they
                 ought
                 to
                 haue
                 euer
                 at
                 hand
                 .
              
               
                 And
                 in
                 construing
                 their
                 own
                 Authors
                 ,
                 let
                 them
                 remember
                 
                 that
                 generall
                 precept
                 ,
                 to
                 marke
                 the
                 newe
                 words
                 with
                 a
                 line
                 vnder
                 them
                 ,
                 as
                 was
                 aduised
                 before
                 ;
                 that
                 they
                 may
                 oft
                 go
                 ouer
                 them
                 :
                 or
                 if
                 they
                 feare
                 they
                 cannot
                 so
                 remember
                 them
                 ,
                 to
                 write
                 them
                 in
                 their
                 books
                 ouer
                 the
                 word
                 ,
                 or
                 in
                 the
                 margents
                 ouer
                 against
                 the
                 words
                 ,
                 in
                 a
                 fine
                 small
                 hand
                 ,
                 it
                 will
                 not
                 hurt
                 their
                 bookes
                 :
                 or
                 for
                 sauing
                 their
                 books
                 ,
                 let
                 euery
                 one
                 haue
                 a
                 little
                 paper
                 booke
                 ,
                 
                 and
                 therein
                 write
                 onely
                 all
                 the
                 new
                 and
                 hard
                 words
                 as
                 was
                 obserued
                 generally
                 ,
                 to
                 bee
                 very
                 perfect
                 in
                 those
                 each
                 way
                 ,
                 by
                 oft
                 reading
                 ouer
                 ;
                 and
                 so
                 they
                 shal
                 come
                 on
                 very
                 fast
                 :
                 hauing
                 those
                 (
                 as
                 I
                 said
                 )
                 they
                 haue
                 all
                 .
                 So
                 that
                 these
                 things
                 obserued
                 shall
                 accomplish
                 your
                 desire
                 .
              
               
                 1.
                 
                 Consider
                 and
                 way
                 wel
                 the
                 generall
                 matter
                 &
                 argument
                 .
                 
              
               
                 2.
                 
                 Marke
                 all
                 the
                 hard
                 words
                 in
                 their
                 proper
                 significations
                 .
              
               
                 3.
                 
                 Keepe
                 in
                 mind
                 that
                 verse
                 of
                 the
                 circumstances
                 of
                 places
                 ;
                 
                   Quis
                   ,
                   cui
                   ,
                   &c.
                
                 
              
               
                 4.
                 
                 Cast
                 and
                 dispose
                 the
                 words
                 in
                 the
                 proper
                 Grammaticall
                 order
                 .
              
               
                 5.
                 
                 See
                 that
                 nothing
                 bee
                 against
                 sense
                 ,
                 
                 nothing
                 against
                 Grammar
                 :
                 but
                 if
                 either
                 the
                 sense
                 be
                 absurd
                 ,
                 or
                 construction
                 against
                 Grammar
                 ,
                 cast
                 it
                 ,
                 and
                 try
                 it
                 another
                 way
                 vntill
                 you
                 find
                 it
                 out
                 .
              
               
                 Finally
                 ,
                 
                 giue
                 me
                 leaue
                 to
                 adde
                 this
                 ,
                 before
                 wee
                 end
                 this
                 matter
                 of
                 construing
                 ;
                 That
                 all
                 these
                 kinds
                 of
                 construing
                 ,
                 or
                 rather
                 of
                 expounding
                 and
                 expressing
                 their
                 minds
                 ,
                 may
                 be
                 vsed
                 by
                 schollars
                 of
                 ripenesse
                 ,
                 and
                 with
                 much
                 profit
                 .
              
               
                 1
                 According
                 to
                 the
                 bare
                 words
                 in
                 their
                 first
                 signification
                 ,
                 and
                 in
                 the
                 naturall
                 order
                 plainly
                 .
              
               
                 2
                 According
                 to
                 the
                 sense
                 to
                 expresse
                 the
                 mind
                 of
                 the
                 Author
                 with
                 vnderstanding
                 .
              
               
                 3
                 More
                 elegantly
                 ,
                 in
                 finenesse
                 of
                 words
                 and
                 phrase
                 .
              
               
                 4
                 Paraphrastically
                 ,
                 by
                 exposition
                 of
                 words
                 and
                 matter
                 more
                 at
                 large
                 ,
                 to
                 make
                 as
                 it
                 were
                 a
                 Paraphrase
                 of
                 it
                 .
                 And
                 to
                 do
                 this
                 last
                 in
                 good
                 Latine
                 ,
                 where
                 they
                 are
                 of
                 ability
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 Spoud
                 .
              
               
                 Sir
                 ,
                 you
                 haue
                 satisfied
                 me
                 at
                 large
                 for
                 all
                 this
                 matter
                 of
                 cōstruing
                 :
                 now
                 I
                 pray
                 you
                 let
                 vs
                 come
                 to
                 parsing
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 manner
                 of
                 it
                 ,
                 which
                 followeth
                 next
                 ;
                 that
                 I
                 may
                 haue
                 
                 your
                 helpe
                 therein
                 .
                 For
                 this
                 hath
                 beene
                 no
                 lesse
                 wearinesse
                 and
                 vexation
                 vnto
                 me
                 ,
                 then
                 the
                 construing
                 hath
                 beene
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 Phil.
                 
              
               
                 Before
                 we
                 come
                 to
                 parsing
                 ,
                 
                 let
                 me
                 also
                 tell
                 you
                 this
                 one
                 thing
                 :
                 
                 That
                 besides
                 my
                 Schollars
                 ordinary
                 Lectures
                 ,
                 and
                 repeating
                 daily
                 some
                 part
                 of
                 that
                 which
                 they
                 haue
                 learned
                 in
                 the
                 lower
                 fourmes
                 ;
                 I
                 finde
                 very
                 great
                 good
                 in
                 causing
                 them
                 euery
                 day
                 in
                 each
                 fourme
                 to
                 construe
                 a
                 peece
                 of
                 their
                 Authours
                 where
                 they
                 haue
                 not
                 learned
                 ;
                 and
                 that
                 
                   ex
                   tempore
                
                 ,
                 aside
                 ,
                 or
                 a
                 leafe
                 at
                 a
                 time
                 ,
                 as
                 leisure
                 will
                 permit
                 :
                 hearing
                 them
                 eyther
                 my selfe
                 ,
                 or
                 by
                 some
                 other
                 very
                 sufficient
                 ,
                 how
                 they
                 can
                 doe
                 it
                 ;
                 and
                 posing
                 onely
                 some
                 hard
                 things
                 as
                 they
                 goe
                 forward
                 :
                 noting
                 also
                 the
                 harder
                 wordes
                 and
                 more
                 difficult
                 places
                 ,
                 as
                 was
                 shewed
                 .
                 Also
                 in
                 those
                 bookes
                 ,
                 where
                 of
                 they
                 haue
                 Translations
                 ,
                 I
                 cause
                 them
                 by
                 course
                 sometimes
                 to
                 construe
                 or
                 reade
                 the
                 same
                 ,
                 out
                 of
                 the
                 Translations
                 :
                 as
                 at
                 other
                 times
                 to
                 reade
                 out
                 of
                 the
                 Authour
                 into
                 English
                 ;
                 according
                 to
                 the
                 maner
                 of
                 the
                 Translation
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 Spoud
                 .
              
               
                 This
                 must
                 needes
                 bee
                 exceeding
                 profitable
                 :
                 I
                 likewise
                 will
                 put
                 it
                 in
                 practice
                 forthwith
                 ,
                 if
                 God
                 will
                 ;
                 and
                 do
                 heartily
                 thanke
                 you
                 for
                 imparting
                 it
                 vnto
                 me
                 .
                 But
                 now
                 if
                 you
                 haue
                 done
                 ,
                 to
                 the
                 matter
                 of
                 parsing
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 Phil.
                 
              
               
                 Let
                 me
                 heare
                 of
                 you
                 ,
                 what
                 course
                 you
                 haue
                 vsed
                 therein
                 ,
                 and
                 I
                 will
                 supply
                 whatsoeuer
                 I
                 can
                 .
              
            
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             IX
             .
          
           
             Of
             Parsing
             ,
             and
             the
             kindes
             thereof
             ;
             and
             how
             children
             may
             parse
             of
             themselues
             readily
             and
             surely
             .
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               FOr
               parsing
               ,
               I
               haue
               followed
               the
               common
               course
               ;
               which
               is
               this
               ,
               
               so
               farre
               as
               I
               haue
               seene
               or
               heard
               :
               viz.
               To
               parse
               ouer
               ,
               all
               my
               yongest
               ,
               euery
               word
               ;
               and
               euen
               in
               the
               same
               order
               as
               the
               words
               doe
               stand
               in
               their
               Authours
               :
               
               teaching
               them
               what
               part
               of
               speech
               euery
               word
               is
               ,
               how
               to
               decline
               them
               ;
               and
               so
               all
               the
               questions
               belonging
               thereunto
               :
               and
               what
               each
               word
               is
               gouerned
               of
               ;
               the
               rules
               for
               euerything
               ,
               and
               the
               like
               .
            
             
               Herein
               ,
               
               after
               long
               and
               much
               labour
               ,
               I
               haue
               found
               very
               little
               fruite
               ,
               through
               the
               hardnesse
               of
               it
               ,
               and
               the
               weakenesse
               of
               the
               childrens
               memories
               to
               carie
               away
               that
               which
               I
               tolde
               them
               :
               much
               lesse
               haue
               I
               beene
               able
               to
               make
               my
               litle
               ones
               ,
               no
               not
               in
               the
               second
               or
               third
               fourmes
               ,
               so
               to
               parse
               of
               themselues
               ,
               as
               to
               giue
               a
               true
               reason
               of
               euery
               word
               why
               it
               must
               be
               so
               ;
               according
               to
               that
               which
               I
               saw
               in
               the
               note
               ,
               what
               might
               be
               done
               in
               parsing
               .
               Now
               if
               you
               haue
               seen
               the
               practice
               therof
               ,
               let
               me
               heare
               it
               of
               you
               ,
               I
               intreate
               you
               ;
               and
               that
               in
               so
               few
               wordes
               as
               you
               can
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               Yes
               indeed
               ,
               I
               haue
               seene
               the
               practice
               hereof
               &
               do
               know
               it
               ,
               that
               children
               will
               doe
               very
               much
               ,
               to
               ease
               &
               delight
               both
               the
               Master
               and
               themselues
               exceedingly
               .
               Besides
               some
               of
               the
               best
               of
               those
               which
               you
               mention
               (
               as
               the
               shewing
               the
               youngest
               how
               to
               parse
               euery
               word
               )
               I
               haue
               learned
               to
               obserue
               these
               things
               following
               ,
               
               and
               finde
               maruellous
               light
               ,
               easinesse
               ,
               surenesse
               and
               helpe
               of
               memory
               by
               them
               :
            
             
               1
               To
               cause
               the
               children
               euer
               to
               parse
               as
               they
               construe
               ,
               
               according
               to
               the
               Grammaticall
               rule
               of
               construing
               and
               the
               Translations
               ;
               alwayes
               marking
               the
               last
               principall
               word
               which
               went
               before
               in
               construing
               :
               wherein
               (
               as
               I
               shortly
               shewed
               you
               before
               )
               the
               very
               childe
               may
               see
               euery
               principall
               word
               going
               before
               ,
               gouerning
               or
               ordering
               that
               which
               followeth
               ;
               and
               so
               he
               hath
               therein
               a
               guide
               leading
               him
               by
               the
               hand
               for
               all
               the
               Syntax
               at
               least
               :
               except
               in
               the
               exceptions
               mentioned
               in
               the
               Grammaticall
               rule
               ;
               as
               of
               Interrogatiues
               ,
               Relatiues
               ,
               &c.
               which
               they
               will
               soone
               know
               :
               and
               where
               one
               word
               gouernes
               diuers
               things
               ;
               as
               in
               that
               example
               .
               Dedit
               mihi
               vestem
               pignori
               ,
               tepresente
               ,
               propria
               manu
               .
               where
               the
               word
               Dedit
               gouernes
               most
               of
               the
               rest
               in
               a
               diuers
               consideration
               .
               
            
             
               2
               To
               aske
               among
               them
               euery
               word
               of
               any
               hardnesse
               ,
               whether
               they
               haue
               not
               learned
               it
               before
               :
               &
               if
               they
               haue
               ,
               to
               
               repeat
               where
               .
               As
               it
               was
               before
               ,
               so
               it
               is
               there
               for
               the
               most
               part
               .
            
             
               3
               For
               the
               Etymologie
               ;
               
               al
               the
               difficulty
               is
               in
               these
               three
               parts
               of
               speech
               ,
               Nounes
               ,
               Verbs
               ,
               and
               Participles
               ;
               the
               rest
               being
               set
               downe
               in
               the
               Accedence
               ,
               or
               easily
               known
               ,
               as
               was
               shewed
               before
               .
               And
               in
               all
               words
               of
               these
               three
               parts
               ,
               do
               but
               tell
               them
               what
               examples
               they
               are
               like
               in
               the
               Accedence
               :
               which
               examples
               being
               knowne
               ,
               will
               presently
               bring
               to
               their
               vnderstanding
               all
               the
               questions
               depending
               on
               them
               and
               their
               answers
               .
               As
               ,
               of
               what
               part
               of
               speech
               the
               words
               are
               ;
               of
               what
               declension
               or
               Coniugation
               :
               so
               the
               declining
               ,
               Case
               ,
               Gender
               ,
               Number
               ,
               Person
               ,
               Mood
               ,
               Tense
               ,
               &c.
               
               Also
               with
               a
               litle
               practice
               they
               wil
               soon
               ghesse
               at
               them
               ,
               themselues
               ;
               &
               that
               very
               right
               ,
               to
               shew
               what
               examples
               they
               are
               like
               ,
               eyther
               by
               the
               English
               ,
               or
               Latine
               ,
               or
               both
               .
               The
               same
               would
               be
               also
               for
               the
               Syntax
               ,
               both
               in
               agreements
               and
               gouernements
               ,
               
               euer
               to
               shew
               what
               examples
               they
               are
               like
               .
               The
               example
               makes
               the
               rule
               most
               plaine
               ,
               and
               imprints
               all
               in
               the
               childes
               memory
               .
            
             
               To
               make
               this
               plaine
               to
               the
               capacity
               of
               the
               simplest
               ,
               I
               will
               adde
               one
               only
               example
               ,
               particularly
               examined
               out
               of
               the
               two
               first
               verses
               of
               
                 Qui
                 mihi
                 discipulus
                 puer
                 es
                 ,
                 &c.
                 
              
            
             
               First
               ,
               
               be
               sure
               that
               the
               childe
               know
               the
               meaning
               of
               them
               ,
               and
               can
               construe
               them
               perfectly
               ,
               as
               thus
               :
            
             
               Puer
               Oh
               childe
               ,
               qui
               who
               ,
               es
               art
               ,
               discipulus
               a
               Schollar
               ,
               mihi
               to
               me
               ,
               atque
               and
               ,
               cupis
               dost
               couet
               (
               or
               desire
               )
               doceri
               to
               bee
               taught
               ;
               ades
               come
               ,
               huc
               hither
               :
               concipe
               conceiue
               (
               or
               consider
               well
               )
               
                 dicta
                 haec
              
               these
               sayings
               ,
               
                 animo
                 tuo
              
               in
               thy
               minde
               .
            
             
               In
               this
               sentence
               ,
               
               parse
               the
               childe
               after
               the
               same
               manner
               ;
               and
               examine
               him
               accordingly
               .
               As
               aske
               ,
               where
               he
               must
               begin
               to
               parse
               ;
               
               he
               answere
               that
               Puer
               ,
               Oh
               boy
               ,
               because
               he
               began
               to
               construe
               there
               .
               And
               if
               you
               ask
               why
               he
               began
               to
               construe
               there
               ;
               he
               answers
               by
               the
               rule
               of
               construing
               ,
               which
               biddeth
               ,
               If
               there
               be
               a
               Vocatiue
               case
               to
               begin
               commonly
               at
               it
               .
               Then
               aske
               what
               Puer
               is
               like
               ;
               he
               answereth
               ,
               like
               Magister
               :
               which
               being
               knowne
               of
               him
               &
               he
               perfect
               in
               his
               examples
               can
               tel
               you
               by
               Magister
               ,
               
               what
               declension
               it
               is
               ,
               how
               to
               decline
               it
               ,
               and
               the
               number
               ;
               and
               also
               by
               the
               increasing
               of
               it
               short
               in
               the
               Genitiue
               case
               ,
               he
               can
               tell
               you
               ,
               it
               is
               the
               Masculine
               Gender
               by
               the
               third
               speciall
               rule
               .
            
             
             
               For
               the
               case
               ;
               that
               it
               is
               the
               Vocatiue
               ,
               knowne
               by
               calling
               ,
               or
               speaking
               to
               the
               childe
               .
               And
               if
               you
               aske
               ,
               why
               it
               may
               not
               be
               pueri
               not
               puero
               ,
               but
               puer
               ;
               he
               answereth
               ,
               because
               it
               is
               the
               Vocatiue
               case
               ,
               which
               is
               like
               the
               Nominatiue
               .
            
             
               Afterwards
               ,
               
               demaunding
               what
               must
               be
               parsed
               next
               ;
               hee
               answereth
               qui
               ;
               because
               qui
               is
               next
               in
               construing
               :
               and
               also
               that
               qui
               is
               a
               Pronoune
               Relatiue
               ,
               set
               down
               in
               the
               Accedence
               ,
               and
               there
               declined
               .
               Also
               that
               it
               is
               the
               Nominatiue
               case
               ,
               comming
               before
               the
               Verbe
               es
               ,
               following
               it
               next
               ,
               by
               the
               rule
               of
               the
               Relatiue
               ;
               When
               there
               commeth
               no
               Nominatiue
               case
               :
               as
               ,
               
                 Miser
                 est
              
               qui
               
                 nummos
                 admiratur
              
               ,
               qui
               admiratur
               So
               qui
               es
               .
               For
               the
               Gender
               likewise
               ;
               that
               it
               is
               the
               Masculine
               Gender
               ,
               because
               so
               is
               his
               Antecedent
               puer
               going
               next
               before
               in
               construing
               :
               with
               which
               the
               Relatiue
               agreeth
               ,
               by
               the
               rule
               of
               the
               Relatiue
               :
               The
               Relatiue
               agreeth
               ,
               &c.
               as
               
                 vir
                 sapit
                 qui
                 pauca
                 loquitur
              
               :
               vir
               qui.
               So
               puer
               qui.
               Also
               hee
               can
               shew
               it
               ,
               to
               bee
               the
               Masculine
               Gender
               ,
               because
               in
               wordes
               of
               three
               terminations
               ,
               the
               first
               is
               the
               Masculine
               ,
               the
               second
               the
               Feminine
               ,
               the
               third
               is
               the
               Neuter
               .
               Likewise
               he
               can
               tell
               why
               it
               must
               be
               qui
               ,
               not
               cuius
               ,
               nor
               cui
               ,
               nor
               any
               other
               ;
               because
               it
               must
               be
               the
               Nominatiue
               case
               to
               the
               Verbe
               ,
               by
               the
               rule
               of
               the
               Relatiue
               ;
               because
               no
               other
               Nominatiue
               case
               commeth
               betweene
               them
               .
               So
               all
               other
               questions
               .
               For
               Person
               ;
               it
               is
               made
               the
               second
               person
               here
               ,
               by
               a
               figure
               called
               Euocation
               ,
               because
               it
               agreeth
               with
               puer
               ,
               which
               is
               made
               of
               the
               second
               person
               ;
               and
               by
               the
               same
               figure
               Euocation
               ,
               as
               euery
               Vocatiue
               case
               is
               ,
               by
               reason
               of
               Tu
               vnderstood
               .
            
             
               Then
               followeth
               es
               ,
               
               art
               :
               of
               which
               word
               the
               childe
               can
               giue
               you
               all
               the
               Questions
               ;
               because
               hee
               hath
               learned
               it
               in
               his
               Accedence
               ,
               and
               is
               perfect
               in
               it
               .
               If
               you
               aske
               why
               it
               must
               be
               es
               ,
               and
               not
               est
               ,
               nor
               any
               other
               word
               ;
               he
               answereth
               ,
               because
               it
               is
               Thou
               art
               ,
               not
               He
               is
               ,
               nor
               I
               am
               :
               and
               also
               because
               in
               that
               place
               qui
               his
               Nominatiue
               case
               is
               of
               the
               second
               person
               ,
               as
               was
               said
               .
               
               If
               you
               then
               aske
               what
               is
               parsed
               next
               ;
               he
               answereth
               discipulus
               ,
               because
               hee
               construed
               so
               :
               and
               discipulus
               is
               like
               Magister
               .
               Which
               being
               knowne
               ,
               the
               childe
               can
               tell
               the
               questions
               of
               declining
               ,
               Gender
               ,
               Case
               ,
               Number
               ,
               and
               the
               rest
               
               appertayning
               thereto
               .
               If
               you
               demaund
               further
               ,
               why
               it
               must
               be
               Discipulus
               and
               not
               Discipulum
               ;
               why
               it
               must
               be
               a
               Nominatiue
               case
               after
               the
               Verbe
               ,
               and
               not
               an
               Accusatiue
               according
               to
               the
               rules
               ,
               The
               Accusatiue
               followeth
               the
               Verbe
               ;
               and
               also
               that
               rule
               ,
               Verbes
               Transitiues
               are
               all
               such
               ,
               &c.
               
               He
               answereth
               ,
               because
               this
               Verbe
               
                 Sum
                 es
              
               ,
               is
               a
               Verbe
               Substantiue
               intransitiue
               ,
               not
               a
               transitiue
               ;
               and
               therefore
               will
               haue
               such
               case
               after
               it
               as
               it
               hath
               before
               it
               :
               as
               
                 Fama
                 est
                 malum
              
               ,
               est
               malum
               .
               And
               that
               other
               rule
               for
               the
               Accusatiue
               after
               the
               Verbe
               ,
               is
               of
               Transitiues
               ,
               whose
               action
               passeth
               into
               another
               thing
               .
               So
               to
               proceede
               throughout
               for
               shortnesse
               ,
               thus
               :
            
             
               Mihi
               ]
               is
               parsed
               next
               ,
               because
               it
               it
               next
               in
               construing
               .
               
               It
               is
               a
               Pronoune
               set
               downe
               in
               the
               booke
               .
               All
               the
               questions
               are
               plaine
               in
               it
               ,
               except
               why
               it
               must
               bee
               the
               Datiue
               case
               :
               which
               is
               ,
               because
               it
               is
               gouerned
               of
               es
               ,
               the
               principall
               gouernour
               going
               before
               ,
               by
               the
               rule
               of
               the
               Datiue
               case
               after
               sum
               ,
               Also
               sum
               with
               his
               compounds
               ,
               except
               
                 possum
                 ,
                 &c.
              
               and
               ,
               for
               that
               ,
               one
               word
               may
               gouerne
               diuers
               cases
               ;
               or
               it
               may
               be
               gouerned
               of
               Discipulus
               the
               Substantiue
               ,
               by
               the
               rule
               of
               the
               later
               of
               two
               Substantiues
               ,
               turned
               into
               a
               Datiue
               :
               wherein
               the
               English
               rules
               are
               defectiue
               .
               The
               rule
               in
               Latine
               ,
               is
               
                 Est
                 etiam
                 vbi
                 in
                 Datiuum
                 ,
                 vertitur
                 ,
                 &c.
                 
              
            
             
               Atque
               ]
               is
               next
               in
               construing
               ;
               
               and
               therefore
               in
               parsing
               .
               It
               is
               a
               Coniunction
               Copulatiue
               ,
               set
               downe
               in
               the
               booke
               .
               It
               is
               also
               a
               Compound
               Coniunction
               ;
               compounded
               of
               at
               and
               que
               .
               It
               is
               put
               here
               to
               couple
               these
               members
               of
               the
               sentence
               together
               ,
               viz.
               
                 Cupis
                 doceri
              
               ,
               with
               that
               going
               before
               .
            
             
               Cupis
               ]
               is
               next
               :
               
               It
               is
               like
               Legis
               ,
               Thou
               readest
               .
               Which
               being
               knowne
               ,
               the
               childe
               can
               tell
               you
               what
               Coniugation
               ,
               Moode
               ,
               Tense
               ,
               Number
               ,
               Person
               ,
               the
               word
               Cupis
               is
               ;
               and
               why
               it
               must
               be
               so
               ,
               and
               not
               cupiunt
               ,
               nor
               any
               other
               worde
               ;
               because
               atque
               couples
               like
               Moodes
               and
               Tenses
               :
               and
               it
               is
               ,
               Thou
               couetest
               .
               Other
               questions
               which
               fall
               out
               in
               declining
               ,
               the
               childe
               can
               tell
               ;
               as
               ,
               why
               it
               is
               Cupiui
               ,
               by
               the
               exception
               of
               the
               rule
               
                 Fit
                 pio
                 ,
                 pi
              
               .
               And
               why
               Cupitum
               ,
               by
               the
               
               rule
               of
               the
               ending
               of
               the
               Preterperfect
               tense
               in
               
                 vi
                 .
                 Vi●it
                 tum
              
               .
            
             
               Doceri
               ]
               is
               parsed
               next
               ,
               
               because
               it
               is
               construed
               next
               :
               it
               is
               in
               my
               booke
               ,
               saith
               the
               childe
               ,
               and
               it
               signifieth
               to
               be
               taught
               .
               Thus
               hee
               can
               answere
               all
               the
               questions
               ,
               why
               it
               must
               bee
               doceri
               ,
               not
               docere
               :
               also
               why
               it
               must
               come
               next
               ;
               because
               an
               Infinitiue
               moode
               doeth
               commonly
               follow
               another
               moode
               .
            
             
               Ades
               ]
               is
               next
               in
               order
               ,
               
               and
               is
               in
               all
               things
               like
               es
               in
               sum
               ,
               compounded
               of
               ad
               and
               sum
               :
               and
               it
               must
               be
               so
               ,
               because
               it
               is
               Come
               thou
               ,
               not
               adest
               not
               adsunt
               .
            
             
               Huc
               ]
               is
               next
               in
               construing
               ,
               
               because
               Aduerbes
               are
               vsually
               ioyned
               to
               the
               Verbs
               ,
               to
               declare
               their
               signification
               .
               It
               is
               an
               Aduerbe
               of
               place
               signifying
               hither
               ,
               or
               to
               this
               place
               .
            
             
               Concipe
               ]
               is
               like
               Lege
               ,
               
               Reade
               thou
               .
               This
               being
               knowne
               ,
               the
               part
               of
               Speech
               ,
               Moode
               ,
               Tense
               ,
               Number
               ,
               Person
               ,
               and
               most
               questions
               of
               it
               are
               knowne
               ;
               except
               two
               or
               three
               of
               the
               compounding
               it
               with
               a
               Preposition
               ,
               and
               of
               changing
               of
               the
               letters
               a
               ,
               into
               i.
               Which
               are
               to
               be
               learned
               after
               by
               the
               rule
               in
               their
               booke
               .
            
             
               Dicta
               ]
               is
               next
               ,
               
               because
               the
               Substantiue
               ,
               which
               is
               more
               principall
               ,
               and
               to
               which
               the
               Adiectiue
               agreeth
               ,
               must
               goe
               before
               the
               Adiectiue
               in
               parsing
               ;
               though
               in
               our
               English
               ,
               Adiectiues
               goe
               before
               .
               It
               is
               like
               Regna
               .
               The
               Accusatiue
               case
               ,
               Neuter
               Gender
               ,
               Plurall
               Number
               ,
               following
               the
               Verbe
               Concipe
               ,
               by
               Verbes
               Transitiues
               .
               And
               the
               Neuter
               Gender
               by
               my
               rule
               of
               all
               wordes
               like
               
                 Regnum
                 .
                 Omne
                 quod
                 exit
                 in
                 um
                 .
              
               And
               
                 Neutrum
                 nomen
              
               in
               e.
               It
               must
               also
               end
               in
               a
               ,
               in
               the
               Accusatiue
               case
               Plurall
               number
               ,
               because
               all
               Neuters
               do
               end
               so
               in
               three
               like
               cases
               .
               It
               is
               deriued
               of
               the
               Supine
               dictu
               ,
               by
               putting
               to
               m.
               
            
             
               Haec
               ]
               is
               a
               Pronoune
               demonstratiue
               ,
               
               agreeing
               with
               dicta
               ,
               by
               the
               rule
               of
               the
               Relatiue
               :
               and
               it
               must
               bee
               so
               by
               that
               rule
               .
            
             
               Animo
               ]
               followeth
               next
               ,
               
               the
               Substantiue
               to
               be
               set
               before
               the
               Adiectiue
               ;
               it
               is
               like
               Magistro
               in
               all
               .
               The
               Ablatiue
               case
               ,
               because
               it
               signifieth
               in
               the
               minde
               ,
               and
               not
               into
               the
               minde
               :
               because
               ,
               in
               ,
               without
               this
               signe
               ,
               to
               ,
               serues
               to
               the
               Ablatiue
               case
               ,
               and
               is
               a
               signe
               thereof
               .
               It
               is
               also
               by
               the
               rule
               ,
               Sometime
               
               this
               Preposition
               In
               ,
               is
               not
               expressed
               but
               vnderstanded
               .
            
             
               Tuo
               ]
               A
               Pronoune
               possessiue
               ,
               
               like
               bono
               or
               meo
               ,
               but
               that
               it
               wants
               the
               Vocatiue
               case
               .
               It
               is
               set
               downe
               in
               my
               booke
               ,
               and
               doth
               agree
               in
               al
               things
               with
               animo
               ;
               by
               the
               rule
               of
               ,
               The
               Adiectiue
               ,
               whether
               it
               be
               Noune
               ,
               Pronoune
               or
               Participle
               ,
               agreeth
               with
               his
               Subst
               .
               &c.
               And
               so
               on
               for
               the
               rest
               .
            
             
               In
               this
               first
               kinde
               of
               parsing
               ,
               
               you
               may
               at
               the
               first
               entrance
               ,
               aske
               them
               the
               English
               of
               each
               word
               ,
               and
               cause
               them
               to
               giue
               you
               the
               Latine
               ,
               and
               so
               to
               parse
               ,
               looking
               on
               their
               Latine
               bookes
               ,
               to
               incourage
               them
               ;
               iust
               in
               the
               manner
               as
               is
               set
               downe
               .
            
             
               After
               a
               little
               time
               cause
               them
               to
               doe
               it
               ,
               looking
               onely
               vpon
               the
               English
               Translation
               .
            
             
               Then
               (
               which
               is
               the
               principall
               ,
               
               and
               wherein
               you
               will
               take
               much
               delight
               )
               cause
               them
               amongst
               themselues
               to
               construe
               and
               parse
               out
               of
               the
               translation
               vntill
               they
               can
               say
               ,
               or
               out
               of
               their
               Authours
               ,
               whether
               they
               can
               sooner
               :
               but
               when
               they
               come
               to
               say
               ,
               cause
               them
               to
               say
               each
               sentence
               ,
               first
               in
               English
               ,
               then
               to
               construe
               and
               parse
               them
               ;
               and
               all
               with
               their
               bookes
               vnder
               their
               armes
               :
               what
               they
               cannot
               repeat
               so
               ,
               they
               will
               doe
               it
               if
               you
               aske
               them
               questions
               of
               it
               .
               You
               shall
               finde
               by
               experience
               ,
               that
               with
               a
               little
               practice
               ,
               all
               who
               are
               apt
               will
               do
               this
               as
               soone
               ,
               readily
               ,
               &
               perfectly
               ,
               as
               looking
               vpon
               their
               books
               (
               if
               so
               that
               they
               but
               vnderstand
               the
               matter
               wel
               before
               )
               and
               so
               they
               will
               make
               all
               their
               owne
               most
               surely
               .
               Thus
               I
               would
               haue
               them
               to
               do
               in
               
                 Sententiae
                 ,
                 Confabulatiunculae
              
               and
               Cato
               if
               you
               will.
               After
               in
               the
               middle
               fourmes
               ,
               as
               in
               E●ops
               Fables
               ,
               
                 Ouid
                 de
                 Tristibus
              
               ,
               or
               
                 Ouids
                 Metamorphosis
                 ,
                 &c
              
               (
               because
               eyther
               the
               matter
               is
               not
               so
               familiar
               and
               easie
               to
               remember
               ,
               or
               the
               Lecture
               longer
               )
               I
               would
               haue
               them
               to
               parse
               thus
               ,
               looking
               vpon
               their
               translation
               ;
               but
               then
               to
               parse
               wholly
               in
               Latine
               :
               and
               I
               can
               assure
               you
               by
               some
               good
               experience
               ,
               that
               through
               Gods
               blessing
               ▪
               you
               will
               admire
               their
               profiting
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               Surely
               Sir
               ▪
               this
               way
               of
               parsing
               is
               most
               direct
               and
               plaine
               ;
               and
               the
               benefits
               must
               needes
               bee
               exceeding
               great
               :
               but
               giue
               me
               leaue
               yet
               to
               aske
               one
               thing
               of
               you
               ,
               concerning
               this
               parsing
               amongst
               the
               younger
               .
               I
               haue
               heard
               of
               some
               ,
               
               who
               would
               teach
               their
               enterers
               to
               know
               by
               the
               very
               words
               ,
               
               what
               part
               of
               Speech
               each
               word
               is
               .
               How
               may
               that
               be
               done
               ?
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               This
               may
               very
               well
               be
               done
               ,
               euen
               according
               to
               this
               ensample
               aboue
               ,
               when
               euery
               thing
               is
               examined
               at
               large
               .
               As
               for
               example
               ,
               Cause
               your
               Schollar
               to
               doe
               this
               :
            
             
               1
               To
               marke
               out
               all
               those
               wordes
               ,
               which
               they
               haue
               learned
               ,
               being
               set
               downe
               in
               their
               Accedences
               ;
               as
               Pronounes
               ,
               Aduerbes
               ,
               Coniunctions
               ,
               Interiections
               :
               that
               they
               knowe
               all
               those
               .
               Then
               haue
               they
               nothing
               to
               trouble
               them
               with
               ;
               but
               they
               may
               know
               that
               all
               the
               rest
               are
               eyther
               Nounes
               ,
               Verbes
               or
               Participles
               ,
               or
               else
               Gerunds
               or
               Supines
               belonging
               to
               the
               Verbes
               ,
               or
               some
               other
               Aduerbs
               .
            
             
               2
               For
               those
               partes
               of
               Speech
               ,
               when
               your
               Schollar
               can
               construe
               perfectly
               ,
               they
               may
               bee
               knowne
               by
               their
               Latine
               and
               English
               together
               ,
               whether
               they
               be
               Nounes
               ,
               Verbs
               ,
               Participles
               ,
               or
               such
               Aduerbes
               ;
               chiefly
               ,
               when
               they
               are
               very
               cunning
               in
               their
               parts
               of
               Speech
               in
               their
               Accedence
               ,
               and
               questions
               thereof
               .
            
             
               1
               The
               Noune
               Substantiues
               ,
               that
               they
               are
               names
               of
               things
               ,
               to
               which
               you
               may
               put
               to
               a
               ,
               
               or
               the
               ,
               as
               was
               said
               ;
               as
               A
               boy
               ,
               A
               Schollar
               :
               but
               cannot
               put
               to
               the
               word
               Thing
               ,
               in
               any
               good
               sense
               .
               And
               morefully
               ,
               when
               the
               Latine
               is
               put
               to
               the
               English
               ;
               as
               puer
               A
               boy
               ,
               like
               
                 Magister
                 :
                 discipulus
              
               a
               schollar
               ,
               like
               Magister
               .
            
             
               The
               Noune
               Adiectiues
               contrarily
               ,
               
               though
               they
               signifie
               a
               thing
               ;
               yet
               they
               cannot
               stand
               by
               themselues
               in
               sense
               ,
               vnlesse
               you
               put
               to
               (
               Thing
               )
               or
               some
               other
               word
               expresly
               or
               vnderstood
               ;
               nor
               you
               cannot
               in
               proper
               speech
               put
               to
               a
               ,
               or
               the.
               As
               we
               cannot
               say
               properly
               ,
               A
               good
               ,
               An
               euill
               :
               but
               wee
               may
               say
               A
               good
               man
               ,
               A
               good
               house
               ,
               An
               euill
               thing
               .
               And
               when
               they
               are
               put
               Substantiuely
               ,
               yet
               Thing
               is
               properly
               vnderstood
               :
               as
               bonum
               a
               good
               thing
               ,
               
                 summum
                 bonum
              
               the
               chiefest
               good
               thing
               ;
               though
               wee
               call
               it
               the
               chiefest
               good
               .
            
             
               These
               Adiectiues
               also
               may
               be
               more
               fully
               vnderstood
               ,
               
               by
               the
               Latin
               words
               :
               as
               if
               they
               end
               in
               us
               or
               er
               ,
               they
               are
               like
               bonus
               ;
               except
               those
               expressed
               like
               Nounes
               ,
               and
               some
               few
               strange
               Adiectiues
               ,
               which
               are
               partly
               Substantiues
               partly
               Adiectiues
               
               set
               downe
               in
               the
               Rule
               ,
               
                 At
                 sunt
                 quae
                 flexu
                 &c.
              
               as
               
                 Pauper
                 ,
                 puber
                 ,
                 &c.
              
               
               And
               in
               the
               Rule
               ,
               
                 Haec
                 proprium
                 ,
                 &c.
              
               as
               
                 Campester
                 ,
                 &c.
              
               
            
             
               Adiectiues
               ending
               in
               ans
               or
               ens
               (
               though
               they
               be
               Participles
               )
               and
               also
               in
               x
               ,
               
               and
               rs
               ,
               as
               concors
               ,
               are
               declined
               like
               foelix
               ;
               and
               some
               in
               or
               ,
               as
               memor
               .
            
             
               Adiectiues
               in
               is
               ,
               
               ior
               ,
               [
               or
               jor
               ]
               and
               ius
               signifying
               the
               Comparatiue
               degree
               ,
               that
               is
               to
               say
               ,
               more
               ,
               are
               like
               Tristis
               :
               as
               
                 Dulcis
                 ,
                 dulcior
                 ,
                 maior
                 ,
                 dulcius
                 .
              
            
             
               Finally
               ,
               if
               the
               childe
               but
               knowe
               his
               word
               to
               be
               like
               any
               of
               the
               examples
               of
               a
               Nown
               Substantiue
               ,
               as
               
                 Musa
                 ,
                 Magister
                 ,
                 Regnū
                 ,
                 Lapis
                 ,
                 Manus
                 ,
                 Meridies
                 ,
              
               he
               knoweth
               it
               to
               be
               a
               Nown
               Substantiue
               .
               If
               like
               
                 bonus
                 ,
                 vnus
                 ,
                 foelix
                 ,
                 tristis
                 ,
              
               a
               Nown
               Adiectiue
               .
            
             
               Verbes
               also
               may
               be
               knowen
               most
               plainly
               by
               the
               English
               and
               Latine
               together
               .
               
               As
               ,
               the
               words
               signifying
               ,
               doing
               ,
               suffering
               or
               being
               ,
               and
               like
               
                 Amo
                 ,
                 doceo
                 ,
                 lego
                 ,
                 audio
                 ,
              
               or
               
                 amor
                 ,
                 doceor
                 ,
                 legor
                 ,
                 audior
                 ,
              
               or
               any
               person
               comming
               of
               them
               in
               any
               Moode
               or
               Tense
               ,
               and
               signifying
               like
               to
               them
               ,
               are
               Verbs
               .
               So
               by
               the
               signes
               of
               the
               tenses
               ;
               do
               ,
               did
               or
               didst
               ,
               haue
               ,
               hast
               ,
               hath
               ,
               had
               or
               haddest
               ,
               shall
               or
               will.
               By
               the
               signes
               of
               the
               moods
               ;
               Or
               signes
               of
               the
               Passiue
               :
               as
               am
               ,
               are
               ,
               art
               ,
               was
               ,
               were
               ,
               wert
               ,
               be
               or
               beene
               :
               where
               any
               of
               these
               signes
               are
               ,
               are
               commonly
               Verbes
               .
            
             
               And
               finally
               ,
               this
               is
               generall
               for
               the
               Verbes
               ,
               as
               for
               the
               Nownes
               ;
               that
               if
               either
               the
               childe
               can
               tell
               of
               himself
               ,
               or
               you
               but
               shewe
               him
               what
               person
               in
               a
               Verbe
               it
               is
               like
               ,
               hee
               can
               tell
               presently
               that
               it
               is
               a
               Verbe
               ,
               and
               most
               questions
               belonging
               to
               it
               ▪
               As
               ,
               knowing
               that
               cupis
               thou
               couetest
               ,
               is
               like
               legis
               thou
               readest
               ,
               he
               knoweth
               presently
               ,
               that
               it
               is
               a
               Verb
               of
               the
               third
               Coniugation
               ,
               and
               the
               Mood
               ,
               Tense
               ,
               &c.
               
            
             
               The
               like
               may
               bee
               sayde
               for
               Gerunds
               of
               Verbes
               ,
               
               and
               Supines
               ,
               
               in
               all
               things
               ,
               as
               for
               the
               Verbe
               before
               .
            
             
               Participles
               
               also
               may
               bee
               plainely
               knowen
               by
               the
               verie
               same
               manner
               ;
               and
               chiefly
               by
               their
               endings
               in
               English
               and
               Latine
               both
               together
               .
               As
               ,
               the
               words
               that
               ende
               in
               [
               ing
               ]
               in
               English
               ,
               and
               in
               Latine
               in
               ans
               or
               ens
               ,
               are
               Participles
               
               of
               the
               Present
               tense
               .
               
               Words
               in
               
                 d
                 ,
                 t
              
               ,
               or
               n
               ,
               and
               their
               Latine
               in
               
                 tus
                 ,
                 sus
                 ,
                 xus
              
               ,
               are
               Participles
               of
               the
               Preter
               tense
               .
               So
               those
               words
               ending
               in
               rus
               in
               Latine
               ,
               and
               signifying
               to
               doe
               or
               about
               to
               doe
               ,
               
               of
               the
               Future
               in
               rus
               .
               And
               in
               dus
               ,
               signifying
               to
               be
               done
               like
               the
               Infinitiue
               moode
               Passiue
               ,
               
               are
               Participles
               of
               the
               Future
               in
               dus
               .
            
             
               Aduerbes
               (
               besides
               those
               in
               the
               booke
               ,
               
               or
               which
               should
               bee
               set
               downe
               in
               the
               English
               Aduerbe
               as
               they
               are
               in
               the
               Latine
               )
               are
               but
               either
               Aduerbes
               of
               Comparison
               or
               of
               Qualitie
               .
            
             
               Those
               of
               Comparison
               end
               in
               us
               ,
               
               and
               signifie
               more
               ;
               or
               in
               e
               ,
               and
               signifie
               most
               .
            
             
               Those
               of
               Qualitie
               end
               in
               è
               ,
               
               or
               in
               er
               commonly
               ;
               and
               all
               of
               these
               haue
               their
               English
               vsually
               ending
               in
               ly
               :
               as
               doctè
               learnedly
               ,
               doctiùs
               more
               learnedly
               ,
               doctissimè
               most
               learnedly
               .
            
             
               To
               conclude
               ,
               they
               are
               also
               marked
               commonly
               in
               all
               bookes
               which
               are
               well
               printed
               ,
               with
               graue
               accents
               ouer
               them
               ,
               to
               distinguish
               them
               from
               other
               parts
               of
               Speech
               ,
               and
               that
               they
               may
               be
               knowen
               to
               bee
               Aduerbes
               :
               as
               doctè
               learnedly
               ,
               to
               bee
               knowen
               from
               docte
               the
               Vocatiue
               case
               of
               the
               Adiectiue
               :
               so
               doctiùs
               .
               And
               thus
               are
               all
               Aduerbes
               of
               like
               nature
               ;
               as
               quàm
               then
               ,
               to
               be
               distinguished
               from
               quam
               which
               ,
               the
               Pronowne
               .
            
             
               And
               also
               sundry
               Prepositions
               are
               so
               marked
               :
               as
               
                 ponè
                 ,
                 propè
              
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               I
               approue
               and
               see
               the
               reason
               of
               all
               this
               ,
               that
               the
               parts
               of
               Speech
               may
               bee
               knowen
               or
               neerely
               ghessed
               at
               :
               and
               I
               doe
               still
               go
               on
               with
               you
               ,
               reioycing
               in
               this
               our
               conference
               .
            
             
               Notwithstanding
               ,
               there
               is
               one
               thing
               I
               haue
               heard
               ,
               that
               a
               child
               may
               not
               only
               be
               taught
               to
               know
               what
               part
               of
               Speech
               each
               word
               is
               ,
               but
               also
               of
               what
               Coniugation
               any
               Verbe
               is
               ,
               if
               hee
               heare
               but
               onely
               the
               first
               person
               of
               the
               Indicatiue
               Mood
               ;
               that
               is
               ,
               if
               he
               heare
               but
               onely
               the
               Verbe
               named
               .
               Now
               this
               seemeth
               to
               me
               vnpossible
               ;
               there
               being
               so
               many
               hundreth
               Verbes
               all
               ending
               in
               o
               ,
               and
               they
               so
               like
               one
               another
               ;
               
               and
               especially
               those
               of
               the
               first
               and
               third
               Coniugation
               ,
               so
               hard
               to
               bee
               distinguished
               ,
               
               that
               this
               may
               oft
               trouble
               a
               learned
               man
               ,
               and
               much
               more
               a
               young
               schollar
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               This
               which
               seemes
               to
               you
               so
               impossible
               ,
               may
               bee
               likewise
               easilie
               done
               by
               a
               childe
               ,
               by
               the
               helpe
               of
               this
               direction
               which
               I
               shall
               heere
               set
               downe
               before
               your
               face
               ,
               and
               by
               one
               obseruation
               or
               two
               arising
               there
               from
               .
            
          
           
             
               
                 
                   
                     A
                     direction
                     how
                     to
                     know
                     the
                     Coniugation
                     of
                     any
                     Simple
                     Verb
                     (
                     and
                     so
                     of
                     the
                     Compounds
                     which
                     may
                     be
                     knowne
                     by
                     the
                     Simples
                     )
                     although
                     the
                     learner
                     neuer
                     heard
                     the
                     Verbes
                     before
                     .
                  
                   
                     ALl
                     Verbes
                     in
                     ëo
                     ,
                     
                     as
                     doceo
                     ,
                     are
                     of
                     the
                     second
                     Coniugation
                     :
                     except
                     a
                     fewe
                     of
                     the
                     first
                     Coniugation
                     ;
                     and
                     
                       eo
                       ,
                       queo
                       ,
                       veneo
                    
                     ,
                     which
                     are
                     of
                     the
                     fourth
                     .
                  
                   
                     So
                     Deponents
                     also
                     in
                     ëor
                     are
                     of
                     the
                     second
                     :
                     as
                     
                       fateor
                       ,
                       tueor
                    
                     ,
                     
                     
                       mereor
                       ,
                       vereor
                       ,
                       misereor
                       ,
                       liceor
                       ,
                    
                     with
                     their
                     Compounds
                     .
                  
                   
                     And
                     onely
                     these
                     sixe
                     ,
                     so
                     farre
                     as
                     I
                     remember
                     .
                     So
                     also
                     Verbes
                     in
                     ëo
                     alone
                     .
                  
                   
                     All
                     Verbes
                     ending
                     in
                     ïo
                     as
                     audio
                     ,
                     
                     and
                     in
                     ïor
                     ,
                     as
                     audior
                     ,
                     and
                     they
                     onely
                     ,
                     are
                     of
                     the
                     fourth
                     Coniugation
                     ,
                     except
                     a
                     fewe
                     which
                     are
                     of
                     the
                     third
                     ,
                     and
                     some
                     of
                     the
                     first
                     noted
                     after
                     .
                  
                   
                     All
                     the
                     Verbes
                     of
                     the
                     third
                     Coniugation
                     are
                     set
                     downe
                     in
                     the
                     rules
                     of
                     the
                     Verbs
                     ,
                     
                     at
                     
                       Tertia
                       praeteritum
                       formabit
                       ,
                       &c.
                    
                     
                     Except
                     these
                     which
                     follow
                     in
                     this
                     Table
                     ,
                     which
                     are
                     also
                     of
                     the
                     third
                     .
                  
                   
                     
                     
                       üo
                       
                         
                           acuo
                           ,
                           arguo
                           ,
                           exuo
                           ,
                           imbuo
                           ,
                           induo
                           ,
                           minuo
                           ,
                           sternuo
                           ,
                           suo
                           ,
                           tribuo
                           ,
                           delibuo
                           ,
                           indè
                           delibutus
                           .
                        
                      
                    
                  
                   
                     
                       bo
                       
                         
                           glubo
                           .
                        
                      
                    
                  
                   
                     
                       co
                       
                         
                           ico
                           .
                        
                      
                    
                  
                   
                     
                       do
                       
                         
                           cudo
                           ,
                           pando
                           ,
                           pindo
                           ,
                           idem
                           quod
                           pinso
                           ,
                           prehendo
                           ,
                           contractè
                           prendo
                           ,
                           accendo
                           ,
                           succendo
                           ,
                           incendo
                           ,
                           à
                           cando
                           obsoleto
                           ,
                           defendo
                           ,
                           offendo
                           ,
                           infendo
                           ,
                           à
                           fendo
                           obsoleto
                           .
                        
                      
                    
                  
                   
                     
                       go
                       
                         
                           cingo
                           ,
                           clango
                           ,
                           fligo
                           ,
                           frigo
                           ,
                           mergo
                           ,
                           mungo
                           ,
                           plango
                           ,
                           sugo
                           ,
                           tego
                           ,
                           tingo
                           ,
                           vngo
                           .
                        
                      
                    
                  
                   
                     
                       guo
                       
                         
                           distinguo
                           ,
                           extinguo
                           ,
                           restinguo
                           ,
                           instinguo
                           ,
                           à
                           stinguo
                           obsoleto
                           ,
                           indè
                           instinctus
                           ,
                           instinctor
                        
                      
                    
                  
                   
                     
                       lo
                       
                         
                           
                             consulo
                             ,
                             molo
                          
                           ,
                           to
                           grinde
                           :
                           but
                           
                             immolo
                             ,
                             as
                             :
                             promello
                          
                           ,
                           an
                           old
                           word
                           ,
                           signifying
                           to
                           stir
                           vp
                           strife
                           ,
                           or
                           to
                           make
                           delay
                           .
                        
                      
                    
                  
                   
                     
                       mo
                       
                         
                           fremo
                           ,
                           gemo
                           ,
                           tre●●o
                        
                      
                    
                  
                   
                     
                       〈◊〉
                       
                         
                           dispe●●●
                           ,
                           to
                           stretch
                           abroad
                           ▪
                           〈…〉
                        
                      
                    
                  
                   
                     
                       po
                       
                         
                           clepo
                           ,
                           repo
                           ,
                           serpo
                           ,
                           sculpo
                           .
                        
                      
                    
                  
                   
                     
                       pso
                       
                         
                           
                             clepso
                             ,
                             pro
                             clepo
                          
                           to
                           steale
                           or
                           take
                           awaie
                           .
                        
                         
                           depso
                           ,
                           to
                           kneade
                           .
                        
                      
                    
                  
                   
                     
                       to
                       
                         
                           beto
                           ,
                           quasi
                           bene
                           ito
                           ,
                           
                             to
                             goe
                          
                           .
                        
                         
                           Varro
                           .
                        
                      
                    
                  
                   
                     
                       sco
                       
                         
                           All
                           in
                           sco
                           ,
                           except
                           
                             conisco
                             ,
                             as
                          
                           ,
                           to
                           push
                           with
                           the
                           head
                           ,
                           as
                           Rams
                           do
                           .
                           lucret
                           .
                        
                      
                    
                  
                   
                     
                       These
                       old
                       words
                    
                     
                       clingo
                       .
                    
                     
                       cludo
                       .
                    
                     
                       lido
                       .
                    
                     
                       geno
                       .
                    
                     
                       pago
                       .
                    
                     
                       tago
                       .
                    
                     
                       spicio
                       .
                       
                         
                           for
                           
                             
                               cingo
                               .
                            
                             
                               claudo
                               .
                            
                             
                               laedo
                               .
                            
                             
                               gigno
                               .
                            
                             
                               pango
                               .
                            
                             
                               tango
                               .
                            
                             
                               specio
                               .
                            
                          
                        
                      
                    
                  
                   
                     These
                     following
                     are
                     of
                     the
                     first
                     and
                     third
                     coniugation
                     in
                     the
                     same
                     signification
                     .
                  
                   
                     
                       la●o
                       ,
                       sono
                       ,
                       tono
                       ,
                       piso
                    
                     to
                     stamp
                     out
                     the
                     huskes
                     of
                     corne
                     .
                  
                   
                     These
                     also
                     of
                     the
                     first
                     and
                     third
                     ,
                     in
                     a
                     diuerse
                     signification
                     .
                  
                   
                     
                       
                         appello
                         ,
                         as
                      
                       ,
                       to
                       call
                       .
                       
                         appello
                         ,
                         is
                         ,
                         appuli
                      
                       ,
                       to
                       bring
                       to
                       ,
                       to
                       approach
                       ,
                       to
                       arriue
                       ,
                       to
                       apply
                       .
                    
                     
                       
                         caluo
                         ,
                         as
                      
                       ,
                       to
                       make
                       balde
                       .
                    
                     
                       
                         caluo
                         ,
                         is
                      
                       ,
                       to
                       deceiue
                       .
                    
                     
                       
                         colo
                         ,
                         as
                      
                       ,
                       to
                       straine
                       .
                    
                     
                       
                         colo
                         ,
                         is
                      
                       ,
                       to
                       worship
                       .
                    
                     
                       
                         como
                         ,
                         as
                      
                       ,
                       to
                       trim
                       or
                       lay
                       out
                       .
                    
                     
                       
                         como
                         ,
                         is
                      
                       ,
                       to
                       kembe
                       .
                    
                     
                       
                         consterno
                         ,
                         as
                      
                       ,
                       to
                       trouble
                       in
                       mind
                       ,
                       
                         consterno
                         ,
                         is
                      
                       ,
                       to
                       strewe
                       or
                       scatter
                       .
                    
                     
                       
                         dico
                         ,
                         as
                      
                       ,
                       to
                       vow
                       ,
                       offer
                       ,
                       dedicate
                       .
                       
                         dico
                         ,
                         is
                      
                       ,
                       to
                       say
                       .
                    
                     
                       
                         duco
                         ,
                         as
                      
                       ,
                       as
                       
                         educo
                         ,
                         as
                      
                       ,
                       to
                       bring
                       vp
                       .
                       
                         duco
                         ,
                         is
                      
                       ,
                       to
                       leade
                       .
                    
                     
                       
                         euallo
                         ,
                         as
                      
                       ,
                       to
                       cast
                       out
                       of
                       the
                       dores
                       .
                       
                         euallo
                         ,
                         is
                      
                       ,
                       to
                       vanne
                       or
                       to
                       make
                       clean
                       corne
                       .
                    
                     
                       
                       
                         fundo
                         ,
                         as
                      
                       ,
                       to
                       found
                       ,
                       establish
                       ▪
                       
                         fundo
                         ,
                         is
                      
                       ,
                       to
                       poure
                       out
                       .
                    
                     
                       
                         iugo
                         ,
                         iugas
                      
                       ,
                       to
                       yoake
                       .
                    
                     
                       
                         iugo
                         ,
                         is
                      
                       ,
                       to
                       cry
                       like
                       a
                       Kite
                       .
                    
                     
                       
                         ●ego
                         ,
                         as
                      
                       ,
                       to
                       send
                       Embassador
                       ,
                       or
                       to
                       bequeath
                       .
                    
                     
                       
                         ●ego
                         ,
                         is
                      
                       ,
                       to
                       read
                       ,
                       to
                       gather
                       ,
                       steale
                       ,
                       or
                       to
                       strike
                       sayle
                       .
                    
                     
                       
                         mando
                         ,
                         as
                      
                       ,
                       to
                       command
                       ,
                       
                         mando
                         ,
                         is
                      
                       ,
                       to
                       eate
                       .
                    
                     
                       
                         nicto
                         ,
                         as
                      
                       ,
                       to
                       winke
                       often
                       .
                    
                     
                       
                         nicto
                         ,
                         is
                      
                       ,
                       to
                       open
                       as
                       a
                       hound
                       ,
                       or
                       quest
                       as
                       aspaniel
                       .
                    
                     
                       
                         pedo
                         ,
                         as
                      
                       ,
                       to
                       prop.
                       
                         pedo
                         ,
                         is
                      
                       ,
                       to
                       breake
                       winde
                       .
                    
                     
                       
                         sero
                         ,
                         as
                      
                       ,
                       to
                       locke
                       .
                       
                         sero
                         ,
                         is
                      
                       ,
                       to
                       lay
                       in
                       order
                       or
                       to
                       sowe
                       .
                    
                  
                   
                     These
                     are
                     of
                     the
                     second
                     and
                     third
                     ;
                     
                       
                         pendeo
                         ,
                         pendo
                         .
                      
                       
                         tergeo
                         ,
                         tergo
                         .
                      
                    
                  
                   
                     
                       These
                       old
                       words
                       ,
                    
                     
                       feruo
                       .
                    
                     
                       cauo
                       .
                    
                     
                       fulgo
                       .
                    
                     
                       olo
                       .
                    
                     
                       cluo
                       .
                    
                     
                       frenlo
                       .
                       
                         
                           for
                           
                             
                               ferueo
                               .
                            
                             
                               caueo
                               .
                            
                             
                               fulgeo
                               .
                            
                             
                               oleo
                               .
                            
                             
                               clueo
                               .
                            
                             
                               frendeo
                               .
                            
                             
                               excello
                               and
                               excelleo
                               .
                            
                          
                        
                      
                    
                  
                   
                     Of
                     the
                     first
                     Coniugation
                     ,
                     There
                     are
                     some
                     in
                     ●o
                     ,
                     as
                     ,
                     
                       beo
                       ,
                       meo
                       ,
                       screo
                    
                     .
                  
                   
                     And
                     al
                     other
                     verbs
                     in
                     ëo
                     deriued
                     from
                     Nowns
                     in
                     ëus
                     ,
                     &
                     ë●
                     ,
                     as
                     calceo
                     :
                     of
                     which
                     also
                     is
                     calcio
                     ,
                     of
                     
                       calceus
                       ;
                       nauseo
                    
                     ,
                     of
                     nausea
                     .
                  
                   
                     Some
                     also
                     in
                     ïo
                     ,
                     as
                     
                       frio
                       ,
                       h●o
                       ,
                       pio
                    
                     to
                     please
                     God
                     by
                     sacrifice
                     .
                  
                   
                     
                       Trauìo
                       .
                    
                     
                       gargaridio
                       
                         
                           olde
                           .
                        
                      
                    
                  
                   
                     And
                     al
                     other
                     verbs
                     in
                     ïo
                     and
                     ïor
                     ,
                     deriued
                     from
                     Nownes
                     in
                     
                       ï●s
                       ,
                       iae
                       ,
                       ium
                    
                     ,
                     and
                     ies
                     :
                     as
                     nuncio
                     ,
                     of
                     nuncius
                     .
                  
                   
                     
                       saucio
                       ,
                    
                     
                       à
                       scio
                       .
                    
                     
                       somnio
                       ,
                    
                     
                       calumnior
                       ,
                    
                     
                       auxilior
                       ,
                    
                     
                       glacio
                       à
                       glacies
                       .
                    
                     
                       satio
                       à
                       saties
                       .
                    
                     
                       meridior
                       .
                    
                  
                   
                     And
                     so
                     all
                     other
                     like
                     ;
                     except
                     these
                     which
                     are
                     of
                     the
                     fourth
                     Coniugation
                     ;
                     as
                     ,
                     ineptio
                     ,
                     
                       
                         insanio
                         ,
                      
                       
                         vesanio
                         ,
                      
                       
                         lasciuio
                         .
                      
                       
                         balbutio
                         ,
                      
                       
                         fastidio
                         .
                      
                       
                         munio
                         à
                         maeniae
                         .
                      
                    
                  
                   
                     Finally
                     all
                     other
                     Verbes
                     besides
                     these
                     ,
                     are
                     of
                     the
                     first
                     Coniugation
                     ;
                     and
                     are
                     infinitely
                     moe
                     then
                     of
                     all
                     the
                     other
                     three
                     Coniugations
                     iointly
                     .
                  
                
              
            
          
           
             
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               I
               see
               that
               to
               bee
               true
               ,
               which
               is
               said
               of
               a
               Parable
               ;
               that
               before
               it
               be
               expounded
               ,
               nothing
               seems
               more
               hard
               and
               obscure
               ;
               but
               when
               it
               is
               once
               made
               plaine
               ,
               nothing
               is
               more
               cleare
               :
               so
               is
               it
               in
               this
               ,
               and
               in
               the
               way
               of
               construing
               and
               parsing
               ,
               by
               the
               helpe
               of
               the
               rule
               ,
               and
               in
               diuers
               other
               things
               ,
               which
               you
               haue
               shewed
               vnto
               me
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               It
               is
               most
               certaine
               which
               you
               say
               .
               I
               my selfe
               haue
               so
               thought
               ,
               this
               matter
               of
               knowing
               what
               Coniugation
               anie
               Verb
               is
               of
               ,
               to
               be
               impossible
               :
               but
               you
               see
               what
               things
               ,
               paine
               and
               diligence
               may
               find
               out
               .
               
               As
               for
               this
               direction
               ,
               I
               acknowledge
               it
               wholly
               to
               that
               painfull
               M.
               Coot
               ;
               who
               writ
               the
               English
               Schoolemaster
               .
               And
               by
               this
               one
               ,
               it
               may
               euidently
               appeare
               ,
               what
               further
               benefit
               the
               Latine
               tongue
               might
               haue
               hoped
               for
               by
               his
               labors
               ,
               if
               God
               had
               vouchsafed
               him
               life
               to
               haue
               brought
               them
               to
               perfection
               ;
               or
               if
               others
               had
               bin
               carefull
               to
               haue
               afforded
               him
               that
               helpe
               that
               they
               might
               haue
               done
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               It
               is
               great
               pitty
               that
               he
               ,
               or
               any
               other
               ,
               should
               want
               any
               help
               or
               means
               ,
               in
               so
               profitable
               a
               work
               ;
               and
               a
               token
               of
               Gods
               displeasure
               ,
               that
               we
               should
               be
               depriued
               of
               such
               profitable
               labors
               .
               But
               ,
               to
               return
               again
               to
               this
               matter
               of
               parsing
               ;
               you
               haue
               very
               well
               satisfied
               mee
               concerning
               the
               younger
               sort
               &
               their
               parsing
               :
               yet
               there
               is
               one
               thing
               concerning
               this
               Grammaticall
               parsing
               amongst
               the
               younger
               ,
               which
               I
               must
               craue
               of
               you
               .
               
               That
               there
               is
               so
               much
               time
               spent
               in
               examining
               euery
               thing
               ;
               the
               Master
               asking
               each
               question
               particularly
               ,
               and
               the
               schollar
               answering
               :
               which
               besides
               the
               losse
               of
               time
               ,
               is
               a
               very
               great
               wearinesse
               to
               the
               Master
               .
               I
               pray
               you
               shewe
               mee
               the
               very
               shortest
               and
               speediest
               waie
               which
               you
               knowe
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               Some
               very
               learned
               would
               haue
               this
               parsing
               to
               be
               by
               pen
               ,
               
               and
               by
               characters
               for
               shortnesse
               :
               But
               howsoeuer
               this
               may
               be
               done
               among
               2.
               or
               3.
               schollars
               taught
               by
               themselues
               ;
               
               yet
               this
               seemeth
               to
               require
               farre
               more
               time
               (
               both
               for
               writing
               to
               set
               euery
               thing
               down
               ,
               and
               also
               for
               examining
               by
               the
               Master
               )
               then
               can
               bee
               performed
               in
               the
               common
               Schooles
               .
            
             
             
               But
               the
               shortest
               ,
               surest
               ,
               most
               pleasant
               &
               easie
               waie
               both
               to
               Master
               and
               Schollar
               ,
               I
               touched
               before
               ,
               if
               you
               marked
               it
               :
               and
               it
               is
               this
               .
               After
               that
               they
               haue
               been
               entred
               ,
               and
               trained
               vp
               some
               twelue-month
               in
               the
               lowest
               fourme
               by
               questions
               ,
               as
               the
               example
               was
               shewed
               out
               of
               
                 Qui
                 mihi
              
               ;
               then
               ,
               when
               they
               goe
               into
               the
               next
               fourme
               ,
               
               as
               into
               Cato
               ,
               to
               begin
               to
               parse
               euerie
               one
               of
               themselues
               ,
               as
               reading
               a
               lecture
               ,
               each
               his
               peece
               .
               I
               meane
               chiefly
               ,
               when
               they
               come
               to
               say
               their
               lectures
               .
            
             
               For
               example
               :
               
               To
               take
               those
               two
               first
               verses
               of
               
                 Qui
                 mihi
              
               ,
               because
               they
               are
               parsed
               before
               .
               
               First
               let
               them
               construe
               perfectly
               in
               the
               Grammaticall
               order
               ,
               as
               was
               sayd
               :
               then
               let
               each
               parse
               his
               word
               or
               two
               ,
               as
               they
               construed
               ,
               euer
               marking
               the
               last
               word
               ,
               and
               in
               all
               things
               iust
               in
               the
               same
               manner
               ,
               as
               is
               set
               downe
               before
               ;
               but
               only
               to
               doe
               it
               of
               themselues
               without
               any
               question
               asked
               ,
               for
               the
               sauing
               of
               time
               :
               Onely
               the
               Master
               ,
               or
               he
               who
               heareth
               them
               ,
               is
               to
               aske
               where
               they
               do
               omit
               any
               necessary
               question
               in
               any
               word
               ,
               or
               where
               they
               misse
               .
            
             
               As
               thus
               :
               
               The
               childe
               hauing
               construed
               ,
               beginnes
               of
               himselfe
               ,
            
             
               Puer
               oh
               child
               :
               It
               is
               to
               be
               parsed
               first
               because
               it
               is
               first
               in
               construing
               .
               Puer
               ,
               is
               like
               Magister
               .
               A
               Nowne
               Substantiue
               common
               of
               the
               second
               Declension
               ;
               and
               so
               he
               declines
               it
               ,
               so
               farre
               as
               the
               Master
               thinkes
               meete
               ,
               at
               least
               giuing
               the
               Genitiue
               case
               ;
               for
               if
               they
               be
               wel
               entred
               in
               the
               Accedence
               ,
               they
               will
               easily
               decline
               any
               regular
               word
               ,
               when
               they
               knowe
               the
               example
               .
               After
               he
               shews
               the
               rule
               when
               he
               hath
               declined
               any
               Nown
               or
               Verbe
               .
               As
               
                 Puer
                 pueri
              
               ,
               is
               a
               graue
               increaser
               ;
               and
               therfore
               of
               the
               Masculine
               Gender
               .
               
                 Nomen
                 cresentis
                 penultimasi
                 Genitiui
                 sit
                 grauis
                 &c.
                 
              
               Also
               the
               Vocatiue
               case
               knowen
               by
               calling
               or
               speaking
               to
               ,
               as
               
                 ô
                 Magister
              
               ,
               ô
               Master
               .
               Qui
               is
               next
               ,
               a
               Pronowne
               Relatiue
               ,
               &c.
               
               So
               euery
               thing
               in
               the
               same
               order
               as
               before
               .
            
             
               To
               help
               your
               schollars
               to
               do
               this
               :
               
               Remember
               first
               when
               you
               haue
               vsed
               for
               a
               time
               to
               parse
               them
               ouer
               euery
               word
               so
               ,
               
               before
               them
               ,
               that
               by
               your
               example
               they
               may
               do
               the
               like
               ;
               then
               for
               speediness
               ,
               when
               they
               haue
               taken
               their
               lectures
               of
               
               themselues
               ,
               that
               they
               can
               cōstrue
               to
               cause
               only
               som
               one
               of
               them
               to
               read
               ouer
               their
               lecture
               ,
               to
               see
               that
               they
               pronounce
               it
               right
               ,
               and
               to
               construe
               if
               you
               will
               ,
               if
               time
               so
               permit
               ,
               or
               to
               reade
               it
               ouer
               to
               them
               :
               And
               what
               words
               you
               obserue
               to
               be
               hard
               ,
               which
               you
               thinke
               they
               know
               not
               ,
               you
               may
               aske
               them
               what
               those
               words
               are
               like
               ,
               and
               how
               they
               are
               declined
               ,
               or
               where
               they
               haue
               learned
               them
               ,
               
               as
               was
               sayd
               .
               Where
               they
               cannot
               tell
               any
               ,
               or
               haue
               any
               newe
               word
               which
               they
               haue
               not
               learned
               ,
               to
               make
               that
               plaine
               vnto
               them
               ,
               and
               to
               cause
               euerie
               one
               of
               the
               fourm
               ,
               as
               was
               directed
               in
               the
               third
               generall
               obseruation
               ,
               
               to
               make
               a
               line
               vnder
               that
               word
               ,
               or
               vnder
               that
               part
               of
               the
               word
               ,
               that
               letter
               or
               syllable
               wherein
               the
               difficulty
               lieth
               ;
               for
               a
               little
               helpe
               will
               bring
               the
               whole
               to
               remembrance
               .
               Or
               to
               note
               them
               with
               some
               marke
               or
               letter
               ouer
               the
               head
               of
               the
               word
               .
            
             
               As
               in
               the
               enterers
               ,
               to
               note
               the
               Declension
               with
               a
               d
               ,
               ouer
               the
               head
               ,
               and
               a
               figure
               signifying
               which
               Declension
               .
            
             
               The
               Coniugation
               with
               a
               c
               ,
               and
               a
               figure
               .
            
             
               Heteroclites
               with
               an
               h
               ;
               lame
               Verbes
               with
               an
               l.
               
            
             
               For
               example
               ,
               to
               take
               that
               which
               was
               parsed
               before
            
             
               
                 
                   Example
                   of
                   marking
                   hard
                   words
                   amongst
                   the
                   first
                   enterers
                   .
                
                 
                   Qui
                   mihi
                   discipulus
                   
                     2.
                     d.
                  
                   puer
                   
                     2.
                     d.
                  
                   es
                   cupis
                   
                     3.
                     c.
                  
                   atque
                   doceri
                   ,
                
                 
                   Huc
                   ades
                   haec
                   animo
                   concipe
                   dicta
                   tuo
                   .
                
              
            
             
               Here
               discipulus
               and
               puer
               are
               noted
               for
               the
               second
               Declension
               ,
               cupis
               the
               third
               Coniugation
               ,
               ades
               for
               the
               Composition
               of
               ad
               and
               
                 sum
                 ,
                 concipe
              
               for
               changing
               a
               into
               i.
               
            
             
               Or
               you
               may
               marke
               Declensions
               and
               Coniugations
               ,
               by
               setting
               downe
               but
               onely
               the
               first
               letters
               of
               the
               examples
               ,
               which
               they
               are
               like
               ,
               as
               
                 discipulus
                 
                   mag
                   .
                
                 ,
                 puer
                 
                   mag
                   .
                
                 ,
                 cupis
                 
                   leg
                   .
                
                 ,
                 &c.
                 
              
            
             
               The
               former
               is
               the
               shorter
               ,
               after
               they
               are
               acquainted
               with
               it
               ,
               and
               can
               make
               their
               figures
               .
            
             
               And
               euer
               what
               rules
               they
               are
               not
               well
               acquainted
               with
               ,
               
               turne
               them
               ,
               
               or
               cause
               them
               to
               turne
               to
               the
               places
               in
               their
               Grammar
               ,
               and
               to
               shew
               them
               to
               you
               .
            
             
             
               As
               they
               proceede
               to
               higher
               fourmes
               ,
               
               and
               are
               more
               perfect
               ,
               marke
               onely
               those
               which
               haue
               most
               difficulty
               ;
               as
               Notations
               ,
               Deriuations
               ,
               figuratiue
               Constructions
               ,
               Tropes
               ,
               Figures
               ▪
               and
               the
               like
               :
               and
               what
               they
               feare
               they
               cannot
               remember
               by
               a
               marke
               ,
               cause
               them
               to
               write
               those
               in
               the
               Margent
               in
               a
               fine
               hand
               ,
               or
               in
               some
               little
               booke
               .
            
             
               In
               the
               lower
               fourmes
               ,
               you
               marking
               one
               booke
               your selfe
               ,
               all
               the
               rest
               may
               marke
               theirs
               after
               it
               ,
               vntill
               they
               can
               doe
               it
               of
               themselues
               .
            
             
               The
               ends
               of
               this
               marking
               ,
               
               are
               ,
               as
               I
               said
               ,
               that
               they
               may
               take
               most
               paines
               in
               these
               ;
               for
               the
               rest
               they
               can
               doe
               easily
               ,
               and
               almost
               of
               themselues
               .
               And
               also
               that
               when
               they
               construe
               and
               repeat
               ouer
               their
               Authors
               ,
               they
               may
               oft
               pose
               ouer
               those
               hard
               wordes
               .
               And
               thus
               they
               shall
               keepe
               their
               Authours
               ,
               which
               they
               haue
               learned
               ,
               to
               the
               credite
               of
               the
               Schoole
               ,
               with
               the
               profiting
               and
               incouragement
               of
               the
               schollars
               ,
               that
               they
               shall
               goe
               farre
               safer
               forward
               ,
               then
               by
               any
               other
               meanes
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spou.
               
            
             
               But
               this
               marking
               may
               indanger
               them
               ,
               to
               make
               them
               Truants
               ,
               &
               to
               trust
               their
               books
               more
               then
               their
               memories
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               I
               answere
               no
               ,
               
               not
               at
               all
               ;
               but
               to
               performe
               a
               necessary
               supply
               vnto
               the
               children
               .
               For
               childrens
               memories
               are
               weake
               :
               and
               they
               are
               soone
               discouraged
               by
               the
               difficultie
               of
               learning
               and
               by
               the
               hastinesse
               of
               their
               Masters
               .
               And
               therefore
               they
               had
               neede
               of
               all
               helpes
               at
               the
               beginning
               .
               It
               is
               also
               the
               oft
               repeating
               ouer
               of
               any
               thing
               ,
               which
               imprints
               it
               in
               their
               memory
               for
               euer
               .
            
             
               Of
               the
               contrary
               ,
               trie
               amongst
               children
               of
               the
               sharpest
               wits
               &
               best
               memories
               ,
               if
               they
               haue
               not
               some
               such
               helps
               ,
               whether
               they
               will
               not
               be
               long
               in
               learning
               to
               parse
               a
               Lecture
               :
               
               &
               when
               they
               can
               parse
               it
               very
               perfectly
               ,
               proue
               them
               within
               a
               month
               after
               ,
               whether
               they
               will
               not
               haue
               forgotten
               ,
               at
               least
               most
               of
               the
               hardest
               &
               chiefe
               matters
               .
               Then
               think
               what
               a
               vexation
               it
               is
               to
               the
               honest
               minded
               Mast
               that
               would
               be
               alwaies
               ready
               to
               giue
               an
               accoūt
               of
               the
               profiting
               of
               his
               schollar
               ;
               &
               withal
               whē
               he
               must
               teach
               him
               euery
               thing
               anew
               ,
               which
               he
               hath
               forgotten
               :
               
               neyther
               his
               leisure
               will
               any
               way
               serue
               ;
               hee
               hauing
               many
               fourmes
               ▪
               and
               being
               to
               goe
               forward
               daily
               with
               his
               Schollars
               in
               some
               new
               construction
               ;
               besides
               many
               other
               like
               discommodities
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               But
               there
               is
               another
               kinde
               of
               apposing
               ,
               which
               I
               remember
               in
               the
               note
               ,
               and
               which
               you
               mentioned
               ;
               how
               to
               teach
               children
               to
               make
               right
               vse
               of
               their
               Authours
               ,
               euen
               of
               euery
               sentence
               :
               which
               I
               conceiue
               not
               of
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               Yes
               truely
               :
               
               and
               that
               which
               I
               account
               the
               very
               principall
               ,
               and
               as
               it
               were
               the
               very
               picking
               out
               of
               the
               kernell
               ,
               and
               the
               life
               of
               euery
               Lecture
               ;
               to
               get
               both
               the
               matter
               and
               also
               the
               Latine
               wordes
               and
               phrases
               ,
               that
               they
               make
               them
               their
               owne
               ,
               to
               vse
               as
               neede
               or
               occasion
               requireth
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               That
               must
               needs
               be
               of
               excellent
               vse
               :
               for
               though
               it
               be
               commendable
               to
               construe
               ,
               &
               to
               parse
               perfectly
               ;
               yet
               it
               is
               nothing
               in
               regard
               of
               this
               ,
               if
               they
               shall
               not
               know
               how
               to
               make
               their
               vse
               and
               benefite
               eyther
               of
               matter
               or
               phrase
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               This
               is
               onely
               by
               apposing
               them
               ,
               as
               I
               shewed
               you
               the
               manner
               in
               the
               
                 Propria
                 quae
                 maribus
              
               ,
               to
               make
               them
               to
               vnderstand
               ;
               and
               that
               first
               in
               English
               ,
               then
               in
               Latine
               :
               and
               to
               cause
               them
               to
               answere
               both
               wayes
               ,
               both
               wordes
               and
               sentences
               ,
               as
               time
               will
               permit
               .
            
             
               For
               example
               ;
               
               Take
               a
               sentence
               or
               two
               in
               the
               beginning
               of
               that
               little
               booke
               ,
               called
               
                 Sententiae
                 pueriles
              
               :
               which
               is
               well
               worthy
               to
               be
               read
               first
               vnto
               children
               ,
               because
               it
               hath
               beene
               gathered
               with
               much
               care
               &
               aduice
               to
               enter
               younger
               schollars
               ,
               for
               Latine
               and
               matter
               euery
               way
               meete
               for
               them
               :
               but
               of
               it
               and
               others
               ,
               what
               I
               finde
               best
               to
               be
               read
               ,
               I
               shall
               shew
               you
               my
               experience
               in
               another
               place
               .
               Out
               of
               it
               you
               may
               examine
               thus
               ,
               for
               making
               vse
               ,
               as
               in
               the
               these
               first
               sentences
               of
               it
               :
               
                 
                   Amicis
                   opitulare
                   .
                
                 
                   Alienis
                   abstine
                   .
                
                 
                   Arcanum
                   cela
                   .
                
                 
                   Affabilis
                   esto
                   ,
                   &c.
                   
                
              
            
             
               1
               If
               you
               will
               ,
               
               you
               may
               aske
               them
               by
               a
               question
               of
               the
               contrary
               ,
               
               Must
               you
               not
               helpe
               your
               friends
               ?
               The
               childe
               answereth
               ,
               Yes
               .
               Then
               bid
               him
               giue
               you
               a
               sentence
               to
               proue
               it
               ;
               
               hee
               answereth
               ,
               
                 Amicis
                 opitulare
              
               .
            
             
               Or
               aske
               by
               a
               distribution
               thus
               ;
               Whether
               must
               you
               helpe
               or
               forsake
               your
               friends
               ?
               The
               childe
               answereth
               ,
               I
               must
               helpe
               them
               .
               Then
               bid
               him
               to
               giue
               you
               a
               sentence
               ;
               he
               answereth
               ,
               
                 Amicis
                 opitulare
              
               .
            
             
               Or
               thus
               by
               Comparison
               ;
               Whether
               ought
               you
               to
               helpe
               your
               friends
               ,
               or
               others
               first
               ?
               or
               friends
               or
               enemies
               ,
               &c.
               
               When
               the
               childe
               hath
               answered
               ,
               euer
               bid
               him
               to
               giue
               his
               sentence
               .
               So
               on
               in
               the
               rest
               .
            
             
               The
               more
               plainly
               you
               can
               propound
               your
               question
               ,
               that
               the
               childe
               may
               vnderstand
               it
               ,
               and
               may
               answere
               in
               the
               very
               wordes
               of
               his
               Lecture
               ,
               the
               better
               it
               is
               :
               so
               to
               examine
               the
               wordes
               seuerally
               :
               How
               say
               you
               Helpe
               ?
               he
               answereth
               Opitulare
               .
               Friends
               ,
               Amicis
               .
               But
               of
               this
               more
               after
               .
            
             
               After
               the
               childe
               hath
               beene
               a
               while
               thus
               practiced
               ,
               
               then
               vse
               to
               examine
               both
               in
               English
               and
               Latin
               together
               :
               I
               mean
               propounding
               the
               questions
               first
               in
               English
               ,
               then
               in
               Latine
               ;
               and
               so
               let
               him
               answere
               ,
               that
               the
               matter
               and
               English
               may
               bring
               the
               Latine
               with
               them
               :
               which
               they
               will
               certainly
               doe
               .
               The
               manner
               I
               shewed
               in
               examining
               in
               the
               Latine
               rules
               :
               I
               will
               set
               downe
               one
               other
               example
               ,
               in
               the
               sentences
               of
               three
               wordes
               ;
               
                 Amor
                 vincit
                 omnia
              
               .
            
             
               Out
               of
               this
               sentence
               I
               examine
               thus
               :
            
             
               Q.
               What
               is
               that
               ,
               that
               will
               ouercome
               all
               things
               ?
            
             
               A.
               Loue.
               
            
             
               Then
               bid
               him
               giue
               the
               sentence
               .
            
             
               A.
               Amor
               vincit
               omnia
               .
            
             
               Or
               thus
               :
               Is
               there
               any
               thing
               that
               can
               ouercome
               all
               things
               ?
            
             
               A.
               Yes
               ;
               Loue.
               
            
             
               Or
               thus
               more
               particularly
               ,
               to
               put
               delight
               and
               vnderstanding
               into
               them
               ;
            
             
               Q.
               What
               is
               that
               which
               will
               ouercome
               learning
               ,
               &
               make
               it
               our
               owne
               ?
            
             
               A.
               Loue
               of
               learning
               ,
               or
               louing
               our
               bookes
               .
            
             
               Q.
               Giue
               me
               a
               sentence
               to
               proue
               it
               .
            
             
               A.
               Amor
               vincit
               omnia
               ,
               &c.
               
            
             
             
               Then
               examine
               in
               Latine
               the
               very
               same
               things
               ;
               but
               vttering
               them
               in
               Latine
               and
               English
               together
               ,
               as
               thus
               :
            
             
               
                 Quid
                 vincit
                 omnia
              
               ?
               what
               will
               ouercome
               all
               things
               ?
            
             
               R.
               Amor.
               
            
             
               Or
               thus
               :
               
                 Est
                 ne
                 aliquid
                 quod
                 potest
                 omnia
                 vincere
                 ?
              
               Is
               there
               any
               thing
               that
               can
               ouercome
               all
               things
               ?
               R.
               Imò
               .
            
             
               
                 Q.
                 Quidest
              
               ?
               What
               is
               it
               ?
            
             
               R.
               Amor.
               
            
             
               Q.
               Da
               sententiam
               .
            
             
               R.
               Amor
               vincit
               omnia
               .
            
             
               Q.
               Or
               thus
               :
               
                 Quid
                 vincit
                 amor
              
               ?
               What
               wil
               loue
               ouercome
               ?
            
             
               R.
               Omnia
               ,
               All
               things
               .
            
             
               So
               in
               Cato
               ,
               
               to
               aske
               ,
               as
               in
               the
               first
               Verses
               ,
            
             
               Q.
               What
               thing
               ought
               to
               be
               chiefe
               vnto
               vs
               ?
            
             
               A.
               The
               worship
               of
               God.
               
            
             
               Q.
               Dasententiam
               .
            
             
               R.
               Cultus
               Deipraecipuus
               .
            
             
               Q
               Dacarmen
               .
            
             
               R.
               Si
               Deus
               est
               animus
               nobis
               ,
               &c.
               
            
             
               Then
               to
               examine
               the
               Verses
               by
               parts
               if
               you
               will
               :
               as
               
                 Si
                 Deus
                 est
                 animus
                 ,
                 &c.
              
               Aske
               ,
            
             
               
                 Qualis
                 est
                 Deus
              
               ,
               What
               is
               God
               ,
               or
               what
               a
               one
               ?
            
             
               A.
               Animus
               ,
               A
               spirit
               ,
               or
               spirituall
               nature
               or
               being
               .
            
             
               Q.
               Qui
               ita
               nobis
               dicunt
               ?
               vel
               ,
               Quae
               nobis
               ita
               dicunt
               ?
               
                 Who
                 or
                 what
                 things
                 tell
                 vs
                 so
                 ?
              
            
             
               R.
               Carmina
               ,
               Verses
               ,
               or
               Poets
               who
               write
               Verses
               .
            
             
               Q.
               Quomodo
               tum
               co●endus
               est
               ?
            
             
               R.
               Pura
               mente
               .
            
             
               Q.
               Dacarmen
               .
            
             
               R.
               Si
               Deus
               est
               animus
               ,
               &c.
               
            
             
               Thus
               throughout
               ,
               onely
               where
               they
               vnderstand
               not
               ,
               to
               propound
               the
               question
               ,
               as
               well
               in
               English
               ,
               as
               in
               Latine
               ,
               and
               so
               to
               answere
               .
            
             
               Also
               you
               may
               examine
               thus
               :
               What
               Verses
               in
               Cato
               haue
               you
               ,
               to
               proue
               that
               the
               worship
               of
               God
               must
               bee
               chiefly
               regarded
               ?
               A.
               
                 Si
                 Deus
                 est
                 animus
              
               .
            
             
               What
               against
               sleepinesse
               and
               idlenesse
               ?
            
             
               A.
               Plus
               vigila
               semper
               ,
               &c.
               
            
             
             
               So
               in
               Esops
               Fables
               ,
               
               besides
               the
               examining
               euery
               peece
               of
               a
               sentence
               in
               the
               Lectures
               ,
               as
               thus
               :
            
             
               Gallus
               Gallinaceus
               dum
               vertit
               stercorarium
               offendit
               gemmam
               ,
               &c.
               
            
             
               Q.
               Quid
               offendebat
               Gallus
               dum
               vertit
               stercorarium
               ?
            
             
               R.
               Offendit
               gemmam
               ,
               &c.
               
            
             
               Cause
               the
               children
               to
               tell
               you
               ,
               what
               euery
               Fable
               is
               about
               or
               against
               ,
               or
               what
               it
               teacheth
               ,
               in
               a
               word
               or
               two
               .
               For
               example
               ,
               thus
               :
            
             
               Q.
               What
               Fable
               haue
               you
               against
               the
               foolish
               contempt
               of
               learning
               and
               vertue
               ,
               and
               preferring
               play
               or
               pleasure
               before
               it
               ?
            
             
               A.
               The
               Fable
               of
               the
               Cocke
               ,
               scratching
               in
               the
               dung-hill
               .
            
             
               Or
               after
               this
               manner
               :
            
             
               Q.
               What
               Fable
               haue
               you
               against
               the
               foolish
               neglect
               of
               learning
               ?
            
             
               A.
               The
               Fable
               of
               the
               Cocke
               ,
               scratching
               in
               the
               dung-hill
               .
            
             
               2
               Cause
               them
               to
               make
               a
               good
               and
               pithy
               report
               of
               the
               Fable
               ;
               
               first
               in
               English
               ,
               then
               in
               Latine
               :
               and
               that
               eyther
               in
               the
               wordes
               of
               the
               Authour
               ,
               or
               of
               themselues
               as
               they
               can
               ;
               and
               as
               they
               did
               in
               English.
               For
               ,
               this
               practice
               in
               English
               to
               make
               a
               good
               report
               of
               a
               Fable
               ,
               is
               of
               singular
               vse
               ,
               to
               cause
               them
               to
               vtter
               their
               mindes
               well
               in
               English
               ;
               and
               would
               neuer
               bee
               omitted
               for
               that
               and
               like
               purposes
               .
            
             
               In
               other
               bookes
               the
               vse
               is
               according
               to
               the
               quality
               of
               them
               :
               
               as
               in
               
                 Confabulatiunculae
                 pueriles
              
               ,
               the
               vse
               is
               for
               the
               children
               to
               talke
               to
               one
               another
               in
               the
               same
               words
               .
            
             
               In
               Sturmius
               Epistles
               ,
               and
               others
               of
               Tully
               ,
               the
               phrase
               principally
               is
               to
               be
               regarded
               :
               as
               also
               in
               the
               Poets
               ,
               the
               Poeticall
               phrase
               .
            
             
               For
               the
               further
               vse
               of
               them
               for
               imitation
               both
               in
               Epistles
               and
               Verses
               ,
               I
               shall
               speake
               after
               in
               their
               place
               .
            
             
               But
               for
               the
               Latine
               and
               matter
               to
               make
               it
               our
               owne
               ,
               
               I
               finde
               the
               chiefe
               benefit
               to
               be
               in
               oft
               reading
               them
               out
               of
               the
               Grammatical
               translations
               ,
               
               ouer
               and
               ouer
               ,
               vntill
               the
               Latine
               be
               as
               familiar
               to
               the
               schollar
               ,
               as
               the
               English
               :
               as
               I
               noted
               in
               the
               benefits
               of
               the
               Translations
               .
               And
               also
               in
               saying
               and
               repeating
               
               of
               Lectures
               (
               I
               meane
               the
               weekes
               worke
               )
               to
               construe
               without
               booke
               :
               and
               then
               repeare
               them
               in
               Verse
               ,
               or
               as
               they
               are
               without
               booke
               .
            
             
               For
               the
               vse
               in
               Tullies
               Offices
               and
               
                 Ouids
                 Metamorphosis
              
               ,
               
               I
               haue
               set
               in
               the
               Margents
               of
               the
               Translations
               ,
               the
               sum
               of
               all
               the
               matter
               ;
               which
               is
               very
               notable
               and
               full
               of
               delight
               .
            
             
               For
               parsing
               in
               the
               highest
               fourmes
               :
               
               to
               obserue
               onely
               for
               breuity
               sake
               the
               difficulties
               of
               Grammar
               or
               Rhetorick
               ,
               
               speciall
               phrases
               ,
               or
               the
               like
               ;
               the
               Master
               onely
               to
               examine
               what
               things
               they
               omit
               ,
               or
               wherein
               he
               suspects
               them
               negligent
               .
               In
               parsing
               they
               may
               vse
               these
               or
               the
               like
               speeches
               :
            
             
               Hae
               sunt
               difficultates
               Grammaticae
               .
               Hae
               elegantiae
               Rhetorices
               .
               Reliqualcuiora
               ,
               trita
               ,
               puerilia
               ,
               &c.
               
            
             
               
                 In
                 Poetry
                 also
              
               ,
               Phrases
               hae
               :
               Epitheta
               ista
               .
            
             
               Let
               all
               this
               examination
               be
               onely
               in
               pure
               Latine
               ,
               
               from
               the
               very
               lowest
               fourmes
               ,
               
               except
               the
               first
               or
               second
               at
               the
               most
               .
               For
               they
               will
               do
               it
               with
               ease
               if
               they
               be
               rightly
               entered
               from
               the
               beginning
               ;
               and
               that
               the
               Master
               euer
               do
               it
               before
               them
               where
               they
               are
               not
               able
               :
               and
               to
               obserue
               wherein
               they
               are
               most
               defectiue
               ,
               therein
               to
               take
               the
               most
               paines
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               Although
               these
               things
               cannot
               but
               be
               very
               profitable
               ;
               yet
               being
               so
               many
               ,
               they
               can
               hardly
               be
               put
               in
               practice
               in
               the
               greater
               Schooles
               .
               I
               pray
               you
               rehearse
               me
               the
               summe
               of
               those
               which
               you
               take
               most
               necessary
               for
               daily
               vse
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               These
               are
               they
               ;
               
               Cause
               your
               schollars
               to
               reade
               first
               their
               Lecture
               distinctly
               and
               construe
               truly
               :
               to
               parse
               as
               they
               construe
               ,
               euer
               marking
               the
               last
               principall
               word
               :
               to
               shew
               where
               they
               haue
               learned
               euery
               hard
               word
               :
               what
               example
               euery
               hard
               word
               is
               like
               ;
               so
               to
               giue
               rules
               &
               examples
               of
               them
               ,
               both
               for
               Etymologie
               &
               Syntax
               ,
               as
               after
               for
               the
               Rhetorick
               ,
               as
               need
               is
               .
               To
               parse
               of
               themselues
               ,
               as
               reading
               a
               Lecture
               ,
               and
               that
               only
               in
               Latin
               when
               they
               come
               to
               say
               ,
               except
               in
               the
               very
               lowest
               fourmes
               :
               to
               make
               some
               marke
               at
               euery
               hard
               word
               ,
               which
               you
               note
               vnto
               them
               ,
               to
               take
               the
               most
               pains
               in
               those
               :
               amongst
               the
               younger
               specially
               ,
               to
               examine
               each
               Lecture
               for
               the
               vse
               ;
               wherby
               they
               may
               get
               matter
               ,
               wordes
               ,
               and
               phrases
               ,
               all
               vnder
               one
               .
               In
               the
               highest
               ,
               for
               speedines
               to
               examine
               
               onely
               the
               difficulties
               ,
               as
               you
               see
               requisite
               ;
               to
               let
               them
               name
               the
               rule
               in
               a
               word
               or
               two
               ;
               to
               obserue
               phrases
               and
               Epithets
               .
               In
               all
               repetitions
               amongst
               themselues
               ,
               and
               construing
               ouer
               their
               Authours
               ,
               to
               examine
               ouer
               also
               the
               noted
               wordes
               ,
               as
               time
               permits
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             X.
             
          
           
             Of
             making
             Latine
             ;
             how
             to
             enter
             children
             therein
             ,
             with
             delight
             and
             certainty
             ,
             without
             danger
             of
             false
             Latine
             ,
             barbarous
             phrase
             ,
             or
             any
             other
             like
             inconuenience
             .
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               NOw
               that
               you
               haue
               thus
               louingly
               ledde
               me
               by
               the
               hand
               ,
               through
               the
               way
               of
               laying
               a
               sure
               foundation
               amongst
               my
               children
               ,
               for
               all
               the
               grounds
               both
               of
               Accedence
               and
               Grammar
               ;
               and
               also
               of
               construing
               and
               parsing
               :
               let
               me
               still
               intreate
               you
               to
               goe
               on
               before
               me
               ;
               and
               next
               to
               shew
               how
               I
               may
               enter
               my
               children
               for
               making
               of
               Latine
               :
               and
               then
               through
               the
               seuerall
               exercises
               thereof
               .
               
               This
               I
               haue
               found
               extreamely
               difficult
               .
               For
               although
               it
               hath
               beene
               a
               matter
               of
               continuall
               vexation
               and
               paine
               vnto
               my selfe
               ,
               and
               of
               feare
               vnto
               my
               poore
               schollars
               ;
               yet
               haue
               I
               found
               as
               little
               profiting
               therein
               ,
               as
               in
               any
               other
               :
               but
               that
               my
               children
               will
               still
               write
               false
               Latine
               ,
               barbarous
               phrase
               ,
               and
               without
               any
               certainty
               ,
               after
               a
               very
               long
               time
               of
               exercise
               .
            
             
               If
               therefore
               you
               can
               guide
               me
               the
               way
               ,
               how
               I
               may
               do
               that
               which
               you
               spake
               of
               before
               ,
               that
               I
               may
               enter
               my
               children
               with
               ease
               and
               delight
               ,
               both
               to
               my selfe
               and
               to
               them
               ;
               and
               also
               surely
               without
               danger
               of
               making
               false
               Latine
               or
               barbarous
               phrase
               ;
               I
               shall
               further
               acknowledge
               my selfe
               ,
               to
               haue
               receiued
               yet
               a
               greater
               benefite
               then
               in
               all
               the
               former
               .
               And
               aboue
               all
               ,
               if
               you
               can
               direct
               me
               how
               by
               that
               
               time
               that
               they
               haue
               beene
               not
               two
               yeares
               onely
               ,
               but
               three
               or
               foure
               yeares
               in
               construction
               ,
               they
               may
               be
               able
               to
               make
               true
               Latine
               ,
               and
               pure
               Tully
               in
               ordinary
               morall
               matters
               .
               For
               I
               my selfe
               haue
               hardly
               beene
               able
               to
               cause
               my
               children
               to
               doe
               this
               at
               fourteene
               or
               fifteene
               yeares
               of
               age
               ;
               nor
               then
               to
               warrant
               that
               which
               they
               haue
               done
               :
               neyther
               doe
               I
               thinke
               that
               it
               is
               much
               otherwise
               in
               our
               ordinary
               Schooles
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               I
               shall
               willingly
               satisfie
               your
               request
               hereein
               likewise
               ,
               and
               shew
               you
               what
               I
               haue
               found
               :
               onely
               let
               me
               see
               ,
               as
               before
               ,
               what
               course
               your selfe
               haue
               taken
               ,
               to
               enter
               your
               children
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               I
               haue
               taken
               that
               course
               which
               I
               thinke
               is
               commonly
               practiced
               in
               Schooles
               :
               
               I
               haue
               giuen
               them
               vulgars
               ,
               or
               Englishes
               ,
               such
               as
               I
               haue
               deuised
               ,
               to
               be
               made
               in
               Latine
               :
               and
               at
               the
               first
               entrance
               I
               haue
               taught
               and
               heard
               them
               ,
               how
               to
               make
               euery
               word
               in
               Latine
               ,
               word
               by
               word
               ,
               according
               to
               their
               rules
               .
               After
               a
               while
               I
               haue
               onely
               giuen
               them
               such
               vulgars
               ,
               and
               appointed
               them
               a
               time
               ,
               against
               which
               they
               should
               bring
               them
               made
               in
               Latine
               :
               and
               at
               the
               perusing
               a●●
               examining
               of
               them
               ,
               I
               haue
               beene
               wont
               to
               correct
               them
               sharply
               ,
               for
               their
               faults
               in
               writing
               ,
               and
               for
               their
               negligence
               ;
               and
               so
               haue
               giuen
               them
               new
               Englishes
               :
               and
               it
               may
               bee
               I
               haue
               told
               them
               the
               Latine
               to
               the
               hardest
               words
               .
               This
               is
               the
               course
               that
               I
               haue
               followed
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               Our
               learned
               Schoole-master
               M.
               Askam
               ,
               
               doeth
               not
               without
               cause
               tearme
               this
               the
               butcherly
               feare
               of
               making
               Latines
               .
               For
               to
               omit
               the
               trouble
               to
               the
               Master
               ,
               and
               that
               it
               will
               require
               a
               ready
               wit
               ,
               to
               giue
               variety
               of
               such
               vulgars
               to
               the
               children
               ;
               and
               also
               that
               it
               will
               aske
               good
               learning
               and
               iudgement
               to
               direct
               them
               ,
               to
               make
               not
               onely
               true
               Latine
               ,
               but
               pure
               phrase
               withall
               ;
               what
               a
               terrour
               must
               this
               needes
               be
               vnto
               the
               young
               Schollar
               ,
               who
               feares
               to
               be
               corrected
               for
               euery
               fault
               ,
               
               and
               hardly
               knoweth
               in
               any
               thing
               ,
               what
               to
               make
               vpon
               sure
               and
               certaine
               grounds
               ?
               But
               for
               the
               way
               ,
               this
               I
               finde
               the
               shortest
               ,
               surest
               ,
               and
               easiest
               both
               to
               Master
               and
               schollar
               ;
               and
               which
               will
               certainely
               effect
               whatsoeuer
               hath
               bin
               said
               :
               and
               that
               Master
               and
               Schollar
               may
               proceede
               cheerefully
               
               and
               boldly
               ,
               to
               iustifie
               what
               they
               doe
               .
            
          
           
             1.
             
             See
             that
             your
             schollar
             be
             very
             cunning
             in
             his
             Accedence
             ,
             
             and
             Grammar
             as
             hee
             goeth
             forward
             :
             and
             chiefly
             in
             Nownes
             and
             Verbes
             ,
             to
             be
             able
             to
             giue
             each
             case
             of
             a
             Nown
             ,
             and
             euery
             tense
             and
             person
             of
             a
             Verbe
             ;
             both
             Latine
             to
             English
             ,
             and
             English
             to
             Latine
             ,
             as
             I
             wished
             you
             ,
             and
             shewed
             the
             manner
             before
             ;
             at
             least
             by
             the
             perfect
             knowledge
             of
             the
             terminations
             of
             them
             .
          
           
             2.
             
             Besides
             the
             construing
             and
             parsing
             their
             lectures
             without
             booke
             ,
             
             in
             the
             lowest
             fourmes
             ,
             or
             out
             of
             the
             English
             translation
             ,
             accustom
             your selfe
             ,
             in
             examining
             the
             lectures
             of
             your
             first
             enterers
             ,
             to
             do
             all
             after
             the
             manner
             of
             making
             Latine
             ;
             as
             it
             were
             causing
             them
             euery
             day
             to
             make
             the
             Latine
             of
             their
             lectures
             ,
             and
             giue
             a
             reason
             why
             each
             word
             must
             be
             so
             ,
             and
             not
             otherwise
             ,
             their
             bookes
             being
             shut
             .
             I
             set
             you
             downe
             the
             manner
             before
             ,
             in
             the
             vse
             of
             the
             Grammaticall
             rule
             for
             making
             Latine
             ,
             in
             that
             example
             ;
             
               Aptissima
               omnino
               sunt
               ,
               &c.
            
             
             Yet
             to
             repeate
             you
             a
             word
             or
             two
             for
             your
             little
             ones
             ;
             take
             that
             first
             sentence
             ,
             
               Amicis
               opitulare
            
             :
             when
             you
             haue
             made
             them
             to
             vnderstand
             the
             meaning
             ,
             and
             examined
             it
             ,
             
             so
             as
             was
             shewed
             ;
             Aske
             but
             thus
             :
          
           
             How
             can
             you
             make
             this
             in
             Latine
             ;
             Helpe
             friends
             ?
             How
             say
             you
             ,
             Helpe
             thou
             ?
          
           
             A.
             Opitulare
             .
          
           
             Q.
             Opitulare
             like
             what
             ?
          
           
             A.
             Like
             
               Amare
               amator
            
             ,
             be
             thou
             loued
             .
          
           
             So
             all
             the
             questions
             for
             parsing
             :
             Then
             aske
             ,
             why
             is
             it
             helpe
             thou
             ,
             and
             not
             ,
             be
             thou
             helped
             ,
             as
             
               Amare
               amator
            
             ,
             be
             thou
             loued
             .
             He
             answereth
             because
             it
             is
             a
             Verbe
             Deponent
             ,
             and
             signifieth
             Actiuely
             ,
             to
             help
             ;
             and
             not
             ,
             to
             be
             helped
             .
          
           
             After
             aske
             the
             next
             word
             :
          
           
             Q.
             Whom
             must
             you
             help
             ?
          
           
             A.
             Our
             friends
             .
          
           
             Q.
             How
             say
             you
             friends
             ?
          
           
             A.
             Amicis
             .
          
           
             Q.
             What
             is
             Amicis
             like
             ?
          
           
             A.
             Magistris
             .
          
           
           
             So
             the
             questions
             of
             declining
             and
             the
             like
             .
             Then
             aske
             ,
             why
             not
             amici
             nor
             amicos
             ,
             the
             Accusatiue
             case
             after
             the
             verb.
             
          
           
             A.
             Because
             the
             Verb
             Opitulor
             ,
             to
             help
             ,
             wil
             haue
             a
             Datiue
             case
             ,
             by
             that
             rule
             of
             the
             Datiue
             ,
             To
             profit
             or
             disprofit
             ,
             &c.
             
          
           
             These
             may
             be
             insteede
             of
             all
             vulgars
             or
             Latines
             ,
             both
             for
             ease
             ,
             
             delight
             and
             certainty
             to
             your selfe
             and
             the
             childe
             :
             and
             so
             you
             may
             euer
             haue
             the
             Author
             to
             warrant
             both
             Latine
             ,
             and
             phrase
             .
          
           
             3
             Next
             vnto
             this
             ,
             
             that
             continuall
             beating
             out
             and
             reading
             their
             Authors
             ,
             both
             lectures
             and
             repetitions
             ,
             out
             of
             the
             translations
             ,
             is
             continual
             making
             Latine
             thus
             ,
             (
             as
             I
             said
             ,
             in
             the
             vse
             of
             the
             translations
             )
             that
             children
             will
             come
             on
             very
             fast
             for
             propriety
             ,
             choise
             ,
             &
             variety
             of
             the
             best
             words
             ,
             phrase
             ,
             matter
             ,
             and
             sentences
             of
             their
             Authors
             ,
             to
             begin
             to
             haue
             a
             store●
             house
             in
             themselues
             of
             all
             copie
             ,
             as
             I
             haue
             obserued
             .
          
           
             4
             After
             the
             former
             practiced
             for
             a
             time
             ,
             you
             may
             chuse
             some
             sentences
             which
             they
             haue
             not
             learned
             ,
             
             and
             cause
             them
             to
             make
             those
             ,
             either
             some
             out
             of
             this
             booke
             of
             Sentences
             ,
             or
             any
             other
             of
             like
             easie
             morall
             matter
             ;
             and
             then
             let
             them
             begin
             to
             write
             downe
             that
             which
             they
             make
             in
             Latine
             .
          
           
             This
             manner
             I
             find
             to
             be
             most
             easie
             and
             speedy
             for
             children
             at
             their
             first
             entrance
             :
             
             wherby
             they
             may
             profit
             in
             English
             ,
             Latine
             ▪
             Writing
             true
             and
             faire
             ,
             and
             all
             vnder
             one
             labor
             .
          
           
             Let
             them
             haue
             their
             paper
             books
             in
             octauo
             ,
             of
             the
             one
             side
             to
             write
             the
             English
             which
             you
             giue
             them
             ;
             on
             the
             other
             to
             set
             the
             Latine
             directly
             ouer
             against
             it
             ,
             and
             word
             for
             word
             .
          
           
             To
             this
             end
             cause
             them
             to
             rule
             their
             bookes
             both
             sides
             at
             once
             ,
             
             or
             at
             least
             the
             lines
             of
             one
             side
             directly
             against
             the
             other
             :
             their
             lines
             a
             good
             distance
             asunder
             ,
             that
             they
             may
             interline
             any
             thing
             ,
             if
             they
             misse
             any
             word
             ;
             or
             for
             copie
             and
             varietie
             ,
             to
             be
             set
             ouer
             the
             head
             if
             you
             will.
             On
             the
             first
             side
             toward
             the
             right
             hand
             ,
             in
             which
             the
             English
             is
             to
             be
             set
             ,
             to
             leaue
             a
             lesse
             margent
             :
             on
             the
             other
             side
             for
             the
             Latine
             a
             greater
             margent
             ;
             because
             the
             Latine
             may
             bee
             written
             in
             a
             
             lesse
             space
             then
             the
             English
             ;
             and
             also
             to
             write
             all
             the
             hard
             words
             in
             the
             margent
             of
             the
             Latine
             ,
             the
             Nominatiue
             case
             of
             the
             Nowne
             and
             the
             first
             person
             of
             the
             Verbe
             ,
             if
             so
             you
             please
             .
             Then
             cause
             so
             many
             as
             are
             to
             write
             Latine
             together
             (
             hauing
             books
             ,
             pen
             ,
             inke
             and
             copie
             before
             them
             ,
             and
             euery
             thing
             so
             fitted
             )
             to
             write
             as
             you
             speake
             ,
             so
             faire
             as
             possibly
             they
             can
             .
          
           
             Herein
             you
             are
             to
             dictate
             ▪
             or
             deliuer
             vnto
             them
             word
             by
             word
             ,
             
             the
             English
             of
             the
             sentence
             ,
             which
             you
             would
             haue
             them
             to
             turne
             into
             Latine
             ;
             &
             to
             do
             it
             according
             to
             the
             manner
             of
             the
             Grammaticall
             translation
             ,
             euery
             word
             in
             that
             order
             &
             in
             propriety
             of
             English
             ,
             answering
             the
             Latine
             as
             neer
             as
             you
             can
             .
             Also
             ,
             you
             are
             to
             vtter
             each
             word
             leasurely
             and
             treatably
             ;
             pronouncing
             euery
             part
             of
             it
             ,
             so
             as
             euery
             one
             may
             write
             both
             as
             fast
             as
             you
             speake
             ,
             and
             also
             faire
             and
             true
             together
             .
          
           
             And
             to
             the
             end
             to
             helpe
             for
             writing
             true
             Orthographie
             ,
             
             besides
             the
             former
             knowledge
             of
             spelling
             ;
             as
             they
             are
             writing
             ,
             cause
             euerie
             one
             in
             order
             to
             spell
             his
             2.
             or
             3.
             words
             together
             ,
             speaking
             vp
             ,
             that
             all
             his
             fellowes
             may
             heare
             ,
             &
             may
             goe
             on
             in
             writing
             ,
             as
             fast
             as
             he
             spels
             and
             you
             speake
             .
             Those
             who
             can
             write
             faster
             to
             take
             paines
             to
             write
             fairer
             ;
             your selfe
             also
             to
             walke
             amongst
             them
             in
             the
             meane
             time
             ,
             to
             see
             that
             euery
             one
             of
             them
             write
             true
             &
             faire
             ,
             and
             to
             shew
             them
             their
             faults
             by
             pointing
             them
             to
             their
             copies
             ,
             and
             vsing
             like
             directions
             mentioned
             in
             the
             helps
             of
             writing
             ,
             of
             which
             I
             spake
             before
             .
          
           
             After
             ;
             when
             they
             haue
             thus
             set
             down
             the
             English
             ,
             cause
             euery
             one
             in
             the
             like
             order
             to
             make
             his
             word
             or
             two
             in
             latin
             ,
             after
             the
             maner
             which
             was
             shewed
             before
             for
             making
             latine
             the
             very
             words
             of
             the
             Author
             in
             the
             natural
             or
             Grāmatical
             order
             :
             &
             cause
             them
             al
             to
             write
             the
             same
             words
             ,
             as
             he
             speaks
             ,
             vnless
             any
             of
             them
             be
             able
             to
             make
             it
             before
             of
             themselues
             ;
             who
             may
             correct
             ,
             as
             they
             heare
             their
             fellowes
             to
             make
             it
             .
             Cause
             also
             euery
             one
             to
             spel
             the
             words
             which
             he
             hath
             made
             in
             Latine
             ,
             like
             as
             they
             did
             in
             English
             ,
             so
             as
             all
             may
             heare
             ,
             &
             go
             surely
             in
             writing
             true
             Orthography
             in
             Latine
             likewise
             .
          
           
           
             And
             when
             they
             haue
             done
             a
             sentence
             ,
             
             or
             so
             much
             as
             you
             thinke
             good
             for
             a
             time
             ,
             then
             cause
             them
             to
             the
             end
             to
             commit
             it
             the
             better
             to
             memorie
             ,
             to
             trie
             which
             of
             them
             can
             repeate
             the
             soonest
             without
             booke
             ,
             that
             which
             they
             haue
             made
             .
             First
             saying
             the
             English
             sentence
             ;
             then
             giuing
             it
             in
             Latine
             ,
             or
             construing
             it
             without
             booke
             :
             which
             all
             of
             them
             who
             are
             apt
             ,
             will
             doe
             presently
             ,
             or
             with
             a
             very
             little
             meditation
             .
             
             Or
             ,
             which
             is
             shortest
             of
             all
             ,
             appoint
             them
             folding
             their
             bookes
             ,
             to
             looke
             only
             on
             the
             English
             ,
             and
             read
             or
             construe
             it
             into
             Latine
             :
             Or
             on
             the
             Latine
             ,
             to
             reade
             or
             construe
             it
             into
             English.
             Thus
             as
             time
             will
             permit
             .
          
           
             By
             this
             meanes
             you
             shall
             haue
             a
             certaine
             direction
             in
             all
             things
             ,
             
             both
             for
             your selfe
             and
             your
             schollar
             ,
             to
             goe
             truely
             and
             surely
             ,
             both
             for
             propriety
             ,
             Latine
             ,
             phrase
             ,
             and
             whatsoeue●
             you
             can
             desire
             .
             By
             this
             exercise
             also
             your
             schollar
             shall
             get
             both
             Writing
             ,
             English
             and
             Latine
             ,
             all
             vnder
             one
             .
             And
             therefore
             an
             howre
             may
             bee
             well
             imployed
             daily
             in
             this
             exercise
             .
          
           
             And
             to
             imprint
             this
             ,
             
             yet
             better
             ;
             you
             may
             cause
             them
             the
             next
             morning
             at
             shewing
             their
             exercise
             made
             that
             night
             ,
             to
             repeate
             together
             with
             it
             ,
             that
             againe
             which
             they
             thus
             made
             the
             day
             before
             (
             if
             time
             permit
             )
             :
             Either
             some
             one
             to
             repeate
             all
             ,
             or
             moe
             ,
             euery
             one
             a
             peece
             ,
             or
             as
             time
             will
             permit
             ;
             but
             all
             to
             be
             able
             to
             do
             it
             as
             they
             are
             called
             forth
             .
             Through
             this
             also
             they
             shall
             from
             the
             first
             entrance
             ,
             get
             audacity
             and
             vtterance
             ,
             with
             good
             matter
             which
             will
             bring
             the
             Latine
             with
             it
             .
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               But
               how
               shall
               they
               doe
               for
               composing
               ,
               or
               right
               placing
               of
               their
               words
               ?
               which
               you
               know
               is
               a
               principal
               matter
               in
               writing
               pure
               Latine
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               I
               would
               haue
               them
               first
               for
               a
               time
               exercised
               in
               this
               plaine
               naturall
               order
               ;
               
               for
               this
               is
               that
               which
               Grammar
               teacheth
               :
               and
               then
               to
               compose
               or
               place
               finely
               ;
               which
               belongeth
               to
               Rhetorick
               ,
               after
               .
               As
               first
               to
               write
               well
               in
               prose
               ,
               before
               they
               beginne
               in
               verse
               :
               so
               in
               prose
               ,
               to
               goe
               vpright
               and
               strongly
               before
               they
               learne
               to
               go
               finely
               ;
               and
               as
               M.
               Askam
               speaketh
               ,
               first
               to
               goe
               ,
               before
               they
               learne
               to
               dance
               .
               But
               for
               entring
               them
               into
               composition
               ,
               thus
               you
               may
               do
               .
            
             
             
               1
               When
               they
               haue
               made
               it
               in
               the
               naturall
               order
               ,
               onely
               reade
               vnto
               them
               how
               Tully
               ,
               or
               the
               Authour
               ,
               whom
               their
               sentence
               is
               taken
               of
               it
               ,
               doth
               place
               it
               ,
               and
               some
               reason
               of
               his
               varying
               ,
               and
               cause
               them
               to
               repeat
               both
               wayes
               ,
               first
               as
               they
               haue
               written
               ,
               after
               in
               composition
               .
            
             
               2
               After
               that
               they
               haue
               beene
               practiced
               a
               while
               in
               the
               former
               plaine
               manner
               ,
               you
               may
               make
               them
               to
               doe
               thus
               :
               Cause
               their
               bookes
               to
               be
               ruled
               in
               three
               columnes
               ;
               in
               the
               first
               to
               write
               the
               English
               ,
               in
               the
               second
               the
               Latine
               verbatim
               ,
               in
               the
               third
               to
               write
               in
               composition
               ,
               to
               try
               who
               can
               come
               the
               neerest
               vnto
               the
               Authour
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               Although
               I
               take
               it
               that
               I
               do
               conceiue
               your
               meaning
               in
               all
               ,
               and
               do
               see
               an
               euident
               reason
               of
               euerything
               :
               yet
               because
               examples
               do
               most
               liuely
               demonstrate
               any
               matter
               ;
               I
               pray
               you
               set
               me
               downe
               one
               example
               hereof
               ,
               and
               shew
               me
               what
               Authour
               you
               thinke
               most
               fit
               to
               gather
               the
               sentences
               forth
               of
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               In
               stead
               of
               your
               Authour
               ,
               
               I
               thinke
               and
               finde
               Tullies
               sentences
               the
               fittest
               ;
               and
               of
               those
               sentences
               ,
               to
               make
               choise
               of
               such
               in
               euery
               Chapter
               ,
               as
               are
               most
               easie
               and
               familiar
               to
               the
               capacity
               of
               the
               children
               .
               This
               booke
               I
               doe
               acount
               of
               all
               other
               to
               bee
               the
               principall
               ;
               the
               Latine
               of
               Tully
               being
               the
               purest
               and
               best
               ,
               by
               the
               generall
               applause
               of
               all
               the
               Learned
               :
               and
               because
               that
               booke
               is
               as
               a
               most
               pleasant
               posie
               ,
               composed
               of
               all
               the
               sweete
               smelling
               flowers
               ,
               picked
               of
               purpose
               out
               of
               all
               his
               workes
               ;
               that
               one
               booke
               ,
               together
               with
               the
               bookes
               which
               the
               children
               haue
               or
               doe
               learne
               ,
               shall
               also
               helpe
               to
               furnish
               them
               with
               some
               sentences
               ,
               contayning
               some
               of
               the
               choysest
               matter
               and
               wordes
               ,
               belonging
               to
               all
               morall
               matters
               whatsoeuer
               ;
               whether
               to
               vnderstand
               ,
               write
               ,
               or
               speake
               thereof
               ;
               that
               they
               shall
               bee
               able
               to
               goe
               forward
               with
               much
               ease
               and
               delight
               ;
               first
               in
               it
               ,
               and
               then
               in
               the
               other
               sentences
               adioyned
               to
               it
               ,
               or
               what
               exercise
               you
               shall
               thinke
               fitte
               .
            
             
               For
               an
               example
               ;
               take
               these
               little
               sentences
               ,
               which
               heere
               follow
               ,
               as
               they
               are
               set
               downe
               in
               the
               first
               Chapter
               of
               
               Tullies
               sentences
               ,
               
                 De
                 Deo
                 eiusque
                 natura
              
               ,
               dictating
               the
               words
               to
               them
               plainly
               ,
               as
               the
               children
               may
               most
               readily
               make
               them
               in
               Latine
               .
               In
               their
               little
               paper
               bookes
               they
               may
               write
               the
               English
               on
               the
               first
               side
               ,
               with
               the
               hard
               Latine
               wordes
               in
               the
               Margent
               ,
               the
               Latine
               on
               the
               other
               ouer
               against
               it
               ,
               in
               two
               columns
               ;
               the
               first
               plaine
               after
               the
               Grammar
               order
               ,
               the
               later
               placed
               after
               the
               order
               of
               the
               Authour
               :
               your selfe
               may
               make
               the
               wordes
               or
               phrases
               plaine
               to
               them
               ,
               as
               they
               are
               set
               in
               the
               margent
               .
            
             
               
                 
                   An
                   Example
                   of
                   Dictating
                   in
                   English
                   ,
                   and
                   setting
                   downe
                   both
                   English
                   and
                   Latine
                   ;
                   and
                   the
                   Latine
                   both
                   plainly
                   and
                   elegantly
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     Dictating
                     according
                     to
                     the
                     naturall
                     order
                     .
                  
                   
                     Ordo
                     Grammaticus
                     .
                  
                   
                     Ordo
                     Ciceronianus
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     No
                     man
                     a
                     hath
                     been
                     b
                     euer
                     great
                     without
                     
                       (
                       verb
                    
                     )
                     some
                     diuine
                     c
                     inspiration
                     .
                  
                   
                     Nemo
                     fuit
                     vnquam
                     magnus
                     sine
                     afflatu
                     aliqu●
                     Diuino
                     .
                  
                   
                     Nemo
                     magnus
                     sine
                     aliquo
                     afflatu
                     diuino
                     vnquam
                     fuit
                     .
                     2.
                     de
                     Natura
                     Deor.
                     
                  
                
                 
                   
                     There
                     is
                     nothing
                     which
                     God
                     cannot
                     d
                     effect
                     ,
                     and
                     truely
                     without
                     any
                     labour
                     .
                  
                   
                     Est
                     nihil
                     quod
                     Deus
                     non
                     possit
                     efficere
                     ,
                     &
                     quidem
                     sine
                     labore
                     vllo
                     .
                  
                   
                     Nihil
                     est
                     quod
                     Deus
                     efficere
                     non
                     possit
                     ,
                     &
                     quidem
                     sine
                     labore
                     vllo
                     .
                     3.
                     de
                     Nat.
                     Deor.
                     
                  
                
                 
                   
                     GOD
                     cannot
                     e
                     be
                     ignorāt
                     f
                     of
                     what
                     minde
                     euery
                     one
                     is
                     .
                  
                   
                     Deus
                     non
                     potest
                     ignorare
                     ,
                     qua
                     mēte
                     quisque
                     sit
                     .
                  
                   
                     Ignorare
                     Deus
                     non
                     potest
                     ,
                     qua
                     quisque
                     mente
                     sit
                     .
                     2.
                     de
                     Diuinatione
                     .
                  
                
              
            
             
               In
               these
               examples
               all
               is
               very
               plaine
               ;
               except
               that
               in
               the
               
               first
               sentence
               we
               say
               ,
               &
               so
               translate
               in
               our
               English
               tongue
               ,
               some
               diuine
               inspiration
               ;
               according
               as
               it
               is
               more
               elegantly
               in
               Latine
               ,
               the
               Adiectiues
               vsually
               before
               the
               Substantiues
               ;
               and
               not
               inspiration
               some
               diuine
               ,
               which
               would
               bee
               very
               harsh
               ;
               and
               so
               likewise
               after
               [
               without
               any
               labour
               ]
               although
               in
               the
               Grammaticall
               order
               in
               the
               Latine
               ,
               the
               Substantiue
               is
               to
               be
               set
               before
               the
               Adiectiue
               ;
               as
               the
               childe
               is
               to
               beginne
               to
               make
               the
               Substantiue
               in
               Latine
               before
               the
               Adiectiue
               ,
               and
               to
               make
               the
               Adiectiues
               to
               agree
               vnto
               ,
               or
               to
               bee
               framed
               according
               to
               the
               Substantiues
               ;
               as
               we
               haue
               shewed
               in
               the
               rules
               obserued
               in
               the
               Grammaticall
               translations
               .
            
             
               If
               you
               thinke
               this
               course
               ouer
               tedious
               to
               write
               both
               waies
               in
               Latine
               ;
               
               then
               let
               them
               turne
               it
               only
               into
               the
               naturall
               order
               ,
               
               thus
               verbatim
               by
               pen
               :
               &
               afterwards
               in
               the
               repeating
               that
               which
               they
               haue
               made
               ,
               ask
               of
               them
               how
               Tully
               would
               place
               each
               word
               ,
               and
               to
               giue
               you
               reasons
               thereof
               :
               and
               then
               to
               reade
               the
               sentence
               in
               the
               booke
               vnto
               them
               ;
               so
               by
               the
               book
               and
               some
               rules
               to
               direct
               them
               how
               to
               proceede
               .
            
             
               For
               further
               practice
               in
               translating
               amongst
               all
               the
               higher
               ,
               
               after
               they
               grow
               in
               some
               good
               sort
               to
               write
               true
               Latine
               verbatim
               ,
               according
               to
               the
               former
               kinde
               of
               translating
               ;
               let
               them
               still
               write
               down
               the
               English
               as
               you
               dictate
               it
               ,
               or
               out
               of
               a
               translation
               ;
               and
               trie
               who
               can
               come
               neerest
               vnto
               Tully
               of
               themselues
               ,
               composing
               at
               the
               first
               ;
               and
               then
               after
               examine
               their
               exercises
               ,
               bringing
               them
               to
               the
               Authour
               .
            
             
               For
               preuenting
               of
               stealing
               ,
               
               or
               any
               helpe
               by
               the
               Latine
               booke
               if
               you
               doubt
               thereof
               ,
               you
               may
               both
               cause
               them
               to
               write
               in
               your
               presence
               ,
               and
               also
               make
               choise
               of
               such
               places
               which
               they
               know
               not
               where
               to
               find
               .
            
             
               If
               you
               catch
               any
               one
               writing
               after
               another
               ,
               
               and
               so
               deceyuing
               both
               himselfe
               and
               you
               ,
               correct
               him
               surely
               ,
               who
               suffereth
               him
               to
               steale
               .
            
             
               For
               going
               on
               faster
               ,
               
               &
               dispatching
               more
               in
               translating
               ;
               beside
               their
               writing
               so
               ,
               
               you
               may
               only
               aske
               them
               the
               words
               or
               phrases
               in
               English
               ,
               how
               they
               can
               vtter
               them
               in
               Latine
               ;
               and
               then
               let
               them
               giue
               them
               in
               Latine
               ,
               euery
               one
               his
               piece
               :
               
               first
               naturally
               ,
               after
               placing
               each
               sentence
               .
               Thus
               to
               goe
               through
               daily
               a
               side
               ,
               or
               a
               leaf
               at
               a
               time
               ,
               or
               as
               leasure
               wil
               serue
               .
            
             
               Besides
               these
               ,
               
               this
               may
               be
               a
               most
               profitable
               course
               as
               they
               proceed
               to
               cause
               them
               to
               translate
               of
               themselues
               Esops
               Fables
               ,
               
               or
               Tullies
               sentences
               ,
               or
               the
               like
               ,
               into
               plaine
               naturall
               English
               ,
               so
               as
               was
               shewed
               ;
               and
               to
               cause
               them
               the
               next
               day
               ,
               for
               their
               exercise
               ,
               
               to
               bring
               the
               same
               thus
               in
               English
               ,
               &
               to
               be
               able
               without
               book
               ,
               first
               to
               make
               a
               report
               of
               it
               (
               striuing
               in
               the
               Fables
               ,
               
               who
               shall
               tell
               his
               tale
               in
               best
               words
               &
               manner
               )
               &
               then
               to
               reade
               it
               into
               the
               Latin
               of
               the
               Author
               out
               of
               the
               English
               ,
               and
               be
               able
               to
               proue
               it
               ,
               and
               where
               they
               haue
               read
               the
               hard
               words
               .
               And
               after
               all
               these
               to
               trie
               (
               if
               your
               leasure
               will
               serue
               )
               how
               they
               can
               report
               the
               same
               in
               Latine
               ,
               eyther
               in
               the
               words
               of
               the
               Authour
               ,
               or
               otherwise
               ,
               as
               they
               can
               of
               themselues
               ;
               which
               all
               who
               are
               pregnant
               ,
               and
               will
               take
               paines
               ,
               will
               be
               able
               to
               doe
               very
               readily
               :
               by
               this
               you
               shall
               finde
               a
               great
               increase
               .
            
             
               Lastly
               ,
               this
               is
               yet
               the
               most
               speedy
               and
               profitable
               way
               of
               all
               ,
               
               as
               my
               experience
               doth
               assure
               me
               ,
               to
               cause
               them
               to
               reade
               
                 ex
                 tempore
              
               some
               easie
               Author
               daily
               ,
               
               out
               of
               the
               translation
               into
               the
               Latine
               of
               the
               Author
               ,
               or
               out
               of
               the
               Author
               into
               English
               ;
               first
               plainly
               ,
               then
               artificially
               .
               And
               to
               this
               purpose
               I
               haue
               translated
               ,
               as
               I
               shewed
               ,
               Corderius
               Dialogues
               ,
               whose
               latin
               you
               know
               to
               be
               most
               easie
               ,
               familar
               ,
               and
               pure
               ;
               and
               also
               
                 Terentius
                 Christianus
              
               ;
               with
               Tullies
               sentences
               to
               helpe
               hereunto
               .
            
             
               For
               further
               translating
               ,
               or
               turning
               any
               Author
               ,
               or
               piece
               of
               Author
               ,
               
               or
               other
               matter
               into
               Latine
               ;
               if
               it
               be
               difficult
               ,
               direct
               your
               Schollars
               to
               resolue
               the
               speech
               into
               the
               naturall
               order
               of
               the
               words
               ,
               so
               neere
               as
               they
               can
               .
               Secondly
               ,
               if
               there
               be
               any
               phrase
               ,
               which
               they
               cannot
               expresse
               ;
               to
               resolue
               &
               expresse
               it
               by
               some
               other
               easier
               words
               &
               phrase
               of
               speech
               ,
               with
               which
               they
               are
               better
               acquainted
               ;
               &
               to
               do
               it
               by
               Periphrasis
               ,
               that
               is
               moe
               words
               ,
               if
               need
               be
               .
               Besides
               ,
               for
               such
               English
               words
               which
               they
               know
               not
               to
               giue
               Latin
               vnto
               ;
               
               let
               them
               vse
               the
               help
               of
               some
               Dictionary
               :
               as
               Holyoke
               or
               Barret
               :
               Holyoke
               is
               best
               ,
               wherein
               the
               proper
               words
               and
               more
               pure
               ,
               are
               first
               placed
               .
            
             
               In
               all
               such
               translating
               either
               English
               or
               Latine
               ,
               
               this
               is
               carefully
               to
               bee
               obserued
               ;
               euer
               to
               consider
               well
               the
               scope
               
               and
               drift
               of
               the
               Author
               &
               the
               circumstances
               of
               the
               place
               ;
               and
               to
               labour
               to
               expresse
               liuely
               ,
               not
               only
               the
               matter
               ,
               but
               also
               the
               force
               of
               each
               phrase
               ,
               so
               neere
               as
               the
               propriety
               of
               the
               tongue
               will
               permit
               .
            
             
               But
               for
               all
               this
               matter
               of
               translating
               ,
               
               that
               practice
               of
               reading
               the
               English
               out
               of
               the
               Authors
               ,
               and
               the
               Authors
               backe
               againe
               out
               of
               the
               translations
               ,
               shall
               fully
               teach
               it
               ,
               so
               far
               as
               it
               concerneth
               the
               schollar
               for
               propriety
               &
               getting
               of
               the
               tongues
               .
               
               For
               translating
               any
               Latine
               Author
               into
               English
               ,
               only
               to
               expresse
               the
               sense
               and
               meaning
               of
               it
               ;
               the
               sense
               &
               drift
               of
               the
               Latine
               Author
               is
               principally
               to
               be
               obserued
               ,
               and
               not
               the
               phrase
               nor
               propriety
               of
               the
               tongue
               ,
               to
               bee
               so
               much
               sought
               to
               bee
               expressed
               or
               stucken
               vnto
               .
               The
               like
               may
               be
               said
               for
               the
               Latine
               .
               But
               this
               kind
               of
               translating
               into
               Latine
               ,
               
               is
               only
               for
               such
               schollars
               as
               are
               wel
               grounded
               thorough
               long
               exercise
               &
               practice
               in
               the
               former
               kind
               of
               Grāmatical
               translation
               ,
               and
               in
               Tullies
               or
               their
               Authors
               phrase
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               I
               hope
               I
               vnderstand
               you
               ,
               right
               ,
               and
               doe
               like
               very
               wel
               of
               all
               ,
               so
               far
               as
               I
               conceiue
               .
               Only
               let
               me
               intreate
               you
               ,
               as
               in
               the
               former
               ,
               to
               rehearse
               the
               principall
               heads
               briefly
               concerning
               this
               matter
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               This
               is
               the
               sum
               of
               all
               ,
               
               for
               this
               entrance
               in
               making
               and
               writing
               Latine
               .
               1.
               
               Readiness
               in
               their
               rules
               ,
               chiefly
               in
               examples
               of
               Nownes
               and
               Verbes
               .
               2.
               
               Making
               their
               owne
               lectures
               into
               Latine
               daily
               .
               3.
               
               Continuall
               reading
               or
               repeating
               lectures
               and
               all
               their
               Authors
               which
               they
               haue
               learned
               ,
               out
               of
               the
               Grammaticall
               translations
               ,
               into
               the
               Latine
               of
               the
               Authors
               .
               4.
               
               Translating
               into
               Tullies
               Latine
               ,
               out
               of
               a
               perfect
               Grāmaticall
               translation
               ,
               or
               as
               the
               English
               is
               so
               dictated
               vnto
               them
               ,
               &
               reading
               or
               repeating
               the
               same
               out
               of
               the
               English
               into
               Latine
               .
               And
               lastly
               ,
               out
               of
               the
               natural
               order
               ,
               into
               the
               order
               of
               Tully
               .
               5.
               
               Translating
               into
               English
               Grammatically
               of
               themselues
               ,
               and
               reading
               forth
               of
               the
               English
               into
               the
               Latine
               of
               the
               Author
               ,
               or
               writing
               it
               downe
               .
            
             
               By
               these
               means
               constantly
               practiced
               ,
               they
               wil
               soone
               be
               able
               to
               make
               ,
               write
               ,
               or
               vtter
               any
               ordinary
               morall
               matter
               in
               pure
               and
               good
               phrase
               ;
               especially
               if
               the
               matter
               be
               deliuered
               
               vnto
               them
               in
               the
               naturall
               order
               of
               the
               words
               .
               Make
               triall
               :
               and
               I
               doubt
               not
               but
               you
               will
               not
               onely
               confirme
               it
               ,
               but
               still
               find
               out
               more
               for
               the
               common
               good
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             XI
             .
          
           
             Of
             the
             Artificiall
             order
             of
             composing
             or
             placing
             the
             words
             in
             prose
             ,
             according
             to
             Tully
             and
             the
             purest
             Latinists
             .
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               BVt
               yet
               here
               is
               one
               thing
               wanting
               :
               namely
               ,
               the
               rules
               which
               you
               spake
               of
               for
               composing
               or
               placing
               the
               words
               after
               the
               manner
               of
               the
               purest
               Latinists
               ;
               I
               meane
               for
               turning
               them
               forth
               of
               this
               naturall
               order
               ,
               into
               the
               Rhetoricall
               order
               ,
               or
               order
               of
               Tully
               ;
               without
               which
               ,
               the
               truest
               and
               best
               Latine
               is
               little
               worth
               .
               This
               I
               haue
               found
               very
               hard
               for
               my
               schollars
               to
               performe
               ;
               
               neyther
               haue
               I
               had
               any
               certain
               grounds
               that
               they
               might
               stand
               vpon
               .
               Moreouer
               ,
               this
               I
               haue
               knowne
               for
               certaine
               ,
               that
               many
               young
               schollars
               the
               more
               confusedly
               that
               they
               can
               transpose
               ,
               
               or
               disorder
               the
               words
               of
               a
               sentence
               ,
               the
               more
               excellent
               they
               think
               it
               to
               be
               ,
               when
               as
               it
               is
               indeed
               most
               absurd
               to
               the
               learned
               eare
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               Although
               this
               may
               seeme
               to
               belong
               to
               Declamations
               and
               Orations
               ,
               because
               therein
               there
               is
               the
               greatest
               labor
               for
               curious
               composition
               and
               setting
               of
               words
               ,
               as
               wherin
               schollars
               stand
               to
               shewe
               most
               art
               ,
               indeauouring
               to
               perswade
               :
               
               yet
               it
               is
               in
               truth
               generall
               to
               all
               Latine
               ,
               whether
               Translations
               ,
               Epistles
               ,
               Theames
               or
               whatsoeuer
               ,
               and
               doth
               bring
               great
               grace
               and
               commendation
               to
               euery
               part
               thereof
               ;
               and
               contrarily
               being
               neglected
               ,
               doth
               detract
               very
               much
               from
               the
               most
               excellent
               speech
               ,
               be
               the
               matter
               and
               words
               neuer
               so
               choise
               .
               And
               because
               there
               is
               speciall
               vse
               of
               it
               ,
               in
               
               the
               practice
               of
               all
               the
               translations
               :
               and
               in
               all
               this
               matter
               of
               making
               Latine
               for
               turning
               or
               composing
               out
               of
               the
               Grammaticall
               order
               ,
               into
               the
               order
               of
               the
               Author
               ,
               I
               will
               afforde
               you
               the
               best
               help
               I
               can
               .
               But
               forsomuch
               as
               neither
               Tully
               nor
               any
               of
               the
               purest
               Latinists
               do
               alwais
               obserue
               the
               same
               order
               ,
               and
               therfore
               I
               take
               it
               that
               no
               certaine
               rules
               can
               bee
               giuen
               as
               perpetuall
               ;
               I
               will
               take
               those
               which
               Macropedius
               hath
               set
               downe
               ,
               as
               being
               the
               most
               easie
               of
               all
               that
               I
               know
               .
               He
               hath
               sundry
               generall
               precepts
               .
            
          
           
             
               Precepts
               of
               Composition
               or
               placing
               the
               words
               in
               Latine
               ,
               as
               they
               are
               set
               downe
               by
               Macropedius
               ,
               in
               the
               end
               of
               his
               method
               of
               making
               Epistles
               .
            
             
               
                 The
                 I.
                 Precept
                 .
              
               
                 Of
                 placing
                 the
                 Nominatiue
                 case
                 ,
                 the
                 Verbe
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 oblique
                 case
                 .
              
               
                 A
                 Perfect
                 sentence
                 consisting
                 most
                 commonly
                 of
                 a
                 Nominatiue
                 case
                 ,
                 a
                 Verbe
                 and
                 an
                 oblique
                 case
                 ;
                 this
                 order
                 is
                 kept
                 in
                 placing
                 ordinarily
              
               
                 1
                 The
                 oblique
                 cases
                 (
                 that
                 ,
                 
                 is
                 all
                 besides
                 the
                 Nominatiue
                 and
                 the
                 Vocatiue
                 )
                 are
                 commonly
                 placed
                 in
                 the
                 beginning
                 ,
                 the
                 Nominatiue
                 case
                 in
                 the
                 midst
                 ,
                 
                 the
                 Verbe
                 in
                 the
                 end
                 :
                 For
                 example
                 ;
                 
                 in
                 the
                 sentence
                 following
                 ,
                 the
                 Grammaticall
                 order
                 is
                 thus
                 ;
              
               
                 Caesar
                 occupauit
                 ciuitatem
                 munitissimam
                 hostium
                 .
              
               
                 The
                 Artificiall
                 order
                 is
                 vsually
                 thus
                 :
              
               
                 Munitissimam
                 hostium
                 ciuitatem
                 Caesar
                 occupanit
                 .
              
               
                 Yet
                 if
                 the
                 oblique
                 case
                 bee
                 of
                 a
                 Nowne
                 negatiue
                 ,
                 
                 or
                 a
                 Nowne
                 of
                 denying
                 ,
                 it
                 may
                 be
                 put
                 elegantly
                 in
                 the
                 end
                 :
                 as
              
               
               
                 Caesare
                 fortunatiorem
                 legimus
                 n●minem
                 .
              
               
                 Yea
                 ,
                 any
                 Adiectiue
                 or
                 Participle
                 may
                 bee
                 put
                 so
                 ,
                 when
                 the
                 chief
                 point
                 of
                 the
                 matter
                 or
                 meaning
                 resteth
                 in
                 it
                 :
                 as
              
               
                 Caesarem
                 in
                 morteferè
                 omnes
                 putant
                 miserum
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 The
                 II.
                 Precept
                 .
              
               
                 THe
                 Adiectiue
                 is
                 ordinarily
                 to
                 bee
                 placed
                 before
                 the
                 Substantiue
                 .
                 
                 And
                 between
                 the
                 Adiectiue
                 and
                 the
                 Substantiue
                 may
                 bee
                 fitly
                 placed
                 the
                 Gentitiue
                 case
                 of
                 the
                 later
                 of
                 two
                 Substantiues
                 ;
                 
                 as
                 in
                 this
                 sentence
                 the
                 Grammaticall
                 order
                 is
                 :
              
               
                 Seuer
                 itas
                 magna
                 Caesaris
                 incussit
                 terrorem
                 hostibus
                 .
              
               
                 The
                 artificiall
                 order
                 thus
                 ;
              
               
                 Terrorem
                 hostibus
                 magna
                 Caesaris
                 seueritas
                 incussit
                 .
              
               
                 Also
                 betweene
                 the
                 Adiectiue
                 and
                 the
                 Substantiue
                 of
                 the
                 Genitiue
                 case
                 ,
                 
                 the
                 word
                 gouerning
                 the
                 Genitiue
                 case
                 ,
                 may
                 be
                 elegantly
                 placed
                 ,
                 as
                 in
                 this
                 sentence
                 :
              
               
                 Clementia
                 Caesariae
                 maiestatis
                 dedit
                 pacem
                 ,
                 &
                 tranquillitatem
                 prouincijs
                 .
              
               
                 The
                 artificiall
                 order
                 may
                 be
                 thus
                 ;
              
               
                 Caesareae
                 clementia
                 maiestatis
                 pacem
                 &
                 tranquillitatem
                 prouincijs
                 dedit
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 The
                 III.
                 Precept
                 .
              
               
                 BEtween
                 the
                 Adiectiue
                 and
                 the
                 Substantiue
                 ,
                 
                 Tully
                 somtime
                 placeth
                 the
                 Verbe
                 in
                 like
                 manner
                 ;
                 
                 sometime
                 the
                 Aduerbe
                 ,
                 
                 sometime
                 the
                 Coniunction
                 ,
                 sometime
                 the
                 Preposition
                 alone
                 ,
                 
                 or
                 with
                 his
                 case
                 :
                 as
                 ,
              
               
                 Magnum
                 profecto
                 laborem
                 Caesar
                 assumpsit
                 ,
                 quem
                 fermè
                 ab
                 ipsis
                 ad
                 nos
                 venisse
                 Gadibus
                 ai●nt
                 ,
                 vt
                 hostes
                 suae
                 quidem
                 maiestati
                 rebelles
                 ,
                 nostris
                 autem
                 supra
                 modum
                 rebus
                 infestos
                 armis
                 subigeret
                 .
                 Quam
                 ob
                 causam
                 ,
                 perpetuum
                 illi
                 amorem
                 ▪
                 &
                 gratiam
                 debemus
                 immortalem
                 .
              
            
             
               
               
                 The
                 III.
                 Precept
                 .
              
               
                 Of
                 Aduerbes
                 and
                 Prepositions
                 .
              
               
                 ADuerbs
                 and
                 Prepositions
                 with
                 their
                 cases
                 may
                 be
                 placed
                 any
                 where
                 ,
                 
                 wheresoeuer
                 they
                 shall
                 seeme
                 to
                 stand
                 most
                 fitly
                 to
                 please
                 the
                 eare
                 :
                 yet
                 most
                 elegantly
                 before
                 the
                 Verbe
                 or
                 Participle
                 which
                 they
                 declare
                 .
                 As
                 ,
              
               
                 Debitam
                 pro
                 contemptu
                 suis
                 hostibus
                 diuque
                 dilatam
                 seueritatem
                 ,
                 Caesar
                 tandem
                 exhibuit
                 ,
                 sedclement
                 issimè
                 mitigauit
                 .
              
               
                 These
                 are
                 the
                 principall
                 of
                 his
                 rules
                 which
                 are
                 necessarie
                 .
              
               
                 To
                 these
                 may
                 be
                 added
                 ,
              
               
                 1.
                 
                 That
                 this
                 is
                 to
                 be
                 obserued
                 very
                 vsually
                 :
                 
                 That
                 the
                 word
                 gouerned
                 is
                 commonly
                 placed
                 before
                 the
                 words
                 gouerning
                 ,
                 
                 contrary
                 to
                 the
                 Grammaticall
                 order
                 .
                 As
                 here
                 .
              
               
                 Fortitudo
                 Caesaris
                 potitur
                 victoria
                 .
              
               
                 The
                 artificiall
                 placing
                 may
                 be
                 fitly
                 .
              
               
                 Caesaris
                 fortitudo
                 victoria
                 potitur
                 .
              
               
                 Also
                 if
                 in
                 a
                 sentence
                 there
                 bee
                 mention
                 of
                 two
                 persons
                 ,
                 
                 the
                 one
                 as
                 it
                 were
                 an
                 agent
                 the
                 other
                 a
                 patient
                 ,
                 they
                 stand
                 together
                 most
                 vsually
                 and
                 elegantly
                 ;
                 
                 the
                 agent
                 commonly
                 first
                 :
                 as
                 ,
              
               
                 Caesar
                 did
                 great
                 wrong
                 to
                 Pompey
                 in
                 this
                 point
                 .
              
               
                 Hac
                 vna
                 in
                 re
                 magnam
                 Caesar
                 Pompeio
                 iniuriam
                 fecit
                 .
              
               
                 These
                 Precepts
                 are
                 set
                 down
                 ,
                 
                 to
                 the
                 end
                 to
                 direct
                 young
                 schollars
                 ;
                 yet
                 so
                 as
                 we
                 must
                 not
                 thinke
                 ,
                 as
                 I
                 sayd
                 ,
                 that
                 these
                 are
                 euer
                 to
                 bee
                 followed
                 strictly
                 ;
                 because
                 neither
                 Tully
                 ,
                 nor
                 Caesar
                 himselfe
                 ,
                 nor
                 any
                 who
                 haue
                 been
                 most
                 curious
                 ,
                 did
                 euer
                 obserue
                 the
                 same
                 :
                 for
                 that
                 should
                 be
                 a
                 falt
                 rather
                 ,
                 as
                 we
                 shall
                 see
                 after
                 .
              
               
                 Notwithstanding
                 ,
                 by
                 practice
                 in
                 composing
                 ,
                 and
                 obseruation
                 
                 in
                 Tully
                 ,
                 
                 Caesar
                 &
                 the
                 best
                 Authors
                 ,
                 and
                 trying
                 how
                 neere
                 we
                 can
                 come
                 vnto
                 them
                 in
                 translating
                 into
                 Latine
                 ,
                 by
                 cōparing
                 ours
                 with
                 theirs
                 ;
                 and
                 finally
                 weighing
                 how
                 euery
                 sentence
                 may
                 so
                 fall
                 as
                 may
                 best
                 please
                 the
                 eare
                 ;
                 schollars
                 may
                 attaine
                 much
                 certaintie
                 and
                 commendation
                 herein
                 .
              
            
          
           
             
               More
               exquisite
               obseruation
               in
               placing
               and
               measuring
               sentences
               .
            
             
               FOr
               most
               exquisite
               obseruation
               of
               placing
               and
               measuring
               sentences
               ,
               
               Rhetorically
               ,
               in
               prose
               by
               schollars
               of
               riper
               iudgement
               ,
               in
               their
               Theames
               ,
               Declamations
               ,
               Orations
               or
               the
               like
               ,
               reade
               Talaeus
               Rhetoricke
               
                 de
                 Numero
                 Oratorio
                 .
                 Cap.
              
               17.
               18.
               
            
             
               Out
               of
               which
               Chapter
               ,
               and
               out
               of
               the
               Commentaries
               of
               Minos
               vpon
               them
               ,
               these
               precepts
               may
               be
               further
               obserued
               ,
               which
               follow
               .
            
             
               1
               That
               the
               placing
               and
               measuring
               of
               the
               sentences
               in
               prose
               ,
               
               should
               be
               both
               vnlike
               to
               the
               placing
               in
               poetrie
               ,
               and
               also
               each
               sentence
               vnlike
               other
               .
               
               And
               therefore
               that
               the
               schollar
               make
               no
               verses
               in
               his
               prose
               ,
               but
               that
               he
               shun
               them
               warily
               .
            
             
               Though
               in
               any
               exercise
               in
               prose
               ,
               
               chiefly
               in
               Theames
               ,
               he
               may
               cite
               verses
               out
               of
               other
               Authors
               eyther
               for
               authoritie
               or
               delight
               .
            
             
               2
               That
               the
               beginning
               or
               ending
               of
               a
               sentence
               in
               prose
               ,
               
               be
               not
               the
               beginning
               or
               ending
               of
               a
               verse
               ;
               although
               this
               be
               not
               so
               faulty
               in
               the
               beginning
               of
               a
               sentence
               ,
               as
               in
               the
               end
               ;
               where
               the
               fault
               is
               more
               obserued
               .
            
             
               3
               That
               the
               ending
               of
               sentences
               bee
               specially
               weighed
               ,
               which
               are
               chiefly
               marked
               of
               all
               ;
               
               and
               therefore
               are
               to
               bee
               carefully
               varyed
               ,
               that
               they
               may
               not
               be
               displeasing
               .
            
             
               4
               That
               this
               curious
               obseruation
               of
               the
               endings
               neede
               not
               bee
               regarded
               aboue
               sixe
               syllables
               from
               the
               end
               ;
               
               and
               those
               to
               stand
               on
               feete
               of
               two
               syllables
               ,
               Trochees
               principally
               .
            
             
             
               5
               That
               we
               doe
               not
               continue
               the
               same
               feete
               in
               the
               ends
               ;
               
               but
               dispose
               them
               diuersly
               :
               not
               all
               long
               syllables
               ,
               nor
               all
               short
               ,
               vnlesse
               more
               seldome
               ;
               but
               commonly
               tempering
               long
               &
               short
               syllables
               together
               ,
               
               as
               Trochees
               and
               Iambicks
               ,
               sometimes
               Spondees
               and
               Perrichees
               ,
               yet
               so
               as
               wee
               be
               not
               curious
               .
            
             
               6
               That
               sentence
               is
               accounted
               most
               sweet
               and
               excellent
               which
               endeth
               in
               two
               Troches
               ;
               
               viz.
               the
               first
               syllable
               long
               ,
               the
               last
               short
               ,
               as
               in
               this
               sentence
               .
            
             
               Deindè
               patris
               dictum
               sapiens
               temeritas
               fil●●
               cōmprŏbā●it
               .
            
             
               This
               endeth
               in
               an
               Iambicke
               and
               two
               Trochees
               .
            
             
               Tully
               vsed
               this
               most
               often
               .
               
               So
               as
               in
               that
               one
               Oration
               
                 pro
                 Pompeio
              
               ,
               it
               is
               obserued
               to
               be
               an
               hundreth
               and
               fowrteene
               times
               .
            
             
               7.
               
               Yet
               the
               variety
               ought
               to
               be
               such
               ,
               that
               this
               art
               of
               placing
               or
               setting
               the
               number
               of
               syllables
               ,
               
               may
               not
               bee
               obserued
               of
               euerie
               one
               ,
               and
               so
               bee
               made
               enuious
               ,
               nor
               the
               curiositie
               ridiculous
               ;
               but
               to
               be
               laboured
               so
               as
               it
               may
               most
               delight
               and
               drawe
               on
               others
               .
            
             
               8.
               
               That
               the
               sounds
               of
               the
               very
               words
               and
               letters
               are
               the
               principall
               things
               to
               bee
               respected
               herein
               .
               
               For
               the
               elegant
               composition
               ,
               is
               that
               which
               is
               made
               by
               a
               sweet
               sound
               of
               letters
               and
               words
               .
            
             
               9.
               
               Therfore
               words
               of
               the
               best
               sound
               are
               to
               be
               obserued
               ;
               
               and
               amongst
               them
               most
               elegant
               Aduerbes
               and
               bonds
               of
               Coniunctions
               to
               bee
               noted
               diligentlie
               .
            
             
               Words
               sounding
               well
               are
               these
               :
               
                 
                   1.
                   
                   Verbals
                   :
                   as
                   ,
                   
                     Dominatrix
                     ,
                     gubernatrix
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   2.
                   
                   Compounds
                   :
                   as
                   ,
                   
                     pernoscere
                     ,
                     excruciari
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   3.
                   
                   
                     Superlatiues
                     :
                     as
                  
                   ,
                   Conspectus
                   iucundissimus
                   .
                   Ad
                   dicendum
                   paratissinus
                   .
                
                 
                   4.
                   
                   Words
                   of
                   mo
                   syllables
                   :
                   as
                   ,
                   
                     Moderatio
                     animi
                     .
                     Tempestas
                     anni
                  
                   .
                
              
            
             
             
               10
               Words
               which
               are
               insolent
               ,
               
               hard
               and
               out
               of
               vse
               ,
               are
               to
               be
               as
               warily
               auoided
               ,
               as
               rockes
               of
               Mariners
               .
            
             
               11
               That
               in
               all
               sentences
               ,
               
               the
               words
               haue
               an
               easie
               and
               distinct
               sound
               :
               that
               is
               ,
               neither
               harsh
               nor
               gaping
               ;
               but
               that
               they
               fall
               and
               conclude
               aptly
               and
               sweetly
               ,
               fitting
               best
               the
               vtterance
               of
               the
               pronouncer
               ,
               and
               as
               may
               most
               like
               the
               eare
               of
               the
               hearer
               .
            
             
               These
               are
               the
               summe
               of
               those
               rules
               as
               I
               remember
               .
               Although
               the
               excellency
               heereof
               is
               rather
               to
               bee
               attained
               ,
               by
               vse
               and
               practice
               ,
               then
               by
               any
               certaine
               precepts
               .
            
             
               
                 Spoud
                 .
              
               
                 Sir
                 these
                 put
                 in
                 practice
                 may
                 be
                 very
                 sufficient
                 for
                 whatsoeuer
                 can
                 be
                 required
                 in
                 this
                 behalfe
                 ,
                 as
                 it
                 seemeth
                 vnto
                 me
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 Phil.
                 
              
               
                 These
                 things
                 concerne
                 onely
                 the
                 placing
                 and
                 setting
                 or
                 measuring
                 of
                 sentences
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 one
                 little
                 part
                 of
                 Rhetorick
                 ?
                 and
                 there
                 the
                 rest
                 is
                 to
                 be
                 fully
                 sought
                 ,
                 &
                 how
                 to
                 adorne
                 all
                 sentences
                 with
                 tropes
                 and
                 figures
                 .
                 The
                 practice
                 of
                 these
                 is
                 to
                 be
                 vsed
                 in
                 their
                 seuerall
                 exercises
                 .
              
               
                 Thus
                 haue
                 I
                 gone
                 thorough
                 all
                 these
                 at
                 large
                 ,
                 for
                 making
                 the
                 Accedence
                 and
                 Grammar
                 perfect
                 ,
                 for
                 construing
                 ,
                 parsing
                 ,
                 and
                 making
                 Latine
                 ;
                 applying
                 my selfe
                 to
                 the
                 capacity
                 of
                 the
                 ●udest
                 learner
                 in
                 so
                 many
                 words
                 ;
                 because
                 these
                 things
                 well
                 performed
                 ,
                 all
                 other
                 learning
                 wil
                 be
                 most
                 pleasant
                 ,
                 as
                 ●as
                 said
                 before
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 Spoud
                 .
              
               
                 But
                 one
                 other
                 thing
                 by
                 the
                 waie
                 ,
                 I
                 cannot
                 omit
                 to
                 demaund
                 that
                 I
                 did
                 obserue
                 by
                 your
                 speech
                 ,
                 that
                 you
                 would
                 haue
                 your
                 very
                 enterers
                 to
                 make
                 some
                 exercise
                 euery
                 night
                 of
                 themselues
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 Phil.
                 
              
               
                 I
                 would
                 indeede
                 haue
                 no
                 Euening
                 passed
                 without
                 some
                 little
                 exercise
                 in
                 Latine
                 by
                 all
                 ,
                 
                 from
                 the
                 very
                 lowest
                 who
                 begin
                 to
                 write
                 Latine
                 ;
                 
                 I
                 meane
                 something
                 to
                 be
                 shewed
                 the
                 next
                 daie
                 about
                 9
                 of
                 the
                 clocke
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 Spoud
                 
              
               
                 But
                 what
                 exercise
                 woulde
                 you
                 appoint
                 to
                 such
                 little
                 ones
                 ,
                 that
                 coulde
                 bee
                 easie
                 enough
                 and
                 meet
                 for
                 their
                 capacitie
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 Phil.
                 
              
               
                 I
                 woulde
                 appoint
                 them
                 to
                 beginne
                 euen
                 at
                 ,
                 In
                 Speech
                 bee
                 these
                 eight
                 parts
                 &c.
                 and
                 so
                 giue
                 them
                 2.
                 or
                 3.
                 
                 lines
                 of
                 it
                 for
                 euery
                 one
                 to
                 turn
                 into
                 Latin.
                 And
                 for
                 the
                 examining
                 what
                 they
                 haue
                 done
                 where
                 they
                 are
                 many
                 ,
                 &
                 time
                 will
                 not
                 permit
                 to
                 examine
                 what
                 euery
                 one
                 hath
                 done
                 ;
                 to
                 cause
                 some
                 one
                 or
                 two
                 whom
                 you
                 suspect
                 to
                 be
                 most
                 negligent
                 ,
                 first
                 to
                 pronounce
                 the
                 English
                 without
                 booke
                 ,
                 then
                 to
                 construe
                 it
                 into
                 Latine
                 without
                 book
                 ,
                 or
                 to
                 repeat
                 the
                 Latin
                 as
                 they
                 haue
                 made
                 it
                 :
                 but
                 to
                 construe
                 it
                 without
                 booke
                 is
                 far
                 the
                 surest
                 ,
                 or
                 to
                 reade
                 &
                 construe
                 it
                 out
                 of
                 the
                 English.
                 And
                 according
                 to
                 these
                 as
                 they
                 pronounce
                 ,
                 and
                 are
                 shewed
                 their
                 faults
                 ,
                 for
                 all
                 the
                 rest
                 to
                 correct
                 theirs
                 .
                 If
                 any
                 be
                 found
                 not
                 to
                 correct
                 so
                 ,
                 or
                 to
                 haue
                 omitted
                 his
                 exercise
                 ,
                 to
                 haue
                 his
                 due
                 correction
                 .
              
               
                 Though
                 I
                 haue
                 tried
                 many
                 wayes
                 and
                 exercises
                 for
                 these
                 little
                 ones
                 ,
                 to
                 doe
                 priuately
                 by
                 themselues
                 ,
                 yet
                 I
                 finde
                 none
                 comparable
                 to
                 this
                 :
                 for
                 this
                 they
                 will
                 doe
                 with
                 much
                 facilitie
                 and
                 contention
                 ,
                 after
                 a
                 little
                 that
                 they
                 are
                 entred
                 ;
                 being
                 helped
                 somewhat
                 by
                 their
                 Latine
                 rules
                 ,
                 which
                 they
                 haue
                 learned
                 .
              
               
                 Thus
                 they
                 may
                 alwayes
                 haue
                 a
                 fit
                 exercise
                 ,
                 and
                 know
                 aforehand
                 what
                 they
                 are
                 to
                 doe
                 .
                 This
                 also
                 will
                 further
                 much
                 towards
                 their
                 parsing
                 in
                 Latin
                 ,
                 and
                 better
                 imprinting
                 their
                 rules
                 .
              
            
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             XII
             .
          
           
             How
             to
             make
             Epistles
             ,
             imitating
             Tully
             ,
             short
             ,
             pithie
             ,
             sweete
             Latine
             and
             familiar
             ;
             and
             to
             indite
             Letters
             to
             our
             friends
             in
             English
             accordingly
             .
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               I
               Am
               very
               glad
               I
               asked
               you
               this
               question
               :
               I
               rest
               fully
               satisfied
               in
               it
               ,
               as
               also
               in
               al
               this
               matter
               of
               making
               and
               composing
               Latine
               ,
               for
               the
               euidence
               of
               the
               meanes
               ;
               and
               doe
               thanke
               you
               heartily
               for
               directing
               me
               so
               particularly
               .
            
             
             
               Now
               let
               vs
               come
               ,
               I
               pray
               you
               ,
               to
               the
               other
               seuerall
               exercises
               of
               Schollars
               ,
               which
               are
               to
               bee
               practiced
               in
               Schooles
               continually
               ,
               for
               the
               morefull
               attayning
               of
               the
               knowledge
               of
               the
               Latine
               tongue
               .
            
             
               And
               first
               for
               the
               making
               of
               Epistles
               ,
               
               in
               such
               sort
               as
               was
               mentioned
               before
               ;
               that
               is
               imitating
               Tully
               ,
               short
               ,
               pithy
               ,
               full
               of
               variety
               of
               good
               matter
               ,
               sweet
               Latin
               and
               familiar
               ;
               and
               for
               inditing
               of
               like
               Letters
               in
               English
               :
            
             
               I
               haue
               found
               this
               exercise
               of
               making
               Epistles
               ,
               no
               lesse
               difficult
               then
               the
               former
               toyle
               of
               making
               Latine
               .
               
               For
               although
               I
               haue
               taken
               great
               paines
               :
               yet
               after
               long
               practice
               ,
               I
               haue
               hardly
               beene
               able
               to
               bring
               them
               to
               a
               shew
               of
               that
               which
               you
               speake
               of
               ,
               I
               meane
               so
               to
               imitate
               and
               resemble
               Tully
               ;
               but
               that
               they
               will
               frame
               them
               of
               long
               sentences
               ,
               matters
               vnfit
               for
               an
               Epistle
               ,
               flash
               and
               to
               little
               purpose
               ;
               but
               very
               childish
               ,
               and
               more
               like
               vnto
               a
               Theame
               or
               an
               Oration
               ,
               then
               to
               an
               Epistle
               .
               Thus
               I
               see
               it
               to
               be
               also
               amongst
               the
               chiefe
               of
               the
               Schollars
               ,
               of
               sundry
               of
               those
               who
               are
               much
               accounted
               of
               ,
               and
               wherin
               the
               schollars
               seeme
               to
               doe
               the
               best
               .
            
             
               As
               for
               inditing
               Letters
               in
               English
               ,
               
               I
               haue
               not
               exercised
               my
               schollars
               in
               them
               at
               all
               ;
               neyther
               haue
               I
               knowne
               them
               to
               be
               vsed
               in
               Schooles
               :
               although
               they
               cannot
               but
               bee
               exceeding
               necessary
               for
               schollars
               ;
               being
               of
               perpetuall
               vse
               in
               all
               our
               whole
               life
               ,
               and
               of
               very
               great
               commendation
               ,
               when
               they
               are
               so
               performed
               .
               Therefore
               I
               still
               craue
               your
               helping
               hand
               to
               direct
               me
               ,
               how
               to
               bring
               my
               schollars
               to
               the
               attayning
               that
               faculty
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               Let
               me
               first
               heare
               what
               way
               you
               haue
               taken
               in
               these
               ,
               like
               as
               you
               shewed
               me
               in
               the
               former
               kinds
               ;
               and
               then
               I
               shall
               relate
               vnto
               you
               how
               this
               may
               bee
               done
               ,
               so
               shortly
               as
               I
               can
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               I
               haue
               done
               this
               :
               
               I
               haue
               read
               them
               some
               of
               Tullies
               Epistles
               ,
               and
               also
               some
               part
               of
               Macropedius
               or
               Hegendorphinus
               
                 de
                 conscribendis
                 Epistolis
              
               .
               I
               haue
               directed
               them
               that
               they
               are
               to
               follow
               the
               rules
               set
               downe
               in
               the
               seuerall
               kindes
               of
               Epistles
               there
               mentioned
               ,
               and
               made
               the
               
               examples
               plaine
               vnto
               them
               .
            
             
               Moreouer
               ,
               I
               haue
               vsed
               oft
               to
               put
               them
               in
               minde
               of
               this
               ,
               that
               an
               Epistle
               is
               nothing
               but
               a
               Letter
               sent
               to
               a
               friend
               ,
               to
               certifie
               him
               of
               some
               matter
               ,
               or
               to
               signifie
               our
               mind
               plainly
               and
               fully
               vnto
               him
               .
               And
               therefore
               looke
               how
               wee
               would
               write
               in
               English
               ,
               so
               to
               doe
               in
               Latin.
               These
               and
               the
               like
               are
               the
               helpes
               which
               I
               haue
               vsed
               :
               and
               I
               take
               them
               to
               bee
               the
               most
               that
               are
               done
               in
               ordinary
               Schooles
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               I
               like
               well
               of
               your
               reading
               of
               Tullies
               Epistles
               ,
               which
               indeed
               is
               the
               very
               foundation
               of
               all
               :
               but
               for
               Macropedius
               and
               Hegendorphinus
               ,
               although
               their
               paines
               were
               great
               ;
               yet
               I
               cannot
               see
               ,
               but
               that
               they
               will
               rather
               require
               an
               auncient
               learned
               Master
               to
               vnderstand
               ,
               and
               make
               vse
               of
               them
               ,
               then
               a
               younger
               schollar
               ,
               who
               is
               to
               be
               taught
               how
               to
               speake
               .
               
               Also
               for
               telling
               a
               childe
               that
               he
               must
               inuent
               variety
               of
               matter
               of
               his
               owne
               head
               ,
               to
               write
               to
               his
               friend
               ;
               this
               is
               a
               taske
               ouer
               hard
               to
               ordinary
               wits
               .
               For
               what
               can
               a
               childe
               haue
               in
               his
               vnderstanding
               ,
               to
               be
               able
               to
               conceiue
               or
               write
               of
               ,
               which
               hee
               hath
               not
               read
               or
               someway
               knowne
               before
               ?
               according
               to
               that
               Maxime
               :
               
                 Nihil
                 est
                 in
                 intellectu
                 quod
                 non
                 prius
                 fuerat
                 in
                 sensu
                 .
              
            
             
               Therefore
               omitting
               these
               ,
               wherein
               I
               my selfe
               haue
               also
               found
               a
               great
               deale
               of
               toyle
               ,
               with
               small
               fruit
               ;
               I
               will
               set
               you
               downe
               plainely
               the
               very
               direct
               way
               ,
               so
               neere
               as
               yet
               I
               haue
               beene
               able
               to
               learne
               ;
               and
               whereby
               I
               am
               out
               of
               doubt
               ,
               that
               that
               same
               faculty
               may
               be
               easily
               gotten
               ,
               of
               writing
               such
               Epistles
               ;
               fully
               expressing
               Tully
               ,
               as
               was
               said
               ,
               and
               of
               inditing
               Letters
               like
               vnto
               them
               ,
               which
               are
               our
               vsuall
               Epistles
               ,
               as
               the
               Latine
               were
               of
               the
               Romanes
               .
            
             
               The
               way
               may
               be
               this
               :
            
             
               1
               When
               your
               young
               schollars
               haue
               gone
               through
               
                 Sententiae
                 pueriles
              
               ,
               
               
                 Confab
                 .
                 Cato
              
               ,
               or
               the
               like
               ;
               and
               can
               begin
               to
               make
               Latine
               in
               some
               such
               good
               sort
               as
               was
               shewed
               ;
               let
               them
               then
               reade
               Tullies
               Epistles
               ,
               gathered
               by
               Sturmius
               ;
               
               as
               being
               of
               the
               choysest
               of
               his
               Epistles
               ,
               and
               most
               fitte
               for
               children
               .
               This
               one
               booke
               rightly
               vsed
               ,
               may
               sufficiently
               furnish
               for
               making
               Epistles
               ,
               so
               farre
               as
               shall
               be
               needfull
               
               for
               the
               Grammar
               Schooles
               .
               It
               would
               be
               read
               by
               them
               twice
               in
               the
               weeke
               at
               least
               ,
               vntill
               they
               had
               gone
               through
               a
               good
               part
               thereof
               ;
               vnlesse
               they
               be
               able
               to
               reade
               it
               of
               themselues
               
                 ex
                 tempore
              
               ,
               or
               by
               the
               helpe
               of
               the
               translation
               .
            
             
               2
               As
               they
               reade
               euery
               Epistle
               ,
               
               or
               before
               they
               are
               to
               imitate
               any
               one
               ,
               
               make
               them
               as
               perfect
               in
               it
               as
               you
               can
               ,
               and
               as
               time
               will
               permit
               :
               not
               onely
               in
               construing
               ,
               parsing
               ,
               reading
               out
               of
               the
               Grammaticall
               translation
               into
               the
               Latine
               ;
               but
               also
               to
               be
               able
               to
               giue
               euery
               phrase
               ,
               both
               Latine
               to
               English
               ,
               and
               English
               to
               Latine
               .
            
             
               Also
               cause
               them
               to
               make
               you
               a
               report
               what
               the
               summe
               of
               the
               Epistle
               is
               ;
               and
               this
               if
               you
               will
               ,
               both
               in
               English
               and
               Latine
               also
               ,
               as
               was
               said
               of
               the
               Fables
               .
            
             
               3
               Cause
               them
               for
               their
               exercise
               to
               make
               another
               Epistle
               in
               imitation
               of
               Tullies
               Epistle
               ,
               
               vsing
               al
               the
               phrases
               and
               matter
               of
               that
               Epistle
               ;
               
               onely
               applying
               and
               turning
               it
               to
               some
               friend
               ,
               as
               if
               they
               had
               the
               very
               same
               occasion
               then
               presently
               :
               and
               also
               changing
               numbers
               ,
               tenses
               persons
               ,
               places
               ,
               times
               :
               yet
               so
               ▪
               as
               thereby
               to
               make
               all
               the
               matter
               and
               phrases
               ,
               each
               way
               most
               familiar
               to
               them
               ▪
               and
               fully
               their
               owne
               .
            
             
               And
               first
               let
               them
               doe
               this
               in
               a
               good
               English
               stile
               ,
               as
               was
               said
               ;
               I
               meane
               in
               making
               an
               English
               Letter
               first
               :
               setting
               it
               after
               the
               manner
               ,
               
               as
               they
               did
               their
               English
               Translation
               ;
               of
               that
               page
               of
               their
               booke
               towards
               the
               left
               hand
               ,
               or
               on
               the
               first
               columne
               ,
               the
               Latine
               on
               the
               other
               ouer
               against
               it
               ,
               sentence
               for
               sentence
               .
            
             
               Herein
               they
               are
               only
               to
               differ
               from
               the
               Translations
               ,
               
               that
               they
               〈◊〉
               doe
               not
               in
               these
               Letters
               sticke
               so
               much
               to
               wordes
               ,
               to
               answere
               word
               for
               word
               both
               English
               and
               Latine
               ;
               as
               to
               write
               purely
               and
               sweetly
               ,
               as
               well
               in
               English
               as
               in
               Latine
               ,
               and
               to
               expresse
               their
               mindes
               most
               fully
               in
               both
               ,
               and
               in
               most
               familiar
               manner
               .
            
             
               4
               The
               next
               day
               to
               make
               another
               Epistle
               ,
               
               as
               being
               sent
               from
               their
               friend
               to
               whom
               they
               writ
               ,
               
               in
               answere
               to
               that
               which
               they
               writ
               the
               former
               day
               :
               and
               in
               that
               to
               answere
               euery
               sentence
               from
               point
               to
               point
               ,
               in
               as
               short
               manner
               as
               the
               former
               Epistle
               was
               ,
               stil
               reteyning
               the
               same
               phrases
               as
               much
               
               as
               they
               can
               .
               
               I
               will
               take
               for
               example
               the
               first
               Epistle
               of
               Sturmius
               .
               The
               more
               easie
               it
               is
               for
               the
               children
               ,
               the
               better
               it
               is
               .
            
          
           
             
               
                 M.
                 C.
                 Terentiae
                 salutem
                 plurimam
                 dicit
                 .
              
               
                 SIvales
                 ,
                 benè
                 est
                 :
                 ego
                 valeo
                 .
                 Nos
                 quotidie
                 tab●llarios
                 vestros
                 expectamus
                 :
                 
                 qui
                 si
                 venerint
                 ,
                 fortasse
                 erimus
                 certiores
                 quid
                 nobis
                 fac●endum
                 sit
                 :
                 faciemusque
                 te
                 statim
                 certiorem
                 ,
                 valetudinem
                 tuam
                 cura
                 diligenter
                 .
                 Vale.
                 Calendis
                 Septembris
                 .
              
            
          
           
             The
             summe
             of
             the
             Letter
             is
             ;
             That
             Tully
             writes
             to
             his
             wife
             Terentia
             :
             
             signifying
             vnto
             her
             ,
             that
             hee
             was
             in
             health
             :
             that
             he
             waited
             for
             the
             Letter-carriers
             daily
             :
             how
             by
             them
             he
             should
             know
             what
             to
             doe
             ;
             and
             that
             he
             would
             then
             certifie
             her
             of
             al
             things
             .
             And
             so
             concludeth
             ,
             wishing
             her
             to
             looke
             well
             to
             her
             health
             .
             The
             Letter
             bare
             date
             the
             Calends
             of
             September
             .
          
           
             
               
                 
                   
                     
                       An
                       English
                       Letter
                       in
                       imitation
                       of
                       Tully
                       .
                    
                     
                       IF
                       you
                       be
                       in
                       health
                       ,
                       it
                       is
                       well
                       :
                       I
                       am
                       in
                       health
                       .
                       I
                       haue
                       long
                       looked
                       for
                       your
                       *
                       Messengers
                       .
                       When
                       they
                       shall
                       come
                       ,
                       I
                       shal
                       be
                       more
                       certaine
                       what
                       I
                       am
                       to
                       do
                       ;
                       and
                       then
                       I
                       will
                       forthwith
                       certifie
                       you
                       of
                       all
                       things
                       .
                       See
                       that
                       you
                       looke
                       very
                       carefully
                       to
                       your
                       health
                       .
                    
                     
                       
                         The
                         Answere
                         .
                      
                       
                         I
                         Reioyce
                         greatly
                         of
                         your
                         health
                         .
                         I
                         am
                         sory
                         that
                         you
                         haue
                         looked
                         for
                         the
                         Carriers
                         so
                         long
                         .
                         They
                         wil
                         be
                         with
                         you
                         very
                         shortly
                         ,
                         &
                         then
                         indeede
                         you
                         shal
                         be
                         more
                         certain
                         what
                         to
                         do
                         .
                         
                         Wee
                         shall
                         forthwith
                         looke
                         to
                         heare
                         of
                         all
                         your
                         matters
                         .
                         I
                         will
                         in
                         the
                         mean
                         time
                         looke
                         to
                         my
                         health
                         ,
                         as
                         you
                         aduise
                         .
                         Farewell
                         .
                      
                    
                  
                   
                     
                       An
                       Epistle
                       in
                       imitation
                       of
                       Tully
                       .
                    
                     
                       EPISTOLA
                       .
                    
                     
                       SIvales
                       benè
                       est
                       :
                       ego
                       qu●dē
                       valeo
                       :
                       diu
                       tabellarios
                       vestros
                       expectaui
                       .
                       Cūvenerint
                       certior
                       ero
                       quid
                       mihi
                       faciēdū
                       sit
                       .
                       Tum
                       autē
                       te
                       omnibus
                       de
                       rebus
                       certiorē
                       faciam
                       .
                       Tuam
                       diligentissimè
                       valetudinem
                       fac
                       vt
                       cures
                       .
                    
                     
                       
                         Responsio
                         .
                      
                       
                         TE
                         valere
                         maximè
                         lator
                         .
                         Doleo
                         quòd
                         tabellarios
                         tam
                         diu
                         expectasti
                         .
                         Statim
                         vobiscum
                         erunt
                         ,
                         &
                         tum
                         re
                         vera
                         certior
                         eris
                         quid
                         tibi
                         agendum
                         sit
                         .
                         
                         Nos
                         deindè
                         vestra
                         omnia
                         audire
                         sperabimus
                         .
                         Meam
                         interim
                         vt
                         suade
                         ;
                         curabo
                         valetudinem
                         .
                         Vale.
                         
                      
                    
                  
                
              
            
          
           
             
               Antonius
               Schorus
            
             in
             the
             end
             of
             his
             booke
             ,
             
               de
               ratione
               discendae
               linguae
               latinae
            
             ,
             hath
             sundry
             examples
             .
             I
             will
             set
             downe
             one
             Epistle
             ,
             imitated
             two
             wayes
             :
             the
             first
             keeping
             almost
             the
             wordes
             and
             forme
             of
             Tullies
             Epistle
             ;
             the
             other
             imitating
             onely
             the
             forme
             ,
             but
             changing
             the
             wordes
             .
             Tullies
             Epistle
             is
             this
             :
          
           
             Aulo
             Trebonio
             ,
             qui
             in
             tua
             prouincia
             magna
             negotiaet
             ampla
             ,
             &
             expedita
             habet
             ,
             multos
             annos
             vtor
             valde
             f●miliariter
             .
             
             Is
             cum
             antea
             semper
             &
             suo
             splendore
             &
             nostra
             caeterorumque
             ,
             amicorum
             commendatione
             gratissimus
             in
             prouincia
             fuit
             ,
             tum
             hoc
             tempore
             propter
             tuum
             in
             me
             amorem
             ,
             nostramque
             necessitudinem
             ,
             vehementer
             confidit
             ,
             his
             meis
             literis
             ,
             se
             apud
             te
             gratiosum
             fore
             .
             Quae
             ne
             spes
             eum
             fallat
             ,
             vehementer
             te
             rogo
             :
             commendoque
             tibi
             eius
             omnia
             negotia
             ,
             liberos
             ,
             procuratores
             ,
             familiam
             :
             inprimisque
             vt
             quae
             T.
             Ampius
             de
             eius
             re
             decreuerit
             ,
             ea
             comprobes
             ,
             omnibusque
             rebus
             eum
             ita
             tractes
             ,
             vt
             intelligat
             nostram
             commendationem
             non
             vulgarem
             fuisse
             .
          
           
             The
             first
             imitation
             ,
             more
             following
             the
             words
             ,
             is
             this
             .
          
           
             Petro
             Fabro
             ,
             
             qui
             in
             vestra
             vrbe
             &
             magnanegotia
             ,
             &
             multos
             amicos
             habet
             ,
             multos
             annos
             vtor
             familiariter
             .
             Is
             cum
             antea
             semper
             &
             suo
             splendore
             ,
             &
             nostra
             caeterorumque
             amicorum
             commendatione
             gratissimus
             in
             hac
             nostra
             Repub.
             fuit
             ,
             tum
             hoc
             tempore
             propter
             tuum
             in
             me
             amorem
             nostramque
             necessitudinem
             vehementer
             confidit
             ,
             his
             meis
             literis
             se
             apud
             te
             gratiosum
             fore
             .
             Quae
             nespes
             eum
             fallat
             ,
             vehementer
             te
             rogo
             :
             commendoque
             tibi
             eius
             omnia
             negotia
             ,
             amicos
             ,
             cognatos
             ,
             inprimi●que
             vt
             quae
             procuratori
             de
             eius
             rebus
             videbuntur
             ,
             ea
             comprobes
             :
             omnibusque
             rebus
             eum
             ita
             tractes
             ,
             vt
             intelligat
             nostram
             commendationem
             non
             vulgarem
             fuisse
             .
          
           
             The
             second
             imitation
             ,
             expressing
             the
             forme
             .
          
           
             Petrus
             Faber
             ,
             
             qui
             tibi
             notus
             est
             ,
             &
             magnas
             res
             apud
             nos
             gessit
             ,
             multos
             annos
             mihi
             valde
             familiaris
             fuit
             .
             Is
             cum
             semper
             &
             sua
             dignitate
             ,
             &
             benefi●ijs
             multis
             erga
             me
             ,
             meis
             omnibus
             gratissimus
             
             fuit
             :
             tum
             nunc
             ob
             tuum
             ergame
             animum
             ,
             nostramque
             coniunctionem
             ,
             non
             dubitat
             quin
             hac
             mea
             commendatione
             sit
             in
             maxima
             gratia
             apud
             te
             futurus
             .
             Quod
             vt
             fiat
             ,
             summoperè
             te
             oro
             :
             committoque
             tuae
             fide●
             &
             curae
             omnes
             res
             eius
             ,
             amicos
             ,
             cognatos
             ,
             parentes
             :
             praecipuè
             verò
             vt
             quae
             procurator
             de
             rebus
             eius
             agat
             ea
             consil●o
             tuo
             iuues
             :
             &
             ita
             honorificè
             eum
             accipias
             ,
             vt
             sentiat
             has
             nostras
             literas
             apud
             te
             pondus
             habuisse
             .
          
           
             Thus
             practicing
             and
             trayning
             vp
             your
             schollar
             by
             little
             and
             little
             ;
             first
             for
             imitation
             ,
             more
             neerely
             following
             the
             wordes
             ;
             afterwards
             only
             the
             forme
             ,
             and
             such
             phrases
             as
             shal
             seeme
             fittest
             :
             and
             euer
             first
             writing
             their
             English
             Letters
             ,
             and
             then
             their
             Latine
             answering
             thereunto
             ;
             you
             shall
             see
             that
             they
             will
             come
             to
             a
             liuely
             imitation
             of
             Tully
             ;
             especially
             if
             you
             exercise
             them
             wel
             in
             Tully
             ,
             in
             such
             sort
             as
             is
             prescribed
             .
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               Sir
               ,
               this
               must
               needes
               bee
               a
               most
               sure
               and
               ready
               way
               .
               But
               in
               imitation
               what
               things
               am
               I
               to
               direct
               them
               to
               obserue
               ?
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               That
               they
               take
               only
               so
               much
               as
               is
               needfull
               ,
               
               and
               fit
               for
               their
               purpose
               ,
               leauing
               out
               all
               the
               rest
               ;
               that
               they
               adde
               what
               is
               wanting
               ,
               alter
               and
               apply
               fitly
               to
               the
               occasions
               ,
               according
               to
               the
               circumstances
               of
               times
               ,
               persons
               ,
               places
               ,
               and
               the
               like
               ;
               that
               nothing
               may
               appeare
               stollen
               ,
               but
               all
               wittily
               imitated
               .
               Be
               sure
               that
               they
               know
               perfectly
               the
               matter
               and
               the
               phrase
               ,
               of
               that
               which
               they
               should
               imitate
               :
               and
               then
               nothing
               will
               be
               hard
               ,
               in
               imitation
               of
               Epistles
               ,
               Verses
               ,
               or
               whatsoeuer
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               What
               is
               then
               the
               summe
               of
               all
               ,
               which
               you
               would
               haue
               principally
               exercised
               ,
               for
               the
               speedy
               attayning
               this
               faculty
               ?
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               That
               your
               schollars
               haue
               daily
               a
               peece
               of
               an
               Epistle
               ,
               or
               a
               whole
               Epistle
               appointed
               them
               ,
               matter
               and
               phrase
               made
               every
               familiar
               vnto
               them
               ;
               then
               one
               day
               to
               make
               an
               Epistle
               in
               imitation
               ,
               and
               that
               both
               English
               and
               Latine
               ;
               the
               next
               day
               to
               make
               an
               answere
               in
               like
               manner
               :
               thus
               to
               proceede
               vntill
               they
               come
               to
               some
               good
               perfection
               .
               And
               so
               much
               may
               serue
               for
               Epistles
               .
            
          
        
         
           
           
             CHAP.
             XIII
             .
          
           
             Of
             making
             Theames
             full
             of
             good
             matter
             ,
             in
             a
             pure
             stile
             ,
             and
             with
             iudgement
             .
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               NExt
               after
               Epistles
               Theames
               ▪
               doe
               follow
               ;
               wherein
               if
               you
               can
               direct
               me
               also
               ,
               how
               these
               likewise
               may
               be
               composed
               by
               children
               ,
               so
               as
               to
               bee
               couched
               full
               of
               good
               matter
               ,
               written
               in
               a
               pure
               stile
               ,
               and
               with
               iudgement
               ,
               and
               with
               as
               much
               certainty
               and
               readinesse
               as
               you
               haue
               shewed
               me
               for
               making
               their
               Epistles
               ;
               I
               shall
               remain
               more
               beholden
               ,
               and
               returne
               home
               with
               greater
               hope
               to
               doe
               good
               .
            
             
               For
               the
               Epistles
               it
               cannot
               bee
               otherwise
               ,
               but
               that
               the
               course
               set
               down
               must
               needs
               produce
               that
               effect
               ,
               which
               you
               haue
               affirmed
               ;
               by
               reason
               of
               these
               singular
               patterns
               of
               Tully
               ,
               which
               children
               haue
               to
               imitate
               .
               But
               what
               patternes
               or
               helpes
               can
               you
               haue
               for
               Theames
               any
               way
               comparable
               to
               those
               ?
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               What
               patternes
               Schollars
               may
               haue
               ,
               you
               shal
               heare
               after
               :
               but
               first
               relate
               vnto
               me
               ,
               as
               in
               the
               former
               ,
               what
               way
               you
               haue
               vsed
               ,
               for
               the
               entring
               of
               your
               children
               in
               making
               their
               Theames
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               I
               haue
               according
               to
               the
               custome
               in
               Schooles
               ,
               
               read
               them
               some
               of
               Apthonius
               rules
               ,
               and
               so
               it
               may
               be
               ,
               haue
               begun
               with
               Apologues
               or
               Fables
               ,
               or
               rather
               with
               a
               Chreia
               :
               and
               in
               their
               Chreia
               ,
               I
               haue
               first
               made
               the
               seuerall
               parts
               of
               it
               ,
               or
               of
               their
               Theame
               so
               handled
               ,
               very
               plaine
               vnto
               them
               ,
               with
               the
               manner
               of
               the
               proofes
               of
               it
               ;
               and
               of
               gathering
               reasons
               to
               amplifie
               it
               ,
               according
               to
               the
               same
               .
            
             
               I
               haue
               then
               giuen
               them
               a
               Theame
               to
               make
               ,
               following
               the
               example
               in
               their
               booke
               ,
               to
               prosecute
               the
               same
               parts
               of
               the
               Theame
               ;
               as
               
                 Exordium
                 ,
                 narratio
                 ,
                 confirmatio
                 ,
                 confutatio
                 ,
                 
                 conclusio
                 ,
              
               and
               also
               to
               follow
               the
               seuerall
               places
               ,
               to
               amplifie
               each
               thing
               by
               .
               I
               haue
               withall
               shewed
               them
               how
               to
               doe
               it
               :
               as
               to
               trie
               what
               they
               could
               gather
               of
               themselues
               ;
               and
               withall
               to
               seeke
               Tullies
               sentences
               what
               they
               could
               find
               out
               of
               it
               ,
               or
               out
               of
               other
               bookes
               to
               their
               purpose
               .
               
               But
               yet
               (
               alas
               !
               )
               that
               which
               my
               children
               haue
               done
               hereby
               for
               a
               long
               time
               ,
               they
               haue
               done
               it
               with
               exceeding
               paines
               and
               feare
               ,
               and
               yet
               too-too
               weakely
               ,
               in
               ha●sh●phrase
               ,
               without
               any
               inuention
               ,
               or
               iudgement
               ;
               and
               ordinarily
               so
               rudely
               ,
               as
               I
               haue
               been
               ashamed
               that
               any
               one
               should
               see
               their
               exercises
               .
               So
               as
               it
               hath
               driuen
               mee
               into
               exceeding
               passions
               ,
               causing
               me
               to
               deale
               ouer
               rigorously
               with
               the
               poore
               boies
               .
               Whereby
               some
               of
               them
               ,
               whose
               Parents
               haue
               been
               more
               tender
               ,
               seeing
               their
               children
               heauy
               and
               vnwilling
               to
               the
               Schoole
               ,
               haue
               suffered
               them
               to
               leaue
               off
               the
               Schoole
               ,
               and
               so
               to
               lose
               all
               which
               they
               had
               gotten
               before
               ;
               others
               also
               haue
               beene
               made
               so
               feareful
               ,
               that
               they
               would
               rather
               desire
               to
               go
               to
               any
               base
               trade
               or
               drudgery
               ,
               then
               to
               be
               Schollars
               ,
               &
               hereby
               haue
               very
               much
               reproached
               my
               schoole
               :
               Because
               ,
               as
               they
               haue
               ouer-rightly
               complained
               ,
               they
               must
               bee
               beaten
               for
               not
               doing
               that
               ,
               which
               they
               knew
               not
               how
               to
               doe
               ;
               so
               that
               this
               feare
               is
               worse
               to
               them
               ,
               then
               the
               first
               for
               making
               Latines
               .
            
             
               And
               yet
               notwithstanding
               ,
               in
               their
               entring
               to
               make
               Theames
               ,
               and
               so
               likewise
               into
               versifying
               ,
               I
               haue
               not
               knowen
               how
               to
               auoid
               it
               ,
               but
               I
               haue
               bin
               enforced
               to
               vse
               so
               much
               sharpnesse
               ,
               as
               to
               make
               them
               to
               call
               all
               their
               wits
               together
               ,
               and
               to
               stir
               them
               vp
               to
               all
               diligence
               and
               paines
               ;
               or
               otherwise
               I
               should
               haue
               done
               no
               good
               at
               all
               .
            
             
               Whereupon
               very
               great
               inconueniences
               haue
               insued
               :
               and
               yet
               as
               I
               sayd
               ,
               I
               haue
               seene
               very
               little
               fruite
               to
               answere
               vnto
               my
               paines
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               I
               doe
               not
               see
               how
               by
               this
               course
               ,
               
               these
               euils
               could
               be
               auoided
               .
               As
               I
               said
               of
               Macropedius
               for
               Epistles
               ,
               so
               I
               may
               here
               ;
               that
               this
               way
               of
               entring
               your
               schollars
               is
               hard
               enough
               to
               many
               a
               Schoolemaster
               ,
               thus
               to
               follow
               euery
               part
               of
               the
               Theame
               and
               those
               places
               of
               Apthonius
               ,
               to
               inuent
               matter
               and
               reasons
               to
               proue
               and
               illustrate
               euery
               thing
               ,
               
               and
               to
               do
               it
               in
               a
               good
               stile
               .
               That
               which
               is
               said
               of
               Epistles
               ,
               that
               children
               must
               be
               acquainted
               by
               reading
               ,
               
               with
               matter
               &
               phrase
               fit
               for
               Epistles
               ,
               before
               they
               can
               euer
               bee
               fit
               to
               make
               such
               Epistles
               ,
               is
               much
               more
               true
               concerning
               both
               theames
               and
               verses
               ;
               inasmuch
               as
               the
               matter
               of
               them
               is
               harder
               ,
               being
               of
               such
               things
               as
               they
               haue
               neuer
               read
               of
               ,
               nor
               been
               any
               way
               acquainted
               with
               ,
               or
               at
               least
               very
               little
               .
               Besides
               ,
               to
               follow
               the
               Logicke
               places
               in
               Apthonius
               in
               a
               Philosophical
               discourse
               ,
               doth
               require
               both
               some
               insight
               in
               Logick
               ,
               and
               reading
               in
               such
               Authors
               as
               haue
               written
               of
               such
               morall
               matters
               .
               And
               therfore
               herein
               many
               a
               Master
               deserues
               rather
               to
               be
               beaten
               then
               the
               schollar
               ,
               
               for
               driuing
               the
               childe
               by
               cruelty
               ,
               to
               doe
               that
               which
               he
               himself
               can
               see
               no
               reason
               how
               the
               poor
               child
               should
               be
               able
               to
               do
               it
               .
               It
               must
               of
               necessitie
               either
               driue
               the
               schollar
               to
               vse
               all
               deuises
               to
               leaue
               the
               schoole
               ,
               or
               else
               cause
               him
               to
               liue
               in
               a
               continual
               horror
               &
               hatred
               of
               learning
               ;
               and
               to
               account
               the
               schoole
               ,
               not
               
                 Ludus
                 literarius
              
               ,
               but
               carnificina
               ,
               or
               
                 pistrînum
                 literarium
              
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               I
               acknowledge
               it
               too
               true
               which
               you
               haue
               said
               :
               I
               pray
               you
               therfore
               shew
               me
               your
               best
               aduise
               &
               experience
               how
               to
               free
               my selfe
               &
               my
               children
               from
               these
               euils
               ;
               that
               I
               may
               both
               so
               enter
               them
               in
               these
               &
               also
               draw
               them
               on
               after
               ,
               as
               not
               to
               discourage
               them
               in
               this
               maner
               ,
               nor
               bee
               driuen
               to
               vse
               the
               like
               sharpnesse
               any
               more
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               Herein
               I
               my self
               am
               desirous
               to
               be
               a
               learner
               ,
               as
               in
               all
               the
               rest
               .
               Although
               too
               much
               experience
               hath
               cōpelled
               me
               to
               seek
               out
               all
               meanes
               to
               redress
               this
               ;
               notwithstanding
               also
               that
               I
               haue
               euer
               been
               afraid
               of
               vsing
               cruelty
               in
               my
               schoole
               .
               And
               the
               rather
               haue
               I
               bin
               careful
               to
               seek
               out
               the
               easiest
               and
               plainest
               way
               ,
               that
               I
               might
               allure
               &
               draw
               on
               my
               schollars
               in
               this
               exercise
               ,
               as
               in
               all
               other
               ,
               to
               proceed
               as
               in
               a
               scholasticall
               play
               ,
               with
               vnderstanding
               ,
               loue
               and
               delight
               .
               So
               much
               as
               I
               haue
               attained
               ,
               I
               shall
               willingly
               impart
               vnto
               you
               .
            
             
               1.
               
               We
               are
               to
               consider
               ,
               
               what
               is
               the
               end
               &
               purpose
               of
               their
               making
               Theams
               ;
               and
               then
               to
               bethink
               our selues
               ,
               which
               way
               they
               may
               the
               soonest
               attaine
               vnto
               the
               same
               .
               The
               principal
               end
               of
               making
               Theams
               ,
               I
               take
               to
               be
               this
               ,
               to
               furnish
               schollars
               
               with
               al
               store
               of
               the
               choisest
               matter
               ,
               
               that
               they
               may
               therby
               learne
               to
               vnderstand
               ,
               speake
               or
               write
               of
               any
               ordinary
               Theame
               ,
               Morall
               or
               Politicall
               ,
               such
               as
               vsually
               fall
               into
               discourse
               amongst
               men
               &
               in
               practice
               of
               life
               ;
               and
               especially
               cōcerning
               vertues
               &
               vices
               .
               So
               as
               to
               work
               in
               themselues
               a
               greater
               loue
               of
               the
               vertue
               and
               hatred
               of
               the
               vice
               ,
               and
               to
               be
               able
               with
               soundnesse
               of
               reason
               to
               draw
               others
               to
               their
               opinion
               .
            
             
               The
               best
               means
               to
               effect
               this
               most
               soone
               and
               surely
               ,
               
               are
               these
               so
               far
               as
               yet
               I
               know
               .
            
             
               1.
               
               To
               see
               that
               by
               perfect
               learning
               ,
               
               &
               oft
               repeating
               they
               be
               very
               readie
               in
               their
               first
               Authors
               ,
               which
               they
               learned
               ,
               of
               such
               morall
               matters
               ;
               as
               their
               Sententiae
               ,
               Cato
               ,
               Esopsfables
               :
               For
               some
               one
               or
               mo
               of
               these
               haue
               the
               grounds
               of
               almost
               euery
               Theam
               ,
               which
               is
               meet
               to
               be
               propounded
               to
               schollars
               to
               write
               on
               .
               So
               that
               by
               these
               they
               shal
               be
               furnished
               with
               the
               iudgements
               of
               may
               Wisemen
               ,
               what
               is
               truth
               ,
               what
               is
               false
               in
               most
               matters
               ,
               with
               som
               words
               to
               expresse
               their
               minds
               ,
               and
               also
               some
               reasons
               ;
               as
               with
               the
               sentences
               or
               testimonies
               of
               the
               wisest
               ,
               Similitudes
               ,
               or
               Apologues
               in
               Aesop
               ,
               and
               some
               graue
               reasons
               out
               of
               Cato
               ,
               which
               they
               may
               cal
               to
               mind
               .
               All
               these
               may
               be
               done
               by
               the
               courses
               set
               downe
               before
               ,
               and
               as
               soon
               as
               the
               bare
               learning
               of
               the
               cōstruing
               &
               parsing
               alone
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               Add
               to
               these
               the
               oft
               reading
               ouer
               of
               Tullies
               sentences
               out
               of
               the
               Gram.
               
               translations
               ,
               
               &
               the
               sentences
               of
               the
               other
               Authors
               adioined
               with
               the
               same
               .
               As
               also
               the
               reading
               them
               forth
               of
               Latine
               into
               a
               good
               English
               stile
               .
               Thus
               yoush
               I
               find
               by
               experience
               ,
               that
               after
               that
               children
               are
               perfect
               in
               their
               first
               schoole
               Authors
               ,
               they
               wil
               also
               read
               this
               book
               of
               themselues
               ,
               by
               the
               help
               of
               the
               translatiō
               alone
               ,
               to
               go
               ouer
               &
               ouer
               it
               ,
               euery
               day
               thus
               reading
               a
               peece
               of
               it
               amongst
               thēselues
               ,
               with
               little
               or
               no
               hindring
               any
               of
               their
               school
               exercises
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               To
               the
               end
               that
               they
               may
               haue
               presidents
               and
               patterns
               for
               Theams
               ,
               
               like
               as
               they
               had
               for
               their
               Epistles
               and
               for
               making
               Latin
               ,
               some
               book
               is
               to
               be
               chosen
               which
               is
               written
               to
               this
               purpose
               ,
               and
               such
               a
               one
               as
               is
               most
               easie
               ,
               both
               for
               the
               sweetest
               Latine
               and
               choisest
               matter
               .
            
             
               These
               presidents
               are
               of
               two
               sorts
               :
               some
               are
               to
               furnish
               
               them
               still
               ,
               
               with
               more
               variety
               of
               the
               best
               matter
               ;
               others
               ,
               for
               the
               whole
               forme
               and
               frame
               of
               the
               Theame
               .
            
             
               Of
               the
               first
               sort
               ,
               
               for
               singular
               matter
               notably
               compact
               together
               ,
               
               
                 Reusners
                 Symbola
              
               doth
               seeme
               to
               me
               most
               familiar
               and
               plaine
               :
               wherein
               the
               Poesies
               or
               sentences
               of
               the
               seuerall
               Emperors
               ,
               both
               Italian
               ,
               Greek
               ,
               and
               Germane
               are
               handled
               :
               As
               these
               ;
            
             
               Artem
               quaeuis
               terra
               alit
               .
               Apex
               Magistratus
               authoritas
               .
               Bonus
               dux
               ,
               bonus
               comes
               .
               Bonis
               nocet
               ,
               qui
               parcet
               malis
               .
               Cedendum
               multitudini
               .
               Festma
               lentè
               
                 and
                 the
                 like
              
            
             
               This
               book
               I
               take
               to
               be
               a
               very
               worthie
               booke
               to
               traine
               vp
               young
               Gentlemen
               ,
               
               and
               all
               others
               whom
               we
               would
               haue
               to
               become
               wise
               men
               ,
               &
               good
               Common-wealths
               men
               .
               It
               is
               full
               of
               most
               singular
               precepts
               and
               instructions
               concerning
               dueties
               and
               vertues
               ;
               and
               for
               framing
               and
               ordering
               the
               whole
               course
               of
               our
               life
               ,
               and
               managing
               all
               our
               affaires
               with
               wisedome
               ,
               safetie
               and
               commendations
               .
               So
               as
               any
               one
               may
               receiue
               many
               wise
               directions
               ,
               for
               all
               occasions
               of
               life
               ,
               and
               withall
               much
               sweete
               delight
               ,
               in
               it
               .
               And
               for
               this
               matter
               of
               Theames
               ,
               it
               is
               fraughted
               full
               of
               the
               graue
               testimonies
               and
               sentences
               of
               many
               of
               the
               auncientest
               ,
               wisest
               ,
               and
               most
               experienced
               ;
               all
               fitly
               applyed
               ,
               without
               any
               matter
               to
               corrupt
               or
               offend
               ,
               and
               in
               a
               most
               familiar
               ,
               easie
               ,
               and
               pleasing
               stile
               .
            
             
               The
               manner
               of
               the
               vse
               of
               it
               for
               the
               first
               enterers
               into
               Theames
               ,
               
               where
               they
               haue
               bookes
               ,
               and
               the
               Teacher
               would
               specially
               apply
               them
               to
               Theames
               ,
               
               and
               that
               they
               haue
               time
               enough
               ,
               may
               be
               this
               :
            
             
               To
               take
               the
               *
               Poesies
               or
               Theams
               of
               it
               in
               order
               :
               or
               if
               any
               of
               them
               seeme
               ouer
               hard
               for
               childrens
               capacities
               ,
               in
               regard
               of
               the
               matter
               of
               them
               ,
               to
               make
               choyse
               of
               the
               most
               easie
               and
               familiar
               ,
               first
               :
               to
               reade
               vnto
               them
               euery
               night
               a
               peece
               of
               a
               Theame
               of
               it
               ,
               as
               a
               side
               of
               a
               leafe
               ,
               or
               more
               or
               lesse
               ;
               according
               to
               the
               abilities
               of
               their
               Schollars
               .
               In
               reading
               ,
               first
               to
               make
               the
               Theame
               or
               generall
               matter
               of
               it
               very
               plaine
               vnto
               them
               .
               They
               are
               commonly
               expounded
               for
               the
               sum
               of
               them
               vnder
               the
               Poesie
               ,
               in
               verse
               ,
               or
               with
               som
               short
               glosse
               ,
               or
               both
               .
               Afterwards
               ,
               to
               shew
               your
               Schollars
               the
               chiefe
               
               reasons
               and
               sentences
               ,
               as
               you
               do
               reade
               ,
               and
               in
               what
               words
               the
               force
               of
               each
               Argument
               or
               reason
               lieth
               .
               Also
               to
               obserue
               al
               the
               phrases
               which
               are
               either
               more
               difficult
               or
               pure
               ,
               or
               most
               fit
               to
               that
               purpose
               in
               hand
               .
            
             
               And
               thus
               to
               make
               euery
               thing
               plaine
               vnto
               them
               ;
               first
               opening
               them
               ,
               after
               examining
               the
               same
               ,
               and
               so
               causing
               them
               to
               vnderstand
               ,
               and
               to
               be
               able
               to
               answere
               euerie
               point
               therof
               in
               Latine
               ,
               or
               to
               giue
               the
               hard
               phrases
               to
               the
               English.
               
            
             
               This
               poasing
               by
               short
               questions
               ,
               with
               the
               other
               things
               mentioned
               ,
               will
               make
               the
               obscurest
               peeces
               of
               it
               very
               euident
               ,
               and
               cause
               both
               weaker
               Masters
               and
               schollars
               to
               profit
               greatly
               in
               vnderstanding
               .
               After
               all
               this
               ,
               if
               you
               will
               ,
               cause
               them
               to
               construe
               it
               amongst
               themselues
               and
               to
               giue
               the
               sense
               ,
               and
               so
               make
               it
               as
               perfect
               as
               they
               can
               euery
               waie
               :
               Or
               if
               they
               bee
               able
               ,
               heare
               them
               to
               construe
               it
               themselues
               first
               ,
               or
               to
               read
               it
               out
               of
               the
               Latine
               into
               English
               ,
               and
               then
               make
               it
               plaine
               to
               them
               .
               Then
               let
               each
               seuerally
               see
               how
               hee
               can
               gather
               a
               short
               Theam
               out
               of
               that
               ;
               choosing
               out
               all
               the
               principal
               sentences
               and
               reasons
               ,
               and
               composing
               them
               in
               good
               order
               :
               following
               ,
               if
               you
               thinke
               good
               ,
               the
               parts
               of
               a
               Theam
               :
               
                 viz.
                 Exordium
                 ,
                 Narratio
                 ,
                 Confirmatio
                 ,
                 Confutatio
                 ,
                 Conclusio
                 ,
              
               though
               their
               Theame
               be
               not
               aboue
               12.
               or
               ●6
               .
               lines
               ,
               according
               to
               their
               time
               &
               abilitie
               .
               To
               these
               they
               may
               adioine
               other
               reasons
               or
               sentēces
               ,
               as
               they
               can
               ,
               either
               what
               they
               haue
               learned
               ,
               or
               what
               they
               can
               gather
               fitly
               to
               the
               same
               purpose
               .
            
             
               To
               bring
               this
               Theame
               of
               theirs
               thus
               made
               ,
               the
               next
               day
               at
               the
               time
               appointed
               for
               shewing
               their
               Theames
               each
               one
               to
               pronounce
               his
               Theam
               without
               book
               ;
               
               you
               in
               the
               meane
               time
               looking
               on
               that
               which
               is
               pronounced
               ,
               &
               examining
               each
               fault
               ,
               as
               they
               are
               vttering
               it
               or
               after
               ,
               by
               asking
               them
               short
               questions
               of
               the
               faults
               ,
               and
               causing
               them
               to
               answere
               them
               ,
               and
               to
               shew
               how
               they
               should
               be
               amended
               ;
               and
               so
               making
               a
               dash
               with
               a
               pen
               vnder
               euery
               falt
               ,
               or
               the
               letters
               where
               the
               falt
               is
               ,
               to
               leaue
               them
               to
               them
               to
               correct
               them
               after
               .
               Yet
               your selfe
               somtimes
               to
               peruse
               the
               exercises
               after
               againe
               ,
               to
               see
               that
               they
               haue
               corrected
               them
               ;
               as
               I
               shal
               shew
               in
               another
               place
               .
               By
               this
               means
               the
               first
               enterers
               may
               haue
               choise
               of
               
               matter
               gathered
               to
               their
               hands
               ,
               which
               otherwise
               they
               were
               to
               seeke
               in
               other
               Authors
               they
               knewe
               not
               where
               no●
               how
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               All
               the
               Theams
               of
               this
               Author
               being
               thus
               written
               of
               ,
               
               and
               pronounced
               by
               them
               memoriter
               ,
               which
               may
               bee
               done
               in
               a
               short
               time
               ,
               keeping
               each
               night
               a
               Theame
               ,
               must
               needs
               help
               to
               furnish
               them
               with
               variety
               of
               the
               best
               matter
               ,
               and
               fit
               phrase
               .
               Besides
               that
               ,
               this
               will
               be
               a
               great
               furtherance
               to
               audac●tie
               ,
               memory
               ,
               gesture
               ,
               pronuntiation
               :
               and
               by
               the
               continual
               and
               diligent
               reading
               of
               that
               Author
               ,
               with
               their
               other
               Authors
               ,
               they
               shall
               haue
               much
               help
               to
               construe
               &
               vnderstand
               any
               other
               morall
               Author
               
                 ex
                 tempore
              
               .
            
             
               Or
               if
               this
               course
               bee
               ouer-tedious
               ,
               
               by
               reason
               of
               the
               multitude
               of
               schollars
               ,
               
               or
               their
               other
               exercises
               ;
               then
               to
               reade
               them
               the
               more
               at
               a
               time
               ,
               and
               let
               them
               bring
               them
               once
               or
               twice
               in
               the
               weeke
               ,
               made
               longer
               and
               more
               carefully
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               This
               way
               may
               bee
               very
               good
               for
               entering
               young
               schollars
               ,
               and
               to
               store
               them
               with
               the
               best
               matter
               &
               phrase
               :
               but
               might
               there
               not
               bee
               some
               speciall
               rules
               and
               directions
               giuen
               ,
               for
               writing
               their
               Theames
               according
               to
               the
               order
               of
               the
               chiefe
               schooles
               ,
               prosecuting
               the
               seuerall
               parts
               of
               the
               Theame
               ?
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               Yes
               :
               but
               these
               I
               thinke
               fittest
               to
               succeed
               in
               the
               second
               place
               ,
               
               after
               that
               they
               haue
               thus
               furnished
               themselues
               ,
               with
               words
               and
               store
               of
               matter
               ,
               by
               this
               help
               ,
               or
               Tullies
               sentences
               ,
               or
               the
               like
               ;
               or
               in
               want
               of
               other
               books
               to
               vse
               Apthonius
               .
               Then
               to
               learne
               to
               flourish
               and
               adorne
               their
               Theames
               after
               .
            
             
               For
               the
               surest
               and
               easiest
               direction
               for
               such
               Theams
               ,
               to
               be
               done
               in
               more
               exquisite
               manner
               ,
               where
               the
               schollars
               may
               haue
               leasure
               to
               them
               ;
               
               I
               shall
               shew
               you
               my
               iudgement
               ,
               and
               what
               I
               can
               yet
               find
               or
               conceiue
               to
               be
               the
               best
               .
            
             
               1.
               
               Because
               I
               would
               not
               haue
               my
               schollars
               discouraged
               any
               way
               thorough
               the
               difficulty
               of
               this
               exercise
               ,
               I
               would
               do
               as
               in
               their
               first
               Theams
               for
               matter
               :
               so
               in
               these
               .
               That
               is
               ,
               I
               would
               take
               their
               Theames
               (
               at
               least
               for
               a
               time
               )
               out
               of
               Apthonius
               ,
               
               either
               in
               order
               as
               they
               stand
               ,
               or
               choosing
               of
               the
               most
               familiar
               ,
               and
               in
               all
               things
               read
               and
               make
               it
               plaine
               vnto
               them
               ,
               with
               the
               seuerall
               parts
               and
               arguments
               ,
               as
               I
               shewed
               you
               before
               in
               Reusner
               .
            
             
               Then
               I
               would
               demaund
               of
               them
               ,
               first
               to
               giue
               mee
               Apthonius
               arguments
               :
               as
               ,
               what
               reasons
               hee
               hath
               from
               the
               Cause
               ,
               Effect
               ,
               Contrarie
               ,
               Similitude
               ,
               Example
               ,
               Testimonie
               .
            
             
               Next
               ,
               what
               reasons
               euerie
               one
               can
               giue
               of
               his
               owne
               ,
               to
               proue
               the
               same
               .
            
             
               In
               the
               third
               place
               to
               shew
               ,
               what
               any
               of
               them
               can
               obiect
               against
               it
               ;
               or
               if
               it
               be
               true
               ,
               what
               absurdities
               and
               inconueniences
               will
               follow
               of
               it
               ;
               and
               also
               some
               of
               them
               to
               answere
               the
               obiections
               and
               inconueniences
               :
               and
               lastly
               my selfe
               to
               supplie
               their
               wants
               and
               faylings
               .
            
             
               After
               this
               done
               ,
               direct
               euery
               one
               of
               them
               who
               are
               to
               write
               of
               it
               ,
               to
               remember
               where
               they
               haue
               read
               any
               thing
               of
               that
               Theam
               ,
               or
               by
               the
               Indexes
               of
               their
               books
               of
               Cōmonplaces
               :
               as
               Tullies
               sentences
               ,
               Reusner
               ,
               or
               the
               like
               ,
               to
               seeke
               what
               they
               can
               finde
               of
               that
               matter
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               That
               they
               obserue
               these
               parts
               ,
               named
               
                 
                   Exordium
                   .
                
                 
                   Narratio
                   .
                   
                
                 
                   Confirmatio
                   .
                
                 
                   Confutatio
                   .
                
                 
                   Conclusio
                   .
                
              
            
             
               3.
               
               To
               make
               their
               Exordium
               very
               short
               ,
               
               two
               or
               three
               lines
               ,
               to
               gaine
               the
               approbation
               of
               the
               hearers
               ,
               and
               their
               attention
               .
            
             
               If
               the
               Theam
               be
               of
               any
               person
               in
               accusation
               or
               defence
               of
               them
               after
               the
               manner
               of
               declamations
               ,
               
               then
               that
               their
               Exordium
               may
               bee
               fittest
               taken
               ,
               from
               the
               partie
               himselfe
               who
               is
               accused
               or
               defended
               ;
               from
               some
               description
               of
               him
               to
               his
               praise
               or
               dispraise
               ;
               or
               else
               from
               the
               person
               of
               the
               aduersarie
               ,
               or
               of
               the
               auditours
               ,
               or
               of
               the
               party
               himselfe
               who
               writeth
               .
            
             
               For
               the
               persons
               whom
               they
               will
               defend
               ,
               they
               must
               labor
               
               to
               perswade
               their
               hearers
               of
               their
               vertues
               ,
               or
               to
               remoue
               from
               them
               all
               preiudicate
               opinion
               .
               And
               for
               the
               persons
               whom
               they
               will
               accuse
               ,
               to
               dispraise
               them
               ,
               by
               shewing
               their
               bad
               qualities
               ;
               so
               to
               bring
               them
               into
               disgrace
               .
            
             
               But
               if
               the
               Theame
               bee
               of
               some
               matter
               to
               be
               proued
               or
               disproued
               ,
               
               commended
               or
               discommended
               ,
               which
               are
               most
               ordinarie
               ;
               their
               Exordium
               may
               bee
               taken
               from
               the
               matter
               ;
               by
               commending
               it
               for
               the
               excellency
               thereof
               ,
               or
               for
               the
               benefit
               which
               may
               redound
               to
               the
               hearers
               ,
               by
               the
               knowledge
               of
               it
               ;
               or
               discommending
               it
               by
               the
               contrary
               ,
               or
               by
               some
               circumstance
               of
               time
               ▪
               persons
               ,
               places
               ,
               or
               the
               like
               .
            
             
               In
               their
               Narration
               ,
               to
               the
               end
               that
               the
               Auditors
               may
               fully
               vnderstand
               the
               matter
               ,
               
               and
               themselues
               may
               proceed
               more
               easily
               ;
               let
               them
               set
               downe
               first
               the
               Theame
               or
               matter
               in
               as
               few
               and
               plaine
               words
               as
               they
               can
               .
            
             
               Secondly
               ,
               expound
               the
               doubtfull
               words
               or
               phrases
               ,
               if
               therebe
               any
               .
               If
               it
               concerne
               persons
               or
               facts
               of
               persons
               ,
               then
               to
               set
               downe
               all
               the
               circumstances
               to
               expresse
               the
               nature
               &
               maner
               of
               it
               .
               Or
               if
               it
               concerne
               some
               special
               matter
               ,
               to
               make
               some
               short
               diuision
               of
               it
               ;
               if
               it
               bee
               a
               generall
               into
               his
               specials
               ,
               or
               if
               a
               whole
               into
               his
               members
               or
               parts
               :
               so
               to
               goe
               throgh
               euery
               part
               in
               order
               ,
               ioining
               each
               part
               together
               with
               fit
               transitions
               ,
               to
               shew
               their
               passage
               frō
               one
               part
               to
               another
               .
            
             
               In
               the
               Confirmation
               to
               the
               end
               ,
               
               to
               bee
               able
               to
               proue
               the
               matter
               the
               better
               ;
            
             
               1.
               
               To
               note
               in
               their
               Authors
               all
               the
               principall
               reasons
               which
               they
               can
               ,
               to
               that
               end
               ,
               and
               to
               gather
               them
               forth
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               To
               trie
               what
               reasons
               they
               can
               inuent
               of
               themselues
               according
               to
               the
               chiefe
               heads
               of
               Inuention
               ,
               following
               either
               Apthonius
               order
               ,
               or
               the
               ten
               chief
               heads
               of
               Inuention
               :
               as
               ,
               Causes
               ,
               Effects
               ,
               Subiects
               ,
               Adiuncts
               ,
               &c.
               which
               ar
               the
               same
               in
               effect
               ,
               but
               farre
               more
               easie
               to
               prosecute
               ,
               according
               to
               the
               Art
               of
               meditation
               ,
               whereof
               we
               shal
               speak
               after
               .
               By
               considering
               wel
               either
               the
               thing
               it self
               ,
               Causes
               &
               Effects
               of
               it
               :
               or
               if
               it
               be
               a
               Proposition
               ,
               as
               in
               this
               (
               Children
               are
               to
               obey
               their
               Parents
               )
               by
               marking
               carefully
               both
               parts
               of
               the
               Proposition
               or
               sentence
               ,
               both
               Antecedent
               and
               consequent
               ,
               as
               they
               are
               
               called
               ;
               and
               the
               one
               part
               wil
               surely
               afford
               some
               reasons
               .
            
             
               As
               if
               we
               thinke
               first
               of
               the
               parents
               what
               they
               haue
               beene
               ,
               and
               are
               towards
               the
               children
               ;
               and
               so
               what
               the
               children
               haue
               and
               doe
               receiue
               from
               them
               (
               thus
               following
               the
               parts
               according
               to
               those
               places
               of
               meditation
               )
               any
               one
               of
               vnderstanding
               shall
               be
               able
               to
               finde
               out
               reasons
               why
               the
               children
               are
               to
               obey
               their
               parents
               .
            
             
               Then
               hauing
               found
               out
               reasons
               ,
               before
               they
               set
               them
               downe
               in
               their
               Theame
               ,
               as
               they
               will
               haue
               them
               ,
               to
               ranke
               them
               in
               their
               minde
               or
               in
               writing
               ;
               so
               as
               they
               doe
               purpose
               to
               set
               them
               in
               their
               Theame
               :
               setting
               some
               stronger
               in
               the
               first
               place
               ,
               weaker
               in
               the
               midst
               ,
               reseruing
               some
               of
               the
               stronger
               to
               the
               last
               ,
               crossing
               and
               leauing
               out
               all
               the
               weake
               ones
               ,
               whereof
               any
               one
               may
               discredite
               all
               the
               rest
               .
            
             
               In
               the
               Confutation
               to
               seeke
               out
               and
               set
               downe
               two
               or
               three
               good
               reasons
               ,
               
               to
               ouerthrow
               or
               reproue
               the
               contrary
               opinion
               to
               the
               Theame
               :
               and
               also
               to
               consider
               what
               may
               be
               obiected
               against
               it
               ,
               and
               how
               to
               answere
               them
               ,
               by
               way
               of
               Occupation
               and
               Subiection
               ,
               or
               of
               preuenting
               and
               obiection
               .
            
             
               Then
               to
               direct
               them
               ,
               
               that
               the
               Conclusion
               is
               nothing
               but
               a
               collection
               gathered
               from
               all
               the
               former
               reasons
               ;
               in
               which
               may
               be
               a
               short
               recapitulation
               ,
               or
               rehearsall
               of
               the
               summe
               of
               the
               reasons
               ,
               and
               an
               vrging
               (
               if
               they
               will
               )
               of
               one
               or
               two
               of
               the
               principall
               &
               most
               forcible
               reasons
               somwhat
               more
               ,
               to
               leaue
               a
               deeper
               impression
               in
               the
               minds
               of
               the
               hearers
               ;
               &
               so
               out
               of
               them
               to
               conclude
               most
               firmly
               .
               And
               thus
               much
               may
               serue
               for
               the
               direction
               in
               generall
               for
               making
               the
               Theame
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               But
               this
               seemes
               still
               to
               me
               rather
               too
               obscure
               for
               young
               Grammar
               schollars
               :
               I
               pray
               you
               let
               me
               heare
               ,
               if
               you
               could
               not
               leade
               me
               yet
               vnto
               more
               ready
               helpes
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               The
               most
               excellent
               patterns
               ,
               I
               take
               to
               be
               the
               most
               speedy
               and
               ready
               helps
               for
               schollars
               to
               be
               acquainted
               with
               ,
               and
               to
               learne
               to
               imitate
               them
               :
               for
               they
               in
               euery
               thing
               doe
               most
               auaile
               ,
               to
               teach
               the
               soonest
               and
               sureliest
               .
            
             
               As
               for
               variety
               of
               Exordiums
               and
               Conclusions
               ,
               
               Apthonius
               his
               Prog●masmata
               may
               helpe
               to
               direct
               ;
               
               and
               also
               Master
               Stockwood
               his
               disputations
               of
               Grammar
               .
            
             
             
               For
               furnishing
               with
               matter
               and
               substance
               ,
               
               besides
               Reusners
               Symbola
               mentioned
               ,
               Erasmus
               Adages
               of
               the
               largest
               and
               last
               Edition
               ,
               is
               a
               rich
               store-house
               .
               Also
               Lycosthenes
               his
               Apothegmata
               ,
               printed
               at
               London
               by
               G.
               Bishoppe
               ,
               M.D.XCVI
               .
               is
               of
               good
               vse
               .
            
             
               Lycosthenes
               of
               the
               last
               Edition
               (
               as
               I
               heare
               )
               is
               dangerously
               corrupted
               with
               Popery
               ,
               
               and
               rayling
               against
               K.
               Henry
               the
               eight
               ,
               K.
               Edward
               ,
               and
               our
               late
               blessed
               Queene
               ;
               and
               therefore
               not
               to
               be
               permitted
               vnto
               children
               .
               Many
               other
               I
               might
               name
               vnto
               you
               ,
               which
               haue
               written
               of
               such
               morall
               matters
               ;
               diuers
               of
               them
               in
               English
               ,
               and
               some
               of
               them
               very
               notable
               :
               as
               the
               French
               Academie
               ,
               the
               morall
               part
               of
               it
               :
               Charactery
               ,
               Morall
               Philosophy
               ,
               Golden
               groue
               ,
               Wits
               Common
               wealth
               ,
               Ciuill
               conuersation
               ;
               and
               others
               .
            
             
               So
               in
               Latin
               ▪
               Z●gedine
               his
               
                 Philosophia
                 Poetica
              
               ;
               The
               sentences
               selected
               out
               of
               the
               best
               Authours
               ,
               adioyned
               to
               Tallies
               sentences
               ;
               
                 Flores
                 Poetarum
              
               for
               Verses
               to
               flourish
               withall
               .
            
             
               But
               the
               former
               ,
               viz.
               Reusner
               Erasmus
               Adages
               ,
               Apthonius
               ,
               and
               Lycosthenes
               ,
               may
               serue
               in
               steed
               of
               many
               ,
               for
               Schollars
               who
               are
               of
               vnderstanding
               and
               iudgement
               to
               vse
               them
               aright
               ;
               chusing
               out
               the
               summe
               of
               the
               most
               excellent
               matter
               ,
               and
               making
               it
               their
               owne
               ;
               composing
               euery
               thing
               fitly
               ,
               without
               apparant
               stealing
               out
               of
               any
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               But
               what
               helpe
               doe
               you
               account
               the
               very
               best
               for
               inuention
               of
               matter
               ,
               
               to
               find
               it
               out
               as
               of
               their
               own
               heads
               ,
               which
               you
               know
               is
               principally
               esteemed
               of
               ?
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               That
               which
               I
               named
               in
               the
               direction
               for
               the
               Theame
               ,
               is
               the
               vsual
               manner
               in
               schooles
               ,
               as
               I
               take
               it
               ;
               I
               mean
               the
               following
               the
               places
               of
               Apthonius
               :
               as
               ,
               
                 à
                 Laudatiuo
                 ,
                 Paraphrastico
                 ,
                 Causa
                 ,
                 Contrario
                 ,
                 Parabola
                 ,
                 Exemplo
                 ,
                 Testimonio
                 veterum
                 ,
                 Breui
                 Epilogo
                 .
              
            
             
               So
               à
               Manifesto
               ,
               Credibili
               ,
               Possibili
               ,
               Consequente
               ,
               Decoro
               ,
               Vtili
               .
               And
               ab
               Obscuro
               ,
               Incredibili
               ,
               Impossibili
               ,
               Inconsequenti
               ,
               Indecoro
               ,
               Inutili
               ,
               
                 and
                 the
                 like
              
               .
            
             
               Yet
               these
               doe
               seeme
               to
               mee
               also
               farre
               too
               hard
               for
               childrens
               conceits
               ,
               who
               haue
               read
               no
               Logicke
               ,
               and
               ouer-tedious
               .
               
               But
               the
               following
               of
               those
               ten
               first
               and
               chiefe
               heads
               of
               reasoning
               ;
               
               to
               wit
               ,
               from
               Causes
               ,
               Effects
               ,
               Subiects
               ,
               Adiuncts
               ,
               Disagreeable
               things
               ,
               Comparisons
               ,
               Notations
               ,
               Distributions
               ,
               Definitions
               ,
               Testimonies
               (
               to
               one
               of
               which
               each
               of
               Apthonius
               or
               Tullies
               places
               doe
               belong
               )
               is
               farre
               the
               easiest
               ,
               surest
               ,
               and
               plainest
               way
               .
            
             
               If
               that
               little
               booke
               called
               the
               Arte
               of
               Meditation
               ,
               
               were
               made
               somewhat
               more
               plaine
               for
               the
               definitions
               or
               descriptions
               ,
               
               that
               children
               might
               see
               euery
               thing
               euidently
               ;
               and
               illustrated
               by
               a
               few
               moe
               examples
               ;
               and
               so
               schollars
               made
               perfect
               in
               it
               by
               examining
               ;
               they
               would
               bee
               able
               to
               inuent
               plenty
               of
               good
               matter
               presently
               ,
               after
               that
               they
               had
               beene
               exercised
               in
               Reusner
               ,
               and
               the
               other
               Authours
               ;
               in
               reading
               ,
               and
               also
               in
               writing
               some
               variety
               of
               Theames
               ,
               after
               the
               manner
               set
               downe
               before
               .
            
             
               Let
               them
               practice
               when
               they
               would
               inuent
               matter
               ,
               but
               to
               runne
               through
               those
               places
               curiously
               in
               their
               mindes
               ;
               and
               if
               one
               place
               doe
               not
               offer
               fit
               matter
               ,
               another
               will
               surely
               ,
               and
               furnish
               them
               with
               store
               :
               so
               that
               by
               the
               helpe
               of
               that
               small
               Treatise
               ,
               if
               it
               were
               so
               perfected
               ,
               all
               this
               might
               bee
               accomplished
               ;
               and
               that
               with
               a
               small
               meditation
               any
               schollar
               of
               vnderstanding
               might
               discourse
               very
               commendably
               of
               any
               such
               matter
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               It
               is
               great
               pitie
               it
               should
               not
               be
               made
               exact
               ,
               if
               the
               vse
               and
               benefite
               bee
               such
               as
               you
               conceiue
               of
               it
               to
               this
               purpose
               ,
               besides
               the
               worthy
               end
               for
               which
               it
               is
               written
               .
            
             
               But
               as
               you
               haue
               giuen
               patternes
               for
               other
               exercises
               ,
               so
               let
               me
               heare
               your
               iudgement
               ,
               where
               they
               may
               haue
               th●
               best
               patternes
               for
               Theames
               ,
               for
               the
               whole
               frame
               thereof
               ,
               being
               handled
               according
               to
               all
               the
               parts
               seuerally
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               Apthonius
               (
               out
               of
               whom
               these
               Theames
               may
               bee
               
               taken
               first
               and
               the
               schollars
               also
               to
               haue
               liberty
               to
               gather
               out
               the
               principall
               matter
               ;
               
               yet
               making
               it
               their
               owne
               ,
               by
               seeking
               to
               better
               euery
               sentence
               )
               hath
               sundry
               very
               good
               presidents
               for
               such
               Theames
               ;
               and
               in
               sweete
               Latine
               ,
               written
               by
               Rodulphus
               Agricola
               ,
               Cataneus
               Lorichius
               ,
               or
               others
               :
               as
               the
               example
               of
               a
               Common-place
               ,
               of
               the
               Thesis
               ,
               and
               the
               
               like
               .
               Though
               Apthonius
               his
               owne
               (
               I
               meane
               )
               those
               translated
               out
               of
               him
               ,
               are
               of
               a
               more
               harsh
               stile
               in
               Latine
               ;
               yet
               the
               order
               is
               good
               ,
               as
               being
               written
               and
               set
               forth
               of
               purpose
               to
               this
               end
               .
            
             
               These
               very
               Theames
               may
               be
               written
               on
               ,
               
               first
               for
               incouragement
               ;
               after
               ,
               others
               of
               like
               matterto
               be
               imitated
               ,
               according
               to
               the
               same
               places
               .
               
            
             
               Secondly
               ,
               
               next
               vnto
               those
               in
               Apthonius
               ,
               which
               are
               more
               easie
               ,
               Tullies
               Paradoxes
               are
               most
               singular
               patternes
               for
               true
               Rhetoricke
               ,
               though
               the
               order
               of
               them
               seeme
               to
               be
               more
               obscure
               :
               they
               will
               be
               notable
               directions
               ,
               if
               that
               the
               schollars
               be
               of
               capacity
               and
               ripenesse
               ,
               and
               haue
               the
               seuerall
               parts
               rightly
               opened
               vnto
               them
               ,
               that
               they
               fully
               vnderstand
               them
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               But
               for
               Declamations
               what
               examples
               or
               helpes
               would
               you
               vse
               ?
               
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               The
               Declamation
               being
               nothing
               else
               but
               a
               Theame
               of
               som
               matter
               ,
               which
               may
               be
               controuerted
               ,
               and
               so
               handled
               by
               parts
               ,
               when
               one
               taketh
               the
               Affirmatiue
               part
               ,
               another
               the
               Negatiue
               ,
               &
               it
               may
               be
               a
               third
               moderateth
               or
               determineth
               betweene
               both
               ;
               we
               haue
               very
               good
               Presidents
               in
               the
               Thesis
               in
               Apthonius
               :
               as
               in
               that
               question
               handled
               both
               affirmatiuely
               and
               negatiuely
               ,
               viz.
               
                 Vxor
                 est
                 ducenda
                 ,
                 Vxor
                 non
                 est
                 ducenda
                 .
              
            
             
               If
               it
               be
               in
               a
               more
               vehement
               inuectiue
               against
               some
               vice
               ,
               
               we
               haue
               sundry
               examples
               in
               Apthonius
               ,
               in
               
                 Loco
                 communi
              
               .
               As
               ,
               
                 In
                 villarum
                 incensores
                 ,
                 In
                 sacrilegum
                 ,
                 Incontumacem
                 ,
                 In
                 auarum
                 .
              
               
            
             
               Likewise
               the
               seuerall
               examples
               there
               set
               downe
               of
               praise
               and
               dispraise
               ,
               of
               persons
               ,
               cities
               ,
               or
               the
               like
               .
               So
               the
               Presidents
               in
               Apthonius
               of
               particular
               actions
               ,
               in
               accusing
               or
               defence
               of
               them
               ,
               may
               be
               great
               helpes
               to
               giue
               much
               good
               direction
               .
            
             
               For
               further
               patternes
               ,
               see
               Tully
               his
               Orations
               ;
               and
               specially
               the
               Inuectiues
               against
               Catiline
               .
            
             
               In
               these
               kinde
               of
               Theames
               ,
               wee
               shall
               haue
               farre
               more
               vse
               of
               those
               figures
               of
               Sentences
               ,
               which
               are
               the
               very
               life
               and
               strength
               of
               an
               Oration
               ;
               as
               of
               Exclamations
               ,
               Reuocations
               ,
               
               Apostrophees
               ,
               Prosopopies
               ;
               and
               the
               rest
               of
               the
               figures
               in
               Dialogismo
               .
            
             
               I
               haue
               heard
               of
               some
               good
               ensamples
               in
               English
               ,
               viz.
               thirteene
               Declamations
               ;
               but
               I
               haue
               not
               beene
               able
               to
               finde
               them
               out
               .
            
             
               But
               these
               kinde
               of
               exercises
               of
               Declaming
               are
               rather
               for
               the
               Vniuersities
               ;
               
               or
               at
               least
               for
               such
               Schollars
               in
               the
               Grammar
               schooles
               ,
               as
               haue
               beene
               long
               exercised
               in
               the
               former
               kindes
               .
            
             
               For
               the
               manner
               of
               writing
               downe
               the
               Theames
               by
               Schollars
               of
               iudgement
               ,
               it
               may
               not
               bee
               amisse
               where
               leasure
               will
               serue
               ,
               to
               cause
               the
               schollars
               to
               write
               them
               thus
               :
               In
               the
               first
               Margent
               towards
               the
               left
               hand
               ,
               together
               with
               the
               seuerall
               partes
               of
               the
               Theame
               (
               as
               
                 Exord
                 .
                 Narratio
                 ,
                 Confirmatio
                 ,
                 Confutatio
                 ,
                 Conclusio
                 ,
              
               being
               set
               in
               great
               letters
               ouer
               against
               each
               part
               )
               to
               set
               also
               the
               heads
               of
               the
               seuerall
               arguments
               ;
               chiefly
               against
               the
               Confirmation
               :
               as
               
                 Causa
                 ,
                 Effectum
              
               :
               like
               as
               Apthonius
               doth
               set
               his
               places
               ,
               
                 à
                 Causa
                 ,
                 à
                 Contrario
              
               .
               And
               in
               the
               later
               side
               of
               the
               page
               ,
               towards
               the
               right
               hand
               ,
               to
               set
               the
               seuerall
               tropes
               or
               figures
               ,
               but
               in
               two
               or
               three
               letters
               .
               As
               for
               
                 Metonymia
                 Efficientis
              
               ,
               no
               more
               but
               
                 Met.
                 Effic
              
               .
               or
               the
               like
               :
               making
               some
               line
               vnder
               the
               word
               ,
               in
               which
               they
               are
               ;
               The
               shorter
               the
               better
               ,
               if
               it
               can
               bee
               vnderstood
               .
            
             
               One
               Theame
               in
               the
               weeke
               well
               performed
               in
               this
               maner
               ,
               
               besides
               all
               other
               exercises
               ,
               
               may
               be
               sufficient
               ;
               like
               as
               the
               order
               is
               in
               many
               of
               the
               chiefe
               schooles
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               Certainely
               Sir
               ,
               these
               courses
               seeme
               to
               me
               as
               easie
               as
               the
               former
               ,
               both
               for
               Masters
               and
               Schollars
               ;
               that
               hereby
               they
               must
               needes
               labour
               ,
               and
               goe
               on
               with
               delight
               ;
               beeing
               thus
               plainely
               guided
               and
               directed
               from
               point
               to
               point
               .
            
             
               Yet
               to
               proceede
               a
               little
               further
               herein
               ,
               if
               you
               will
               giue
               me
               leaue
               :
               I
               haue
               heard
               of
               some
               schollars
               marueilously
               praised
               for
               this
               ,
               that
               they
               haue
               beene
               able
               to
               speake
               of
               a
               Theame
               
                 ex
                 tempore
              
               for
               a
               quarter
               of
               an
               houre
               ,
               or
               more
               together
               ,
               in
               good
               Latine
               ,
               and
               to
               very
               good
               purpose
               .
            
             
             
               Now
               how
               doe
               you
               thinke
               that
               this
               may
               be
               done
               ?
               for
               this
               is
               a
               matter
               of
               very
               high
               commendations
               to
               young
               schollars
               euen
               in
               the
               Vniuersities
               ;
               and
               much
               more
               in
               the
               Grammar
               schooles
               ,
               if
               it
               can
               be
               done
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               This
               exercise
               must
               needes
               require
               much
               reading
               ,
               
               and
               practice
               to
               doe
               it
               ,
               in
               such
               commendable
               manner
               ;
               as
               indeed
               it
               may
               .
               The
               best
               way
               how
               to
               attaine
               it
               most
               soone
               and
               surely
               ▪
               is
               this
               ,
               so
               farre
               as
               yet
               I
               can
               conceiue
               :
            
             
               1
               They
               must
               practice
               constantly
               for
               a
               good
               space
               ,
               the
               former
               or
               better
               course
               of
               making
               Theames
               ;
               that
               they
               may
               become
               very
               ready
               in
               writing
               their
               Theames
               of
               any
               morall
               matter
               with
               a
               little
               study
               .
            
             
               2
               I
               haue
               seene
               this
               practice
               to
               bee
               easie
               and
               profitable
               to
               this
               end
               :
               
               the
               very
               vse
               of
               the
               Grammatical
               translation
               of
               Apthonius
               ,
               according
               to
               the
               maner
               of
               the
               vse
               of
               the
               translations
               ,
               for
               keeping
               the
               schoole
               Authours
               perfectly
               .
            
             
               As
               first
               ,
               causing
               them
               to
               reade
               a
               Theame
               out
               of
               the
               Latine
               into
               English
               ;
               or
               where
               it
               is
               hard
               ,
               first
               to
               reade
               it
               ouer
               in
               English
               to
               giue
               some
               light
               ;
               
               then
               out
               of
               the
               Latine
               into
               English
               ,
               to
               vnderstand
               it
               perfectly
               :
               afterwards
               to
               reade
               it
               out
               of
               the
               English
               translation
               into
               Latin
               ,
               to
               haue
               the
               phrase
               and
               Latine
               readily
               to
               expresse
               their
               mindes
               .
            
             
               Then
               euery
               one
               in
               his
               course
               ,
               to
               trie
               how
               he
               is
               able
               to
               expresse
               or
               vtter
               that
               Theame
               of
               himselfe
               ;
               first
               in
               English
               ,
               then
               in
               Latine
               ,
               euery
               part
               of
               the
               Theame
               in
               order
               .
            
             
               For
               example
               :
               To
               begin
               first
               with
               the
               Exordium
               ,
               to
               trie
               how
               they
               can
               vtter
               it
               in
               English
               ,
               and
               whether
               they
               can
               better
               the
               Authour
               .
               After
               the
               first
               ,
               a
               second
               fellow
               to
               assay
               how
               he
               is
               able
               to
               better
               the
               first
               ;
               so
               another
               after
               him
               to
               better
               them
               both
               :
               and
               so
               forward
               as
               you
               will.
               
            
             
               After
               this
               ,
               to
               make
               tryall
               how
               they
               can
               vtter
               the
               same
               in
               Latine
               ;
               euery
               one
               still
               bettering
               others
               :
               then
               to
               doe
               the
               like
               in
               the
               Narration
               ;
               and
               so
               through
               euery
               part
               ,
               both
               in
               English
               and
               Latine
               ;
               still
               contending
               to
               go
               beyond
               their
               patternes
               in
               purity
               of
               phrase
               and
               matter
               ,
               contracting
               ,
               adding
               ,
               or
               changing
               as
               they
               will.
               
            
             
               When
               they
               haue
               for
               some
               good
               time
               vsed
               this
               practice
               ,
               
               
               then
               trying
               how
               they
               are
               able
               to
               discourse
               of
               themselues
               in
               a
               Theame
               giuen
               vnto
               them
               ,
               
               according
               to
               the
               order
               of
               meditation
               ,
               or
               places
               of
               Inuention
               ,
               by
               continual
               exercise
               they
               shall
               attaine
               hereunto
               .
            
             
               The
               practice
               in
               Apthonius
               will
               affoord
               them
               matter
               and
               wordesenow
               for
               imitation
               of
               Exordiums
               ,
               
               manner
               of
               Confutations
               and
               Conclusions
               .
            
             
               Their
               readinesse
               in
               their
               first
               Authours
               of
               morall
               matters
               ,
               as
               also
               in
               Tullies
               sentences
               ,
               and
               
                 Flores
                 Poëtarum
              
               ;
               and
               that
               their
               continued
               exercise
               in
               Reusner
               ,
               with
               the
               helpe
               of
               the
               places
               of
               Inuention
               ,
               will
               commonly
               yeelde
               matter
               sufficient
               .
            
             
               What
               phrase
               or
               word
               they
               cannot
               vtter
               in
               Latine
               ,
            
             
               1
               Let
               them
               bethinke
               themselues
               how
               they
               would
               first
               vtter
               and
               vary
               it
               in
               English
               ,
               
               and
               some
               of
               the
               English
               words
               will
               bring
               Latine
               wordes
               ,
               
               or
               phrases
               to
               their
               remembrance
               ;
               or
               else
               how
               they
               can
               expresse
               it
               by
               Periphrasis
               ,
               or
               circumlocution
               in
               moe
               words
               ,
               by
               some
               description
               ,
               or
               by
               the
               generall
               ,
               or
               the
               contrary
               ,
               or
               by
               some
               property
               ,
               or
               the
               like
               .
            
             
               2
               Next
               to
               this
               ,
               
               they
               may
               vse
               the
               helpe
               of
               Holyokes
               Dictionary
               ;
               
               and
               for
               phrase
               Manutius
               or
               Master
               Draxes
               Calliepëia
               :
               the
               phrases
               may
               bee
               found
               more
               easily
               in
               the
               Calliepëia
               .
            
             
               3
               And
               to
               the
               end
               that
               they
               may
               be
               sure
               to
               haue
               variety
               both
               of
               words
               and
               phrase
               ,
               
               which
               doth
               much
               delight
               ;
               it
               shal
               not
               be
               amisse
               to
               peruse
               before
               in
               the
               phrase
               book
               ,
               the
               principall
               wordes
               or
               phrases
               which
               concerne
               that
               Theame
               ,
               and
               how
               many
               wayes
               they
               may
               be
               vttered
               :
               at
               least
               the
               Master
               when
               hee
               tryeth
               his
               Schollars
               in
               this
               extemporall
               faculty
               ,
               if
               hee
               bee
               not
               a
               ready
               and
               perfect
               Latinist
               may
               haue
               the
               phrase
               booke
               by
               him
               ,
               
               to
               looke
               euery
               hard
               phrase
               which
               they
               cannot
               vtter
               well
               ;
               and
               how
               they
               may
               vary
               it
               diuers
               wayes
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               But
               to
               the
               end
               that
               schollars
               may
               be
               sure
               euer
               to
               haue
               store
               of
               matter
               ,
               or
               to
               finde
               of
               a
               sudden
               where
               to
               turne
               to
               fit
               matter
               for
               euery
               Theame
               ;
               what
               doe
               you
               thinke
               of
               Common-place
               bookes
               of
               such
               morall
               matters
               ,
               that
               euery
               
               schollar
               should
               haue
               his
               Common-place
               booke
               written
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               I
               do
               account
               them
               a
               great
               help
               where
               the
               schollars
               haue
               leasure
               and
               iudgement
               to
               gather
               them
               ;
               
               I
               meane
               ,
               to
               gleane
               out
               all
               the
               choyse
               sentences
               and
               matter
               in
               the
               best
               Authours
               .
               Or
               ,
               because
               that
               that
               is
               ouer-great
               a
               toyle
               ,
               and
               requires
               more
               iudgement
               then
               can
               bee
               looked
               for
               in
               so
               young
               yeares
               ;
               if
               they
               had
               but
               only
               bookes
               of
               References
               ,
               it
               would
               be
               exceeding
               profitable
               :
               to
               wit
               ,
               such
               Common-place
               bookes
               as
               did
               but
               only
               containe
               the
               generall
               heads
               of
               matter
               ,
               and
               then
               the
               Quotations
               of
               three
               or
               foure
               of
               the
               chiefe
               Authours
               ;
               as
               Reusner
               ,
               Erasmus
               Adages
               ,
               Tullies
               sentences
               ,
               or
               some
               other
               ;
               setting
               downe
               the
               booke
               and
               the
               page
               ,
               where
               to
               turn
               of
               a
               sudden
               to
               any
               such
               matter
               in
               them
               .
               This
               would
               ease
               them
               of
               much
               searching
               ,
               and
               make
               schollars
               to
               do
               such
               exercises
               much
               sooner
               ,
               and
               with
               farre
               greater
               commendations
               :
               like
               as
               it
               is
               in
               Diuinity
               ,
               Law
               ,
               Physick
               ,
               and
               whatsoeuer
               other
               Artes.
               Thus
               they
               may
               vse
               the
               matter
               of
               the
               best
               Authors
               ,
               going
               farre
               beyond
               the
               matter
               which
               the
               wit
               of
               any
               childe
               can
               conceiue
               ;
               sith
               that
               those
               bookes
               haue
               in
               them
               the
               choysest
               sayings
               of
               the
               very
               wisest
               of
               all
               ages
               :
               although
               they
               are
               stil
               to
               adde
               whatsoeuer
               they
               can
               inuent
               of
               their
               owne
               braine
               ,
               so
               it
               be
               wittily
               and
               pithily
               .
            
             
               Such
               a
               book
               of
               References
               wel
               gathered
               ,
               and
               made
               publicke
               ,
               would
               much
               further
               young
               schollars
               herein
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               I
               see
               well
               how
               they
               may
               be
               furnished
               for
               store
               of
               matter
               ;
               yet
               for
               choyse
               of
               good
               wordes
               and
               phrase
               ,
               to
               haue
               copie
               and
               variety
               euer
               ready
               at
               hand
               ,
               I
               make
               some
               doubt
               how
               they
               may
               be
               furnished
               :
               for
               it
               is
               a
               toyle
               to
               goe
               euer
               to
               turne
               to
               phrase
               bookes
               ;
               neyther
               can
               they
               haue
               time
               when
               they
               are
               to
               speake
               
                 ex
                 tempore
              
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               Take
               no
               care
               for
               that
               ;
               
               store
               of
               matter
               being
               thus
               gotten
               ,
               as
               I
               haue
               shewed
               ,
               wil
               bring
               words
               :
               yet
               to
               haue
               copie
               of
               Synonymaes
               &
               good
               phrase
               ,
               besides
               their
               Authours
               made
               perfect
               ,
               &
               other
               helps
               mentioned
               ;
               Calliepeia
               translated
               in
               propriety
               ,
               &
               read
               one
               while
               out
               of
               Latin
               into
               English
               ,
               another
               while
               out
               of
               English
               into
               Latin
               ,
               &
               after
               trying
               how
               to
               vary
               both
               in
               English
               and
               Latin
               ;
               will
               help
               very
               much
               to
               furnish
               
               with
               copie
               both
               English
               and
               Latine
               .
               Hereof
               I
               haue
               known
               som
               experience
               .
               A
               little
               triall
               will
               soon
               cōfirm
               this
               .
            
             
               There
               may
               be
               also
               other
               helpes
               forvarying
               :
               
               as
               the
               rules
               in
               Erasmus
               
                 de
                 Cap●a
              
               ,
               in
               Macropedius
               and
               others
               ;
               and
               more
               specially
               some
               select
               phrases
               to
               seuerall
               purposes
               noted
               in
               Erasmus
               
                 de
                 Copia
              
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               But
               what
               say
               you
               concerning
               Orations
               ,
               
               what
               course
               doe
               you
               thinke
               fittest
               to
               bee
               able
               to
               performe
               them
               with
               commendations
               ?
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               I
               take
               them
               to
               belong
               rather
               to
               the
               Vniuersities
               ,
               
               that
               there
               is
               more
               seldom
               vse
               of
               them
               in
               schooles
               ,
               and
               then
               also
               to
               be
               performed
               by
               schollars
               growen
               to
               som
               maturity
               .
            
             
               For
               examples
               or
               patterns
               of
               Orations
               ,
               
               wee
               can
               haue
               no
               better
               then
               Tullies
               Orations
               ;
               wherein
               are
               presidents
               of
               all
               sorts
               .
               In
               these
               is
               the
               schollar
               to
               bee
               exercised
               to
               knowe
               the
               nature
               of
               them
               ,
               &
               the
               maner
               of
               the
               loftiness
               of
               stile
               vsed
               in
               them
               .
               Also
               Turners
               Orations
               ,
               Muretus
               ,
               or
               others
               .
               Though
               for
               entrance
               into
               them
               we
               may
               follow
               the
               exāples
               of
               praises
               in
               Apthonius
               .
               Chap.
               8.
               
               Or
               some
               other
               select
               Orations
               .
            
             
               Yet
               ,
               because
               in
               Schooles
               of
               special
               note
               ,
               and
               where
               there
               are
               auncient
               schollars
               ,
               
               sometimes
               it
               may
               bee
               expected
               amongst
               them
               ,
               that
               some
               one
               of
               them
               should
               make
               an
               Oration
               to
               entertaine
               a
               Benefactor
               ,
               or
               other
               person
               of
               note
               ;
               and
               it
               may
               be
               ,
               to
               do
               it
               
                 ex
                 tempore
              
               ,
               as
               their
               comming
               is
               of
               a
               sodaine
               ;
               therfore
               certaine
               speciall
               heads
               of
               an
               Oration
               to
               that
               purpose
               might
               be
               euer
               in
               readinesse
               .
               
               As
               the
               commendations
               of
               a
               person
               for
               his
               descent
               ,
               learning
               ,
               loue
               and
               countenance
               of
               good
               learning
               &
               vertue
               ,
               beneficence
               curtesie
               ,
               fauor
               towards
               that
               place
               ,
               and
               the
               like
               .
               Also
               for
               excusing
               themselues
               by
               their
               tender
               yeers
               ,
               want
               of
               experience
               and
               of
               practice
               in
               that
               kind
               ,
               bashfulnesse
               ,
               timorousnesse
               ;
               and
               yet
               their
               desire
               to
               answere
               the
               parties
               loue
               &
               expectation
               ,
               with
               presuming
               vpon
               their
               patience
               ,
               and
               such
               others
               .
               To
               be
               acquainted
               also
               with
               variety
               of
               choise
               phrases
               to
               the
               same
               purposes
               ,
               to
               haue
               them
               euer
               in
               fresh
               memory
               .
            
          
           
             
               Sp.
               
            
             
               These
               courses
               are
               very
               plain
               in
               my
               iudgemēt
               :
               yet
               notwithstanding
               ,
               sith
               they
               are
               of
               more
               seldom
               vse
               ,
               but
               Theams
               
               of
               daily
               practice
               ,
               wee
               are
               specially
               to
               looke
               vnto
               them
               .
               Therfore
               my
               weak
               memory
               ,
               let
               me
               heare
               in
               two
               words
               ,
               the
               sum
               of
               all
               concerning
               the
               Theames
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               This
               is
               the
               sum
               ;
            
             
               1.
               
               That
               they
               be
               acquainted
               with
               som
               matter
               for
               Theams
               and
               easie
               phrase
               ,
               
               and
               so
               accustomed
               to
               write
               Theames
               in
               a
               plaine
               manner
               first
               ,
               following
               Reusner
               principally
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               That
               they
               learne
               to
               handle
               the
               Theame
               more
               curiously
               according
               to
               Apthonius
               ,
               prosequuting
               and
               adorning
               the
               seuerall
               parts
               thereof
               ,
               making
               choise
               of
               the
               most
               excellent
               patternes
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               That
               they
               haue
               the
               helps
               and
               grounds
               of
               inuenting
               reasons
               of
               themselues
               ,
               and
               do
               know
               whereto
               finde
               more
               store
               of
               matter
               and
               phrase
               to
               expresse
               their
               mindes
               ,
               and
               be
               furnished
               with
               helps
               of
               the
               best
               books
               .
            
             
               4.
               
               Lastly
               ,
               that
               as
               in
               all
               other
               exercises
               ,
               they
               vse
               continuall
               practice
               ;
               which
               makes
               the
               hardest
               things
               easie
               and
               pleasant
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             XIIII
             .
          
           
             How
             to
             enter
             to
             make
             verses
             with
             delight
             and
             certaintie
             ,
             without
             bodging
             ;
             and
             to
             traine
             vp
             schollars
             to
             imitate
             and
             expresse
             Ouid
             or
             Virgil
             ,
             both
             their
             phrase
             &
             stile
             .
          
           
             
               Spo●d
               .
            
             
               NOw
               that
               wee
               haue
               gone
               thorough
               all
               the
               whole
               course
               of
               writing
               Latine
               in
               prose
               ,
               and
               the
               seuerall
               exercises
               therof
               which
               are
               requisite
               in
               Grammar
               schooles
               ,
               so
               far
               forth
               as
               I
               remember
               ;
               it
               remaineth
               that
               we
               come
               to
               verse
               :
               wherein
               I
               presume
               of
               your
               loue
               as
               in
               all
               the
               former
               ,
               not
               to
               conceale
               anything
               from
               me
               ,
               but
               to
               impart
               whatsoeuer
               may
               helpe
               to
               the
               attaining
               of
               that
               facultie
               .
            
          
           
             
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               Though
               Poetry
               bee
               rather
               for
               ornament
               then
               for
               any
               necessary
               vse
               ;
               
               and
               the
               main
               matter
               to
               be
               regarded
               in
               it
               ,
               
               is
               the
               puritie
               of
               phrase
               and
               of
               stile
               :
               yet
               because
               there
               is
               very
               commendable
               vse
               of
               it
               ,
               sometimes
               in
               occasions
               of
               triumph
               and
               reioicing
               ,
               more
               ordinarily
               at
               the
               funerals
               of
               some
               worthy
               personages
               ,
               and
               sometimes
               for
               some
               other
               purposes
               ;
               it
               is
               not
               amisse
               to
               traine
               vp
               schollars
               euen
               in
               this
               kinde
               also
               .
               And
               the
               rather
               because
               it
               serueth
               very
               much
               for
               the
               sharpning
               of
               the
               wit
               ,
               and
               is
               a
               matter
               of
               high
               commendation
               ,
               when
               a
               schollar
               is
               able
               to
               write
               a
               smooth
               and
               pure
               verse
               ,
               and
               to
               comp●ehend
               a
               great
               deale
               of
               choise
               matter
               in
               a
               very
               little
               roome
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               Surely
               sir
               though
               it
               is
               ,
               as
               you
               say
               ,
               but
               an
               ornament
               ,
               yet
               it
               is
               such
               a
               one
               ,
               as
               doth
               highly
               grace
               those
               who
               haue
               attained
               it
               ,
               in
               any
               such
               measure
               as
               you
               speak
               of
               ;
               and
               two
               such
               verses
               are
               worth
               two
               thousand
               ,
               of
               such
               flash
               and
               bodge
               stuffe
               as
               are
               ordinarily
               in
               some
               schooles
               .
               But
               this
               I
               haue
               found
               also
               to
               be
               full
               of
               difficutie
               ,
               
               both
               in
               the
               entring
               ,
               the
               progresse
               ,
               and
               also
               in
               the
               end
               ;
               that
               my
               schollars
               haue
               had
               more
               feare
               in
               this
               ,
               then
               in
               all
               the
               former
               ,
               and
               my selfe
               also
               driuen
               to
               more
               seuerity
               :
               which
               I
               haue
               been
               inforced
               vnto
               ,
               or
               else
               I
               should
               haue
               done
               no
               good
               at
               al
               with
               the
               greatest
               part
               .
            
             
               And
               yet
               when
               I
               haue
               done
               my
               vttermost
               ,
               I
               haue
               not
               had
               any
               to
               come
               to
               such
               pe●fection
               as
               you
               mention
               ,
               
               to
               write
               so
               pithily
               or
               purely
               :
               yea
               ,
               let
               me
               tell
               you
               this
               ,
               that
               I
               haue
               knowensom
               Masters
               ,
               who
               haue
               thought
               themselues
               very
               profound
               Poets
               ,
               who
               would
               vpon
               an
               occasion
               of
               a
               Funerall
               haue
               written
               you
               a
               sheete
               or
               two
               of
               verses
               ,
               as
               it
               were
               of
               a
               sydden
               ;
               yet
               amongst
               all
               those
               ,
               you
               should
               hardly
               haue
               found
               one
               such
               a
               Verse
               as
               you
               speake
               of
               ,
               vnlesse
               it
               were
               stolne
               ;
               and
               most
               of
               them
               such
               ,
               as
               iudicious
               Poet
               would
               be
               ready
               to
               laugh
               at
               ,
               or
               loath
               to
               reade
               .
               Therefore
               I
               intreat
               you
               to
               guide
               me
               ,
               how
               I
               may
               redresse
               this
               euill
               ,
               and
               preuent
               these
               inconueniences
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               Though
               I
               be
               no
               Poet
               ,
               yet
               I
               finde
               this
               course
               to
               be
               found
               most
               easie
               and
               plaine
               to
               direct
               my
               schollars
               :
            
             
             
               1.
               
               To
               looke
               that
               they
               bee
               able
               in
               manner
               to
               write
               true
               Latine
               ,
               
               and
               a
               good
               phrase
               in
               prose
               ,
               
               before
               they
               begin
               to
               meddle
               with
               making
               a
               verse
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               That
               they
               haue
               read
               some
               poetry
               first
               ;
               
               as
               at
               least
               these
               books
               or
               the
               like
               ,
               or
               some
               part
               of
               them
               :
               viz.
               Ouid
               
                 de
                 Tristibus
              
               ,
               or
               
                 de
                 Ponto
              
               ,
               some
               peace
               of
               his
               Metamorphosis
               or
               of
               Virgil
               ,
               and
               be
               well
               acquainted
               with
               their
               Poeticall
               phrases
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               I
               find
               this
               a
               most
               easie
               &
               pleasant
               way
               to
               enter
               them
               ;
               
               that
               for
               all
               the
               first
               bookes
               of
               Poetry
               which
               they
               learne
               in
               the
               beginning
               ,
               
               they
               vse
               to
               reade
               them
               daily
               out
               of
               the
               Grammaticall
               translations
               :
               first
               resoluing
               euery
               verse
               into
               the
               Grammaticall
               order
               ,
               like
               as
               it
               is
               in
               the
               translation
               ;
               after
               into
               the
               Poeticall
               ,
               turning
               it
               into
               verse
               ,
               as
               the
               words
               are
               in
               the
               Poet
               :
               according
               as
               I
               shewed
               the
               manner
               before
               ,
               in
               the
               benefit
               and
               vse
               of
               the
               translations
               .
               
               For
               the
               making
               of
               a
               verse
               ,
               
               is
               nothing
               but
               the
               turning
               of
               words
               forth
               of
               the
               Grammaticall
               order
               ,
               into
               the
               Rhetoricall
               ,
               in
               some
               kinde
               of
               metre
               ;
               which
               wee
               call
               verses
               .
               And
               withall
               ,
               that
               in
               reading
               thus
               out
               of
               the
               translations
               ,
               they
               vse
               to
               giue
               the
               Poeticall
               phrases
               ,
               to
               our
               English
               phrases
               ,
               set
               in
               the
               margents
               ,
               and
               also
               the
               Epithetes
               .
            
             
               For
               this
               practice
               of
               reading
               their
               Poetry
               ,
               out
               of
               the
               translations
               into
               verse
               ,
               a
               little
               trial
               will
               soon
               shew
               you
               ,
               that
               very
               children
               wil
               do
               it
               as
               fast
               almost
               as
               into
               prose
               :
               and
               by
               the
               vse
               of
               it
               ,
               continually
               turning
               prose
               into
               verse
               ,
               they
               will
               be
               in
               a
               good
               way
               towards
               the
               making
               a
               verse
               ,
               before
               they
               haue
               learned
               any
               rules
               therof
               .
            
             
               4.
               
               Then
               when
               you
               would
               haue
               them
               to
               go
               in
               hand
               with
               making
               a
               verse
               ;
               
               that
               they
               be
               made
               very
               cunning
               in
               the
               rules
               of
               versifying
               ,
               so
               as
               to
               be
               able
               to
               giue
               you
               readily
               each
               rule
               ,
               and
               the
               meaning
               therof
               .
            
             
               5.
               
               That
               they
               bee
               expert
               in
               scanning
               a
               verse
               ,
               
               and
               in
               prouing
               euery
               quantity
               ,
               according
               to
               their
               rules
               ,
               and
               so
               vse
               to
               practice
               in
               their
               lectures
               daily
               .
            
             
               6.
               
               To
               keepe
               them
               that
               they
               shall
               neuer
               bodge
               in
               their
               entrance
               ,
               
               neither
               for
               phrase
               nor
               otherwise
               ,
               but
               to
               enter
               
               with
               ease
               ,
               certainty
               and
               delight
               ;
               this
               you
               shall
               finde
               to
               be
               a
               most
               speedy
               way
               :
            
             
               Take
               
                 Flores
                 Poetarum
              
               ,
               
               and
               in
               euery
               Common
               place
               make
               choise
               of
               Ouids
               verses
               ,
               
               or
               if
               you
               find
               any
               other
               which
               be
               pleasant
               and
               easie
               :
               and
               making
               sure
               ,
               that
               your
               schollars
               know
               not
               the
               verses
               a
               forehand
               ,
               vse
               to
               dictate
               vnto
               them
               as
               you
               did
               in
               prose
               .
               Cause
               also
               so
               many
               as
               you
               would
               haue
               to
               learne
               together
               ,
               to
               set
               down
               the
               English
               as
               you
               dictate
               .
            
             
               Secondly
               to
               giue
               you
               ,
               and
               to
               write
               downe
               all
               the
               words
               in
               Latine
               verbatim
               ,
               or
               Grammatically
               .
            
             
               Thirdly
               ,
               hauing
               iust
               the
               same
               words
               ,
               let
               them
               trie
               which
               of
               them
               can
               soonest
               turne
               them
               into
               the
               order
               of
               a
               verse
               :
               which
               they
               will
               presently
               doe
               ▪
               being
               trained
               vp
               in
               the
               vse
               of
               the
               translations
               ;
               which
               is
               the
               same
               in
               effect
               .
            
             
               And
               then
               lastly
               ,
               read
               thē
               ouer
               the
               verse
               of
               Ouid
               ,
               that
               they
               may
               see
               that
               themselues
               haue
               made
               the
               very
               same
               ;
               or
               wherin
               they
               missed
               :
               this
               shall
               much
               incourage
               and
               assure
               them
               .
            
             
               After
               that
               they
               haue
               practiced
               this
               for
               a
               little
               time
               ;
               
               if
               for
               speediness
               ,
               &
               for
               sauing
               paper
               (
               because
               they
               may
               soon
               run
               ouer
               much
               )
               you
               do
               vse
               but
               only
               to
               read
               the
               English
               Grammatically
               ,
               and
               appoint
               som
               one
               of
               them
               to
               deliuer
               it
               in
               Latine
               ;
               then
               all
               to
               trie
               which
               of
               them
               can
               soonest
               turne
               those
               words
               into
               a
               verse
               ,
               or
               how
               many
               waies
               they
               can
               turne
               them
               into
               a
               verse
               :
               you
               shall
               see
               them
               come
               on
               a
               pace
               ,
               and
               an
               earnest
               ●●rift
               to
               be
               wrought
               amongst
               them
               .
               
            
             
               This
               also
               may
               bee
               done
               most
               easily
               ,
               
               by
               the
               vse
               of
               Grammaticall
               translations
               of
               all
               the
               choyce
               verses
               in
               
                 Flores
                 Poetarum
              
               ;
               practicing
               as
               in
               Tully
               &
               other
               ,
               to
               read
               them
               ▪
               
                 ex
                 tēpore
              
               out
               of
               the
               English
               first
               into
               prose
               ▪
               after
               into
               verse
               .
               They
               wil
               be
               as
               familiar
               &
               easie
               ,
               as
               to
               read
               prose
               ,
               and
               to
               do
               it
               with
               as
               much
               delight
               and
               contention
               ,
               or
               more
               ;
               euery
               da●e
               practicing
               a
               little
               by
               course
               .
               
               For
               this
               is
               nothing
               (
               as
               I
               sayd
               )
               but
               the
               Poeticall
               composition
               .
               In
               the
               practice
               of
               this
               likewise
               ,
               vse
               to
               note
               euery
               new
               &
               hard
               word
               ,
               and
               quātity
               ,
               as
               also
               Epithetes
               ;
               according
               to
               the
               generall
               rule
               before
               ,
               and
               the
               manner
               in
               each
               lecture
               ,
               
               and
               oft
               to
               examine
               those
               .
            
             
               7.
               
               Cause
               them
               to
               turn
               the
               verses
               of
               their
               lecture
               into
               other
               verses
               ,
               
               either
               to
               the
               same
               purpose
               ,
               which
               is
               easiest
               for
               yoūg
               
               beginners
               ,
               or
               turned
               to
               some
               other
               purpose
               ,
               to
               expresse
               some
               other
               matter
               ;
               yet
               euer
               to
               keep
               the
               very
               phrase
               of
               the
               Poet
               ,
               there
               or
               in
               other
               places
               ,
               only
               transposing
               the
               words
               or
               phrase
               ,
               or
               changing
               some
               words
               or
               phrase
               ,
               or
               the
               numbers
               ,
               or
               persons
               ,
               or
               applying
               them
               to
               matters
               which
               are
               familiar
               ,
               as
               they
               did
               in
               imitating
               Epistles
               .
               This
               may
               be
               practiced
               ,
               each
               to
               bring
               first
               a
               verse
               or
               two
               thus
               changed
               ,
               either
               being
               giuen
               at
               eleuen
               to
               be
               brought
               at
               one
               ,
               or
               at
               euening
               to
               be
               brought
               in
               the
               morning
               ,
               or
               both
               .
            
             
               8.
               
               As
               they
               proceed
               ,
               
               to
               cause
               them
               to
               contract
               their
               lectures
               ,
               
               drawing
               seauen
               or
               eight
               verses
               into
               fowre
               or
               fiue
               ,
               or
               fewer
               :
               yet
               still
               labouring
               to
               expresse
               the
               whole
               matter
               of
               their
               Author
               in
               their
               owne
               verse
               ,
               and
               euery
               circumstance
               ,
               with
               all
               significant
               Metaphors
               ,
               and
               other
               tropes
               and
               phrases
               ,
               so
               much
               as
               they
               can
               .
            
             
               Thus
               ▪
               they
               may
               proceed
               if
               you
               wil
               ,
               from
               the
               lowest
               kind
               of
               verse
               in
               the
               Eclogues
               ,
               to
               somthing
               a
               loftier
               in
               the
               Georgicks
               ;
               and
               so
               to
               the
               stateliest
               kinds
               in
               the
               Aeneids
               :
               wherein
               they
               may
               be
               tasked
               to
               go
               thorough
               some
               booke
               of
               the
               Aeneids
               ,
               
               euery
               day
               contracting
               a
               certaine
               number
               ,
               as
               some
               5
               or
               6.
               a
               day
               ,
               for
               some
               of
               their
               exercises
               ,
               striuing
               who
               can
               expresse
               their
               Author
               most
               liuely
               .
               By
               which
               daily
               contention
               you
               shall
               find
               ,
               that
               those
               who
               take
               a
               delight
               in
               Poetry
               ,
               and
               haue
               sharpness
               &
               dexterity
               accordingly
               ,
               
               will
               in
               a
               short
               time
               attaine
               to
               that
               ripenesse
               ,
               as
               that
               they
               who
               know
               not
               the
               places
               which
               they
               imitate
               ,
               shall
               hardly
               discerne
               in
               many
               verses
               ,
               whether
               the
               verse
               bee
               Virgils
               verse
               ,
               or
               the
               schollars
               .
            
             
               But
               herein
               there
               must
               be
               this
               care
               ,
               
               that
               before
               they
               goe
               in
               hand
               with
               this
               kinde
               of
               contracting
               ,
               they
               bee
               both
               well
               exercised
               in
               the
               former
               kindes
               ,
               or
               the
               like
               ;
               and
               also
               that
               they
               beate
               out
               the
               meaning
               of
               the
               place
               fully
               ,
               marking
               what
               goeth
               before
               ,
               and
               also
               what
               followeth
               after
               ;
               and
               obseruing
               curiously
               euery
               phrase
               ,
               elegancy
               ,
               and
               matter
               of
               any
               weight
               .
               
            
             
               Morouer
               ,
               
               that
               your
               schollars
               may
               be
               able
               to
               write
               verses
               
                 ex
                 tempore
              
               ,
               of
               any
               ordinary
               Theame
               ,
               after
               they
               haue
               bin
               wel
               
               practiced
               in
               turning
               the
               easie
               verses
               of
               
                 Flores
                 Po●tarum
              
               ,
               forth
               of
               prose
               into
               verse
               ,
               that
               they
               can
               doe
               it
               readily
               ;
               appoint
               them
               of
               the
               most
               familiar
               Theames
               of
               it
               ,
               and
               the
               sweetest
               verses
               thereof
               in
               order
               ,
               to
               see
               how
               they
               can
               turne
               the
               same
               
                 ex
                 tempore
              
               into
               other
               verses
               ,
               to
               the
               very
               same
               purpose
               ;
               either
               by
               imitation
               ,
               or
               contraction
               ,
               like
               as
               I
               shewed
               the
               practice
               in
               their
               lectures
               :
               or
               hauing
               but
               the
               light
               of
               those
               verses
               ,
               how
               they
               can
               make
               other
               verses
               of
               their
               owne
               like
               vnto
               them
               .
            
             
               By
               this
               practice
               kept
               duely
               ,
               
               to
               make
               some
               such
               verses
               twise
               in
               the
               day
               (
               as
               to
               giue
               them
               Theams
               before
               their
               breaking
               vp
               at
               noone
               ,
               
               to
               bring
               them
               at
               one
               of
               the
               clocke
               ,
               and
               at
               night
               to
               bring
               them
               in
               the
               morning
               ,
               or
               nine
               ,
               as
               before
               ;
               onely
               hauing
               this
               help
               and
               direction
               )
               or
               of
               a
               sodaine
               euer
               before
               they
               are
               to
               pla●e
               ,
               to
               versifie
               of
               some
               Theame
               not
               thought
               of
               :
               and
               secondly
               by
               causing
               them
               to
               bring
               the
               sum
               of
               their
               Theams
               written
               vnder
               their
               Theams
               ,
               comprized
               in
               a
               disticke
               ,
               or
               two
               or
               moe
               ,
               you
               shall
               finde
               that
               they
               will
               grow
               in
               so
               good
               sort
               ,
               as
               shall
               be
               requisite
               to
               make
               you
               verses
               ,
               
                 ex
                 tempore
              
               of
               any
               vsuall
               Theame
               ,
               without
               hindering
               of
               their
               other
               studies
               .
               And
               here
               by
               they
               will
               soone
               bee
               acquainted
               with
               matter
               of
               all
               sorts
               according
               to
               those
               Common
               places
               ,
               
               and
               also
               with
               variety
               of
               poetical
               phrase
               of
               the
               best
               ,
               with
               Epihetes
               &
               stile
               .
               This
               exercise
               is
               very
               commendable
               to
               satisfie
               such
               ,
               
               as
               vse
               to
               giue
               Theams
               to
               versifie
               vpon
               
                 ex
                 tempore
              
               ;
               and
               also
               for
               that
               it
               is
               a
               very
               great
               sharpner
               of
               the
               wit
               ,
               as
               was
               sayd
               ,
               and
               a
               stirrer
               vp
               of
               inuention
               and
               of
               good
               wits
               to
               strift
               and
               emulation
               .
            
             
               In
               this
               matter
               of
               versifying
               ,
               
               as
               in
               all
               the
               former
               exercises
               ,
               I
               take
               this
               Imitation
               of
               the
               most
               excellent
               patternes
               ,
               
               to
               be
               the
               surest
               rule
               ,
               both
               for
               phrase
               and
               whatsoeuer
               :
               And
               therefore
               I
               would
               haue
               the
               chiefest
               labor
               to
               make
               these
               purest
               Authors
               our
               owne
               ,
               as
               Tully
               for
               prose
               ,
               so
               Ouid
               and
               Virgil
               for
               verse
               so
               to
               speake
               and
               write
               in
               Latine
               for
               the
               phrase
               ,
               as
               they
               did
               .
            
             
               For
               them
               who
               desire
               to
               attain
               to
               more
               exquisite
               perfection
               in
               this
               faculty
               of
               Poetry
               ,
               
               these
               things
               may
               much
               further
               besides
               the
               former
               :
            
             
             
               1.
               
               For
               more
               store
               and
               variety
               of
               matter
               ,
               
               to
               haue
               Common
               place
               books
               (
               as
               I
               said
               for
               the
               Theams
               )
               therein
               at
               least
               to
               haue
               ref●rences
               ▪
               wherby
               to
               turn
               of
               a
               sodaine
               to
               matters
               of
               all
               sorts
               ,
               in
               the
               most
               exquisite
               and
               pure
               Poets
               :
               to
               haue
               some
               direction
               both
               for
               matter
               and
               imitation
               ;
               whether
               for
               Gratulatory
               verses
               ,
               Triumphs
               ,
               Funerals
               ,
               or
               whatsoeuer
               .
               Or
               to
               refer
               all
               such
               principall
               places
               for
               imitation
               ,
               to
               the
               heads
               in
               
                 Flores
                 Poetarum
              
               ;
               which
               may
               serue
               insteede
               thereof
               
            
             
               2.
               
               For
               variety
               &
               copie
               of
               Poeticall
               phrases
               ,
               
               the
               
                 The
                 saurus
                 Phrasium
                 poeticarum
              
               gathered
               by
               Buchlerus
               of
               the
               last
               Edition
               .
               
                 An.
                 M.
                 D
                 Cvij
              
               .
               is
               a
               notable
               helpe
               .
            
             
               Also
               both
               for
               words
               and
               phrases
               ,
               
               
                 Sylua
                 Synonimorum
              
               ,
               may
               stand
               in
               good
               steede
               ,
               chiefly
               for
               schollars
               of
               iudgementable
               to
               make
               right
               choise
               of
               the
               fittest
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               For
               store
               of
               Epithetes
               ,
               
               which
               if
               they
               bee
               choyse
               ,
               are
               a
               singular
               ornament
               ,
               and
               meanes
               of
               speedinesse
               in
               this
               facultie
               ,
               and
               so
               for
               all
               other
               matters
               belonging
               to
               Poetrie
               ,
               Textor
               his
               Epitheta
               of
               the
               largest
               and
               of
               the
               last
               Edition
               printed
               at
               Lions
               ,
               
                 M.
                 D.
                 Cij
              
               .
               may
               bee
               a
               great
               helpe
               .
            
             
               The
               abbridgement
               of
               Textors
               Epithetes
               may
               serue
               insteede
               hereof
               to
               young
               schollars
               :
               
               and
               namely
               to
               such
               who
               are
               not
               able
               to
               buy
               the
               large
               ;
               though
               the
               large
               is
               more
               profitable
               .
            
             
               4.
               
               For
               hauing
               of
               the
               best
               authorities
               for
               the
               quantities
               of
               all
               syllables
               ,
               
               Smotius
               his
               Prosodia
               will
               furnish
               plentifully
               ;
               
               all
               needfull
               words
               being
               set
               in
               it
               in
               the
               Alphabeticall
               order
               .
               For
               rules
               of
               quantities
               ,
               though
               our
               owne
               Grammar
               may
               be
               sufficient
               ;
               yet
               you
               may
               see
               also
               Smotius
               his
               
                 Methodus
                 dignosc●n●arum
                 Syllabarum
                 ex
                 Georg.
                 Fabricio
                 ,
              
               set
               before
               his
               Prosodia
               .
               And
               rules
               of
               the
               quantities
               of
               Syllables
               in
               M.
               Butlers
               Rhetorick
               ,
               short
               and
               very
               plaine
               .
               
                 Chap.
                 14
                 de
                 Metro
              
               .
               
            
             
               Also
               the
               Virgils
               printed
               with
               
                 Erythraus
                 Index
              
               ,
               
               for
               Authorities
               and
               vses
               of
               all
               words
               in
               Virgil.
               
            
             
               5.
               
               For
               imitation
               of
               the
               best
               Poets
               ,
               
               and
               further
               direction
               to
               attaine
               to
               more
               perfection
               in
               Poetry
               ,
               see
               Sabines
               precepts
               
               
                 Decarminibi●s
                 ad
                 vete●um
                 imitationem
                 artificiose
                 componendis
                 ▪
              
               ioyned
               with
               Textors
               Epithets
               .
               Also
               Buch●●rus
               his
               
                 Institutio
                 Poetica
              
               in
               the
               end
               of
               his
               
                 Thesaurus
                 phrasium
                 poeticarum
              
               .
            
             
               6
               For
               the
               Figures
               belonging
               to
               Poetry
               ,
               
               see
               Butlars
               Rhetoricke
               in
               his
               fourteenth
               Chapt.
               
                 De
                 Metro
              
               .
            
             
               7
               For
               turning
               of
               Verses
               diuers
               waies
               ,
               
               M
               ▪
               Stockwood
               his
               
                 Progymnasma
                 scholasticum
              
               is
               
                 instar
                 omnium
                 ▪
              
               to
               direct
               and
               to
               incourage
               young
               schollars
               .
               In
               which
               booke
               towards
               the
               end
               of
               it
               ,
               you
               shall
               haue
               one
               Disticke
               or
               couple
               of
               Verses
               ,
               varied
               450.
               wayes
               .
               
               The
               Verses
               are
               these
               :
               
                 
                   1
                   Linque
                   Cupido
                   iecur
                   ;
                   cordi
                   quoque
                   parcito
                   :
                   sivis
                
                 
                   Figere
                   fige
                   alio
                   tela
                   cruent
                   a
                   loco
                   .
                
                 
                   2
                   Parce
                   meo
                   iecori
                   ;
                   intactum
                   mihi
                   linquito
                   pectus
                   :
                
                 
                   Omnia
                   de
                   reliquo
                   corpore
                   membrapete
                   .
                
                 
                   3
                   Ca●epuer
                   ,
                   &c.
                   
                
              
            
             
               And
               in
               the
               shutting
               vp
               of
               all
               ,
               
               this
               one
               Verse
               is
               turned
               by
               transposing
               the
               words
               104.
               wayes
               ;
               all
               the
               same
               wordes
               ,
               and
               onely
               those
               wordes
               being
               kept
               :
               which
               might
               seeme
               impossible
               ,
               but
               that
               there
               we
               may
               see
               it
               before
               our
               eyes
               ,
               that
               nine
               wordes
               should
               serue
               to
               make
               a
               hundreth
               and
               foure
               Verses
               ,
               all
               of
               the
               same
               matter
               .
               The
               Verse
               is
               this
               :
               
                 
                   Est
                   mea
                   spes
                   Christus
                   sol●s
                   ,
                   qui
                   de
                   cruce
                   pendet
                   .
                
                 
                   Est
                   Christus
                   solus
                   mea
                   spes
                   ,
                   qui
                   de
                   cruce
                   pendet
                   .
                
                 
                   Est
                   solus
                   Christus
                   mea
                   spes
                   ,
                   qui
                   de
                   cruce
                   pendet
                   .
                
                 
                   Solus
                   de
                   cruce
                   ,
                   &c.
                   
                
              
            
             
               A
               schollar
               of
               any
               inclination
               and
               fitnesse
               for
               Poetry
               ,
               cannot
               but
               receiue
               notable
               incouragement
               ,
               hauing
               these
               ,
               or
               but
               the
               principall
               of
               these
               bookes
               :
               this
               exercise
               of
               Versifying
               will
               be
               found
               a
               most
               pleasant
               recreation
               vnto
               him
               after
               a
               time
               .
            
             
               8
               Lastly
               ,
               
               in
               this
               exercise
               ,
               as
               in
               all
               the
               rest
               ,
               I
               holde
               daily
               practice
               and
               diligence
               (
               following
               the
               best
               patternes
               )
               to
               be
               the
               surest
               and
               speediest
               guide
               ;
               and
               which
               will
               bring
               in
               time
               much
               perfection
               ,
               where
               there
               is
               aptnesse
               of
               nature
               concurring
               .
            
          
           
             
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               But
               repeat
               mee
               in
               a
               word
               ,
               which
               exercises
               you
               would
               haue
               daily
               put
               in
               practice
               .
               
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               Turning
               the
               Verses
               of
               the
               Lectures
               ,
               as
               was
               shewed
               ;
               chiefly
               by
               contraction
               in
               Virgil
               ,
               keeping
               strictly
               his
               phrase
               .
            
             
               2
               Before
               each
               breaking
               vp
               at
               noones
               and
               nights
               ,
               to
               haue
               a
               Theame
               out
               of
               the
               easiest
               of
               
                 Fl●res
                 Poëtarum
              
               in
               order
               ,
               to
               bring
               Verses
               of
               it
               at
               their
               entrance
               againe
               ,
               or
               as
               is
               appointed
               to
               them
               .
            
             
               3
               Writing
               Verses
               of
               their
               weekly
               Theames
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             XV.
             
          
           
             The
             manner
             of
             examining
             and
             correcting
             Exercises
             .
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               HAuing
               thus
               gone
               through
               the
               principall
               exercises
               of
               writing
               ;
               
               I
               pray
               you
               let
               me
               heare
               your
               iudgment
               ,
               for
               the
               examining
               of
               such
               exercises
               ,
               and
               the
               best
               manner
               of
               performing
               it
               :
               
               for
               I
               finde
               it
               a
               matter
               very
               tedious
               and
               troublesome
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               Howsoeuer
               it
               be
               tedious
               ,
               
               yet
               it
               is
               such
               a
               matter
               as
               would
               neuer
               be
               omitted
               ,
               no
               more
               then
               the
               giuing
               of
               exercises
               ;
               nor
               to
               be
               slightly
               passed
               ouer
               ,
               so
               much
               as
               time
               and
               oportunity
               will
               permit
               .
               For
               when
               the
               schollar
               knoweth
               that
               his
               exercise
               must
               be
               strictly
               examined
               ,
               it
               will
               make
               him
               more
               carefull
               in
               performing
               thereof
               ,
               and
               contrarily
               ;
               and
               it
               will
               be
               a
               great
               helpe
               to
               bring
               him
               sooner
               to
               perfection
               .
            
             
               For
               the
               manner
               of
               doing
               it
               ;
            
             
               1
               The
               Master
               ought
               heedfully
               to
               obserue
               those
               speciall
               faults
               ,
               
               wherein
               his
               schollars
               doe
               most
               vsually
               slip
               ;
               and
               to
               acquaint
               euery
               one
               ,
               not
               onely
               with
               the
               generall
               ,
               but
               also
               with
               his
               particular
               ,
               to
               warne
               them
               of
               them
               .
            
             
             
               For
               example
               ;
               
               I
               haue
               found
               my
               schollars
               to
               misse
               most
               in
               these
               :
               through
               want
               of
               Dipthongs
               .
               Incongruity
               in
               their
               Concords
               .
               In
               the
               vse
               of
               the
               two
               chiefe
               rules
               of
               the
               Relatiue
               
                 Qui
                 ,
                 quae
                 quod
              
               .
               Ablatiue
               case
               absolute
               .
               Apposition
               ▪
               Coniunctions
               to
               couple
               together
               like
               cases
               ,
               moodes
               and
               Tenses
               .
               Nominature
               case
               after
               the
               Verbe
               ,
               &c.
               
               The
               Accusatiue
               case
               before
               an
               Infinitiue
               Moode
               .
            
             
               Also
               that
               they
               will
               oft
               haue
               a
               Synchesis
               ,
               
               or
               a
               disordered
               confusion
               of
               their
               wordes
               ;
               
               and
               sometimes
               they
               will
               vse
               hyperbaton
               :
               which
               is
               a
               further
               fetching
               or
               carrying
               of
               some
               wordes
               ,
               whereby
               a
               sentence
               is
               obscured
               ;
               and
               the
               schollar
               forgets
               himselfe
               before
               he
               come
               to
               the
               end
               of
               his
               sentence
               ,
               and
               so
               writes
               false
               Latine
               .
               Long
               Periods
               are
               therefore
               to
               be
               auoyded
               as
               much
               as
               may
               be
               .
            
             
               2
               The
               Schollars
               are
               to
               be
               called
               vpon
               ,
               
               to
               reade
               ouer
               their
               exercises
               in
               the
               naturall
               or
               Grammaticall
               order
               ,
               
               so
               as
               they
               construe
               :
               and
               then
               they
               may
               see
               presently
               how
               the
               wordes
               doe
               hang
               together
               ,
               both
               for
               agreement
               ,
               gouernement
               ,
               and
               sense
               ,
               and
               where
               the
               faults
               of
               Grammar
               are
               .
            
             
               3
               That
               besides
               their
               rules
               ,
               they
               be
               able
               presently
               to
               parallele
               or
               proue
               each
               phrase
               and
               construction
               ,
               
               by
               the
               like
               example
               in
               Grammar
               ,
               
               or
               by
               a
               like
               phrase
               out
               of
               Tully
               ,
               or
               other
               Authours
               :
               and
               what
               they
               know
               not
               ,
               to
               seeke
               out
               ;
               to
               the
               end
               that
               they
               may
               be
               able
               to
               iustifie
               euery
               word
               ,
               euen
               where
               they
               haue
               read
               it
               ,
               so
               much
               as
               may
               be
               .
            
             
               4
               The
               higher
               schollars
               to
               looke
               to
               elegancie
               ,
               
               and
               finenesse
               of
               phrase
               and
               Composition
               ;
               
               and
               so
               to
               bee
               reading
               their
               exercises
               ouer
               and
               ouer
               ,
               stil
               correcting
               and
               amending
               them
               ,
               neuer
               thinking
               an
               exercise
               well
               enough
               ,
               vntill
               no
               fault
               can
               be
               found
               ,
               
               in
               Latine
               ,
               propriety
               ,
               composition
               ,
               matter
               ;
               no
               nor
               in
               the
               least
               tittle
               .
               The
               schollar
               is
               herein
               to
               imitate
               the
               curious
               painter
               ,
               who
               is
               still
               amending
               and
               bettering
               his
               picture
               ,
               to
               drawe
               all
               into
               admiration
               ;
               that
               his
               Theames
               ,
               Verses
               ,
               Orations
               may
               be
               as
               the
               harpe
               of
               Orpheus
               ,
               to
               draw
               all
               the
               hearers
               or
               readers
               after
               them
               .
            
             
               5
               To
               appoint
               aduersaries
               to
               take
               one
               anothers
               exercises
               ,
               
               
               and
               to
               see
               whether
               of
               them
               can
               finde
               the
               moe
               faults
               :
               
               and
               if
               you
               will
               ,
               to
               set
               vnderneath
               ,
               how
               many
               faults
               either
               of
               them
               findes
               ;
               and
               so
               to
               giue
               them
               to
               the
               Master
               ,
               or
               to
               themselues
               first
               to
               correct
               ,
               then
               to
               the
               Master
               .
            
             
               6
               Afterall
               ,
               
               the
               Master
               is
               carefully
               to
               reade
               ouer
               euery
               ones
               exercise
               ,
               
               so
               much
               as
               leasure
               will
               permit
               ;
               and
               by
               questions
               to
               make
               themselues
               to
               finde
               where
               the
               errour
               is
               :
               as
               but
               asking
               ;
               Doe
               we
               say
               thus
               or
               thus
               ?
               and
               to
               cause
               them
               to
               amend
               it
               of
               themselues
               by
               giuing
               a
               like
               example
               ▪
               And
               in
               the
               meane
               time
               ,
               to
               make
               some
               little
               line
               vnder
               the
               phrase
               or
               word
               ,
               or
               peece
               of
               the
               word
               or
               syllable
               wherein
               the
               errour
               is
               ,
               that
               they
               may
               amend
               it
               after
               in
               their
               bookes
               .
               And
               for
               all
               correcting
               of
               translations
               in
               Latine
               ,
               to
               doe
               it
               by
               comparing
               their
               exercise
               with
               the
               Authour
               ;
               and
               so
               exercises
               of
               imitation
               ,
               to
               see
               who
               commeth
               next
               to
               the
               example
               .
            
             
               7
               In
               examining
               exercises
               in
               the
               highest
               fourmes
               (
               as
               in
               Theames
               ,
               
               Declamations
               ,
               
               Verses
               ,
               Orations
               ,
               and
               the
               like
               )
               besides
               the
               faults
               against
               Grammar
               ,
               the
               diligent
               Master
               should
               obserue
               ,
               first
               ,
               all
               barbarous
               phrases
               ,
               or
               Poeticall
               phrase
               in
               Prose
               ,
               or
               contrary
               :
               secondly
               ,
               Tautologies
               ,
               or
               oft
               repetitions
               of
               the
               same
               thing
               or
               words
               :
               thirdly
               ,
               want
               of
               transitions
               ;
               that
               is
               ,
               of
               fit
               bonds
               or
               phrases
               ,
               whereby
               to
               passe
               elegantly
               from
               one
               point
               to
               another
               ;
               so
               as
               they
               might
               be
               more
               easily
               vnderstood
               :
               fourthly
               ▪
               harsh
               composition
               :
               fiftly
               ,
               lacke
               of
               matter
               :
               sixtly
               ,
               want
               of
               elegancy
               in
               Tropes
               and
               Figures
               ;
               and
               so
               like
               elegancies
               noted
               in
               Grammar
               .
            
             
               7
               To
               haue
               a
               diligent
               eye
               that
               the
               schollars
               do
               forthwith
               correct
               their
               exercises
               ,
               
               so
               noted
               out
               vnto
               them
               :
               
               and
               to
               this
               end
               he
               is
               oft
               to
               looke
               in
               their
               bookes
               ,
               whether
               they
               haue
               corrected
               their
               former
               exercises
               ;
               and
               to
               vse
               sharpe
               reprehension
               or
               correction
               for
               that
               carelesnes
               ,
               to
               make
               them
               to
               looke
               to
               that
               aboue
               all
               .
               For
               there
               is
               nothing
               wherein
               their
               negligence
               is
               more
               intollerable
               ,
               nor
               for
               which
               the
               Master
               shal
               be
               more
               censured
               ,
               when
               their
               parents
               ,
               or
               others
               who
               be
               learned
               ▪
               shall
               looke
               into
               their
               bookes
               ,
               
               and
               reade
               ouer
               their
               exercises
               ,
               and
               there
               to
               find
               them
               vncorrected
               .
            
             
               8
               If
               at
               any
               time
               the
               Masters
               occasions
               permit
               not
               so
               much
               
               time
               ,
               yet
               to
               see
               that
               it
               be
               performed
               by
               the
               Vsher
               or
               some
               of
               the
               highest
               schollars
               ,
               and
               the
               number
               of
               faults
               noted
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spou.
               
            
             
               But
               what
               if
               there
               should
               be
               30.
               or
               40.
               
               in
               a
               fourme
               (
               as
               it
               may
               be
               in
               the
               greater
               schools
               ;
               
               especially
               amongst
               the
               lower
               fourmes
               )
               how
               would
               you
               do
               to
               examine
               all
               their
               exercises
               in
               a
               morning
               ,
               but
               you
               shal
               hinder
               your selfe
               &
               them
               frō
               many
               other
               things
               ,
               w
               th
               you
               must
               of
               necessity
               performe
               ?
            
          
           
             
               Ph.
               
            
             
               In
               such
               cases
               we
               must
               yeeld
               to
               necessity
               ,
               &
               vse
               the
               best
               policy
               we
               can
               ;
               as
               in
               that
               exercise
               of
               translating
               into
               Latin
               ,
               to
               cause
               som
               3.
               or
               4.
               whom
               you
               most
               feare
               ,
               
               to
               pronounce
               their
               exercises
               ,
               or
               to
               reade
               or
               construe
               thē
               out
               of
               the
               translation
               ;
               you
               to
               looke
               vpon
               the
               exercises
               ,
               as
               they
               are
               pronouncing
               ,
               &
               cause
               them
               to
               shew
               how
               they
               must
               be
               amended
               :
               so
               al
               the
               rest
               to
               correct
               theirs
               ,
               according
               as
               they
               heare
               those
               corrected
               :
               if
               any
               be
               found
               carelesse
               to
               correct
               so
               ,
               that
               he
               be
               surely
               corrected
               :
               and
               this
               is
               the
               best
               helpe
               which
               I
               know
               in
               this
               behalfe
               .
            
             
               So
               likewise
               where
               you
               giue
               them
               a
               Theame
               to
               make
               Verses
               
                 ex
                 tempore
              
               :
               
               or
               vpon
               som
               smal
               meditation
               ,
               as
               those
               which
               are
               to
               be
               brought
               each
               morning
               ,
               or
               at
               one
               of
               the
               clocke
               ,
               when
               time
               will
               not
               permit
               to
               peruse
               the
               writing
               of
               euery
               one
               ;
               yet
               to
               cause
               euery
               one
               to
               pronounce
               the
               Verses
               which
               he
               hath
               made
               :
               and
               as
               they
               pronounce
               ,
               to
               shew
               them
               their
               faults
               ,
               and
               then
               cause
               them
               to
               correct
               them
               after
               .
               Thus
               haue
               I
               shewed
               you
               my
               iudgement
               also
               for
               examining
               of
               exercises
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             XVI
             .
          
           
             How
             to
             answere
             any
             needefull
             question
             of
             Grammar
             or
             Rhetoricke
             .
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               WEll
               good
               Sir
               ,
               you
               see
               how
               bolde
               I
               am
               ,
               to
               require
               your
               iudgment
               in
               euery
               mater
               ,
               wherin
               I
               find
               difficulty
               :
               now
               to
               return
               to
               the
               brief
               again
               of
               those
               things
               which
               you
               affirmed
               might
               be
               done
               for
               learning
               ;
            
             
               This
               I
               remember
               was
               another
               point
               ,
               which
               cannot
               but
               greatly
               commend
               a
               schollar
               :
               to
               bee
               able
               to
               answere
               
               any
               difficult
               question
               of
               Grammar
               ,
               euen
               beside
               those
               which
               are
               in
               the
               rules
               ,
               which
               are
               commonly
               learned
               ;
               and
               also
               how
               to
               oppose
               or
               dispute
               schollar-like
               in
               Latine
               ,
               of
               any
               good
               Grammar
               question
               ;
               as
               both
               what
               may
               be
               obiected
               against
               Lillies
               rules
               ,
               and
               how
               to
               defend
               them
               :
               I
               pray
               you
               let
               mee
               heare
               of
               you
               how
               this
               may
               be
               done
               ,
               and
               what
               is
               the
               most
               speedy
               way
               which
               you
               know
               hereunto
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               The
               plainest
               ,
               
               shortest
               ,
               and
               surest
               way
               ,
               I
               finde
               to
               be
               this
               :
            
             
               1
               See
               that
               they
               be
               very
               ready
               in
               all
               the
               vsuall
               and
               ordinary
               questions
               of
               Grammar
               ,
               
               by
               daily
               examining
               at
               Parts
               .
            
             
               2
               For
               most
               of
               the
               rest
               fit
               for
               young
               schollars
               ,
               
               I
               haue
               gathered
               them
               for
               the
               vse
               of
               mine
               owne
               schollars
               ,
               and
               set
               them
               together
               after
               the
               end
               of
               the
               Accedence
               Questions
               ;
               yet
               so
               ▪
               as
               I
               haue
               sorted
               and
               referred
               euery
               Question
               to
               the
               right
               place
               whither
               it
               appertaines
               :
               as
               to
               the
               Noune
               ,
               Pronoune
               ,
               Participle
               ,
               and
               so
               the
               seuerall
               heads
               thereof
               .
            
             
               When
               as
               young
               schollars
               waxe
               perfect
               in
               all
               the
               former
               ,
               which
               are
               in
               the
               Accedence
               ;
               then
               a
               little
               paines
               in
               teaching
               them
               these
               ,
               making
               them
               plain
               vnto
               them
               ,
               and
               examining
               them
               some
               halfe
               side
               at
               time
               (
               in
               stead
               of
               the
               time
               spent
               before
               in
               examining
               the
               former
               )
               will
               very
               soone
               make
               them
               as
               ready
               in
               these
               also
               .
            
             
               3
               After
               these
               ,
               
               you
               may
               (
               if
               you
               please
               )
               goe
               through
               the
               questions
               of
               Grammatica
               ,
               and
               make
               them
               plaine
               ;
               examining
               them
               in
               Latin
               :
               and
               so
               through
               all
               the
               necessary
               questions
               which
               are
               scattered
               here
               and
               there
               ,
               through
               the
               whole
               Grammar
               :
               directing
               them
               to
               marke
               out
               the
               questions
               ,
               or
               the
               speciall
               wordes
               wherein
               the
               questions
               are
               ,
               and
               how
               to
               be
               propounded
               ;
               that
               they
               themselues
               may
               oppose
               one
               another
               ,
               or
               one
               to
               oppose
               all
               as
               neede
               is
               .
            
             
               But
               this
               as
               you
               shall
               thinke
               necessary
               ;
               
               and
               so
               as
               it
               do
               not
               hinder
               better
               studies
               .
            
             
               4
               You
               may
               runne
               through
               the
               questions
               in
               M.
               Stockwoods
               disputations
               of
               Grammar
               ,
               
               as
               they
               are
               commonly
               noted
               in
               the
               Margents
               ,
               
               but
               onely
               propounding
               the
               question
               in
               few
               words
               ,
               both
               English
               and
               Latine
               ,
               as
               need
               requires
               ,
               
               and
               teaching
               them
               to
               answere
               in
               a
               word
               or
               two
               .
            
             
               By
               going
               through
               these
               ,
               they
               may
               be
               able
               to
               answere
               all
               ,
               
               or
               most
               of
               those
               which
               are
               set
               together
               in
               the
               end
               of
               his
               disputations
               ;
               
               wherein
               he
               hath
               with
               marueilous
               paines
               ,
               and
               diligent
               obseruation
               ,
               collected
               a
               very
               great
               part
               of
               the
               difficulties
               of
               all
               Classicall
               Authours
               ,
               and
               in
               the
               last
               Edition
               noted
               the
               words
               in
               the
               Margents
               ,
               in
               which
               the
               difficulty
               in
               each
               sentence
               is
               .
               What
               other
               are
               wanting
               in
               these
               ,
               may
               be
               answered
               by
               them
               ,
               being
               of
               like
               nature
               .
            
             
               5
               To
               giue
               a
               further
               light
               ,
               and
               that
               nothing
               may
               bee
               wanting
               for
               my
               children
               ,
               
               I
               haue
               adioyned
               vnto
               the
               later
               end
               of
               all
               the
               Accedence
               questions
               which
               I
               spake
               of
               ,
               certain
               generall
               figures
               :
               vnto
               some
               of
               which
               ,
               many
               of
               the
               difficulties
               of
               all
               auncient
               Authours
               (
               both
               those
               in
               Stockewood
               and
               others
               )
               may
               be
               referred
               ,
               or
               else
               vnto
               those
               figures
               set
               downe
               in
               the
               Grammar
               and
               Rhetoricke
               .
            
             
               For
               answering
               the
               questions
               of
               Rhetoricke
               ,
               
               you
               may
               if
               you
               please
               ,
               make
               them
               perfect
               in
               Talaeus
               Rhetorick
               ,
               which
               I
               take
               to
               be
               most
               vsed
               in
               the
               best
               Schooles
               ;
               onely
               to
               giue
               each
               definition
               and
               distribution
               ,
               and
               some
               one
               example
               or
               two
               at
               most
               in
               each
               Chapter
               ;
               and
               those
               of
               the
               shortest
               sentences
               out
               of
               the
               Poets
               :
               so
               that
               they
               can
               giue
               the
               word
               or
               words
               ,
               wherein
               the
               force
               of
               the
               rule
               is
               .
               And
               so
               to
               proportion
               all
               other
               questions
               accordingly
               .
            
             
               To
               this
               end
               ,
               the
               wordes
               wherein
               the
               force
               of
               the
               examples
               consist
               ,
               
               would
               bee
               marked
               as
               in
               the
               Grammar
               ;
               and
               that
               not
               onely
               in
               some
               one
               or
               two
               examples
               in
               euery
               Chapter
               ,
               which
               they
               are
               to
               haue
               perfect
               without
               booke
               ,
               but
               also
               in
               euery
               example
               through
               the
               booke
               ,
               to
               be
               able
               to
               apply
               any
               .
            
             
               Claudius
               Minos
               Commentary
               may
               bee
               a
               good
               helpe
               to
               make
               Talaeus
               Rhetoricke
               most
               plaine
               ,
               
               both
               for
               precepts
               and
               examples
               .
            
             
               If
               your
               Schollar
               after
               he
               hath
               read
               these
               ,
               
               doe
               but
               vse
               to
               bee
               carefull
               to
               keepe
               a
               short
               Catalogue
               in
               his
               minde
               ,
               of
               the
               names
               of
               the
               Tropes
               ,
               and
               also
               Figures
               (
               and
               those
               both
               of
               Grammar
               and
               Rhetoricke
               )
               hee
               shall
               with
               practice
               of
               
               examination
               and
               obseruation
               be
               able
               to
               tell
               any
               of
               them
               ,
               but
               repeating
               the
               heads
               in
               his
               minde
               .
            
             
               Or
               in
               stead
               of
               Talaeus
               ,
               
               you
               may
               vse
               Master
               Butlars
               Rhetoricke
               ,
               of
               Magdalens
               in
               Oxford
               ,
               printed
               in
               Oxford
               ;
               which
               I
               mentioned
               before
               :
               being
               a
               notable
               abbridgement
               of
               Talaeus
               ,
               making
               it
               most
               plaine
               ,
               and
               farre
               more
               easie
               to
               be
               learned
               of
               Schollars
               ,
               and
               also
               supplying
               very
               many
               things
               wanting
               in
               Talaeus
               .
               Both
               it
               and
               the
               Commentary
               together
               ,
               are
               almost
               as
               small
               as
               Talaeus
               alone
               ,
               and
               not
               a
               much
               greater
               price
               ,
               though
               the
               worth
               be
               double
               .
               It
               is
               a
               booke
               ,
               which
               (
               as
               I
               take
               it
               )
               is
               yet
               very
               little
               knowne
               in
               Schooles
               ,
               thought
               it
               haue
               beene
               forth
               sundry
               yeares
               ,
               set
               forth
               for
               the
               vse
               of
               Schooles
               ;
               and
               the
               vse
               and
               benefit
               will
               be
               found
               to
               be
               farre
               aboue
               all
               that
               euer
               hath
               beene
               written
               of
               the
               same
               .
            
             
               Finally
               ,
               
               for
               answering
               the
               questions
               of
               Tullies
               Offices
               ,
               M.
               Brasbridge
               his
               questions
               therof
               ,
               are
               as
               short
               and
               perspicuous
               as
               any
               of
               the
               former
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               Sir
               ,
               I
               haue
               not
               (
               in
               truth
               )
               so
               much
               as
               euer
               heard
               of
               eyther
               of
               those
               bookes
               :
               as
               neyther
               of
               any
               almost
               of
               those
               singular
               helps
               which
               you
               mentioned
               for
               Poetry
               ;
               by
               which
               apt
               Schollars
               cannot
               choose
               but
               become
               excellent
               Poets
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               Thereby
               may
               appeare
               what
               a
               generall
               want
               here
               is
               amongst
               vs
               ;
               
               when
               God
               hath
               giuen
               so
               many
               worthy
               helpes
               ,
               whereby
               we
               and
               our
               Schollars
               may
               attaine
               so
               readily
               the
               excellency
               of
               all
               learning
               meet
               for
               vs
               ,
               and
               make
               all
               our
               courses
               so
               full
               of
               al
               pleasant
               and
               alluring
               contentment
               ,
               and
               yet
               we
               shall
               neglect
               to
               enquire
               after
               them
               .
            
          
        
         
           
           
             CHAP.
             XVII
             .
          
           
             Of
             Grammaticall
             oppositions
             ,
             how
             to
             dispute
             schollarlike
             of
             any
             Grammar
             question
             in
             good
             Latine
             .
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               IT
               seemeth
               to
               be
               very
               euident
               ,
               that
               by
               these
               means
               they
               may
               be
               able
               to
               answere
               any
               necessarie
               question
               ,
               meete
               for
               them
               ;
               but
               for
               those
               schollar-like
               oppositions
               in
               Grammar
               questions
               ,
               I
               heare
               you
               to
               say
               nothing
               ,
               although
               it
               cannot
               but
               be
               a
               maruellous
               profitable
               exercise
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               It
               is
               indeed
               a
               profitable
               exercise
               :
               and
               I
               finde
               that
               it
               may
               be
               very
               easily
               attained
               thus
               ;
            
             
               1.
               
               About
               that
               time
               when
               they
               begin
               to
               reade
               Virgill
               or
               before
               ,
               
               as
               they
               are
               able
               ,
               when
               they
               begin
               to
               make
               Theams
               ,
               two
               of
               them
               may
               be
               appointed
               ,
               insteed
               of
               their
               Theam
               ,
               or
               Verses
               to
               be
               made
               for
               that
               mornings
               exercise
               ,
               to
               dispute
               euery
               day
               by
               course
               .
               The
               manner
               of
               it
               thus
               :
            
             
               Let
               them
               take
               M.
               Stockwoods
               disputations
               ,
               
               to
               direct
               them
               .
               And
               first
               for
               their
               greater
               ease
               and
               incouragement
               ,
               to
               enter
               them
               ;
               appoint
               them
               to
               dispute
               in
               the
               very
               words
               which
               M.
               Stockwood
               hath
               ,
               and
               that
               of
               all
               the
               questions
               in
               order
               ,
               about
               a
               side
               of
               a
               leafe
               at
               a
               time
               ,
               or
               as
               they
               can
               well
               :
               so
               that
               following
               the
               words
               of
               the
               Author
               ,
               there
               needeth
               no
               more
               labour
               ,
               but
               committing
               it
               to
               memory
               and
               vttering
               ;
               vnlesse
               they
               can
               meditate
               to
               doe
               it
               more
               shortly
               of
               themselues
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               After
               this
               when
               they
               haue
               thus
               gone
               ouer
               the
               book
               or
               the
               greatest
               part
               of
               it
               ,
               
               which
               they
               may
               doe
               in
               a
               short
               time
               ,
               keeping
               a
               constant
               course
               :
               then
               cause
               them
               to
               practice
               to
               take
               a
               whole
               disputation
               at
               a
               time
               ,
               or
               at
               least
               a
               whole
               question
               ,
               and
               to
               bring
               only
               the
               substance
               of
               it
               as
               shortly
               as
               they
               can
               ;
               yet
               st●l
               obseruing
               as
               much
               as
               may
               be
               ▪
               M.
               Stockwoods
               phrase
               ,
               his
               order
               and
               witty
               conceits
               ,
               which
               he
               vseth
               both
               in
               obiecting
               and
               answering
               .
            
             
             
               For
               their
               better
               vnderstanding
               of
               their
               disputations
               ,
               
               do
               as
               in
               their
               Theams
               :
               vse
               at
               their
               entrance
               ,
               to
               read
               them
               ouer
               vnto
               them
               :
               shew
               them
               the
               plaine
               meaning
               of
               euery
               thing
               ;
               and
               by
               examining
               the
               sum
               of
               it
               all
               ,
               first
               in
               English
               after
               in
               Latine
               ,
               cause
               them
               to
               vnderstand
               so
               much
               as
               time
               will
               permit
               .
            
             
               What
               they
               are
               not
               able
               to
               vtter
               in
               Latine
               ,
               remember
               to
               cause
               them
               first
               to
               vtter
               in
               English
               ,
               and
               then
               they
               wil
               easily
               do
               it
               in
               Latine
               ,
               as
               we
               said
               .
            
             
               When
               they
               haue
               beene
               well
               exercised
               in
               these
               that
               they
               are
               able
               thus
               to
               dispute
               with
               facility
               ,
               and
               are
               acquainted
               well
               with
               Stockwoods
               phrase
               and
               order
               ;
               they
               may
               haue
               other
               questions
               giuen
               to
               handle
               wholly
               of
               themselues
               ,
               if
               you
               will.
               
            
             
               By
               these
               means
               of
               continuall
               disputing
               they
               shall
               reape
               these
               benefits
               :
               
            
             
               1.
               
               They
               shall
               bee
               much
               helped
               for
               the
               perfect
               vnderstanding
               ,
               and
               answering
               of
               any
               difficult
               Grammar
               question
               ,
               as
               was
               sayd
               before
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               They
               shall
               bee
               very
               much
               furthered
               for
               deliuering
               their
               minds
               easily
               in
               Latine
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               They
               shal
               be
               notably
               fitted
               for
               disputations
               in
               the
               Vniuersity
               ,
               or
               any
               like
               opposition
               ,
               mooting
               ,
               or
               pleading
               in
               the
               Innes
               of
               Court.
               
            
             
               4.
               
               It
               shall
               bring
               audacity
               ,
               help
               ,
               gesture
               ,
               pronuntiation
               ,
               memory
               ,
               and
               much
               prouoke
               them
               to
               an
               ingenuous
               e●ulation
               and
               contention
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               But
               I
               haue
               seene
               in
               a
               schoole
               ,
               where
               the
               schollars
               haue
               beene
               able
               to
               dispute
               
                 ex
                 tempore
              
               of
               any
               ordinarie
               morall
               question
               ,
               which
               you
               should
               propound
               vnto
               them
               :
               which
               me
               thought
               did
               exceedingly
               grace
               them
               ,
               and
               was
               a
               very
               rare
               commendation
               vnto
               the
               schoole
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               Though
               I
               doe
               grant
               with
               you
               that
               this
               deserued
               very
               great
               praise
               ;
               
               yet
               this
               seemes
               to
               me
               rather
               to
               belong
               to
               the
               Vniuersities
               ,
               then
               to
               the
               Grammar
               schooles
               .
               For
               I
               take
               it
               not
               onely
               meet
               ,
               but
               also
               most
               equall
               and
               necessarie
               ,
               that
               euery
               place
               haue
               their
               owne
               Priuiledges
               reserued
               vnto
               
               them
               ;
               and
               that
               one
               in
               no
               case
               should
               incroach
               vpon
               another
               .
            
             
               Aboue
               all
               ,
               
               that
               there
               be
               a
               chiefe
               regard
               of
               the
               Vniuersities
               ,
               as
               vnto
               which
               the
               Grammar
               schooles
               are
               ordained
               principally
               ,
               for
               training
               vp
               young
               schollars
               to
               furnish
               them
               ;
               and
               that
               they
               haue
               all
               their
               honours
               and
               prerogatiues
               ,
               reserued
               most
               carefully
               vnto
               them
               .
               Of
               which
               sort
               these
               disputations
               in
               Logick
               and
               other
               Philosophie
               are
               .
               
            
             
               Notwithstanding
               I
               shall
               shew
               you
               my
               iudgement
               ,
               
               how
               this
               may
               be
               performed
               also
               ;
               and
               as
               I
               take
               it
               in
               the
               most
               easie
               manner
               ,
               and
               most
               surely
               ,
               so
               farre
               as
               it
               may
               be
               .
            
             
               1.
               
               I
               would
               haue
               my
               schollar
               well
               practiced
               in
               these
               Grammaticall
               disputations
               ,
               
               to
               haue
               phrase
               &
               order
               of
               disputation
               in
               readinesse
               ,
               and
               to
               keep
               themselues
               within
               the
               compasse
               of
               that
               kinde
               of
               reasoning
               ;
               leauing
               logicall
               and
               strict
               concluding
               by
               Syllogisms
               ,
               vnto
               the
               Vniuersitie
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               To
               haue
               read
               ouer
               Tullies
               Offices
               ,
               
               with
               vnderstanding
               ;
               which
               by
               the
               helpe
               of
               Master
               Brasbridges
               questions
               ,
               and
               the
               Grammatical
               translations
               they
               may
               the
               more
               speedily
               by
               farre
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               To
               choose
               out
               of
               the
               easiest
               of
               those
               questions
               ,
               
               and
               to
               appoint
               the
               schollars
               insteede
               of
               their
               disputations
               in
               Grammar
               :
               when
               they
               haue
               gone
               thorough
               those
               ,
               then
               to
               reply
               and
               answere
               an
               argument
               or
               two
               vpon
               some
               of
               these
               questions
               daily
               .
               It
               were
               worthy
               the
               labor
               of
               some
               ingenuous
               and
               good
               Latinist
               ,
               
               as
               M.
               Stockwood
               ,
               to
               handle
               some
               of
               the
               questions
               of
               Tullies
               Offices
               after
               the
               manner
               of
               his
               Grammaticall
               disputations
               ,
               to
               fit
               schollars
               the
               more
               for
               such
               witty
               and
               pleasant
               disputations
               ,
               against
               that
               they
               should
               come
               to
               the
               Vniuersitie
               .
               But
               I
               speak
               this
               as
               the
               rest
               vnder
               better
               iudgement
               ,
               and
               so
               farre
               as
               these
               may
               be
               meet
               for
               the
               Grammar
               schooles
               .
            
             
               4.
               
               For
               inuenting
               reasons
               to
               replie
               ,
               
               it
               may
               soone
               be
               performed
               ,
               by
               the
               dullest
               capacitie
               ,
               according
               to
               the
               manner
               of
               inuenting
               reasons
               for
               Theames
               or
               verses
               ,
               following
               the
               chiefe
               heads
               of
               reasoning
               .
               If
               the
               replier
               do
               but
               only
               meditate
               what
               can
               be
               sayd
               against
               the
               question
               or
               position
               ,
               from
               
               some
               one
               of
               those
               chiefe
               places
               of
               reasoning
               ,
               discoursed
               in
               his
               mind
               in
               order
               ;
               hauing
               the
               places
               euer
               in
               fresh
               memorie
               (
               as
               I
               shewed
               before
               )
               by
               the
               practice
               of
               the
               Art
               of
               Meditation
               ,
               or
               the
               like
               :
               For
               then
               if
               one
               place
               will
               not
               presently
               afforde
               meete
               matter
               ,
               another
               will.
               And
               commonly
               ,
               the
               places
               from
               Causes
               ,
               Effects
               ,
               Contraries
               ,
               Examples
               ,
               Testimonies
               ,
               are
               most
               pregnant
               to
               bring
               reasons
               to
               our
               minde
               .
            
             
               Moreouer
               ,
               
               to
               helpe
               to
               answere
               the
               subtilties
               or
               ●allacies
               ;
               besides
               the
               perfect
               vnderstanding
               of
               the
               question
               ,
               
               and
               the
               matter
               of
               it
               ,
               by
               reading
               or
               meditating
               of
               it
               diligently
               ,
               the
               wise
               obseruing
               by
               the
               aunswerer
               from
               what
               place
               of
               reasoning
               the
               argument
               seemes
               to
               be
               taken
               ,
               will
               vsually
               answere
               the
               reason
               .
               For
               ,
               the
               most
               ordinary
               fallacies
               or
               deceits
               in
               reasoning
               ,
               are
               from
               a
               bare
               shew
               of
               Causes
               ,
               Effects
               ,
               Contraries
               ,
               Testimonies
               ,
               and
               the
               rest
               ,
               mistaken
               or
               misalledged
               ;
               yet
               vrged
               as
               if
               they
               were
               true
               Causes
               Effects
               &c.
               when
               they
               are
               but
               fained
               or
               bare
               shewes
               :
               Or
               else
               in
               wra●gling
               about
               words
               ,
               not
               disputing
               to
               the
               purpose
               ,
               and
               to
               the
               point
               ;
               but
               in
               some
               other
               sense
               mistaking
               the
               question
               .
            
             
               For
               those
               common
               places
               or
               heads
               of
               Inuention
               ,
               
               all
               schollars
               who
               come
               to
               any
               ripeness
               ,
               
               are
               necessarily
               to
               be
               acquainted
               with
               them
               ,
               as
               was
               touched
               before
               .
               These
               wil
               euer
               stand
               them
               insteed
               for
               making
               of
               all
               Epistles
               Theams
               ,
               Verses
               ,
               Declamations
               ,
               Oppositions
               .
            
             
               Also
               to
               helpe
               them
               to
               resolue
               whatsoeuer
               they
               reade
               or
               heare
               in
               any
               continued
               speech
               ;
               
               and
               to
               remember
               it
               ,
               by
               gathering
               all
               the
               matter
               vnto
               the
               seuerall
               heads
               of
               Inuention
               .
               Thus
               to
               be
               able
               to
               remember
               ,
               and
               confute
               a
               Position
               ,
               or
               an
               Oration
               ,
               
                 ex
                 tempore
              
               ,
               with
               much
               admiration
               .
            
             
               Without
               these
               helps
               they
               shall
               neuer
               be
               able
               to
               do
               these
               things
               ;
               or
               at
               least
               not
               with
               that
               facilitie
               ,
               and
               in
               so
               commendable
               a
               manner
               ,
               though
               they
               haue
               otherwise
               very
               singular
               gifts
               ,
               of
               nature
               and
               learning
               .
            
             
               But
               aboue
               all
               ,
               
               as
               in
               all
               other
               exercises
               so
               in
               this
               chieflie
               ,
               continuall
               practice
               of
               disputing
               is
               all
               in
               all
               ;
               when
               once
               you
               haue
               directed
               them
               how
               to
               attaine
               good
               order
               ,
               or
               method
               ,
               phrase
               ,
               and
               matter
               .
            
             
             
               If
               you
               desire
               any
               more
               ,
               
               cōcerning
               the
               difficult
               questions
               of
               Grammar
               ,
               reade
               Goclenius
               his
               Problems
               in
               the
               end
               of
               his
               Obseruations
               of
               the
               Latine
               tongue
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               I
               much
               approoue
               of
               all
               that
               you
               haue
               sayde
               in
               this
               matter
               ;
               and
               principally
               that
               the
               Vniuersities
               should
               be
               honoured
               by
               all
               means
               ▪
               and
               their
               dignities
               reserued
               inuiolable
               ;
               yet
               giue
               me
               leaue
               to
               tell
               you
               of
               one
               thing
               ,
               which
               here
               may
               seeme
               to
               bee
               blame-worthy
               ,
               
               which
               is
               this
               :
               That
               you
               would
               haue
               your
               enterers
               into
               this
               kinde
               of
               opposing
               ,
               to
               bring
               the
               whole
               disputations
               of
               M.
               Stockw
               ▪
               to
               dispute
               in
               his
               very
               words
               ;
               this
               may
               helpe
               to
               make
               them
               truants
               ,
               to
               trust
               only
               to
               their
               books
               and
               memory
               ,
               and
               not
               to
               stirre
               vp
               their
               owne
               wits
               and
               inuentions
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               Nothing
               less
               :
               for
               you
               see
               how
               after
               that
               they
               haue
               bin
               exercised
               this
               way
               for
               a
               time
               ,
               then
               I
               would
               haue
               them
               to
               trie
               their
               owne
               wits
               &
               inuentions
               also
               ;
               first
               abbridging
               their
               Author
               ,
               
               then
               bringing
               their
               owne
               :
               But
               ▪
               for
               following
               this
               course
               ,
               both
               experience
               and
               reason
               do
               shew
               it
               to
               be
               the
               surest
               ;
               as
               in
               all
               other
               learning
               ,
               so
               in
               this
               (
               like
               as
               we
               obserued
               in
               generall
               before
               )
               to
               let
               them
               haue
               first
               the
               most
               excellent
               patterns
               ,
               &
               neuer
               to
               rest
               vntil
               they
               haue
               the
               very
               patterns
               in
               their
               heads
               ,
               and
               as
               it
               were
               euer
               before
               their
               eies
               ;
               for
               then
               they
               wil
               be
               able
               to
               go
               forwards
               of
               themselues
               with
               delight
               &
               cōmendations
               .
               
               Wheras
               ,
               otherwise
               to
               inforce
               them
               by
               feare
               ,
               to
               vndertake
               such
               exercises
               ,
               wherwith
               they
               are
               not
               acquainted
               ,
               nor
               see
               the
               reason
               of
               them
               ,
               it
               is
               a
               matter
               of
               ouer
               great
               rigor
               ▪
               that
               I
               say
               no
               more
               of
               it
               ,
               &
               which
               must
               needs
               worke
               a
               maruellous
               distast
               in
               the
               schollar
               ,
               as
               I
               haue
               noted
               .
               Besides
               ,
               to
               cause
               such
               young
               ones
               to
               dispute
               without
               hearing
               or
               seeing
               such
               presidents
               ,
               is
               al
               one
               ,
               as
               to
               teach
               them
               to
               write
               only
               by
               precepts
               or
               some
               direction
               without
               copie
               .
               For
               euen
               as
               therin
               they
               shal
               both
               write
               very
               il
               fauouredly
               if
               any
               thing
               at
               all
               ,
               and
               learn
               so
               bad
               a
               hand
               ,
               as
               they
               shal
               be
               much
               troubled
               to
               forget
               ,
               which
               they
               must
               doe
               before
               they
               can
               come
               to
               a
               good
               hand
               ▪
               so
               is
               it
               here
               .
               1.
               
               They
               shall
               dispute
               very
               weakly
               &
               childishly
               ,
               both
               forwords
               &
               matter
               ▪
               if
               any
               thing
               at
               all
               ,
               &
               2.
               they
               shal
               get
               barbarous
               phrase
               ,
               to
               make
               them
               to
               be
               skorned
               ,
               and
               which
               they
               shall
               hardly
               forget
               againe
               .
            
             
             
               But
               of
               the
               otherside
               ,
               
               they
               being
               trained
               vp
               thus
               ,
               shall
               make
               not
               onely
               the
               matter
               of
               their
               learned
               Authour
               their
               owne
               ,
               but
               also
               his
               phrase
               ;
               and
               be
               so
               furnished
               ,
               that
               any
               man
               wil
               take
               delight
               to
               heare
               them
               .
               And
               that
               which
               I
               say
               of
               this
               ,
               the
               same
               I
               affirm
               of
               all
               excellent
               patterns
               ,
               whether
               for
               making
               Theames
               ,
               Verses
               or
               whatsoeuer
               ;
               that
               the
               more
               absolute
               their
               Presidents
               are
               ,
               and
               the
               more
               cunning
               they
               are
               in
               them
               ,
               the
               more
               singular
               they
               shall
               vndoubtedly
               proue
               .
            
             
               This
               is
               the
               very
               maine
               reason
               ,
               why
               all
               would
               haue
               the
               children
               to
               learne
               each
               Author
               so
               perfectly
               ,
               as
               to
               say
               euery
               worde
               without
               booke
               ,
               as
               much
               as
               is
               possible
               ,
               that
               the
               verie
               phrase
               and
               matter
               of
               their
               Author
               may
               bee
               their
               owne
               to
               vse
               perpetually
               .
            
             
               To
               conclude
               this
               point
               ,
               
               triall
               and
               experience
               may
               teach
               vs.
               Let
               two
               children
               be
               taken
               ,
               one
               of
               a
               more
               pregnant
               and
               sharpe
               wit
               ,
               the
               other
               of
               a
               slower
               and
               duller
               capacity
               :
               cause
               him
               of
               the
               sharpe
               wit
               ,
               to
               do
               all
               only
               by
               precept
               and
               his
               own
               Inuention
               in
               making
               Epistles
               ,
               Theames
               ,
               Verses
               ,
               disputing
               ;
               but
               let
               the
               other
               of
               the
               duller
               capacitie
               be
               trained
               vp
               ,
               not
               only
               by
               precept
               and
               his
               own
               inuention
               ;
               but
               principally
               by
               being
               kept
               strictly
               to
               imitate
               the
               most
               excellent
               patternes
               in
               all
               things
               :
               then
               make
               the
               triall
               ,
               whether
               he
               of
               the
               duller
               wit
               shall
               not
               expresse
               the
               sharpnesse
               ,
               learning
               ,
               grauitie
               ,
               of
               the
               most
               learned
               and
               wise
               men
               ,
               with
               certaine
               assurance
               to
               iustifie
               what
               hee
               hath
               done
               :
               whereas
               in
               the
               other
               ;
               shall
               be
               found
               by
               a
               learned
               and
               a
               iudicious
               examiner
               ,
               nothing
               but
               froth
               ,
               childishnesse
               and
               vncertaintie
               ,
               in
               the
               greatest
               ouerweening
               of
               wit
               and
               learning
               ;
               and
               whether
               the
               duller
               and
               harder
               wit
               shall
               not
               do
               it
               with
               farre
               lesse
               labour
               .
            
          
           
             
               Sp.
               
            
             
               I
               must
               needs
               yeeld
               vnto
               that
               which
               you
               say
               ,
               
               for
               that
               euidēce
               of
               truth
               which
               cannot
               be
               gainsaid
               .
               For
               this
               indeed
               all
               men
               doe
               see
               by
               common
               experience
               ,
               that
               in
               all
               trades
               and
               sciences
               ,
               they
               who
               get
               themselues
               most
               excellent
               patternes
               to
               follow
               ,
               and
               are
               the
               curiousest
               in
               expressing
               them
               most
               liu●ly
               ,
               are
               euer
               found
               the
               most
               excellent
               workemen
               .
               And
               therefore
               I
               do
               content
               my selfe
               ,
               as
               fully
               answered
               ,
               intreating
               that
               we
               may
               still
               proceed
               .
            
          
        
         
           
           
             CHAP.
             XVIII
             .
          
           
             Of
             pronouncing
             naturally
             and
             sweetly
             without
             vaine
             affectation
             .
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               WHat
               will
               you
               that
               we
               come
               vnto
               next
               ?
               Take
               it
               that
               wee
               haue
               gone
               thorough
               the
               most
               things
               ,
               which
               concerne
               our
               function
               for
               teaching
               the
               Latine
               tongue
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               There
               remaine
               yet
               two
               other
               matters
               ,
               and
               those
               of
               no
               lesse
               difficulty
               nor
               waight
               then
               most
               of
               the
               former
               ;
               and
               without
               which
               ,
               yet
               schooles
               doe
               lacke
               their
               principall
               ornaments
               ,
               as
               I
               suppose
               :
               the
               one
               of
               them
               is
               pronouncing
               sweetly
               ,
               the
               other
               speaking
               Latine
               purely
               and
               readily
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               These
               2.
               are
               ▪
               indeed
               worthy
               of
               our
               best
               thoughts
               .
               The
               first
               of
               them
               ,
               
               that
               is
               ,
               Pronuntiation
               ,
               beeing
               that
               which
               either
               makes
               or
               mars
               the
               most
               excellent
               speech
               .
               For
               al
               speeches
               are
               vsually
               esteemed
               euen
               as
               they
               are
               vttered
               or
               pronounced
               ;
               the
               finest
               schollar
               without
               this
               is
               accounted
               no
               bodie
               :
               and
               a
               mean
               schollar
               hauing
               attained
               this
               facultie
               ,
               is
               ordinarily
               reputed
               and
               commended
               aboue
               the
               best
               .
               Wherupō
               you
               know
               how
               that
               famous
               Greek
               Orator
               ,
               when
               he
               was
               asked
               ,
               what
               was
               the
               chief
               grace
               or
               excellēcy
               in
               Rhetorick
               ,
               what
               was
               the
               second
               and
               third
               ;
               he
               stil
               answered
               ,
               To
               pronounce
               wel
               .
               
               And
               for
               the
               second
               ,
               that
               is
               ,
               speaking
               of
               Latine
               ,
               as
               in
               examinations
               and
               disputations
               ,
               so
               in
               all
               other
               things
               ,
               there
               would
               bee
               a
               perpetuall
               vse
               of
               it
               amongst
               all
               Grammar
               schollars
               of
               any
               yeers
               .
               To
               the
               end
               ,
               to
               fit
               them
               to
               answer
               any
               learned
               man
               in
               Latine
               ,
               or
               to
               dispute
               
                 ex
                 tempore
              
               :
               also
               to
               traine
               them
               vp
               to
               be
               able
               to
               speak
               purely
               when
               they
               come
               in
               the
               Vniuersities
               ;
               as
               in
               some
               Colledges
               they
               are
               only
               to
               speake
               Latine
               :
               or
               to
               fit
               them
               ,
               if
               they
               shall
               go
               beyond
               these
               as
               ,
               as
               Gentlemen
               who
               goe
               to
               trauell
               ,
               Factors
               for
               Marchants
               ,
               and
               the
               like
               .
               The
               readinesse
               in
               which
               facultie
               if
               it
               
               be
               in
               a
               good
               phrase
               ,
               how
               much
               it
               graceth
               a
               childe
               in
               Vniuersitie
               ,
               Citie
               ,
               or
               Countrey
               ,
               we
               all
               of
               vs
               knowe
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               Sir
               ,
               you
               haue
               spoken
               very
               truely
               of
               these
               :
               therfore
               let
               vs
               come
               vnto
               them
               in
               order
               ,
               I
               intreate
               you
               ;
               and
               first
               vnto
               pronuntiation
               .
               
               This
               I
               haue
               found
               passing
               hard
               to
               acquaint
               my
               schollars
               withall
               ,
               to
               bring
               them
               to
               any
               ripenesse
               or
               commendable
               faculty
               ,
               but
               still
               they
               will
               speake
               as
               a
               boy
               who
               is
               saying
               his
               lesson
               ;
               though
               I
               haue
               both
               directed
               them
               how
               to
               pronounce
               ,
               vttering
               the
               sentences
               oft
               before
               them
               ,
               and
               haue
               very
               much
               called
               vpon
               them
               for
               the
               same
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               To
               bring
               your
               schollars
               vnto
               this
               sweetnesse
               of
               pronuntiation
               ,
               
               this
               is
               the
               plainest
               and
               surest
               way
               ,
               so
               farre
               forth
               as
               yet
               I
               can
               finde
               :
               and
               this
               I
               am
               assured
               will
               effect
               it
               in
               a
               commendable
               sort
               ;
            
             
               1.
               
               You
               must
               remember
               that
               which
               was
               generally
               premised
               in
               the
               beginning
               .
               
               To
               acquaint
               your
               young
               schollar
               from
               the
               very
               first
               entrance
               ,
               
               to
               pronounce
               euery
               lesson
               and
               each
               word
               audibly
               ,
               leasurely
               ,
               and
               distinctly
               ,
               euer
               sounding
               out
               the
               last
               letter
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               To
               pronounce
               euery
               matter
               according
               to
               the
               nature
               of
               it
               ,
               
               so
               much
               as
               you
               can
               ;
               
               chiefly
               where
               persons
               or
               other
               things
               are
               ●ained
               to
               speake
               .
            
             
               As
               for
               example
               :
               In
               the
               
                 Confabulatiunculae
                 pueriles
              
               ,
               Cause
               them
               to
               vtter
               euery
               dialogue
               liuely
               ,
               as
               if
               they
               themselues
               were
               the
               persons
               which
               did
               speake
               in
               that
               dialogue
               ,
               &
               so
               in
               euery
               other
               speech
               ,
               to
               imagine
               themselues
               to
               haue
               occasion
               to
               vtter
               the
               very
               same
               things
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               What
               they
               cannot
               vtter
               well
               in
               Latine
               ,
               
               cause
               them
               first
               to
               do
               it
               naturally
               and
               liuely
               in
               English
               ,
               
               and
               shew
               them
               your selfe
               the
               absurdnesse
               of
               their
               pronuntiation
               ,
               by
               pronouncing
               foolishly
               or
               childishly
               ,
               as
               they
               do
               :
               and
               then
               pronounce
               it
               rightly
               ,
               and
               naturally
               before
               them
               likewise
               ,
               that
               they
               may
               perceiue
               the
               difference
               to
               be
               ashamed
               of
               the
               one
               ,
               and
               take
               a
               delight
               in
               the
               other
               .
            
             
               So
               cause
               them
               to
               do
               it
               after
               you
               ,
               vntill
               that
               they
               can
               do
               it
               in
               good
               sort
               ,
               tuning
               their
               voices
               sweetly
               .
               When
               they
               can
               
               doe
               it
               in
               English
               ,
               then
               cause
               them
               to
               doe
               it
               iust
               in
               the
               same
               manner
               in
               Latine
               ;
               and
               thus
               they
               will
               vndoubtedly
               come
               vnto
               it
               very
               easily
               .
            
             
               4
               Also
               cause
               sundry
               of
               them
               to
               pronounce
               thus
               the
               very
               same
               sentence
               ;
               
               disgracing
               the
               speech
               of
               those
               who
               pronounce
               absurdly
               ,
               by
               imitation
               of
               it
               ,
               and
               gracing
               as
               much
               the
               speech
               of
               those
               who
               doe
               it
               most
               naturally
               and
               pleasantly
               :
               propounding
               such
               as
               patternes
               and
               markes
               to
               all
               their
               fellows
               ,
               for
               al
               to
               emulate
               and
               imitate
               them
               ;
               as
               I
               haue
               aduised
               generally
               .
            
             
               5
               Cause
               them
               to
               doe
               the
               like
               in
               Corderius
               ,
               
               Esops
               Fables
               ,
               or
               Terence
               as
               they
               did
               in
               Confabulatiunculae
               .
               For
               Esops
               Fables
               ,
               we
               haue
               shewed
               before
               the
               manner
               ,
               for
               making
               a
               report
               of
               each
               Fable
               ,
               first
               in
               English
               ,
               after
               in
               Latine
               ,
               and
               the
               benefite
               thereof
               .
            
             
               So
               after
               when
               they
               shall
               come
               to
               Virgils
               Eclogues
               ,
               
               cause
               them
               yet
               still
               more
               liuely
               ,
               in
               saying
               without
               booke
               ,
               to
               expresse
               the
               affections
               and
               persons
               of
               sheepeheards
               ;
               or
               whose
               speech
               soeuer
               else
               ,
               which
               they
               are
               to
               imitate
               .
               Of
               which
               sort
               are
               the
               Prosopopeyes
               of
               Iupiter
               ,
               Apollo
               ,
               and
               others
               in
               Ouids
               Metamorphosis
               ,
               Iuno
               ,
               Neptune
               ,
               Aeolus
               ,
               Aeneas
               ,
               Venus
               ,
               Dido
               ,
               &c.
               Virgils
               Aeneids
               .
            
             
               So
               in
               all
               Poetry
               ,
               
               for
               the
               pronuntiation
               ,
               it
               is
               to
               be
               vttered
               as
               prose
               ;
               obseruing
               distinctions
               and
               the
               nature
               of
               the
               matter
               ;
               not
               to
               bee
               tuned
               foolishly
               or
               childishly
               after
               the
               manner
               of
               scanning
               a
               Verse
               as
               the
               vse
               of
               some
               is
               .
               Onely
               to
               tune
               it
               so
               in
               scanning
               ,
               or
               getting
               it
               without
               booke
               ,
               vnlesse
               you
               would
               haue
               them
               to
               pronounce
               some
               speciall
               booke
               ,
               for
               getting
               authorities
               for
               quantities
               ;
               or
               others
               ,
               onely
               to
               that
               same
               purpose
               .
            
             
               6
               To
               helpe
               hereunto
               yet
               more
               ,
               
               and
               that
               they
               may
               doe
               euery
               thing
               according
               to
               the
               very
               nature
               ;
               acquaint
               them
               to
               pronounce
               some
               speciall
               examples
               ,
               set
               downe
               in
               Talaeus
               Rhetoricke
               as
               pathetically
               as
               they
               can
               :
               as
               examples
               of
               Ironies
               ,
               Exclamations
               ,
               Reuocations
               ,
               Prosopopeyes
               ,
               and
               those
               which
               are
               in
               his
               rules
               of
               pronouncing
               .
            
             
               Let
               them
               also
               be
               taught
               carefully
               ,
               in
               what
               word
               the
               Emphasis
               
               
               
               
               
               lyeth
               ;
               
               and
               therefore
               which
               is
               to
               be
               eleuated
               in
               the
               pronuntiation
               .
               As
               namely
               those
               wordes
               in
               which
               the
               chiefe
               Trope
               or
               Figure
               is
               .
            
             
               Thus
               let
               them
               take
               speciall
               pains
               to
               pronounce
               Theams
               or
               Declamations
               ,
               
               striuing
               who
               shall
               doe
               best
               :
               
               and
               in
               all
               their
               oppositions
               to
               dispute
               ,
               as
               if
               
                 ex
                 animo
              
               in
               good
               earnest
               ,
               with
               all
               contention
               and
               vehemencie
               .
            
             
               Finally
               ,
               the
               practice
               of
               pronouncing
               emphatically
               ,
               of
               some
               of
               Tullies
               Orations
               ,
               which
               are
               most
               flowing
               in
               these
               Figures
               of
               sentences
               (
               especially
               in
               Exclamations
               ,
               
               Prosopopeis
               ,
               Apostrophees
               ,
               and
               the
               like
               :
               as
               some
               against
               Catiline
               )
               must
               needes
               much
               acquaint
               them
               with
               great
               variety
               of
               pronuntiation
               ,
               to
               be
               fitted
               for
               all
               sorts
               .
            
             
               For
               more
               exquisite
               knowledge
               and
               practice
               hereof
               ,
               
               I
               leaue
               it
               to
               the
               Vniuersities
               ,
               which
               are
               to
               perfect
               all
               those
               faculties
               which
               are
               but
               begun
               in
               the
               Grammar
               Schooles
               ;
               and
               do
               referre
               you
               for
               precepts
               ,
               to
               the
               second
               booke
               of
               Talaeus
               Rhetoricke
               
                 de
                 pronunciatione
              
               :
               or
               rather
               of
               Master
               Butlars
               Rhetoricke
               ,
               as
               I
               said
               before
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             XIX
             .
          
           
             Of
             speaking
             Latine
             purely
             and
             readily
             .
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               I
               Pray
               you
               Sir
               ,
               go
               on
               to
               the
               last
               point
               :
               in
               this
               which
               you
               haue
               said
               for
               the
               maner
               of
               pronuntiation
               ,
               I
               haue
               heard
               nothing
               which
               I
               can
               iustly
               except
               against
               ,
               it
               doth
               all
               sound
               so
               pleasing
               and
               likely
               in
               mine
               eare
               .
               When
               I
               haue
               more
               tryall
               ,
               I
               shall
               be
               able
               to
               say
               more
               .
            
             
               In
               the
               meane
               time
               let
               me
               craue
               the
               like
               ,
               for
               the
               manner
               of
               learning
               to
               speake
               Latine
               .
               If
               you
               can
               shew
               me
               so
               plaine
               a
               way
               of
               it
               ,
               as
               this
               seemeth
               to
               be
               ,
               surely
               you
               shall
               make
               mee
               much
               more
               to
               reioyce
               .
            
             
             
               For
               of
               this
               I
               may
               complaine
               yet
               more
               ,
               
               then
               of
               most
               of
               the
               rest
               ;
               that
               though
               I
               haue
               laboured
               and
               striuen
               by
               Ferula
               ,
               and
               all
               meanes
               of
               seuerity
               ,
               yet
               I
               haue
               not
               beene
               able
               to
               make
               my
               Schollars
               to
               vtter
               their
               mindes
               in
               any
               tollerable
               manner
               ,
               of
               ordinary
               things
               ,
               but
               in
               very
               barbarous
               phrase
               ,
               nor
               so
               much
               as
               to
               put
               it
               in
               practice
               amongst
               themselues
               ;
               much
               lesse
               to
               vtter
               their
               minds
               in
               Latine
               easily
               ,
               purely
               ,
               and
               freely
               as
               it
               were
               to
               be
               wished
               ,
               and
               as
               you
               haue
               shewed
               the
               necessity
               and
               commendation
               thereof
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               I
               my selfe
               haue
               had
               long
               experience
               of
               the
               truth
               and
               griefe
               of
               this
               complaint
               likewise
               ,
               though
               I
               also
               haue
               done
               what
               I
               could
               continually
               :
               and
               yet
               of
               late
               time
               I
               grow
               to
               this
               certaine
               assurance
               ,
               that
               Schollars
               may
               be
               brought
               to
               talke
               of
               any
               ordinary
               matter
               which
               can
               be
               required
               of
               them
               ,
               both
               in
               good
               Latine
               ,
               and
               also
               most
               readily
               and
               easily
               .
            
             
               Herein
               hath
               beene
               a
               great
               part
               of
               my
               errour
               and
               hinderance
               ,
               
               that
               I
               euer
               thought
               as
               most
               doe
               ,
               that
               children
               were
               not
               to
               be
               exercised
               to
               speake
               Latin
               ,
               for
               feare
               of
               Barbarisme
               ,
               vntill
               they
               came
               into
               the
               highest
               fourmes
               ;
               as
               at
               least
               vntill
               they
               were
               in
               the
               third
               ,
               fourth
               ,
               or
               fift
               fourmes
               :
               and
               hereuppon
               I
               could
               neuer
               attaine
               to
               that
               which
               I
               desired
               .
            
             
               But
               now
               I
               finde
               euidently
               ,
               
               that
               this
               must
               be
               begun
               from
               the
               very
               first
               entrance
               into
               construction
               ;
               their
               first
               books
               being
               principally
               appointed
               ,
               and
               read
               to
               them
               to
               this
               end
               ,
               to
               enter
               and
               traine
               them
               vp
               in
               speaking
               of
               Latine
               of
               ordinary
               matters
               :
            
             
               As
               
                 Confabulatiunculae
                 Pueriles
                 ,
                 Corderius
              
               ,
               and
               other
               like
               Colloquiums
               .
               And
               therefore
               they
               should
               then
               begin
               to
               practice
               to
               vse
               those
               phrases
               which
               there
               they
               learne
               .
            
             
               Also
               for
               the
               Grammar
               ,
               I
               see
               no
               reason
               but
               it
               might
               haue
               beene
               all
               as
               well
               set
               downe
               in
               the
               English
               ,
               like
               as
               the
               Accedence
               is
               ,
               and
               learned
               in
               one
               halfe
               of
               the
               time
               ,
               &
               with
               much
               more
               delight
               ;
               but
               onely
               or
               chiefly
               to
               traine
               vp
               schollars
               to
               deliuer
               all
               their
               Grammar
               rules
               ,
               and
               matters
               concerning
               Grammar
               ,
               in
               Latin.
               
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               It
               standeth
               with
               very
               great
               reason
               ,
               that
               it
               should
               
               be
               as
               you
               say
               ,
               that
               in
               the
               learning
               of
               those
               bookes
               ,
               the
               right
               foundation
               of
               speaking
               Latine
               familiarly
               should
               be
               layed
               ;
               and
               the
               practice
               begunne
               ;
               and
               that
               indeede
               there
               is
               a
               generall
               mistaking
               about
               this
               :
               but
               I
               desire
               you
               to
               set
               downe
               the
               whole
               course
               and
               proceeding
               in
               it
               ,
               how
               to
               bring
               it
               to
               perfection
               ;
               and
               then
               I
               shall
               bee
               much
               better
               able
               to
               iudge
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               For
               the
               manner
               of
               effecting
               it
               ,
               
               I
               find
               it
               to
               be
               most
               easie
               thus
               :
               
            
             
               1
               You
               must
               remember
               that
               which
               I
               said
               ,
               concerning
               the
               manner
               of
               the
               examining
               both
               of
               their
               Grammar
               rules
               and
               Lectures
               ;
               to
               pose
               euery
               peece
               of
               a
               rule
               ,
               and
               euery
               part
               of
               a
               sentence
               both
               in
               English
               and
               Latine
               ,
               as
               leasure
               will
               permit
               ;
               and
               to
               cause
               them
               to
               answere
               both
               in
               English
               and
               Latine
               ,
               vntill
               they
               be
               able
               to
               vnderstand
               and
               answere
               in
               Latine
               alone
               .
               And
               so
               both
               examining
               in
               the
               wordes
               of
               their
               Authors
               ,
               and
               causing
               them
               to
               answer
               likewise
               in
               the
               very
               same
               words
               of
               the
               Authours
               ,
               they
               will
               enter
               into
               it
               with
               great
               delight
               .
               For
               the
               particular
               manner
               .
               I
               referre
               you
               to
               the
               Chapter
               of
               examining
               in
               Latine
               ,
               which
               I
               shewed
               you
               before
               at
               large
               ,
               and
               set
               downe
               examples
               of
               it
               .
            
             
               2
               What
               they
               are
               not
               able
               to
               vtter
               in
               Latine
               ,
               
               vtter
               you
               it
               euer
               before
               them
               ;
               that
               as
               the
               childe
               learneth
               of
               the
               mother
               or
               of
               the
               nurse
               ,
               to
               begin
               to
               speake
               ,
               so
               they
               may
               of
               you
               and
               of
               their
               Authour
               .
            
             
               If
               you
               were
               not
               able
               so
               to
               vtter
               euery
               thing
               before
               them
               ,
               as
               very
               many
               are
               to
               seeke
               this
               way
               ,
               amongst
               others
               (
               I
               meane
               in
               this
               ,
               to
               speake
               in
               Latine
               easily
               and
               purely
               ,
               euen
               in
               ordinary
               matters
               )
               ;
               
               yet
               this
               continuall
               practice
               of
               daily
               examining
               and
               teaching
               your
               schollars
               to
               answere
               out
               of
               the
               wordes
               of
               the
               Authour
               (
               as
               the
               manner
               was
               set
               down
               before
               )
               and
               watchfulnesse
               to
               vse
               to
               speake
               Latine
               ,
               onely
               amongst
               all
               whom
               you
               would
               haue
               to
               learne
               it
               ,
               shall
               bring
               you
               vnto
               it
               ;
               and
               much
               more
               by
               the
               meanes
               following
               .
            
             
               3
               I
               doe
               finde
               the
               daily
               practice
               also
               of
               those
               Grammaticall
               translations
               ,
               which
               I
               haue
               so
               oft
               mentioned
               in
               reading
               the
               Latine
               of
               the
               Author
               out
               of
               the
               translation
               ,
               to
               be
               a
               
               marueilous
               helpe
               heereunto
               ;
               especially
               the
               reading
               of
               bookes
               of
               Dialogues
               :
               as
               of
               
                 Confabulatiunculae
                 pueriles
                 ,
                 Corderius
                 ,
                 &c.
                 
              
               For
               if
               there
               they
               can
               presently
               expresse
               their
               mindes
               in
               Latine
               ,
               of
               any
               such
               matter
               as
               is
               there
               handled
               ;
               why
               shall
               they
               not
               be
               able
               to
               doe
               it
               likewise
               ,
               of
               any
               such
               thing
               falling
               into
               their
               common
               talke
               .
            
             
               4
               As
               they
               learne
               these
               Dialogues
               ,
               
               when
               they
               haue
               construed
               and
               parsed
               ,
               
               cause
               them
               to
               talke
               together
               ;
               vttering
               euery
               sentence
               pathetically
               one
               to
               another
               (
               as
               was
               shewed
               in
               our
               former
               speech
               of
               pronouncing
               )
               and
               first
               to
               vtter
               euery
               sentence
               in
               English
               ,
               as
               neede
               is
               ,
               then
               in
               Latine
               .
            
             
               So
               you
               shall
               be
               sure
               that
               they
               shall
               not
               goe
               by
               rote
               (
               as
               we
               tearme
               it
               )
               and
               as
               they
               may
               do
               soone
               ,
               if
               they
               only
               repeate
               the
               Latine
               so
               talking
               together
               .
               And
               moreouer
               ,
               euer
               thus
               with
               the
               English
               ,
               the
               Latine
               will
               easily
               come
               to
               their
               remembrance
               ,
               so
               often
               as
               they
               haue
               occasion
               to
               vse
               the
               same
               .
            
             
               5
               The
               practice
               mentioned
               of
               turning
               euery
               morning
               a
               peece
               of
               their
               Accedence
               into
               Latin
               ,
               
               for
               their
               exercise
               ,
               shall
               much
               prepare
               them
               to
               parse
               and
               speake
               in
               Latine
               .
            
             
               6
               Accustome
               them
               to
               parse
               wholly
               in
               Latine
               ,
               by
               that
               time
               that
               they
               haue
               bin
               a
               yeare
               or
               two
               at
               the
               most
               ,
               in
               construction
               ,
               
               and
               are
               well
               acquainted
               with
               the
               manner
               of
               parsidg
               in
               English
               ,
               as
               we
               aduised
               before
               .
               This
               they
               will
               do
               very
               readily
               ,
               if
               you
               traine
               them
               vp
               well
               in
               their
               Accedence
               ,
               and
               in
               the
               former
               kindes
               of
               examining
               and
               exercises
               ,
               which
               I
               spake
               of
               euen
               now
               ;
               and
               more
               specially
               by
               the
               right
               &
               continuall
               apposing
               of
               their
               Grammar
               rules
               in
               Latine
               .
            
             
               Moreouer
               ,
               the
               Dialogues
               in
               the
               end
               of
               the
               first
               booke
               of
               Corderius
               Dialogues
               ,
               
               will
               much
               further
               them
               in
               this
               parsing
               ,
               because
               they
               are
               principally
               written
               to
               this
               purpose
               ;
               as
               all
               his
               foure
               bookes
               are
               very
               sweete
               and
               pleasant
               for
               all
               ordinary
               schollars
               talke
               .
            
             
               7
               Next
               vnto
               these
               I
               finde
               the
               daily
               practice
               of
               disputing
               or
               opposing
               in
               Latine
               (
               following
               the
               order
               ,
               
               and
               vsing
               the
               helpe
               of
               M.
               Stockwood
               )
               to
               be
               marueilously
               profitable
               ,
               for
               witty
               and
               sweet
               speech
               .
            
             
             
               8
               Vnto
               these
               you
               may
               adde
               the
               practice
               of
               varying
               of
               a
               phrase
               ,
               
               according
               to
               the
               manner
               of
               Erasmus
               ,
               Riuius
               ,
               or
               Macropedius
               ,
               
                 de
                 copia
                 verborum
              
               :
               as
               the
               wayes
               of
               varying
               the
               first
               Supine
               ,
               of
               the
               Imperatiue
               moode
               ,
               the
               future
               tense
               ,
               the
               Superlatiue
               degree
               ,
               and
               the
               like
               .
               But
               these
               onely
               as
               leasure
               will
               suffer
               not
               hindering
               the
               most
               necessary
               exercises
               .
            
             
               9
               So
               also
               for
               copie
               of
               the
               purest
               phrases
               and
               Synonimaes
               ,
               
               besides
               the
               daily
               helpes
               of
               all
               their
               Authours
               ,
               Manutius
               or
               Master
               Draxe
               his
               phrases
               ,
               to
               see
               how
               many
               wayes
               they
               can
               vtter
               any
               thing
               in
               good
               phrase
               ;
               and
               so
               to
               turne
               to
               any
               phrase
               when
               they
               haue
               occasion
               .
               And
               more
               specially
               for
               that
               practice
               of
               the
               reading
               them
               ou●
               of
               the
               Grammaticall
               Translations
               in
               propriety
               (
               as
               was
               shewed
               before
               of
               the
               Dialogues
               )
               any
               shall
               finde
               to
               be
               most
               easie
               ,
               to
               furnish
               with
               store
               of
               the
               purest
               phrase
               for
               any
               purpose
               .
            
             
               10
               Besides
               ,
               
               for
               the
               Master
               to
               vse
               oft
               ,
               at
               taking
               or
               saying
               Lectures
               or
               exercises
               ,
               
               or
               at
               their
               pronouncing
               or
               shewing
               exercises
               ,
               to
               cause
               them
               to
               giue
               variety
               for
               anything
               ;
               who
               is
               able
               to
               giue
               a
               better
               word
               or
               phrase
               ,
               or
               to
               giue
               the
               greatest
               copie
               to
               expresse
               their
               mindes
               ,
               and
               where
               they
               haue
               read
               the
               wordes
               or
               phrase
               .
            
             
               11
               Where
               none
               can
               giue
               a
               fit
               word
               ,
               
               there
               to
               turne
               their
               Dictionaries
               ,
               as
               to
               Holyokes
               Dictionary
               ,
               and
               then
               to
               furnish
               them
               ;
               or
               to
               describe
               the
               thing
               by
               some
               Periphrasis
               or
               circumlocution
               of
               words
               or
               the
               phrases
               mentioned
               .
            
             
               12
               But
               to
               the
               end
               to
               haue
               copie
               of
               proper
               wordes
               ,
               besides
               all
               other
               helpes
               spoken
               of
               ,
               
               it
               were
               not
               vnprofitable
               to
               haue
               daily
               some
               few
               wordes
               to
               be
               repeated
               first
               in
               the
               morning
               ;
               as
               out
               of
               Adrianus
               ●unius
               his
               Nomenclator
               ;
               or
               out
               of
               the
               Latine
               Primitiues
               ,
               or
               the
               Greeke
               Radices
               ;
               the
               vse
               whereof
               I
               shall
               shew
               hereafter
               :
               and
               euer
               for
               those
               wordes
               which
               they
               haue
               learned
               (
               any
               one
               who
               can
               soonest
               )
               to
               name
               where
               they
               haue
               learned
               them
               .
            
             
               Thus
               by
               all
               meanes
               they
               should
               be
               furnished
               with
               propriety
               and
               copie
               of
               the
               best
               words
               ;
               which
               is
               a
               wonderfull
               helpe
               to
               all
               kinde
               of
               learning
               ,
               especially
               to
               the
               knowledge
               of
               the
               tongues
               .
            
             
             
               13
               To
               all
               these
               may
               be
               added
               for
               them
               who
               haue
               leasure
               enough
               the
               reading
               ouer
               and
               ouer
               of
               Erasmus
               Colloquium
               ,
               
               Castalions
               Dialogues
               ,
               or
               the
               like
               .
            
             
               14
               Lastly
               when
               you
               haue
               layed
               a
               sound
               foundation
               that
               they
               may
               be
               sure
               to
               haue
               warrantable
               and
               pure
               phrase
               ,
               
               by
               these
               means
               or
               the
               best
               of
               them
               ,
               and
               all
               other
               their
               schoole
               exercises
               ;
               then
               continuall
               practice
               of
               speaking
               shall
               vndoubtedly
               accomplish
               your
               desire
               to
               cause
               them
               to
               speake
               truely
               ,
               purely
               ,
               properly
               ,
               and
               readily
               ;
               Practice
               in
               a
               good
               way
               being
               here
               ,
               as
               in
               all
               the
               rest
               ,
               that
               which
               doth
               all
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               These
               things
               ,
               or
               but
               the
               best
               of
               them
               ,
               being
               constantly
               practiced
               cannot
               but
               effect
               marueilous
               much
               ,
               and
               very
               surely
               ;
               chiefly
               if
               we
               could
               bring
               them
               to
               speake
               Latine
               continually
               ,
               from
               that
               time
               that
               they
               beginne
               to
               parse
               in
               Latine
               :
               
               but
               this
               I
               haue
               had
               too
               much
               experience
               of
               ,
               that
               without
               great
               seuerity
               they
               will
               not
               be
               brought
               vnto
               :
               but
               they
               will
               speake
               English
               ,
               and
               one
               will
               winke
               at
               another
               ,
               if
               they
               be
               out
               of
               the
               Masters
               hearing
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               It
               is
               indeed
               exceeding
               hard
               ,
               to
               cause
               this
               to
               bee
               practiced
               constantly
               amongst
               schollars
               .
               That
               is
               a
               vsuall
               custome
               in
               Schooles
               to
               appoint
               Custodes
               ,
               
               or
               Asini
               (
               as
               they
               are
               tearmed
               in
               some
               places
               )
               to
               obserue
               and
               catch
               them
               who
               speake
               English
               in
               each
               fourme
               ,
               
               or
               whom
               they
               see
               idle
               ,
               to
               giue
               them
               the
               Ferula
               ,
               and
               to
               make
               them
               Custodes
               if
               they
               cannot
               answere
               a
               question
               which
               they
               aske
               .
            
             
               But
               I
               haue
               obserued
               so
               much
               inconuenience
               in
               it
               ,
               as
               I
               cannot
               tell
               what
               to
               say
               in
               this
               case
               :
               for
               oft-times
               ,
               he
               who
               is
               the
               Custos
               will
               hardly
               attend
               his
               own
               worke
               ,
               for
               harkening
               to
               heare
               others
               to
               speake
               English.
               
            
             
               Also
               there
               falleth
               our
               amongst
               them
               oft-times
               so
               much
               w●angling
               about
               the
               questions
               ,
               or
               defending
               themselues
               ,
               that
               they
               did
               not
               speake
               English
               ,
               or
               were
               not
               idle
               ,
               that
               all
               the
               whole
               fourme
               is
               troubled
               .
               So
               likewise
               when
               the
               Custodes
               are
               called
               for
               ,
               before
               breaking
               vp
               at
               dinner
               and
               at
               night
               ,
               there
               will
               be
               so
               much
               contention
               amongst
               them
               ,
               as
               is
               a
               disquieting
               and
               trouble
               to
               the
               Master
               .
               Moreouer
               ,
               this
               I
               haue
               obserued
               ,
               that
               euer
               if
               there
               be
               any
               one
               simple
               in
               a
               
               fourme
               or
               harder
               of
               learning
               then
               the
               rest
               ,
               they
               will
               make
               him
               a
               right
               Asinus
               ,
               causing
               such
               to
               be
               the
               Custodes
               continually
               ,
               or
               for
               the
               most
               part
               ,
               if
               they
               cannot
               answere
               :
               and
               to
               this
               end
               will
               be
               alwayes
               watching
               them
               ;
               wherby
               many
               such
               are
               not
               only
               notably
               abused
               ,
               but
               very
               much
               discouraged
               for
               being
               schollars
               ,
               when
               they
               see
               themselues
               so
               baited
               at
               by
               all
               :
               some
               others
               are
               made
               ouer
               malipart
               thereby
               .
            
             
               Besides
               all
               these
               ,
               
               I
               doe
               not
               see
               any
               great
               fitnesse
               ,
               that
               one
               schollar
               should
               smite
               another
               with
               the
               Ferula
               ;
               
               because
               much
               malicing
               one
               another
               ,
               with
               grudges
               and
               quarrels
               do
               arise
               thereupon
               .
               So
               that
               the
               discommodities
               that
               follow
               the
               Custodes
               ,
               seem
               to
               me
               to
               be
               many
               moe
               then
               the
               benefits
               can
               be
               ;
               chiefly
               in
               losse
               of
               time
               ,
               and
               hindering
               more
               in
               other
               learning
               ,
               then
               can
               be
               gotten
               in
               that
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               I
               my selfe
               haue
               had
               experience
               of
               most
               of
               these
               inconueniences
               :
               but
               what
               way
               will
               you
               take
               then
               ,
               to
               cause
               your
               schollars
               to
               speake
               Latine
               continually
               ?
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               This
               is
               the
               best
               way
               that
               yet
               I
               can
               finde
               ,
               
               &
               to
               auoid
               the
               former
               inconueniences
               ;
               
               First
               ,
               to
               appoint
               the
               two
               Seniors
               in
               each
               fourm
               (
               of
               whom
               we
               shall
               speake
               after
               )
               as
               to
               look
               to
               all
               other
               matters
               in
               the
               fourme
               ,
               
               so
               to
               this
               more
               specially
               ,
               that
               none
               speake
               English
               nor
               barbarous
               Latin
               :
               &
               if
               they
               be
               found
               partiall
               or
               negligent
               ,
               then
               to
               preferre
               others
               into
               their
               places
               ;
               besides
               the
               other
               censures
               to
               be
               inflicted
               vpon
               them
               which
               I
               shall
               mention
               to
               you
               ,
               when
               we
               shall
               come
               to
               speake
               of
               punishments
               ;
               &
               so
               to
               haue
               their
               due
               rewards
               ,
               being
               found
               carefull
               .
               
               Secondly
               ,
               the
               Masters
               owne
               eye
               &
               eare
               in
               the
               Schoole
               ,
               
               to
               be
               continuall
               Custodes
               so
               much
               as
               may
               be
               ,
               
               both
               for
               Monitors
               and
               others
               .
               Thirdly
               ,
               if
               they
               do
               vse
               to
               parse
               in
               Latin
               (
               &
               therefore
               must
               needs
               exercise
               themselues
               in
               that
               against
               that
               time
               that
               their
               Master
               doth
               come
               to
               hearethem
               )
               &
               secondly
               ,
               
               if
               they
               be
               kept
               in
               their
               places
               ,
               and
               strictly
               looked
               vnto
               for
               performing
               all
               exercises
               ;
               I
               doe
               not
               see
               but
               they
               may
               be
               made
               to
               speake
               Latin
               in
               the
               schoole
               at
               schooletimes
               ;
               neyther
               that
               they
               shall
               haue
               any
               great
               occasions
               of
               the
               contrary
               .
               Fourthly
               ,
               
               for
               speaking
               Latin
               in
               all
               other
               places
               ,
               it
               must
               only
               be
               by
               Monitours
               appointed
               weekly
               ,
               as
               we
               shall
               haue
               occasion
               to
               speak
               more
               after
               ,
               and
               some
               
               seuerely
               corrected
               who
               are
               found
               most
               carelesse
               herein
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               
            
             
               But
               if
               any
               one
               alone
               ,
               
               who
               hath
               some
               vnderstanding
               of
               Latine
               ,
               
               would
               learne
               to
               speake
               of
               familiar
               matters
               ,
               to
               be
               able
               to
               talke
               with
               others
               ,
               what
               course
               doe
               you
               thinke
               the
               speediest
               ?
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               Euen
               the
               same
               which
               I
               would
               vse
               to
               help
               a
               whole
               Schoole
               :
               which
               if
               I
               should
               take
               a
               course
               for
               a
               wager
               ,
               amongst
               others
               ,
               I
               would
               vse
               specially
               ,
               to
               cause
               them
               daily
               to
               spend
               some
               quarter
               ,
               or
               halfe
               an
               howre
               ,
               each
               in
               his
               order
               ,
               reading
               Corderius
               first
               out
               of
               Latine
               into
               English
               ,
               after
               out
               of
               English
               into
               Latine
               ,
               euery
               one
               a
               little
               peece
               ;
               where
               one
               failes
               another
               to
               helpe
               ;
               and
               the
               booke
               or
               Master
               where
               all
               faile
               :
               and
               also
               the
               Master
               to
               cause
               them
               to
               vary
               each
               hard
               phrase
               (
               and
               chiefly
               all
               which
               are
               of
               most
               common
               vse
               )
               so
               many
               waies
               as
               they
               can
               ,
               trying
               who
               can
               doe
               best
               ;
               himselfe
               to
               adde
               moe
               where
               they
               faile
               .
               After
               Corderius
               gone
               ouer
               ,
               to
               do
               the
               like
               in
               other
               easie
               Authors
               ,
               as
               Terence
               ,
               or
               
                 Terentius
                 Christianus
              
               ,
               and
               the
               like
               .
               So
               I
               would
               haue
               the
               priuate
               learner
               to
               practice
               daily
               the
               same
               ,
               reading
               Corderius
               first
               out
               of
               Latine
               into
               English
               ,
               by
               help
               of
               the
               translation
               ;
               after
               trying
               how
               he
               can
               read
               it
               out
               of
               English
               into
               Latine
               ,
               and
               euer
               where
               he
               fails
               ,
               to
               vse
               the
               help
               of
               the
               Latine
               book
               lying
               by
               him
               .
               The
               continual
               exercise
               in
               this
               ,
               if
               they
               labor
               to
               be
               perfect
               in
               the
               examples
               of
               Nowns
               &
               Verbs
               ,
               and
               somwhat
               in
               knowing
               the
               Rules
               of
               the
               Accedence
               ,
               as
               was
               shewed
               ,
               shal
               most
               speedily
               effect
               this
               desire
               .
               For
               thus
               may
               any
               one
               soon
               learne
               to
               vtter
               all
               that
               booke
               :
               And
               in
               it
               is
               the
               substance
               of
               most
               things
               falling
               out
               in
               ordinary
               speech
               .
               After
               this
               ,
               hee
               may
               do
               the
               like
               in
               other
               easie
               books
               by
               the
               same
               helpe
               of
               translations
               .
               And
               lastly
               ,
               practicing
               to
               translate
               other
               books
               of
               dialogues
               (
               as
               ,
               Erasmus
               Colloquium
               ,
               or
               the
               like
               )
               and
               afterwards
               reading
               them
               forth
               of
               English
               into
               Latine
               againe
               ,
               any
               one
               may
               come
               on
               very
               fast
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               This
               stands
               vpon
               the
               former
               grounds
               .
               These
               seuerall
               points
               which
               you
               haue
               gone
               thorough
               ,
               seeme
               to
               me
               very
               sufficient
               (
               and
               to
               neede
               no
               addition
               )
               for
               training
               vp
               schollars
               to
               attain
               to
               so
               good
               perfection
               in
               the
               Latin
               tong
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               These
               are
               but
               an
               entrance
               ,
               meet
               for
               the
               Grammar
               
               schooles
               ;
               but
               to
               attaine
               to
               the
               perfection
               of
               the
               Latine
               tongue
               ,
               for
               propriety
               ,
               choise
               ,
               elegancy
               ,
               puritie
               ,
               will
               require
               much
               and
               long
               reading
               ,
               and
               exercise
               in
               the
               Vniuersities
               .
            
             
               
               For
               further
               direction
               thereunto
               ,
               I
               refer
               you
               to
               Gocleninius
               his
               obseruations
               of
               the
               Latine
               tongue
               :
               
               whom
               I
               take
               to
               be
               worthy
               the
               diligent
               reading
               of
               all
               schollars
               who
               are
               of
               iudgement
               ,
               and
               who
               doe
               desire
               to
               come
               to
               the
               puritie
               and
               ripenesse
               of
               the
               Latine
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             XX.
             
          
           
             How
             to
             attaine
             most
             speedily
             vnto
             the
             knowledge
             of
             the
             Greeke
             tongue
             .
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               NOw
               that
               we
               haue
               gone
               thorough
               all
               the
               principall
               points
               of
               learning
               ,
               which
               belong
               to
               the
               knowledge
               of
               the
               Latine
               tongue
               ▪
               so
               much
               as
               can
               be
               required
               in
               schooles
               ,
               as
               far
               forth
               as
               I
               can
               conceiue
               or
               remember
               for
               the
               present
               ;
               let
               me
               (
               I
               intreat
               you
               )
               require
               your
               like
               helpe
               for
               the
               Greek
               :
               for
               I
               desire
               now
               ,
               to
               be
               directed
               in
               euery
               matter
               ,
               which
               may
               concerne
               our
               calling
               and
               facultie
               .
               I
               doe
               perceiue
               by
               our
               former
               speeches
               ,
               that
               you
               likewise
               haue
               trauelled
               and
               found
               much
               experience
               and
               assurance
               herein
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               Although
               I
               am
               onely
               a
               learner
               in
               the
               Greeke
               ,
               
               as
               in
               the
               Latine
               ,
               and
               my
               hope
               is
               chiefly
               for
               the
               time
               to
               come
               :
               yet
               this
               I
               haue
               found
               by
               experience
               ,
               that
               the
               Latine
               once
               obtained
               ,
               the
               Greeke
               may
               bee
               gotten
               with
               farre
               lesse
               labour
               ,
               and
               euerything
               as
               certainly
               ,
               And
               this
               also
               in
               a
               little
               time
               ,
               so
               much
               as
               it
               shall
               bee
               requisite
               for
               the
               Grammar
               schooles
               .
            
          
           
             
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               Surely
               sir
               ,
               
               if
               but
               that
               one
               thing
               that
               I
               saw
               in
               the
               note
               ,
               may
               be
               attained
               ,
               concerning
               the
               tongues
               ,
               the
               Greek
               and
               Hebrew
               ,
               I
               doe
               not
               see
               what
               can
               be
               more
               required
               for
               the
               Grammarschooles
               :
               That
               is
               ;
               That
               schollars
               may
               be
               able
               as
               they
               proceed
               ,
               to
               reade
               the
               Greeke
               of
               the
               New
               Testament
               and
               the
               Hebrew
               of
               the
               olde
               ,
               first
               into
               Latine
               ,
               or
               English
               exactly
               ,
               out
               of
               the
               bare
               text
               ;
               and
               after
               ,
               out
               of
               a
               translation
               to
               reade
               them
               into
               the
               text
               ,
               that
               is
               ,
               into
               their
               owne
               wordes
               againe
               :
               and
               also
               to
               giue
               the
               reason
               of
               euery
               word
               ,
               why
               it
               must
               be
               so
               ,
               and
               to
               be
               able
               to
               proceed
               thus
               of
               themselues
               in
               the
               Vniuersitie
               .
            
             
               The
               continual
               practice
               hereof
               ,
               must
               needs
               make
               them
               worthy
               Linguists
               ,
               as
               was
               there
               sayd
               ,
               and
               notable
               text
               men
               .
               I
               pra●
               you
               therfore
               let
               me
               heare
               of
               you
               ,
               how
               this
               may
               bee
               effected
               ,
               and
               I
               shall
               thinke
               my selfe
               sufficiently
               satisfied
               for
               all
               my
               trauell
               ,
               though
               it
               were
               but
               in
               this
               one
               thing
               alone
               besides
               all
               the
               former
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               Nay
               rather
               ,
               
               let
               vs
               goe
               thorough
               the
               whole
               course
               still
               ,
               so
               farre
               as
               wee
               can
               ,
               how
               the
               exact
               knowledge
               of
               this
               famous
               tongue
               may
               bee
               gotten
               most
               speedily
               .
               For
               when
               I
               do
               remember
               the
               worthy
               testimony
               ,
               which
               our
               learnedest
               Schoolemaster
               doth
               giue
               ,
               
               concerning
               this
               Greek
               tongue
               ,
               I
               cannot
               thinke
               any
               paines
               ouer-much
               ,
               for
               the
               finding
               out
               the
               readie
               waie
               to
               the
               perfect
               knowledge
               of
               it
               .
               Hee
               in
               one
               place
               hauing
               mentioned
               sundrie
               of
               the
               renowned
               Greeke
               Authors
               ,
               as
               
                 Plato
                 ,
                 Aristotle
                 ,
                 Zenophon
                 ,
                 Demosthenes
                 ,
                 Isocrates
              
               and
               others
               ,
               whom
               he
               names
               there
               (
               the
               matchlesse
               masters
               in
               all
               manner
               of
               learning
               )
               addes
               these
               words
               in
               praise
               of
               the
               Greeke
               tongue
               ,
               and
               the
               learning
               in
               it
               .
            
             
               Now
               let
               Italian
               ,
               sayth
               hee
               ,
               and
               Latine
               it selfe
               ,
               Spanish
               ,
               French
               ,
               Dutch
               ,
               and
               English
               bring
               forth
               their
               learning
               ,
               and
               recite
               their
               Authors
               ,
               Cicero
               onely
               excepted
               ,
               and
               one
               or
               two
               more
               in
               Latine
               ;
               they
               be
               all
               patched
               clouts
               and
               ragges
               in
               comparison
               of
               faire
               wouen
               broad
               cloathes
               .
               And
               truely
               ,
               saith
               he
               ,
               if
               there
               bee
               any
               good
               in
               them
               ,
               it
               is
               either
               learned
               ,
               borrowed
               ,
               or
               stolne
               from
               som
               one
               of
               those
               worthy
               wits
               of
               Athens
               .
               Thus
               far
               M.
               Askam
               .
            
          
           
             
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               This
               is
               a
               high
               commendation
               indeed
               ,
               to
               bee
               giuen
               by
               a
               man
               of
               such
               reading
               and
               estimation
               for
               learning
               ,
               as
               M.
               Askam
               was
               ;
               and
               which
               must
               needs
               incite
               all
               students
               to
               the
               reading
               of
               the
               principall
               Greeke
               Authors
               ,
               to
               desire
               to
               heare
               these
               peerlesse
               Masters
               to
               speake
               in
               their
               ovvne
               tongue
               .
            
             
               Wherefore
               ,
               I
               pray
               you
               let
               vs
               heare
               from
               you
               ,
               how
               you
               thinke
               that
               the
               way
               may
               bee
               made
               so
               ready
               vnto
               it
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               The
               way
               may
               be
               most
               short
               and
               easie
               to
               him
               ,
               
               who
               is
               acquainted
               with
               the
               maner
               of
               getting
               the
               Latine
               tongue
               ,
               so
               as
               hath
               been
               mentioned
               ;
               because
               it
               is
               the
               very
               same
               with
               it
               in
               effect
               .
            
             
               1.
               
               If
               your
               schollars
               who
               are
               to
               enter
               into
               it
               ,
               
               be
               such
               as
               haue
               time
               enough
               before
               them
               ;
               let
               them
               get
               the
               Grammar
               very
               perfectly
               ,
               
               especially
               all
               the
               chiefe
               rules
               ,
               by
               continuall
               saying
               and
               poasing
               ,
               as
               in
               the
               Latine
               .
               Most
               exceptions
               or
               Anomalies
               may
               bee
               learned
               after
               ,
               or
               turned
               vnto
               presently
               ,
               as
               they
               learne
               their
               Authors
               .
               Because
               Rectum
               is
               
                 Index
                 sui
                 ,
                 &
                 obliqui
              
               .
               And
               knowing
               the
               rule
               perfectly
               ,
               they
               will
               soone
               know
               the
               reason
               of
               the
               change
               .
            
             
               More
               specially
               ,
               
               make
               them
               very
               perfect
               in
               declining
               Nouns
               &
               Verbs
               ,
               and
               giuing
               all
               the
               Terminations
               of
               them
               :
               I
               meane
               the
               seuerall
               Terminations
               of
               each
               declension
               ,
               
               and
               euery
               case
               in
               them
               ;
               
               and
               so
               likewise
               the
               Terminanations
               of
               euery
               Coniugation
               ,
               and
               each
               Tense
               therein
               .
            
             
               In
               the
               Coniugations
               ,
               
               to
               giue
               the
               first
               person
               of
               euery
               Mood
               and
               Tense
               ,
               in
               each
               voice
               together
               (
               wherby
               they
               are
               the
               soonest
               learned
               ,
               
               one
               directing
               another
               )
               and
               also
               to
               bee
               able
               to
               runne
               the
               Terminations
               as
               in
               the
               Latine
               .
            
             
               For
               example
               ,
               in
               the
               first
               Declension
               .
               The
               terminations
               of
               the
               Declension
               are
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               and
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               .
               Terminations
               of
               the
               cases
               are
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               ,
               &c.
               
            
             
               So
               declining
               the
               example
               .
            
             
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               .
            
             
               So
               in
               the
               rest
               :
               The
               Terminations
               gotten
               first
               perfectly
               ,
               the
               words
               are
               declined
               presently
               ,
               as
               I
               sayd
               .
            
             
               In
               the
               Verbs
               also
               ,
               besides
               the
               Terminations
               ,
               to
               vse
               to
               giue
               
               the
               first
               Persons
               together
               in
               euery
               voice
               .
               Onely
               let
               them
               be
               perfect
               in
               the
               Actiue
               voice
               ,
               giuing
               all
               the
               first
               persons
               in
               order
               ;
               then
               the
               Passiue
               and
               middle
               voice
               by
               comparing
               them
               to
               the
               Actiue
               :
               As
               
                 Indicat●vus
                 presens
                 ,
                 
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                
                 verbero
                 ,
                 
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                
                 .
                 Imperfectum
                 ,
                 
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                
                 verberabam
                 ,
                 
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                
                 .
                 Futurum
                 pr●us
                 ,
                 
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                
                 verber●bo
                 
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                
                 .
              
            
             
               So
               the
               Terminations
               of
               them
               ,
               if
               you
               will
               :
               As
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               ,
               &c.
               
            
             
               To
               this
               end
               ,
               make
               them
               very
               perfect
               in
               the
               tables
               of
               the
               
                 cognata
                 tempora
              
               .
               And
               also
               ,
               cause
               them
               to
               run
               the
               Terminations
               in
               each
               voice
               thus
               ;
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               .
            
             
               You
               shall
               finde
               they
               will
               be
               learned
               not
               onely
               very
               soon
               and
               surely
               this
               way
               ,
               but
               also
               most
               profitably
               for
               vse
               .
            
             
               After
               these
               to
               bee
               perfect
               in
               Pronowns
               ,
               
               Aduerbs
               ,
               Coniunctions
               ,
               and
               Prepositions
               ;
               giuing
               (
               if
               you
               will
               )
               Latine
               to
               Greeke
               ,
               and
               Greeke
               to
               Latine
               ,
               as
               I
               shewed
               before
               in
               the
               Latine
               .
               Because
               then
               all
               the
               labour
               is
               with
               the
               Nowns
               and
               Verbes
               onely
               .
            
             
               If
               your
               schollars
               who
               begin
               Greeke
               ,
               
               be
               of
               good
               yeeres
               and
               iudgement
               ;
               it
               may
               suffice
               to
               haue
               them
               perfect
               in
               the
               examples
               of
               the
               Nownes
               and
               Verbes
               ,
               and
               some
               fewe
               principall
               rules
               ,
               in
               such
               sort
               as
               I
               haue
               shewed
               :
               and
               to
               be
               well
               acquainted
               with
               the
               order
               of
               the
               Grammar
               ,
               by
               shewing
               how
               and
               where
               euery
               part
               of
               it
               stands
               ;
               that
               so
               they
               may
               learne
               the
               Rules
               or
               the
               meaning
               of
               them
               ,
               by
               turning
               to
               them
               ;
               as
               they
               shall
               haue
               occasion
               in
               euery
               lect●re
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               But
               what
               Grammar
               woulde
               you
               haue
               them
               to
               vse
               ?
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               Master
               Camdens
               Grammar
               ,
               
               notwithstanding
               the
               faults
               in
               the
               print
               (
               as
               indeede
               there
               are
               very
               many
               ;
               which
               thing
               would
               bee
               carefully
               amended
               in
               all
               our
               schoole
               Authors
               )
               and
               what
               other
               exceptions
               can
               be
               taken
               :
               because
               ,
               as
               it
               is
               one
               of
               the
               shortest
               as
               yet
               ,
               so
               it
               is
               most
               answerable
               to
               our
               Latine
               Grammar
               ,
               for
               the
               order
               of
               it
               .
               Wherby
               schollars
               well
               acquainted
               with
               our
               common
               Grammar
               ,
               wil
               be
               much
               
               helped
               both
               for
               speedy
               vnderstanding
               and
               learning
               it
               .
               Also
               the
               words
               of
               art
               set
               downe
               in
               it
               in
               Greeke
               ,
               as
               well
               as
               Latine
               ,
               will
               bee
               a
               great
               helpe
               for
               reading
               Commentaries
               in
               Greeke
               :
               as
               vpon
               Hesiode
               ,
               and
               Homer
               .
            
             
               To
               the
               end
               to
               make
               that
               Grammar
               most
               plaine
               ,
               
               and
               to
               supply
               and
               helpe
               whatsoeuer
               is
               defectiue
               ;
               I
               take
               it
               ,
               that
               the
               Strasburge
               Greeke
               Grammar
               ,
               set
               sorth
               lately
               by
               Golius
               (
               which
               seemes
               to
               me
               to
               haue
               been
               made
               in
               an
               imitation
               of
               Camden
               )
               may
               be
               as
               a
               good
               Commentarie
               ,
               though
               the
               order
               be
               not
               euer
               directly
               kept
               :
               The
               first
               part
               of
               it
               seruing
               for
               a
               briefe
               sum
               of
               the
               Etymologie
               ,
               the
               second
               for
               an
               exposition
               at
               large
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               But
               with
               what
               Author
               would
               you
               begin
               ,
               to
               enter
               them
               into
               Construction
               ?
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               I
               hold
               the
               Greeke
               Testament
               to
               bee
               most
               fit
               ;
               
               and
               that
               for
               these
               reasons
               :
               
            
             
               1.
               
               Because
               ,
               
               that
               thorough
               the
               familiarnesse
               of
               the
               matter
               ,
               (
               in
               that
               children
               are
               so
               well
               acquainted
               with
               it
               ,
               by
               daily
               hearing
               or
               reading
               of
               it
               )
               the
               Greek
               thereof
               which
               is
               easie
               of
               itselfe
               ,
               will
               be
               made
               yet
               far
               more
               easie
               to
               the
               learner
               ;
               for
               that
               the
               matter
               will
               bring
               the
               words
               ,
               as
               I
               haue
               oft
               sayd
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               Because
               all
               schollars
               who
               can
               haue
               meanes
               to
               come
               to
               any
               knowledge
               of
               the
               Greeke
               ,
               
               should
               indeauour
               aboue
               all
               other
               Authors
               ,
               to
               be
               well
               acquainted
               with
               this
               .
               First
               ,
               for
               that
               this
               booke
               together
               with
               the
               Hebrew
               of
               the
               Old
               Testament
               were
               written
               by
               the
               Lord
               himselfe
               ;
               not
               onely
               the
               matter
               ,
               but
               also
               euen
               the
               very
               words
               of
               them
               .
            
             
               Secondly
               ,
               for
               that
               eternall
               life
               is
               onely
               in
               these
               bookes
               ,
               being
               truely
               vnderstood
               and
               beleeued
               .
               So
               that
               wee
               may
               rightly
               tearme
               these
               the
               Bible
               ,
               or
               Book
               of
               books
               ;
               because
               all
               other
               bookes
               are
               but
               as
               seruants
               vnto
               these
               ,
               and
               all
               other
               are
               nothing
               without
               these
               ,
               for
               any
               true
               good
               ,
               but
               only
               to
               condemnation
               by
               leauing
               men
               more
               without
               excuse
               .
               Yea
               ,
               
               euery
               one
               who
               can
               haue
               opportunitie
               ,
               should
               labour
               to
               see
               with
               his
               owne
               eyes
               ,
               for
               the
               fulnesse
               of
               his
               assurance
               ,
               rather
               then
               to
               rest
               on
               others
               .
               And
               much
               more
               because
               there
               are
               so
               many
               and
               such
               malicious
               sl●unders
               against
               all
               
               our
               translations
               ;
               as
               that
               those
               shamelesse
               calumniations
               haue
               beene
               a
               principall
               meanes
               to
               turne
               many
               thousand
               soules
               ,
               after
               Sathan
               and
               Antichrist
               ,
               by
               causing
               them
               to
               reiect
               the
               sacred
               Scriptures
               vtterly
               ,
               to
               their
               endless
               perdition
               ,
               and
               haue
               beene
               enough
               to
               shake
               the
               faith
               of
               Gods
               Elect.
               Vnder
               this
               very
               pretence
               of
               false
               translations
               ,
               
               and
               obscuritie
               of
               the
               Scriptures
               ,
               hath
               Antichrist
               principally
               holden
               vp
               his
               kingdome
               ;
               keeping
               all
               in
               palpable
               ignorance
               to
               be
               drawen
               to
               dumb
               Idols
               ,
               to
               murther
               Princes
               ,
               to
               lying
               and
               all
               abhominations
               which
               himselfe
               listeth
               .
            
             
               And
               therefore
               in
               these
               respects
               it
               were
               to
               bee
               wished
               ,
               that
               all
               schollars
               who
               haue
               any
               leasure
               ,
               and
               may
               come
               to
               these
               studies
               of
               Greeke
               and
               Hebrew
               (
               especially
               they
               who
               purpose
               in
               time
               to
               become
               teachers
               of
               others
               )
               would
               doe
               
               their
               indeauours
               to
               be
               as
               perfect
               in
               these
               two
               bookes
               ,
               
               and
               to
               haue
               them
               as
               familiarly
               as
               euer
               the
               auncient
               Iewes
               had
               the
               Hebrew
               .
               This
               cunning
               in
               the
               Text
               should
               make
               them
               to
               speake
               as
               the
               words
               of
               God
               indeed
               ,
               with
               facility
               ,
               authority
               ,
               and
               power
               .
            
             
               Those
               also
               ,
               
               who
               haue
               but
               a
               little
               time
               to
               bestow
               in
               the
               Greeke
               ,
               
               would
               bestow
               it
               here
               ,
               for
               the
               former
               reasons
               ;
               and
               because
               they
               may
               haue
               good
               occasion
               &
               helpe
               to
               increase
               in
               this
               continually
               ,
               by
               the
               daily
               vse
               which
               they
               haue
               of
               the
               scriptures
               :
               wheras
               they
               ,
               hauing
               but
               a
               smattring
               insom
               other
               Greek
               Authors
               ,
               and
               contenting
               themselues
               therewith
               ,
               doe
               come
               in
               a
               short
               time
               vtterly
               to
               forget
               all
               ;
               and
               so
               all
               that
               labour
               which
               was
               taken
               therin
               ,
               is
               altogether
               lost
               .
            
             
               If
               any
               doe
               preferre
               some
               other
               Greek
               Author
               ,
               
               for
               the
               sweetnesse
               and
               purity
               of
               the
               Greek
               ,
               
               and
               so
               will
               spend
               their
               little
               time
               ●o
               that
               ;
               Luke
               is
               inferior
               to
               none
               therein
               ,
               by
               the
               iudgement
               of
               the
               learned
               .
               If
               they
               look
               to
               the
               excellencie
               of
               all
               wisdom
               ,
               what
               light
               is
               there
               to
               the
               light
               of
               the
               Sunne
               ?
               Also
               ,
               for
               them
               who
               haue
               a
               desire
               to
               trauel
               further
               ,
               
               amongst
               all
               the
               famous
               Greeke
               writers
               ,
               for
               the
               surpassing
               humane
               wisedome
               to
               bee
               found
               therein
               ;
               this
               booke
               once
               perfectly
               knowen
               ,
               will
               make
               the
               passage
               thorough
               all
               of
               them
               both
               very
               direct
               and
               plain
               ,
               and
               also
               full
               of
               all
               delight
               and
               contentment
               ,
               
               &
               to
               read
               al
               other
               Authors
               without
               any
               danger
               .
            
             
               In
               the
               Greeke
               Testament
               ,
               
               to
               begin
               at
               the
               Gospell
               of
               Iohn
               as
               being
               most
               easie
               ;
               
               and
               next
               vnto
               that
               to
               go
               through
               the
               Gospell
               of
               Luke
               ,
               if
               you
               please
               .
               In
               which
               two
               Euangelists
               most
               of
               the
               history
               of
               the
               Gospell
               is
               contained
               :
               that
               by
               them
               the
               Euangelists
               may
               be
               soone
               run
               thorough
               ;
               And
               also
               the
               Acts
               :
               Then
               all
               the
               Epistles
               may
               be
               read
               with
               speed
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               I
               cannot
               but
               allowe
               and
               like
               of
               all
               these
               things
               ;
               and
               principally
               of
               reading
               the
               Greeke
               Testament
               in
               the
               first
               place
               ,
               making
               it
               the
               entrance
               ,
               and
               another
               foundation
               to
               all
               the
               Greek
               studies
               .
               But
               if
               that
               could
               be
               brought
               to
               passe
               ,
               
               that
               schollars
               ,
               as
               they
               proceeded
               herein
               ,
               might
               growe
               as
               perfect
               in
               the
               Greeke
               Testament
               ,
               as
               it
               is
               sayde
               of
               the
               learned
               Iewes
               ,
               that
               they
               were
               in
               the
               bookes
               of
               the
               Olde
               Testament
               ;
               what
               a
               blessing
               might
               it
               bee
               to
               the
               Church
               of
               God
               ,
               and
               what
               a
               happinesse
               to
               all
               posterity
               ?
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               Surely
               ,
               I
               am
               fully
               perswaded
               of
               it
               ,
               that
               very
               much
               may
               be
               done
               in
               it
               ;
               and
               after
               also
               ,
               in
               the
               Hebrew
               of
               the
               Old
               ,
               to
               come
               neere
               vnto
               them
               :
               except
               that
               ,
               that
               was
               their
               natiue
               language
               .
               This
               perswasion
               I
               ground
               ,
               partly
               from
               that
               little
               experience
               which
               I
               haue
               had
               in
               mine
               owne
               triall
               ;
               yet
               sufficient
               to
               confirme
               me
               by
               proportion
               .
               More
               specially
               ,
               by
               that
               which
               is
               well
               knowen
               in
               a
               worthy
               schoole
               in
               London
               ,
               (
               to
               which
               I
               acknowledge
               my selfe
               much
               beholden
               for
               that
               which
               I
               haue
               seene
               in
               this
               behalfe
               ,
               and
               some
               other
               )
               where
               som
               of
               the
               schollars
               haue
               bin
               able
               in
               very
               good
               sort
               to
               c●strue
               and
               resolue
               the
               Greek
               Testam
               .
               out
               of
               the
               Latine
               into
               Greek
               ,
               wheresoeuer
               you
               would
               set
               them
               ,
               and
               to
               go
               verie
               neer
               to
               tell
               you
               ,
               where
               they
               had
               read
               any
               speciall
               word
               or
               phrase
               in
               it
               ,
               to
               turn
               to
               them
               .
               And
               lastly
               ,
               for
               the
               euident
               reasons
               therof
               ,
               and
               the
               agreement
               of
               it
               with
               som
               former
               courses
               in
               the
               Latine
               ,
               wherof
               I
               haue
               a
               full
               assurance
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               I
               pray
               you
               shew
               me
               the
               meanes
               how
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               The
               means
               are
               these
               ,
               
               most
               easie
               &
               plain
               ,
               for
               euery
               one
               to
               teach
               who
               hath
               any
               Greek
               ,
               
               and
               for
               others
               to
               learne
               :
            
             
               1.
               
               That
               they
               haue
               so
               much
               knowledge
               in
               the
               Grammar
               ,
               as
               I
               shewed
               chiefly
               in
               Nowns
               and
               Verbes
               .
            
             
             
               2
               Besides
               the
               Greeke
               Testament
               ,
               I
               would
               haue
               euery
               one
               to
               haue
               his
               English
               Testament
               ,
               or
               Latine
               ,
               or
               both
               ;
               and
               euer
               in
               their
               entrance
               before
               they
               learne
               a
               lesson
               ,
               to
               haue
               read
               it
               ouer
               in
               the
               translation
               ,
               and
               to
               bee
               able
               eyther
               to
               say
               it
               without
               booke
               ,
               or
               make
               a
               report
               of
               it
               in
               English
               or
               Latine
               :
               but
               better
               to
               say
               it
               without
               booke
               ,
               euen
               in
               the
               English
               ;
               which
               with
               a
               little
               reading
               ouer
               ,
               especially
               before
               bedde
               time
               ,
               those
               who
               are
               of
               good
               memories
               will
               get
               quickely
               .
               This
               same
               done
               with
               vnderstanding
               ,
               will
               exceedingly
               bring
               the
               Greeke
               with
               it
               :
               besides
               ,
               that
               thus
               they
               shall
               haue
               much
               opportunity
               and
               furtherance
               ,
               to
               get
               the
               English
               text
               almost
               by
               heart
               ,
               as
               we
               tearme
               it
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               In
               reading
               a
               Lecture
               to
               them
               ,
               euer
               tell
               them
               what
               example
               each
               Noune
               and
               Verbe
               is
               like
               vnto
               ,
               and
               for
               Pronounes
               ,
               Aduerbes
               ,
               and
               the
               like
               :
               if
               they
               bee
               not
               perfect
               in
               Grammar
               ,
               tell
               them
               in
               a
               word
               ,
               or
               point
               them
               where
               they
               are
               in
               the
               Grammar
               ;
               iust
               after
               the
               manner
               as
               in
               the
               Latine
               .
            
             
               4
               Shew
               them
               carefully
               al
               the
               hard
               words
               ,
               &
               those
               which
               they
               haue
               not
               learned
               ;
               and
               for
               those
               which
               you
               thinke
               they
               cannot
               remember
               otherwise
               ,
               or
               wherin
               there
               is
               need
               of
               speciall
               labour
               ,
               cause
               euery
               one
               to
               write
               them
               in
               a
               little
               paper
               book
               ,
               made
               for
               that
               purpose
               ,
               with
               sundry
               columnes
               in
               each
               page
               ,
               to
               write
               at
               least
               the
               Greek
               word
               &
               Latin
               or
               English
               in
               ,
               in
               each
               Chap.
               &
               the
               Verse
               against
               them
               :
               to
               the
               end
               to
               take
               most
               paines
               in
               those
               ,
               &
               to
               run
               oft
               ouer
               them
               :
               and
               so
               euer
               to
               see
               after
               where
               they
               haue
               had
               those
               wordes
               before
               .
               And
               thereby
               also
               to
               account
               how
               many
               new
               wordes
               they
               haue
               in
               euery
               Lecture
               :
               for
               all
               the
               rest
               learned
               before
               in
               any
               place
               or
               which
               are
               very
               easie
               ,
               are
               not
               to
               be
               accounted
               for
               any
               new
               wordes
               .
            
             
               Thus
               shall
               you
               prouoke
               and
               encourage
               them
               to
               more
               paines
               ▪
               when
               they
               haue
               not
               ouer
               fiue
               or
               sixe
               new
               words
               in
               a
               douzen
               or
               twenty
               Verses
               ,
               and
               in
               time
               happely
               not
               two
               in
               a
               Chapter
               .
               So
               that
               they
               will
               haue
               the
               most
               of
               the
               hard
               words
               in
               a
               short
               time
               ,
               and
               be
               able
               easily
               to
               proceed
               of
               themselues
               ,
               without
               any
               reading
               ,
               throgh
               these
               &
               other
               helps
               following
               .
               
               5
               When
               they
               learne
               to
               construe
               ,
               let
               them
               doe
               it
               by
               the
               helpe
               of
               the
               translation
               ;
               obseruing
               wherein
               the
               translation
               seemes
               to
               differ
               from
               the
               wordes
               of
               the
               Greeke
               ,
               and
               marking
               the
               reason
               thereof
               ;
               and
               after
               to
               trie
               of
               themselues
               how
               they
               can
               construe
               ,
               looking
               onely
               vpon
               the
               translation
               ,
               beating
               the
               Greeke
               out
               of
               it
               ,
               as
               formerly
               they
               did
               the
               Latin.
               Those
               who
               are
               of
               any
               aptnesse
               ,
               will
               doe
               it
               presently
               .
            
             
               And
               thus
               by
               practice
               ,
               euery
               day
               going
               a
               piece
               ,
               and
               oft
               reading
               ouer
               and
               ouer
               ,
               they
               will
               grow
               very
               much
               ,
               to
               your
               great
               joy
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               But
               giue
               me
               leaue
               to
               aske
               of
               you
               two
               or
               three
               doubts
               .
            
             
               1
               Why
               you
               would
               haue
               them
               to
               write
               down
               their
               hard
               wordes
               in
               a
               booke
               :
               
               will
               not
               making
               some
               markes
               at
               the
               wordes
               serue
               as
               in
               their
               Latine
               Authours
               ,
               according
               to
               the
               generall
               obseruation
               ?
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               This
               was
               obserued
               before
               ,
               as
               I
               remember
               to
               mark
               their
               hard
               wordes
               eyther
               in
               their
               bookes
               ,
               or
               setting
               them
               downe
               in
               a
               paper
               .
               But
               here
               I
               thinke
               it
               to
               be
               better
               ,
               thus
               to
               write
               downe
               the
               principall
               ;
               First
               ,
               because
               schollars
               now
               will
               be
               carefull
               to
               keepe
               their
               Greeke
               Testaments
               faire
               from
               blotting
               or
               scrauling
               ,
               although
               a
               booke
               were
               well
               bestowed
               to
               make
               them
               perfect
               in
               it
               ,
               though
               it
               were
               neuer
               so
               marked
               .
               Secondly
               ,
               be●●use
               when
               they
               are
               fit
               to
               reade
               Greeke
               ,
               they
               haue
               commonly
               good
               discretion
               to
               keepe
               their
               notes
               ,
               and
               to
               make
               vse
               of
               them
               ;
               going
               oft
               ouer
               them
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               But
               might
               there
               not
               be
               some
               other
               meanes
               for
               the
               getting
               of
               the
               hard
               wordes
               aforehand
               ?
               for
               this
               must
               needes
               be
               some
               labour
               ,
               and
               aske
               care
               and
               diligence
               thus
               to
               write
               them
               down
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               Yes
               verily
               ,
               if
               it
               be
               looked
               to
               in
               time
               ;
               all
               these
               may
               be
               so
               prepared
               aforehand
               ,
               that
               most
               of
               this
               labour
               now
               may
               be
               spared
               ,
               and
               onely
               speciall
               difficulties
               to
               be
               obserued
               .
            
             
               The
               maner
               of
               it
               is
               thus
               :
               That
               wheras
               there
               is
               nothing
               in
               getting
               any
               tongue
               ,
               but
               to
               get
               wordes
               ,
               
               and
               Grammar
               for
               framing
               and
               setting
               those
               wordes
               together
               ,
               and
               afterwards
               
               practice
               ;
               I
               hold
               it
               to
               be
               farre
               the
               speediest
               course
               ,
               
               to
               haue
               the
               schollars
               to
               haue
               learned
               the
               Greeke
               Radices
               or
               Primitiue
               words
               ,
               before
               that
               they
               goe
               to
               construction
               ;
               or
               at
               least
               to
               be
               well
               acquainted
               with
               them
               .
            
             
               This
               course
               some
               famous
               Grecians
               haue
               taken
               :
               
               wee
               may
               doe
               it
               most
               easily
               ,
               and
               without
               any
               losse
               of
               time
               ,
               or
               very
               little
               ,
               if
               any
               ;
               as
               I
               haue
               made
               triall
               :
               First
               ,
               hauing
               gathered
               the
               Greeke
               Radices
               out
               of
               Scapula
               ,
               after
               the
               manner
               of
               that
               abbridgement
               ,
               called
               
                 voces
                 primogeniae
              
               ,
               I
               haue
               heretofore
               caused
               such
               as
               I
               haue
               thought
               fit
               ,
               to
               write
               it
               out
               ,
               and
               to
               bring
               me
               a
               side
               (
               or
               so
               much
               as
               I
               thought
               good
               )
               euery
               morning
               at
               my
               entrance
               into
               the
               Schoole
               ,
               or
               presently
               after
               ;
               and
               so
               haue
               vsed
               to
               examine
               those
               wordes
               amongst
               them
               all
               ,
               once
               or
               twice
               ouer
               ,
               and
               where
               they
               haue
               learned
               the
               principall
               Latine
               wordes
               .
               (
               Of
               late
               I
               haue
               seene
               the
               Greeke
               Nomenclaton
               vsed
               ,
               not
               without
               fruit
               ;
               though
               it
               be
               vnperfectly
               gathered
               .
               )
            
             
               The
               manner
               of
               getting
               the
               wordes
               may
               bee
               most
               easie
               ,
               thus
               :
               
            
             
               Hauing
               these
               in
               this
               manner
               with
               the
               English
               adioyned
               :
               if
               you
               would
               make
               triall
               herein
               ;
               when
               you
               haue
               examined
               a
               side
               ,
               reade
               them
               ouer
               as
               much
               more
               against
               the
               next
               day
               ;
               reading
               first
               the
               English
               word
               ,
               then
               the
               Latine
               ,
               and
               Greeke
               last
               :
               shewing
               them
               some
               helpe
               how
               to
               remember
               ,
               by
               comparing
               the
               Greeke
               with
               the
               Latine
               ,
               or
               English
               ;
               and
               so
               the
               English
               will
               bring
               the
               Latine
               to
               remembrance
               ,
               and
               both
               of
               them
               the
               Greeke
               .
            
             
               And
               in
               examining
               them
               ,
               
               to
               aske
               them
               the
               English
               word
               ;
               and
               to
               cause
               them
               to
               giue
               both
               Latine
               and
               Greeke
               together
               ,
               both
               backeward
               and
               forward
               againe
               .
            
             
               As
               ,
               posing
               thus
               :
               How
               say
               you
               ,
               I
               loue
               ?
               He
               answereth
               ,
               
                 Amo
                 ,
                 
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                
                 ,
                 amo
              
               ,
               I
               loue
               :
               so
               they
               will
               be
               perfect
               each
               way
               .
               Thus
               within
               the
               space
               of
               a
               twelue
               moneth
               they
               may
               goe
               through
               the
               whole
               ;
               spending
               not
               much
               aboue
               a
               quarter
               of
               an
               houre
               in
               a
               day
               or
               half
               an
               houre
               at
               most
               of
               schoole
               time
               .
               Those
               who
               are
               diligent
               may
               get
               them
               in
               good
               sort
               ,
               onely
               (
               as
               I
               haue
               oft
               admonished
               )
               making
               some
               little
               pricks
               
               or
               markes
               at
               the
               hardest
               to
               runne
               oft
               ouer
               them
               :
               and
               when
               they
               haue
               once
               gone
               ouer
               them
               ,
               you
               may
               cause
               them
               to
               bring
               you
               a
               leafe
               at
               a
               time
               ,
               or
               more
               ;
               as
               those
               who
               are
               apt
               will
               doe
               readily
               .
            
             
               By
               this
               meanes
               ,
               besides
               that
               they
               shall
               learne
               very
               many
               Latine
               wordes
               ,
               
               chiefly
               most
               of
               the
               Primitiues
               to
               further
               them
               greatly
               in
               the
               Latine
               ,
               and
               to
               counteruaile
               all
               the
               time
               and
               labour
               bestowed
               in
               them
               :
               they
               may
               also
               ,
               when
               they
               come
               to
               construction
               ,
               eyther
               haue
               euery
               Radix
               in
               their
               head
               ,
               or
               turne
               to
               it
               with
               a
               wette
               finger
               ,
               and
               make
               it
               perfect
               in
               an
               instant
               ;
               and
               thereby
               haue
               such
               a
               light
               to
               all
               other
               wordes
               comming
               of
               these
               ,
               as
               presently
               by
               them
               ,
               to
               conceiue
               of
               and
               remember
               any
               word
               .
            
             
               And
               thus
               by
               them
               and
               their
               readinesse
               in
               the
               Grammar
               ,
               to
               goe
               on
               in
               reading
               by
               the
               helpes
               mentioned
               ,
               faster
               then
               you
               would
               imagine
               .
            
             
               For
               hauing
               these
               Radices
               perfect
               ,
               
               they
               will
               conceiue
               presently
               by
               a
               little
               obseruing
               ,
               of
               what
               roote
               euery
               word
               commeth
               ,
               and
               ghesse
               neere
               at
               the
               significations
               of
               them
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               But
               how
               shall
               I
               teach
               my
               fourmes
               which
               haue
               not
               learned
               the
               Greeke
               Grammar
               ,
               to
               reade
               these
               Radices
               ?
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               Nothing
               more
               easily
               :
               
               for
               I
               finde
               by
               experience
               that
               they
               will
               learne
               that
               presently
               ,
               
               by
               knowing
               but
               the
               value
               and
               power
               of
               the
               Greeke
               letters
               ;
               I
               meane
               what
               euery
               letter
               signifieth
               ,
               or
               soundeth
               in
               the
               Latine
               :
               and
               so
               calling
               them
               by
               their
               names
               ,
               as
               
                 A.
                 b.
                 g.
                 d.
              
               or
               giuing
               them
               their
               sounds
               .
               Although
               if
               you
               will
               ,
               the
               names
               of
               the
               Greeke
               characters
               are
               soone
               learned
               :
               but
               that
               former
               course
               ,
               with
               continuall
               reading
               ouer
               to
               them
               before
               hand
               ,
               so
               much
               as
               you
               would
               haue
               them
               to
               learne
               at
               once
               ,
               will
               sufficiently
               effect
               it
               ,
               vntill
               they
               learne
               the
               Grammar
               .
            
             
               In
               learning
               these
               Radices
               ,
               
               call
               vpon
               them
               oft
               to
               marke
               carefully
               the
               accents
               of
               each
               word
               ,
               with
               the
               spirits
               :
               for
               that
               will
               further
               them
               exceedingly
               to
               accent
               right
               ,
               when
               they
               
               come
               to
               write
               in
               Greeke
               ,
               by
               knowing
               but
               the
               accent
               of
               the
               Primitiue
               word
               ,
               and
               a
               few
               other
               rules
               .
               Right
               pronouncing
               of
               them
               ,
               will
               make
               both
               their
               accents
               and
               spirits
               remembred
               .
            
             
               By
               some
               experience
               of
               the
               fruite
               of
               this
               booke
               ,
               
               for
               the
               speedy
               getting
               of
               the
               Greeke
               ▪
               I
               haue
               endeauoured
               to
               make
               it
               more
               perfect
               ,
               by
               placing
               so
               neere
               as
               I
               can
               ,
            
             
               First
               ,
               the
               most
               proper
               significations
               in
               the
               first
               place
               ;
               and
               onely
               one
               worde
               in
               each
               signification
               ,
               lest
               the
               volume
               should
               proue
               ouer-great
               :
               though
               (
               if
               the
               volume
               would
               beare
               it
               )
               variety
               vnder
               euery
               one
               ,
               being
               rightly
               placed
               ,
               were
               the
               better
               ,
               to
               vse
               as
               neede
               required
               ;
               and
               therby
               also
               to
               help
               to
               furnish
               with
               copie
               of
               Synonimaes
               .
            
             
               Secondly
               ,
               by
               setting
               downe
               also
               the
               English
               in
               one
               proper
               word
               ,
               or
               iust
               as
               the
               Latine
               ;
               onely
               to
               expresse
               it
               ,
               and
               without
               variety
               :
               except
               in
               some
               speciall
               things
               which
               haue
               diuers
               names
               in
               our
               owne
               tongue
               ,
               not
               commonly
               knowne
               .
            
             
               Thirdly
               ,
               setting
               downe
               also
               the
               Articles
               in
               the
               Nounes
               ,
               at
               least
               in
               all
               which
               are
               hard
               to
               distinguish
               .
               The
               Future
               and
               Preterperfect
               tenses
               of
               the
               Verbes
               may
               be
               known
               by
               their
               figuratiue
               letters
               :
               Anomalyes
               are
               set
               down
               in
               the
               Grammar
               for
               most
               part
               .
            
             
               I
               also
               intend
               (
               God
               willing
               )
               to
               set
               in
               the
               Margent
               of
               it
               all
               the
               Hebrew
               Radices
               ,
               against
               euery
               Radix
               in
               Greeke
               ;
               at
               least
               so
               many
               as
               can
               be
               found
               :
               which
               I
               presume
               vpon
               good
               ground
               will
               be
               found
               a
               speedy
               introduction
               to
               the
               Hebrew
               .
            
             
               Thus
               young
               schollars
               ,
               and
               all
               others
               who
               are
               desirous
               to
               get
               the
               tongues
               ,
               may
               make
               a
               most
               easie
               entrance
               into
               them
               ,
               and
               goe
               forward
               with
               much
               pleasure
               in
               all
               together
               :
               for
               hauing
               these
               ,
               they
               shall
               lack
               nothing
               in
               effect
               ,
               but
               some
               precepts
               of
               Grammar
               ,
               with
               practice
               in
               reading
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               But
               I
               would
               thinke
               ,
               these
               Radices
               should
               be
               very
               hard
               to
               remember
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               Not
               so
               :
               for
               there
               is
               such
               an
               agreement
               and
               harmony
               ,
               
               betweene
               all
               the
               foure
               tongues
               ,
               
               or
               some
               of
               them
               in
               many
               wordes
               ,
               as
               will
               make
               the
               learners
               to
               take
               a
               delight
               in
               them
               ,
               and
               much
               quicken
               and
               confirme
               the
               memory
               of
               the
               weakest
               ;
               if
               it
               be
               but
               by
               the
               very
               sounding
               of
               one
               word
               like
               another
               .
            
             
               Those
               wordes
               which
               they
               cannot
               remember
               thus
               ,
               direct
               them
               to
               remember
               them
               by
               some
               other
               name
               or
               thing
               which
               we
               know
               well
               ;
               being
               of
               a
               like
               sound
               :
               which
               so
               soone
               as
               they
               but
               conceiue
               ,
               the
               Greeke
               or
               Hebrew
               wordes
               may
               come
               to
               their
               minde
               ,
               or
               the
               significations
               of
               them
               .
            
             
               Here
               must
               be
               remembred
               that
               Maxime
               in
               the
               Arte
               of
               Memory
               ,
               
               that
               the
               more
               we
               doe
               animate
               or
               giue
               life
               vnto
               the
               obiect
               ,
               or
               thing
               wherby
               we
               would
               remember
               ,
               the
               more
               presently
               will
               the
               word
               which
               we
               would
               remember
               come
               to
               our
               minde
               .
               But
               yet
               withall
               ,
               we
               must
               alwayes
               looke
               to
               that
               diuine
               Caueat
               ,
               that
               we
               neuer
               helpe
               the
               minde
               by
               any
               filthy
               obiect
               ,
               or
               whatsoeuer
               may
               any
               way
               corrupt
               it
               ,
               or
               offend
               the
               Lord
               :
               because
               we
               must
               neuer
               doe
               the
               least
               euill
               ,
               that
               we
               may
               obtaine
               the
               greatest
               good
               .
               If
               we
               get
               any
               thing
               so
               ,
               the
               more
               the
               worse
               ;
               for
               it
               cannot
               prosper
               ,
               but
               to
               bring
               a
               curse
               with
               it
               .
            
             
               But
               for
               this
               point
               of
               the
               agreement
               of
               the
               tongues
               ,
               it
               may
               be
               I
               shall
               haue
               more
               occasion
               yet
               after
               ,
               and
               how
               to
               remember
               the
               wordes
               .
            
             
               And
               thus
               much
               shortly
               for
               remembring
               the
               Radices
               .
            
             
               Yet
               besides
               these
               ,
               
               there
               might
               yet
               bee
               a
               shorter
               way
               for
               committing
               all
               the
               Radices
               to
               memory
               ,
               or
               exceedingly
               helping
               thereunto
               ;
            
             
               If
               all
               the
               principal
               of
               them
               were
               contriued
               into
               continued
               speeches
               ,
               &
               diuided
               into
               certaine
               Classes
               or
               chiefe
               heads
               ;
               and
               they
               translated
               verbatim
               into
               Latine
               or
               English
               ,
               or
               both
               :
               and
               the
               translation
               to
               be
               made
               in
               a
               booke
               separate
               ,
               or
               in
               seuerall
               pages
               ;
               as
               in
               the
               one
               page
               the
               Greeke
               ,
               in
               the
               other
               ouer
               against
               it
               the
               Latine
               or
               English
               ,
               line
               for
               line
               ,
               and
               so
               many
               words
               in
               a
               line
               :
               like
               as
               is
               the
               translation
               of
               Theogius
               ,
               and
               the
               other
               small
               Poets
               adioyned
               ,
               with
               Sylburgius
               annotations
               ;
               that
               so
               looking
               onely
               on
               the
               Greeke
               ,
               they
               
               might
               learne
               first
               to
               construe
               into
               Latin
               ,
               and
               after
               looking
               onely
               on
               the
               translation
               they
               might
               beate
               out
               the
               Greeke
               (
               as
               I
               shewed
               before
               in
               the
               vse
               of
               the
               translations
               )
               and
               onely
               vse
               the
               helpe
               of
               the
               Greeke
               text
               where
               they
               could
               not
               finde
               it
               out
               otherwise
               .
            
             
               By
               this
               meanes
               ,
               when
               they
               were
               able
               to
               reade
               these
               both
               wayes
               ,
               both
               the
               Greeke
               into
               the
               translation
               ,
               and
               the
               translation
               into
               the
               Greeke
               readily
               (
               as
               they
               might
               soone
               doe
               ,
               by
               oft
               reading
               ouer
               ,
               and
               by
               vnderstanding
               the
               matter
               of
               them
               well
               )
               it
               must
               needes
               make
               all
               other
               Greeke
               very
               easie
               ,
               being
               but
               the
               same
               wordes
               in
               effect
               .
            
             
               This
               work
               also
               is
               done
               in
               part
               :
               it
               perfected
               and
               adioyned
               as
               a
               praxis
               in
               the
               end
               of
               the
               Radices
               ,
               being
               so
               framed
               (
               as
               was
               shewed
               )
               the
               one
               might
               soone
               be
               learned
               by
               the
               helpe
               of
               the
               other
               .
            
             
               And
               finally
               for
               this
               matter
               of
               thus
               getting
               all
               the
               Radices
               ,
               
               or
               principall
               wordes
               in
               the
               tongues
               ,
               if
               all
               the
               hard
               Latine
               wordes
               ,
               and
               specially
               whereof
               they
               may
               haue
               vse
               in
               good
               Authours
               ,
               and
               which
               they
               haue
               not
               learned
               in
               their
               former
               Authours
               (
               as
               namely
               in
               Virgil
               ,
               or
               the
               rest
               vnder
               him
               ,
               or
               which
               were
               not
               to
               bee
               found
               in
               his
               Nomenclator
               )
               were
               set
               downe
               after
               all
               these
               Radices
               ,
               in
               a
               few
               leaues
               in
               the
               end
               ,
               the
               schollars
               should
               be
               with
               all
               furnished
               for
               ordinary
               Latine
               words
               .
            
             
               As
               for
               such
               wordes
               as
               are
               peculiar
               to
               some
               speciall
               artes
               ,
               as
               to
               Physicke
               or
               the
               like
               ,
               they
               are
               to
               bee
               studied
               and
               lear●ed
               onely
               of
               them
               who
               apply
               themselues
               to
               those
               artes
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               Well
               Sir
               ,
               to
               returne
               vnto
               the
               point
               again
               for
               making
               your
               schollars
               so
               perfect
               in
               the
               Testament
               ,
               by
               helpe
               of
               reading
               it
               out
               of
               the
               translation
               ;
               
               I
               would
               thinke
               that
               it
               must
               needes
               bee
               hard
               to
               learne
               to
               construe
               or
               reade
               it
               out
               of
               our
               translation
               ,
               to
               doe
               it
               with
               iudgement
               on
               sure
               grounds
               ;
               because
               ours
               so
               oft
               doe
               expresse
               the
               sense
               and
               force
               of
               the
               wordes
               ,
               for
               the
               better
               vnderstanding
               of
               the
               matter
               ,
               according
               to
               the
               phrase
               in
               our
               owne
               tongue
               ;
               
               and
               not
               the
               wordes
               particularly
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               Indeede
               it
               is
               oft-times
               the
               more
               hard
               and
               vncertaine
               :
               and
               therefore
               the
               Schollar
               must
               take
               the
               more
               paines
               to
               remember
               it
               .
            
             
               But
               to
               this
               purpose
               ,
               for
               the
               exact
               getting
               of
               the
               Greeke
               Testament
               ,
               
               if
               there
               were
               a
               perfect
               verball
               Translation
               ,
               
               according
               to
               the
               manner
               of
               the
               interlineall
               (
               that
               so
               out
               of
               that
               the
               schollar
               might
               daily
               practice
               to
               reade
               the
               Greeke
               )
               this
               must
               needes
               make
               him
               exceeding
               readie
               ,
               without
               danger
               of
               any
               missing
               ,
               eyther
               of
               the
               phrase
               ,
               or
               misplacing
               the
               wordes
               :
               or
               in
               steede
               of
               such
               a
               perfect
               verball
               Translation
               ,
               if
               you
               take
               the
               ordinary
               interlineall
               Translation
               ;
               and
               where
               it
               doth
               not
               sufficiently
               expresse
               the
               force
               of
               the
               Greeke
               wordes
               ,
               there
               setting
               downe
               the
               different
               wordes
               in
               the
               Margent
               ,
               as
               they
               are
               in
               the
               best
               Translations
               ,
               you
               shall
               finde
               it
               very
               profitable
               .
               Or
               if
               you
               will
               ,
               you
               may
               take
               Bezaes
               Translation
               ,
               and
               set
               the
               verball
               in
               the
               Margent
               ,
               where
               Beza
               differeth
               from
               it
               .
               The
               difficult
               Radices
               would
               be
               also
               be
               set
               in
               the
               Margent
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               It
               is
               very
               like
               that
               this
               would
               make
               them
               very
               perfect
               in
               the
               wordes
               of
               the
               text
               :
               but
               yet
               this
               verball
               translation
               would
               not
               serue
               for
               the
               manner
               of
               construction
               ,
               or
               the
               parsing
               of
               it
               ;
               like
               as
               the
               Grammaticall
               translations
               did
               in
               the
               Latine
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               By
               this
               time
               ,
               
               when
               they
               know
               the
               wordes
               ,
               and
               the
               meaning
               ,
               they
               will
               be
               able
               to
               cast
               them
               into
               the
               Grammaticall
               order
               of
               themselues
               ;
               and
               so
               all
               that
               labour
               is
               supplyed
               for
               construing
               and
               parsing
               :
               for
               euen
               as
               they
               cast
               and
               dispose
               the
               Latine
               into
               the
               naturall
               order
               ;
               so
               they
               may
               the
               Greeke
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               Then
               that
               must
               needes
               follow
               ▪
               which
               you
               affirme
               ;
               
               that
               by
               daily
               practice
               of
               reading
               the
               Greeke
               out
               of
               such
               a
               translation
               ,
               
               they
               may
               be
               exceeding
               perfect
               in
               the
               Testament
               ;
               and
               that
               after
               that
               they
               are
               a
               little
               entred
               they
               may
               goe
               on
               of
               themselues
               in
               it
               :
               and
               so
               likewise
               all
               others
               by
               the
               same
               reason
               ,
               who
               haue
               any
               smattering
               in
               the
               
               Greeke
               ,
               as
               all
               such
               Ministers
               who
               are
               desirous
               hereof
               ,
               may
               grow
               to
               great
               readinesse
               and
               perfection
               in
               it
               by
               themselues
               ,
               thorough
               such
               a
               Translation
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               It
               is
               most
               certaine
               :
               for
               there
               is
               the
               very
               same
               reason
               in
               it
               that
               is
               in
               the
               Latine
               ;
               and
               this
               I
               finde
               that
               a
               child
               of
               9.
               or
               10.
               yeere
               old
               ,
               being
               well
               entred
               ,
               shall
               be
               able
               only
               by
               the
               help
               of
               the
               translation
               ,
               to
               read
               of
               himselfe
               an
               easie
               Author
               ,
               as
               Corderius
               ,
               or
               Tullies
               sentences
               ,
               as
               fast
               out
               of
               Latine
               into
               the
               English
               ,
               or
               the
               English
               into
               the
               Latine
               ,
               as
               the
               Latine
               is
               ordinarily
               read
               alone
               ,
               after
               he
               hath
               read
               it
               ouer
               once
               or
               twice
               :
               to
               bee
               able
               to
               reade
               you
               thus
               ,
               in
               the
               space
               of
               an
               howre
               ,
               a
               side
               of
               a
               leafe
               or
               more
               ,
               of
               that
               which
               he
               neuer
               saw
               before
               :
               And
               by
               oft
               reading
               it
               ouer
               ,
               to
               haue
               it
               almost
               without
               booke
               ,
               if
               he
               vnderstand
               the
               matter
               of
               it
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               But
               if
               they
               should
               vse
               the
               very
               Interlineall
               of
               Arias
               Montanus
               ,
               
               as
               it
               is
               :
               I
               meane
               the
               Greeke
               and
               Latine
               together
               ;
               might
               they
               not
               as
               well
               learne
               by
               that
               ;
               as
               hauing
               them
               so
               seuerally
               ,
               the
               Greeke
               in
               one
               book
               the
               Latine
               in
               another
               ?
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               No
               in
               no
               wise
               .
               This
               will
               appeare
               most
               euidently
               to
               any
               who
               shall
               make
               triall
               ,
               how
               much
               sooner
               and
               more
               surely
               they
               will
               learne
               ,
               and
               keep
               that
               which
               they
               learne
               ,
               by
               this
               meanes
               of
               hauing
               the
               bookes
               separate
               .
            
             
               The
               reason
               also
               is
               euident
               ;
               because
               when
               the
               bookes
               are
               so
               seuered
               ,
               the
               mind
               it
               beates
               out
               the
               words
               ,
               and
               makes
               them
               it
               s
               owne
               :
               yea
               ,
               and
               also
               imprints
               them
               ;
               and
               doth
               vse
               the
               Translation
               but
               onely
               as
               a
               Schoolemaster
               ,
               or
               a
               Dictionary
               ,
               
               where
               it
               is
               not
               able
               to
               finde
               out
               the
               words
               of
               it selfe
               ;
               and
               also
               to
               try
               after
               ,
               that
               it
               haue
               gone
               surely
               .
               But
               when
               both
               are
               ioined
               together
               ,
               as
               in
               the
               Interlineall
               ,
               the
               eye
               is
               as
               soone
               vpon
               the
               one
               as
               the
               other
               :
               I
               meane
               ,
               as
               soone
               vpon
               the
               Latine
               as
               vpon
               the
               Greeke
               ;
               and
               so
               likewise
               vpon
               the
               Greek
               as
               vpon
               the
               Latine
               ,
               because
               they
               are
               so
               close
               ioined
               one
               vnto
               the
               other
               .
               So
               that
               the
               booke
               insteed
               of
               being
               a
               Master
               to
               helpe
               only
               where
               it
               should
               ,
               where
               the
               mind
               cannot
               study
               it
               out
               ▪
               it
               becommeth
               a
               continuall
               prompter
               and
               maketh
               the
               mind
               a
               truant
               ,
               that
               it
               will
               not
               take
               the
               pains
               ,
               which
               it
               should
               .
            
             
             
               How
               this
               euill
               can
               be
               preuented
               amongst
               schollars
               ,
               
               hauing
               both
               together
               ,
               I
               doe
               not
               possibly
               see
               .
               For
               ,
               whether
               they
               be
               to
               get
               it
               themselues
               ,
               or
               to
               be
               examined
               ;
               yet
               still
               will
               their
               eye
               be
               vpon
               the
               helpe
               ,
               where
               it
               should
               not
               be
               .
            
             
               Indeed
               this
               I
               grant
               ,
               
               that
               the
               Interlineall
               translation
               may
               bee
               a
               worthy
               helpe
               for
               a
               man
               of
               iudgement
               or
               vnderstanding
               ;
               
               who
               can
               so
               moderate
               his
               eye
               as
               to
               keep
               it
               fixed
               vpon
               either
               Greeke
               or
               Latine
               alone
               ,
               when
               hee
               would
               beat
               the
               other
               out
               of
               it
               ;
               as
               vpon
               the
               Greeke
               onely
               when
               hee
               would
               construe
               ,
               or
               reade
               it
               into
               Latine
               ,
               or
               on
               the
               Latine
               onely
               when
               he
               would
               reade
               it
               into
               Greeke
               ,
               and
               so
               can
               vse
               them
               as
               was
               sayd
               ,
               without
               hindring
               the
               mind
               to
               studie
               and
               beat
               out
               ,
               or
               to
               remember
               .
               Though
               the
               wisest
               shall
               find
               it
               very
               hard
               to
               vse
               it
               in
               this
               sort
               ,
               but
               the
               eye
               will
               be
               where
               it
               should
               not
               ;
               vnlesse
               hee
               vse
               this
               course
               ,
               to
               lay
               a
               knife
               ,
               or
               a
               ruler
               ,
               or
               the
               like
               ,
               on
               the
               line
               which
               he
               would
               not
               see
               ,
               &
               so
               remoue
               it
               as
               neede
               is
               .
               Thus
               hee
               may
               vse
               it
               both
               for
               the
               Greeke
               and
               Hebrew
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               It
               stands
               with
               great
               reason
               .
               Well
               then
               ,
               the
               way
               beeing
               so
               ready
               and
               plaine
               ,
               they
               are
               vtterly
               vnworthie
               so
               great
               a
               benefit
               ,
               who
               wil
               not
               take
               paines
               in
               so
               easie
               a
               course
               .
            
             
               But
               if
               I
               woulde
               haue
               my
               schollars
               to
               proceede
               in
               other
               Greeke
               Authors
               ,
               
               what
               courses
               should
               I
               then
               take
               :
               Though
               I
               cannot
               doubt
               ,
               but
               being
               only
               thus
               entred
               in
               the
               Testament
               ,
               that
               they
               will
               be
               well
               accepted
               in
               the
               Vniuersitie
               ,
               and
               goe
               forward
               speedily
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               If
               you
               traine
               them
               vp
               thus
               f●●st
               in
               the
               Testament
               ,
               they
               vvill
               goe
               forwards
               in
               others
               with
               the
               smaller
               helpes
               .
               But
               if
               you
               would
               haue
               them
               to
               begin
               in
               other
               Greeke
               Authors
               ;
               I
               take
               the
               very
               same
               help
               of
               translations
               ,
               either
               verball
               or
               Grammaticall
               ,
               to
               be
               the
               most
               speedy
               furtherances
               ,
               so
               that
               there
               bee
               a
               diligent
               care
               of
               propriety
               in
               translating
               ,
               and
               of
               variety
               set
               in
               the
               margents
               ;
               to
               vse
               them
               in
               all
               things
               as
               in
               the
               Greeke
               Testament
               ,
               and
               in
               the
               Latine
               Authors
               mentioned
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               But
               how
               shal
               we
               do
               for
               such
               translations
               of
               those
               Greeke
               Authors
               ?
            
          
           
             
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               Insteed
               of
               reading
               lectures
               to
               them
               ,
               you
               may
               thus
               translate
               them
               their
               lectures
               daily
               ,
               either
               in
               Latine
               or
               English
               ;
               and
               cause
               them
               then
               eyther
               to
               seeke
               them
               out
               of
               themselues
               by
               their
               translations
               ,
               Grammars
               and
               Lexicons
               :
               Or
               reading
               them
               first
               vnto
               them
               ,
               cause
               them
               to
               make
               them
               perfect
               hereby
               .
            
             
               By
               this
               labour
               of
               translating
               ,
               you
               shall
               finde
               your selfe
               to
               profit
               very
               much
               in
               this
               knowledge
               of
               the
               Greeke
               ,
               and
               be
               greatly
               eased
               in
               your
               paines
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               But
               be
               it
               so
               ,
               that
               I
               am
               not
               able
               to
               translate
               thus
               ;
               as
               he
               had
               neede
               to
               be
               a
               good
               Grecian
               who
               should
               translate
               in
               such
               manner
               :
               what
               then
               should
               I
               do
               ?
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               If
               you
               bee
               able
               to
               reade
               the
               Author
               truely
               vnto
               them
               ,
               
               and
               profitably
               ;
               then
               may
               you
               also
               translate
               it
               thus
               :
               you
               may
               haue
               helpe
               by
               such
               translations
               as
               are
               extant
               ,
               to
               giue
               you
               much
               light
               .
               But
               it
               were
               much
               to
               bee
               wished
               ,
               that
               to
               this
               purpose
               ,
               some
               skilfull
               Grecians
               would
               translate
               som
               of
               the
               purest
               Authors
               in
               this
               manner
               .
               As
               namely
               ,
               Isocrates
               ,
               Xenophon
               ,
               Plato
               ,
               or
               Demosthenes
               ,
               or
               some
               parts
               of
               them
               ,
               which
               might
               seem
               most
               fit
               for
               schollars
               ;
               onely
               to
               be
               for
               this
               purpose
               of
               getting
               the
               Greeke
               .
               To
               begin
               with
               the
               easiest
               of
               them
               first
               .
               All
               painfu●l
               students
               would
               be
               found
               to
               profit
               exceedingly
               ,
               and
               to
               become
               rare
               Grecians
               in
               a
               little
               time
               .
            
             
               Thus
               they
               might
               goe
               on
               vntill
               they
               were
               able
               to
               reade
               any
               Greeke
               Author
               of
               themselues
               ,
               with
               such
               helpes
               as
               are
               extant
               .
            
             
               In
               the
               meane
               time
               ,
               
               you
               may
               vse
               such
               Authors
               as
               are
               so
               translated
               ,
               or
               which
               come
               the
               neerest
               vnto
               them
               ;
               of
               which
               sort
               are
               those
               fables
               of
               Aesop
               translated
               in
               the
               Argentine
               Grammar
               ,
               and
               others
               which
               I
               shall
               shew
               you
               in
               the
               manner
               of
               parsing
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               For
               the
               parsing
               then
               ,
               what
               way
               may
               I
               vse
               ?
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               I
               haue
               shewed
               you
               this
               in
               part
               :
               
               as
               the
               noting
               and
               causing
               your
               schollars
               to
               write
               euery
               hard
               word
               ,
               shewing
               what
               examples
               they
               are
               like
               ,
               the
               speciall
               rule
               ,
               &
               so
               the
               other
               helpes
               as
               they
               are
               in
               the
               Latine
               ,
               by
               casting
               words
               into
               the
               
               Grammaticall
               order
               .
            
             
               More
               speciall
               helpes
               for
               them
               ,
               who
               are
               not
               acquainted
               with
               Camdens
               Grammar
               .
            
             
               1.
               
               They
               may
               vse
               the
               
                 Praxis
                 Praeceptorum
                 Grammatices
              
               of
               Antesignanus
               ,
               
               set
               downe
               in
               the
               end
               of
               Cleonards
               Greeke
               Grammar
               ;
               
               wherein
               is
               both
               an
               Interlineall
               verball
               translation
               ,
               
               such
               as
               I
               spake
               of
               ;
               and
               also
               a
               parsing
               of
               euery
               word
               familiarly
               and
               plainely
               ,
               much
               according
               to
               the
               manner
               of
               parsing
               of
               Latine
               ,
               which
               I
               shewed
               you
               ;
               which
               may
               be
               a
               good
               direction
               for
               parsing
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               Berkets
               Commentary
               vpon
               Stephens
               Catechisme
               ,
               
               parsing
               euery
               word
               according
               to
               Cleonard
               in
               folio
               ,
               is
               found
               to
               be
               a
               speedy
               helpe
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               M
               Stockwood
               his
               
                 Progymna●ma
                 scholasticum
              
               :
               
               wherin
               is
               also
               a
               Grammatical
               practice
               of
               sundry
               Greeke
               Epigrams
               gathered
               by
               H.
               Stephens
               ,
               
               hauing
               a
               double
               translation
               in
               Latine
               (
               the
               one
               
                 ad
                 verbum
              
               ,
               the
               other
               in
               verse
               )
               and
               also
               a
               varying
               of
               each
               Epigr●●
               Latineverse
               by
               diuerse
               Authors
               .
               And
               lastly
               ,
               an
               explanation
               or
               parsing
               of
               euery
               hard
               word
               set
               in
               the
               margent
               ,
               or
               vnder
               each
               Epigram
               in
               manner
               of
               a
               Commentarie
               .
               In
               it
               also
               the
               Greeke
               text
               is
               set
               downe
               both
               in
               Greek
               Characters
               ,
               and
               also
               in
               Latine
               letters
               interlineally
               ,
               directly
               ouer
               the
               head
               of
               the
               Greek
               words
               ;
               of
               purpose
               for
               the
               easie
               entering
               and
               better
               directing
               of
               the
               ignorant
               .
            
             
               The
               Commentary
               in
               it
               for
               parsing
               ,
               may
               be
               also
               a
               good
               direction
               ,
               for
               parsing
               in
               the
               shortest
               manner
               by
               pen
               or
               reading
               .
            
             
               Besides
               these
               ,
               
               for
               Poetry
               ,
               wee
               may
               take
               these
               Authors
               ,
               which
               are
               easie
               and
               plaine
               by
               their
               helpes
               mentioned
               :
               
            
             
               1.
               
               Theognis
               his
               sentences
               with
               the
               other
               Poets
               ioined
               with
               him
               :
               as
               namely
               ,
               Phocilides
               with
               the
               Latine
               translation
               and
               notes
               ,
               
               set
               forth
               by
               Sylburgius
               ;
               which
               is
               verie
               notable
               to
               enter
               young
               Schollars
               into
               Poetry
               ,
               for
               making
               a
               verse
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               Hesiode
               his
               Opera
               and
               Dies
               with
               Ceporine
               and
               Melancthons
               Commentaries
               set
               forth
               by
               
                 Iohannes
                 Frisius
                 Tigurinus
              
               ,
               
               and
               the
               new
               translation
               of
               it
               ,
               adverbum
               ,
               by
               Erasmus
               Schemidt
               ,
               Greeke
               professour
               at
               Wittenberge
               ,
               printed
               1601.
               
            
             
               3.
               
               Homer
               with
               Eustathius
               Greeke
               Commentarie
               may
               easily
               bee
               read
               after
               these
               (
               especially
               after
               the
               Commentary
               on
               Hesiode
               ;
               
               which
               may
               bee
               as
               an
               introduction
               to
               it
               )
               by
               the
               help
               of
               the
               verbal
               Latine
               translation
               of
               Homer
               :
               and
               the
               words
               of
               Art
               ,
               belonging
               to
               Grammar
               set
               down
               in
               Greek
               in
               M.
               Camdens
               Grammer
               .
            
             
               Moreouer
               ,
               these
               directions
               following
               wil
               be
               most
               speedie
               helps
               for
               all
               the
               Poets
               :
            
             
               To
               haue
               in
               readinesse
               some
               briefe
               rules
               of
               the
               chiefe
               figures
               ,
               
               and
               dialects
               :
               as
               those
               who
               are
               in
               Master
               Camdens
               Grammar
               ;
               so
               to
               be
               able
               to
               referre
               all
               Anomalies
               in
               Greeke
               vnto
               them
               .
               Those
               with
               the
               
                 verba
                 anomala
              
               ,
               and
               the
               particular
               dialects
               ,
               according
               to
               each
               part
               of
               speech
               ,
               set
               downe
               in
               the
               end
               of
               Camden
               ,
               may
               resolue
               most
               doubtes
               :
               for
               Anomalies
               and
               speciall
               difficulties
               which
               you
               cannot
               find
               otherwise
               ,
               
               you
               may
               find
               many
               of
               them
               set
               Alphabetically
               together
               in
               the
               end
               of
               Scapula
               his
               Lexicon
               ,
               where
               they
               are
               expressed
               fully
               ,
               and
               particularly
               :
               which
               you
               shall
               proue
               to
               be
               a
               maruellous
               readinesse
               to
               you
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               Here
               are
               indeed
               very
               many
               and
               singular
               helpes
               :
               most
               of
               which
               ,
               I
               may
               truely
               say
               as
               before
               ,
               that
               I
               haue
               not
               so
               much
               as
               heard
               of
               .
               But
               if
               I
               would
               haue
               my
               schollar
               to
               write
               in
               Greek
               ,
               what
               meanes
               should
               I
               vse
               then
               ?
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               If
               you
               mean
               for
               the
               tongue
               ,
               
               to
               be
               able
               to
               write
               true
               and
               pure
               Greeke
               ,
               the
               sure
               meanes
               are
               euen
               the
               same
               ,
               as
               for
               writing
               Latine
               .
            
             
               1.
               
               The
               continuall
               practice
               of
               construing
               ,
               
               parsing
               ,
               and
               reading
               forth
               of
               the
               translation
               into
               the
               Authors
               ,
               is
               making
               the
               Greeke
               continually
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               To
               come
               to
               the
               stile
               and
               composition
               ,
               and
               so
               for
               Orthography
               ,
               to
               doe
               as
               for
               the
               Latine
               .
               As
               I
               directed
               you
               to
               giue
               them
               sentences
               in
               English
               ,
               translated
               Grammatically
               out
               of
               Tullies
               sentences
               ,
               to
               turne
               into
               Tullies
               Latine
               ,
               wherby
               both
               your selfe
               and
               they
               may
               haue
               a
               certaine
               guide
               for
               
               them
               to
               go
               surely
               ;
               so
               here
               to
               giue
               them
               sentences
               or
               peeces
               out
               of
               the
               Testament
               ,
               or
               out
               of
               Isocrates
               ,
               as
               
                 ad
                 Demomcum
              
               ,
               or
               out
               of
               Xenophon
               to
               translate
               into
               Greeke
               ,
               and
               so
               to
               see
               how
               neere
               they
               can
               come
               vnto
               the
               Author
               .
               Or
               else
               ,
               to
               aske
               them
               onely
               the
               Latine
               or
               English
               of
               the
               Greeke
               ,
               and
               to
               trie
               how
               they
               can
               turne
               it
               into
               Greek
               first
               Grammatically
               ,
               after
               in
               composition
               :
               or
               sometimes
               one
               way
               ,
               somtimes
               the
               other
               .
               And
               to
               this
               purpose
               also
               ,
               the
               translations
               of
               som
               excellent
               parts
               of
               the
               purest
               Greek
               Authors
               were
               most
               necessary
               .
            
             
               By
               these
               meanes
               they
               might
               come
               in
               time
               ,
               to
               be
               as
               accurate
               in
               writing
               Greeke
               for
               the
               stile
               and
               composition
               ,
               as
               in
               the
               Latine
               .
               For
               all
               other
               exercises
               in
               Greeke
               ,
               I
               referre
               you
               to
               that
               which
               hath
               been
               said
               concerning
               the
               Latine
               ,
               the
               reason
               and
               meanes
               being
               the
               like
               .
            
             
               Or
               if
               you
               meant
               for
               writing
               the
               Greek
               hand
               faire
               ,
               
               most
               exquisite
               copies
               constantly
               followed
               ,
               as
               in
               the
               Latine
               and
               English
               ,
               and
               practice
               ,
               shal
               bring
               them
               vnto
               it
               .
               But
               for
               this
               ,
               I
               likewise
               refer
               you
               to
               that
               which
               was
               sayd
               concerning
               the
               way
               of
               writing
               faire
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               But
               what
               say
               you
               for
               versifying
               in
               Greeke
               ?
               
               for
               that
               you
               know
               to
               commend
               the
               chiefe
               Schooles
               greatly
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               As
               I
               answered
               you
               before
               ,
               so
               I
               take
               the
               meanes
               to
               be
               in
               all
               things
               the
               same
               ,
               as
               for
               versifying
               in
               Latine
               ;
               except
               that
               this
               is
               more
               easie
               ,
               because
               of
               the
               long
               and
               short
               vowels
               so
               certainely
               knowne
               .
               
               To
               be
               very
               perfect
               in
               the
               rules
               of
               versifying
               ;
               
               inscanning
               averse
               .
               To
               learne
               Theognis
               ,
               that
               pleasant
               and
               easie
               Poet
               without
               booke
               ,
               to
               haue
               store
               of
               Poeticall
               phrase
               and
               authorities
               :
               which
               is
               the
               speediest
               and
               surest
               way
               .
               And
               so
               to
               enter
               by
               turning
               or
               imitating
               his
               verses
               ,
               as
               in
               Latine
               .
               But
               herein
               as
               in
               all
               the
               rest
               ,
               I
               do
               stil
               desire
               the
               help
               of
               the
               learned
               ,
               who
               can
               better
               shew
               by
               experience
               the
               shortest
               ,
               surest
               ,
               and
               most
               plaine
               waies
               .
            
             
               Notwithstanding
               ,
               
               let
               me
               heere
               admonish
               you
               of
               this
               (
               which
               for
               our
               curiositie
               wee
               had
               neede
               to
               bee
               often
               put
               in
               minde
               of
               )
               that
               ,
               
               seeing
               wee
               haue
               so
               little
               practice
               of
               any
               exercises
               to
               bee
               written
               in
               Greeke
               ,
               wee
               doe
               not
               bestowe
               too
               
               much
               time
               in
               that
               ,
               whereof
               wee
               happely
               shall
               haue
               no
               vse
               ;
               and
               which
               therefore
               wee
               shall
               also
               forget
               againe
               :
               but
               that
               wee
               still
               imploy
               our
               pretious
               time
               to
               the
               best
               aduantage
               in
               the
               most
               profitable
               studies
               ,
               which
               may
               after
               do
               most
               good
               to
               Gods
               Church
               or
               our
               countrey
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               Your
               counsell
               is
               good
               :
               yet
               repeate
               mee
               againe
               a
               briefe
               of
               the
               principall
               of
               these
               helpes
               for
               my
               memorie
               sake
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               This
               was
               it
               ;
            
             
               1.
               
               To
               make
               your
               Schollars
               very
               perfect
               in
               the
               Grammar
               ,
               
               chiefly
               Nownes
               and
               Verbes
               ;
               that
               they
               may
               bee
               able
               to
               proue
               and
               parallel
               euery
               thing
               by
               a
               like
               example
               ,
               or
               at
               least
               to
               turne
               to
               them
               readily
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               To
               haue
               the
               Greeke
               Radices
               by
               the
               meanes
               mentioned
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               Continuall
               vse
               of
               most
               accurate
               verball
               or
               Grammaticall
               translations
               ;
               and
               in
               the
               meane
               time
               to
               make
               them
               perfect
               in
               the
               Testament
               daily
               vse
               of
               our
               ordinarie
               translations
               so
               as
               was
               shewed
               ,
               by
               reading
               the
               Greek
               out
               of
               them
               ouer
               and
               ouer
               .
            
             
               4.
               
               Helpe
               of
               the
               best
               Commentaries
               and
               Grammaticall
               practices
               in
               the
               books
               mentioned
               .
            
             
               5.
               
               To
               be
               ready
               in
               the
               dialects
               and
               the
               common
               figures
               for
               the
               Poetry
               .
            
             
               6.
               
               Noting
               all
               the
               difficulties
               ,
               and
               running
               oft
               ouer
               them
               as
               in
               the
               Latine
               ;
               and
               so
               all
               other
               helpes
               of
               vnderstanding
               the
               matter
               first
               ,
               and
               the
               rest
               mentioned
               generally
               .
            
          
        
         
           
           
             CHAP.
             XXI
             .
          
           
             How
             to
             get
             most
             speedily
             the
             knowledge
             and
             vnderstanding
             of
             the
             Hebrew
             .
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               BVt
               what
               say
               you
               ,
               for
               that
               most
               sacred
               tongue
               ,
               the
               Hebrew
               ?
               How
               ,
               I
               pray
               you
               ,
               do
               you
               think
               ,
               that
               that
               may
               bee
               attained
               ,
               which
               you
               mentioned
               ,
               that
               students
               may
               come
               so
               soon
               to
               the
               vnderstanding
               of
               it
               ?
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               This
               may
               be
               obtained
               the
               sooner
               ,
               
               because
               we
               haue
               it
               all
               comprised
               ,
               so
               far
               as
               is
               necessary
               for
               vs
               to
               know
               ,
               in
               that
               one
               sacred
               volume
               of
               the
               old
               Testament
               .
               Also
               because
               the
               principall
               rootes
               of
               it
               are
               so
               few
               ,
               the
               matter
               so
               familiar
               ,
               as
               which
               euery
               one
               of
               vs
               ought
               to
               bee
               acquainted
               with
               .
               The
               Nowns
               haue
               so
               little
               varying
               or
               turning
               in
               them
               .
            
             
               And
               finally
               ,
               for
               that
               wee
               haue
               such
               singular
               helpes
               for
               the
               vnderstanding
               of
               it
               (
               as
               the
               Interlineall
               verball
               translation
               ,
               and
               the
               translations
               and
               labours
               of
               others
               which
               beat
               out
               the
               propriety
               ,
               force
               and
               sense
               of
               euery
               word
               &
               phrase
               )
               like
               as
               in
               the
               Greeke
               Testament
               ,
               that
               nothing
               can
               be
               difficult
               in
               it
               to
               the
               good
               heart
               ,
               who
               will
               vse
               the
               means
               which
               the
               Lord
               hath
               vouchsafed
               ,
               and
               will
               seek
               this
               blessing
               ,
               from
               his
               Maiesty
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               Surely
               ,
               hee
               is
               vtterly
               vnworthy
               of
               this
               heauenlie
               treasure
               ,
               who
               will
               not
               seek
               &
               beg
               it
               from
               the
               Lord
               ,
               and
               dig
               deep
               for
               it
               :
               I
               meane
               ,
               who
               wil
               not
               vse
               any
               holy
               meanes
               ,
               for
               the
               obtaining
               of
               it
               ;
               and
               much
               more
               the
               course
               being
               so
               short
               ,
               plaine
               &
               direct
               ,
               as
               you
               say
               .
               But
               I
               intreat
               you
               to
               trace
               me
               out
               the
               shortest
               way
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               The
               way
               ,
               so
               far
               as
               yet
               I
               haue
               been
               able
               to
               learne
               ,
               is
               wholly
               set
               downe
               already
               in
               the
               manner
               of
               getting
               the
               Latine
               and
               the
               Greek
               .
               But
               to
               make
               a
               brie●e
               rehearsall
               ▪
            
             
             
               1
               For
               them
               who
               would
               bee
               more
               accurate
               Hebricians
               for
               the
               beating
               out
               of
               euery
               tittle
               ,
               
               they
               are
               to
               haue
               the
               Grammar
               very
               accurately
               ;
               and
               that
               by
               the
               like
               means
               euen
               as
               the
               Greeke
               and
               the
               Latine
               .
            
             
               But
               for
               those
               who
               onely
               desire
               the
               vnderstanding
               of
               it
               ,
               and
               to
               be
               skilfull
               in
               the
               text
               ,
               the
               chiefe
               care
               must
               be
               ,
               that
               they
               be
               made
               perfect
               in
               some
               few
               principall
               rules
               of
               Grammar
               of
               most
               vse
               .
               
               Also
               in
               declining
               and
               coniugating
               the
               examples
               set
               down
               in
               the
               book
               ,
               &
               in
               the
               seuerall
               terminations
               of
               declensions
               ,
               numbers
               ,
               moodes
               ,
               tenses
               ,
               persons
               ,
               to
               be
               able
               in
               them
               in
               some
               good
               manner
               to
               giue
               Hebrew
               to
               Latine
               ,
               and
               Latine
               to
               Hebrew
               ,
               and
               to
               run
               the
               terminations
               in
               each
               ;
               at
               least
               to
               giue
               the
               Latine
               to
               the
               Hebrew
               perfectly
               .
               And
               so
               in
               the
               seuerall
               Pronounes
               ,
               Aduerbes
               ,
               Coniunctions
               to
               do
               the
               like
               ;
               I
               meane
               ,
               to
               giue
               Latine
               to
               the
               Hebrew
               ,
               to
               haue
               them
               very
               readily
               ,
               seeing
               they
               are
               but
               few
               ,
               and
               sundry
               of
               them
               of
               continuall
               vse
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               But
               what
               Grammar
               would
               you
               vse
               ?
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               Martinius
               of
               the
               last
               Edition
               ,
               
               with
               the
               Technologia
               adioyned
               to
               it
               ,
               
               I
               take
               to
               be
               most
               vsed
               of
               all
               the
               learned
               ,
               as
               most
               methodicall
               and
               perfect
               ;
               although
               Blebelius
               is
               farre
               more
               easie
               to
               the
               young
               beginner
               ,
               
               as
               much
               more
               answering
               to
               our
               Latine
               Grammar
               ;
               and
               made
               so
               plaine
               of
               purpose
               by
               questions
               and
               answeres
               ,
               that
               any
               one
               of
               iudgement
               may
               better
               vnderstand
               it
               ,
               and
               goe
               forward
               with
               delight
               :
               so
               as
               it
               may
               be
               a
               notable
               introduction
               or
               Commentary
               to
               Martinius
               ,
               who
               had
               neede
               of
               a
               good
               Reader
               ,
               to
               learne
               to
               vnderstand
               him
               perfectly
               .
            
             
               Both
               read
               together
               ,
               
               must
               needs
               be
               most
               profitable
               ;
               Martinius
               for
               method
               and
               shortnes
               ,
               Blebelius
               for
               resoluing
               and
               expounding
               euery
               obscurity
               :
               yet
               euery
               one
               who
               hath
               learned
               a
               Grammar
               ,
               may
               best
               vse
               the
               same
               ,
               because
               that
               is
               most
               familiar
               to
               him
               .
            
             
               But
               for
               them
               who
               are
               to
               begin
               ,
               or
               to
               teach
               others
               ,
               they
               may
               take
               the
               easiest
               first
               ,
               that
               the
               learner
               may
               no
               way
               bee
               discouraged
               ;
               and
               after
               others
               as
               as
               they
               shall
               thinke
               meete
               ,
               or
               which
               shall
               be
               found
               most
               profitable
               ,
               by
               the
               iudgement
               
               of
               the
               greatest
               Hebricians
               .
               This
               I
               thinke
               to
               be
               the
               surest
               aduice
               ;
               and
               by
               comparing
               of
               Grammars
               together
               ,
               euer
               to
               beate
               out
               the
               sense
               and
               meaning
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               What
               is
               your
               next
               meanes
               ?
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               The
               getting
               of
               the
               Hebrew
               rootes
               ,
               
               together
               with
               the
               Grammar
               ,
               euery
               day
               a
               certaine
               number
               .
               Hereunto
               the
               
                 Nomenclator
                 Anglolatmus-Graecus-Haebraicus
              
               ,
               mentioned
               before
               ,
               if
               it
               were
               so
               finished
               ,
               might
               be
               a
               notable
               introductiō
               .
            
             
               For
               the
               maner
               of
               committing
               the
               Radices
               to
               memory
               ,
               
               I
               shewed
               it
               before
               :
               yet
               hereto
               speake
               of
               it
               a
               little
               more
               fully
               ,
               first
               to
               helpe
               our
               remembrance
               by
               som
               of
               the
               chiefe
               helps
               of
               memory
               ;
               as
               by
               comparing
               in
               our
               meditation
               the
               seueral
               words
               in
               the
               Hebrew
               ,
               with
               what
               words
               they
               are
               like
               vnto
               ,
               eyther
               in
               the
               English
               ,
               Latin
               ,
               or
               Greek
               ,
               which
               words
               eyther
               do
               come
               of
               them
               ,
               or
               sound
               like
               vnto
               them
               ,
               or
               with
               some
               other
               roote
               in
               the
               Hebr●w
               ,
               wherwith
               they
               haue
               affinity
               .
               That
               so
               soone
               as
               we
               see
               the
               Hebrew
               roote
               ,
               the
               other
               word
               which
               we
               would
               remember
               it
               by
               ,
               comming
               to
               our
               minde
               ;
               the
               vnderstanding
               or
               meaning
               of
               the
               Hebrew
               roote
               may
               also
               come
               to
               minde
               with
               it
               .
            
             
               As
               for
               example
               ,
               
               to
               begin
               in
               the
               first
               Radices
               ,
               &
               to
               giue
               som
               light
               in
               2.
               or
               3
               ;
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               &
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               ●uber
               or
               
                 pubert
                 as
              
               ,
               may
               be
               remembred
               by
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               ,
               pubertas
               ;
               and
               by
               ephebe
               or
               ephebus
               ,
               in
               Latine
               comming
               of
               it
               ,
               signifying
               the
               same
               :
               as
               
                 Postquam
                 excessit
                 ex
                 ephebis
                 .
                 Terent.
              
               Also
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               may
               be
               remēbred
               by
               the
               month
               Abib
               in
               the
               Scriptures
               ,
               which
               was
               amongst
               the
               Iewes
               
                 mensis
                 pubertatis
                 ,
                 in
                 quo
                 seges
                 terrae
                 Canaan
                 protrudebat
                 spicas
                 .
                 
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                
                 Perijt
                 ,
              
               may
               be
               remembred
               by
               Abaddon
               in
               the
               Apocalips
               ,
               called
               in
               Greek
               Apollion
               ,
               the
               destroyer
               ,
               or
               destruction
               ;
               the
               Angel
               of
               the
               bottomlesse
               pit
               .
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               
                 voluit
                 ,
                 acquieuit
              
               ,
               or
               
                 bene
                 affectus
                 est
                 in
                 aliquid
                 ,
                 vt
                 pater
                 in
                 filios
                 :
              
               It
               may
               fully
               be
               remembred
               by
               Abba
               ,
               father
               ,
               comming
               of
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               pater
               :
               and
               so
               the
               word
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               in
               Greeke
               ,
               or
               Abbas
               an
               Abbot
               ,
               
                 quia
                 Abbas
                 erat
                 pater
                 totius
                 societatis
                 .
              
               And
               Auus
               seemes
               to
               come
               of
               the
               same
               By
               any
               of
               these
               we
               may
               remember
               the
               roote
               .
            
             
               Thus
               we
               may
               remember
               very
               many
               of
               them
               by
               the
               help
               of
               Auenars
               Dictionary
               (
               as
               I
               shewed
               )
               or
               by
               our
               own
               meditation
               ,
               
               euen
               from
               the
               wordes
               comming
               of
               them
               indeede
               ,
               or
               in
               shew
               ,
               obserued
               according
               to
               certaine
               rules
               which
               Auenarius
               giueth
               in
               the
               beginning
               of
               his
               Lexicon
               .
            
             
               The
               reason
               hereof
               also
               is
               most
               euident
               ;
               
               for
               that
               this
               is
               the
               mother
               tongue
               of
               all
               tongues
               ,
               
               &
               was
               the
               only
               tongue
               ,
               vntil
               the
               confounding
               of
               the
               tongs
               at
               Babel
               :
               in
               which
               confusion
               ,
               som
               words
               were
               changed
               altogether
               ,
               in
               others
               the
               significations
               were
               altered
               ,
               &
               many
               haue
               bin
               depraued
               and
               corrupted
               by
               continuance
               &
               succession
               of
               time
               .
               
               Therefore
               as
               this
               tongue
               is
               to
               be
               honored
               ,
               so
               this
               diligence
               in
               comparing
               &
               deriuing
               other
               tongues
               ,
               
               must
               needes
               be
               of
               exceeding
               great
               profit
               many
               wayes
               :
               &
               amongst
               other
               ,
               for
               this
               very
               purpose
               of
               conceiuing
               or
               cōmitting
               to
               memory
               ,
               &
               retayning
               the
               Hebrew
               more
               surely
               ,
               by
               other
               wordes
               better
               knowne
               to
               vs.
               
            
             
               Other
               wordes
               which
               cannot
               be
               remembred
               thus
               ,
               
               yet
               may
               be
               remembred
               by
               the
               learned
               ,
               by
               some
               thing
               which
               they
               sound
               like
               vnto
               ,
               in
               one
               of
               the
               three
               tongs
               ;
               So
               that
               we
               forget
               not
               to
               animate
               that
               which
               we
               remember
               by
               :
               that
               is
               ,
               to
               conceiue
               of
               it
               in
               our
               minde
               ,
               as
               being
               liuely
               and
               stirring
               ;
               like
               as
               we
               noted
               before
               in
               the
               Greeke
               .
            
             
               The
               rest
               of
               the
               roots
               besides
               these
               ,
               
               will
               be
               but
               few
               :
               and
               being
               noted
               with
               a
               line
               with
               a
               black
               lead
               pen
               (
               as
               was
               said
               )
               or
               any
               marke
               ,
               and
               oft
               run
               ouer
               ,
               they
               may
               soone
               be
               gotten
               .
            
             
               Besides
               these
               ,
               
               som
               mark
               would
               be
               giuen
               vnder
               euery
               deriuatiue
               ,
               in
               each
               roote
               ,
               which
               doth
               differ
               much
               in
               signification
               from
               the
               Radix
               ,
               and
               cannot
               be
               remembred
               well
               by
               the
               Radix
               ,
               nor
               how
               it
               may
               be
               deriued
               from
               it
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               Such
               a
               Nomenclator
               as
               you
               speake
               of
               ,
               must
               needs
               be
               a
               rare
               and
               speedy
               helpe
               to
               all
               the
               tongues
               ,
               if
               it
               were
               well
               gathered
               by
               some
               very
               learned
               and
               iudicious
               Hebrician
               .
               But
               in
               the
               meane
               time
               ,
               what
               abbridgement
               would
               you
               vse
               for
               getting
               these
               Radices
               of
               the
               Hebrew
               ?
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               The
               Epitome
               of
               Pagnine
               I
               take
               to
               be
               most
               common
               :
               
               but
               Buxtorphius
               his
               abbridgement
               (
               going
               vnder
               the
               name
               of
               Polanus
               )
               must
               needes
               be
               the
               best
               in
               all
               likelihood
               ;
               as
               hauing
               had
               the
               helpe
               of
               that
               and
               all
               other
               ,
               and
               gathered
               by
               great
               iudgement
               .
            
             
             
               I
               haue
               seene
               a
               draught
               of
               another
               ,
               
               much
               shorter
               then
               them
               both
               ,
               collected
               by
               comparing
               Pagnine
               ,
               Auenar
               ,
               and
               others
               ;
               shewing
               also
               for
               most
               part
               how
               the
               Hebrew
               deriuatiues
               ,
               which
               are
               more
               obscure
               ,
               are
               deriued
               from
               the
               Radices
               ,
               giuing
               at
               least
               a
               probable
               reason
               for
               them
               :
               and
               also
               in
               sundry
               ,
               shewing
               the
               agreement
               and
               manner
               of
               the
               deriuation
               of
               the
               tongues
               ,
               one
               from
               another
               ,
               and
               the
               affinity
               of
               many
               of
               them
               ;
               to
               helpe
               the
               memory
               with
               the
               speedy
               and
               sure
               getting
               of
               all
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               It
               were
               great
               pitie
               ,
               but
               that
               that
               should
               be
               perfected
               ;
               for
               the
               benefite
               of
               it
               must
               needes
               be
               very
               great
               .
               But
               might
               there
               not
               be
               such
               a
               deuise
               ,
               of
               contriuing
               all
               the
               Hebrew
               roots
               into
               continued
               speeches
               ;
               and
               so
               learning
               them
               by
               studying
               them
               out
               of
               verball
               translations
               ,
               as
               you
               shewed
               for
               the
               Greeke
               ?
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               Yes
               vndoubtedly
               ,
               
               it
               might
               easily
               be
               accomplished
               by
               some
               exquisite
               and
               painefull
               Hebrician
               ,
               to
               make
               this
               labour
               yet
               much
               more
               compendious
               :
               Although
               I
               doe
               not
               doubt
               but
               any
               indifferent
               memory
               ,
               might
               in
               the
               space
               of
               a
               twelue
               moneth
               or
               lesse
               ,
               get
               all
               the
               Hebrew
               Radices
               very
               perfectly
               ,
               
               by
               the
               former
               meanes
               of
               Buxtorphius
               or
               Pagnines
               abbridgement
               alone
               ;
               spending
               but
               euery
               day
               one
               houre
               therein
               .
               And
               when
               they
               were
               once
               gotten
               ,
               they
               were
               easily
               kept
               by
               oft
               repetition
               ,
               running
               ouer
               the
               hardest
               ,
               being
               marked
               out
               ;
               and
               by
               daily
               practice
               in
               reading
               some
               Chapters
               ;
               though
               much
               more
               easily
               ,
               by
               hauing
               the
               heads
               reduced
               to
               such
               classes
               ,
               and
               the
               oft
               running
               ouer
               them
               .
            
             
               I
               haue
               heard
               moreouer
               of
               all
               the
               Radices
               ,
               with
               their
               Primitiue
               significations
               alone
               ,
               drawne
               into
               a
               very
               little
               space
               ;
               which
               being
               well
               performed
               ,
               must
               needes
               be
               a
               notable
               furtherance
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               What
               is
               your
               third
               helpe
               ?
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               The
               perfect
               verball
               translations
               written
               out
               of
               Arias
               Montanus
               ,
               
               by
               conferring
               with
               Iunius
               and
               our
               owne
               Bible
               ,
               specially
               our
               new
               translation
               ,
               and
               setting
               the
               diuers
               readings
               in
               the
               margents
               with
               a
               letter
               ,
               to
               signifie
               whose
               the
               translations
               are
               ,
               and
               also
               euery
               hard
               Radix
               noted
               in
               the
               
               margent
               ,
               as
               now
               sundry
               of
               them
               are
               ;
               with
               references
               to
               them
               by
               letters
               or
               figures
               ,
               as
               I
               shewed
               for
               the
               Greeke
               :
               these
               being
               vsed
               as
               the
               English
               translations
               ,
               for
               getting
               the
               Latin
               ,
               and
               as
               the
               Latine
               or
               English
               for
               the
               Greeke
               ,
               will
               be
               found
               aboue
               all
               that
               we
               would
               imagine
               .
            
             
               And
               that
               after
               this
               manner
               :
            
             
               First
               ,
               as
               I
               said
               for
               the
               others
               ,
               by
               reading
               ouer
               the
               translations
               ,
               
               to
               vnderstand
               the
               matter
               .
            
             
               Secondly
               ,
               learning
               to
               construe
               the
               Hebrew
               into
               the
               Latine
               exactly
               ,
               and
               backe
               againe
               out
               of
               the
               translation
               into
               Hebrew
               ;
               looking
               onely
               on
               the
               translation
               ,
               to
               meditate
               and
               beate
               out
               the
               Hebrew
               .
               This
               helpes
               vnderstanding
               ,
               apprehension
               ,
               memory
               ,
               and
               all
               (
               as
               I
               said
               )
               to
               haue
               the
               text
               most
               absolutely
               .
            
             
               Lastly
               ,
               beginning
               with
               the
               easiest
               first
               (
               as
               in
               the
               other
               tongues
               )
               as
               eyther
               some
               part
               of
               the
               History
               (
               as
               namely
               Genesis
               ,
               the
               bookes
               of
               Samuell
               )
               or
               else
               the
               Psalmes
               ;
               and
               therin
               specially
               the
               hundred
               and
               nineteene
               Psalme
               ,
               as
               most
               plaine
               of
               all
               other
               :
               or
               rather
               to
               beginne
               with
               the
               Praxis
               vpon
               the
               Psalmes
               ,
               the
               first
               ,
               the
               fiue
               and
               twentieth
               ,
               and
               the
               threescore
               and
               eight
               ,
               set
               downe
               in
               the
               end
               of
               Martinius
               Grammar
               ,
               printed
               by
               Raphalengius
               ,
               Anno
               1607.
               which
               will
               both
               acquaint
               the
               learner
               with
               the
               vnderstanding
               of
               Martinius
               ,
               and
               set
               him
               in
               a
               most
               direct
               and
               ready
               way
               ,
               by
               the
               other
               helpes
               .
            
             
               For
               the
               certainty
               of
               this
               ,
               
               besides
               that
               the
               reason
               is
               the
               very
               same
               with
               the
               Latine
               ,
               and
               like
               as
               I
               said
               for
               the
               Greeke
               also
               ,
               I
               haue
               moreouer
               knowne
               this
               experience
               in
               a
               childe
               ,
               vnder
               fifteene
               yeares
               of
               age
               ;
               who
               besides
               all
               kinde
               of
               studies
               and
               exercises
               ,
               both
               in
               Latin
               and
               Greeke
               ,
               as
               those
               mentioned
               before
               ,
               and
               his
               daily
               progresse
               in
               them
               ,
               had
               within
               the
               space
               of
               lesse
               then
               a
               yeare
               ,
               gotten
               sundry
               of
               the
               principall
               and
               most
               necessary
               rules
               of
               Grammar
               .
               Also
               a
               great
               part
               of
               the
               Radices
               in
               Buxtorphius
               ,
               though
               hee
               spent
               not
               therein
               aboue
               two
               houres
               in
               a
               day
               .
               And
               besides
               all
               this
               ,
               hee
               had
               learned
               about
               foureteene
               or
               fifteene
               Psalmes
               :
               wherein
               he
               was
               so
               readie
               ,
               as
               that
               hee
               was
               able
               not
               onely
               to
               
               construe
               or
               reade
               the
               Hebrew
               into
               the
               Latine
               ;
               but
               also
               out
               of
               the
               bare
               translation
               ,
               to
               reade
               the
               Hebrew
               backe
               againe
               ,
               to
               shew
               euery
               Radix
               ,
               and
               to
               giue
               a
               reason
               in
               good
               sort
               for
               each
               word
               ,
               why
               it
               was
               so
               .
               Of
               this
               hath
               beene
               tryall
               by
               learned
               and
               sufficient
               witnesses
               .
            
             
               The
               which
               experience
               with
               the
               daily
               trials
               of
               reading
               the
               Latine
               so
               exactly
               and
               readily
               out
               of
               the
               English
               ,
               and
               getting
               it
               (
               as
               it
               were
               without
               booke
               )
               by
               that
               practice
               ,
               doefully
               assure
               me
               that
               by
               this
               daily
               exercise
               the
               very
               originals
               of
               the
               Hebrew
               may
               be
               made
               as
               easie
               and
               familiar
               as
               the
               Latine
               is
               ;
               yea
               ,
               in
               time
               with
               continuall
               practice
               ,
               to
               be
               able
               to
               say
               very
               much
               of
               it
               without
               booke
               :
               
               as
               I
               shewed
               before
               for
               the
               Greeke
               .
               And
               what
               Student
               ,
               especially
               of
               Diuinity
               ,
               can
               euer
               bestow
               some
               part
               of
               his
               time
               in
               a
               more
               pleasant
               ,
               easie
               and
               happy
               studie
               ?
               when
               there
               will
               be
               no
               more
               but
               reading
               ouer
               and
               ouer
               with
               meditation
               ,
               and
               still
               to
               be
               reading
               the
               words
               and
               wisedome
               of
               the
               Highest
               ;
               in
               whose
               presence
               he
               hopes
               to
               dwell
               ,
               and
               to
               heare
               the
               same
               sweete
               voyce
               in
               the
               Temple
               in
               heauen
               eternally
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               By
               these
               means
               ,
               it
               seemeth
               to
               me
               that
               any
               tongue
               may
               be
               gotten
               speedily
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               Yea
               verily
               ,
               
               I
               do
               so
               perswade
               my selfe
               .
               For
               seeing
               (
               as
               I
               said
               )
               that
               there
               is
               no
               more
               in
               any
               tongue
               ,
               
               but
               wordes
               and
               ioyning
               of
               those
               words
               together
               ;
               therfore
               the
               words
               being
               first
               gotten
               ,
               chiefly
               by
               being
               contriued
               into
               continued
               speeches
               ,
               &
               those
               so
               learnd
               out
               of
               such
               verbal
               translations
               :
               secondly
               ,
               some
               few
               rules
               of
               them
               being
               knowne
               :
               thirdly
               ,
               continuall
               vse
               of
               such
               translations
               ;
               would
               make
               any
               tongue
               to
               be
               vnderstood
               and
               learned
               very
               soone
               ,
               so
               farre
               as
               I
               can
               conceiue
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               How
               soeuer
               this
               be
               ,
               which
               seemeth
               indeede
               most
               probable
               ;
               
               yet
               I
               take
               it
               ,
               there
               can
               be
               no
               doubt
               of
               this
               ,
               but
               that
               in
               euery
               country
               of
               the
               world
               ,
               the
               Latin
               ,
               Greek
               ,
               &
               Hebrew
               may
               be
               attained
               by
               the
               same
               meanes
               :
               which
               three
               are
               enough
               (
               yea
               the
               two
               last
               alone
               sufficient
               )
               to
               know
               God
               and
               Iesus
               Christ
               to
               eternall
               life
               :
               and
               that
               so
               by
               the
               knowledge
               of
               the
               Originals
               ,
               men
               may
               haue
               a
               certaine
               knowledge
               of
               the
               eternall
               worde
               of
               the
               Lord.
               
            
          
           
             
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               I
               can
               see
               no
               reason
               at
               all
               to
               the
               contrary
               ,
               but
               that
               these
               our
               Latine
               Classicall
               Authours
               being
               translated
               Grammatically
               into
               other
               tongues
               ,
               by
               some
               who
               are
               learned
               amongst
               them
               ,
               the
               Latine
               may
               as
               well
               bee
               learned
               thereby
               by
               them
               out
               of
               their
               translations
               ,
               in
               their
               own
               tongues
               ,
               by
               such
               helps
               of
               rules
               as
               haue
               bin
               mentioned
               ,
               or
               the
               like
               ,
               as
               out
               of
               translations
               in
               our
               English
               tongue
               .
               Secondly
               ,
               the
               Latine
               tongue
               being
               once
               gotten
               ,
               the
               getting
               of
               the
               Greek
               and
               Hebrew
               are
               the
               very
               same
               vnto
               them
               which
               they
               are
               to
               vs.
               
            
             
               Or
               otherwise
               ,
               the
               Greeke
               and
               Hebrew
               but
               translated
               so
               alone
               ,
               
               into
               the
               seuerall
               tongues
               of
               each
               Nation
               (
               I
               meane
               verbally
               )
               they
               might
               as
               easily
               ,
               if
               not
               more
               easily
               ,
               be
               learned
               in
               each
               countrey
               out
               of
               them
               ,
               as
               out
               of
               the
               English
               or
               Latine
               ;
               and
               the
               sense
               or
               meaning
               also
               ,
               if
               in
               euery
               difficult
               place
               ,
               or
               where
               the
               wordes
               seemed
               to
               be
               out
               of
               order
               ,
               it
               were
               set
               in
               the
               margents
               ouer
               against
               them
               .
            
             
               The
               same
               I
               say
               for
               our
               English
               ;
               into
               which
               the
               Hebrew
               ,
               in
               most
               places
               translated
               verbatim
               ,
               doth
               keepe
               a
               perfect
               sense
               ,
               and
               might
               bee
               learned
               out
               of
               it
               .
               Also
               the
               most
               absolute
               fulnesse
               of
               vnderstanding
               of
               the
               matter
               in
               our
               heads
               ,
               doth
               bring
               wordes
               ,
               most
               readily
               to
               expresse
               it
               ;
               which
               I
               haue
               oft
               tolde
               you
               of
               .
               
            
             
               But
               remember
               this
               that
               I
               haue
               said
               ;
               
               that
               the
               verball
               Translations
               ,
               for
               these
               originals
               ,
               shall
               make
               the
               learners
               most
               cunning
               in
               the
               text
               ,
               and
               in
               the
               very
               order
               of
               the
               wordes
               of
               the
               Holy
               Ghost
               ,
               without
               danger
               of
               any
               way
               deprauing
               ,
               corrupting
               or
               inuerting
               one
               iotte
               or
               tittle
               :
               though
               for
               the
               Latine
               ,
               the
               Grammaticall
               translations
               bee
               farre
               most
               profitable
               ,
               as
               we
               haue
               shewed
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               Are
               these
               all
               the
               directions
               that
               you
               would
               giue
               me
               herein
               ?
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               These
               are
               all
               which
               yet
               I
               know
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               By
               these
               then
               it
               seemeth
               that
               you
               are
               fully
               perswaded
               that
               this
               holy
               tongue
               may
               be
               obtayned
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               Yea
               vndoubtedly
               ,
               so
               much
               as
               shal
               be
               requisit
               for
               vs
               ,
               
               by
               obseruing
               withall
               those
               generall
               rules
               ,
               set
               downe
               for
               the
               getting
               of
               the
               Latine
               ;
               and
               chiefly
               that
               ,
               of
               making
               markes
               vnder
               euery
               hard
               word
               in
               each
               page
               ,
               without
               marring
               our
               bookes
               ;
               and
               to
               runne
               oft
               ouer
               those
               .
            
             
               But
               herein
               it
               is
               necessary
               that
               I
               put
               you
               in
               minde
               againe
               ,
               
               of
               that
               which
               I
               admonished
               you
               of
               in
               the
               Greek
               ;
               that
               your
               schollar
               learne
               so
               much
               onely
               ,
               as
               eyther
               the
               present
               time
               requires
               :
               I
               meane
               ,
               whereof
               he
               may
               haue
               good
               vse
               presently
               ,
               or
               else
               when
               he
               shall
               proceede
               to
               higher
               studies
               in
               the
               Vniuersities
               ,
               or
               to
               other
               imployments
               .
               And
               for
               other
               speculatiue
               or
               more
               curious
               knowledge
               in
               Quiddities
               ,
               eyther
               to
               cut
               them
               off
               altogether
               from
               hindring
               better
               and
               more
               needefull
               studies
               ,
               or
               to
               reserue
               them
               to
               their
               due
               time
               and
               place
               ;
               or
               to
               leaue
               them
               onely
               to
               them
               who
               shall
               giue
               themselues
               wholly
               to
               these
               studies
               ,
               to
               be
               readers
               in
               the
               Vniuersities
               ,
               or
               for
               like
               purposes
               ;
               as
               ,
               the
               learning
               of
               the
               musick
               and
               Rhetoricall
               accents
               :
               the
               
                 Prosodia
                 metrica
              
               ,
               and
               the
               like
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               What
               is
               then
               the
               summe
               of
               all
               ?
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               For
               them
               who
               desire
               to
               be
               exact
               Hebricians
               ,
               to
               be
               very
               perfect
               in
               the
               Grammar
               ;
               for
               them
               who
               desire
               but
               only
               the
               vnderstanding
               ,
               to
               haue
               ,
            
             
               1
               Some
               necessary
               rules
               ,
               and
               principally
               examples
               of
               Nounes
               and
               Verbes
               very
               readily
               .
            
             
               2
               The
               Radices
               .
            
             
               3
               Continuall
               vse
               of
               verball
               translations
               ,
               or
               others
               ;
               as
               in
               the
               Greeke
               .
            
             
               4
               Oft
               running
               ouer
               the
               hardest
               wordes
               .
            
             
               But
               these
               ,
               as
               all
               other
               things
               ,
               I
               write
               vnder
               correction
               ,
               and
               with
               submission
               and
               desire
               of
               better
               iudgement
               .
            
          
        
         
           
           
             CHAP.
             XXII
             .
          
           
             Of
             knowledge
             of
             the
             grounds
             of
             religion
             and
             training
             vp
             the
             schollars
             therin
             .
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               NOw
               that
               we
               haue
               thus
               gone
               thorough
               all
               the
               way
               of
               learning
               ,
               for
               whatsoeuer
               can
               bee
               required
               in
               the
               Grammar
               schooles
               ;
               and
               how
               to
               lay
               a
               sure
               foundation
               ,
               both
               for
               the
               Greeke
               and
               the
               Hebrew
               ,
               that
               they
               may
               bee
               able
               to
               goe
               on
               of
               themselues
               in
               all
               these
               by
               their
               owne
               studies
               :
               it
               remaineth
               that
               wee
               come
               yet
               to
               one
               further
               point
               ,
               and
               which
               is
               as
               it
               were
               the
               end
               of
               all
               these
               .
               
               That
               is
               ,
               how
               schollars
               may
               be
               seasoned
               and
               trained
               vp
               in
               Gods
               true
               Religion
               and
               in
               grace
               ;
               without
               which
               all
               other
               learning
               is
               meerely
               vaine
               ,
               or
               to
               increase
               a
               greater
               condemnation
               .
               This
               one
               alone
               doth
               make
               them
               truely
               blessed
               ,
               and
               sanctifie
               all
               other
               their
               studies
               .
            
             
               Moreouer
               ,
               they
               being
               taught
               herein
               in
               their
               youth
               shall
               not
               depart
               from
               it
               when
               they
               are
               old
               .
               I
               intreat
               you
               therefore
               to
               shew
               me
               so
               shortly
               as
               you
               can
               ,
               how
               schollars
               maie
               bee
               taught
               all
               those
               things
               which
               were
               contained
               in
               the
               note
               :
               As
               ,
            
             
               1.
               
               To
               be
               acquainted
               with
               all
               the
               grounds
               of
               religion
               and
               chief
               histories
               of
               the
               Bible
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               So
               to
               take
               the
               Sermons
               ▪
               at
               least
               for
               all
               the
               substance
               both
               for
               doctrines
               ,
               proofes
               ,
               vses
               ;
               and
               after
               to
               make
               a
               rehearsall
               of
               them
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               Euery
               one
               to
               begin
               to
               conceiue
               and
               answere
               the
               seuerall
               points
               of
               the
               Sermons
               ,
               euen
               from
               the
               lowest
               formes
               .
            
             
               These
               are
               matters
               that
               I
               thinke
               are
               least
               thought
               of
               in
               most
               schooles
               ,
               
               though
               of
               all
               other
               they
               must
               needes
               bee
               most
               necessary
               ,
               and
               which
               our
               lawes
               and
               iniunctions
               doe
               
               take
               principall
               care
               for
               ;
               and
               that
               the
               schoolmasters
               ,
               to
               these
               ends
               ,
               be
               of
               sincere
               religion
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               I
               feare
               indeede
               that
               it
               is
               as
               you
               say
               ,
               that
               this
               is
               ouer-generally
               neglected
               .
               
               And
               herein
               shall
               the
               popish
               schoolemasters
               rise
               vp
               in
               iudgement
               against
               vs
               :
               who
               make
               this
               the
               very
               chiefe
               marke
               at
               which
               they
               aime
               ,
               in
               all
               their
               teaching
               ;
               to
               poure
               in
               superstition
               at
               the
               beginning
               ,
               first
               to
               corrupt
               and
               deceiue
               the
               tender
               minds
               .
            
             
               But
               to
               returne
               vnto
               the
               matter
               ,
               how
               they
               may
               bee
               thus
               trained
               vp
               in
               the
               feare
               of
               the
               Lord
               ;
               I
               shall
               set
               you
               downe
               the
               best
               manner
               ,
               so
               neere
               as
               I
               my selfe
               haue
               yet
               learned
               ,
               follovving
               the
               order
               of
               these
               particulars
               mentioned
               .
            
             
               1.
               
               For
               beeing
               acquainted
               with
               the
               grounds
               of
               religion
               and
               the
               principles
               of
               the
               Catechisme
               ;
               
               Euerie
               Saturdaie
               before
               their
               breaking
               vp
               the
               schoole
               (
               for
               〈◊〉
               finishing
               their
               weeks
               labours
               ,
               
               and
               a
               preparatiue
               to
               the
               Sabbaoth
               )
               let
               them
               spend
               halfe
               an
               howre
               or
               more
               in
               learning
               &
               answering
               the
               Catechisme
               .
            
             
               To
               this
               end
               ,
               cause
               euery
               one
               to
               haue
               his
               Catechisme
               ,
               to
               get
               halfe
               a
               side
               of
               a
               leafe
               or
               more
               at
               a
               time
               ;
               each
               to
               be
               able
               to
               repeate
               the
               whole
               .
               The
               more
               they
               say
               at
               a
               time
               and
               the
               ofter
               they
               runne
               ouer
               the
               whole
               ,
               the
               sooner
               they
               will
               come
               to
               vnderstanding
               .
               This
               must
               be
               as
               their
               parts
               in
               their
               Accedence
               .
            
             
               In
               examining
               ,
               
               first
               your
               Vsher
               or
               Seniors
               of
               each
               fourm
               may
               heare
               that
               euery
               one
               can
               say
               .
               
               Afterwardes
               ,
               you
               hauing
               all
               set
               before
               you
               ,
               may
               poase
               whom
               you
               suspect
               most
               carelesse
               .
            
             
               1.
               
               Whether
               they
               can
               answere
               the
               questions
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               In
               demanding
               euery
               question
               againe
               ,
               to
               stand
               a
               little
               on
               it
               ,
               to
               make
               it
               so
               plaine
               and
               easie
               ,
               as
               the
               least
               childe
               amongst
               them
               may
               vnderstand
               euery
               word
               which
               hath
               any
               hardnesse
               in
               it
               ,
               and
               the
               force
               of
               it
               .
            
             
               Let
               the
               manner
               of
               the
               poasing
               bee
               as
               I
               shewed
               for
               the
               Accedence
               .
               The
               more
               plainly
               the
               question
               is
               drawen
               out
               of
               the
               very
               words
               of
               the
               book
               ,
               and
               into
               the
               moe
               short
               questions
               it
               is
               diuided
               ,
               and
               also
               examined
               backeward
               and
               forward
               ,
               
               the
               sooner
               a
               great
               deale
               they
               will
               vnderstand
               it
               ,
               and
               better
               remember
               it
               .
            
             
               Herein
               also
               to
               vse
               all
               diligence
               to
               apply
               euery
               peecevnto
               them
               ,
               to
               whet
               it
               vpon
               them
               ,
               to
               worke
               holy
               affections
               in
               them
               ;
               that
               each
               may
               learne
               to
               feare
               the
               Lord
               and
               walke
               in
               all
               his
               commandements
               .
               For
               ,
               beeing
               in
               their
               hearts
               and
               practice
               ,
               it
               will
               be
               more
               firmly
               kept
               .
               This
               also
               must
               be
               remembred
               for
               all
               that
               followeth
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               For
               the
               Sabbaoths
               and
               other
               daies
               when
               there
               is
               anie
               sermon
               ,
               
               cause
               euery
               one
               to
               learn
               somthing
               at
               the
               sermons
               .
            
             
               1.
               
               The
               very
               lowest
               to
               bring
               some
               notes
               ,
               at
               least
               3.
               or
               4.
               
               If
               they
               can
               ,
               to
               learne
               them
               by
               their
               owne
               marking
               ;
               if
               not
               to
               get
               other
               of
               their
               fellowes
               to
               teach
               them
               some
               short
               lessons
               after
               .
               As
               thus
               :
               Without
               God
               we
               can
               do
               nothing
               .
               All
               good
               gifts
               are
               from
               God
               :
               or
               the
               like
               short
               sentences
               ;
               not
               to
               ouer-load
               them
               at
               the
               first
               .
            
             
               To
               this
               end
               ,
               that
               the
               Monitours
               see
               ,
               1.
               
               That
               all
               be
               most
               attentiue
               to
               the
               Preacher
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               That
               all
               those
               who
               can
               write
               any
               thing
               ,
               
               or
               do
               but
               begin
               to
               write
               ●oining
               hand
               ,
               doe
               euery
               one
               write
               some
               such
               notes
               ,
               or
               at
               least
               to
               get
               them
               written
               ,
               some
               5.
               or
               6.
               or
               moe
               as
               they
               can
               ,
               as
               I
               sayde
               to
               bee
               able
               to
               repeate
               them
               without
               booke
               ,
               as
               their
               other
               little
               fellowes
               .
               
            
             
               But
               herein
               there
               must
               be
               great
               care
               by
               the
               Monitours
               ,
               
               that
               they
               trouble
               not
               their
               fellowes
               ,
               nor
               the
               congregation
               ,
               in
               asking
               notes
               ,
               or
               stirring
               out
               of
               their
               places
               to
               seek
               of
               one
               another
               ,
               or
               any
               other
               disorder
               ;
               but
               to
               aske
               them
               after
               they
               are
               come
               forth
               of
               the
               Church
               ,
               and
               get
               them
               written
               then
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               For
               those
               who
               haue
               been
               longer
               practiced
               herein
               ,
               
               to
               set
               downe
               ,
               1.
               
               The
               Text
               or
               a
               part
               of
               it
               .
               2.
               
               To
               marke
               as
               neere
               as
               they
               can
               ,
               and
               set
               downe
               euery
               doctrine
               ,
               and
               what
               proofes
               they
               can
               ,
               the
               reasons
               and
               the
               vses
               of
               them
               .
            
             
               4.
               
               In
               the
               highest
               fourmes
               ,
               
               cause
               them
               to
               set
               downe
               all
               the
               Sermons
               .
               As
               Text
               ,
               diuision
               ,
               exposition
               ,
               or
               meaning
               ,
               doctrines
               ,
               and
               how
               the
               seuerall
               doctrines
               were
               gathered
               ,
               all
               the
               proofes
               ,
               reasons
               ,
               vses
               ,
               applications
               .
               I
               meane
               all
               the
               substance
               and
               effect
               of
               the
               Sermons
               :
               for
               learning
               is
               
               not
               so
               much
               seene
               ,
               in
               setting
               downe
               the
               words
               ,
               as
               the
               substance
               .
            
             
               And
               also
               for
               further
               directing
               them
               ,
               
               and
               better
               helping
               their
               vnderstanding
               and
               memories
               ,
               
               for
               the
               repetition
               thereof
               ;
               cause
               them
               to
               leaue
               spaces
               betweene
               euery
               part
               ,
               and
               where
               neede
               is
               to
               diuide
               them
               with
               lines
               .
               So
               also
               to
               distinguish
               the
               seuerall
               parts
               by
               letters
               or
               figures
               ,
               
               and
               setting
               the
               sum
               of
               euery
               thing
               in
               the
               margent
               ouer
               against
               each
               matter
               in
               a
               word
               or
               two
               .
               
               As
               ,
               Text
               ,
               Diuision
               ,
               Summe
               .
            
             
               First
               Obseruation
               or
               1.
               
               Doctrine
               ,
               Proofes
               ,
               Reasons
               1.
               2.
               3.
               
               Vses
               1.
               2.
               3.
               
               So
               ,
               the
               2.
               
               Obseruation
               or
               doctrine
               ,
               proofes
               ,
               reasons
               ,
               &c.
               so
               thoroughout
               .
               Or
               what
               method
               soeuer
               ,
               the
               Preacher
               doth
               vse
               ,
               to
               follow
               the
               parts
               after
               the
               same
               maner
               ,
               so
               well
               as
               they
               can
               .
            
             
               Direct
               them
               to
               leaue
               good
               margents
               for
               these
               purposes
               :
               
               and
               so
               soone
               as
               euer
               the
               Preacher
               quotes
               any
               scripture
               ,
               
               as
               hee
               nameth
               it
               ,
               
               to
               set
               it
               in
               the
               Margent
               against
               the
               place
               ,
               lest
               it
               slip
               out
               of
               memorie
               .
            
             
               And
               presently
               after
               the
               sermon
               is
               done
               ,
               to
               run
               ouer
               all
               againe
               ,
               
               correcting
               it
               ,
               and
               setting
               downe
               the
               sum
               of
               euerie
               chief
               head
               ,
               faire
               and
               distinctly
               in
               the
               margent
               ouer
               against
               the
               place
               ,
               if
               his
               leasure
               will
               suffer
               .
            
             
               By
               this
               helpe
               they
               will
               be
               able
               to
               vnderstand
               ,
               and
               make
               a
               repetition
               of
               the
               sermon
               ,
               
               with
               a
               verie
               little
               meditation
               ;
               yea
               to
               doe
               it
               with
               admiration
               for
               children
               .
            
             
               After
               all
               these
               ,
               
               you
               may
               (
               if
               you
               think
               good
               )
               cause
               them
               the
               next
               morning
               ,
               to
               translate
               it
               into
               a
               good
               Latine
               stile
               ,
               insteed
               of
               their
               exercise
               the
               next
               day
               (
               I
               meane
               ,
               so
               many
               of
               them
               as
               write
               Latine
               )
               or
               some
               little
               peece
               of
               it
               according
               to
               their
               ability
               .
            
             
               Or
               rather
               ,
               
               (
               because
               of
               the
               lacke
               of
               time
               ,
               to
               examine
               what
               euery
               one
               hath
               written
               )
               to
               see
               how
               they
               are
               able
               out
               of
               the
               English
               ,
               
               to
               read
               that
               which
               they
               haue
               written
               ,
               into
               Latine
               ,
               
                 ex
                 tempore
              
               ,
               each
               of
               them
               reading
               his
               peece
               in
               order
               ,
               and
               helping
               others
               to
               giue
               better
               phrase
               and
               more
               variety
               ,
               for
               euery
               difficult
               word
               ;
               and
               so
               to
               runne
               thorough
               the
               whole
               .
            
             
             
               This
               I
               finde
               that
               they
               will
               beginne
               to
               do
               ,
               
               after
               that
               they
               haue
               beene
               exercised
               in
               making
               Latine
               a
               twelue
               moneth
               or
               two
               ,
               if
               they
               haue
               beene
               rightly
               entred
               ,
               and
               well
               exercised
               in
               
                 Sententiae
                 pueriles
              
               ;
               especially
               in
               the
               diuine
               sentences
               in
               the
               end
               thereof
               ,
               and
               in
               Corderius
               with
               other
               bookes
               and
               exercises
               noted
               before
               ,
               chiefly
               by
               the
               practice
               of
               reading
               out
               of
               the
               translations
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               But
               when
               would
               you
               examine
               these
               ?
               
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               For
               the
               reading
               into
               Latine
               ,
               I
               would
               haue
               it
               done
               the
               next
               day
               at
               9.
               of
               the
               clock
               for
               their
               exercise
               ,
               or
               at
               their
               entrance
               after
               dinner
               ;
               that
               so
               they
               might
               haue
               some
               meete
               time
               to
               meditate
               of
               it
               before
               :
               and
               for
               examining
               of
               it
               in
               English
               ,
               to
               do
               it
               at
               night
               before
               their
               breaking
               vp
               ,
               amongst
               them
               all
               shortly
               ,
               or
               before
               dinner
               .
            
             
               Herein
               also
               some
               one
               of
               the
               higher
               fourmes
               might
               bee
               appointed
               in
               order
               to
               make
               a
               repetitiō
               of
               the
               wholeserm
               on
               without
               book
               ,
               
               according
               as
               I
               shewed
               the
               manner
               of
               setting
               it
               down
               ;
               rehearsing
               the
               seueral
               parts
               so
               distinctly
               &
               briefly
               ,
               as
               the
               rest
               attending
               may
               the
               better
               conceiue
               of
               the
               whole
               ,
               and
               not
               exceed
               the
               space
               of
               a
               quarter
               of
               an
               howre
               .
            
             
               After
               the
               repetition
               of
               it
               ,
               
               if
               leasure
               serue
               ,
               the
               Master
               may
               aske
               amongst
               the
               highest
               som
               few
               questions
               ,
               of
               whatsoeuer
               points
               might
               seeme
               difficult
               in
               the
               sermon
               :
               for
               by
               questions
               as
               I
               haue
               said
               ,
               they
               wil
               com
               to
               vnderstand
               any
               thing
               .
            
             
               Next
               to
               appose
               amongst
               the
               lowest
               ,
               
               where
               he
               thinkes
               good
               ,
               what
               notes
               they
               took
               of
               the
               Sermons
               ,
               and
               cause
               them
               to
               pronounce
               them
               ;
               and
               in
               appoasing
               to
               cause
               them
               to
               vnderstand
               ,
               by
               applying
               all
               things
               to
               them
               in
               a
               word
               or
               two
               .
               Thus
               to
               go
               thorough
               as
               time
               shall
               permit
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               This
               strict
               examining
               will
               be
               a
               good
               means
               to
               make
               them
               attentiue
               ?
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               It
               will
               indeed
               ;
               
               so
               as
               you
               shal
               see
               them
               to
               increase
               in
               knowledge
               and
               vnderstanding
               aboue
               your
               expectation
               :
               And
               besides
               it
               wil
               keep
               them
               from
               playing
               talking
               ,
               sleeping
               and
               all
               other
               disorders
               in
               the
               Church
               .
               To
               this
               end
               therfore
               poase
               diligently
               ,
               all
               those
               whō
               you
               obserue
               or
               suspect
               most
               negligent
               ▪
               as
               I
               haue
               aduised
               :
               then
               you
               shall
               haue
               them
               to
               attend
               heedfully
               .
            
          
           
             
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               But
               how
               will
               you
               cause
               them
               to
               be
               able
               so
               to
               repeate
               the
               Sermon
               ?
               Mee
               thinkes
               that
               should
               bee
               very
               difficult
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               The
               schollars
               will
               doe
               it
               very
               readily
               ,
               
               where
               the
               Preachers
               keep
               any
               good
               order
               ;
               when
               they
               haue
               so
               noted
               euerything
               as
               I
               directed
               before
               ,
               and
               set
               downe
               the
               sum
               in
               the
               margent
               .
               For
               then
               ,
               first
               meditating
               the
               text
               to
               haue
               it
               perfect
               :
               secondly
               ,
               meditating
               the
               margents
               to
               get
               the
               sum
               of
               all
               into
               their
               heads
               ,
               and
               the
               manner
               how
               it
               stands
               :
               thirdly
               ,
               obseruing
               how
               many
               doctrines
               were
               gathered
               and
               how
               ,
               what
               proofs
               ,
               how
               many
               reasons
               &
               vses
               of
               euery
               doctrine
               ;
               they
               will
               soone
               both
               conceiue
               it
               ,
               and
               be
               able
               to
               deliuer
               it
               with
               much
               facilitie
               after
               a
               little
               practice
               .
            
             
               But
               herein
               the
               principall
               helpes
               are
               vnderstanding
               ,
               
               by
               getting
               the
               summes
               ,
               and
               margents
               ;
               obseruing
               the
               order
               ,
               and
               constant
               practice
               .
               Vnderstanding
               will
               bring
               words
               :
               practice
               perfection
               .
            
             
               If
               those
               who
               are
               weaker
               or
               more
               timorous
               ,
               
               haue
               their
               notes
               lying
               open
               before
               them
               ,
               
               to
               cast
               their
               eye
               vpon
               them
               here
               or
               there
               where
               they
               sticke
               ,
               it
               shall
               much
               embolden
               them
               ,
               and
               fit
               them
               after
               to
               make
               vse
               of
               short
               notes
               of
               any
               thing
               :
               I
               meane
               of
               the
               briefe
               summe
               of
               that
               which
               they
               shall
               deliuer
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               These
               are
               surely
               very
               good
               exercises
               for
               the
               Saturday
               for
               catechizing
               ,
               and
               the
               daies
               after
               the
               sermons
               for
               repeating
               of
               the
               sermons
               :
               but
               would
               you
               haue
               no
               exercises
               of
               religion
               at
               all
               in
               the
               other
               daies
               of
               the
               weeke
               ?
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               Yes
               .
               As
               there
               is
               no
               no
               day
               but
               it
               is
               the
               Lords
               ,
               and
               therefore
               it
               and
               all
               our
               labours
               to
               be
               consecrated
               to
               him
               by
               a
               morning
               &
               an
               euening
               sacrifice
               ,
               I
               mean
               praier
               &
               thanksgiuing
               morning
               &
               euening
               ;
               so
               there
               would
               no
               day
               be
               su●fered
               to
               passe
               ouer
               ,
               wherin
               there
               should
               not
               be
               some
               short
               exercise
               or
               lesson
               of
               religion
               :
               which
               is
               both
               the
               chiefe
               end
               of
               all
               other
               our
               studies
               ,
               and
               also
               that
               ,
               wherby
               all
               the
               rest
               are
               sanctified
               .
               And
               to
               this
               end
               ,
               one
               quarter
               of
               an
               hower
               or
               more
               might
               be
               taken
               euery
               euening
               before
               praier
               ,
               though
               they
               were
               kept
               so
               much
               the
               longer
               ,
               that
               it
               might
               not
               hinder
               
               any
               other
               of
               their
               daily
               studies
               :
               Although
               in
               this
               ,
               no
               losse
               will
               euer
               be
               found
               ,
               to
               any
               other
               studie
               ,
               but
               the
               Lord
               wil
               bless
               so
               much
               the
               more
               ;
               That
               also
               to
               be
               in
               such
               a
               course
               as
               none
               could
               any
               way
               dislike
               ,
               &
               which
               of
               all
               other
               might
               be
               both
               most
               sure
               and
               profitable
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               What
               such
               a
               course
               can
               you
               find
               which
               is
               so
               profitable
               ,
               and
               which
               all
               must
               needes
               so
               approue
               of
               ,
               which
               might
               be
               so
               short
               ?
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               To
               go
               thorough
               the
               history
               of
               the
               Bible
               ,
               euery
               day
               a
               history
               ,
               or
               som
               peece
               of
               a
               history
               :
               I
               meane
               ,
               some
               few
               questions
               of
               it
               in
               order
               ,
               as
               the
               time
               will
               permit
               .
            
             
               To
               this
               purpose
               ,
               
               there
               is
               a
               little
               book
               called
               the
               history
               of
               the
               Bible
               ,
               gathered
               by
               M.
               Paget
               :
               wherin
               if
               you
               cause
               them
               to
               prouide
               against
               euery
               night
               a
               side
               of
               a
               leafe
               ,
               or
               as
               you
               shall
               thinke
               meet
               ,
               of
               the
               most
               easie
               &
               plaine
               questions
               ;
               and
               to
               examine
               them
               after
               the
               maner
               of
               examining
               the
               Catechism
               ;
               
               you
               shall
               see
               them
               to
               profit
               much
               ,
               both
               for
               the
               easinesse
               of
               the
               history
               ,
               and
               the
               delight
               which
               children
               will
               take
               therein
               .
            
             
               Wherein
               also
               if
               first
               you
               shall
               shewe
               them
               or
               aske
               them
               what
               vertues
               are
               commended
               in
               that
               history
               ;
               what
               vices
               are
               cōdemned
               ;
               or
               what
               generals
               they
               could
               gather
               out
               of
               that
               particular
               ;
               or
               what
               examples
               they
               haue
               against
               such
               vices
               ,
               or
               for
               such
               vertues
               ;
               and
               thus
               examine
               them
               after
               the
               same
               maner
               ,
               so
               going
               ouer
               &
               ouer
               as
               the
               time
               permits
               ,
               you
               shall
               see
               them
               to
               come
               on
               according
               to
               your
               desire
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               But
               me
               thinks
               that
               you
               would
               not
               haue
               them
               to
               take
               euery
               question
               in
               that
               booke
               before
               them
               .
               
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               No
               :
               I
               would
               haue
               only
               those
               histories
               which
               are
               most
               familiar
               for
               children
               to
               vnderstand
               ,
               and
               most
               to
               edification
               ;
               and
               so
               those
               questions
               only
               to
               be
               chosen
               .
               There
               are
               sundry
               concerning
               the
               Leuiticall
               lawes
               ,
               which
               are
               beyond
               their
               conceit
               ,
               and
               so
               in
               diuerse
               other
               parts
               .
               For
               that
               shuld
               euer
               be
               kept
               in
               memorie
               ,
               that
               things
               wel
               vnderstood
               are
               euer
               most
               soone
               learned
               and
               most
               firmly
               kept
               :
               and
               we
               should
               euer
               be
               afraid
               to
               discourage
               our
               children
               by
               the
               difficulty
               of
               anything
               .
            
          
           
             
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               It
               is
               true
               indeed
               .
               And
               moreouer
               ,
               howsoeuer
               it
               is
               most
               certaine
               that
               all
               holy
               Scripture
               is
               profitable
               ,
               and
               all
               to
               be
               knowen
               :
               yet
               som
               parts
               are
               more
               easie
               and
               as
               milk
               ,
               meet
               for
               the
               weakest
               and
               youngest
               children
               to
               be
               taught
               ,
               and
               which
               they
               may
               vnderstand
               and
               conceiue
               of
               easily
               ;
               others
               are
               as
               stronger
               meate
               ,
               and
               more
               obscure
               ,
               wherewith
               they
               are
               to
               be
               acquainted
               after
               .
               But
               as
               in
               all
               other
               learning
               ,
               so
               it
               is
               here
               ,
               euery
               thing
               is
               to
               be
               learned
               in
               the
               right
               place
               .
               The
               more
               plaine
               and
               easie
               questions
               and
               places
               will
               still
               be
               expounders
               and
               masters
               to
               the
               more
               hard
               and
               obscure
               .
            
             
               But
               yet
               ,
               
               howsoeuer
               I
               like
               very
               well
               of
               all
               this
               ,
               you
               know
               that
               there
               are
               some
               who
               would
               not
               haue
               their
               children
               to
               be
               taught
               any
               religion
               ,
               nor
               to
               meddle
               with
               it
               at
               all
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               There
               cannot
               bee
               anie
               such
               who
               either
               loue
               or
               know
               the
               Gospell
               of
               Christ
               ,
               or
               regarde
               their
               owne
               saluation
               ,
               or
               the
               sauing
               of
               their
               children
               .
            
             
               The
               rest
               are
               to
               be
               pittied
               and
               praied
               for
               ,
               rather
               then
               to
               be
               answered
               .
            
             
               The
               Popish
               sort
               know
               the
               necessitie
               hereof
               :
               and
               therefore
               they
               labour
               principally
               to
               corrupt
               the
               youth
               ,
               and
               offer
               their
               pains
               freely
               to
               that
               end
               .
               They
               shal
               be
               the
               Iudges
               of
               all
               such
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               But
               it
               will
               take
               vp
               ouer-much
               time
               from
               their
               other
               learning
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               I
               directed
               you
               how
               to
               cut
               off
               all
               such
               exceptions
               :
               
               I
               would
               take
               the
               time
               to
               that
               purpose
               ouer
               and
               beside
               their
               ordinarie
               .
               It
               is
               but
               mine
               owne
               labour
               ,
               for
               a
               quarter
               or
               halfe
               an
               howre
               in
               the
               day
               at
               the
               most
               ,
               keeping
               them
               a
               little
               longer
               .
               Although
               if
               it
               should
               be
               part
               of
               the
               schoole
               time
               ,
               there
               would
               neuer
               be
               found
               any
               losse
               therein
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               But
               how
               will
               you
               teach
               your
               children
               ciuility
               &
               good
               manners
               ?
               which
               is
               principally
               required
               in
               Schollars
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               Religion
               will
               teach
               them
               manners
               :
               
               As
               they
               grow
               in
               it
               ,
               so
               they
               will
               also
               in
               all
               ciuil
               and
               good
               behauiour
               .
               The
               word
               of
               the
               Lord
               is
               the
               rule
               and
               ground
               of
               all
               ,
               to
               frame
               their
               manners
               by
               ;
               that
               is
               therefore
               the
               first
               and
               principall
               meanes
               .
            
             
             
               Secondly
               ,
               out
               of
               their
               Authours
               which
               they
               reade
               ,
               you
               may
               still
               take
               occasion
               to
               teach
               them
               manners
               ;
               some
               of
               their
               Treatises
               being
               written
               of
               purpose
               to
               that
               end
               :
               as
               
                 Qui
                 mihi
                 ,
                 Sententiae
                 pueriles
                 ,
                 Cato
                 ,
              
               Tullies
               Offices
               ,
               &c.
               
            
             
               For
               the
               carriage
               of
               youth
               ,
               according
               to
               the
               ciuility
               vsed
               in
               our
               time
               ,
               and
               for
               the
               whole
               course
               of
               framing
               their
               manners
               in
               the
               most
               commendable
               sort
               ,
               there
               is
               a
               little
               booke
               translated
               out
               of
               French
               ,
               
               called
               The
               Schoole
               of
               good
               manners
               ,
               or
               The
               new
               Schoole
               of
               vertue
               ;
               teaching
               youth
               how
               they
               ought
               to
               behaue
               themselues
               in
               all
               companies
               ,
               times
               ,
               and
               places
               .
               It
               is
               a
               booke
               most
               easie
               and
               plaine
               ,
               meet
               both
               for
               Masters
               and
               Schollars
               to
               be
               acquainted
               with
               ,
               to
               frame
               all
               according
               vnto
               it
               ;
               vnlesse
               in
               any
               particular
               the
               custome
               of
               the
               place
               require
               otherwise
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               How
               would
               you
               haue
               the
               children
               acquainted
               with
               this
               ?
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               The
               Master
               sometimes
               in
               steade
               of
               the
               History
               ,
               or
               if
               he
               will
               (
               at
               some
               other
               times
               )
               might
               reade
               it
               ouer
               vnto
               them
               al
               ,
               a
               leaf
               or
               two
               at
               a
               time
               ,
               &
               after
               to
               examin
               it
               amongst
               them
               .
               It
               is
               so
               plaine
               that
               they
               will
               easily
               vnderstand
               it
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               But
               if
               I
               could
               thus
               teach
               them
               Religion
               ,
               and
               Latine
               all
               vnder
               one
               ;
               it
               were
               a
               most
               happy
               thing
               ,
               and
               I
               should
               cut
               off
               all
               quarrell
               and
               exception
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               I
               will
               shew
               you
               how
               you
               may
               doe
               it
               .
               
               Cause
               your
               Schollars
               to
               reade
               you
               a
               Chapter
               of
               the
               New
               Testament
               ,
               
               or
               a
               peece
               of
               a
               Chapter
               ,
               as
               time
               will
               permit
               ,
               about
               twentie
               verses
               at
               a
               time
               ,
               in
               steed
               of
               the
               History
               mentioned
               .
               One
               night
               to
               reade
               it
               out
               of
               the
               Latin
               into
               English
               ;
               reading
               first
               a
               verse
               or
               a
               sentence
               in
               Latine
               to
               a
               Comma
               ,
               or
               a
               full
               point
               ,
               as
               they
               can
               :
               then
               Englishing
               that
               ,
               not
               as
               construing
               it
               ,
               but
               as
               reading
               it
               into
               good
               English
               ;
               so
               throughout
               :
               the
               next
               night
               to
               reade
               the
               same
               ouer
               againe
               forth
               of
               an
               English
               Testament
               ,
               into
               the
               same
               Latine
               backe
               againe
               .
            
             
               Thus
               euery
               one
               of
               those
               who
               are
               able
               ,
               to
               reade
               in
               order
               ,
               each
               his
               night
               ;
               all
               the
               rest
               to
               looke
               on
               their
               owne
               Testaments
               ,
               English
               ,
               Latine
               ,
               or
               Greeke
               ,
               or
               to
               harken
               .
               Let
               them
               beginne
               at
               the
               Gospell
               of
               Iohn
               ,
               as
               was
               
               aduised
               for
               the
               Greeke
               ,
               as
               being
               most
               easie
               ;
               or
               at
               Matthew
               if
               you
               please
               ;
               and
               you
               shall
               soone
               finde
               that
               through
               the
               familiarnes
               of
               the
               matter
               ,
               they
               will
               so
               come
               on
               both
               wayes
               (
               both
               in
               reading
               the
               Latine
               into
               English
               ,
               and
               English
               into
               Latine
               )
               as
               your selfe
               will
               maruell
               at
               ,
               and
               their
               parents
               will
               reioyce
               in
               ;
               and
               acknowledge
               themselues
               bound
               vnto
               you
               for
               to
               see
               their
               little
               ones
               to
               be
               able
               to
               reade
               the
               Testament
               into
               Latine
               .
            
             
               Besides
               that
               ,
               it
               will
               be
               also
               a
               notable
               preparatiue
               to
               learne
               the
               Greeke
               Testament
               ,
               when
               they
               are
               so
               well
               acquainted
               with
               the
               English
               and
               Latine
               before
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               But
               what
               Latine
               translation
               would
               you
               vse
               ?
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               Such
               as
               my
               Schollars
               haue
               :
               Erasmus
               or
               Beza
               ;
               but
               chiefly
               Beza
               ,
               as
               the
               more
               pure
               phrase
               ,
               and
               more
               fully
               expressing
               the
               sense
               and
               drift
               of
               the
               Holy
               Ghost
               .
               Therein
               your selfe
               ,
               or
               your
               schollars
               marking
               the
               peculiar
               Latine
               phrases
               ,
               when
               they
               reade
               first
               forth
               of
               the
               Latine
               into
               the
               English
               ,
               they
               will
               be
               able
               of
               themselues
               (
               when
               they
               reade
               them
               the
               second
               time
               forth
               of
               the
               English
               into
               Latine
               )
               to
               giue
               the
               same
               phrases
               againe
               ,
               and
               to
               imprint
               them
               for
               euer
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               But
               what
               time
               should
               I
               haue
               then
               for
               the
               History
               of
               the
               Bible
               ,
               that
               little
               booke
               which
               you
               mentioned
               ;
               wherof
               must
               needes
               be
               very
               singular
               vse
               :
               would
               you
               haue
               me
               to
               omit
               it
               ?
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               No
               ,
               in
               no
               case
               :
               one
               quarter
               of
               an
               houre
               spent
               in
               examining
               it
               before
               prayers
               in
               the
               forenoone
               ,
               
               a
               side
               or
               a
               leafe
               at
               a
               time
               (
               as
               I
               said
               )
               may
               serue
               for
               that
               ;
               and
               another
               quarter
               or
               not
               much
               more
               ,
               before
               prayers
               at
               the
               breaking
               vp
               at
               euening
               for
               this
               ;
               and
               so
               neyther
               to
               lose
               time
               ,
               nor
               to
               omit
               any
               thing
               necessary
               for
               their
               happy
               growth
               herein
               .
               In
               this
               reading
               of
               the
               Chapters
               so
               ,
               you
               shall
               finde
               that
               they
               will
               get
               as
               much
               Latine
               ,
               and
               goe
               on
               as
               fast
               as
               in
               any
               other
               exercise
               whatsoever
               ;
               and
               also
               will
               doe
               it
               with
               ease
               ,
               when
               they
               haue
               beene
               first
               well
               trayned
               vp
               in
               the
               Grammaticall
               translations
               ,
               and
               that
               each
               knoweth
               his
               night
               to
               looke
               to
               it
               aforehand
               .
            
          
           
             
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               But
               at
               this
               kinde
               of
               reading
               the
               Chapter
               ,
               the
               lesser
               sort
               which
               vnderstand
               no
               Latine
               ,
               will
               get
               no
               good
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               Yes
               very
               much
               .
               
               If
               after
               that
               the
               Chapter
               is
               read
               ,
               you
               vse
               but
               to
               examine
               some
               two
               or
               three
               ,
               as
               time
               will
               permit
               ;
               asking
               them
               what
               they
               remember
               of
               that
               which
               was
               read
               ,
               or
               how
               much
               they
               can
               repeat
               without
               booke
               of
               it
               :
               you
               shall
               see
               that
               in
               a
               short
               time
               they
               will
               so
               marke
               ,
               or
               so
               looke
               to
               it
               afore
               hand
               ,
               as
               they
               will
               (
               almost
               any
               of
               them
               )
               repeate
               you
               a
               verse
               or
               two
               a
               peece
               .
               If
               you
               vse
               to
               appose
               ordinarily
               for
               example
               ,
               some
               one
               whom
               you
               know
               can
               repeat
               a
               great
               deale
               ,
               it
               will
               much
               prouoke
               the
               rest
               ,
               to
               marke
               and
               take
               paines
               ;
               and
               especially
               if
               (
               as
               in
               other
               things
               )
               you
               vse
               to
               appose
               aduersaries
               ,
               whether
               can
               repeate
               the
               more
               .
               And
               thus
               much
               for
               that
               ,
               how
               they
               may
               get
               Religion
               and
               Latine
               together
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             XXIII
             .
          
           
             How
             to
             vnderstand
             and
             remember
             any
             morall
             matter
             .
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               YEt
               one
               other
               point
               remaineth
               ,
               which
               is
               of
               great
               vse
               ,
               and
               very
               fit
               to
               bee
               asked
               here
               ;
               how
               children
               may
               be
               made
               to
               vnderstand
               ,
               and
               conceiue
               of
               any
               ordinary
               matter
               meete
               for
               them
               ?
               as
               the
               points
               of
               the
               Sermons
               ,
               the
               History
               of
               the
               Bible
               :
               for
               euen
               most
               of
               these
               things
               may
               seeme
               to
               be
               aboue
               childrens
               capacities
               ;
               and
               I
               see
               vnderstanding
               to
               be
               the
               life
               and
               substance
               of
               all
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               This
               point
               hath
               been
               taught
               throughout
               in
               part
               :
               
               but
               this
               I
               say
               vnto
               you
               againe
               ,
               and
               you
               shall
               finde
               it
               most
               true
               ;
               that
               for
               any
               one
               who
               would
               conceiue
               of
               any
               long
               sentence
               and
               remember
               it
               ,
               let
               him
               diuide
               it
               into
               as
               many
               short
               questions
               as
               he
               can
               ,
               and
               answere
               them
               (
               though
               closely
               )
               in
               his
               minde
               ;
               it
               shall
               giue
               a
               great
               light
               .
               So
               do
               with
               your
               
               schollars
               in
               any
               thing
               which
               you
               would
               haue
               them
               to
               vnderstand
               :
               diuide
               the
               long
               question
               or
               sentence
               into
               many
               short
               ones
               ;
               by
               the
               short
               they
               will
               vnderstand
               and
               conceiue
               of
               the
               long
               .
               I
               shewed
               the
               maner
               in
               examining
               young
               schollars
               ,
               at
               In
               speech
               ,
               and
               in
               
                 Sententiae
                 pueriles
              
               .
            
             
               For
               other
               helpes
               ;
               as
               for
               marking
               the
               summe
               and
               drift
               of
               euery
               thing
               ,
               and
               also
               for
               obseruing
               what
               goeth
               before
               ,
               what
               followeth
               after
               ,
               the
               propriety
               of
               words
               ,
               those
               circumstances
               of
               examining
               and
               vnderstanding
               ,
               casting
               the
               words
               into
               the
               naturall
               order
               ,
               and
               the
               like
               :
               I
               referre
               you
               to
               the
               Chapter
               of
               construing
               
                 ex
                 tempore
              
               ;
               where
               these
               things
               are
               handled
               at
               large
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               Yet
               for
               my
               further
               direction
               ,
               giue
               me
               one
               ensample
               in
               a
               sentence
               ,
               in
               the
               storie
               of
               the
               Bible
               ,
               because
               wee
               were
               speaking
               of
               that
               last
               ,
               and
               how
               to
               teach
               children
               to
               vnderstand
               that
               .
               I
               take
               it
               there
               is
               the
               like
               reason
               in
               the
               Latin
               ,
               and
               in
               all
               things
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               There
               is
               indeede
               the
               same
               reason
               .
               I
               will
               giue
               you
               an
               instance
               in
               a
               sentence
               or
               two
               in
               the
               first
               Chapter
               in
               Genesis
               :
               and
               the
               rather
               because
               this
               is
               vsed
               by
               many
               ,
               to
               cause
               children
               to
               reade
               a
               Chapter
               of
               the
               Bible
               ,
               and
               then
               to
               aske
               some
               questions
               out
               of
               that
               .
               For
               example
               :
            
             
               1
               In
               the
               beginning
               God
               created
               the
               heauen
               and
               the
               earth
               .
               
            
             
               2
               And
               the
               earth
               was
               without
               forme
               and
               voyde
               ,
               and
               darkenesse
               was
               vpon
               the
               face
               of
               the
               deepe
               ,
               and
               the
               spirit
               of
               God
               moued
               vpon
               the
               waters
               .
            
             
               3
               Then
               God
               said
               ;
               Let
               there
               be
               light
               ,
               and
               there
               was
               light
               ,
               &c.
               
            
             
               I
               would
               propound
               my
               questions
               thus
               ,
               sundry
               wayes
               ,
               out
               of
               the
               wordes
               ,
               and
               that
               they
               may
               answere
               directly
               in
               the
               very
               wordes
               :
            
             
               Q.
               What
               did
               God
               in
               the
               beginning
               ?
            
             
               A.
               He
               created
               heauen
               and
               earth
               .
            
             
               Q.
               When
               did
               God
               create
               heauen
               and
               earth
               ?
            
             
               A.
               In
               the
               beginning
               .
            
             
               Q.
               Were
               not
               heauen
               and
               earth
               alwayes
               ?
            
             
             
               A.
               No
               ;
               God
               created
               them
               .
            
             
               Q.
               What
               a
               one
               was
               the
               earth
               ?
            
             
               A.
               The
               earth
               was
               without
               forme
               or
               fashion
               .
            
             
               Q.
               Had
               it
               any
               thing
               in
               it
               ?
            
             
               A.
               No
               ;
               it
               was
               voyde
               or
               waste
               .
            
             
               Q.
               Was
               there
               nothing
               vpon
               it
               ?
            
             
               A.
               Yes
               ;
               darkenesse
               was
               vpon
               the
               deepe
               .
            
             
               Q.
               Was
               there
               nothing
               else
               mouing
               ?
            
             
               A.
               Yes
               ;
               the
               spirit
               of
               God
               moued
               on
               the
               waters
               .
            
             
               Q.
               What
               said
               God
               then
               ?
            
             
               A.
               Let
               there
               be
               light
               ?
            
             
               Q.
               Was
               there
               light
               as
               he
               commaunded
               ?
            
             
               A.
               Yes
               ;
               there
               was
               light
               .
            
             
               Q.
               Was
               there
               no
               light
               before
               ?
            
             
               A.
               No
               ;
               God
               commaunding
               created
               it
               :
               there
               was
               nothing
               but
               darkenesse
               before
               :
               darkeness
               was
               vpon
               the
               deep
               .
            
             
               These
               questions
               and
               answeres
               arise
               directly
               out
               of
               the
               words
               ;
               &
               are
               the
               same
               in
               effect
               with
               those
               in
               the
               little
               booke
               ,
               called
               The
               Historie
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               These
               verely
               giue
               a
               great
               light
               ,
               and
               are
               marueilous
               easie
               ,
               and
               do
               cause
               that
               a
               childe
               may
               conceiue
               and
               carie
               away
               most
               of
               them
               ;
               whereas
               reading
               them
               ouer
               hee
               marked
               little
               in
               them
               .
               But
               yet
               here
               are
               some
               things
               darke
               ,
               and
               ouer-hard
               for
               children
               to
               vnderstand
               :
               as
               ,
               what
               is
               meant
               by
               created
               ,
               by
               the
               deepe
               ,
               and
               the
               mouing
               of
               the
               spirit
               vpon
               the
               waters
               ,
               &c.
               
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               It
               is
               true
               ;
               
               but
               yet
               by
               this
               meanes
               a
               childe
               shal
               haue
               a
               great
               light
               and
               helpe
               for
               vnderstanding
               ,
               conceit
               and
               memory
               in
               most
               .
               And
               for
               those
               things
               which
               remaine
               obscure
               ,
               the
               learner
               is
               to
               marke
               them
               out
               ,
               and
               inquire
               them
               of
               others
               ,
               or
               of
               the
               notes
               &
               short
               Commentaries
               vpon
               them
               ;
               and
               so
               by
               the
               other
               helpes
               mentioned
               :
               and
               especially
               considering
               the
               drift
               of
               the
               Holy
               Ghost
               ,
               and
               comparing
               with
               more
               plaine
               places
               where
               like
               phrases
               are
               vsed
               .
               But
               here
               it
               shal
               be
               the
               safest
               ,
               in
               posing
               to
               aske
               those
               things
               which
               arise
               clearly
               &
               naturally
               out
               of
               the
               words
               ,
               &
               may
               be
               fully
               vnderstood
               ;
               to
               omit
               the
               rest
               vntil
               God
               shal
               make
               them
               as
               euident
               .
               
               The
               easiest
               being
               first
               learned
               perfectly
               ,
               the
               rest
               will
               come
               in
               their
               time
               ,
               and
               the
               fruite
               according
               to
               your
               desire
               .
            
             
               And
               let
               me
               tell
               you
               this
               for
               your
               owne
               benefite
               :
               In
               your
               priuate
               reading
               Scriptures
               ,
               
               or
               other
               bookes
               ,
               where
               you
               would
               fully
               vnderstand
               and
               lay
               vp
               ,
               vse
               thus
               to
               resolue
               by
               questions
               and
               answeres
               in
               your
               minde
               ;
               and
               then
               tell
               me
               what
               you
               doe
               finde
               .
               The
               benefit
               which
               I
               doe
               conceiue
               of
               it
               ,
               makes
               me
               bolde
               thus
               to
               aduise
               you
               :
               but
               this
               by
               the
               way
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               Thus
               you
               will
               binde
               me
               vnto
               you
               for
               euer
               ,
               in
               directing
               me
               in
               euery
               thing
               ,
               so
               plainly
               and
               so
               easily
               ;
               and
               not
               onely
               for
               my
               children
               ,
               and
               how
               to
               doe
               them
               all
               this
               good
               ,
               but
               euen
               for
               mine
               owne
               priuate
               .
               Though
               I
               cannot
               requite
               you
               ,
               yet
               the
               high
               God
               ,
               who
               hath
               giuen
               you
               this
               heart
               ,
               and
               who
               neuer
               forgets
               the
               least
               part
               of
               the
               labor
               or
               loue
               which
               any
               of
               his
               seruants
               shall
               shew
               to
               his
               name
               ,
               he
               will
               certainely
               reward
               it
               .
            
             
               Thus
               haue
               we
               gone
               through
               all
               the
               maine
               and
               principall
               matters
               concerning
               this
               our
               function
               ,
               for
               all
               parts
               and
               exercises
               of
               learning
               ,
               which
               I
               doe
               remember
               ;
               so
               farre
               as
               doe
               belong
               to
               our
               calling
               :
               so
               that
               now
               I
               should
               leaue
               off
               from
               hindering
               or
               troubling
               you
               any
               further
               .
               Yet
               neuerthelesse
               ,
               whereas
               I
               remember
               that
               you
               said
               ,
               that
               God
               might
               direct
               this
               our
               conference
               ,
               not
               onely
               to
               our
               owne
               priuate
               benefite
               ,
               but
               also
               to
               the
               benefite
               of
               many
               thousand
               other
               ;
               and
               verely
               I
               see
               that
               hee
               may
               turne
               it
               to
               a
               perpetuall
               blesing
               :
               giue
               me
               leaue
               to
               propound
               some
               other
               doubts
               ,
               to
               the
               very
               same
               purpose
               ,
               to
               remoue
               whatsoeuer
               may
               hinder
               or
               bring
               scruple
               to
               any
               ,
               and
               to
               supply
               what
               yet
               may
               seeme
               wanting
               or
               hard
               to
               be
               effected
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               Goe
               on
               I
               pray
               you
               :
               I
               shall
               resolue
               you
               in
               all
               ,
               according
               to
               my
               poore
               ability
               ,
               as
               I
               haue
               in
               the
               rest
               .
               Now
               indeede
               we
               haue
               a
               fit
               time
               :
               and
               God
               knoweth
               whether
               euer
               we
               shall
               haue
               the
               like
               opportunity
               againe
               .
               Therefore
               propound
               whatsoeuer
               may
               tend
               hereunto
               .
            
          
        
         
           
           
             CHAP.
             XXIIII
             .
          
           
             Some
             things
             necessary
             to
             be
             knowne
             ,
             for
             the
             better
             attaining
             of
             all
             the
             partes
             of
             Learning
             mentioned
             .
          
           
             1
             How
             the
             Schoolemaster
             should
             be
             qualified
             .
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               My
               first
               question
               shall
               bee
               this
               :
               
               How
               you
               would
               haue
               your
               Schoolemaster
               qualified
               ,
               to
               be
               able
               to
               doe
               all
               these
               in
               this
               manner
               :
               hee
               had
               not
               neede
               to
               be
               euery
               ordinary
               man.
               
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               I
               will
               answere
               you
               ,
               how
               I
               thinke
               it
               necessary
               ,
               that
               the
               Schoolemaster
               should
               be
               qualified
               .
            
             
               1
               To
               be
               such
               a
               one
               as
               is
               sufficient
               to
               direct
               his
               Schollars
               in
               the
               things
               mentioned
               ,
               
               or
               in
               better
               ;
               according
               as
               the
               learning
               of
               his
               Schollars
               shall
               require
               :
               or
               at
               least
               such
               a
               one
               as
               is
               tractable
               ,
               and
               not
               conceited
               ,
               though
               his
               ability
               be
               the
               meaner
               ;
               and
               who
               will
               willingly
               vse
               any
               helpe
               or
               direction
               ,
               to
               fit
               him
               hereunto
               .
               Neyther
               is
               there
               any
               thing
               here
               ,
               but
               that
               any
               one
               meere
               to
               be
               admitted
               to
               that
               place
               ,
               may
               by
               his
               labour
               and
               diligence
               (
               following
               but
               euen
               this
               direction
               )
               attaine
               vnto
               in
               short
               time
               ,
               through
               the
               blessing
               of
               God.
               
            
             
               2
               He
               must
               resolue
               to
               be
               painefull
               and
               constant
               in
               the
               best
               courses
               ;
               
               of
               conscience
               ,
               to
               do
               a
               speciall
               seruice
               to
               God
               in
               his
               place
               :
               to
               be
               alwayes
               vpon
               his
               worke
               ,
               during
               schoole
               times
               ;
               neuer
               absent
               from
               his
               place
               or
               office
               more
               then
               vppon
               vrgent
               necessity
               .
            
             
               To
               cast
               aside
               all
               other
               studies
               for
               the
               time
               of
               his
               schoole
               ,
               
               I
               meane
               in
               the
               greater
               Grammar
               schooles
               :
               his
               eye
               to
               be
               on
               euery
               one
               and
               their
               behauiours
               ,
               and
               that
               nothing
               bee
               
               wanting
               to
               them
               :
               his
               minde
               vpon
               their
               taskes
               and
               profiting
               ;
               
               not
               posting
               ouer
               the
               trust
               to
               others
               ,
               for
               hearing
               parts
               or
               Lectures
               ,
               or
               examining
               exercises
               ,
               so
               farre
               as
               his
               owne
               leisure
               will
               serue
               .
               For
               he
               shall
               sensibly
               discerne
               a
               neglect
               ,
               euen
               in
               the
               best
               where
               they
               haue
               any
               hope
               to
               escape
               the
               Masters
               own
               view
               .
               One
               day
               omitted
               shall
               make
               them
               worse
               two
               dayes
               after
               .
               The
               Masters
               eye
               must
               feede
               the
               horse
               :
               therefore
               where
               he
               is
               compelled
               to
               vse
               the
               helpe
               of
               some
               schollars
               ,
               he
               is
               to
               see
               that
               they
               deale
               faithfully
               ,
               and
               to
               take
               some
               short
               tryall
               of
               them
               after
               .
            
             
               3
               Hee
               should
               be
               of
               a
               louing
               and
               gentle
               disposition
               with
               grauitie
               ;
               
               or
               such
               a
               one
               as
               will
               frame
               himselfe
               vnto
               it
               ;
               and
               to
               incourage
               his
               schollars
               by
               due
               praise
               ,
               rewards
               ,
               and
               an
               honest
               emulation
               ;
               who
               also
               dislikes
               vttery
               all
               seuerity
               ,
               more
               then
               for
               necessity
               :
               yet
               so
               as
               that
               he
               be
               quicke
               and
               cheerefull
               ▪
               to
               put
               life
               into
               all
               ,
               and
               who
               cannot
               indure
               to
               see
               sluggishnesse
               or
               idlenesse
               in
               any
               ,
               much
               lesse
               any
               vngratiousnesse
               ;
               and
               therefore
               can
               vse
               also
               not
               onely
               sharpenesse
               ,
               but
               euen
               seuerity
               with
               discretion
               where
               neede
               is
               .
            
             
               4
               Hee
               ought
               to
               bee
               a
               godly
               man
               ,
               of
               a
               good
               carriage
               in
               all
               his
               conuersation
               ,
               
               to
               gaine
               loue
               and
               reuerence
               thereby
               .
               And
               therefore
               to
               auoyde
               carefully
               all
               lightnesse
               ,
               
               and
               ouer-much
               familiarity
               with
               boyes
               ,
               or
               whatsoeuer
               may
               diminish
               his
               estimation
               and
               authority
               .
               And
               also
               to
               the
               end
               that
               God
               may
               grace
               him
               with
               authority
               ,
               to
               aime
               in
               all
               his
               labour
               ,
               not
               at
               his
               owne
               priuate
               gaine
               or
               credite
               ,
               but
               how
               he
               may
               most
               honour
               God
               in
               his
               place
               ,
               doe
               the
               best
               seruice
               to
               his
               Church
               ,
               and
               most
               profite
               the
               children
               committed
               to
               him
               .
               To
               expect
               the
               blessing
               of
               his
               labours
               only
               from
               the
               Lord
               ,
               and
               to
               ascribe
               all
               the
               praise
               vnto
               him
               alone
               .
               Thus
               to
               serue
               forth
               his
               time
               ,
               so
               long
               as
               he
               remaines
               therein
               ,
               that
               he
               may
               be
               euer
               acceptable
               vnto
               the
               Lord
               ,
               looking
               (
               as
               was
               said
               )
               for
               his
               chiefe
               reward
               from
               him
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               Indeede
               Sir
               ,
               such
               a
               man
               cannot
               doubt
               of
               a
               blessing
               ,
               and
               a
               reward
               from
               the
               Lord
               :
               yet
               neverthelesse
               he
               had
               
               neede
               haue
               good
               helpe
               ,
               and
               also
               to
               bee
               well
               rewarded
               and
               incouraged
               from
               men
               ,
               at
               least
               by
               them
               with
               whose
               children
               hee
               takes
               these
               paines
               .
               You
               thinke
               it
               then
               necessary
               that
               he
               should
               haue
               an
               Vsher
               :
               I
               pray
               you
               let
               me
               heare
               ,
               your
               iudgement
               of
               this
               ,
               and
               what
               a
               one
               you
               would
               haue
               his
               Vsher
               to
               be
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             XXV
             .
          
           
             Of
             the
             Vsher
             and
             his
             Office.
             
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               TO
               answere
               your
               questions
               ,
               
               and
               first
               for
               an
               Vsher.
               I
               thinke
               it
               most
               necessarie
               ,
               that
               in
               all
               greater
               schooles
               ,
               where
               an
               Vsher
               can
               bee
               had
               ,
               there
               bee
               prouision
               for
               one
               Vsher
               or
               moe
               ,
               
               according
               to
               the
               number
               of
               the
               schollars
               ;
               that
               the
               burden
               may
               be
               diuided
               equally
               amongst
               them
               .
               As
               Iethro
               exhorted
               Moses
               concerning
               the
               Magistracie
               ;
               wherein
               he
               was
               ouertoiled
               ,
               and
               the
               iudgement
               of
               the
               people
               much
               hindred
               for
               lacke
               of
               help
               ;
               that
               therfore
               there
               should
               be
               prouision
               of
               helpers
               made
               :
               so
               is
               it
               as
               requisite
               here
               .
            
             
               That
               so
               the
               Master
               may
               imploy
               his
               paines
               principally
               amongst
               the
               chiefer
               ;
               as
               the
               Vsher
               doth
               amongst
               the
               lower
               .
               For
               otherwise
               ,
               
               when
               the
               master
               is
               compelled
               to
               diuide
               his
               pains
               both
               amongst
               little
               &
               great
               ,
               he
               may
               much
               ouer-wearie
               himselfe
               ,
               and
               yet
               not
               be
               able
               to
               do
               that
               good
               with
               anie
               ,
               which
               he
               might
               haue
               done
               hauing
               helpe
               .
            
             
               Hence
               also
               it
               shall
               come
               to
               passe
               ,
               that
               another
               Schoolemaster
               who
               hath
               but
               two
               or
               three
               of
               the
               chiefe
               fourmes
               onely
               vnder
               him
               ,
               shall
               haue
               his
               schollars
               farre
               to
               excell
               his
               ,
               who
               is
               troubled
               with
               all
               ;
               though
               the
               other
               neyther
               take
               halfe
               the
               paines
               ,
               nor
               obserue
               so
               good
               orders
               .
               Besides
               ,
               that
               he
               who
               hath
               the
               care
               of
               all
               ,
               can
               haue
               no
               leasure
               nor
               opportunity
               to
               furnish
               himselfe
               more
               &
               more
               for
               the
               better
               profiting
               
               and
               growth
               of
               the
               highest
               ,
               nor
               for
               any
               other
               studie
               to
               answere
               the
               expectation
               of
               his
               place
               .
               
               It
               is
               in
               this
               case
               as
               we
               see
               in
               husbandrie
               ;
               where
               the
               meanest
               and
               most
               vnskilfull
               husband
               hauing
               but
               a
               little
               husbandrie
               to
               follow
               ,
               which
               hee
               is
               able
               to
               compasse
               thoroughly
               ,
               goeth
               ordinarily
               beyond
               the
               most
               skilfull
               beeing
               ouercharged
               ,
               though
               hee
               toyle
               neuer
               so
               hard
               ,
               and
               weary
               himselfe
               neuer
               so
               much
               .
            
             
               And
               howsoeuer
               wise
               order
               and
               policie
               may
               much
               help
               ,
               
               to
               the
               supply
               of
               the
               want
               of
               an
               Vsher
               ,
               by
               meanes
               of
               some
               of
               the
               schollars
               :
               yet
               it
               shal
               not
               be
               comparable
               to
               that
               good
               which
               may
               bee
               done
               by
               a
               sufficient
               Vsher
               ,
               because
               of
               his
               stayednesse
               and
               authoritie
               ;
               neither
               without
               some
               hinderance
               to
               those
               schollars
               ,
               who
               are
               so
               imployed
               .
            
             
               Besides
               this
               ,
               in
               the
               absence
               of
               the
               Master
               (
               which
               sometimes
               will
               necessarily
               fall
               out
               )
               how
               hard
               a
               thing
               it
               is
               to
               keep
               children
               in
               any
               awe
               without
               an
               Vsher
               (
               when
               boyes
               are
               to
               bee
               gouerned
               by
               boyes
               )
               euery
               man
               knoweth
               ;
               what
               inconueniences
               also
               come
               of
               it
               ,
               and
               specially
               what
               discredit
               to
               the
               schoole
               .
               And
               thus
               much
               for
               the
               necessitie
               of
               an
               Vsher
               .
            
             
               Now
               for
               the
               sufficiency
               of
               the
               Vsher
               ,
               
               it
               would
               be
               such
               ,
               as
               that
               hee
               should
               bee
               able
               in
               some
               good
               sort
               to
               supply
               the
               Masters
               absence
               ;
               or
               that
               he
               be
               such
               a
               one
               ,
               as
               who
               will
               willingly
               take
               any
               paines
               ,
               and
               follow
               any
               good
               direction
               to
               fit
               himselfe
               for
               his
               place
               .
            
             
               For
               his
               submission
               ,
               
               he
               should
               be
               alwaies
               at
               the
               Masters
               command
               ,
               in
               all
               things
               in
               the
               schoole
               ,
               euer
               to
               supplie
               the
               Masters
               absence
               ,
               as
               need
               shall
               require
               ;
               and
               to
               see
               that
               there
               be
               no
               intermission
               ,
               or
               loitering
               in
               any
               fourme
               ,
               if
               the
               Master
               bee
               away
               :
               but
               that
               euery
               one
               doe
               goe
               on
               in
               his
               place
               .
               Yet
               awarie
               care
               must
               be
               had
               ,
               
               that
               hee
               be
               vsed
               with
               respect
               by
               the
               Master
               ,
               and
               all
               the
               schollars
               ,
               to
               maintaine
               and
               increase
               his
               authoritie
               ,
               to
               auoide
               all
               disgrace
               and
               contempt
               .
            
             
               Also
               ,
               
               for
               the
               auoiding
               of
               all
               repining
               and
               malice
               against
               him
               ,
               
               there
               would
               be
               this
               caueat
               ;
               that
               he
               doe
               not
               take
               vpon
               him
               the
               correction
               of
               those
               which
               are
               vnder
               the
               Master
               ;
               without
               aspeciall
               charge
               ,
               or
               some
               extraordinary
               occasion
               .
            
             
             
               And
               to
               speake
               further
               what
               I
               thinke
               in
               this
               case
               ;
               
               That
               although
               I
               would
               haue
               the
               Vsher
               to
               haue
               authoritie
               to
               correct
               any
               vnder
               him
               ,
               or
               others
               also
               ,
               need
               so
               requiring
               in
               the
               Masters
               absence
               ,
               and
               all
               the
               schollars
               to
               know
               so
               much
               :
               Yet
               he
               shold
               not
               vse
               that
               authoritie
               ,
               no
               not
               in
               correcting
               those
               vnder
               himself
               ,
               vnless
               very
               sparingly
               ;
               but
               rather
               of
               himselfe
               &
               in
               his
               own
               discretion
               ,
               to
               referre
               or
               to
               put
               them
               vp
               to
               the
               Master
               ;
               so
               to
               keepe
               the
               schollars
               from
               that
               stomaking
               and
               complaints
               which
               will
               be
               made
               against
               him
               to
               the
               Parents
               and
               otherwise
               ,
               do
               he
               what
               he
               can
               to
               preuent
               it
               :
               vnlesse
               it
               be
               where
               the
               Vsher
               teacheth
               in
               a
               place
               separate
               from
               the
               Master
               ;
               there
               he
               is
               of
               necessitie
               to
               vse
               correction
               ,
               though
               with
               great
               discretion
               ,
               and
               so
               seldome
               as
               may
               be
               .
               Experience
               also
               sheweth
               ,
               that
               the
               schollars
               will
               much
               more
               willingly
               and
               submisly
               take
               correction
               of
               the
               Master
               without
               the
               least
               repining
               .
               Neither
               need
               this
               correction
               to
               be
               so
               great
               ,
               as
               to
               trouble
               the
               Master
               very
               much
               ,
               if
               right
               gouernment
               be
               vsed
               .
            
             
               All
               this
               must
               bee
               ordered
               by
               the
               discretion
               of
               the
               wise
               Master
               ,
               so
               as
               they
               may
               stand
               in
               awe
               of
               the
               Vsher
               :
               otherwise
               little
               good
               will
               be
               done
               .
            
             
               The
               principall
               office
               and
               imploiment
               of
               the
               Vsher
               ,
               
               where
               there
               is
               but
               one
               ,
               should
               be
               ,
               for
               all
               vnder
               construction
               and
               the
               enterers
               into
               it
               ,
               to
               prepare
               and
               fit
               them
               for
               the
               Master
               ,
               to
               lay
               a
               most
               sure
               foundation
               amongst
               them
               ;
               to
               traine
               them
               vp
               to
               the
               Masters
               hand
               ;
               and
               so
               to
               make
               them
               exceeding
               perfect
               in
               all
               the
               first
               grounds
               ,
               that
               they
               may
               goe
               on
               with
               ●ase
               and
               cheerfulnesse
               ,
               when
               they
               come
               vnder
               the
               Master
               .
            
             
               Also
               to
               the
               end
               that
               the
               Vsher
               bee
               not
               a
               meanes
               of
               the
               negligence
               of
               the
               Master
               ,
               
               but
               to
               preuent
               that
               ,
               and
               a
               number
               of
               inconueniences
               ,
               and
               also
               to
               tye
               both
               Vsher
               and
               Schollars
               ,
               to
               perpetuall
               diligence
               and
               care
               ;
               and
               withall
               that
               the
               Master
               may
               haue
               an
               assured
               comfort
               in
               the
               profiting
               of
               all
               his
               Schollars
               ,
               and
               boldenesse
               against
               the
               accusations
               of
               any
               malitious
               party
               ,
               this
               shall
               be
               very
               requisite
               :
               that
               the
               Master
               go
               ouer
               all
               once
               in
               the
               day
               (
               if
               he
               can
               possibly
               )
               to
               see
               
               what
               they
               haue
               done
               ,
               and
               to
               examine
               some
               questions
               in
               each
               fourme
               of
               them
               vnder
               the
               Vsher
               ,
               to
               make
               triall
               in
               some
               part
               of
               that
               which
               they
               haue
               learned
               that
               day
               ,
               how
               well
               they
               haue
               done
               it
               ;
               or
               at
               least
               amongst
               some
               of
               them
               where
               there
               are
               many
               .
               This
               account
               will
               inforce
               all
               ,
               both
               Vsher
               and
               schollars
               ,
               to
               a
               very
               heedefull
               care
               .
               It
               may
               bee
               shorter
               or
               longer
               ,
               as
               time
               and
               occasions
               permit
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             XXVI
             .
          
           
             Helpes
             in
             the
             schoole
             .
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               BVt
               be
               it
               so
               ,
               
               that
               you
               be
               destitute
               of
               an
               Vsher
               ;
               or
               hauing
               an
               Vsher
               ,
               yet
               your
               number
               is
               so
               many
               ,
               as
               you
               are
               not
               able
               to
               goe
               thorough
               them
               all
               ,
               in
               that
               sort
               that
               were
               meete
               :
               what
               helpe
               would
               you
               vse
               then
               ?
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               My
               helpes
               are
               of
               two
               sorts
               ;
               generall
               or
               particular
               .
               My
               generall
               helpes
               which
               are
               common
               to
               all
               schooles
               ,
               euen
               where
               there
               are
               Vshers
               ,
               are
               these
               :
            
             
               1.
               
               That
               which
               was
               noted
               amongst
               the
               generall
               obseruations
               ;
               
               to
               haue
               all
               my
               schoole
               sorted
               into
               fourmes
               or
               Classes
               ,
               and
               those
               so
               few
               as
               may
               be
               :
               though
               twenty
               in
               a
               fourme
               or
               moe
               ,
               the
               better
               ,
               as
               was
               sayd
               ;
               and
               my
               fourmes
               diuided
               into
               equall
               parts
               .
               This
               shall
               gaine
               one
               halfe
               of
               time
               ,
               for
               the
               reasons
               there
               mentioned
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               In
               euery
               fourme
               this
               may
               bee
               a
               notable
               helpe
               ,
               
               that
               the
               two
               or
               fowre
               seniors
               in
               each
               fourme
               ,
               be
               as
               Vshers
               in
               that
               fourme
               ,
               for
               ouerseeing
               ,
               directing
               ,
               examining
               ,
               and
               fitting
               the
               rest
               euery
               way
               before
               they
               come
               to
               say
               ;
               and
               so
               for
               ouerseeing
               the
               exercises
               .
            
             
               Also
               in
               straights
               of
               time
               ,
               to
               stand
               forth
               before
               the
               rest
               ,
               and
               to
               heare
               them
               .
               The
               Master
               to
               haue
               an
               eie
               and
               see
               carefully
               that
               they
               deale
               faithfully
               ,
               and
               make
               some
               short
               examination
               
               after
               .
               And
               in
               all
               lectures
               those
               two
               Seniors
               to
               be
               blamed
               principally
               for
               the
               negligence
               of
               their
               sides
               ,
               and
               contrarily
               to
               be
               commended
               for
               their
               diligence
               .
               This
               may
               bee
               a
               second
               and
               a
               very
               great
               helpe
               :
               like
               as
               it
               is
               in
               an
               army
               ,
               where
               they
               haue
               their
               vnder-officers
               for
               hundreths
               or
               for
               tennes
               ;
               as
               
                 Decuriones
                 ,
                 Centuriones
                 ,
                 &c.
              
               for
               the
               speciall
               gouernment
               of
               all
               vnder
               them
               .
               These
               who
               thus
               take
               most
               paines
               with
               the
               rest
               ,
               shall
               stil
               euer
               keep
               to
               be
               the
               best
               of
               the
               fourmes
               .
            
             
               A
               third
               might
               be
               added
               :
               
               which
               is
               Authority
               and
               good
               Gouernment
               ,
               which
               indeed
               is
               aboue
               all
               .
               But
               of
               that
               it
               will
               be
               fitter
               to
               speake
               by
               it selfe
               .
            
             
               The
               particular
               help
               where
               either
               an
               Vsher
               is
               wanting
               ,
               
               or
               else
               is
               not
               sufficient
               ,
               
               is
               by
               a
               Subdoctor
               ,
               one
               or
               mo
               ,
               according
               to
               the
               number
               of
               the
               schollars
               .
               The
               Subdoctor
               is
               to
               be
               appointed
               out
               of
               all
               your
               highest
               fourmes
               ▪
               euery
               one
               to
               be
               his
               day
               insteed
               of
               an
               Vsher
               ,
               to
               do
               those
               things
               which
               the
               Vsher
               should
               ,
               according
               to
               their
               abilities
               ;
               and
               so
               to
               obserue
               the
               behauior
               of
               all
               vnder
               them
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               These
               cannot
               but
               bee
               very
               worthy
               helpes
               .
               But
               here
               I
               pray
               you
               resolue
               me
               a
               doubt
               or
               two
               ,
               arising
               hereon
               .
            
             
               1.
               
               How
               will
               you
               diuide
               your
               schoole
               thus
               ,
               and
               especially
               your
               fourmes
               ,
               for
               the
               appointing
               of
               your
               Seniors
               ,
               that
               euery
               one
               in
               a
               fourm
               may
               be
               placed
               according
               to
               his
               learning
               ?
               which
               I
               take
               to
               be
               very
               necessary
               ;
               so
               as
               they
               shall
               not
               thinke
               ,
               that
               any
               are
               preferred
               by
               the
               fauour
               of
               the
               Master
               :
               also
               that
               all
               may
               sit
               as
               Aduersaries
               and
               fit
               matches
               ,
               and
               so
               to
               haue
               sides
               equally
               diuided
               ,
               to
               doe
               all
               by
               that
               emulation
               ,
               and
               honest
               strift
               and
               contention
               ,
               which
               you
               spake
               of
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               For
               my
               fourmes
               I
               would
               put
               so
               many
               in
               a
               fourm
               ,
               
               as
               possibly
               can
               goe
               together
               ,
               as
               was
               noted
               :
               the
               better
               will
               be
               continuall
               helpers
               to
               the
               other
               ,
               and
               much
               drawe
               on
               the
               worse
               .
            
             
               Secondly
               ,
               for
               the
               diuision
               of
               my
               fourms
               ,
               and
               election
               of
               Seniors
               ,
               I
               finde
               this
               the
               only
               way
               to
               cut
               off
               all
               quarrelling
               ,
               and
               to
               prouoke
               all
               to
               a
               continuall
               contention
               ;
            
             
               1.
               
               By
               voices
               ;
               all
               of
               a
               fourme
               to
               name
               who
               is
               the
               best
               
               of
               their
               fourme
               ,
               
               and
               so
               who
               is
               the
               best
               next
               him
               .
               Those
               who
               haue
               the
               most
               voices
               ,
               to
               bee
               the
               two
               Seniours
               of
               the
               fourme
               .
               These
               they
               will
               choose
               very
               certainly
               .
               Then
               to
               the
               ende
               to
               make
               equall
               sides
               ;
               let
               the
               second
               or
               Iunior
               of
               those
               two
               so
               chosen
               ,
               call
               vnto
               himselfe
               the
               best
               which
               hee
               can
               ,
               to
               make
               his
               side
               .
            
             
               After
               that
               ,
               let
               the
               first
               choose
               the
               best
               next
               ;
               then
               after
               ,
               the
               second
               and
               his
               fellow
               ,
               to
               choose
               the
               best
               next
               to
               them
               again
               :
               And
               thus
               to
               go
               thorough
               choosing
               vntil
               they
               haue
               chosen
               all
               the
               fourme
               .
               The
               two
               Seniours
               ,
               I
               say
               ,
               to
               be
               chosen
               by
               electiō
               of
               the
               whole
               fourm
               :
               then
               they
               two
               to
               choose
               ,
               or
               call
               the
               rest
               of
               the
               fourm
               by
               equall
               election
               ;
               the
               Iunior
               choosing
               first
               and
               so
               to
               go
               by
               course
               :
               If
               the
               Senior
               should
               choose
               first
               ,
               then
               his
               side
               would
               euer
               be
               the
               better
               ;
               which
               by
               the
               Iunior
               choosing
               first
               is
               preuented
               .
            
             
               By
               this
               meanes
               you
               shall
               find
               that
               they
               will
               choose
               very
               equally
               ,
               
               and
               without
               partialitie
               ,
               
               to
               the
               end
               that
               each
               may
               haue
               the
               best
               fellowes
               ;
               euen
               as
               gamesters
               will
               do
               at
               matches
               in
               shooting
               ,
               bowling
               or
               the
               like
               :
               and
               euery
               match
               shal
               be
               very
               equall
               ,
               or
               small
               difference
               amongst
               them
               .
            
             
               Also
               hereby
               all
               mutterings
               shall
               be
               cut
               off
               ,
               wherby
               some
               kind
               boyes
               will
               bee
               whispering
               to
               their
               Parents
               ,
               that
               their
               Master
               doth
               not
               regard
               no●
               loue
               them
               ,
               but
               preferres
               others
               before
               them
               .
               Thus
               also
               the
               painefull
               shall
               be
               incouraged
               ,
               when
               they
               find
               themselues
               preferred
               by
               the
               iudgement
               of
               all
               their
               fellowes
               ;
               and
               each
               made
               to
               striue
               daily
               to
               bee
               as
               good
               as
               his
               match
               or
               aduersary
               ,
               and
               for
               the
               credite
               of
               their
               side
               :
               and
               finally
               ,
               they
               wil
               labor
               that
               they
               may
               be
               preferred
               at
               the
               next
               election
               ;
               or
               at
               least
               ,
               not
               bee
               put
               downe
               with
               disgrace
               .
               This
               election
               would
               be
               made
               oftener
               amongst
               the
               younger
               ,
               as
               once
               in
               a
               moneth
               at
               least
               ;
               because
               their
               diligence
               and
               quicknesse
               will
               much
               alter
               :
               Amongst
               the
               Senior
               fourmes
               once
               in
               a
               quarter
               may
               suffice
               ;
               yet
               at
               the
               Masters
               discretion
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               This
               election
               surely
               is
               most
               equall
               ,
               and
               the
               benefits
               of
               it
               must
               needs
               be
               very
               great
               according
               to
               that
               which
               you
               haue
               sayd
               ;
               and
               chiefly
               to
               helpe
               as
               much
               as
               any
               one
               
               thing
               to
               make
               the
               schoole
               to
               be
               indeede
               a
               pleasant
               place
               of
               honest
               ,
               
               schollarlike
               ,
               sweete
               and
               earnest
               contention
               .
               But
               you
               spake
               of
               a
               third
               generall
               helpe
               ,
               which
               might
               be
               added
               ,
               which
               you
               sayd
               was
               aboue
               all
               ;
               to
               wit
               good
               gouernment
               :
               of
               this
               I
               do
               desire
               to
               heare
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             XXVII
             .
          
           
             Of
             gouernment
             and
             authoritie
             in
             schooles
             .
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               COncerning
               the
               gouernment
               of
               the
               schoole
               ,
               
               of
               which
               you
               so
               desire
               my
               sentence
               ;
               I
               do
               indeed
               account
               it
               the
               helpe
               of
               helps
               :
               as
               it
               is
               in
               all
               kinde
               of
               societies
               ;
               so
               principally
               in
               the
               schoole
               :
               out
               of
               which
               ,
               all
               other
               good
               and
               ciuill
               societies
               should
               first
               proceed
               .
               To
               the
               end
               ,
               that
               out
               of
               the
               schooles
               ,
               and
               from
               the
               first
               yeares
               ,
               children
               may
               learne
               the
               benefit
               and
               blessing
               of
               good
               gouernment
               ,
               and
               how
               euery
               one
               ought
               to
               doe
               his
               duetie
               in
               his
               place
               :
               and
               so
               from
               thence
               this
               good
               order
               and
               gouernment
               may
               be
               deriued
               into
               all
               places
               in
               som
               maner
               .
               
            
             
               This
               gouernment
               ought
               to
               bee
               ,
               1.
               
               By
               maintaining
               authoritie
               ,
               which
               is
               the
               very
               top
               of
               all
               gouernment
               ;
               and
               is
               indeed
               aspeciall
               gift
               of
               God.
               
            
             
               This
               authority
               must
               be
               maintained
               ,
               
               as
               in
               the
               Magistrate
               ,
               by
               his
               so
               carying
               himselfe
               ,
               as
               beeing
               a
               certaine
               liuing
               lawe
               ,
               or
               rather
               as
               in
               the
               place
               of
               God
               amongst
               them
               ;
               
               I
               mean
               ,
               as
               one
               appointed
               of
               God
               ,
               to
               see
               the
               most
               profitable
               courses
               to
               be
               put
               in
               practice
               painfully
               ,
               and
               constantly
               ,
               for
               the
               speediest
               furnishing
               his
               schollars
               with
               the
               best
               learning
               &
               manners
               ,
               to
               the
               greatest
               good
               of
               the
               schollars
               ,
               Gods
               Church
               ,
               and
               their
               countrey
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               It
               must
               bee
               maintained
               by
               a
               most
               strict
               execution
               of
               iustice
               ,
               
               in
               rewards
               &
               punishments
               .
               As
               Solon
               said
               that
               the
               
               Common-wealth
               ,
               was
               vpholden
               by
               two
               things
               ;
               
                 praemio
                 &
                 poena
              
               .
               That
               the
               painefull
               and
               obedient
               bee
               by
               all
               meanes
               countenanced
               ,
               incouraged
               and
               preferred
               :
               the
               negligent
               ,
               and
               any
               waie
               disobedient
               ,
               be
               disgraced
               ,
               and
               discouraged
               in
               all
               their
               euill
               manners
               ,
               vntill
               they
               frame
               themselues
               to
               the
               diligence
               and
               obedience
               of
               the
               best
               .
            
             
               Thus
               by
               the
               incouragement
               &
               commendation
               of
               vertue
               ,
               
               and
               discountenancing
               of
               vice
               ;
               you
               shall
               in
               time
               ouercome
               the
               most
               froward
               nature
               ,
               
               and
               bring
               all
               into
               a
               cheerefull
               submission
               :
               
               Wheras
               of
               the
               contrary
               ,
               dealing
               partially
               ,
               or
               making
               no
               difference
               betweene
               the
               good
               and
               the
               bad
               ,
               and
               much
               more
               discountenancing
               the
               painful
               and
               toward
               ,
               and
               countenancing
               or
               fauouring
               the
               idle
               and
               vngracious
               ,
               you
               shall
               see
               all
               ouerturned
               :
               
               for
               who
               will
               not
               frame
               himselfe
               to
               the
               lewdest
               ,
               when
               it
               is
               all
               one
               vnto
               them
               ,
               whatsoeuer
               they
               be
               ?
               our
               corrupt
               natures
               being
               so
               prone
               vnto
               the
               worst
               things
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               That
               in
               all
               their
               gouernment
               there
               be
               a
               true
               demonstration
               of
               conscience
               and
               loue
               ,
               
               to
               doe
               all
               as
               of
               conscience
               to
               God
               ,
               and
               of
               loue
               to
               the
               children
               ,
               for
               the
               perpetuall
               good
               of
               euery
               one
               ;
               and
               in
               an
               indeuor
               &
               study
               to
               draw
               them
               on
               by
               loue
               ,
               in
               an
               honest
               emulation
               ,
               with
               due
               praise
               and
               rewards
               ;
               abhorring
               cruelty
               ,
               &
               auoiding
               seuerity
               (
               as
               was
               said
               )
               more
               then
               of
               necessity
               .
            
             
               4.
               
               By
               beeing
               Presidents
               of
               all
               vertue
               to
               their
               children
               ;
               
               and
               being
               as
               carefull
               in
               their
               owne
               places
               first
               ,
               before
               the
               childrens
               eyes
               to
               do
               their
               dueties
               ,
               as
               they
               would
               haue
               their
               children
               to
               be
               in
               theirs
               .
               And
               so
               finally
               ,
               by
               their
               holy
               and
               faithfull
               cariage
               ,
               to
               seeke
               that
               God
               may
               rule
               ,
               and
               that
               the
               children
               may
               obey
               God
               :
               For
               then
               hee
               will
               both
               blesse
               all
               their
               labours
               ,
               and
               maintaine
               their
               authority
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               Surely
               si●
               these
               are
               worthy
               meanes
               to
               maintaine
               authority
               :
               which
               vnlesse
               it
               be
               preserued
               inuiolable
               ,
               all
               gouernment
               goeth
               downe
               ▪
               But
               I
               perceiue
               ,
               you
               vtterly
               dislike
               that
               extreame
               seueritie
               whereby
               all
               things
               are
               done
               in
               verie
               many
               schooles
               ,
               and
               the
               whole
               gouernment
               maintained
               only
               by
               continuall
               and
               terrible
               whipping
               ;
               because
               you
               haue
               
               so
               oft
               mentioned
               it
               as
               with
               griefe
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               You
               shall
               find
               that
               M.
               Askam
               doth
               as
               oft
               and
               more
               vehemently
               inueigh
               against
               it
               .
               
               For
               mine
               owne
               part
               I
               doe
               indeed
               altogether
               dislike
               it
               ,
               more
               then
               necessity
               inforceth
               :
               and
               I
               take
               it
               that
               I
               haue
               better
               grounds
               for
               my
               dislike
               ,
               then
               any
               one
               can
               haue
               to
               the
               contrary
               ;
               euen
               from
               those
               things
               which
               cannot
               be
               contradicted
               .
            
             
               1
               We
               are
               to
               imitate
               the
               Lord
               himselfe
               ;
               
               who
               though
               he
               be
               iustice
               it selfe
               ,
               yet
               is
               euermore
               inclined
               vnto
               mercy
               ,
               and
               doth
               not
               execute
               the
               seuerity
               and
               rigour
               of
               his
               iustice
               ,
               when
               any
               other
               meanes
               can
               serue
               :
               who
               if
               he
               should
               smite
               vs
               ,
               euen
               the
               most
               vigilant
               of
               vs
               all
               ,
               so
               oft
               as
               wee
               offend
               ,
               as
               many
               doe
               the
               children
               ;
               which
               of
               vs
               could
               liue
               ?
            
             
               2
               What
               father
               is
               there
               ;
               
               nay
               which
               of
               vs
               is
               there
               who
               is
               a
               father
               ,
               who
               would
               not
               haue
               our
               owne
               children
               rather
               trained
               vp
               by
               all
               louing
               meanes
               of
               gentle
               incouragement
               ,
               praise
               and
               faire
               dealing
               ,
               then
               with
               buffeting
               and
               blowes
               ,
               or
               continuall
               and
               cruell
               whipping
               ,
               scorning
               ,
               and
               reuiling
               ?
               Or
               which
               of
               vs
               could
               but
               indure
               to
               see
               that
               indignity
               done
               to
               our
               owne
               children
               ,
               before
               our
               faces
               ?
            
             
               Now
               our
               gouernement
               and
               correction
               ought
               to
               bee
               such
               ,
               as
               which
               the
               very
               parent
               being
               present
               (
               I
               meane
               the
               wise
               parent
               )
               might
               approoue
               ;
               and
               for
               which
               wee
               may
               euer
               haue
               comfort
               and
               boldenesse
               ,
               euen
               before
               the
               holy
               God.
               To
               this
               we
               are
               to
               striue
               and
               contend
               alwayes
               ,
               vntill
               at
               length
               we
               attaine
               vnto
               it
               .
            
             
               3
               Which
               of
               vs
               is
               there
               that
               would
               willingly
               liue
               vnder
               such
               a
               gouernement
               of
               any
               sort
               ,
               
               that
               our
               state
               should
               bee
               as
               the
               people
               ,
               vnder
               their
               taske
               Masters
               in
               Aegypt
               ,
               that
               we
               should
               bee
               smitten
               continually
               for
               euery
               little
               fault
               ?
               and
               labour
               we
               neuer
               so
               much
               to
               doe
               our
               duties
               ,
               yet
               still
               we
               should
               be
               beaten
               .
            
             
               4
               Let
               euery
               mans
               experience
               teach
               whether
               extreamity
               or
               excesse
               of
               feare
               
               (
               which
               must
               needes
               follow
               vpon
               such
               cruell
               and
               continuall
               beating
               and
               dulling
               )
               doth
               not
               depriue
               and
               robbe
               the
               minde
               of
               all
               the
               helpes
               
               which
               reason
               offers
               .
               So
               as
               that
               the
               minde
               running
               about
               that
               which
               it
               feares
               so
               much
               ,
               forgets
               that
               which
               it
               should
               wholly
               intend
               ;
               whereby
               in
               timorous
               natures
               ,
               you
               shall
               see
               some
               to
               stand
               as
               very
               sottes
               ,
               and
               senselesse
               through
               an
               apprehension
               of
               some
               extreame
               euil
               ,
               or
               by
               extremity
               of
               feare
               ;
               wheras
               they
               are
               otherwise
               as
               wise
               &
               learned
               as
               the
               best
               .
               Insomuch
               as
               all
               deuices
               are
               to
               be
               vsed
               to
               rid
               children
               of
               that
               kinde
               of
               ouerwhelming
               feare
               ;
               and
               sometimes
               correction
               for
               it
               ,
               when
               this
               feare
               is
               without
               cause
               ,
               and
               cannot
               be
               helped
               otherwise
               .
            
             
               5
               For
               the
               schollars
               themselues
               ;
               
               because
               all
               things
               should
               be
               done
               in
               the
               Schoole
               ,
               so
               as
               to
               worke
               in
               the
               children
               a
               loue
               of
               learning
               ,
               and
               also
               of
               their
               teachers
               :
               for
               that
               this
               loue
               is
               well
               knowne
               to
               be
               the
               most
               effectuall
               meanes
               ,
               to
               increase
               and
               nourish
               learning
               in
               them
               the
               fastest
               ;
               and
               also
               that
               gouernement
               which
               consists
               in
               loue
               ,
               is
               euer
               the
               firmest
               .
            
             
               Now
               this
               extreame
               whipping
               ,
               all
               men
               know
               what
               a
               dislike
               it
               breedeth
               in
               the
               children
               ,
               both
               of
               the
               schoole
               ,
               and
               of
               all
               learning
               as
               that
               they
               will
               think
               themselues
               very
               happy
               ,
               if
               the
               parents
               will
               set
               them
               to
               any
               seruille
               or
               toyling
               busines
               ,
               so
               that
               they
               may
               keepe
               from
               schoole
               .
               And
               also
               it
               workes
               in
               them
               a
               secret
               hatred
               of
               their
               Masters
               ;
               according
               to
               the
               sayings
               ,
               
                 Quem
                 metuunt
                 oderint
              
               :
               and
               ,
               
                 Quem
                 quisque
                 odit
                 perijsse
                 expetit
              
               ;
               whom
               men
               doe
               feare
               with
               a
               slauish
               feare
               ,
               them
               they
               hate
               ,
               and
               wish
               in
               their
               hearts
               to
               see
               their
               death
               .
            
             
               6
               In
               regard
               of
               the
               Masters
               themselues
               ;
               
               because
               by
               this
               milde
               and
               louing
               gouernement
               ,
               they
               shall
               both
               haue
               the
               hearts
               &
               commendations
               of
               the
               children
               presently
               ,
               when
               they
               see
               in
               the
               Masters
               the
               affections
               of
               fathers
               towards
               them
               ;
               and
               also
               they
               will
               euer
               keepe
               a
               sweet
               and
               thankefull
               remembrance
               of
               them
               ,
               all
               their
               life
               long
               :
               that
               euer
               when
               they
               haue
               occasion
               to
               speake
               of
               their
               Schoolemasters
               ,
               they
               will
               doe
               it
               with
               reuerence
               ,
               and
               praise
               God
               that
               euer
               they
               fell
               into
               the
               hands
               of
               such
               Masters
               :
               whereas
               of
               the
               contrary
               ,
               they
               shall
               be
               sure
               of
               the
               secret
               hate
               and
               complaints
               of
               the
               poore
               children
               presently
               ,
               where
               they
               dare
               speake
               :
               and
               euer
               
               after
               when
               they
               come
               at
               their
               owne
               liberty
               ,
               they
               will
               then
               report
               as
               they
               haue
               found
               ,
               and
               it
               may
               be
               farre
               worse
               .
               So
               that
               they
               can
               neuer
               speake
               of
               their
               Master
               ,
               but
               as
               of
               a
               thing
               which
               they
               abhorre
               :
               his
               name
               is
               as
               a
               curse
               in
               their
               mouthes
               ;
               many
               wishing
               they
               had
               neuer
               knowne
               him
               .
               For
               that
               then
               they
               had
               beene
               schollars
               ,
               if
               they
               had
               not
               falne
               into
               the
               hands
               of
               so
               cruell
               Masters
               .
            
             
               7
               And
               finally
               ,
               
               because
               in
               this
               louing
               ,
               equall
               ,
               milde
               and
               tender
               gouernement
               ,
               the
               Masters
               shall
               euer
               haue
               boldenes
               and
               comfort
               before
               the
               children
               ,
               their
               parents
               ,
               in
               their
               own
               consciences
               ,
               and
               before
               God
               himselfe
               :
               whereas
               in
               the
               cruell
               and
               vnmercifull
               tyrannie
               ,
               they
               shall
               haue
               nothing
               but
               feare
               ;
               feare
               of
               the
               children
               ,
               feare
               of
               their
               parents
               ,
               feare
               in
               their
               owne
               consciences
               ,
               feare
               for
               the
               Lord
               who
               hath
               said
               ,
               that
               there
               shall
               be
               iudgement
               mercilesse
               for
               them
               who
               shew
               no
               mercy
               ;
               and
               so
               the
               conscience
               being
               awaked
               ,
               to
               haue
               nothing
               but
               feare
               round
               about
               ,
               except
               the
               Lord
               doe
               graunt
               vnfained
               repentance
               to
               escape
               thereby
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               I
               know
               not
               how
               to
               answere
               that
               which
               you
               say
               .
               
               The
               Lord
               be
               mercifull
               vnto
               vs
               all
               who
               are
               in
               this
               calling
               ,
               euen
               for
               this
               sinne
               :
               for
               it
               is
               no
               small
               matter
               to
               moderate
               our
               passion
               ,
               and
               our
               correction
               .
               When
               the
               parents
               and
               others
               looke
               for
               great
               things
               at
               our
               hands
               ,
               and
               we
               find
               little
               good
               ,
               and
               oft-times
               those
               the
               worst
               ,
               whom
               we
               would
               fainest
               haue
               to
               doe
               the
               best
               :
               which
               of
               vs
               can
               herein
               iustifie
               our selues
               ?
               But
               I
               pray
               you
               Sir
               ,
               how
               would
               you
               haue
               our
               authority
               maintained
               ,
               and
               iustice
               executed
               ,
               which
               you
               so
               commend
               ?
               You
               would
               haue
               correction
               vsed
               ,
               and
               sometimes
               sharpness
               too
               ;
               as
               I
               obserued
               in
               your
               speech
               for
               your
               Schoolemaster
               .
               How
               wold
               you
               haue
               the
               iustice
               ,
               
                 inpraemio
                 &
                 poena
              
               ,
               in
               rewards
               and
               punishments
               ?
               Set
               me
               downe
               shortly
               the
               meanes
               :
               and
               first
               for
               rewardes
               and
               incourageme●ts
               ;
               after
               for
               punishments
               .
            
          
        
         
           
           
             CHAP.
             XXVIII
             .
          
           
             Of
             Preferments
             and
             incouragements
             .
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               FOr
               the
               rewardes
               of
               learning
               by
               preferments
               and
               incouragements
               ;
               
               thus
               I
               finde
               best
               to
               doe
               it
               :
            
             
               1
               By
               often
               elections
               of
               euery
               fourme
               ,
               
               in
               such
               manner
               as
               was
               shewed
               ;
               and
               so
               euer
               preferring
               the
               best
               thereby
               ,
               to
               higher
               places
               as
               they
               grow
               in
               learning
               .
            
             
               2
               By
               gracing
               all
               the
               Seniors
               ,
               
               all
               best
               in
               each
               fourme
               ,
               both
               to
               incourage
               them
               ,
               and
               to
               prouoke
               their
               fellowes
               to
               emulate
               them
               ,
               to
               striue
               in
               all
               things
               to
               bee
               like
               vnto
               them
               :
               and
               also
               to
               cause
               all
               their
               fellowes
               in
               all
               things
               to
               reuerence
               ,
               and
               preferre
               them
               ,
               both
               by
               giuing
               place
               to
               them
               and
               otherwise
               .
            
             
               3
               By
               preferring
               or
               putting
               vp
               those
               into
               higher
               fourms
               ,
               
               who
               profite
               extraordinarily
               .
            
             
               Also
               daily
               (
               if
               you
               see
               good
               )
               to
               giue
               higher
               places
               to
               them
               who
               do
               better
               ,
               vntill
               the
               other
               recouer
               their
               places
               againe
               ,
               by
               the
               election
               of
               the
               whole
               fourme
               ,
               or
               by
               their
               diligence
               .
            
             
               4
               To
               vse
               to
               commend
               euery
               thing
               in
               their
               exercises
               ,
               
               which
               is
               well
               or
               painefully
               done
               ;
               passing
               ouer
               the
               lesser
               faults
               onely
               with
               a
               word
               ,
               shewing
               our
               dislike
               :
               and
               that
               which
               is
               absurd
               ,
               with
               some
               pretty
               speech
               ;
               sharpely
               reprouing
               or
               disgracing
               their
               absurdity
               ,
               without
               further
               correction
               ,
               if
               there
               doe
               not
               appeare
               in
               them
               extreame
               negligence
               .
            
             
               Yet
               in
               praising
               them
               ,
               you
               are
               to
               beware
               of
               making
               any
               of
               them
               wantonly
               proude
               ,
               
               or
               letting
               them
               to
               be
               any
               way
               ouerbolde
               or
               malepart
               ,
               or
               of
               vsing
               them
               ouer-familiarly
               :
               for
               
               familiarity
               will
               certainely
               breede
               contempt
               ,
               and
               sundry
               inconueniences
               ;
               whereas
               a
               reuerend
               awe
               and
               louing
               feare
               ,
               with
               these
               incouragements
               ,
               shall
               continually
               nourish
               all
               vertue
               and
               diligence
               .
            
             
               5
               This
               might
               be
               vsed
               also
               with
               much
               fruite
               ,
               
               to
               incourage
               and
               prouoke
               :
               but
               this
               as
               shall
               be
               found
               meet
               ;
               To
               haue
               a
               disputation
               for
               the
               victorship
               once
               euery
               quarter
               of
               the
               yeare
               :
               as
               the
               last
               Wednesday
               or
               Friday
               of
               each
               Quarter
               in
               the
               afternoone
               ;
               the
               manner
               thus
               :
            
             
               Cause
               the
               two
               Seniours
               of
               the
               two
               highest
               fourmes
               to
               sit
               together
               in
               the
               vpper
               end
               of
               the
               Schoole
               ;
               
               and
               all
               the
               Schollars
               from
               the
               lowest
               which
               take
               construction
               ,
               vnto
               the
               highest
               ▪
               to
               aske
               of
               eyther
               of
               them
               ,
               each
               two
               questions
               in
               order
               ▪
               of
               the
               best
               questions
               ,
               which
               they
               haue
               learned
               in
               their
               Grammar
               or
               Authours
               :
               first
               the
               two
               Seniour
               aduersaries
               of
               the
               highest
               fourme
               to
               answere
               ,
               then
               two
               of
               the
               next
               .
               And
               then
               let
               those
               two
               of
               them
               foure
               ,
               who
               answered
               best
               (
               that
               is
               ,
               one
               of
               either
               fourm
               who
               answered
               most
               questions
               )
               bee
               the
               victours
               for
               that
               Quarter
               .
               Two
               other
               of
               their
               next
               fellowes
               ,
               or
               moe
               ,
               to
               take
               note
               ,
               and
               set
               downe
               to
               how
               many
               question
               's
               each
               answered
               ;
               and
               so
               the
               victorship
               to
               be
               decided
               .
            
             
               After
               this
               ,
               some
               vse
               to
               cause
               the
               schollars
               euery
               of
               them
               ,
               to
               giue
               something
               for
               a
               Praemium
               ,
               
               to
               the
               Victours
               :
               as
               each
               one
               a
               point
               or
               a
               counter
               ,
               or
               moe
               ;
               or
               else
               better
               gifts
               if
               they
               be
               well
               able
               ,
               of
               such
               things
               as
               they
               may
               without
               their
               hurt
               ,
               or
               the
               offence
               of
               their
               parents
               ,
               and
               as
               euery
               one
               will
               himselfe
               .
               These
               to
               bee
               diuided
               equally
               betweene
               the
               two
               Victours
               ,
               as
               a
               reward
               of
               their
               diligence
               and
               learning
               ;
               to
               incourage
               them
               ,
               and
               all
               the
               rest
               of
               them
               by
               their
               ensample
               to
               striue
               at
               length
               to
               come
               vnto
               the
               Victorshippe
               ;
               because
               then
               besides
               the
               honour
               of
               it
               ,
               each
               may
               come
               to
               receiue
               againe
               more
               then
               euer
               they
               gaue
               before
               .
            
             
               The
               practice
               of
               this
               disputation
               must
               needes
               bee
               very
               profitable
               ;
               
               though
               some
               good
               Schoolemasters
               doe
               doubt
               of
               the
               expediency
               for
               Schollars
               to
               giue
               any
               thing
               ,
               but
               to
               honour
               them
               otherwise
               .
            
             
             
               The
               two
               victours
               in
               regard
               of
               this
               dignity
               ,
               and
               the
               applause
               from
               their
               fellowes
               ,
               
               should
               vse
               to
               make
               some
               exercises
               of
               Verses
               ,
               or
               the
               like
               ,
               to
               get
               leaue
               to
               play
               on
               euery
               Thursday
               ,
               when
               there
               was
               no
               play
               day
               in
               the
               weeke
               before
               .
               And
               so
               they
               two
               continually
               to
               haue
               that
               day
               for
               their
               fellowes
               ,
               as
               a
               further
               reward
               and
               honour
               of
               their
               learning
               ;
               I
               meane
               onely
               in
               such
               weekes
               when
               they
               had
               no
               play
               before
               ,
               or
               at
               the
               Masters
               discretion
               .
               But
               this
               (
               as
               was
               aduised
               )
               as
               Masters
               shall
               finde
               it
               most
               expedient
               .
            
             
               6
               Aboue
               all
               these
               ,
               
               this
               may
               be
               vsed
               as
               a
               notable
               incouragement
               and
               prouocation
               ,
               
               both
               to
               Masters
               and
               schollars
               ,
               and
               very
               necessary
               ;
               That
               euery
               yeare
               ,
               at
               least
               once
               in
               the
               yeare
               ,
               there
               be
               a
               solemne
               examination
               by
               the
               Gouernours
               of
               the
               schoole
               ,
               or
               some
               specially
               appointed
               thereunto
               .
            
             
               Against
               which
               time
               ,
               
               all
               of
               any
               ability
               should
               prouide
               some
               exercises
               faire
               written
               ;
               as
               eyther
               Translations
               ,
               Epistles
               ,
               Theames
               ,
               or
               Verses
               ,
               according
               to
               the
               daily
               exercises
               of
               euery
               fourme
               :
               and
               withall
               some
               declamations
               where
               there
               are
               auncient
               schollars
               ,
               an
               Oration
               by
               the
               highest
               ,
               to
               giue
               the
               visitours
               intertainement
               .
               That
               in
               these
               their
               exercises
               ,
               all
               may
               see
               their
               profiting
               ,
               at
               least
               in
               writing
               ,
               and
               receiue
               some
               other
               contentment
               .
            
             
               Also
               all
               to
               keepe
               their
               chiefe
               exercises
               faire
               written
               in
               bookes
               ,
               
               to
               be
               shewed
               then
               ;
               that
               by
               comparing
               them
               together
               with
               the
               former
               yeares
               ,
               both
               the
               Masters
               diligence
               and
               their
               profiting
               may
               appeare
               ,
               and
               haue
               due
               commendation
               .
            
             
               Besides
               these
               also
               ,
               
               for
               the
               full
               examination
               of
               the
               schollars
               in
               all
               their
               learning
               ,
               the
               Schoolemasters
               and
               Vshers
               are
               to
               be
               appointed
               an
               order
               and
               course
               in
               their
               examination
               ;
               and
               themselues
               first
               to
               make
               a
               demonstration
               before
               the
               Visitours
               ,
               what
               the
               children
               can
               doe
               in
               euery
               fourme
               ,
               both
               in
               their
               Grammar
               and
               Authours
               ,
               and
               each
               kinde
               ▪
               as
               shall
               be
               fit
               .
               It
               would
               be
               done
               first
               by
               themselues
               ,
               because
               the
               schollars
               are
               best
               acquainted
               with
               their
               manner
               of
               examining
               ,
               
               and
               will
               be
               most
               bolde
               to
               answere
               them
               .
               After
               them
               
               the
               Visitours
               and
               others
               ,
               who
               are
               not
               satisfied
               ,
               to
               examine
               where
               ,
               and
               as
               they
               please
               .
            
             
               Then
               when
               all
               is
               done
               ,
               
               as
               the
               Visitours
               are
               to
               incourage
               all
               who
               doe
               well
               ,
               with
               praise
               ;
               so
               those
               who
               doe
               best
               ,
               would
               be
               graced
               with
               some
               Praemium
               from
               them
               :
               
               as
               some
               little
               booke
               ,
               or
               money
               ;
               to
               euery
               one
               something
               :
               or
               at
               least
               with
               some
               speciall
               commendation
               .
            
             
               It
               were
               to
               be
               wished
               that
               in
               great
               schooles
               ,
               
               there
               were
               something
               giuen
               to
               this
               end
               ,
               to
               be
               so
               bestowed
               ;
               fiue
               shillings
               or
               ten
               shillings
               .
               It
               would
               exceedingly
               incourage
               and
               incite
               all
               to
               take
               paines
               .
            
             
               This
               set
               solemne
               publike
               examination
               ,
               
               will
               more
               inforce
               all
               ,
               
               both
               Masters
               ,
               Vshers
               and
               Schollars
               ,
               to
               take
               paines
               ,
               and
               tye
               them
               to
               make
               conscience
               of
               their
               dueties
               ,
               and
               to
               seeke
               to
               profite
               and
               increase
               daily
               in
               knowledge
               ,
               that
               they
               may
               then
               answere
               the
               expectation
               of
               all
               men
               ,
               and
               giue
               vp
               a
               good
               account
               ;
               then
               any
               augmentation
               of
               maintenance
               ,
               or
               statutes
               ,
               or
               whatsoeuer
               deuise
               can
               possibly
               doe
               :
            
             
               Although
               all
               necessary
               prouision
               is
               to
               bee
               made
               ,
               both
               for
               the
               best
               statutes
               and
               orders
               ;
               and
               chiefly
               for
               sufficient
               maintenance
               ,
               and
               rewardes
               to
               giue
               all
               kinde
               of
               hartning
               and
               incouragement
               both
               to
               Masters
               ,
               Vshers
               ,
               and
               Schollars
               .
            
             
               Also
               if
               at
               such
               examinations
               ,
               
               something
               were
               giuen
               by
               the
               Visitors
               or
               other
               benefactors
               ,
               to
               be
               allowed
               vpon
               some
               poore
               schollar
               of
               the
               schoole
               ,
               who
               is
               of
               speciall
               painefulnesse
               and
               towardlinesse
               ;
               to
               the
               end
               he
               might
               be
               assistant
               to
               the
               Vsher
               :
               it
               would
               much
               help
               both
               Vsher
               and
               the
               younger
               schollars
               ,
               and
               animate
               all
               such
               to
               take
               paines
               ;
               striuing
               who
               should
               haue
               that
               preferment
               .
            
             
               Before
               such
               publique
               examinations
               ,
               
               all
               the
               parents
               of
               the
               children
               should
               haue
               notice
               giuen
               them
               :
               that
               all
               of
               them
               may
               know
               certainely
               ,
               the
               hopes
               of
               their
               children
               ,
               and
               contrarily
               ;
               and
               all
               who
               will
               may
               take
               tryall
               .
            
             
               That
               so
               neyther
               the
               parents
               may
               bee
               abused
               ,
               neyther
               schooles
               ,
               nor
               schollars
               discredited
               ,
               nor
               any
               lose
               their
               time
               ,
               
               nor
               be
               wearied
               out
               ,
               in
               that
               to
               which
               they
               are
               not
               fitted
               by
               nature
               ;
               but
               euery
               one
               to
               be
               imployed
               to
               that
               in
               due
               time
               ,
               to
               which
               he
               is
               most
               apt
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               These
               meanes
               constantly
               obserued
               ,
               together
               with
               that
               strift
               and
               contention
               by
               aduersaries
               ,
               must
               needes
               prouoke
               to
               a
               vehement
               studie
               and
               emulation
               ;
               vnlesse
               in
               such
               who
               are
               of
               a
               very
               seruile
               nature
               ,
               and
               bad
               disposition
               :
               but
               how
               will
               you
               deale
               with
               them
               ?
               you
               must
               needs
               vse
               extreame
               seuerity
               towards
               them
               ,
               who
               regard
               neyther
               preferment
               ,
               nor
               credite
               ,
               nor
               feare
               ought
               but
               stripes
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               For
               these
               and
               all
               the
               rest
               (
               besides
               the
               former
               preferments
               )
               to
               the
               end
               to
               auoyde
               this
               cruelty
               ,
               which
               is
               so
               odious
               to
               all
               ,
               we
               are
               to
               striue
               to
               this
               one
               thing
               following
               :
            
             
               7
               Aboue
               all
               ,
               
               to
               labour
               to
               worke
               in
               them
               some
               conscience
               of
               their
               dueties
               ,
               by
               planting
               grace
               in
               them
               ,
               and
               the
               feare
               of
               the
               Lord
               ;
               with
               childelike
               affections
               towards
               the
               Lord
               ,
               as
               towards
               their
               heauenly
               Father
               .
            
             
               And
               that
               also
               ,
               besides
               al
               other
               means
               of
               Religion
               ,
               spoken
               of
               before
               ,
               
               by
               calling
               oft
               vpō
               all
               ,
               to
               remember
               these
               things
               :
            
             
               1
               That
               in
               their
               calling
               they
               serue
               not
               men
               ,
               
               but
               God
               ;
               that
               they
               are
               Gods
               children
               and
               seruants
               .
               As
               the
               very
               drudge
               is
               Gods
               seruant
               :
               so
               they
               are
               much
               more
               ,
               being
               imployed
               in
               so
               holy
               a
               calling
               ,
               as
               to
               get
               knowledge
               and
               good
               nurture
               ,
               for
               the
               good
               of
               the
               Church
               of
               God
               ,
               and
               their
               owne
               saluation
               ;
               and
               principally
               that
               they
               may
               be
               most
               seruiceable
               to
               God
               in
               all
               their
               liues
               after
               ,
               in
               what
               calling
               soeuer
               .
            
             
               And
               therefore
               euer
               to
               bethinke
               themselues
               ,
               that
               Gods
               eye
               is
               vpon
               them
               ,
               
               and
               he
               markes
               all
               their
               labour
               ,
               and
               of
               what
               conscience
               to
               him
               they
               doe
               it
               ;
               and
               so
               will
               accept
               and
               reward
               them
               according
               to
               their
               faithfulnesse
               :
               so
               to
               be
               painefull
               and
               obedient
               ,
               not
               for
               feare
               of
               their
               Master
               ,
               nor
               of
               the
               rodde
               ;
               but
               for
               the
               feare
               and
               loue
               of
               God
               ,
               because
               hee
               hath
               appointed
               them
               so
               .
               And
               so
               herein
               to
               make
               a
               full
               demonstration
               ,
               who
               they
               are
               amongst
               them
               that
               are
               truely
               wise
               ,
               who
               feare
               and
               loue
               God
               indeede
               ;
               and
               who
               otherwise
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               To
               call
               on
               them
               oft
               ,
               to
               aime
               at
               this
               ,
               to
               vse
               all
               their
               
               wit
               ,
               
               their
               labour
               ,
               time
               ,
               and
               all
               their
               gifts
               ,
               which
               are
               Gods
               ,
               to
               get
               the
               best
               learning
               that
               they
               can
               ;
               to
               doe
               the
               Lord
               the
               greatest
               honour
               which
               they
               are
               able
               ,
               whilst
               they
               shall
               remaine
               in
               the
               earth
               ,
               and
               the
               best
               seruice
               to
               his
               Church
               ▪
               and
               thereby
               to
               walke
               towards
               eternall
               life
               .
               Because
               ,
               thus
               they
               shall
               be
               sure
               that
               God
               will
               honour
               them
               seeking
               to
               honour
               him
               ;
               &
               wil
               cast
               learning
               vpon
               them
               so
               far
               as
               shall
               be
               good
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               To
               put
               them
               oft
               in
               mind
               of
               the
               reward
               of
               their
               learning
               ,
               
               which
               they
               may
               looke
               for
               euen
               in
               this
               life
               .
               As
               those
               rewards
               which
               accompanie
               great
               learned
               men
               ;
               namely
               ,
               riches
               ,
               honours
               ,
               dignities
               ,
               fauour
               ,
               pleasures
               ,
               and
               whatsoeuer
               their
               hearts
               can
               desire
               ;
               and
               much
               more
               that
               rewarde
               which
               shal
               be
               eternall
               ;
               that
               if
               men
               should
               be
               vnthankfull
               ,
               yet
               God
               wil
               reward
               al
               our
               labor
               &
               study
               aboundantly
               ,
               euen
               euery
               thought
               &
               meditation
               that
               euer
               we
               had
               for
               his
               name
               .
            
             
               To
               this
               end
               ,
               
               to
               inculcate
               oft
               vnto
               them
               som
               of
               Salomons
               Prouerbs
               ,
               cōcerning
               the
               excellency
               of
               learning
               &
               wisdom
               .
            
             
               As
               ,
               Pro.
               3.
               13.
               
               Blessed
               is
               the
               man
               that
               findeth
               wisdom
               ,
               and
               the
               man
               that
               getteth
               vnderstanding
               .
            
             
               14.
               
               For
               the
               merchandize
               thereof
               is
               better
               than
               the
               merchandize
               of
               siluer
               ,
               and
               the
               gaine
               therof
               is
               better
               then
               gold
               .
            
             
               15.
               
               It
               is
               more
               pretious
               then
               pearls
               ;
               and
               all
               things
               that
               thou
               canst
               desire
               ,
               are
               not
               to
               be
               compared
               vnto
               her
               .
            
             
               And
               so
               forth
               ,
               the
               16.
               17
               ,
               &
               18.
               verses
               .
               Also
               Prou.
               4.
               7.
               8.
               
               &
               8.
               14.
               15.
               16.
               17.
               18.
               19.
               20.
               
               &c.
               &
               33.
               34.
               
               &c.
               These
               and
               the
               like
               ,
               being
               indeed
               chiefly
               meant
               ,
               of
               the
               diuine
               wisdom
               ,
               comprehend
               also
               this
               learning
               ,
               which
               is
               the
               way
               and
               meanes
               vnto
               that
               diuine
               and
               heauenly
               wisdome
               .
            
             
               By
               these
               meanes
               ,
               and
               remembring
               well
               the
               generall
               obseruations
               to
               put
               them
               in
               practice
               (
               as
               ,
               
               to
               make
               all
               grounds
               exceeding
               perfect
               as
               they
               go
               ,
               chiefly
               their
               Accedence
               and
               Grammar
               ,
               and
               to
               keepe
               them
               by
               continual●
               repetitions
               and
               examinations
               ,
               that
               they
               may
               goe
               on
               with
               ease
               ,
               
               and
               feeling
               a
               sweetnesse
               of
               learning
               ,
               
               and
               keeping
               a
               constant
               course
               in
               your
               gouernment
               ;
               obseruing
               wisely
               the
               nature
               and
               disposition
               of
               euerie
               one
               ,
               and
               framing
               your selfe
               therto
               accordingly
               )
               you
               shall
               vndoubtedly
               see
               the
               Lord
               so
               
               bringing
               them
               in
               obedience
               by
               your
               prayers
               ,
               as
               a
               very
               small
               punishment
               shall
               serue
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               It
               cannot
               he
               ,
               but
               if
               we
               can
               plant
               the
               feare
               of
               the
               Lord
               in
               them
               ,
               to
               worke
               in
               them
               a
               conscience
               of
               their
               duties
               ,
               it
               must
               needs
               be
               most
               auaileable
               ;
               and
               much
               more
               all
               these
               :
               but
               yet
               seeing
               that
               punishments
               also
               must
               needs
               be
               inflicted
               on
               some
               oft
               times
               and
               on
               all
               sometimes
               (
               because
               otherwise
               as
               you
               sayd
               ,
               iustice
               cannot
               be
               executed
               ,
               nor
               any
               gouernment
               or
               authority
               maintained
               )
               I
               pray
               you
               let
               mee
               heare
               ,
               how
               you
               would
               proceed
               in
               the
               same
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             XXIX
             .
          
           
             Of
             execution
             of
             iustice
             in
             schooles
             by
             punishments
             .
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               FOr
               inflicting
               punishments
               ,
               
               we
               ought
               to
               come
               thereunto
               vnwillingly
               ,
               and
               euen
               inforced
               ;
               and
               therefore
               to
               proceed
               by
               degrees
               :
               that
               who
               cannot
               bee
               moued
               by
               any
               of
               the
               former
               meanes
               of
               preferments
               ,
               nor
               incouragements
               ,
               nor
               any
               gentle
               exhortation
               nor
               admonition
               ,
               may
               be
               brought
               into
               order
               and
               obedience
               by
               punishment
               .
            
             
               And
               therefore
               ,
               
               first
               to
               beginne
               with
               the
               lesser
               kindes
               of
               punishments
               ;
               and
               so
               by
               degrees
               to
               the
               highest
               and
               seuerest
               ,
               after
               this
               manner
               obseruing
               carefully
               the
               natures
               of
               euery
               one
               ,
               as
               was
               sayd
               .
            
             
               1.
               
               To
               vse
               reproofes
               ;
               
               and
               those
               sometimes
               more
               sharpe
               according
               to
               the
               nature
               of
               the
               offender
               ,
               and
               his
               falt
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               To
               punish
               by
               losse
               of
               place
               to
               him
               who
               dooth
               better
               according
               to
               our
               discretion
               .
               
            
             
               3.
               
               To
               punish
               by
               a
               note
               ,
               
               which
               may
               be
               called
               ,
               the
               black
               Bill
               .
               This
               I
               would
               haue
               the
               principall
               punishment
               ,
               I
               meane
               
               most
               of
               vse
               :
               for
               you
               shall
               finde
               by
               experience
               ,
               that
               it
               being
               rig●●ly
               vsed
               ,
               it
               is
               more
               auaileable
               then
               all
               other
               ,
               to
               keepe
               〈◊〉
               obedience
               ;
               and
               specially
               for
               any
               notoriously
               idle
               or
               stubborne
               ,
               or
               which
               are
               of
               euill
               behauiour
               any
               way
               .
            
             
               The
               manner
               of
               it
               may
               be
               thus
               :
            
             
               To
               keepe
               a
               note
               in
               writing
               :
               
               or
               which
               may
               more
               easily
               be
               done
               ;
               to
               keepe
               a
               remembrance
               of
               all
               whom
               you
               obserue
               very
               negligent
               ,
               stubborne
               ,
               lewd
               ,
               or
               any
               waie
               disobedient
               ,
               to
               restraine
               them
               from
               all
               liberty
               of
               play
               .
            
             
               And
               therfore
               ,
               
               to
               giue
               them
               all
               to
               know
               so
               much
               before
               hand
               ,
               that
               whosoeuer
               asketh
               leaue
               to
               play
               ,
               or
               vpon
               what
               occasion
               soeuer
               ,
               yet
               we
               intend
               alwaies
               to
               except
               all
               such
               ;
               and
               that
               the
               liberty
               is
               granted
               only
               for
               the
               painfull
               and
               obedient
               ,
               which
               are
               worthy
               to
               haue
               the
               priuiledges
               of
               schollars
               ,
               and
               of
               the
               schoole
               ,
               because
               they
               are
               such
               ,
               and
               are
               an
               ornament
               to
               the
               schoole
               :
               not
               for
               them
               who
               are
               a
               disgrace
               vnto
               it
               .
            
             
               So
               alwaies
               at
               such
               playing
               times
               ,
               
               before
               the
               Exeatis
               ,
               the
               Master
               and
               Vshers
               to
               view
               euery
               fourm
               thorough
               ;
               and
               then
               to
               cause
               all
               them
               to
               sit
               still
               ,
               whom
               they
               remember
               to
               haue
               been
               negligent
               ,
               or
               faulty
               in
               any
               speciall
               sort
               worthie
               that
               punishment
               ,
               and
               to
               doe
               some
               exercises
               in
               writing
               besides
               ;
               either
               those
               which
               they
               haue
               omitted
               before
               ,
               or
               such
               as
               wherein
               they
               cannot
               be
               idle
               .
            
             
               But
               herein
               there
               must
               be
               a
               speciall
               care
               ,
               
               when
               they
               are
               thus
               restrained
               from
               play
               ,
               that
               either
               Master
               or
               Vsher
               ,
               if
               it
               can
               be
               conueniently
               ,
               haue
               an
               eye
               to
               them
               ,
               that
               they
               cannot
               loyter
               ;
               or
               some
               one
               specially
               appointed
               ,
               to
               see
               that
               they
               do
               their
               taskes
               .
            
             
               Also
               that
               they
               bee
               called
               to
               an
               account
               the
               next
               morning
               ,
               whether
               they
               haue
               done
               the
               taskes
               inioined
               ,
               vnder
               paine
               of
               sixe
               ierkes
               to
               be
               surely
               payed
               .
            
             
               Moreouer
               ,
               
               for
               all
               those
               who
               are
               notoriously
               stubborne
               ,
               or
               negligent
               ,
               or
               haue
               done
               any
               grosse
               fault
               ,
               to
               cause
               them
               to
               sit
               thus
               ,
               not
               only
               one
               day
               ,
               but
               euery
               play
               day
               cōtinually
               ,
               vntill
               they
               shew
               themselues
               truly
               sory
               for
               their
               faults
               ,
               and
               do
               amend
               ;
               becomming
               as
               duetifull
               ,
               and
               submisse
               as
               any
               other
               ;
               
               and
               vntill
               they
               do
               declare
               by
               good
               signes
               ,
               their
               desire
               and
               purpose
               to
               please
               and
               obey
               their
               Master
               .
               Vnlesse
               they
               be
               released
               at
               very
               great
               suite
               ,
               or
               vpon
               sufficient
               sureties
               of
               their
               fellowes
               ,
               to
               incurre
               otherwise
               their
               penalty
               if
               they
               amend
               not
               .
            
             
               This
               course
               straightly
               obserued
               ,
               
               partly
               thorough
               the
               shame
               of
               being
               noted
               in
               the
               ranke
               of
               disordered
               fellowes
               ,
               and
               also
               lest
               their
               Parents
               should
               knowe
               it
               ;
               and
               partly
               thorough
               depriuing
               them
               of
               play
               ,
               and
               more
               also
               thorough
               this
               strict
               account
               to
               be
               giuen
               of
               their
               taskes
               ,
               and
               seuerity
               of
               correction
               otherwise
               ,
               will
               more
               tame
               the
               stubbornest
               and
               prowdest
               ,
               thorough
               Gods
               blessing
               ,
               then
               anie
               correction
               by
               rod
               :
               and
               this
               without
               danger
               to
               the
               schollar
               ,
               or
               offence
               to
               their
               friends
               .
            
             
               And
               therefore
               ,
               
               when
               rod
               and
               all
               other
               meanes
               faile
               ,
               let
               vs
               looke
               carefully
               to
               this
               ,
               not
               to
               leaue
               one
               stubborne
               boy
               ,
               vntill
               hee
               be
               brought
               as
               submisse
               and
               dutifull
               as
               any
               of
               the
               rest
               .
               For
               ,
               those
               beeing
               brought
               into
               obedience
               ,
               the
               rest
               may
               easily
               bee
               kept
               in
               order
               ,
               with
               very
               little
               correction
               :
               whereas
               one
               stubborne
               boy
               suffered
               ,
               will
               spoile
               ,
               or
               at
               leastwise
               indanger
               all
               the
               rest
               .
            
             
               4.
               
               Sometimes
               in
               greater
               faults
               ,
               
               to
               giue
               three
               or
               fowre
               ierkes
               with
               a
               birch
               ,
               or
               with
               a
               small
               redde
               willow
               where
               birch
               cannot
               be
               had
               .
               Or
               for
               terror
               in
               some
               notorious
               fault
               ,
               halfe
               a
               dozen
               stripes
               or
               moe
               ,
               soundly
               laied
               on
               ,
               according
               to
               the
               discretion
               of
               the
               Master
               .
            
             
               Some
               doe
               only
               keep
               a
               bill
               ,
               
               and
               note
               carefully
               their
               seuerall
               principal
               disorders
               ;
               and
               now
               and
               then
               ,
               shew
               them
               their
               names
               and
               faults
               mildly
               ,
               how
               oft
               they
               haue
               been
               admonished
               ;
               and
               when
               they
               take
               them
               in
               hand
               pay
               them
               soundly
               ,
               and
               by
               this
               policie
               keepe
               them
               in
               great
               obedience
               .
            
             
               In
               this
               correction
               with
               the
               rod
               ,
               
               speciall
               prouision
               must
               be
               had
               for
               sundry
               things
               .
            
             
               1.
               
               That
               when
               you
               are
               to
               correct
               any
               stubborne
               or
               vnbroken
               boy
               ,
               
               you
               make
               sure
               with
               him
               to
               hold
               him
               fast
               ;
               as
               they
               are
               inforced
               to
               do
               ,
               who
               are
               to
               shooe
               or
               to
               tame
               an
               vnbroken
               colt
               .
            
             
             
               To
               this
               end
               to
               appoint
               3.
               or
               4
               of
               your
               schollars
               ,
               
               whom
               you
               knowe
               to
               bee
               honest
               ,
               and
               strong
               inough
               ,
               or
               moe
               if
               need
               be
               ,
               to
               lay
               hands
               vpon
               him
               together
               ,
               to
               hold
               him
               fast
               ,
               ouer
               some
               fourme
               ,
               so
               that
               he
               cannot
               stir
               hand
               nor
               foot
               ;
               or
               else
               if
               no
               other
               remedy
               will
               serue
               ,
               to
               hold
               him
               to
               some
               post
               (
               which
               is
               farre
               the
               safest
               and
               free
               from
               inconuenience
               )
               so
               as
               he
               cannot
               any
               way
               hurt
               himselfe
               or
               others
               ,
               be
               he
               neuer
               so
               peeuish
               .
               Neither
               that
               he
               can
               haue
               hope
               by
               any
               deuise
               or
               turning
               ,
               or
               by
               his
               apparell
               ,
               or
               any
               other
               meanes
               to
               escape
               .
               
               Nor
               yet
               that
               any
               one
               be
               left
               in
               his
               stubbornness
               to
               go
               away
               murmuring
               ,
               
               pou●ing
               ,
               or
               blowing
               and
               puffing
               ,
               vntill
               he
               shew
               as
               much
               submission
               as
               any
               ,
               and
               that
               hee
               will
               lie
               still
               of
               himselfe
               without
               any
               holding
               ;
               yet
               so
               as
               euer
               a
               wise
               moderation
               be
               kept
               .
               Although
               this
               must
               of
               necessitie
               bee
               locked
               vnto
               ;
               because
               besides
               the
               euill
               ensample
               to
               others
               ,
               there
               is
               no
               hope
               to
               doe
               any
               good
               to
               count
               of
               ,
               with
               any
               vntill
               their
               stomacks
               be
               first
               broken
               :
               and
               then
               they
               once
               thoroughly
               brought
               vnder
               ,
               you
               may
               haue
               great
               hope
               to
               work
               all
               good
               according
               to
               their
               capacity
               ;
               so
               that
               it
               may
               be
               ,
               you
               shall
               haue
               little
               occasion
               to
               correct
               them
               after
               .
            
             
               Moreouer
               ,
               a
               very
               child
               suffered
               in
               his
               stubbornnesse
               ,
               to
               scape
               for
               his
               strugling
               ,
               will
               in
               a
               short
               time
               come
               to
               trouble
               two
               or
               three
               men
               to
               take
               him
               vp
               ,
               and
               to
               correct
               him
               without
               danger
               of
               hurting
               himselfe
               ,
               or
               others
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               To
               be
               very
               wary
               for
               smiting
               them
               ouer
               the
               backes
               ,
               
               in
               any
               case
               ,
               or
               in
               such
               sort
               as
               in
               any
               way
               to
               hurt
               or
               indanger
               them
               .
               To
               the
               end
               to
               preuent
               all
               mischiefes
               ,
               for
               our
               owne
               comfort
               ;
               and
               to
               cut
               off
               all
               occasions
               from
               quarrelling
               parents
               or
               euill
               reports
               of
               the
               schoole
               .
               And
               withall
               ,
               to
               auoid
               for
               these
               causes
               ,
               all
               smiting
               them
               vpon
               the
               head
               ,
               with
               hand
               ,
               rod
               ,
               or
               ferula
               .
               
               Also
               to
               the
               end
               that
               we
               may
               auoid
               all
               danger
               and
               feare
               for
               desperate
               boyes
               hurting
               themselues
               ,
               not
               to
               vse
               to
               threaten
               them
               afore
               ,
               and
               when
               they
               hane
               done
               any
               notorious
               fault
               ,
               nor
               to
               let
               them
               know
               when
               they
               shall
               be
               beaten
               ;
               but
               when
               they
               commit
               a
               new
               fault
               ,
               or
               that
               wee
               see
               the
               schoole
               most
               full
               or
               opportunity
               most
               fit
               to
               take
               them
               of
               a
               sodaine
               .
            
             
             
               3.
               
               That
               the
               Master
               do
               not
               in
               any
               case
               abase
               himselfe
               ,
               
               to
               striue
               or
               struggle
               with
               any
               boy
               to
               take
               him
               vp
               :
               but
               to
               appoint
               other
               〈◊〉
               the
               strongest
               to
               do
               it
               ,
               where
               such
               need
               is
               ,
               in
               such
               sort
               as
               was
               shewed
               before
               ;
               and
               the
               rather
               for
               feare
               of
               hurting
               them
               in
               his
               anger
               ,
               &
               for
               the
               euils
               which
               may
               come
               therof
               ,
               &
               which
               som
               Schoolemasters
               haue
               lamented
               after
               .
            
             
               4.
               
               That
               the
               Masters
               and
               Vshers
               also
               ,
               do
               by
               all
               meanes
               ,
               auoide
               all
               furious
               anger
               ,
               
               threatning
               ,
               cha●ing
               ,
               fretting
               ,
               reuiling
               :
               for
               these
               things
               will
               diminish
               authoritie
               ,
               and
               may
               do
               much
               hurt
               ,
               and
               much
               indanger
               many
               waies
               .
            
             
               And
               therefore
               of
               the
               contrary
               ,
               
               that
               all
               their
               correction
               be
               done
               with
               authority
               ,
               and
               with
               a
               wise
               and
               sober
               moderation
               ,
               in
               a
               demonstration
               of
               duety
               to
               God
               ,
               and
               loue
               to
               the
               children
               ,
               for
               their
               amendment
               ,
               and
               the
               reformation
               of
               their
               euill
               manners
               .
            
             
               Finally
               ,
               
               as
               God
               hath
               sanctified
               the
               rod
               and
               correction
               ,
               to
               cure
               the
               euils
               of
               their
               conditions
               ,
               to
               driue
               out
               that
               folly
               which
               is
               bound
               vp
               in
               their
               hearts
               ,
               to
               saue
               their
               soules
               from
               hell
               ,
               and
               to
               giue
               them
               wisdome
               ;
               so
               it
               is
               to
               be
               vsed
               as
               Gods
               instrument
               to
               these
               purposes
               .
               To
               spare
               them
               in
               these
               cases
               is
               to
               hate
               them
               .
               
               To
               loue
               them
               is
               to
               correct
               them
               betime
               .
               Do
               it
               vnder
               God
               ,
               and
               for
               him
               to
               these
               ends
               and
               with
               these
               cautions
               ,
               and
               you
               shall
               neuer
               hurt
               them
               :
               you
               haue
               the
               Lord
               for
               your
               warrant
               .
               Correction
               in
               such
               manner
               ,
               for
               stubbornnesse
               ,
               negligence
               and
               carelesnesse
               ,
               is
               not
               to
               be
               accounted
               ouer-great
               seueritie
               ,
               much
               lesse
               crueltie
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               But
               how
               hard
               a
               matter
               is
               it
               to
               keepe
               this
               moderation
               in
               correcting
               ,
               and
               thus
               to
               temper
               our
               anger
               !
               Surely
               ,
               it
               must
               bee
               a
               greater
               worke
               then
               of
               flesh
               and
               blood
               :
               how
               may
               wee
               attaine
               vnto
               it
               ?
               It
               is
               a
               matter
               which
               hath
               often
               times
               troubled
               me
               ,
               but
               I
               haue
               not
               been
               able
               to
               ouercome
               it
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               I
               doe
               not
               condemne
               all
               anger
               in
               vs
               :
               
               nay
               ,
               anger
               in
               the
               Schoole-master
               is
               as
               necessary
               as
               in
               any
               other
               ,
               
               to
               be
               angry
               at
               the
               negligence
               and
               other
               vices
               of
               the
               children
               ;
               for
               God
               hath
               ordained
               this
               to
               be
               a
               meanes
               ,
               to
               whet
               vs
               on
               to
               do
               our
               duties
               ,
               &
               for
               the
               reformation
               &
               good
               of
               our
               schollars
               ,
               
               to
               keepe
               them
               euer
               in
               a
               holy
               awe
               by
               the
               feare
               of
               it
               .
               Yea
               ,
               sometimes
               in
               more
               grieuous
               offenses
               ,
               God
               is
               wonderfully
               pleased
               with
               it
               ,
               though
               it
               be
               more
               vehement
               ;
               as
               we
               may
               see
               in
               the
               anger
               of
               Moses
               &
               Phineas
               ,
               so
               that
               we
               tēper
               it
               in
               such
               sort
               ,
               as
               that
               we
               sin
               not
               in
               it
               .
               That
               it
               do
               not
               cause
               vs
               to
               break
               out
               to
               reuiling
               ,
               fretting
               ,
               chafing
               ,
               blowes
               on
               the
               head
               ,
               or
               otherwise
               to
               any
               cruell
               or
               vnmercifull
               dealing
               with
               the
               children
               ,
               to
               vse
               them
               worse
               ,
               then
               wee
               would
               vse
               a
               dogge
               ,
               as
               we
               say
               :
            
             
               But
               that
               wee
               euer
               remember
               ,
               that
               they
               are
               children
               ,
               Gods
               children
               ,
               heires
               of
               his
               kingdome
               ;
               we
               are
               to
               nu●ture
               them
               onely
               vnder
               him
               ,
               to
               traine
               them
               vp
               for
               him
               ,
               and
               for
               his
               Church
               ;
               nor
               to
               correct
               nature
               but
               vice
               ;
               to
               do
               all
               to
               the
               end
               to
               make
               them
               men
               .
            
             
               Now
               the
               helpes
               of
               repressing
               this
               our
               anger
               ,
               
               are
               the
               wise
               consideration
               of
               those
               things
               which
               I
               haue
               mentioned
               ,
               or
               the
               like
               .
               As
               to
               keep
               a
               continuall
               memory
               ,
               whose
               the
               children
               are
               ;
               what
               they
               are
               ;
               for
               whom
               we
               bring
               them
               vp
               ;
               vnder
               whom
               and
               in
               whose
               place
               ;
               whether
               we
               would
               haue
               God
               angry
               at
               vs
               ,
               &
               to
               smite
               vs
               ,
               as
               we
               do
               the
               children
               ,
               for
               euery
               fault
               which
               wee
               do
               :
               how
               we
               would
               haue
               our
               owne
               children
               dealt
               withall
               :
               and
               also
               Gods
               iustice
               to
               measure
               to
               vs
               or
               ours
               ,
               with
               what
               measure
               we
               mete
               to
               others
               .
               Besides
               ,
               to
               remember
               ,
               that
               anger
               will
               blinde
               our
               mindes
               ,
               that
               we
               cannot
               see
               to
               correct
               or
               vse
               any
               right
               moderation
               .
            
             
               Moreouer
               ,
               to
               haue
               euer
               in
               mind
               ,
               the
               mischiefes
               that
               come
               of
               anger
               ;
               how
               it
               will
               diminish
               our
               authority
               ,
               and
               disgrace
               vs
               extremelie
               in
               the
               eyes
               of
               the
               children
               ,
               when
               it
               is
               immoderate
               ,
               and
               without
               iust
               cause
               .
               Also
               that
               in
               our
               anger
               ,
               we
               may
               do
               that
               euill
               in
               a
               moment
               ,
               which
               we
               shall
               repent
               all
               our
               liues
               long
               .
               And
               the
               rather
               ,
               because
               Sathan
               watcheth
               to
               get
               aduantage
               against
               vs
               ,
               to
               bring
               vs
               to
               some
               notable
               euils
               in
               our
               anger
               .
               Into
               whose
               hand
               ,
               it
               is
               iust
               with
               God
               to
               leaue
               vs
               ,
               because
               we
               would
               not
               watch
               ouer
               this
               passion
               to
               keepe
               it
               in
               temper
               ;
               when
               we
               know
               that
               of
               all
               other
               our
               affections
               we
               mostly
               open
               to
               his
               malice
               in
               this
               ,
               by
               reason
               of
               our
               continuall
               occasions
               of
               anger
               .
            
             
             
               Therefore
               to
               conclude
               this
               point
               ,
               as
               wee
               are
               to
               vse
               all
               wisdome
               to
               preuent
               these
               euills
               ;
               so
               principally
               ,
               a
               constant
               course
               in
               obseruing
               all
               orders
               ,
               shall
               preuaile
               maruellously
               ,
               by
               cutting
               off
               most
               occasions
               of
               anger
               .
            
             
               And
               finally
               ,
               when
               all
               other
               meanes
               faile
               of
               conquering
               this
               vnruly
               passion
               :
               let
               vs
               call
               to
               mind
               the
               means
               ,
               which
               the
               Lord
               hath
               sanctified
               to
               bring
               euery
               thought
               into
               obedience
               ;
               
               to
               wit
               ,
               his
               heauenly
               word
               and
               praier
               .
               To
               this
               end
               it
               shall
               bee
               necessary
               ,
               to
               haue
               euer
               in
               minde
               ,
               some
               speciall
               places
               of
               holie
               scripture
               against
               anger
               ;
               as
               these
               and
               the
               like
               :
            
             
               Be
               angry
               but
               sin
               not
               ,
               
               let
               not
               the
               sunne
               goe
               downe
               vpon
               your
               wrath
               :
               neyther
               giue
               place
               to
               the
               diuell
               .
            
             
               Bee
               slowe
               to
               wrath
               :
               
               For
               ,
               the
               wrath
               of
               man
               doth
               not
               accomplish
               the
               righteousnesse
               of
               God.
               
            
             
               Cease
               from
               anger
               ,
               
               leaue
               off
               wrath
               :
               fret
               not
               thy selfe
               also
               to
               do
               euill
               .
            
             
               A
               foole
               in
               a
               day
               is
               knowne
               by
               his
               anger
               .
            
             
               Be
               not
               of
               a
               hastie
               spirit
               ,
               to
               be
               angrie
               :
               for
               anger
               resteth
               in
               the
               bosome
               of
               fooles
               .
            
             
               The
               angry
               man
               is
               said
               to
               exalt
               folly
               ,
               to
               set
               vp
               his
               folly
               to
               be
               seene
               of
               all
               .
            
             
               A
               man
               of
               much
               anger
               shal
               suffer
               punishmēt
               :
               
               and
               though
               thou
               deliuer
               him
               ,
               yet
               wil
               his
               anger
               come
               againe
               .
            
             
               In
               a
               word
               ,
               that
               seuere
               denuntiation
               of
               our
               Sauior
               for
               this
               vndiscreete
               anger
               ,
               breaking
               out
               into
               euill
               speeches
               ,
               may
               humble
               vs
               continually
               and
               make
               vs
               afraide
               of
               this
               sinne
               :
            
             
               That
               whosoeuer
               is
               angry
               with
               his
               brother
               vnaduisedly
               ,
               
               shall
               be
               culpable
               of
               iudgement
               [
               or
               subiect
               to
               punishment
               .
               ]
               
               And
               whosoeuer
               shall
               say
               vnto
               his
               brother
               Racha
               ,
               shall
               bee
               worthy
               to
               be
               punished
               by
               the
               Councell
               ;
               and
               whosoeuer
               shall
               say
               foole
               shal
               be
               worthy
               to
               be
               punished
               with
               hell
               fire
               .
            
             
               By
               all
               which
               words
               it
               is
               most
               euident
               ,
               that
               our
               vndiscreete
               and
               hastie
               anger
               which
               ouertakes
               vs
               too
               oft
               in
               our
               places
               ,
               making
               vs
               to
               breake
               out
               (
               vnlesse
               wee
               bee
               more
               watchfull
               )
               not
               onely
               into
               reuiling
               speeches
               ,
               but
               also
               to
               blowes
               ,
               and
               to
               great
               seueritie
               ,
               is
               highly
               displeasing
               to
               
               the
               Lord
               ;
               and
               it
               dooth
               exceedingly
               indaunger
               vs
               for
               his
               wrath
               and
               vengeance
               ,
               vnlesse
               we
               be
               daily
               humbled
               by
               vnfained
               repentance
               for
               it
               :
               and
               yet
               so
               ,
               as
               that
               we
               cannot
               looke
               to
               escape
               some
               like
               measure
               from
               him
               ,
               that
               we
               or
               ours
               shal
               surely
               feele
               his
               hand
               ,
               vnlesse
               we
               preuent
               and
               amend
               it
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               These
               are
               worthy
               places
               of
               holy
               Scriptures
               ;
               and
               able
               to
               stay
               vs
               ,
               if
               we
               could
               keepe
               them
               in
               memory
               .
               But
               yet
               euen
               in
               the
               most
               moderate
               ,
               the
               very
               desire
               to
               do
               good
               ,
               and
               to
               answer
               our
               places
               ,
               moued
               by
               the
               vntowardnes
               and
               carelesnesse
               of
               many
               of
               our
               children
               ,
               doth
               cause
               vs
               sometimes
               to
               forget
               our selues
               ,
               and
               to
               breake
               out
               ouer-much
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               God
               hath
               left
               this
               to
               our
               calling
               ,
               
               as
               a
               meanes
               to
               trie
               vs
               ,
               and
               to
               humble
               vs
               continually
               ;
               and
               also
               to
               haue
               matter
               wherin
               to
               exercise
               vs
               to
               striue
               against
               ,
               and
               to
               make
               vs
               more
               watchfull
               in
               our
               places
               .
               But
               if
               wee
               could
               learne
               but
               these
               three
               lessons
               ,
               
               wee
               should
               wonderfully
               preuent
               Sathan
               in
               these
               occasions
               of
               our
               anger
               ,
               wherein
               wee
               are
               so
               ouertaken
               ;
            
             
               1
               So
               much
               as
               euer
               we
               are
               able
               ,
               
               to
               haue
               our
               eye
               continually
               round
               about
               the
               Schoole
               vpon
               euery
               one
               ;
               and
               namely
               the
               most
               vnruely
               ,
               to
               keepe
               them
               in
               awe
               :
               and
               that
               we
               keepe
               order
               strictly
               in
               euerything
               at
               all
               times
               ;
               as
               specially
               in
               all
               examinations
               and
               taskes
               ,
               and
               our
               times
               for
               euery
               thing
               most
               precisely
               ,
               that
               they
               may
               looke
               for
               it
               :
               for
               omitting
               them
               somtimes
               ,
               makes
               the
               best
               too
               carelesse
               ,
               &
               some
               bolde
               to
               offend
               ,
               in
               hope
               that
               they
               shall
               not
               be
               seene
               ,
               or
               not
               called
               to
               an
               account
               :
               wheras
               by
               the
               contrary
               they
               grow
               into
               a
               habite
               of
               painefulnesse
               and
               obedience
               .
            
             
               2
               Studying
               to
               put
               on
               a
               fatherly
               affection
               and
               to
               deale
               so
               with
               them
               as
               a
               good
               father
               amongst
               his
               children
               .
               
               This
               shall
               also
               bring
               them
               or
               many
               of
               them
               to
               the
               affections
               and
               dutifulnesse
               of
               louing
               children
               ,
               to
               doe
               all
               of
               cons●ience
               .
            
             
               3
               Labouring
               to
               be
               Enocks
               ,
               
               to
               walke
               in
               our
               places
               with
               God
               ,
               as
               euer
               in
               his
               presence
               ,
               his
               eye
               alwayes
               on
               vs
               ;
               that
               hee
               obserues
               all
               our
               wayes
               and
               will
               reward
               and
               blesse
               vs
               ,
               according
               to
               our
               conscience
               herein
               :
               thus
               to
               walke
               before
               him
               ,
               
               vntill
               he
               translate
               vs
               hence
               ,
               being
               as
               little
               absent
               from
               our
               place
               and
               charge
               ,
               as
               possible
               may
               be
               ;
               cutting
               off
               wisely
               all
               vnnecessary
               occasions
               .
               Oft
               absence
               of
               the
               Master
               is
               a
               principall
               cause
               of
               the
               schollars
               negligence
               and
               not
               profiting
               ,
               with
               the
               griefe
               and
               vexing
               of
               the
               Master
               ,
               arising
               thereon
               ;
               vnlesse
               he
               haue
               very
               good
               supply
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               Happy
               men
               were
               we
               if
               we
               could
               attaine
               to
               this
               .
               But
               I
               pray
               you
               sir
               ,
               what
               thinke
               you
               of
               this
               ,
               to
               haue
               ever
               the
               rodde
               or
               ferula
               in
               our
               hand
               ,
               at
               lesser
               faults
               to
               giue
               them
               a
               blow
               or
               a
               ierke
               on
               the
               hand
               ;
               and
               so
               when
               wee
               see
               any
               of
               them
               idle
               ?
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               If
               we
               will
               striue
               earnestly
               ,
               according
               to
               the
               former
               meanes
               ,
               we
               shall
               by
               little
               and
               little
               attaine
               to
               that
               ability
               ,
               to
               cut
               off
               those
               occasions
               ,
               and
               come
               to
               this
               good
               gouernement
               ,
               so
               farre
               as
               the
               Lord
               shall
               be
               well
               pleased
               with
               vs
               ;
               and
               that
               he
               will
               passe
               by
               our
               weakenesses
               .
               But
               for
               hauing
               the
               rodde
               or
               ferula
               alwayes
               in
               our
               hands
               ,
               if
               we
               be
               of
               hastie
               natures
               ,
               
               I
               take
               it
               to
               be
               ,
               as
               for
               a
               furious
               man
               to
               carie
               euer
               a
               naked
               sword
               in
               his
               hand
               .
               It
               will
               make
               vs
               to
               strike
               many
               a
               time
               ,
               when
               wee
               will
               bee
               sory
               for
               it
               after
               ,
               if
               it
               fall
               not
               out
               worse
               .
               For
               these
               lighter
               faults
               ,
               proceeding
               from
               lacke
               of
               time
               ,
               yeares
               ,
               capacity
               ,
               discretion
               ,
               or
               the
               like
               ,
               would
               rather
               be
               corrected
               by
               words
               ,
               and
               reformed
               louingly
               ,
               then
               by
               this
               continuall
               whipping
               and
               striking
               :
               neyther
               will
               any
               good
               and
               wise
               father
               smite
               his
               childe
               for
               euery
               fault
               .
            
             
               I
               would
               therefore
               haue
               neyther
               of
               these
               to
               be
               continually
               holden
               vp
               ;
               
               but
               rather
               some
               little
               twigge
               ,
               if
               you
               will
               needes
               :
               I
               meane
               a
               small
               twigge
               something
               more
               then
               a
               foote
               long
               ;
               that
               if
               you
               a
               little
               rap
               them
               on
               the
               heads
               ,
               you
               can
               no
               way
               hurt
               them
               ,
               neyther
               their
               head
               ,
               eyes
               nor
               face
               .
            
             
               But
               I
               account
               this
               farre
               the
               best
               ,
               for
               a
               Schoolemaster
               by
               his
               graue
               and
               wise
               carriage
               ,
               
               and
               his
               faithfulnesse
               in
               his
               place
               ;
               and
               also
               by
               carefully
               obseruing
               ,
               and
               surely
               and
               soundly
               correcting
               the
               negligent
               and
               disobedient
               ,
               when
               other
               meanes
               faile
               ;
               to
               striue
               to
               come
               to
               this
               ,
               that
               his
               owne
               presence
               ,
               or
               at
               least
               his
               eye
               &
               speech
               ,
               may
               sufficiently
               preuaile
               
               to
               keepe
               all
               in
               a
               submisse
               obedience
               ;
               and
               that
               he
               may
               vse
               the
               rodde
               very
               sparingly
               ,
               but
               onely
               in
               greater
               faults
               ,
               and
               on
               the
               principall
               offenders
               for
               example
               and
               terrour
               .
               This
               shall
               be
               a
               fatherly
               and
               worthy
               gouernement
               indeede
               ,
               when
               the
               children
               thus
               obey
               of
               conscience
               ;
               striuing
               who
               shall
               be
               the
               best
               ,
               and
               each
               way
               most
               dutifull
               .
               And
               thus
               in
               a
               short
               time
               ,
               when
               your
               Schollars
               are
               so
               inured
               to
               your
               gouernement
               that
               they
               know
               what
               to
               looke
               for
               ,
               you
               shall
               finde
               that
               very
               seldome
               correction
               will
               serue
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               I
               like
               your
               aduice
               wonderfull
               well
               herein
               :
               
               but
               when
               would
               you
               haue
               the
               time
               ,
               of
               common
               punishment
               to
               be
               inflicted
               ;
               as
               namely
               that
               for
               their
               misdemeanours
               in
               the
               Church
               ,
               or
               other
               grosse
               faults
               noted
               by
               the
               Monitours
               ?
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               I
               would
               haue
               this
               done
               commonly
               at
               the
               giuing
               vp
               of
               the
               Monitours
               Bils
               ,
               some
               day
               before
               prayer
               ;
               sometimes
               one
               day
               ,
               sometimes
               another
               :
               and
               when
               the
               Master
               findes
               the
               greatest
               company
               present
               ,
               then
               to
               call
               for
               the
               Monitours
               of
               that
               weeke
               ;
               lest
               keeping
               a
               settime
               ,
               any
               absent
               themselues
               by
               fained
               excuses
               or
               otherwise
               ,
               or
               cry
               vnto
               their
               parents
               ,
               that
               they
               dare
               not
               go
               to
               the
               schoole
               ,
               because
               they
               must
               be
               beaten
               .
               But
               for
               extreame
               negligence
               ,
               or
               other
               faults
               in
               the
               Schoole
               ,
               the
               very
               fittest
               time
               is
               immediately
               before
               the
               breaking
               vp
               ,
               vpon
               the
               play-dayes
               ;
               then
               if
               need●
               so
               require
               ,
               first
               to
               whip
               all
               the
               stubborne
               and
               notoriously
               negligent
               ,
               as
               also
               those
               who
               haue
               done
               any
               grosse
               fault
               :
               and
               after
               to
               cause
               them
               to
               sit
               ,
               and
               do
               some
               exercises
               ,
               wherof
               they
               are
               to
               giue
               a
               strict
               account
               ,
               as
               I
               said
               .
               This
               will
               surely
               by
               Gods
               blessing
               tame
               the
               proudest
               of
               them
               in
               time
               ,
               &
               bring
               them
               to
               be
               as
               submisse
               as
               the
               least
               childe
               ;
               as
               experience
               will
               manifest
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               But
               what
               if
               you
               haue
               any
               ,
               
               whom
               you
               cannot
               yet
               reforme
               of
               their
               vngratiousnesse
               or
               loyt●ring
               ,
               and
               whom
               you
               can
               do
               no
               good
               with
               all
               ,
               no
               not
               by
               〈◊〉
               these
               meanes
               ?
               As
               some
               there
               are
               euer
               in
               all
               schooles
               extreamly
               vntoward
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               These
               I
               would
               haue
               some
               way
               remoued
               from
               the
               schoole
               ;
               at
               least
               by
               giuing
               the
               parents
               notice
               ,
               and
               intreating
               
               them
               to
               imploy
               them
               some
               other
               way
               ;
               that
               neyther
               other
               be
               hurt
               by
               their
               example
               ,
               nor
               they
               be
               a
               reproach
               to
               the
               Schoole
               ,
               nor
               yet
               we
               be
               inforced
               to
               vse
               that
               seuerity
               with
               them
               which
               they
               will
               deserue
               .
               But
               keepe
               these
               courses
               strictly
               ,
               and
               you
               shall
               see
               that
               they
               will
               eyther
               amend
               ,
               or
               get
               away
               of
               themselues
               ,
               by
               one
               meanes
               or
               other
               ;
               I
               meane
               ,
               by
               some
               deuice
               to
               their
               parents
               ,
               to
               leaue
               the
               Schoole
               ,
               and
               to
               go
               to
               some
               other
               imployment
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             XXX
             .
          
           
             Of
             Schoole
             times
             ,
             intermissions
             and
             recreations
             .
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               NOw
               that
               you
               haue
               thus
               curteously
               gone
               through
               this
               point
               concerning
               the
               Schoole-gouernment
               ,
               by
               rewards
               and
               punishments
               (
               which
               being
               rightly
               put
               in
               practice
               ,
               must
               needes
               bring
               a
               great
               blessing
               with
               them
               )
               let
               me
               craue
               your
               iudgement
               also
               for
               the
               times
               of
               Schoole
               and
               intermissions
               ;
               with
               recreations
               to
               be
               vsed
               therein
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               To
               giue
               you
               my
               iudgement
               in
               all
               these
               briefly
               ,
               
               according
               to
               that
               which
               by
               tryall
               I
               finde
               best
               ;
            
             
               1
               The
               Schoole-time
               should
               beginne
               at
               sixe
               :
               all
               who
               write
               Latine
               to
               make
               their
               exercises
               which
               were
               giuen
               ouernight
               ,
               in
               that
               houre
               before
               seuen
               ,
               vnlesse
               they
               did
               them
               the
               night
               before
               ,
               to
               get
               parts
               or
               the
               like
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               Would
               you
               then
               haue
               the
               Master
               and
               Vsher
               present
               so
               early
               ?
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               The
               Vsher
               should
               necessarily
               be
               there
               ,
               to
               be
               present
               amongst
               them
               ;
               
               though
               hee
               follow
               his
               owne
               priuate
               studie
               that
               houre
               ,
               yet
               to
               see
               that
               all
               the
               Schollars
               doe
               their
               dueties
               appointed
               ,
               and
               that
               there
               be
               no
               disorder
               :
               which
               
               will
               be
               ,
               vnlesse
               he
               or
               some
               other
               of
               authority
               be
               amongst
               them
               .
               For
               otherwise
               the
               best
               children
               ,
               left
               to
               their
               owne
               liberty
               ,
               will
               shew
               themselues
               children
               .
               If
               the
               Master
               bee
               present
               at
               seuen
               ,
               it
               may
               suffice
               ,
               where
               there
               is
               any
               in
               his
               place
               ,
               whose
               presence
               they
               stand
               in
               awe
               of
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               But
               it
               is
               hard
               for
               the
               little
               children
               to
               rise
               so
               early
               ,
               and
               in
               some
               families
               all
               lie
               long
               :
               how
               would
               you
               haue
               them
               come
               so
               soone
               then
               ?
               You
               would
               not
               haue
               them
               beaten
               euery
               time
               that
               they
               come
               ouer-late
               ,
               as
               the
               custome
               is
               in
               some
               schooles
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               That
               I
               take
               farre
               too
               great
               seuerity
               ,
               and
               whereby
               many
               a
               poore
               childe
               is
               driuen
               into
               wonderfull
               feare
               ,
               and
               eyther
               to
               play
               the
               truant
               ,
               or
               make
               some
               deuice
               to
               leaue
               the
               schoole
               ;
               at
               least
               to
               come
               with
               a
               marueilous
               ill
               will
               ,
               and
               oft
               to
               be
               dragged
               to
               the
               Schoole
               ,
               to
               the
               reproach
               of
               the
               Master
               and
               the
               Schoole
               .
            
             
               The
               best
               meanes
               that
               euer
               I
               could
               finde
               to
               make
               them
               to
               rise
               early
               ,
               
               to
               preuent
               all
               this
               feare
               of
               whipping
               ,
               is
               this
               ;
               by
               letting
               the
               little
               ones
               to
               haue
               their
               places
               in
               their
               fourmes
               daily
               ,
               according
               to
               their
               comming
               after
               sixe
               of
               the
               clock
               :
               so
               many
               as
               are
               there
               at
               sixe
               ,
               to
               haue
               their
               places
               as
               they
               had
               them
               by
               election
               or
               the
               day
               before
               :
               all
               who
               come
               after
               six
               ,
               euery
               one
               to
               sit
               as
               he
               commeth
               ,
               and
               so
               to
               continue
               that
               day
               ,
               and
               vntill
               he
               recouer
               his
               place
               againe
               by
               the
               election
               of
               the
               fourme
               or
               otherwise
               .
               Thus
               deale
               with
               them
               at
               all
               times
               ,
               after
               euery
               intermission
               ,
               when
               they
               are
               to
               be
               in
               their
               places
               againe
               ,
               and
               you
               shall
               haue
               them
               euer
               attending
               who
               to
               be
               first
               in
               his
               place
               ;
               so
               greatly
               euen
               children
               are
               prouoked
               by
               the
               credite
               of
               their
               places
               .
            
             
               If
               any
               cannot
               be
               brought
               by
               this
               ,
               then
               to
               be
               noted
               in
               the
               blacke
               Bill
               by
               a
               speciall
               marke
               ,
               and
               feele
               the
               punishment
               thereof
               :
               and
               sometimes
               present
               correction
               to
               be
               vsed
               for
               terrour
               ;
               though
               this
               (
               as
               I
               said
               )
               to
               be
               more
               seldome
               ,
               for
               making
               them
               to
               feare
               comming
               to
               the
               Schoole
               .
               
            
             
               The
               higher
               Schollars
               must
               of
               necessity
               rest
               to
               doe
               their
               exercises
               ,
               if
               their
               exercises
               be
               strictly
               called
               for
               .
            
             
               Thus
               they
               are
               to
               continue
               vntill
               nine
               ,
               signified
               by
               Monitours
               ,
               
               Subdoctour
               ,
               or
               otherwise
               .
               Then
               at
               nine
               I
               finde
               that
               order
               which
               is
               in
               Westminster
               to
               bee
               farre
               the
               best
               ;
               to
               let
               them
               to
               haue
               a
               quarter
               of
               an
               houre
               at
               least
               ,
               or
               more
               for
               intermission
               ,
               eyther
               for
               breakefast
               ,
               for
               all
               who
               are
               neere
               vnto
               the
               Schoole
               ,
               that
               can
               bee
               there
               within
               the
               time
               limitted
               ,
               or
               els
               for
               the
               nece●sity
               of
               euery
               one
               ,
               or
               their
               honest
               recreation
               ,
               or
               to
               prepare
               their
               exercises
               against
               the
               Masters
               comming
               in
               .
            
             
               After
               ,
               each
               of
               them
               to
               be
               in
               his
               place
               in
               an
               instant
               vpon
               the
               knocking
               of
               the
               dore
               ,
               or
               some
               other
               signe
               giuen
               by
               the
               Subdoctor
               or
               Monitors
               ,
               in
               paine
               of
               losse
               of
               his
               place
               ,
               or
               further
               punishment
               ,
               as
               was
               noted
               before
               ;
               so
               to
               continue
               vntill
               eleuen
               of
               the
               clocke
               ,
               or
               somewhat
               after
               ,
               to
               counteruaile
               the
               time
               of
               the
               intermission
               at
               nine
               .
            
             
               To
               be
               againe
               all
               ready
               ,
               and
               in
               their
               places
               at
               one
               ,
               in
               an
               instant●
               to
               continue
               vntill
               three
               ,
               or
               halfe
               an
               houre
               after
               :
               then
               to
               haue
               another
               quarter
               of
               an
               houre
               or
               more
               ,
               as
               at
               nine
               for
               drinking
               and
               necessities
               ;
               so
               to
               continue
               till
               halfe
               an
               houre
               after
               fiue
               :
               thereby
               in
               that
               halfe
               houre
               to
               counteruaile
               the
               time
               at
               three
               ;
               then
               to
               end
               so
               as
               was
               shewed
               ,
               with
               reading
               a
               peece
               of
               a
               Chapter
               ,
               and
               with
               singing
               two
               staues
               of
               a
               Psalme
               :
               lastly
               ,
               with
               prayer
               to
               be
               vsed
               by
               the
               Master
               .
            
             
               For
               the
               Psalmes
               ,
               euery
               schollar
               should
               begin
               to
               giue
               the
               Psalme
               and
               the
               tune
               in
               order
               ,
               
               and
               to
               reade
               euery
               verse
               before
               them
               ;
               or
               euery
               one
               to
               haue
               his
               booke
               (
               if
               it
               can
               bee
               )
               and
               reade
               it
               as
               they
               doe
               sing
               it
               :
               where
               any
               one
               can
               not
               begin
               the
               tune
               ,
               his
               next
               fellow
               beneath
               is
               to
               helpe
               him
               ,
               and
               take
               his
               place
               .
            
             
               By
               this
               they
               will
               all
               learne
               to
               giue
               the
               tunes
               sweetely
               ,
               which
               is
               a
               thing
               very
               commendable
               ;
               and
               also
               it
               will
               helpe
               both
               reading
               ,
               voyce
               and
               audacity
               in
               the
               younge●
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               But
               these
               intermissions
               at
               nine
               and
               three
               ,
               may
               be
               offensiue
               :
               they
               who
               know
               not
               the
               maner
               of
               them
               ,
               may
               reproch
               the
               schoole
               ,
               thinking
               that
               they
               do
               nothing
               but
               play
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               We
               are
               so
               much
               as
               may
               be
               in
               all
               things
               to
               auoyde
               offence
               :
               
               but
               when
               by
               long
               custome
               the
               order
               is
               once
               made
               knowne
               ,
               it
               will
               be
               no
               more
               offensiue
               then
               it
               is
               at
               Westminster
               ,
               
               or
               then
               it
               is
               at
               noone
               and
               night
               ;
               so
               that
               it
               be
               done
               in
               a
               decent
               order
               .
            
             
               The
               benefits
               of
               such
               intermissions
               
               will
               be
               found
               very
               great
               ,
               and
               to
               preuent
               many
               inconueniences
               .
            
             
               1
               By
               this
               meanes
               neyther
               Masters
               nor
               Schollars
               shall
               bee
               ouer-toyled
               ,
               
               but
               haue
               fit
               times
               of
               refreshing
               .
               For
               there
               is
               none
               (
               no
               not
               almost
               of
               the
               least
               )
               but
               being
               vsed
               to
               it
               a
               while
               ,
               they
               will
               sitte
               very
               well
               in
               their
               places
               ,
               for
               two
               houres
               together
               ,
               
               or
               two
               houres
               and
               a
               halfe
               ;
               without
               any
               wearinesse
               or
               necessity
               ,
               obseruing
               duely
               those
               times
               .
            
             
               2
               By
               this
               meanes
               also
               the
               Schollars
               may
               bee
               kept
               euer
               in
               their
               places
               ,
               and
               hard
               to
               their
               labours
               ,
               without
               that
               running
               out
               to
               the
               Campo
               (
               as
               the
               tearme
               it
               )
               at
               schoole
               times
               ,
               
               and
               the
               manifolde
               disorders
               thereof
               ;
               as
               watching
               and
               striuing
               for
               the
               clubbe
               ,
               and
               loytering
               then
               in
               the
               fields
               ,
               some
               hindred
               that
               they
               cannot
               go
               forth
               at
               all
               .
            
             
               But
               hereby
               all
               may
               haue
               their
               free
               liberty
               in
               due
               time
               ;
               and
               none
               can
               abuse
               their
               liberty
               in
               that
               sort
               ,
               nor
               haue
               their
               minds
               drawne
               away
               ,
               nor
               stirre
               abroad
               all
               the
               day
               at
               schoole
               times
               :
               except
               vpon
               some
               vrgent
               necessity
               ,
               to
               be
               signified
               to
               the
               Master
               or
               Vsher
               ;
               and
               so
               leaue
               to
               be
               gotten
               priuately
               ,
               to
               returne
               presently
               againe
               .
               And
               also
               in
               those
               cases
               to
               lose
               their
               places
               for
               that
               day
               ,
               vnlesse
               the
               case
               be
               approued
               very
               necessary
               and
               sure
               ;
               to
               the
               end
               to
               cut
               off
               occasions
               
               from
               such
               as
               will
               pretend
               necessities
               .
               If
               any
               one
               be
               catched
               abusing
               his
               Master
               or
               his
               liberty
               ,
               without
               necessity
               onely
               ,
               vpon
               desire
               of
               idlenesse
               or
               play
               ,
               he
               is
               to
               be
               corrected
               sharpely
               ,
               for
               ensample
               .
               By
               this
               meanes
               you
               shall
               bring
               them
               to
               that
               order
               and
               obedience
               in
               a
               short
               time
               as
               they
               will
               not
               thinke
               of
               stirring
               all
               the
               day
               ,
               but
               at
               their
               times
               appointed
               ,
               or
               vpon
               very
               vrgent
               and
               almost
               extraordinary
               necessity
               .
            
             
               3
               Besides
               these
               benefits
               ,
               
               this
               will
               also
               gaine
               so
               much
               time
               euery
               day
               ,
               as
               is
               lost
               in
               those
               intermissions
               ;
               because
               there
               is
               no
               day
               but
               they
               will
               all
               looke
               for
               so
               much
               time
               or
               more
               ,
               to
               the
               Campo
               :
               especially
               the
               shrewdest
               boyes
               ,
               who
               vse
               to
               waite
               for
               the
               club
               ,
               and
               watch
               their
               times
               ;
               
               these
               will
               be
               sure
               to
               haue
               much
               more
               then
               that
               .
               Besides
               all
               the
               time
               which
               they
               lose
               in
               wayting
               for
               that
               idle
               fit
               ;
               and
               that
               they
               will
               ,
               if
               they
               can
               ,
               be
               away
               at
               Lectures
               ,
               and
               shewing
               exercises
               :
               and
               likewise
               they
               will
               exceedingly
               trouble
               the
               Master
               in
               asking
               three
               or
               foure
               sometimes
               together
               ,
               what
               businesse
               soeuer
               he
               be
               about
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               I
               haue
               been
               well
               acquainted
               with
               these
               disorders
               of
               the
               Campo
               ,
               and
               vexed
               with
               them
               many
               a
               time
               :
               I
               shall
               be
               most
               glad
               ▪
               if
               I
               may
               thus
               reforme
               them
               ,
               and
               finde
               these
               benefites
               in
               stead
               thereof
               .
               But
               what
               say
               you
               for
               their
               recrea●ions
               ?
               Let
               me
               also
               hea●e
               your
               iudgement
               in
               them
               :
               for
               I
               see
               that
               you
               would
               haue
               in
               like
               manner
               a
               speciall
               regard
               to
               be
               kept
               thereof
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               I
               would
               indeed
               haue
               their
               recreations
               as
               well
               looked
               vnto
               ,
               as
               their
               learning
               ;
               as
               you
               may
               perceiue
               plainely
               ,
               by
               their
               intermissions
               ,
               at
               nine
               and
               at
               three
               .
            
             
               Besides
               those
               ,
               and
               all
               other
               their
               intermissions
               ,
               it
               is
               very
               requisite
               also
               ,
               that
               they
               should
               haue
               weekely
               one
               part
               of
               an
               after-noone
               for
               recreation
               ,
               
               as
               a
               reward
               of
               their
               diligence
               ,
               obedience
               and
               profiting
               :
               and
               that
               to
               be
               appointed
               at
               the
               Masters
               discretion
               ,
               eyther
               the
               Thursday
               ,
               after
               the
               vsuall
               custom
               ;
               or
               according
               to
               the
               best
               opportunity
               of
               the
               place
               .
               That
               also
               to
               be
               procured
               by
               some
               Verses
               ,
               made
               by
               the
               Victors
               ,
               as
               was
               shewed
               :
               and
               then
               onely
               ,
               when
               there
               hath
               bin
               already
               no
               play-day
               in
               the
               week
               before
               ,
               nor
               holy
               day
               in
               all
               the
               weeke
               .
            
             
               Before
               their
               breaking
               vp
               also
               ,
               it
               shall
               not
               bee
               amisse
               to
               giue
               them
               a
               Theamto
               make
               som
               verses
               of
               ,
               
                 ex
                 tempore
              
               ,
               
               in
               the
               highest
               fourmes
               ,
               after
               they
               haue
               beene
               for
               a
               time
               exercised
               therein
               :
               or
               if
               time
               permit
               ,
               sometime
               to
               cap
               verses
               .
            
             
               In
               capping
               verses
               the
               way
               to
               prouoke
               them
               the
               most
               ,
               and
               to
               haue
               most
               variety
               of
               good
               verses
               ,
               
               is
               ,
               to
               appoint
               some
               one
               or
               two
               of
               the
               best
               ,
               to
               challenge
               their
               fellowes
               to
               come
               one
               after
               another
               ;
               and
               euer
               as
               any
               one
               but
               sticketh
               or
               misseth
               in
               a
               syllable
               ,
               the
               other
               to
               tell
               him
               ,
               and
               another
               to
               come
               in
               his
               place
               :
               or
               els
               to
               trie
               aduersaries
               or
               fourmes
               together
               .
            
             
             
               This
               exercise
               will
               much
               helpe
               capacitie
               and
               audacitie
               ,
               
               memorie
               ,
               right
               pronuntiation
               ,
               to
               furnish
               with
               store
               of
               authorities
               for
               Poetrie
               ,
               and
               the
               like
               ;
               so
               as
               that
               they
               may
               bee
               very
               cunning
               in
               their
               Poets
               by
               it
               .
            
             
               Therefore
               it
               may
               also
               be
               vsed
               in
               regard
               of
               the
               benefits
               at
               some
               other
               fit
               times
               besides
               ,
               insteed
               of
               some
               other
               examination
               .
            
             
               Hee
               that
               brings
               the
               most
               sweete
               verses
               ,
               
               out
               of
               Ouid
               and
               Virgil
               or
               Cato
               amongst
               the
               yongest
               ,
               and
               so
               out
               of
               other
               most
               approued
               Poets
               ,
               is
               to
               haue
               euer
               the
               greatest
               commendations
               .
            
             
               Absurde
               verses
               ,
               such
               as
               most
               are
               of
               those
               called
               
                 Carmina
                 Prouerbialia
              
               ,
               are
               to
               be
               hissed
               forth
               :
               Namely
               ,
               those
               which
               are
               tearmed
               
                 versus
                 Leonini
              
               .
               As
               that
               first
               verse
               ,
               
                 Si
                 canis
                 ex
                 hilla
                 religatur
                 mordet
                 in
                 illa
                 .
              
            
             
               And
               so
               all
               other
               of
               the
               same
               mould
               .
               Though
               euen
               amongst
               those
               of
               that
               booke
               there
               are
               some
               tolerable
               verses
               ,
               if
               good
               choise
               be
               made
               .
            
             
               This
               exercise
               may
               well
               goe
               before
               play
               :
               for
               it
               is
               nothing
               but
               a
               pleasant
               schoole
               recreation
               ,
               &
               will
               exceedingly
               whet
               on
               the
               schollars
               to
               an
               ingenuous
               contention
               .
            
             
               All
               recreations
               and
               sports
               of
               schollars
               ,
               
               would
               be
               meet
               for
               Gentleman
               .
               Clownish
               sports
               ,
               or
               perilous
               ,
               or
               yet
               playing
               for
               money
               ,
               are
               no
               way
               to
               be
               admitted
               .
            
             
               The
               recreations
               of
               the
               studious
               are
               as
               well
               to
               be
               looked
               vnto
               ,
               
               as
               the
               study
               of
               the
               rest
               :
               That
               none
               take
               hurt
               by
               his
               study
               ,
               either
               for
               minde
               or
               bodie
               ,
               or
               any
               waie
               else
               .
            
             
               Yet
               here
               of
               the
               other
               side
               ,
               
               very
               great
               care
               is
               to
               be
               had
               ,
               in
               the
               moderating
               of
               their
               recreation
               .
               For
               schooles
               ,
               generally
               ,
               doe
               not
               take
               more
               hinderance
               by
               any
               one
               thing
               ,
               then
               by
               ouer-often
               leaue
               to
               play
               .
               Experience
               teacheth
               ,
               that
               this
               draweth
               their
               mindes
               vtterly
               away
               from
               their
               bookes
               ,
               that
               that
               they
               cannot
               take
               paines
               ,
               for
               longing
               after
               plaie
               ,
               and
               talking
               of
               it
               ;
               as
               also
               deuising
               meanes
               to
               procure
               others
               to
               get
               leaue
               to
               play
               :
               so
               that
               ordinarily
               when
               they
               are
               but
               in
               hope
               thereof
               ,
               they
               will
               doe
               things
               very
               negligently
               ;
               and
               after
               the
               most
               play
               they
               are
               euermore
               farre
               the
               worst
               .
            
             
             
               And
               contrarily
               ,
               when
               they
               are
               most
               holden
               to
               it
               ,
               without
               looking
               for
               any
               play
               ,
               in
               such
               a
               course
               ,
               as
               wherein
               they
               may
               take
               delight
               ,
               and
               goe
               on
               with
               ease
               ;
               then
               will
               they
               do
               farre
               the
               best
               ,
               without
               any
               daunger
               of
               taking
               hurt
               thereby
               ;
               for
               that
               thē
               their
               learning
               is
               for
               most
               part
               as
               a
               play
               to
               them
               who
               are
               ingenuous
               .
            
             
               Therefore
               Masters
               are
               to
               vse
               great
               wisdom
               in
               auoiding
               this
               ▪
               and
               answering
               with
               mildnesse
               ,
               all
               those
               who
               are
               euer
               importunate
               in
               asking
               leaue
               .
            
             
               And
               whereas
               such
               suiters
               are
               wont
               to
               be
               instant
               thus
               ,
               That
               the
               Schollars
               will
               learne
               the
               better
               after
               ;
               we
               may
               say
               truly
               ,
               that
               they
               will
               learne
               fa●
               the
               worse
               after
               .
               Also
               ,
               whereas
               they
               think
               that
               they
               do
               them
               good
               ;
               they
               do
               both
               them
               ,
               their
               friends
               and
               the
               schoole
               very
               great
               hurt
               ,
               for
               the
               reasons
               mentioned
               .
               It
               is
               continuall
               applying
               which
               brings
               learning
               ,
               and
               the
               credit
               of
               a
               schoole
               .
               And
               for
               this
               cause
               it
               were
               not
               amisse
               ,
               nor
               inconuenient
               (
               neither
               for
               the
               schoole
               ,
               nor
               the
               Master
               himselfe
               who
               hath
               a
               regard
               of
               the
               profiting
               of
               his
               schollars
               )
               if
               in
               such
               places
               where
               both
               Master
               and
               schollars
               are
               hindred
               hereby
               that
               there
               were
               some
               statute
               for
               the
               helpe
               of
               the
               Master
               ,
               that
               he
               could
               not
               giue
               leaue
               of
               himselfe
               aboue
               once
               in
               the
               weeke
               ,
               without
               consent
               of
               the
               Minister
               ,
               or
               some
               man
               of
               authority
               in
               the
               towne
               ;
               vnlesse
               very
               seldome
               ,
               and
               vnto
               some
               chiefe
               parties
               to
               be
               yeelded
               vnto
               of
               necessity
               ,
               in
               regard
               of
               some
               speciall
               dignity
               or
               desert
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               Many
               Masters
               would
               count
               this
               a
               bondage
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               They
               should
               yet
               finde
               it
               a
               profitable
               bondage
               ,
               and
               which
               would
               bring
               no
               small
               freedome
               and
               comfort
               to
               themselues
               ,
               or
               benefit
               and
               credite
               to
               their
               schooles
               in
               the
               end
               .
            
          
        
         
           
           
             CHAP.
             XXXI
             .
          
           
             Inconuenience
             growing
             by
             diuersitie
             of
             teaching
             ,
             and
             of
             Grammars
             .
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               BVt
               what
               think
               you
               of
               diuersities
               of
               Grammars
               ,
               
               and
               of
               diuers
               courses
               in
               teaching
               ?
               do
               you
               not
               take
               them
               to
               be
               very
               inconuenient
               ?
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               Yes
               indeed
               :
               for
               by
               this
               means
               they
               younger
               schollars
               comming
               at
               new
               schooles
               ,
               or
               vnder
               new
               masters
               ,
               are
               new
               to
               begin
               ;
               or
               are
               hindered
               ,
               and
               do
               lose
               much
               time
               ,
               when
               they
               must
               after
               asort
               begin
               againe
               .
               Many
               of
               great
               towardnesse
               and
               hope
               are
               thought
               to
               haue
               nothing
               in
               them
               ,
               because
               they
               are
               not
               acquainted
               with
               the
               newe
               courses
               .
            
             
               Also
               their
               former
               Masters
               are
               discredited
               ,
               which
               happely
               had
               taken
               the
               best
               and
               most
               profitable
               paines
               with
               them
               :
               the
               children
               are
               vtterly
               or
               very
               much
               discouraged
               .
               Besides
               that
               many
               schoolmasters
               are
               extreamly
               ignorant
               ,
               and
               insufficient
               ,
               not
               knowing
               any
               good
               course
               of
               teaching
               at
               all
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               But
               how
               might
               these
               be
               helped
               ?
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               Only
               thus
               :
               The
               best
               courses
               being
               once
               foūd
               out
               by
               search
               ,
               conference
               ,
               and
               trial
               ,
               with
               directions
               &
               helps
               
               for
               the
               practice
               therof
               ▪
               &
               the
               same
               vniuersally
               receiued
               or
               at
               least
               known
               ;
               these
               inconueniences
               should
               be
               for
               most
               part
               preuented
               ,
               &
               both
               Masters
               &
               schollars
               go
               on
               with
               cheerfulnes
               in
               euery
               place
               .
               In
               the
               meane
               time
               this
               is
               the
               safest
               course
               ;
               To
               make
               them
               perfect
               in
               our
               ordinary
               Grāmar
               ,
               by
               the
               vse
               whereof
               alone
               so
               many
               excellent
               schollars
               haue
               been
               :
               then
               they
               shall
               be
               sure
               to
               goe
               forward
               in
               any
               schoole
               or
               course
               ,
               and
               to
               be
               well
               liked
               by
               euery
               one
               .
            
          
        
         
           
           
             CHAP.
             XXXII
             .
          
           
             Euils
             by
             ordinarie
             absence
             of
             Schollars
             .
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               ALthough
               I
               haue
               been
               troubled
               by
               that
               diuersitie
               ,
               yet
               much
               more
               by
               the
               absence
               of
               many
               of
               my
               schollars
               ,
               
               when
               some
               of
               them
               are
               away
               ,
               two
               or
               three
               dayes
               in
               a
               weeke
               ,
               and
               sometimes
               happely
               a
               moneth
               together
               ,
               or
               almost
               a
               quarter
               of
               a
               yeere
               ,
               as
               in
               the
               haruest
               time
               ,
               and
               it
               may
               be
               they
               haue
               no
               bookes
               neither
               ;
               and
               yet
               the
               Parents
               will
               expect
               ,
               that
               they
               should
               profit
               as
               much
               as
               if
               they
               were
               there
               daily
               ,
               and
               as
               if
               they
               had
               al
               necessary
               bookes
               .
            
             
               Also
               they
               will
               bee
               ready
               to
               raile
               vpon
               me
               that
               their
               children
               do
               no
               good
               :
               whereby
               both
               my selfe
               and
               my
               schoole
               are
               much
               traduced
               ;
               when
               the
               fault
               is
               wholly
               in
               themselues
               or
               principally
               ,
               neither
               can
               I
               tell
               how
               to
               helpe
               it
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               I
               knowe
               this
               to
               bee
               a
               common
               grieuance
               .
               The
               best
               waie
               to
               redresse
               it
               ,
               is
               this
               ,
               so
               farre
               as
               I
               know
               :
            
             
               1.
               
               Parents
               are
               to
               bee
               admonished
               ,
               either
               to
               keepe
               their
               children
               to
               schoole
               daily
               ,
               or
               to
               keep
               them
               away
               continually
               .
               For
               by
               such
               absence
               ,
               though
               it
               bee
               but
               now
               and
               then
               ,
               the
               mindes
               of
               the
               best
               and
               most
               studious
               will
               bee
               much
               drawen
               away
               ,
               or
               they
               discouraged
               ,
               and
               made
               vnable
               to
               go
               with
               their
               fellowes
               .
            
             
               Other
               their
               fellowes
               also
               ,
               are
               often
               much
               hindred
               for
               them
               ;
               Schooles
               and
               Masters
               discredited
               by
               them
               :
               Besides
               that
               in
               their
               absence
               they
               commonly
               learne
               much
               euill
               ;
               and
               chiefly
               stubbornnesse
               to
               corrupt
               themselues
               and
               others
            
             
             
               Therefore
               this
               would
               bee
               looked
               vnto
               specially
               ,
               
               to
               be
               auoided
               so
               much
               as
               may
               be
               :
               And
               order
               to
               be
               taken
               by
               the
               gouernours
               and
               ouerseers
               of
               schooles
               ,
               that
               all
               such
               should
               be
               sent
               home
               againe
               ,
               who
               are
               kept
               awaie
               aboue
               a
               certaine
               number
               of
               daies
               ;
               as
               thirteene
               in
               a
               Quarter
               (
               as
               the
               statute
               is
               in
               some
               schooles
               )
               or
               a
               like
               number
               :
               vnlesse
               in
               case
               of
               sicknesse
               ,
               or
               such
               necessary
               occasion
               to
               be
               approued
               by
               the
               Master
               or
               ouerseers
               .
            
             
               Those
               most
               seldome
               absences
               ,
               to
               be
               punished
               by
               losse
               of
               their
               places
               ,
               and
               correction
               too
               ,
               if
               the
               fault
               be
               found
               to
               be
               any
               way
               in
               themselues
               ;
               or
               at
               least
               to
               sit
               still
               on
               the
               play
               daies
               to
               learne
               when
               their
               fellowes
               plaie
               ,
               to
               recouer
               that
               time
               againe
               ,
               and
               to
               make
               them
               more
               carefull
               to
               come
               ;
               or
               by
               all
               these
               meanes
               together
               .
               This
               will
               make
               the
               Parents
               to
               amend
               it
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             XXXIII
             .
          
           
             Discouragements
             of
             Schoolemasters
             by
             vnthankfulnesse
             of
             Parents
             .
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               THis
               is
               good
               counsell
               ,
               if
               I
               could
               get
               our
               ouerseers
               to
               put
               it
               in
               execution
               ;
               I
               my selfe
               will
               trie
               what
               I
               can
               doe
               to
               redresse
               it
               by
               these
               helpes
               :
               Yet
               there
               is
               one
               other
               discouragement
               ,
               whereby
               I
               haue
               bin
               very
               much
               troubled
               in
               my selfe
               ,
               many
               times
               ;
               that
               is
               ,
               the
               great
               vnthankfulnesse
               that
               I
               finde
               ,
               
               and
               haue
               euer
               found
               in
               many
               whose
               children
               I
               haue
               had
               ;
               That
               some
               ,
               if
               they
               think
               they
               haue
               any
               little
               priuiledge
               by
               the
               place
               ,
               they
               will
               not
               so
               much
               as
               giue
               me
               thanks
               for
               all
               my
               labours
               ,
               nor
               it
               may
               be
               afford
               me
               a
               good
               word
               ,
               though
               their
               children
               do
               neuer
               so
               well
               vnder
               me
               .
            
             
             
               Others
               who
               haue
               no
               priuiledge
               in
               the
               place
               ,
               will
               giue
               little
               or
               nothing
               ,
               in
               regarde
               of
               my
               paines
               ,
               or
               to
               my
               meete
               maintenance
               ,
               according
               to
               my
               place
               ,
               to
               incourage
               mee
               to
               take
               paines
               :
               and
               besides
               ,
               they
               will
               run
               behind
               with
               me
               two
               or
               three
               Quarters
               ,
               and
               then
               they
               will
               seek
               some
               occasion
               to
               take
               away
               their
               children
               ,
               to
               set
               them
               to
               other
               schooles
               ,
               finding
               some
               quarrell
               that
               their
               children
               did
               not
               profit
               ,
               or
               the
               like
               ;
               and
               thus
               not
               onely
               defraude
               me
               of
               my
               due
               ,
               but
               also
               raise
               such
               slaunders
               against
               me
               ,
               for
               the
               recompence
               of
               all
               my
               paines
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               We
               must
               look
               for
               thankes
               ,
               
               and
               the
               rewards
               of
               our
               labours
               from
               God
               ,
               where
               the
               world
               is
               vnthankfull
               .
               But
               for
               the
               help
               of
               this
               ,
               my
               aduise
               is
               ,
               that
               first
               we
               labour
               to
               be
               faithfull
               in
               our
               places
               ,
               in
               the
               best
               courses
               and
               kindes
               ;
               chiefly
               to
               make
               our
               schollars
               good
               Grāmarians
               :
               and
               then
               we
               may
               be
               bold
               to
               cause
               them
               who
               are
               of
               abilitie
               to
               paie
               accordingly
               in
               some
               sort
               ,
               for
               the
               instruction
               of
               their
               children
               .
               They
               will
               better
               esteem
               the
               worth
               of
               learning
               ,
               and
               of
               the
               seruice
               we
               performe
               to
               them
               (
               in
               those
               in
               whom
               they
               are
               to
               liue
               after
               their
               time
               )
               and
               also
               to
               the
               Church
               &
               Common-wealth
               .
               And
               if
               God
               doe
               blesse
               vs
               ,
               that
               our
               schollars
               profit
               indeede
               ,
               we
               shall
               in
               time
               haue
               schollars
               enow
               ;
               such
               as
               will
               be
               willing
               to
               pay
               well
               ,
               how
               basely
               soeuer
               learning
               be
               esteemed
               of
               .
            
             
               Moreouer
               ,
               to
               preuent
               all
               such
               shifting
               and
               detraction
               ,
               it
               is
               wisdom
               euer
               to
               cal
               for
               our
               due
               at
               the
               Quarters
               end
               ;
               and
               to
               see
               that
               our
               cariage
               &
               gouernment
               be
               such
               in
               our
               place
               ,
               
               as
               that
               we
               may
               stand
               in
               the
               face
               of
               any
               such
               vnthankful
               detractour
               .
               Also
               ,
               that
               Gods
               blessing
               on
               our
               labours
               ,
               may
               euer
               answere
               for
               vs
               ;
               which
               following
               but
               these
               directions
               we
               may
               certainly
               expect
               .
            
             
               Finally
               ,
               that
               in
               our
               places
               we
               labour
               to
               serue
               the
               Lord
               faithfully
               :
               and
               then
               wee
               may
               bee
               sure
               to
               receiue
               the
               full
               reward
               of
               all
               our
               labour
               ,
               from
               him
               ;
               let
               men
               ,
               as
               I
               said
               ,
               be
               neuer
               so
               vnthankfull
               .
            
          
        
         
           
           
             CHAP.
             XXXIIII
             .
          
           
             What
             Children
             are
             to
             be
             kept
             to
             learning
             .
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               SIr
               ,
               if
               I
               should
               not
               take
               heart
               and
               courage
               to
               set
               to
               my
               calling
               afresh
               ,
               I
               were
               much
               to
               be
               blamed
               ,
               hauing
               all
               my
               doubts
               thus
               answered
               ,
               and
               being
               thus
               heartened
               in
               euery
               part
               .
               But
               yet
               ,
               that
               I
               may
               both
               returne
               vnto
               it
               cheerefully
               ;
               and
               also
               goe
               forward
               ,
               and
               continue
               happily
               to
               the
               end
               :
               I
               pray
               you
               let
               me
               haue
               your
               iudgement
               in
               these
               two
               points
               :
            
             
               1.
               
               What
               children
               you
               would
               haue
               set
               to
               learning
               ,
               and
               incouraged
               to
               goe
               on
               in
               the
               same
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               Which
               you
               would
               haue
               sent
               to
               the
               Vniuersity
               ,
               &
               how
               qualified
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               To
               both
               these
               I
               shall
               aunswere
               you
               vvhat
               I
               hold
               .
               
            
             
               To
               the
               first
               :
               I
               would
               haue
               those
               who
               after
               good
               time
               of
               triall
               shall
               be
               found
               the
               fittest
               amongst
               a
               mans
               children
               ,
               to
               be
               applied
               vnto
               learning
               ;
               
               as
               being
               the
               meetest
               to
               be
               offered
               to
               God
               in
               a
               more
               speciall
               maner
               ,
               to
               the
               publick
               seruice
               of
               his
               church
               or
               their
               Countries
               .
            
             
               And
               so
               those
               onely
               of
               them
               ,
               to
               be
               incouraged
               to
               goe
               on
               in
               the
               same
               ,
               whom
               you
               find
               most
               ingenuous
               ,
               and
               especially
               whom
               you
               perceiue
               to
               loue
               learning
               the
               best
               ;
               which
               also
               do
               witnesse
               the
               same
               by
               their
               painfulnesse
               and
               delight
               in
               their
               books
               .
               The
               rest
               to
               be
               fitted
               so
               far
               as
               may
               be
               conueniently
               ,
               for
               trades
               ,
               or
               some
               other
               calling
               ,
               or
               to
               be
               remoued
               speedily
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               To
               the
               second
               I
               answere
               :
               That
               such
               onely
               should
               be
               sent
               to
               the
               Vniuersities
               ,
               
               who
               proue
               most
               ingenuous
               and
               towardly
               ,
               and
               who
               in
               a
               loue
               of
               learning
               ,
               will
               begin
               to
               take
               
               paines
               of
               themselues
               ,
               hauing
               attained
               in
               some
               sort
               the
               former
               parts
               of
               learning
               ;
               
               being
               good
               Grammarians
               
               at
               least
               ,
               able
               to
               vnderstand
               ,
               write
               and
               speake
               Latine
               in
               good
               sort
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               Such
               as
               haue
               good
               discretion
               how
               to
               gouerne
               themselues
               there
               ,
               
               and
               to
               moderate
               their
               expenses
               ;
               which
               is
               seldome
               times
               before
               15.
               yeeres
               of
               age
               :
               which
               is
               also
               the
               youngest
               age
               admitted
               by
               the
               statutes
               of
               the
               Vniuersity
               ,
               as
               I
               take
               it
               .
            
             
               Some
               of
               chiefe
               note
               for
               learning
               and
               gouernment
               ,
               and
               of
               long
               experience
               in
               the
               Vniuersitie
               (
               as
               namely
               ,
               some
               worthy
               heads
               of
               Colledges
               )
               would
               haue
               none
               sent
               nor
               admitted
               into
               the
               Vniuersitie
               ,
               
               before
               they
               be
               full
               fifteen
               yeers
               olde
               at
               least
               ;
               for
               these
               reasons
               specially
               amongst
               others
               :
            
             
               1.
               
               Because
               ,
               before
               that
               time
               ,
               they
               will
               commonly
               require
               more
               bodily
               helpe
               ,
               then
               can
               be
               there
               afforded
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               The
               Vniuersitie
               statute
               forbiddeth
               to
               admit
               any
               vnder
               this
               age
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               Because
               that
               daily
               experience
               doth
               teach
               how
               inconuenient
               it
               is
               in
               diuers
               respects
               .
            
             
               Finally
               ,
               all
               generally
               of
               whom
               I
               can
               heare
               in
               the
               Vniuersitie
               ,
               doe
               assent
               hereunto
               .
               Many
               would
               haue
               them
               17.
               or
               18.
               yeere
               olde
               before
               ;
               because
               then
               commonly
               they
               haue
               discretion
               to
               sticke
               to
               their
               studies
               and
               to
               gouerne
               themselues
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               I
               doe
               much
               approue
               their
               iudgement
               .
               I
               would
               haue
               them
               good
               schollars
               ,
               before
               they
               goe
               to
               the
               Vniuersitie
               ;
               and
               namely
               sound
               Grammarians
               ,
               that
               the
               Tutors
               need
               not
               to
               be
               troubled
               with
               teaching
               them
               to
               make
               or
               to
               construe
               Latine
               ;
               but
               that
               they
               may
               goe
               forward
               in
               Logick
               or
               other
               studies
               meet
               for
               the
               Vniuersitie
               .
               For
               such
               a
               schollar
               as
               is
               able
               to
               vnderstand
               well
               what
               hee
               reades
               ,
               or
               what
               is
               read
               vnto
               him
               there
               (
               I
               meane
               in
               regard
               of
               the
               Latine
               )
               shall
               doe
               more
               good
               in
               a
               yeere
               ,
               then
               a
               weak
               schollar
               shall
               do
               in
               two
               or
               three
               ;
               chiefly
               ,
               if
               hee
               haue
               discretion
               to
               gouerne
               himselfe
               ,
               and
               abide
               close
               to
               his
               booke
               .
            
             
               For
               when
               as
               the
               schollar
               is
               faine
               to
               turne
               his
               Dictionary
               
               for
               euery
               word
               ,
               or
               hearing
               a
               Lecture
               read
               doth
               come
               away
               as
               he
               went
               ;
               vnlesse
               he
               be
               placed
               vnder
               a
               most
               painefull
               Tutor
               ,
               how
               is
               it
               possible
               that
               he
               should
               profite
               any
               thing
               ,
               in
               respect
               of
               him
               who
               goeth
               a
               good
               schollar
               thither
               ?
               How
               many
               euils
               doe
               come
               vpon
               the
               sending
               of
               schollars
               so
               rawly
               thither
               ,
               both
               Vniuersity
               and
               Countrey
               doe
               fully
               know
               and
               ●ue
               .
            
             
               Now
               you
               haue
               so
               louingly
               and
               fully
               answered
               me
               in
               euery
               doubt
               ,
               and
               so
               largely
               laide
               open
               your
               minde
               vnto
               me
               ,
               as
               indeede
               I
               cannot
               desire
               any
               more
               of
               you
               :
               Onely
               let
               me
               tell
               you
               this
               ,
               
               that
               the
               points
               are
               so
               many
               ,
               as
               I
               feare
               that
               I
               shall
               neuer
               be
               able
               to
               put
               them
               in
               practice
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               You
               may
               make
               triall
               of
               all
               ,
               or
               the
               most
               likely
               of
               them
               ;
               and
               constantly
               practice
               those
               which
               you
               finde
               most
               profitable
               :
               the
               shorter
               that
               you
               can
               be
               in
               euery
               thing
               ,
               the
               better
               shall
               you
               do
               ;
               so
               that
               all
               be
               done
               with
               vnderstanding
               ,
               as
               I
               said
               before
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               I
               trust
               you
               will
               giue
               me
               a
               copie
               of
               them
               :
               for
               otherwise
               I
               shall
               neuer
               be
               able
               to
               remember
               them
               ;
               besides
               that
               they
               will
               require
               to
               be
               oft
               read
               ouer
               and
               ouer
               ,
               vntill
               I
               shall
               grow
               perfect
               in
               them
               .
               I
               doe
               not
               doubt
               ,
               but
               you
               haue
               set
               them
               downe
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               I
               haue
               ;
               though
               as
               yet
               very
               imperfectly
               ,
               for
               lacke
               of
               meete
               leasure
               .
               Such
               as
               I
               haue
               I
               shall
               impart
               (
               seeing
               your
               earnest
               desire
               to
               doe
               good
               )
               and
               more
               as
               God
               shall
               adde
               more
               helpe
               and
               experience
               by
               your selfe
               ,
               and
               by
               others
               ▪
            
          
        
         
           
           
             CHAP.
             XXXV
             .
          
           
             A
             briefe
             rehearsall
             of
             the
             chiefe
             points
             and
             helpes
             mentioned
             in
             this
             booke
             .
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               HOw
               much
               shall
               you
               make
               me
               more
               indebted
               by
               that
               fauour
               ,
               aboue
               all
               your
               other
               kindnesse
               hitherto
               !
               Yet
               in
               the
               meane
               time
               before
               we
               depart
               ,
               to
               the
               end
               to
               helpe
               my
               weake
               memory
               ,
               and
               to
               cause
               me
               to
               goe
               on
               more
               cherefully
               ,
               let
               me
               request
               onely
               these
               two
               things
               of
               you
               further
               :
            
             
               1
               To
               repeat
               the
               principall
               heads
               of
               those
               things
               which
               should
               be
               as
               it
               were
               in
               the
               Masters
               remembrance
               alwayes
               ,
               
               to
               be
               continually
               put
               in
               practice
               .
            
             
               2
               To
               set
               me
               downe
               a
               short
               Catalogue
               of
               the
               bookes
               and
               helpes
               which
               you
               haue
               mentioned
               belonging
               hereunto
               ,
               
               for
               the
               better
               accomplishing
               of
               all
               these
               seuerall
               parts
               of
               learning
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               For
               those
               principall
               heads
               ,
               though
               most
               of
               them
               were
               named
               in
               the
               obseruations
               ;
               yet
               sith
               such
               little
               briefes
               doe
               much
               helpe
               memory
               ,
               I
               will
               rehearse
               them
               so
               neere
               as
               I
               can
               .
            
             
               These
               were
               of
               the
               chiefe
               :
            
             
               1
               To
               cause
               all
               to
               be
               done
               with
               vnderstanding
               .
               
            
             
               2
               To
               cut
               off
               all
               needlesse
               matters
               ,
               so
               much
               as
               may
               be
               ,
               and
               passe
               by
               that
               which
               is
               vnprofitable
               .
            
             
               3
               To
               note
               all
               hard
               and
               new
               wordes
               :
               to
               obserue
               matter
               and
               phrase
               carefully
               .
            
             
               4
               To
               learne
               and
               keepe
               all
               things
               most
               perfectly
               ,
               as
               they
               goe
               .
            
             
               5
               To
               haue
               few
               fourmes
               .
            
             
               6
               To
               discourage
               none
               ,
               but
               to
               draw
               on
               all
               by
               a
               desire
               of
               commendation
               .
            
             
               7
               To
               stirre
               vp
               to
               emulation
               of
               aduersaries
               ,
               and
               to
               vse
               all
               good
               policy
               for
               one
               to
               prouoke
               another
               .
            
             
             
               8
               Continuall
               examining
               (
               which
               is
               the
               life
               of
               all
               )
               and
               chiefly
               posing
               of
               the
               most
               negligent
               .
            
             
               9
               Right
               pronuntiation
               .
            
             
               10
               Some
               exercise
               of
               memory
               daily
               .
            
             
               11
               To
               haue
               the
               best
               patternes
               for
               euery
               thing
               ;
               and
               to
               doe
               all
               by
               imitation
               .
            
             
               12
               The
               Master
               to
               stirre
               vp
               both
               himselfe
               and
               his
               Schollars
               to
               continuall
               cheerefulnesse
               .
            
             
               13
               Constancy
               in
               order
               .
            
             
               These
               were
               generally
               premised
               .
               To
               these
               we
               may
               adde
               ;
            
             
               14
               To
               get
               an
               Idea
               or
               short
               summe
               and
               generall
               notion
               of
               euery
               Treatise
               or
               Chapter
               .
            
             
               15
               To
               parallel
               all
               by
               examples
               ,
               or
               to
               giue
               like
               examples
               for
               each
               thing
               ,
               and
               where
               they
               haue
               learned
               them
               .
            
             
               16
               To
               see
               that
               they
               haue
               continually
               all
               necessaries
               .
            
             
               17
               To
               countenance
               and
               preferre
               the
               best
               ,
               to
               be
               markes
               for
               the
               rest
               to
               aime
               at
               ,
               and
               that
               all
               may
               be
               incouraged
               by
               their
               example
               .
            
             
               18
               Maintayning
               authority
               ,
               by
               carefull
               execution
               of
               iustice
               in
               rewards
               and
               punishments
               ,
               with
               demonstration
               of
               loue
               ,
               faithfulnesse
               and
               painefulnesse
               in
               our
               place
               ,
               with
               grauitie
               ;
               working
               by
               all
               means
               a
               loue
               of
               learning
               in
               the
               schollars
               ,
               and
               a
               strift
               who
               shall
               excell
               most
               therein
               ,
               of
               a
               conscience
               to
               do
               most
               honour
               and
               seruice
               vnto
               the
               Lord
               ,
               both
               presently
               ,
               and
               chiefly
               in
               time
               to
               come
               .
            
             
               19
               In
               a
               word
               ;
               Seruing
               the
               Lord
               with
               constant
               cheerefulnesse
               ,
               in
               the
               best
               courses
               which
               he
               shall
               make
               knowne
               vnto
               vs
               ▪
               we
               shall
               vndoubtedly
               see
               his
               blessing
               ,
               according
               to
               our
               hearts
               .
            
             
               M.
               Askam
               hath
               these
               steps
               to
               learning
               :
               
               First
               ,
               Aptnesse
               of
               nature
               :
               Secondly
               ,
               Loue
               of
               learning
               :
               Thirdly
               ,
               Diligence
               in
               right
               order
               :
               Fourthly
               ,
               Constancy
               with
               pleasant
               moderation
               :
               Fiftly
               ,
               Alwayes
               to
               learne
               of
               the
               most
               learned
               ;
               pointing
               and
               ayming
               at
               the
               best
               ,
               to
               match
               or
               go
               beyond
               them
               .
            
             
               Philip
               Melanchton
               also
               ,
               in
               his
               Preface
               before
               Hesiod
               ,
               aduiseth
               after
               this
               manner
               ;
               
               To
               striue
               to
               make
               schollars
               exceeding
               cunning
               in
               euery
               Authour
               which
               they
               reade
               .
               
               doe
               this
               by
               oft
               reading
               and
               construing
               ouer
               their
               Authors
               ;
               causing
               them
               to
               note
               euery
               thing
               worthy
               obseruation
               ,
               with
               some
               marke
               ,
               to
               run
               ofter
               ouer
               those
               :
               not
               regarding
               how
               many
               the
               Authours
               are
               ,
               but
               how
               exactly
               they
               learne
               them
               ;
               chiefly
               all
               their
               sentences
               &
               speciall
               phrases
               ,
               that
               the
               speech
               of
               the
               children
               may
               euer
               sauor
               of
               them
               :
               for
               thus
               he
               saith
               ;
               
                 Vt
                 quisque
                 author
                 optimus
                 ,
                 it
                 a
                 saepissimè
                 relegendus
                 ad
                 imit
                 ationem
                 :
              
               And
               that
               thereby
               they
               may
               alwayes
               haue
               of
               a
               sudden
               a
               patterne
               or
               president
               in
               their
               minde
               ,
               whereunto
               to
               run
               ,
               as
               the
               painter
               hath
               .
               And
               so
               much
               for
               the
               chiefe
               points
               :
               for
               the
               seuerall
               books
               and
               helps
               ,
               I
               referre
               you
               rather
               to
               the
               seuerall
               Chapters
               ;
               where
               you
               may
               soone
               see
               them
               together
               ,
               as
               you
               shal
               haue
               occasion
               to
               vse
               them
               for
               their
               seuerall
               purposes
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               But
               it
               is
               a
               great
               charge
               to
               poore
               men
               ,
               to
               prouide
               so
               many
               bookes
               as
               may
               seeme
               necessary
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               It
               is
               true
               indeede
               ;
               yet
               one
               yeare
               gained
               in
               their
               childrens
               learning
               ,
               will
               recompence
               abundantly
               all
               charge
               in
               bookes
               which
               they
               shall
               neede
               :
               and
               much
               more
               ,
               if
               by
               them
               they
               shall
               gaine
               sundry
               yeares
               ,
               and
               be
               furnished
               with
               all
               kinde
               of
               excellent
               learning
               meet
               for
               their
               yeares
               ;
               which
               without
               the
               best
               bookes
               ,
               it
               is
               no
               more
               likely
               to
               do
               ,
               then
               for
               any
               to
               proue
               exquisite
               in
               other
               trades
               and
               sciences
               ,
               without
               the
               most
               fine
               instruments
               seruing
               thereunto
               .
            
             
               And
               this
               one
               certaine
               assurance
               of
               the
               obtayning
               this
               treasure
               of
               learning
               ,
               by
               following
               the
               right
               meanes
               and
               courses
               ,
               may
               counterpoize
               all
               labour
               and
               charges
               whatsoeuer
               can
               be
               furmised
               ,
               for
               attayning
               of
               the
               same
               .
            
          
           
             
               Spoud
               .
            
             
               Sir
               ,
               I
               rest
               fully
               satisfied
               ;
               praysing
               the
               Lord
               ,
               and
               acknowledging
               my
               perpetual
               debt
               for
               this
               our
               conference
               .
            
          
           
             
               Phil.
               
            
             
               Let
               vs
               giue
               God
               all
               the
               glory
               ;
               to
               whom
               of
               due
               it
               appertaines
               :
               and
               let
               vs
               euer
               intreate
               him
               ,
               that
               as
               he
               hath
               thus
               begun
               ,
               so
               he
               will
               perfect
               his
               owne
               worke
               ,
               for
               the
               euerlasting
               praise
               of
               his
               owne
               name
               ,
               and
               the
               perpetuall
               good
               of
               all
               his
               people
               ,
               vntill
               Christ
               Iesus
               shall
               come
               .
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               .
            
          
           
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
          
        
      
    
     
       
         
         
           THE
           SEVERALL
           CHAPTERS
           ,
           WITH
           THE
           PARticular
           Contents
           of
           them
           .
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             I.
             
          
           
             1
             A
             Discourse
             betweene
             two
             Schoolemasters
             ,
             concerning
             their
             function
             :
             in
             the
             end
             determining
             a
             conference
             about
             the
             best
             way
             of
             teaching
             ,
             and
             the
             manner
             of
             proceeding
             in
             the
             same
             .
          
           
             Herein
             these
             particulars
             :
          
           
             
               The
               Schoolemasters
               place
               ,
               ordinarily
               ,
               wearisome
               ,
               and
               thankelesse
               .
            
             
               They
               ,
               who
               haue
               felt
               the
               euils
               of
               labouring
               without
               fruit
               ,
               will
               neyther
               spare
               trauell
               nor
               cost
               to
               helpe
               the
               same
               .
            
             
               Many
               honest
               hearted
               &
               painful
               Schoolemasters
               vtterly
               discouraged
               ,
               and
               liuing
               in
               continuall
               discontentment
               ,
               through
               lacke
               of
               knowledge
               of
               a
               right
               course
               of
               teaching
               .
            
             
               Some
               few
               God
               much
               blesseth
               in
               this
               calling
               ,
               thogh
               rare
               .
            
             
               More
               true
               contentment
               to
               bee
               found
               in
               this
               calling
               ,
               rightly
               followed
               ,
               then
               in
               any
               recreation
               .
            
             
               The
               fruits
               of
               this
               ,
               most
               sweet
               in
               the
               remembrance
               .
            
             
               Knowledge
               and
               practice
               of
               the
               best
               courses
               will
               much
               augment
               the
               blessing
               of
               our
               labour
               ,
               and
               fill
               our
               liues
               with
               contentment
               .
            
             
               How
               the
               way
               of
               all
               good
               learning
               may
               bee
               made
               more
               easie
               ,
               then
               euer
               in
               former
               ages
               .
            
             
               Many
               worthy
               helpes
               lie
               hid
               from
               the
               greatest
               part
               ,
               only
               through
               neglect
               .
            
             
               
               A
               briefe
               rehearsall
               of
               the
               chiefe
               contents
               ,
               for
               the
               better
               entring
               into
               the
               conference
               ,
               &
               for
               giuing
               more
               light
               and
               life
               to
               all
               that
               followeth
               .
            
             
               The
               manner
               of
               proceeding
               in
               this
               conference
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             II.
             
          
           
             2
             WHen
             the
             schollar
             should
             first
             be
             set
             to
             the
             school
             .
             Branches
             ;
          
           
             
               The
               time
               of
               the
               first
               entrance
               in
               countrey
               schooles
               ,
               at
               seuen
               or
               eight
               yeare
               olde
               .
            
             
               The
               child
               of
               any
               ordinary
               towardlines
               ,
               to
               begin
               to
               learn
               about
               fiue
               yeare
               olde
               .
               Reasons
               and
               benefit
               of
               it
               .
            
             
               Two
               or
               three
               yeares
               may
               be
               gained
               hereby
               ,
               to
               fit
               them
               sooner
               for
               the
               Vniuersity
               .
            
             
               Parents
               ought
               to
               labour
               to
               see
               their
               childrens
               good
               education
               before
               their
               eyes
               ,
               so
               soone
               as
               may
               be
               .
            
             
               Obiections
               against
               setting
               children
               so
               young
               to
               the
               schoole
               ,
               answered
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             III.
             
          
           
             3
             HOw
             the
             schollar
             may
             be
             taught
             to
             reade
             English
             wel
             and
             speedily
             ,
             to
             fit
             him
             the
             sooner
             and
             better
             for
             the
             Grammar
             schoole
             .
          
           
             Herein
             these
             things
             handled
             ;
          
           
             
               The
               inconueniences
               of
               hauing
               the
               Grammar
               schooles
               troubled
               with
               teaching
               
                 A.
                 B.
                 C.
              
               
            
             
               How
               this
               might
               be
               remedied
               by
               some
               other
               schooles
               in
               each
               towne
               for
               that
               purpose
               .
            
             
               The
               redresse
               hereof
               to
               besought
               .
            
             
               To
               be
               borne
               with
               patience
               ,
               where
               it
               cannot
               be
               auoyded
               ;
               and
               the
               burden
               of
               it
               to
               be
               made
               so
               light
               as
               may
               be
               .
            
             
               The
               first
               entring
               of
               children
               to
               be
               looked
               to
               heedily
               .
            
             
               To
               teach
               to
               reade
               wel
               ,
               a
               matter
               of
               good
               commendation
               .
            
             
               Griefe
               &
               discredit
               to
               the
               Schoolemaster
               for
               want
               of
               this
               .
            
             
               To
               teach
               to
               call
               and
               pronounce
               each
               letter
               right
               .
            
             
               
               How
               to
               know
               their
               letters
               the
               soonest
               .
            
             
               To
               spell
               ,
               and
               take
               a
               delight
               therein
               .
            
             
               Some
               of
               the
               hardest
               syllables
               and
               words
               set
               downe
               ,
               for
               the
               practicing
               children
               in
               spelling
               of
               them
               ;
               to
               helpe
               by
               them
               to
               spell
               any
               other
               speedily
               ,
               and
               for
               writing
               true
               Orthography
               .
            
             
               Of
               ioyning
               syllables
               together
               .
            
             
               Bookes
               to
               be
               first
               learned
               of
               children
               .
            
             
               In
               what
               time
               children
               well
               applyed
               ,
               may
               learne
               to
               reade
               English.
               
            
             
               Diuiding
               and
               distinguishing
               syllables
               .
            
             
               The
               pleasantest
               way
               to
               teach
               the
               little
               ones
               ,
               to
               pronounce
               their
               letters
               ,
               and
               to
               spell
               before
               they
               know
               a
               letter
               ;
               and
               how
               to
               doe
               it
               .
            
             
               Any
               one
               who
               can
               reade
               ,
               may
               thus
               enter
               children
               ,
               if
               they
               wil
               follow
               the
               directions
               ;
               and
               so
               a
               poore
               body
               may
               make
               an
               honest
               liuing
               of
               it
               ,
               and
               free
               the
               Grammar
               schooles
               .
            
             
               Complaints
               for
               children
               for
               getting
               to
               reade
               English
               ,
               when
               they
               first
               enter
               into
               Latine
               ;
               and
               how
               to
               auoyde
               them
               .
            
             
               The
               iust
               complaint
               of
               want
               of
               care
               in
               our
               schooles
               ,
               for
               proceeding
               in
               our
               owne
               tongue
               ,
               as
               in
               the
               Latine
               or
               Greeke
               ;
               wheras
               our
               chiefe
               care
               should
               be
               for
               our
               owne
               language
               :
               and
               reasons
               for
               it
               .
            
             
               How
               schollars
               may
               increase
               continually
               ,
               as
               fast
               in
               our
               own
               tongue
               as
               in
               the
               Latine
               .
            
             
               The
               chiefe
               fault
               of
               children
               going
               backe
               in
               English
               ,
               when
               they
               begin
               to
               learne
               Latine
               ,
               is
               in
               the
               Parents
               .
            
             
               An
               ordinary
               fault
               ,
               that
               schollars
               are
               to
               seeke
               in
               matters
               of
               common
               numbers
               ;
               and
               how
               to
               redresse
               it
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             IIII.
             
          
           
             OF
             writing
             .
             How
             the
             Master
             may
             direct
             his
             schollars
             to
             write
             faire
             ,
             though
             himselfe
             be
             no
             good
             pen-man
             .
          
           
             Herein
             these
             particulars
             :
          
           
             
               Faire
               writing
               a
               great
               benefit
               and
               ornament
               to
               schooles
               .
            
             
               The
               opinion
               is
               fond
               ,
               that
               a
               good
               schollar
               cannot
               be
               a
               good
               writer
               .
            
             
               
               The
               trouble
               of
               Schoolemasters
               ,
               for
               want
               of
               this
               skill
               to
               teach
               their
               schollars
               how
               to
               write
               .
            
             
               When
               the
               schollars
               should
               begin
               to
               write
               .
            
             
               To
               haue
               all
               necessaries
               thereunto
               ,
               and
               books
               kept
               faire
               .
            
             
               Each
               to
               learne
               to
               make
               his
               owne
               pen
               ,
               and
               how
               .
            
             
               Holding
               the
               pen
               ,
               and
               carrying
               it
               lightly
               .
            
             
               In
               stead
               of
               setting
               copies
               ,
               to
               haue
               little
               copie-bookes
               fastened
               to
               the
               tops
               of
               their
               bookes
               ;
               and
               those
               of
               the
               best
               which
               can
               be
               procured
               .
            
             
               Manner
               of
               their
               copie-bookes
               and
               copies
               .
            
             
               Inconuenience
               of
               following
               diuers
               hands
               .
            
             
               Euils
               of
               the
               want
               of
               such
               copie-bookes
               .
            
             
               Faire
               writing
               to
               be
               practiced
               by
               all
               the
               schollars
               once
               euery
               day
               .
            
             
               General
               rule
               in
               writing
               ,
               to
               make
               all
               like
               the
               copie
               .
            
             
               How
               to
               keepe
               euen
               compasse
               in
               writing
               ,
               not
               ouer-high
               not
               too
               low
               .
            
             
               Benefit
               of
               ruling-pens
               for
               each
               ,
               and
               what
               ones
               .
            
             
               The
               bookes
               of
               the
               young
               beginners
               to
               bee
               ruled
               with
               crosse
               lines
               .
            
             
               The
               compasse
               in
               greatnes
               and
               neerenes
               of
               the
               letters
               .
            
             
               Ioyning
               the
               letters
               in
               writing
               .
            
             
               Writing
               straight
               without
               lines
               .
            
             
               Speciall
               furtherances
               for
               the
               first
               enterers
               ,
               when
               they
               cannot
               frame
               any
               letter
               .
            
             
               Leisurely
               drawing
               the
               letters
               as
               the
               Painter
               ,
               a
               chief
               help
               .
            
             
               To
               obserue
               ornaments
               of
               writing
               .
            
             
               To
               make
               all
               the
               letters
               most
               plaine
               .
            
             
               Mischiefes
               of
               getting
               a
               bad
               hand
               first
               .
            
             
               What
               the
               Master
               is
               to
               doe
               ,
               to
               the
               end
               that
               he
               may
               learne
               to
               teach
               his
               schollars
               to
               write
               faire
               .
            
             
               To
               walke
               amongst
               the
               schollars
               ,
               to
               see
               that
               they
               obserue
               their
               directions
               ,
               and
               to
               marke
               all
               faults
               in
               writing
               .
            
             
               This
               skill
               is
               to
               be
               gotten
               ,
               to
               auoyde
               the
               euils
               by
               wandring
               Scriueners
               .
            
             
               The
               vse
               of
               Scriueners
               in
               Grammar
               Schooles
               ,
               what
               .
            
             
               The
               summe
               of
               the
               principal
               directions
               for
               writing
               ,
               to
               be
               euer
               in
               memory
               .
            
          
        
         
           
           
             CHAP.
             V.
             
          
           
             CErtaine
             general
             obseruations
             to
             be
             knowen
             of
             Schoolmasters
             ,
             and
             practiced
             carefully
             ;
             chiefly
             in
             all
             Grammar
             learning
             .
          
           
             
               1.
               
               That
               schollars
               bee
               taught
               to
               doe
               all
               things
               with
               vnderstanding
               ,
               and
               to
               haue
               a
               generall
               knowledge
               of
               the
               matter
               before
               .
            
             
               To
               do
               all
               things
               by
               reason
               with
               vnderstanding
               ,
               brings
               almost
               double
               learning
               ,
               besides
               ease
               and
               delight
               .
            
             
               Reading
               without
               vnderstanding
               ,
               is
               a
               neglect
               of
               learning
               .
            
             
               Triall
               of
               difference
               betweene
               learning
               with
               vnderstanding
               and
               without
               .
            
             
               Verses
               of
               Horace
               to
               this
               end
               ,
               worthy
               to
               bee
               written
               in
               letters
               of
               golde
               ,
               to
               be
               imprinted
               in
               the
               memories
               of
               all
               .
            
             
               How
               some
               writers
               haue
               so
               far
               gone
               beyond
               others
               in
               eloquence
               ,
               thorough
               their
               ripenesse
               and
               vnderstanding
               .
            
             
               How
               to
               teach
               all
               to
               be
               done
               by
               vnderstanding
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               To
               learne
               onely
               such
               things
               as
               whereof
               they
               may
               haue
               good
               and
               perpetuall
               vse
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               To
               note
               all
               hard
               words
               or
               matters
               worthie
               obseruation
               ,
               and
               the
               manner
               of
               marking
               them
               .
            
             
               4.
               
               To
               learne
               all
               things
               so
               perfectly
               ,
               as
               the
               former
               may
               be
               insteed
               of
               a
               Schoolemaster
               to
               the
               later
               .
            
             
               5.
               
               That
               the
               whole
               schoole
               be
               diuided
               into
               so
               few
               forms
               ,
               as
               may
               be
               ;
               with
               reasons
               for
               the
               same
               .
            
             
               6
               To
               haue
               a
               great
               care
               that
               none
               be
               discouraged
               ,
               but
               all
               to
               be
               prouoked
               by
               emulation
               and
               desire
               of
               praise
               .
            
             
               A
               sentence
               of
               Tully
               to
               this
               purpose
               worthie
               to
               be
               euer
               before
               the
               Masters
               eye
               .
            
             
               Strift
               for
               victories
               the
               most
               commendable
               plaie
               and
               a
               chiefe
               meanes
               to
               make
               the
               schoole
               
                 Ludus
                 Literar●us
              
               .
            
             
               7.
               
               Each
               to
               haue
               his
               aduersary
               :
               and
               they
               to
               be
               so
               matched
               and
               placed
               as
               all
               may
               be
               done
               by
               equall
               strift
               .
            
             
               
               8.
               
               To
               vse
               euer
               to
               examine
               the
               most
               negligent
               .
            
             
               9.
               
               Continuall
               care
               of
               pronouncing
               .
            
             
               10.
               
               To
               haue
               some
               exercise
               of
               memory
               daily
               ,
               for
               making
               excellent
               memories
               .
            
             
               11.
               
               To
               haue
               the
               best
               patternes
               of
               all
               sorts
               that
               can
               bee
               gotten
               .
            
             
               12.
               
               The
               Masters
               to
               incourage
               themselues
               and
               their
               schollars
               continually
               .
            
             
               12.
               
               Constancie
               in
               good
               orders
               ,
               with
               continuall
               demonstration
               of
               loue
               ,
               to
               doe
               all
               for
               the
               greatest
               good
               of
               the
               schollars
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             VI.
             
          
           
             HOw
             to
             make
             children
             perfect
             in
             the
             Accedence
             .
          
           
             Herein
             these
             particulars
             :
          
           
             
               The
               vsuall
               manner
               of
               learning
               to
               reade
               the
               Accedence
               .
            
             
               The
               ordinary
               manner
               of
               getting
               the
               Accedence
               without
               booke
               .
            
             
               The
               best
               meanes
               ,
               for
               learning
               to
               reade
               the
               Accedence
               .
            
             
               Generall
               rule
               in
               learning
               without
               booke
               ,
               or
               getting
               whatsoeuer
               seemeth
               hard
               ,
               To
               take
               but
               a
               little
               at
               a
               time
               .
            
             
               To
               cause
               them
               first
               to
               vnderstand
               their
               lectures
               and
               how
               .
            
             
               Admonition
               to
               Masters
               ,
               desirous
               to
               do
               good
               ;
               To
               be
               as
               the
               Nurses
               with
               little
               children
               .
            
             
               Example
               how
               to
               make
               children
               to
               vnderstand
               ,
               by
               shewing
               the
               meaning
               ,
               and
               by
               asking
               questions
               .
            
             
               In
               what
               points
               of
               the
               Accedence
               ,
               the
               chiefe
               labour
               would
               be
               bestowed
               to
               make
               young
               schollars
               very
               perfect
               ▪
               viz.
               in
               all
               kinde
               of
               declining
               .
            
             
               How
               to
               be
               most
               speedily
               perfect
               in
               the
               Verbs
               ;
               which
               are
               a
               mean
               foundation
               ,
               and
               wherin
               the
               greatest
               difficulty
               lieth
               .
            
             
               No
               paines
               can
               be
               too
               great
               in
               Nownes
               and
               Verbs
               vntill
               they
               be
               exceeding
               perfect
               .
            
             
               
               Two
               generall
               obseruations
               in
               the
               English
               rules
               :
               what
               parts
               of
               the
               English
               rules
               ,
               to
               be
               made
               most
               perfect
               in
               .
            
             
               Helpe
               for
               examination
               of
               the
               Accedence
               :
               viz.
               The
               questions
               of
               the
               Accedence
               ,
               called
               the
               Poasing
               of
               the
               English
               parts
               .
               Other
               needfull
               questions
               adioined
               to
               the
               end
               of
               the
               same
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             VII
             .
          
           
             HOw
             to
             make
             schollars
             perfect
             in
             the
             Grammar
             .
          
           
             
               What
               is
               done
               ordinarily
               in
               schooles
               in
               teaching
               Grammar
               .
            
             
               What
               things
               are
               requisite
               in
               learning
               Grammar
               .
            
             
               How
               to
               get
               the
               Grammar
               with
               most
               ease
               and
               fruite
               .
            
             
               Benefit
               of
               Lillies
               rules
               construed
               .
            
             
               Learning
               the
               rules
               without
               booke
               .
            
             
               Construing
               the
               rules
               without
               booke
               .
            
             
               How
               to
               do
               where
               leasure
               is
               wanting
               .
            
             
               How
               to
               examine
               so
               as
               to
               make
               your
               schollar
               to
               answer
               any
               question
               of
               his
               Grammar
               ;
               with
               an
               example
               thereof
               .
            
             
               To
               appose
               only
               in
               English
               ,
               where
               children
               are
               too
               weak
               to
               answere
               in
               Latine
               .
            
             
               Examining
               in
               the
               Latine
               Nownes
               and
               Verbes
               .
            
             
               Examining
               the
               Syntaxis
               ,
               and
               helpes
               thereunto
               .
            
             
               Repeating
               titles
               and
               margents
               ,
               or
               the
               beginning
               of
               the
               rules
               ,
               in
               a
               continued
               speech
               ,
               to
               keep
               the
               rules
               perfectly
               .
            
             
               Helpe
               for
               hearing
               part
               in
               straights
               of
               time
               .
            
             
               Helps
               for
               further
               vnderstanding
               the
               rules
               .
            
             
               The
               sum
               of
               all
               ,
               wherin
               chiefe
               care
               would
               be
               had
               .
            
             
               A
               perfect
               saying
               euery
               rule
               ,
               not
               so
               absolutely
               necessarie
               .
            
             
               To
               turne
               to
               each
               hard
               rule
               in
               parsing
               ,
               a
               helpe
               to
               make
               Schollars
               perfect
               in
               the
               Grammar
               .
            
             
               Grammar
               to
               be
               made
               as
               a
               Dictionary
               to
               the
               Schollars
               .
            
          
        
         
           
           
             CHAP.
             VIII
             .
          
           
             OF
             Construction
             ,
             or
             of
             construing
             Authors
             ,
             how
             to
             make
             all
             the
             way
             thereof
             most
             easie
             and
             plaine
             .
          
           
             Herein
             these
             particulars
             :
          
           
             
               Things
               seeming
               difficult
               in
               construction
               .
            
             
               The
               ordinary
               toile
               of
               Masters
               about
               giuing
               lectures
               ,
               &
               making
               their
               schollars
               able
               to
               construe
               .
            
             
               Difficulty
               in
               taking
               lectures
               ,
               in
               propriety
               of
               words
               and
               sense
               .
            
             
               Griefe
               of
               the
               Masters
               for
               their
               schollars
               forgetting
               that
               which
               they
               haue
               learned
               .
            
             
               The
               waie
               of
               construing
               most
               plaine
               ,
               by
               practice
               of
               the
               Rule
               of
               construing
               ,
               and
               of
               Grammaticall
               translations
               .
            
             
               The
               rule
               of
               construing
               vnheard
               of
               to
               the
               most
               .
            
             
               The
               rule
               set
               downe
               by
               sundry
               learned
               Grammarians
               .
            
             
               The
               rule
               according
               as
               Master
               Leech
               hath
               set
               it
               downe
               .
            
             
               The
               rule
               according
               to
               Crusius
               .
            
             
               The
               rule
               expounded
               more
               at
               large
               ,
               though
               the
               curious
               handling
               of
               it
               be
               left
               to
               some
               others
               .
            
             
               The
               sum
               of
               the
               rule
               briefly
               .
            
             
               An
               example
               of
               construing
               and
               of
               Grammaticall
               translations
               according
               to
               the
               rule
               :
               wherin
               may
               be
               seene
               the
               generall
               benefits
               therof
               ,
               for
               resoluing
               Latine
               into
               the
               Grammaticall
               order
               ,
               construing
               ,
               parsing
               ,
               making
               Latine
               ,
               and
               trying
               it
               .
            
             
               The
               chiefe
               reason
               of
               the
               benefits
               .
            
             
               Benefits
               of
               translatiōs
               according
               to
               the
               rule
               ,
               set
               down
               more
               particularly
               .
            
             
               Things
               specially
               obserued
               in
               the
               translations
               of
               the
               Schoole
               Authors
               .
            
             
               How
               to
               vse
               the
               translations
               ,
               so
               as
               to
               attaine
               the
               former
               benefits
               .
            
             
               Obiections
               against
               the
               vse
               of
               translations
               in
               Schooles
               ,
               answered
               .
            
             
               
               The
               vses
               and
               benefits
               mentioned
               ,
               cannot
               be
               made
               of
               any
               other
               translations
               of
               the
               Schoole
               Authors
               ,
               except
               of
               the
               Grammaticall
               :
               and
               the
               reason
               of
               it
               .
            
             
               Som
               exampls
               of
               other
               translations
               ,
               to
               manifest
               the
               truth
               hereof
               .
            
             
               Grammatical
               translations
               separate
               from
               the
               Latine
               ,
               cannot
               indanger
               any
               to
               make
               them
               truants
               .
            
             
               How
               to
               preuent
               idlenesse
               or
               negligence
               in
               the
               vse
               of
               the
               translations
               .
            
             
               These
               no
               meanes
               to
               make
               Masters
               idle
               ,
               but
               contrarily
               to
               incourage
               them
               to
               take
               all
               paines
               .
            
             
               The
               account
               to
               be
               iustly
               made
               of
               such
               translations
               .
            
             
               Schoole
               Authors
               translated
               Grammatically
               .
            
             
               Other
               bookes
               also
               translated
               Grammatically
               for
               continuall
               helps
               in
               Schooles
               .
            
             
               What
               helpes
               to
               be
               vsed
               for
               construing
               higher
               Authors
               ,
               and
               so
               for
               construing
               
                 ex
                 tempore
              
               .
            
             
               The
               higher
               fourmes
               to
               practice
               to
               goe
               ouer
               so
               much
               as
               they
               can
               ,
               construing
               
                 ex
                 tempore
              
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             IX
             .
          
           
             OF
             Parsing
             and
             the
             seueral
             kinds
             therof
             .
             How
             children
             may
             parse
             of
             themselues
             ,
             readily
             and
             surely
             .
          
           
             The
             particular
             branches
             are
             these
             ;
          
           
             
               The
               vsuall
               manner
               of
               teaching
               to
               parse
               .
            
             
               The
               certaine
               direction
               for
               parsing
               .
            
             
               To
               parse
               as
               they
               construe
               ,
               marking
               the
               last
               word
               .
            
             
               To
               obserue
               carefully
               ,
               where
               they
               haue
               learned
               each
               word
               ,
               what
               exāple
               euery
               word
               is
               like
               ;
               so
               to
               parallel
               by
               exāples
               ,
               each
               thing
               which
               they
               haue
               not
               learned
               in
               their
               rules
               .
            
             
               An
               example
               of
               parsing
               ,
               set
               downe
               at
               large
               for
               the
               rudest
               .
            
             
               Manner
               of
               hearing
               lectures
               amongst
               the
               lower
               .
            
             
               How
               to
               knowe
               by
               the
               words
               what
               part
               of
               Speech
               each
               word
               is
               .
            
             
               
               How
               a
               childe
               may
               knowe
               ,
               of
               what
               Coniugation
               any
               Verbe
               is
               .
            
             
               Much
               time
               and
               toyle
               in
               parsing
               ,
               thorough
               examining
               each
               word
               by
               the
               Master
               ,
               how
               helped
               .
            
             
               The
               surest
               ,
               shortest
               &
               speediest
               way
               of
               parsing
               ,
               to
               parse
               as
               reading
               a
               lecture
               .
            
             
               How
               to
               helpe
               to
               prepare
               the
               children
               for
               parsing
               at
               taking
               lectures
               ,
               by
               shewing
               them
               onely
               the
               hard
               words
               ,
               that
               they
               may
               take
               most
               paines
               in
               them
               .
            
             
               Example
               of
               marking
               the
               hard
               words
               amongst
               the
               first
               enterers
               .
            
             
               Marking
               the
               hard
               words
               helpeth
               much
               ,
               and
               preuenteth
               many
               inconueniences
               .
            
             
               How
               to
               oppose
               so
               as
               children
               may
               get
               both
               matter
               ,
               words
               and
               phrase
               of
               each
               lecture
               ,
               with
               examples
               of
               it
               in
               the
               first
               Authors
               :
               and
               how
               to
               make
               vse
               of
               each
               Author
               .
            
             
               Parsing
               in
               the
               higher
               fourmes
               ,
               and
               to
               do
               all
               in
               Latine
               .
            
             
               The
               sum
               of
               all
               for
               parsing
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             X.
             
          
           
             OF
             making
             Latine
             .
             How
             to
             enter
             children
             to
             make
             Latine
             ,
             with
             delight
             and
             certainty
             ;
             without
             daunger
             of
             false
             Latine
             ,
             barbarous
             phrase
             ,
             or
             any
             other
             like
             inconuenience
             .
          
           
             Particular
             points
             ;
          
           
             
               To
               enter
               children
               to
               make
               Latine
               ,
               a
               matter
               ordinarily
               extreamly
               difficult
               and
               full
               of
               toyle
               ,
               both
               to
               Master
               and
               Schollar
               .
            
             
               The
               vsuall
               manner
               in
               country
               Schooles
               ,
               to
               enter
               children
               to
               make
               Latine
               .
            
             
               The
               shortest
               ,
               surest
               ,
               and
               easiest
               way
               ,
               both
               to
               Master
               and
               Schollar
               ,
               for
               entring
               to
               make
               Latine
               .
            
             
               Making
               first
               the
               Latine
               of
               their
               lectures
               ,
               and
               giuing
               a
               reason
               of
               each
               word
               .
               Example
               of
               it
               .
            
             
               Continuall
               construing
               ,
               parsing
               ,
               and
               reading
               their
               Authors
               
               out
               of
               Grammaticall
               translations
               ,
               is
               continuall
               making
               pure
               Latine
               ,
               to
               cause
               children
               to
               come
               on
               in
               it
               very
               fast
               .
            
             
               Choosing
               fit
               sentences
               out
               of
               Authors
               ,
               for
               the
               children
               to
               make
               of
               themselues
               .
            
             
               The
               maner
               of
               the
               entrance
               of
               children
               to
               write
               Latine
               ,
               so
               as
               to
               profit
               in
               English
               ,
               Latine
               ,
               Writing
               faire
               and
               true
               ,
               all
               vnder
               one
               labor
               .
            
             
               How
               to
               haue
               their
               bookes
               ruled
               to
               this
               purpose
               .
            
             
               Manner
               of
               dictating
               the
               English
               to
               schollars
               ,
               when
               they
               are
               to
               learne
               to
               write
               Latine
               .
            
             
               Making
               and
               setting
               downe
               the
               Latine
               ,
               by
               the
               Schollars
               .
            
             
               Benefit
               of
               it
               for
               ,
               certaine
               direction
               both
               to
               Master
               and
               Schollar
               .
            
             
               Further
               vse
               to
               be
               made
               of
               the
               Latine
               so
               set
               down
               ,
               to
               make
               it
               fully
               their
               owne
               .
            
             
               Composing
               the
               Latine
               into
               the
               order
               of
               the
               Author
               .
            
             
               Tullies
               Sentences
               ,
               the
               fittest
               book
               to
               dictate
               sentences
               out
               of
               .
            
             
               An
               example
               of
               the
               manner
               of
               dictating
               ,
               and
               writing
               downe
               both
               English
               and
               Latine
               .
            
             
               Translating
               into
               pure
               Latine
               ,
               and
               in
               good
               composition
               of
               themselues
               ,
               trying
               who
               can
               come
               neerest
               vnto
               Tullie
               .
            
             
               How
               to
               preuent
               stealing
               ,
               and
               writing
               after
               one
               another
               .
            
             
               How
               to
               goe
               on
               faster
               ,
               and
               dispatch
               more
               in
               making
               Latine
               .
            
             
               Translating
               into
               English
               of
               themselues
               ,
               after
               M.
               Askams
               maner
               ;
               and
               after
               ,
               reading
               the
               same
               into
               Latine
               again
               ,
               or
               writing
               it
               .
            
             
               The
               most
               speedy
               and
               profitable
               way
               of
               translating
               for
               young
               schollars
               .
            
             
               How
               to
               translate
               an
               Authour
               into
               Latine
               ,
               or
               any
               peece
               thereof
               .
            
             
               Such
               translating
               onely
               for
               Schollars
               well
               grounded
               .
            
             
               Summe
               of
               all
               for
               making
               Latine
               .
            
          
        
         
           
           
             CHAP.
             XI
             .
          
           
             OF
             the
             Artificial
             order
             of
             composing
             ,
             or
             placing
             of
             the
             words
             in
             prose
             ,
             according
             to
             Tully
             ,
             and
             the
             purest
             latinists
             .
             Herein
             these
             particulars
             :
          
           
             
               Pure
               composition
               a
               matter
               of
               difficulty
               .
            
             
               The
               error
               of
               young
               Schollars
               ,
               displacing
               sentences
               ,
               in
               an
               imagination
               of
               fine
               composition
               .
            
             
               Composition
               generally
               belonging
               to
               all
               Latine
               .
            
             
               Rules
               of
               composition
               ,
               as
               they
               are
               set
               down
               by
               Macropedius
               ,
               in
               the
               end
               of
               his
               Method
               of
               making
               Epistles
               .
            
             
               More
               exquisite
               obseruation
               in
               placing
               and
               measuring
               sentences
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             XII
             .
          
           
             HOw
             to
             make
             Epistles
             imitating
             Tully
             ,
             short
             pithy
             ,
             sweet
             Latine
             and
             familiar
             ,
             and
             to
             indite
             Letters
             to
             our
             friends
             in
             English
             accordinglie
             .
             Herein
             these
             things
             ;
          
           
             
               Difficulty
               of
               making
               Epistles
               purely
               ,
               and
               pithily
               .
            
             
               The
               ordinary
               meanes
               of
               directing
               Schollars
               to
               make
               Epistles
               .
            
             
               Difficulty
               for
               children
               ,
               who
               haue
               no
               reading
               ,
               to
               inuent
               variety
               of
               matter
               of
               themselues
               .
            
             
               Helpes
               for
               making
               Epistles
               ,
               by
               reading
               Tullies
               Epistles
               ,
               and
               imitating
               them
               .
            
             
               Making
               answeres
               to
               Epistles
               .
            
             
               Examples
               of
               imitating
               Epistles
               ,
               and
               answering
               them
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             XIII
             .
          
           
             OF
             making
             Theames
             full
             of
             good
             matter
             ,
             in
             a
             pure
             stile
             and
             with
             iudgement
             .
          
           
           
             Herein
             these
             branches
             ;
          
           
             
               The
               ordinary
               manner
               of
               directing
               schollars
               how
               to
               enter
               to
               make
               Theames
               ,
               according
               to
               Apthonius
               precepts
               .
            
             
               The
               inconueniencies
               of
               that
               course
               for
               yong
               schollars
               ;
               and
               that
               it
               is
               hard
               enough
               for
               many
               teachers
               .
            
             
               Difficulty
               in
               making
               Theames
               ,
               because
               schollars
               are
               not
               acquainted
               with
               the
               matter
               of
               them
               .
            
             
               The
               schollar
               is
               oft
               beaten
               for
               his
               Theame
               ,
               when
               the
               Master
               rather
               deserueth
               it
               .
            
             
               To
               consider
               the
               end
               of
               making
               Theames
               .
            
             
               The
               meanes
               to
               furnish
               the
               schollars
               for
               Theames
               .
            
             
               Presidents
               or
               examples
               for
               Theames
               .
            
             
               Presidents
               for
               matter
               ,
               to
               furnish
               schollars
               with
               store
               of
               the
               best
               matter
               .
            
             
               
                 Reusneri
                 Symbola
              
               ,
               a
               booke
               meete
               to
               this
               purpose
               ;
               and
               chiefly
               for
               trayning
               vp
               young
               Gentlemen
               ,
               and
               all
               of
               chiefe
               sort
               and
               condition
               .
            
             
               How
               to
               vse
               Reusner
               for
               Theames
               .
            
             
               An
               easie
               direction
               for
               Theames
               ,
               to
               be
               handled
               according
               to
               the
               seuerall
               parts
               thereof
               .
            
             
               Imitation
               of
               Exordiums
               and
               Conclusions
               .
            
             
               Other
               Authours
               for
               matter
               .
            
             
               Helpes
               for
               inuention
               of
               matter
               .
            
             
               The
               knowledge
               of
               the
               ten
               grounds
               of
               Inuention
               ,
               the
               readiest
               way
               .
            
             
               The
               Art
               of
               meditation
               most
               profitable
               and
               easie
               for
               help
               of
               inuention
               .
            
             
               Presidents
               for
               the
               forme
               and
               manner
               of
               making
               Theames
               .
            
             
               Declamations
               and
               patternes
               for
               them
               .
            
             
               Declamations
               fit
               for
               the
               Vniuersities
               ,
               or
               for
               the
               principall
               schollars
               in
               Grammar
               schooles
               .
            
             
               Manner
               of
               writing
               down
               Theams
               by
               schollars
               of
               iudgement
               .
            
             
               Making
               of
               Theames
               
                 ex
                 tempore
              
               ,
               a
               matter
               of
               great
               commendations
               ,
               if
               it
               be
               done
               schollar-like
               .
            
             
               The
               way
               to
               make
               Theames
               
                 ex
                 tempore
              
               .
            
             
               
               A
               most
               easie
               and
               profitable
               practice
               ,
               to
               helpe
               to
               make
               Theames
               
                 ex
                 tempore
              
               .
            
             
               Whereto
               be
               stored
               with
               matter
               and
               words
               for
               each
               part
               of
               the
               Theame
               .
            
             
               Helpe
               for
               supplying
               wordes
               and
               phrases
               .
            
             
               Common-place
               bookes
               ,
               a
               singular
               helpe
               .
            
             
               Orations
               .
            
             
               Orations
               belong
               specially
               to
               the
               Vniuersities
               .
            
             
               Examples
               of
               Orations
               .
            
             
               Orations
               
                 ex
                 tempore
              
               .
            
             
               Summe
               for
               Theames
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             XIIII
             .
          
           
             OF
             versifying
             .
             How
             to
             enter
             to
             make
             verses
             with
             delight
             and
             certainty
             ,
             without
             bodging
             ;
             and
             to
             traine
             vp
             schollars
             to
             imitate
             and
             expresse
             Ouid
             or
             Virgill
             ,
             both
             their
             phrase
             and
             stile
             .
          
           
             Herein
             these
             particulars
             :
          
           
             
               Poetry
               rather
               for
               ornament
               then
               for
               any
               necessity
               .
            
             
               There
               may
               be
               commendable
               vse
               of
               Poetry
               .
            
             
               The
               ordinary
               difficulty
               of
               Poetry
               .
            
             
               The
               folly
               of
               some
               in
               this
               kinde
               .
            
             
               The
               most
               plaine
               way
               how
               to
               enter
               to
               make
               verses
               ,
               without
               bodging
               .
            
             
               Turning
               the
               verses
               of
               their
               Lectures
               into
               other
               verses
               .
            
             
               Of
               contracting
               or
               drawing
               seuen
               or
               eight
               verses
               into
               foure
               or
               fiue
               ;
               and
               the
               certaine
               benefit
               of
               this
               exercise
               .
            
             
               To
               make
               verses
               of
               any
               ordinary
               Theame
               .
            
             
               To
               versifie
               
                 ex
                 tempore
              
               .
            
             
               Helpes
               for
               versifying
               .
            
          
        
         
           
           
             CHAP.
             XV.
             
          
           
             THe
             manner
             of
             examining
             and
             correcting
             exercises
             .
          
           
             Herein
             these
             particulars
             :
          
           
             
               Examining
               exercises
               neuer
               to
               be
               omitted
               .
            
             
               Generall
               faults
               wherein
               schollars
               doe
               commonly
               slip
               .
            
             
               To
               reade
               ouer
               their
               exercises
               first
               in
               naturall
               order
               .
            
             
               To
               parallel
               each
               thing
               by
               examples
               .
            
             
               To
               looke
               to
               elegancy
               and
               finenesse
               of
               composition
               .
            
             
               Neuer
               to
               thinke
               any
               thing
               laboured
               enough
               .
            
             
               Aduersaries
               to
               note
               faults
               in
               one
               anothers
               exercises
               .
            
             
               The
               manner
               of
               examining
               exercises
               by
               the
               Master
               .
            
             
               Speciall
               faults
               in
               the
               highest
               fourmes
               .
            
             
               Care
               that
               they
               doe
               correct
               their
               exercises
               presently
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             XVI
             .
          
           
             HOw
             to
             answere
             any
             needfull
             question
             of
             Grammar
             or
             Rhetoricke
             .
          
           
             Herein
             these
             things
             ;
          
           
             
               To
               answere
               any
               Grammar
               question
               ,
               a
               thing
               commendable
               .
            
             
               How
               to
               answere
               any
               difficult
               Grammar
               question
               .
            
             
               Most
               of
               the
               difficulties
               of
               the
               auncient
               Classicall
               Authours
               ,
               collected
               briefly
               by
               M.
               Stockwood
               .
            
             
               How
               to
               answere
               the
               questions
               of
               Rhetoricke
               .
            
             
               How
               to
               answere
               the
               questions
               of
               Tullies
               Offices
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             XVII
             .
          
           
             OF
             Grammaticall
             oppositions
             .
             How
             to
             dispute
             schollar-like
             of
             any
             Grammar
             question
             in
             good
             Latine
             .
          
           
             Herein
             these
             branches
             :
          
           
             
               
               To
               vse
               the
               helpe
               of
               Master
               Stockwoods
               disputations
               of
               Grammar
               .
            
             
               Benefits
               of
               such
               scholasticall
               oppositions
               .
            
             
               Disputations
               of
               morall
               Philosophy
               belong
               rather
               to
               the
               Vniuersities
               .
            
             
               How
               these
               may
               be
               done
               ,
               and
               how
               farre
               .
            
             
               Obiection
               answered
               ,
               for
               disputing
               out
               of
               Master
               Stockwood
               .
            
             
               Euils
               of
               inforcing
               schollars
               to
               exercises
               ,
               with
               the
               examples
               whereof
               they
               are
               not
               acquainted
               first
               .
            
             
               Benefite
               of
               hauing
               the
               best
               paternes
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             XVIII
             .
          
           
             OF
             pronouncing
             naturally
             and
             sweetly
             ,
             without
             vaine
             affectation
             .
          
           
             Herein
             these
             particulars
             :
          
           
             
               The
               excellency
               of
               pronuntiation
               .
            
             
               Pronuntiation
               ordinarily
               hard
               to
               bee
               attained
               in
               schooles
               .
            
             
               How
               schollars
               may
               bee
               brought
               to
               pronounce
               sweetelie
               .
            
             
               Children
               to
               be
               trai●ed
               vp
               to
               pronounce
               right
               from
               the
               first
               entrance
               .
            
             
               To
               vtter
               euery
               matter
               according
               to
               the
               nature
               of
               it
               .
            
             
               What
               they
               cannot
               vtter
               in
               Latine
               ,
               to
               learne
               to
               doe
               it
               first
               in
               English
               ,
               then
               in
               Latine
               .
            
             
               To
               cause
               sundry
               to
               pronounce
               the
               very
               same
               sentence
               in
               emulation
               .
            
             
               To
               be
               carefull
               ,
               chiefly
               for
               pronuntiation
               ,
               in
               all
               Authors
               wherein
               persons
               are
               fained
               to
               speake
               .
            
             
               Poetry
               to
               be
               pronounced
               as
               prose
               ,
               except
               in
               scanning
               .
            
             
               Further
               helpes
               in
               pronouncing
               .
            
             
               To
               marke
               in
               each
               sentence
               ,
               in
               what
               word
               the
               Emphasie
               lyeth
               .
            
             
               Care
               in
               pronouncing
               exercises
               .
            
             
               
               The
               more
               exquisite
               knowledge
               and
               practice
               of
               pronouncing
               ,
               left
               vnto
               the
               Vniuersities
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             XIX
             .
          
           
             OF
             speaking
             Latine
             purely
             and
             readily
             .
          
           
             
               Complaint
               of
               the
               difficulty
               to
               traine
               vp
               schollars
               to
               speake
               Latine
               .
            
             
               The
               generall
               errour
               ,
               for
               the
               time
               when
               schollars
               are
               to
               begin
               to
               speake
               Latine
               .
            
             
               To
               learne
               to
               speake
               Latine
               should
               be
               begun
               from
               the
               first
               entrance
               into
               construction
               .
            
             
               The
               surest
               course
               for
               entring
               young
               schollars
               to
               speake
               Latine
               .
            
             
               How
               the
               Master
               himselfe
               may
               doe
               it
               easily
               before
               them
               .
            
             
               The
               daily
               practice
               of
               Grammaticall
               Translations
               ,
               and
               chiefly
               of
               reading
               bookes
               of
               Dialogues
               out
               of
               English
               into
               Latine
               ,
               is
               a
               continuall
               practice
               of
               speaking
               Latine
               .
            
             
               Difficulty
               to
               cause
               schollars
               to
               practice
               speaking
               Latine
               amongst
               themselues
               .
            
             
               Inconueniencies
               of
               Custodes
               for
               speaking
               Latine
               .
            
             
               Inconuenience
               of
               one
               schollar
               smiting
               another
               with
               the
               Ferula
               .
            
             
               The
               best
               meanes
               to
               holde
               schollars
               to
               speaking
               Latine
               .
            
             
               How
               any
               one
               may
               by
               himselfe
               alone
               ,
               attaine
               to
               speake
               Latine
               in
               ordinary
               matters
               .
            
             
               For
               them
               who
               desire
               to
               come
               to
               ripenesse
               and
               purity
               in
               the
               Latine
               tongue
               ,
               Goclenius
               his
               obseruations
               of
               the
               Latine
               tongue
               ,
               is
               of
               singular
               vse
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             XX.
             
          
           
             HOw
             to
             attaine
             most
             speedily
             vnto
             the
             knowledge
             of
             the
             Greeke
             tongue
             .
          
           
           
             Herein
             these
             branches
             ;
          
           
             
               The
               Greeke
               may
               be
               gotten
               with
               farre
               lesse
               labour
               then
               the
               Latine
               .
            
             
               One
               benefite
               of
               the
               perfect
               knowledge
               of
               the
               Greeke
               Testament
               alone
               ,
               worthy
               all
               our
               labour
               to
               be
               taken
               in
               the
               Greeke
               .
            
             
               M.
               Askams
               testimony
               concerning
               the
               Greeke
               tongue
               ,
               and
               the
               excellent
               learning
               contained
               in
               it
               .
            
             
               The
               way
               to
               the
               Greeke
               ,
               the
               same
               with
               the
               Latine
               .
            
             
               How
               schollars
               of
               vnderstanding
               and
               iudgement
               may
               take
               a
               shorter
               course
               .
            
             
               To
               vse
               M.
               Camdens
               Grammar
               .
            
             
               
                 Grammatica
                 Graecapro
                 Schola
                 Argentinensi
                 per
                 Theophilum
                 Golium
                 ,
              
               may
               serue
               in
               steede
               of
               a
               further
               exposition
               of
               Camden
               .
            
             
               To
               begin
               construction
               with
               the
               Greeke
               Testament
               ,
               and
               why
               .
            
             
               To
               striue
               to
               haue
               the
               Scriptures
               as
               familiarly
               in
               the
               Originals
               ,
               as
               the
               Iewes
               had
               the
               Hebrew
               .
            
             
               Those
               who
               purpose
               to
               haue
               any
               smattering
               in
               the
               Greek
               ,
               to
               haue
               it
               in
               the
               Testament
               ,
               and
               why
               .
            
             
               The
               Testament
               compared
               to
               other
               Greeke
               Authours
               .
            
             
               The
               Testament
               a
               notable
               entrance
               to
               all
               other
               Greeke
               Authours
               .
            
             
               How
               schollars
               may
               be
               made
               most
               perfect
               in
               the
               Greeke
               Testament
               .
            
             
               The
               speediest
               way
               to
               the
               Greeke
               ,
               To
               get
               the
               Radices
               first
               .
            
             
               The
               easiest
               way
               ,
               how
               to
               learne
               the
               Greeke
               Radices
               .
            
             
               How
               any
               may
               soone
               learne
               to
               reade
               the
               Greeke
               ,
               before
               they
               learne
               the
               Greeke
               Grammar
               .
            
             
               How
               the
               Nomenclator
               of
               the
               Greeke
               Primitiues
               might
               be
               made
               of
               singular
               vse
               .
            
             
               Helpe
               for
               committing
               wordes
               to
               memory
               .
            
             
               Caueat
               in
               remembring
               .
            
             
               
               The
               Greeke
               Radices
               contriued
               into
               continued
               speeches
               ,
               may
               be
               gotten
               soonest
               of
               all
               .
            
             
               The
               readiest
               and
               surest
               way
               of
               getting
               the
               Testament
               ▪
               By
               a
               perfect
               verball
               translation
               ,
               separate
               from
               the
               Greeke
               .
            
             
               How
               by
               the
               help
               of
               such
               a
               translation
               ,
               any
               who
               haue
               but
               a
               smattering
               in
               the
               Greeke
               may
               proceede
               of
               themselues
               in
               the
               Testament
               .
            
             
               This
               cannot
               be
               so
               done
               by
               the
               interlineall
               ,
               or
               hauing
               the
               Greeke
               and
               Latine
               together
               ,
               and
               why
               .
            
             
               How
               schollars
               of
               iudgement
               may
               vse
               the
               interlineall
               .
            
             
               How
               to
               proceede
               in
               other
               Authours
               .
            
             
               The
               benefit
               of
               such
               translations
               of
               some
               of
               the
               purest
               Greeke
               Authours
               .
            
             
               Parsing
               in
               Greeke
               .
            
             
               Helpes
               for
               parsing
               in
               Greeke
               .
            
             
               Helpes
               for
               knowledge
               of
               the
               Poets
               .
            
             
               How
               to
               write
               in
               Greeke
               purely
               .
            
             
               How
               to
               write
               faire
               in
               Greeke
               .
            
             
               Versifying
               in
               Greeke
               .
            
             
               Summe
               of
               all
               for
               the
               Greeke
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             XXI
             .
          
           
             HOw
             to
             get
             most
             speedily
             ,
             the
             knowledge
             and
             vnderstanding
             of
             the
             Hebrew
             .
          
           
             Herein
             these
             branches
             ;
          
           
             
               The
               knowledge
               of
               the
               Hebrew
               may
               be
               the
               soonest
               gotten
               ,
               and
               why
               .
            
             
               Manner
               of
               learning
               the
               Grammar
               ,
               and
               what
               Grammar
               to
               be
               vsed
               .
            
             
               The
               getting
               the
               Hebrew
               Radices
               ,
               a
               chiefe
               helpe
               .
            
             
               Manner
               of
               committing
               the
               Radices
               to
               memory
               .
            
             
               Examples
               of
               helping
               the
               memory
               in
               learning
               the
               Hebrew
               Radices
               .
            
             
               The
               benefit
               of
               comparing
               the
               tongues
               .
            
             
               The
               best
               Epitome
               for
               learning
               the
               Radices
               .
            
             
               
               The
               way
               might
               be
               more
               compendious
               by
               the
               rootes
               reduced
               to
               Classes
               .
            
             
               Continuall
               practice
               of
               perfect
               verball
               Translations
               ,
               a
               singular
               helpe
               .
            
             
               A
               Student
               hauing
               opportunity
               cannot
               be
               better
               imployed
               ,
               then
               in
               getting
               perfectly
               ,
               and
               imprinting
               the
               originals
               in
               memory
               .
            
             
               The
               Latine
               ,
               Greeke
               and
               Hebrew
               ,
               may
               bee
               the
               soonest
               gotten
               by
               such
               perfect
               Translations
               in
               each
               tongue
               .
            
             
               How
               much
               and
               what
               to
               learne
               in
               all
               things
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             XXII
             .
          
           
             OF
             knowledge
             of
             the
             grounds
             of
             Religion
             ,
             and
             trayning
             vp
             schollars
             therein
             .
          
           
             Herein
             these
             heads
             ;
          
           
             
               Schollars
               are
               to
               be
               trained
               vp
               in
               Religion
               .
            
             
               Religion
               most
               neglected
               in
               Schooles
               .
            
             
               The
               Popish
               Schoolemasters
               shall
               rise
               vp
               in
               iudgement
               against
               all
               who
               neglect
               it
               .
            
             
               Teaching
               the
               Catechisme
               ,
               and
               when
               .
            
             
               Examining
               the
               Catechisme
               .
            
             
               Taking
               notes
               of
               Sermons
               .
            
             
               Setting
               downe
               all
               the
               substance
               of
               the
               Sermons
               ,
               in
               the
               higher
               fourmes
               .
            
             
               Manner
               of
               noting
               ,
               for
               helping
               vnderstanding
               and
               memory
               .
            
             
               To
               translate
               the
               Sermon
               into
               Latine
               ,
               or
               to
               reade
               it
               into
               Latine
               
                 ex
                 tempore
              
               .
            
             
               Examining
               Sermons
               .
            
             
               Repetition
               or
               rehearsall
               of
               the
               Sermons
               .
            
             
               Benefit
               of
               strict
               examination
               of
               Sermons
               .
            
             
               How
               the
               repetition
               may
               be
               done
               readily
               .
            
             
               How
               to
               goe
               through
               the
               History
               of
               the
               Bible
               ,
               and
               the
               manner
               of
               examining
               it
               .
            
             
               Obiections
               answered
               .
            
             
               How
               to
               teach
               the
               schollars
               ciuility
               .
            
          
        
         
           
           
             CHAP.
             XXIII
             .
          
           
             HOw
             to
             vnderstand
             and
             remember
             anie
             Morall
             matter
             .
          
           
             Herein
             these
             things
             ;
          
           
             
               A
               principall
               helpe
               of
               vnderstanding
               ,
               to
               cause
               children
               to
               vnderstand
               and
               remember
               by
               questions
               .
            
             
               An
               example
               hereof
               .
            
             
               Helpe
               in
               priuate
               reading
               ,
               by
               questions
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             XXIIII
             .
          
           
             SOme
             things
             necessarie
             to
             be
             knowen
             ,
             for
             the
             better
             attaining
             of
             all
             the
             parts
             of
             learning
             mentioned
             before
             :
             as
             ,
          
           
             
               1.
               
               How
               the
               Schoolemaster
               should
               be
               qualified
               .
               Herein
               these
               branches
               ;
            
             
               The
               Schoolemaster
               ought
               to
               be
               sufficient
               to
               direct
               his
               Schollars
               ,
               or
               tractable
               and
               willing
               to
               be
               directed
               .
            
             
               The
               Schoolemaster
               must
               be
               painfull
               and
               constant
               ,
               of
               conscience
               of
               God.
               
            
             
               He
               must
               cast
               off
               all
               other
               studdies
               at
               schoole
               times
               .
            
             
               He
               must
               not
               post
               ouer
               the
               trust
               to
               others
               .
            
             
               The
               Schoolemaster
               must
               be
               of
               a
               louing
               disposition
               ,
               to
               incourage
               all
               by
               praise
               and
               rewards
               .
            
             
               He
               ought
               to
               be
               a
               godly
               man
               ,
               and
               of
               good
               cariage
               .
            
             
               To
               seeke
               to
               gaine
               ,
               and
               maintaine
               authority
               ,
               and
               how
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             XXV
             .
          
           
             OF
             the
             Vsher
             and
             his
             office
             .
          
           
             Herein
             these
             particulars
             ;
          
           
             
               An
               Vsher
               necessary
               in
               all
               greater
               Schooles
               .
            
             
               
               Euils
               of
               lacke
               of
               an
               Vsher.
               
            
             
               The
               Master
               burdened
               with
               all
               ,
               is
               ,
               as
               the
               Husbandman
               ouercharged
               with
               more
               then
               he
               can
               compasse
               .
            
             
               Supply
               by
               Schollars
               ,
               not
               sufficient
               .
            
             
               Sufficiency
               of
               the
               Vsher.
               
            
             
               The
               Vsher
               to
               be
               at
               the
               Masters
               command
               .
            
             
               To
               be
               vsed
               with
               respect
               .
            
             
               The
               Vsher
               not
               to
               meddle
               with
               correcting
               the
               highest
               Schollars
               .
            
             
               The
               Vsher
               to
               vse
               as
               little
               correction
               as
               may
               be
               ,
               vnlesse
               in
               the
               Masters
               absence
               .
            
             
               The
               Vshers
               principall
               imployment
               with
               the
               younger
               ,
               to
               traine
               them
               vp
               for
               the
               Master
               .
            
             
               To
               preuent
               all
               inconueniences
               by
               the
               Vsher.
               
            
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             XXVI
             .
          
           
             HElpes
             in
             the
             Schoole
             besides
             the
             Vsher.
             
          
           
             
               Seniors
               in
               each
               fourme
               .
            
             
               Particular
               helpe
               ,
               a
               Subdoctor
               in
               place
               of
               the
               Vsher
               ,
               or
               where
               one
               Vsher
               is
               not
               sufficient
               .
            
             
               Sorting
               the
               fourmes
               ,
               so
               many
               into
               a
               fourme
               as
               may
               be
               .
            
             
               Choise
               and
               matching
               each
               forme
               equally
               ,
               that
               all
               may
               sit
               as
               matches
               .
            
             
               Benefits
               of
               this
               election
               .
            
             
               This
               equall
               matching
               all
               ,
               a
               chiefe
               meanes
               to
               make
               the
               Schoole
               
                 Ludus
                 L●terarius
              
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             XXVII
             .
          
           
             OF
             gouernment
             and
             of
             authority
             in
             Schooles
             .
          
           
             Herein
             these
             branches
             ;
          
           
             
               Gouernment
               ,
               the
               helpe
               of
               helps
               .
            
             
               Authority
               ,
               the
               top
               of
               gouernment
               .
            
             
               Authority
               how
               to
               be
               maintained
               .
            
             
               
               The
               Masters
               and
               Vshers
               to
               be
               as
               liuing
               laws
               ,
               to
               maintaine
               their
               authority
               .
            
             
               Authority
               maintained
               by
               most
               strict
               execution
               of
               iustice
               ,
               by
               rewards
               and
               punishments
               .
            
             
               Incouraging
               vertue
               ,
               discouraging
               vice
               ,
               to
               maintaine
               authority
               .
            
             
               The
               euils
               of
               neglect
               hereof
               ,
               and
               of
               partiality
               .
            
             
               Authority
               to
               be
               maintained
               by
               a
               continuall
               demonstration
               of
               conscience
               ,
               and
               loue
               to
               the
               schollars
               .
            
             
               By
               being
               Presidents
               of
               all
               vertue
               .
            
             
               Extream
               seuerity
               ,
               &
               whipping
               ,
               to
               be
               auoided
               in
               schooles
               ;
               and
               all
               meanes
               vsed
               to
               preuent
               it
               .
            
             
               Reasons
               .
            
             
               Difficulty
               for
               the
               Master
               to
               moderate
               his
               passions
               oftentimes
               ,
               if
               he
               striue
               to
               doe
               good
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             XXVIII
             .
          
           
             OF
             Preferments
             and
             incouragements
             .
          
           
             Herein
             these
             particulars
             :
          
           
             
               Incouragements
               to
               be
               by
               these
               meanes
               ;
            
             
               Often
               Elections
               .
            
             
               Countenancing
               and
               gracing
               the
               Seniors
               ,
               and
               all
               the
               best
               and
               most
               painfull
               .
            
             
               Putting
               vp
               into
               higher
               fourmes
               .
            
             
               Giuing
               places
               .
            
             
               Commending
               euery
               thing
               well
               done
               .
            
             
               Caueat
               in
               commending
               .
            
             
               Disputation
               for
               the
               victorship
               .
            
             
               Praemia
               to
               be
               giuen
               to
               the
               two
               Victors
               .
            
             
               Office
               of
               the
               Victors
               for
               their
               praemia
               .
            
             
               Solemne
               examination
               to
               bee
               made
               once
               euerie
               yeere
               .
            
             
               Exercises
               to
               be
               prouided
               against
               that
               time
               .
            
             
               To
               keepe
               their
               daily
               exercises
               faire
               written
               in
               bookes
               ,
               to
               try
               their
               profiting
               ▪
               by
               comparing
               with
               the
               former
               .
            
             
               
               A
               course
               of
               examination
               to
               be
               appointed
               :
               and
               the
               same
               first
               to
               be
               performed
               by
               the
               Masters
               and
               Vshers
               ;
               after
               by
               others
               not
               satisfied
               .
            
             
               All
               dooing
               well
               to
               bee
               praised
               ,
               the
               best
               specially
               graced
               .
            
             
               Benefits
               of
               this
               set
               solemne
               examination
               .
            
             
               All
               Parents
               to
               haue
               notice
               before
               such
               examinations
               .
            
             
               To
               labour
               by
               all
               meanes
               to
               worke
               a
               conscience
               in
               all
               the
               Schollars
               ,
               to
               do
               all
               of
               dutie
               and
               loue
               to
               God
               ,
               and
               how
               .
            
             
               Some
               excellent
               sentences
               to
               be
               oft
               inculcated
               ,
               to
               worke
               in
               the
               Schollars
               a
               loue
               of
               learning
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             XXIX
             .
          
           
             OF
             execution
             of
             iustice
             in
             Schooles
             ,
             by
             punishments
             .
             Herein
             these
             particulars
             :
          
           
             
               To
               punish
               vnwillingly
               .
            
             
               To
               proceede
               by
               degrees
               in
               punishing
               .
            
             
               A
               note
               which
               may
               be
               tearmed
               the
               black
               Bill
               ,
               of
               principall
               vse
               ,
               and
               most
               auaileable
               in
               punishing
               &
               reforming
               .
            
             
               Manner
               of
               the
               blacke
               Bill
               ,
               to
               depriue
               all
               chiefe
               offenders
               of
               the
               benefit
               of
               play
               daies
               .
            
             
               To
               cause
               all
               such
               to
               knowe
               aforehand
               ,
               what
               to
               looke
               for
               .
            
             
               To
               view
               the
               formes
               before
               play
               ,
               and
               to
               separate
               all
               the
               disobedient
               and
               vnworthy
               ,
               to
               be
               left
               to
               their
               taskes
               .
            
             
               Care
               that
               their
               taskes
               be
               strictly
               exacted
               .
            
             
               Notorious
               offenders
               ,
               or
               stubborne
               boies
               ,
               to
               sit
               so
               many
               dayes
               ,
               vntill
               that
               they
               shew
               good
               tokens
               of
               amendment
               .
            
             
               Benefit
               of
               this
               punishment
               ,
               strictly
               obserued
               ,
               and
               why
               .
            
             
               Correction
               with
               rodde
               to
               be
               vsed
               more
               seldome
               ,
               and
               chiefly
               for
               terror
               .
            
             
               Caueats
               in
               correcting
               .
            
             
               Manner
               of
               correcting
               the
               stubborne
               ,
               and
               vnbroken
               .
            
             
               
               Not
               to
               suffer
               any
               to
               goe
               away
               in
               their
               stubbornnesse
               .
            
             
               To
               be
               wary
               to
               auoide
               all
               smi●ing
               or
               hurting
               the
               children
               .
            
             
               Caueat
               of
               threatning
               .
            
             
               That
               the
               Maister
               doe
               not
               abase
               himselfe
               ,
               to
               struggle
               with
               any
               stubborne
               boy
               .
            
             
               To
               auoide
               all
               furious
               anger
               and
               cha●ing
               .
            
             
               How
               correction
               should
               euer
               be
               taken
               .
            
             
               Sparing
               the
               rodde
               where
               necessitie
               requireth
               ,
               is
               to
               vndoe
               the
               children
               .
            
             
               Assurance
               of
               safety
               in
               correction
               ,
               when
               it
               is
               done
               aright
               .
            
             
               Anger
               necessary
               in
               Schoolemaisters
               ,
               so
               it
               bee
               tempered
               aright
               .
            
             
               Meanes
               to
               represse
               furious
               and
               raging
               anger
               .
            
             
               Places
               of
               Scripture
               to
               bee
               euer
               in
               our
               mindes
               ,
               for
               the
               repressing
               and
               moderating
               our
               anger
               .
            
             
               Danger
               of
               rash
               anger
               when
               it
               exceeds
               .
            
             
               Occasions
               of
               anger
               ,
               left
               to
               the
               calling
               of
               the
               Schoolemaisters
               ,
               to
               humble
               and
               exercise
               them
               .
            
             
               Three
               lessons
               for
               preuenting
               anger
               .
            
             
               The
               danger
               of
               hauing
               the
               rod
               ,
               or
               ferule
               euer
               in
               the
               hand
               of
               the
               Maister
               or
               Vsher.
               
            
             
               The
               surest
               way
               to
               haue
               nothing
               ordinarily
               ,
               but
               grauitie
               and
               authoritie
               .
            
             
               The
               time
               of
               inflicting
               common
               punishments
               .
            
             
               Such
               as
               in
               whom
               is
               no
               hope
               of
               reformation
               ,
               to
               bee
               sent
               from
               Schoole
               in
               time
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             XXX
             .
          
           
             OF
             School-times
             ,
             intermissions
             ,
             and
             recreations
             .
          
           
             
               School-time
               to
               begin
               at
               sixe
               .
            
             
               The
               Vsher
               to
               be
               euer
               present
               at
               sixe
               of
               the
               clock
               ,
               though
               onely
               to
               ouersee
               all
               .
            
             
               How
               to
               make
               children
               to
               striue
               vvho
               shall
               bee
               first
               at
               Schoole
               without
               correction
               .
            
             
               Daily
               intermissions
               at
               nine
               ,
               and
               three
               of
               the
               clock
               ,
               for
               a
               
               quarter
               of
               an
               hower
               or
               more
               .
            
             
               To
               sing
               part
               of
               a
               Psalme
               before
               breaking
               vp
               at
               night
               ,
               and
               each
               to
               begin
               in
               order
               ,
               and
               to
               giue
               the
               tune
               .
            
             
               Intermissions
               at
               nine
               of
               the
               clocke
               and
               three
               ,
               not
               offensiue
               ,
               when
               they
               are
               once
               knowne
               .
            
             
               Benefits
               of
               intermissions
               .
            
             
               None
               to
               stirre
               forth
               of
               t●eir
               places
               at
               Schoole-times
               ,
               but
               vpon
               vrgent
               occasions
               .
            
             
               The
               time
               of
               the
               intermissions
               may
               be
               gayned
               dayly
               ,
               and
               sundry
               inconueniences
               preuented
               .
            
             
               Weekely
               recreations
               .
            
             
               Before
               breaking
               vp
               to
               play
               ,
               to
               make
               Verses
               
                 ex
                 tempore
              
               ,
               or
               to
               cap
               Verses
               .
            
             
               The
               best
               manner
               of
               capping
               Verses
               .
            
             
               The
               greatest
               commendation
               in
               these
               .
            
             
               Manner
               of
               their
               recreations
               .
            
             
               The
               recreations
               of
               the
               studious
               to
               be
               regarded
               .
            
             
               Ouermuch
               play
               to
               be
               carefully
               auoided
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             XXXI
             .
          
           
             
               INconueniences
               growing
               by
               diuersity
               of
               teaching
               and
               of
               Grammars
               .
            
             
               How
               this
               helped
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             XXXII
             .
          
           
             Euils
             by
             ordinary
             absence
             of
             Schollars
             .
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             XXXIII
             .
          
           
             
               DIscouragements
               of
               Schoolemaisters
               ,
               by
               vnthankefulnesse
               of
               parents
               .
            
             
               Remedies
               against
               such
               discouragements
               .
            
          
        
         
           
           
             CHAP.
             XXXIIII
             .
          
           
             
               WHat
               Children
               to
               be
               set
               and
               kept
               to
               learning
               .
            
             
               What
               Schollars
               to
               be
               sent
               to
               the
               Vniuersities
               .
            
             
               None
               to
               bee
               sent
               to
               the
               Vniuersities
               before
               fifteene
               yeares
               of
               age
               at
               least
               .
            
             
               The
               best
               courses
               to
               be
               practiced
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             XXXV
             .
          
           
             
               A
               Briefe
               rehearsall
               of
               the
               chiefe
               points
               and
               special
               helps
               ,
               mentioned
               through
               the
               whole
               booke
               .
            
             
               The
               principall
               heads
               of
               those
               things
               ,
               vvhich
               vvould
               bee
               euer
               kept
               in
               memory
               by
               the
               Maister
               ,
               to
               bee
               continually
               put
               in
               practice
               .
            
             
               Mt.
               Askames
               steppes
               to
               good
               learning
               :
               with
               a
               briefe
               direction
               of
               Melanchtons
               .
            
          
        
         
           FINIS
           .
        
      
       
         
           STudious
           Reader
           ,
           I
           thought
           meete
           to
           giue
           thee
           notice
           ,
           that
           my
           Translation
           of
           
             Sententiae
             Pueriles
          
           ,
           and
           of
           Cato
           ,
           are
           now
           vnder
           the
           Presse
           ;
           and
           the
           former
           of
           them
           ,
           within
           a
           day
           or
           two
           ,
           ready
           to
           come
           forth
           .
           Expect
           the
           other
           ,
           shortly
           after
           .
        
      
       
         
         
           Postscript
           .
        
         
           PAge
           53.
           line
           3.
           reade
           
             by
             that
          
           .
           p.
           78.
           l.
           35.
           for
           declension
           read
           
             Gender
             or
             declining
          
           .
           p.
           87.
           l.
           16.
           for
           euer
           reade
           a●way
           .
           p.
           115.
           l.
           9.
           put
           in
           
             so
             far
             as
             I
             know
          
           p.
           116.
           after
           the
           11.
           line
           ,
           put
           in
           
             so
             mothers
             for
             most
             part
          
           .
           p.
           191
           ,
           l.
           ●7
           .
           put
           out
           ●ound
           .
           p.
           202.
           l.
           25
           for
           
             of
             Grammatica
          
           ,
           read
           
             at
             Grammatica
          
           .
           p.
           2●0
           .
           l.
           32
           ▪
           put
           out
           secondly
           .
           p.
           251.
           l.
           20.
           for
           most
           ,
           read
           many
           .
           p.
           274.
           l.
           22.
           put
           out
           kinde
           .
           297.
           l.
           35.
           for
           rest
           ,
           read
           :
           rise
           .
        
      
       
         
           Faults
           escaped
           by
           the
           Printer
           .
        
         
           IN
           PAge
           20.
           line
           3
           the
           Alphabet
           should
           haue
           beene
           distinguished
           by
           threes
           ,
           thus
           ;
           A
           b
           c.
           d
           e
           f.
           g
           h
           i.
           and
           so
           for
           the
           rest
           .
        
         
           
             
               
                 Page
              
               
                 Line
              
               
                 False
              
               
                 True.
                 
              
            
             
               
                 20
              
               
                 25
              
               
                 thus
              
               
                 this
              
            
             
               
                 30
              
               
                 24
              
               
                 long
              
               
                 longest
              
            
             
               
                 30
              
               
                 36
              
               
                 a
                 booke
              
               
                 bookes
              
            
             
               
                 31
              
               
                 22
              
               
                 m.
                 i
                 t.
                 
              
               
                 m
                 c.t.
                 
              
            
             
               
                 31
              
               
                 30
              
               
                 without
              
               
                 or
                 without
              
            
             
               
                 46
              
               
                 1
              
               
                 Third
              
               
                 A
                 third
              
            
             
               
                 56
              
               
                 9
              
               
                 of
              
               
                 or
              
            
             
               
                 59
              
               
                 29
              
               
                 manuifoelicis
              
               
                 manuifoelici
              
            
             
               
                 63
              
               
                 3
              
               
                 parsed
              
               
                 poased
              
            
             
               
                 63
              
               
                 27
              
               
                 parsing
              
               
                 poasing
              
            
             
               
                 72
              
               
                 23
              
               
                 more
              
               
                 most
              
            
             
               
                 73
              
               
                 1
              
               
                 goe
                 truely
              
               
                 goe
                 surely
              
            
             
               
                 79
              
               
                 3
              
               
                 speedily
              
               
                 specially
              
            
             
               
                 102
              
               
                 12
              
               
                 Que
              
               
                 Que
              
            
             
               
                 18
              
               
                 Virtutem
                 .
              
               
                 virtutum
              
            
             
               
                 36
              
               
                 weapon
              
               
                 weapons
              
            
             
               
                 114
              
               
                 9
              
               
                 must
              
               
                 will
              
            
             
               
                 137
              
               
                 2
              
               
                 àscio
              
               
                 ascio
              
            
             
               
                 144
              
               
                 3.
                 &
                 11
              
               
                 vincit
              
               
                 vincet
              
            
             
               
                 179
              
               
                 31
              
               
                 fittest
              
               
                 fit●●est
              
            
             
               
                 182
              
               
                 17
              
               
                 curiously
              
               
                 cursorily
              
            
             
               
                 192
              
               
                 1
              
               
                 in
                 manner
              
               
                 in
                 good
                 manner
              
            
             
               
                 221
              
               
                 37
              
               
                 so
                 great
              
               
                 great
              
            
             
               
                 231
              
               
                 16
              
               
                 Nomenc●aton
              
               
                 Nomenclator
              
            
             
               
                 234
              
               
                 35
              
               
                 Th●ogius
              
               
                 Theognis
              
            
             
               
                 235
              
               
                 22
              
               
                 his
              
               
                 this
              
            
             
               
                 236
              
               
                 19
              
               
                 be
                 also
              
               
                 also
              
            
             
               
                 241
              
               
                 13
              
               
                 who
              
               
                 which
              
            
             
               
                 278
              
               
                 24
              
               
                 oderint
              
               
                 oderunt
                 .
              
            
          
        
         
           Page
           200.
           in
           the
           margent
           against
           line
           18
           for
           
             yongest
             ▪
          
           read
           highest
           :
        
         
         
         
      
       
         Notes, typically marginal, from the original text
         
           Notes for div A16865-e220
           
             In
             the
             true
             Watch
             and
             Rule
             of
             life
             ,
             made
             farre
             more
             perfect
             and
             plaine
             in
             this
             5.
             
             Editiō
             .
          
        
         
           Notes for div A16865-e300
           
             Tubal-cain
             .
          
        
         
           Notes for div A16865-e1010
           
             Mr
             Askame
             1.
             
             Booke
             page
             1
             
          
        
         
           Notes for div A16865-e1230
           
             The
             Schoolemasters
             place
             ordinarily
             wearisome
             ,
             thankelesse
             .
          
           
             They
             who
             haue
             felt
             the
             euils
             of
             labouring
             without
             fruit
             in
             their
             calling
             ,
             wil
             neither
             spare
             labor
             nor
             cost
             to
             help
             the
             same
             .
          
           
             If
             for
             to
             gain
             a
             little
             politick
             experience
             or
             to
             see
             fashions
             ,
             many
             will
             aduēture
             both
             by
             sea
             and
             land
             ,
             into
             enemies
             countries
             ,
             to
             the
             hazarding
             ofttimes
             both
             of
             body
             and
             soule
             ;
             how
             much
             more
             ought
             we
             to
             trauel
             at
             home
             ,
             amongst
             our
             friends
             ,
             to
             gain
             lasting
             comfort
             in
             our
             labours
             ?
          
           
             Many
             honest
             and
             painefull
             School-masters
             weary
             of
             their
             places
             ,
             liue
             in
             continuall
             discontent
             ,
             thorow
             lacke
             of
             knowledge
             of
             a
             good
             cour●e
             of
             teaching
             .
          
           
             Some
             few
             God
             much
             blesseth
             in
             this
             calling
             though
             they
             be
             very
             rare
             .
          
           
             More
             true
             contentment
             may
             be
             ●ound
             in
             this
             calling
             rightly
             followed
             ,
             then
             in
             any
             recreation
             whatsoeuer
             .
          
           
             The
             fruit
             of
             this
             trauel
             is
             euer
             the
             sweetest
             in
             the
             remembrance
             of
             it
             after
             .
          
           
             Knowledge
             &
             practi●e
             of
             the
             best
             courses
             will
             much
             augment
             the
             blessing
             of
             our
             labours
             ,
             and
             fill
             our
             liues
             with
             contentment
             .
          
           
             Feeling
             of
             the
             griefe
             and
             want
             of
             others
             ,
             will
             make
             vs
             more
             compassionate
             .
          
           
             Wee
             are
             but
             stuards
             of
             Gods
             gifts
             &
             to
             bee
             accountable
             for
             euery
             talent
             .
          
           
             What
             our
             affection
             and
             resolution
             should
             be
             in
             receiuing
             any
             speciall
             blessing
             from
             the
             Lord
             :
             as
             namely
             direction
             how
             to
             walke
             more
             fruitfully
             in
             our
             calling
             .
          
           
             How
             the
             way
             of
             all
             good
             learning
             may
             be
             more
             easie
             then
             euer
             in
             former
             ages
             .
          
           
             Many
             most
             worthy
             helps
             lie
             vtterly
             hid
             from
             the
             greatest
             part
             ,
             only
             thorow
             neglect
             .
          
           
             All
             the
             things
             mentioned
             in
             the
             contents
             may
             be
             effected
             through
             diligence
             ,
             constancy
             &
             Gods
             blessing
             .
          
           
             See
             the
             particulars
             in
             the
             contents
             set
             before
             the
             booke
             .
          
           
             The
             most
             easie
             and
             profitable
             manner
             of
             procee●ing
             in
             this
             conference
             ▪
             
          
           
             The
             first
             point
             .
             How
             soone
             the
             childe
             is
             to
             bee
             set
             to
             the
             schoole
             .
          
           
             The
             time
             of
             the
             first
             entrāce
             in
             countrey
             schooles
             ,
             at
             7.
             or
             8.
             
          
           
             The
             childe
             of
             any
             ordinary
             towardlinesse
             ,
             to
             begin
             to
             learne
             about
             5.
             yeere
             olde
             .
             Reasons
             .
          
           
             1.
             
             Because
             they
             are
             then
             meete
             to
             conceiue
             of
             learning
             and
             to
             delight
             in
             it
             .
          
           
             2.
             
             For
             that
             they
             are
             apt
             much
             sooner
             to
             learn
             shrewdnesse
             ,
             &
             those
             things
             which
             are
             hurtfull
             .
          
           
             3.
             
             To
             auoide
             much
             rudeness
             ,
             and
             that
             too
             much
             sweetness
             which
             they
             feel
             in
             play
             and
             idlenesse
             .
          
           
             4
             This
             age
             is
             most
             easily
             bēded
             ,
             and
             ac●ustomed
             to
             good
             things
             .
          
           
             5
             Two
             or
             three
             yeeres
             may
             be
             gained
             by
             this
             meanes
             ,
             to
             fit
             thē
             sooner
             for
             the
             Vniuersitie
             or
             other
             imploiments
             ,
             which
             is
             no
             small
             benefit
             .
          
           
             6
             Parents
             ought
             to
             labour
             to
             see
             their
             childrens
             good
             educatiō
             before
             their
             eyes
             ,
             so
             soone
             as
             may
             be
             .
          
           
             Ob.
             It
             will
             hinder
             their
             growth
             .
          
           
             A.
             The
             schoole
             being
             rightly
             vsed
             will
             not
             hinder
             any
             more
             thē
             their
             plaie
             .
          
           
             Ob.
             2.
             
             It
             will
             cause
             them
             to
             hate
             learning
             .
          
           
             A
             They
             will
             rather
             loue
             it
             better
             .
          
           
             Ob.
             3
             It
             is
             a
             small
             matter
             to
             lose
             a
             yeere
             or
             two
             then
             .
          
           
             A
             The
             losse
             of
             a
             yeere
             or
             two
             will
             be
             found
             in
             the
             end
             .
          
           
             Ob.
             4.
             
             They
             will
             learn
             the
             faster
             .
          
           
             A
             So
             in
             higher
             learning
             at
             those
             yeeres
             .
          
           
             The
             inconuenience
             of
             hauing
             the
             Grammar
             schooles
             trobled
             with
             teaching
             A.
             B.
             C
             
          
           
             Continuall
             applying
             in
             a
             right
             course
             is
             aboue
             al
             means
             
          
           
             How
             this
             might
             be
             remedied
             by
             some
             other
             schoole
             in
             each
             towne
             for
             this
             purpose
             .
          
           
             The
             redresse
             of
             it
             to
             be
             sought
             .
          
           
             To
             be
             borne
             with
             patience
             where
             it
             cannot
             be
             remedied
             .
          
           
             The
             first
             entring
             of
             children
             to
             be
             looked
             to
             carefully
             .
          
           
             To
             teach
             to
             read
             well
             in
             a
             short
             time
             is
             of
             great
             profit
             
          
           
             Griefe
             &
             discredit
             of
             the
             want
             of
             this
             .
          
           
             1.
             
             To
             teach
             children
             how
             to
             cal
             and
             pronounce
             their
             letters
             right
             .
          
           
             And
             first
             the
             5.
             vowels
             .
          
           
             The
             Consonants
             .
          
           
             Right
             calling
             the
             letters
             before
             the
             children
             doe
             know
             them
             .
          
           
             2.
             
             How
             to
             teach
             children
             to
             know
             the
             letters
             the
             soonest
             .
          
           
             To
             cause
             them
             to
             finde
             out
             any
             letter
             .
          
           
             The
             surer
             way
             is
             to
             learne
             but
             one
             letter
             at
             a●
             once
             .
          
           
             3.
             
             How
             to
             teach
             to
             spell
             .
          
           
             M.
             Coots
             English
             Schoolemaster
             might
             bee
             profitable
             to
             this
             purpose
             ,
             in
             which
             booke
             are
             syllables
             &
             words
             of
             all
             sorts
             .
          
           
             To
             make
             children
             to
             take
             delight
             in
             spelling
             .
          
           
             Some
             of
             the
             hardest
             syllables
             to
             practice
             children
             in
             the
             spelling
             of
             thē
             .
             These
             would
             be
             written
             in
             some
             little
             table
             to
             poase
             them
             oft
             .
          
           
             Note
             in
             spelling
             .
          
           
             Right
             pronoūcing
             makes
             right
             spelling
             .
          
           
             Further
             direction
             for
             spelling
             after
             .
          
           
             4.
             
             Ioyning
             syllables
             together
             .
          
           
             Vnderstanding
             the
             matter
             .
          
           
             Bookes
             to
             bee
             first
             learned
             of
             children
             .
          
           
             Abcie
             ,
             Primer
             .
             Second
             reading
             of
             a
             booke
             .
          
           
             Psalmes
             in
             metre
             .
          
           
             Testament
             .
          
           
             Schoole
             of
             Vertue
             .
          
           
             Schoole
             of
             good
             manners
             ,
          
           
             5.
             
             In
             what
             time
             children
             well
             applyed
             ,
             may
             easily
             learne
             to
             reade
             English.
             
          
           
             Diuiding
             and
             distinguishing
             syllables
             .
          
           
             6.
             
             To
             teach
             little
             ones
             to
             pronounce
             their
             letters
             ,
             and
             to
             spell
             before
             they
             know
             a
             letter
             ,
             is
             the
             pleasantest
             way
             
          
           
             How
             little
             ones
             will
             presently
             pronounce
             their
             fiue
             vowels
             .
          
           
             To
             put
             the
             cōsonants
             in
             order
             before
             the
             vowelles
             pronoūcing
             them
             .
          
           
             To
             teach
             to
             spell
             these
             thus
             ,
             putting
             the
             consonants
             first
             .
          
           
             Repeating
             th
             letters
             of
             thee
             Alphabet
             ,
             by
             roate
             .
          
           
             To
             teach
             them
             to
             know
             their
             letters
             as
             before
             .
          
           
             To
             cause
             them
             to
             knowe
             the
             matter
             by
             questions
             or
             oft
             repeating
             to
             thē
             .
          
           
             Any
             one
             who
             can
             read
             ,
             may
             thus
             enter
             children
             for
             reading
             english
             
          
           
             8.
             
             The
             inconuenience
             of
             childrē
             forgetting
             to
             reade
             English
             ,
             when
             they
             enter
             first
             into
             latine
             ,
             and
             how
             to
             auoid
             it
             .
             Complaints
             of
             Parents
             for
             childrē
             forgetting
             English.
             
          
           
             Complaint
             of
             want
             of
             care
             in
             our
             schooles
             for
             growth
             in
             our
             owne
             tong
             is
             in
             the
             latine
             .
          
           
             Our
             chiefe
             indeauor
             should
             be
             for
             our
             own
             tongue
             .
          
           
             Reasons
             .
          
           
             Few
             Scooles
             which
             haue
             any
             regarde
             for
             our
             English
             tongue
             
          
           
             Meanes
             to
             obtaine
             this
             benefit
             of
             increasing
             in
             our
             English
             tong
             ,
             as
             in
             the
             Latin.
             
          
           
             1.
             
             Daily
             vse
             of
             Lillies
             rules
             construed
             .
          
           
             2.
             
             Continuall
             practice
             of
             English
             Grammaticall
             translations
             .
          
           
             3.
             
             Translating
             and
             writing
             English
             ,
             with
             some
             other
             Schoole
             exercises
             .
          
           
             The
             chief
             fault
             of
             the
             children
             going
             backewards
             in
             reading
             English
             ,
             when
             they
             first
             learne
             latine
             ,
             is
             in
             the
             Parents
             themselues
             .
          
           
             An
             ordinary
             fault
             ,
             that
             most
             schollars
             are
             to
             seek
             in
             matters
             of
             common
             numbers
             ,
             which
             they
             may
             bee
             taught
             in
             an
             hower
             or
             two
             .
          
           
             Numbers
             by
             letters
             knowen
             easily
             ,
             yet
             oft
             neglected
             .
          
           
             Numbers
             by
             figures
             .
          
           
             Why
             this
             Dialogue
             is
             so
             long
             
          
           
             Faire
             writing
             a
             great
             benefit
             &
             ornament
             to
             Schooles
             .
          
           
             It
             hath
             beene
             a
             receiued
             opinion
             a
             ●ong
             many
             ,
             that
             a
             good
             Schollar
             can
             not
             be
             a
             good
             writer
             .
          
           
             The
             trouble
             of
             Schoolemasters
             ,
             for
             the
             want
             of
             this
             faculty
             to
             teach
             Schollars
             to
             write
             .
          
           
             The
             ordinary
             course
             in
             Schooles
             to
             teach
             to
             write
             .
          
           
             1.
             
             When
             Schollars
             should
             begin
             to
             write
             .
          
           
             2.
             
             To
             haue
             all
             necessaries
             .
          
           
             3.
             
             Inke
             and
             paper
             ,
             of
             what
             sort
             .
          
           
             Writing
             books
             kept
             faire
             .
          
           
             4.
             
             Euery
             one
             to
             learne
             to
             make
             his
             owne
             pen.
             
          
           
             The
             manner
             of
             making
             the
             pen.
             
          
           
             Cleft
             of
             the
             penne
             .
          
           
             The
             neb
             of
             the
             pen.
             
          
           
             The
             surest
             way
             for
             making
             the
             pen.
             
          
           
             How
             to
             holde
             the
             pen.
             
          
           
             To
             cary
             the
             pen
             so
             lightly
             as
             to
             glide
             on
             the
             paper
             .
          
           
             Copies
             .
             In
             stead
             of
             setting
             copies
             to
             haue
             copie
             bookes
             fastened
             to
             the
             top
             of
             their
             books
             .
          
           
             Maner
             of
             the
             copie
             bookes
             .
          
           
             Examples
             of
             copyes
             contayning
             all
             the
             letters
             in
             one
             line
             of
             ioyning
             .
          
           
             The
             hardest
             sylables
             and
             principall
             numbers
             to
             be
             set
             in
             the
             end
             of
             the
             copy
             bookes
             .
          
           
             The
             copy
             books
             to
             bee
             printed
             &
             how
             ,
             with
             the
             benefit
             of
             them
             .
          
           
             Inconuenience
             of
             following
             diuers
             hands
             .
          
           
             The
             best
             written
             copies
             to
             be
             procured
             .
          
           
             Inconuenience
             of
             the
             lacke
             of
             such
             bookes
             .
          
           
             Faire
             writing
             to
             be
             practiced
             by
             all
             the
             schollars
             once
             euery
             day
             .
          
           
             General
             rule
             in
             writing
             ;
             To
             make
             all
             like
             vnto
             the
             copy
             .
          
           
             To
             keepe
             euen
             compasse
             .
          
           
             How
             to
             write
             of
             euen
             height
             .
          
           
             Each
             to
             haue
             his
             ruling
             pen
             ,
             and
             what
             on●●
             .
          
           
             The
             neb
             of
             the
             ruling
             pen
             ,
             and
             how
             to
             rule
             with
             it
             .
          
           
             ☜
             
          
           
             Euen
             writing
             to
             be
             streightly
             looked
             to
             ,
             by
             the
             help
             of
             a
             ruling
             pen.
             
          
           
             Ruling
             the
             bookes
             of
             the
             young
             beginners
             with
             crosse
             lines
             thus
             .
          
           
             Benefit
             of
             this
             ruling
             .
          
           
             The
             compasse
             in
             greatnesse
             or
             neernesse
             of
             the
             letters
             .
          
           
             Writing
             straight
             without
             lines
             .
          
           
             ☜
             
          
           
             Speciall
             furtherances
             for
             the
             first
             enterers
             in
             writing
             .
             When
             they
             cannot
             frame
             a
             letter
             .
          
           
             To
             follow
             a
             letter
             with
             a
             dry
             pen.
             
          
           
             Leasurely
             drawing
             as
             the
             Painter
             .
          
           
             To
             learne
             to
             make
             one
             letter
             wel
             first
             ,
             then
             another
             .
          
           
             To
             helpe
             to
             write
             cleane
             ,
             fast
             and
             faire
             together
             .
          
           
             Making
             florishes
             ,
             gliding
             vpon
             the
             paper
             .
          
           
             To
             obserue
             ornaments
             of
             writing
             .
          
           
             ☞
             
          
           
             To
             make
             the
             letters
             most
             plaine
             .
          
           
             ☞
             
          
           
             Mischiefs
             of
             getting
             a
             bad
             hand
             .
          
           
             ☜
             
          
           
             To
             procure
             the
             most
             excellent
             copies
             from
             the
             beginning
             .
          
           
             That
             the
             Master
             may
             teach
             his
             Schollars
             to
             write
             faire
             ,
             what
             to
             be
             don
             .
          
           
             ☜
             
          
           
             To
             walke
             amongst
             the
             schollars
             ,
             to
             see
             they
             obserue
             these
             directions
             ▪
             
          
           
             To
             obserue
             all
             the
             bad
             letters
             and
             faults
             in
             writing
             .
          
           
             Any
             Schollar
             may
             helpe
             the
             Master
             .
          
           
             The
             meanest
             writers
             may
             bring
             many
             of
             their
             schollars
             to
             be
             good
             pen-men
             .
          
           
             To
             auoyde
             the
             euils
             by
             wandring
             Scriueners
             .
          
           
             Things
             necessarily
             required
             in
             commendable
             writing
             .
          
           
             The
             vse
             of
             Scriueners
             in
             the
             Grammar
             Schooles
             ,
             what
             .
          
           
             ☜
             
          
           
             The
             sum
             of
             the
             principall
             and
             most
             necessary
             directions
             for
             writing
             ,
             to
             be
             euer
             remembred
             :
             and
             therefore
             here
             shortly
             repeated
             that
             we
             may
             haue
             a
             briefe
             notion
             of
             them
             .
          
           
             This
             maketh
             nothing
             against
             the
             honest
             Scriueners
             ,
             but
             to
             preuent
             the
             abuse
             of
             shifters
             ,
             and
             hurt
             to
             Schooles
             .
          
           
             Schollars
             are
             to
             be
             taught
             to
             do
             all
             thing
             ,
             with
             vnderstanding
             ,
             and
             to
             know
             the
             matter
             before
             in
             generall
             .
          
           
             The
             common
             course
             to
             doe
             all
             things
             without
             vnderstanding
             the
             reason
             of
             them
             or
             how
             to
             make
             vse
             of
             any
             thing
             .
          
           
             The
             defect
             hereof
             exceeding
             great
             .
          
           
             To
             doe
             all
             things
             by
             reason
             ,
             brings
             almost
             double
             learning
             .
          
           
             To
             read
             without
             vnderstanding
             and
             knowledge
             how
             to
             make
             vse
             ,
             is
             a
             neglect
             of
             all
             learning
             .
          
           
             Triall
             of
             the
             difference
             between
             learning
             with
             vnderstanding
             &
             without
             1.
             
             In
             schollars
             examined
             together
             ,
             whereof
             one
             vnderstandeth
             ,
             and
             can
             giue
             reasons
             of
             things
             ,
             the
             other
             not
             .
          
           
             2.
             
             In
             getting
             a
             lesson
             ,
             how
             to
             do
             it
             soonest
             ,
             &
             in
             the
             best
             manner
             .
          
           
             3.
             
             In
             our
             owne
             experience
             construing
             or
             studying
             out
             any
             difficult
             place
             in
             any
             Author
             or
             tongue
             .
          
           
             One
             chiefe
             cause
             why
             Virgil
             and
             others
             writ
             so
             eloquētly
             ,
             because
             they
             were
             so
             ripe
             in
             vnderstanding
             ,
             and
             had
             such
             store
             of
             matter
             .
          
           
             Trie
             .
          
           
             They
             who
             find
             experience
             will
             be
             desirous
             to
             make
             others
             partakers
             .
          
           
             It
             seemeth
             great
             difficulty
             for
             masters
             to
             teach
             their
             schollars
             to
             do
             all
             things
             with
             vnderstanding
             .
          
           
             The
             second
             generall
             obseruation
             .
          
           
             To
             learne
             only
             such
             things
             ,
             as
             whereof
             they
             may
             haue
             good
             and
             perpetuall
             vse
             .
          
           
             Filthy
             places
             in
             Poets
             omitted
             .
          
           
             3.
             
             To
             note
             all
             hard
             words
             ,
             or
             matters
             worthy
             obseruation
             .
          
           
             Manner
             of
             marking
             .
          
           
             This
             general
             in
             getting
             all
             learning
             .
          
           
             The
             bookes
             of
             the
             best
             students
             thus
             noted
             .
          
           
             To
             note
             books
             of
             dailyvse
             with
             inke
             .
          
           
             Others
             with
             blacke
             leade
             thrust
             into
             a
             quill
             .
          
           
             How
             to
             rub
             it
             for●h
             againe
             .
          
           
             4.
             
             To
             learne
             all
             so
             perfectly
             ,
             as
             the
             former
             may
             be
             in
             stead
             of
             a
             Schoolmaster
             to
             the
             later
             .
          
           
             Not
             to
             neede
             to
             teach
             the
             same
             things
             twise
             or
             thrise
             ouer
             .
          
           
             To
             tell
             where
             they
             haue
             learned
             euery
             hard
             word
             .
          
           
             5.
             
             That
             the
             whole
             Schoole
             be
             diuided
             into
             so
             few
             fourmes
             as
             may
             be
             .
          
           
             Reasons
             :
          
           
             1.
             
             It
             is
             for
             most
             part
             the
             same
             labour
             ,
             to
             teach
             twenty
             in
             a
             fourme
             ,
             as
             to
             teach
             two
             .
          
           
             2.
             
             The
             fewer
             fourmes
             ,
             the
             more
             labour
             may
             be
             bestowed
             in
             examining
             euery
             title
             .
          
           
             Examination
             ,
             a
             quickner
             of
             learning
             .
          
           
             Euery
             one
             of
             a
             fourme
             shall
             some
             way
             prouoke
             the
             others
             by
             this
             means
             .
          
           
             And
             euery
             one
             may
             helpe
             others
             .
          
           
             Those
             who
             but
             reade
             ,
             to
             be
             put
             together
             so
             many
             as
             can
             be
             .
          
           
             6
             ,
             To
             haue
             a
             great
             care
             that
             none
             be
             discouraged
             .
          
           
             But
             all
             to
             be
             prouoked
             by
             emulation
             and
             desire
             of
             praise
             .
          
           
             Commendation
             the
             Whet-stone
             of
             the
             wit.
             
          
           
             A
             sentence
             of
             Tully
             worthy
             to
             be
             euer
             before
             the
             Masters
             eye
             .
          
           
             Cic.
             5.
             de
             finib
             .
          
           
             This
             strift
             for
             Masteries
             is
             the
             most
             commendable
             play
             ,
             and
             a
             chiefe
             meanes
             to
             make
             the
             Schoole
             
               Ludus
               literarius
            
             .
          
           
             7.
             
             All
             to
             haue
             their
             aduersaries
             ,
             and
             so
             to
             be
             matched
             and
             placed
             ,
             that
             all
             may
             be
             done
             by
             strift
             .
          
           
             8.
             
             To
             vse
             euer
             to
             appose
             the
             most
             negligent
             .
          
           
             9.
             
             Continuall
             care
             of
             pronunciation
             .
          
           
             10.
             
             To
             haue
             some
             exercise
             of
             the
             memory
             daily
             .
          
           
             Reason
             of
             it
             for
             making
             excellent
             memories
             .
          
           
             11.
             
             To
             haue
             the
             best
             patternes
             ,
             of
             all
             sorts
             .
          
           
             12
             The
             Masters
             continually
             to
             incourage
             themselues
             ,
             and
             their
             Schollars
             .
          
           
             13.
             
             Constancy
             in
             good
             orders
             ,
             with
             a
             continuall
             demonstration
             of
             loue
             to
             the
             Schollars
             ,
             to
             do
             all
             for
             their
             good
             .
          
           
             The
             vsuall
             māner
             of
             learning
             to
             reade
             the
             Accedence
             .
          
           
             The
             ordinarie
             manner
             of
             getting
             the
             Accedence
             without
             booke
             .
          
           
             The
             wants
             in
             this
             course
             .
          
           
             The
             best
             means
             for
             learning
             to
             read
             the
             Accedence
             .
          
           
             Euer
             one
             to
             be
             reading
             ,
             all
             the
             rest
             marking
             &
             helping
             .
          
           
             ☞
             
          
           
             Learning
             the
             Accedence
             without
             book
             ,
             to
             take
             but
             a
             little
             at
             once
             .
          
           
             This
             rule
             must
             be
             generall
             of
             all
             learning
             that
             seemeth
             hard
             &
             of
             things
             to
             be
             gotten
             perfectly
             ;
             but
             here
             specially
             .
          
           
             ☞
             
          
           
             To
             make
             them
             first
             to
             vnderstand
             their
             lectures
             &
             how
             .
          
           
             ☜
             
          
           
             To
             let
             them
             answer
             the
             questions
             vpō
             their
             bookes
             .
          
           
             Admonition
             to
             masters
             desirous
             to
             doe
             good
             ,
             to
             be
             as
             the
             Nurses
             with
             little
             children
             .
          
           
             Exāple
             how
             to
             make
             the
             child
             to
             vnderstand
             by
             shewing
             the
             meaning
             .
          
           
             How
             by
             asking
             Questions
             .
          
           
             ☞
             
          
           
             In
             what
             points
             of
             the
             Accedence
             the
             chief
             labour
             would
             be
             bestowed
             with
             the
             children
             ,
             to
             make
             them
             perfect
             in
             them
             .
          
           
             Articles
             .
          
           
             Declining
             English
             before
             Latine
             ,
             Latine
             before
             Eng●lsh
             .
          
           
             ☜
             
          
           
             Benefit
             of
             this
             declining
             .
          
           
             Genders
             .
          
           
             ☞
             
          
           
             Seuerall
             terminations
             of
             the
             Declensions
             .
          
           
             Declining
             the
             examples
             in
             each
             Declension
             .
          
           
             ☞
             
          
           
             Declining
             all
             the
             examples
             of
             all
             the
             Declensions
             together
             .
          
           
             Giuing
             th●
             bare
             terminations
             ,
             the
             shortest
             way
             .
          
           
             The
             like
             i●
             bonus
             .
          
           
             Declining
             of
             Substantiues
             and
             Adiectiues
             together
             .
          
           
             Chiefe
             examples
             in
             the
             Pronownes
             of
             most
             common
             vse
             .
          
           
             Persons
             of
             the
             Pronownes
             .
          
           
             How
             to
             come
             most
             speedily
             to
             be
             perfect
             in
             the
             verbes
             ,
             which
             are
             a
             meane
             foundation
             ▪
             and
             wherin
             the
             greatest
             difficulty
             lyeth
             .
          
           
             These
             may
             be
             added
             if
             we
             wil●
             to
             make
             them
             more
             ready
             .
          
           
             The
             manner
             of
             apposing
             here
             .
          
           
             Knowledge
             of
             the
             terminations
             .
          
           
             Comparing
             them
             together
             for
             memory
             sake
             ,
             though
             they
             come
             not
             one
             of
             another
             .
          
           
             For
             vnderstanding
             this
             Table
             .
          
           
             ☞
             
          
           
             The
             shortest
             way
             of
             all
             to
             repeat
             and
             keepe
             these
             .
          
           
             No
             paines
             can
             be
             too
             great
             for
             perfect
             getting
             Nounes
             and
             Verbes
             .
          
           
             Yet
             children
             not
             to
             stay
             ouerlong
             in
             these
             .
          
           
             Participles
             .
          
           
             Aduerbs
             ,
             Coniunctions
             ,
             Prepositions
             ,
             Interiections
             .
          
           
             A
             want
             in
             the
             Aduerbs
             to
             be
             supplied
             .
          
           
             Rules
             of
             deriuing
             Aduerbs
             necessary
             ;
             and
             of
             the
             Latine
             in
             the
             Accedence
             Englished
             .
          
           
             English
             rules
             .
          
           
             Benefit
             of
             them
             well
             gotten
             .
          
           
             Generall
             obseruations
             in
             the
             English
             rules
             .
          
           
             1.
             
             To
             construe
             the
             examples
             .
          
           
             2.
             
             To
             tell
             in
             what
             wordes
             the
             force
             of
             the
             examples
             doth
             lie
             .
          
           
             See
             this
             more
             plainly
             ,
             in
             examining
             the
             Syntax
             in
             Latine
             .
          
           
             To
             make
             them
             most
             perfect
             in
             the
             rules
             of
             the
             principal
             Verb.
             Concordes
             .
          
           
             Relatiue
             Qui.
             
          
           
             Gouernments
             .
             Manner
             of
             examining
             in
             them
             
          
           
             Other
             helpes
             to
             make
             Scholars
             ready
             in
             the
             Accedence
             .
          
           
             ●
             .
             Daily
             repetitions
             and
             examinations
             .
          
           
             ☞
             
          
           
             Manner
             of
             hearing
             parts
             .
          
           
             2.
             
             The
             spending
             of
             a
             moneth
             or
             two
             to
             make
             the
             Accedence
             perfect
             ,
             after
             it
             is
             learned
             ouer
             .
          
           
             3.
             
             Some
             time
             separate
             daily
             to
             examine
             Nownes
             and
             Verbs
             .
          
           
             Constancy
             in
             poasing
             till
             vse
             bring
             surenesse
             .
          
           
             What
             is
             done
             ordinarily
             in
             Schooles
             in
             teaching
             Grammar
             .
          
           
             What
             things
             are
             requisite
             to
             be
             done
             in
             learning
             Grammar
             .
          
           
             To
             get
             the
             Grammar
             with
             most
             ease
             and
             fruite
             .
          
           
             To
             learne
             euery
             ordinary
             rule
             perfectly
             .
          
           
             With
             titles
             and
             summes
             .
          
           
             Manner
             for
             enterers
             .
          
           
             1.
             
             Reading
             their
             rules
             to
             them
             .
          
           
             2.
             
             Construing
             and
             shewing
             them
             the
             meaning
             .
          
           
             ☜
             
          
           
             How
             they
             may
             soonest
             learne
             to
             construe
             them
             .
          
           
             Each
             Schollar
             to
             haue
             his
             cōstruing
             booke
             ,
             and
             learne
             to
             construe
             by
             that
             .
          
           
             Benefit
             of
             the
             vse
             of
             Lillyes
             rules
             construed
             
          
           
             1.
             
             To
             gain
             one
             halfe
             of
             time
             in
             cōstruing
             them
             .
          
           
             And
             free
             their
             Masters
             from
             much
             trouble
             ,
             and
             the
             Schollar
             from
             much
             feare
             and
             toyle
             .
             Also
             some
             recouer
             their selues
             hauing
             forgot
             .
          
           
             Increase
             in
             reading
             English.
             Masters
             freed
             from
             clamors
             
          
           
             Wherein
             the
             construing
             bookes
             ,
             vnder
             correction
             ,
             may
             be
             much
             helped
             &
             made
             more
             profitable
             .
          
           
             This
             I
             thinke
             is
             in
             hand
             or
             finished
             .
          
           
             Necessary
             words
             to
             bee
             Englished
             in
             their
             proper
             significations
             .
          
           
             Learning
             the
             rules
             without
             booke
             .
          
           
             ☜
             
          
           
             Helps
             for
             getting
             without
             book
             all
             things
             which
             they
             learne
             in
             verse
             .
          
           
             So
             repeating
             the
             Rules
             in
             verse
             .
          
           
             Construing
             without
             book
             .
          
           
             Benefit
             of
             construing
             without
             booke
             .
          
           
             Where
             leasure
             is
             wanting
             how
             to
             doe
             .
          
           
             And
             in
             the
             elder
             
          
           
             ☜
             
          
           
             The
             surest
             way
             for
             young
             beginners
             .
          
           
             ☞
             
          
           
             At
             saying
             of
             rules
             how
             to
             examine
             ,
             to
             cause
             them
             to
             answere
             any
             question
             .
          
           
             Manner
             of
             appoasing
             .
          
           
             Exāple
             of
             making
             the
             rules
             〈…〉
             .
          
           
             Propria
             quae
             maribus
             .
          
           
             Title
             of
             it
             .
          
           
             Appo●sing
             after
             the
             same
             manner
             ,
             to
             help
             the
             weakest
             teacher
             :
             for
             whom
             I
             haue
             set
             down
             the
             moe
             examples
             .
          
           
             ☜
             
          
           
             This
             poasing
             in
             Latine
             if
             it
             be
             ouer-hard
             to
             the
             enterers
             at
             first
             ,
             may
             be
             vsed
             after
             a
             time
             in
             examining
             their
             parts
             .
          
           
             Examining
             out
             of
             the
             margent
             .
          
           
             Examining
             out
             of
             the
             words
             of
             the
             rule
             .
          
           
             Manner
             of
             appoasing
             the
             examples
             of
             the
             rules
             .
          
           
             ☞
             
          
           
             Fewest
             words
             best
             .
          
           
             ☞
             
          
           
             To
             oppose
             only
             in
             English
             if
             children
             be
             too
             weak
             to
             answer
             in
             Latine
             .
          
           
             Manner
             of
             the
             questions
             in
             English
             ,
             at
             
               Propria
               Foemineum
            
             .
          
           
             Appell
             ,
             Arborū
             .
          
           
             Examining
             of
             the
             speciall
             rules
             .
          
           
             Examining
             the
             Exceptions
             .
          
           
             Posing
             by
             asking
             first
             the
             examples
             .
          
           
             ☞
             
          
           
             The
             shortest
             course
             .
          
           
             Examining
             the
             Adiectiues
             .
          
           
             How
             to
             make
             Schollars
             perfect
             in
             the
             Genitiue
             cases
             .
          
           
             To
             appose
             the
             hardest
             oft-times
             .
          
           
             Examining
             in
             the
             Heteroclites
             .
          
           
             Making
             the
             Verbes
             plaine
             .
          
           
             Examining
             in
             them
             .
          
           
             ☜
             
          
           
             ☜
             
          
           
             Good
             vse
             of
             the
             Syntax
             in
             Latine
             .
          
           
             Examining
             the
             Syntax
             for
             help
             of
             the
             weakest
             likewise
             .
          
           
             All
             who
             wish
             well
             to
             poore
             countrey-Schooles
             ,
             will
             pardon
             my
             indeauour
             to
             be
             so
             plain
             ,
             thogh
             in
             so
             many
             examples
             .
          
           
             Examining
             in
             the
             rules
             of
             gouernement
             .
          
           
             Helpes
             to
             speedie
             examining
             and
             applying
             the
             force
             of
             the
             examples
             .
          
           
             In
             saying
             their
             rules
             ,
             after
             each
             example
             repeated
             ,
             to
             repeate
             those
             words
             ,
             in
             which
             the
             force
             of
             the
             example
             heth
             .
          
           
             Benefit
             of
             this
             kinde
             of
             repeating
             .
          
           
             Difficulty
             hereof
             ,
             vnlesse
             they
             be
             thus
             taught
             .
          
           
             The
             trouble
             and
             inconuenience
             in
             marking
             the
             books
             ,
             chiefly
             by
             Schollars
             .
          
           
             The
             Grammars
             are
             procured
             ●o
             be
             thus
             printed
             ,
             as
             to
             be
             most
             easie
             and
             profitable
             for
             schooles
             ,
             without
             inconuenience
             .
          
           
             ☜
             
          
           
             Other
             helpes
             to
             examine
             and
             vnderstand
             the
             rules
             .
          
           
             How
             to
             make
             them
             to
             vnderstand
             and
             answere
             any
             question
             in
             Latine
             .
          
           
             To
             giue
             English
             rules
             to
             the
             Latine
             .
          
           
             ☜
             
          
           
             Other
             helps
             to
             get
             the
             rules
             easily
             ,
             and
             to
             keepe
             them
             perfectly
             ;
             repeating
             the
             Titles
             and
             Margents
             in
             a
             continued
             speech
             .
          
           
             ☜
             
          
           
             To
             repeate
             the
             beginnings
             of
             the
             rules
             in
             a
             continued
             speech
             .
          
           
             Benefits
             of
             these
             .
          
           
             Idaea
             .
          
           
             ☞
             
          
           
             Shorter
             examination
             and
             repetition
             .
          
           
             Summes
             to
             be
             perfected
             .
          
           
             This
             is
             reported
             to
             haue
             his
             Master
             Bruns-words
             order
             .
          
           
             ☞
             
          
           
             Helpe
             in
             hearing
             parts
             in
             straights
             of
             time
             .
          
           
             To
             vse
             the
             most
             profitable
             
          
           
             The
             profite
             of
             rules
             thus
             learned
             .
          
           
             ☜
             
          
           
             The
             summe
             of
             all
             :
             wherein
             chiefe
             care
             would
             be
             had
             .
          
           
             Difficulty
             of
             keeping
             the
             Grammar
             rules
             perfectly
             without
             booke
             .
          
           
             How
             helped
             .
          
           
             ☞
             
          
           
             Such
             a
             perfect
             saying
             euery
             rule
             ,
             not
             so
             absolutely
             necessarie
             .
          
           
             ☞
             
          
           
             Other
             helpe
             to
             haue
             the
             Grammar
             perfect
             ,
             to
             turne
             to
             each
             rule
             as
             they
             parse
             .
          
           
             Note
             in
             examining
             lectures
             .
          
           
             Grammar
             to
             be
             made
             as
             a
             Dictionary
             .
          
           
             Seldomer
             repeating
             rules
             in
             the
             higher
             formes
             may
             serue
             .
          
           
             Readinesse
             of
             schollars
             in
             Accedence
             and
             Grammar
             ,
             will
             helpe
             to
             make
             the
             Schoolemasters
             life
             most
             pleasant
             .
          
           
             A
             most
             plaine
             m●nner
             of
             examining
             Accedence
             &
             Grammar
             ,
             collected
             ,
             to
             help
             to
             make
             al
             schollars
             perfect
             therein
             ;
             called
             ,
             The
             posing
             of
             the
             parts
             .
          
           
             Things
             seeming
             difficult
             in
             cōstruction
             .
          
           
             The
             ordinary
             toile
             of
             m●sters
             about
             giuing
             lectures
             ,
             and
             to
             cause
             their
             schollars
             to
             const●ue
             .
          
           
             Difficulty
             in
             taking
             lectures
             in
             proprietie
             of
             words
             &
             sense
             .
          
           
             Hardnesse
             for
             schollars
             to
             remember
             how
             they
             were
             construed
             ,
             and
             the
             trouble
             therein
             .
          
           
             Griefe
             of
             the
             Masters
             for
             their
             schollars
             forge●●ing
             of
             that
             which
             they
             haue
             learned
             .
          
           
             ☜
             
          
           
             All
             th●s
             may
             be
             done
             by
             the
             practice
             of
             the
             rule
             of
             construing
             &
             of
             Grammatical
             translations
             .
          
           
             The
             rule
             of
             〈◊〉
             vnheard
             of
             to
             the
             most
             .
          
           
             This
             rule
             is
             set
             downe
             by
             sundry
             learned
             Grammarians
             .
          
           
             The
             rule
             ,
             as
             M.
             Leech
             hath
             it
             ,
          
           
             The
             rule
             ,
             according
             to
             Crusius
             .
          
           
             Crusius
             in
             his
             Latine
             Grammar
             ,
             pag.
             382
             ,
          
           
             ☞
             
          
           
             The
             rule
             expounded
             more
             〈◊〉
             .
          
           
             The
             ●urious
             .
             〈…〉
             .
          
           
             Generall
             obseruations
             for
             the
             better
             vnderstanding
             of
             the
             rule
             .
          
           
             1.
             
             That
             the
             Schollar
             reade
             before
             he
             construe
             .
          
           
             2.
             
             To
             mark
             the
             sentence
             well
             ,
             and
             all
             the
             points
             in
             it
             .
          
           
             ●
             To
             marke
             words
             beginning
             with
             great
             letters
             ,
             and
             included
             in
             a
             Parenthesis
             .
          
           
             4.
             
             To
             vnderstand
             the
             matter
             .
          
           
             5.
             
             To
             marke
             if
             there
             be
             any
             Voca●iue
             case
             .
          
           
             6.
             
             To
             seeke
             out
             the
             principall
             Verbe
             ,
             and
             obserue
             that
             wel
             ,
             as
             directing
             all
             .
          
           
             7
             To
             giue
             euery
             clause
             his
             right
             Verbe
             .
          
           
             8.
             
             To
             supply
             all
             words
             wanting
             .
          
           
             9.
             
             To
             giue
             each
             word
             his
             due
             signification
             and
             proper
             signe
             .
          
           
             10.
             
             To
             ioyne
             Substantiue
             and
             Adiectiue
             ,
             also
             Preposition
             and
             case
             .
          
           
             11.
             
             To
             marke
             if
             the
             sentence
             haue
             not
             an
             Interrogatiue
             point
             .
          
           
             The
             order
             of
             the
             rule
             :
             to
             take
             
          
           
             1.
             
             The
             Vocatiue
             case
             ,
             or
             whatsoeuer
             is
             in
             place
             of
             it
             ,
             or
             hangeth
             of
             it
             .
          
           
             2.
             
             The
             Nominatiue
             case
             ,
             or
             whatsoeuer
             is
             in
             place
             of
             it
             ,
             or
             dependeth
             of
             it
             .
          
           
             3.
             
             The
             principall
             Verbe
             ,
             and
             whatsoeuer
             dependeth
             on
             it
             .
          
           
             4.
             
             The
             case
             which
             the
             Verb
             properly
             go●erneth
             .
          
           
             5.
             
             All
             the
             other
             cases
             in
             order
             .
          
           
             Other
             cautiues
             in
             the
             rule
             .
          
           
             1
             To
             take
             so
             many
             words
             as
             there
             are
             in
             the
             same
             order
             .
          
           
             2
             The
             order
             is
             changed
             by
             Relat.
             Interrog
             .
             Indef
             .
             Partit
             .
             wordes
             of
             dependence
             and
             Connexion
             .
          
           
             3
             To
             take
             for
             the
             Nominat
             .
             case
             whatsoeuer
             is
             put
             in
             place
             of
             it
             ,
             or
             includeth
             it
             .
          
           
             4
             Participles
             ,
             Gerunds
             and
             Supines
             ,
             follow
             the
             order
             of
             the
             Verbes
             .
          
           
             5
             New
             Coniunctions
             and
             wordes
             of
             dependence
             serue
             to
             ioyne
             new
             sentences
             .
          
           
             6
             Aduerbs
             to
             be
             placed
             to
             the
             best
             sense
             .
          
           
             7
             To
             obserue
             Latinismes
             ,
             and
             ioyne
             phrases
             .
          
           
             The
             reason
             of
             the
             rule
             .
          
           
             1
             The
             wordes
             to
             be
             placed
             in
             naturall
             order
             .
          
           
             2
             Gouernours
             before
             the
             gouerned
             .
          
           
             3
             Declarers
             to
             follow
             the
             declared
             .
          
           
             4
             The
             principall
             words
             going
             before
             ,
             direct
             the
             wordes
             following
             ;
             except
             the
             Interr
             .
             Relat.
             Ind.
             Part.
             
          
           
             The
             summe
             of
             the
             rule
             of
             construing
             .
          
           
             A
             briefe
             of
             the
             rule
             of
             construing
             for
             euery
             childe
             to
             be
             able
             to
             answere
             .
          
           
             An
             example
             of
             construing
             ,
             and
             of
             Grammaticall
             translations
             according
             to
             the
             rule
             .
          
           
             1
             The
             artificiall
             placing
             ,
             according
             to
             T●lly
             .
             〈◊〉
             Senectu●e
             
          
           
             2.
             
             The
             Grammaticall
             placing
             .
          
           
             3.
             
             Translation
             according
             to
             the
             〈…〉
             Grammaticall
             order
             .
          
           
             a
             Are
             the
             very
             fittest
             weapons
             ,
             Verb
             aptest
             .
          
           
             b
             Wonderfull
             fruits
             ,
             or
             benefits
             .
          
           
             c
             Very
             long
             
          
           
             d
             Neuer
             leaue
             vs.
             
          
           
             e
             Not
             indeede
             .
          
           
             f
             In
             our
             last
             age
             .
          
           
             Verb
             loued
             or
             adorned
             .
          
           
             g
             The
             chiefe
             .
          
           
             h
             The
             inward
             testimony
             .
          
           
             Verb
             in
             all
             age
             .
          
           
             4.
             
             Construing
             according
             to
             the
             Grammaticall
             translation
             .
             Or
             ,
             
               que
               cultae
               afferunt
               ,
               &c.
            
             
          
           
             5.
             
             Parsing
             according
             to
             this
             translation
             .
          
           
             Scipio
             .
          
           
             Et.
             
          
           
             Laeli.
             
          
           
             Artes.
             
          
           
             Quae.
             
          
           
             Exercitationes
             .
          
           
             Virtutem
             .
          
           
             Sunt
             .
          
           
             Omninò
             .
          
           
             Arma.
             
          
           
             Aptissima
             .
          
           
             Senectutis
             .
          
           
             6.
             
             Making
             latine
             according
             to
             this
             rule
             .
          
           
             Example
             .
          
           
             ☜
             
          
           
             Vse
             and
             benefit
             of
             Grammaticall
             translations
             ,
             set
             downe
             in
             generall
             .
          
           
             ☞
             
          
           
             Chief
             reason
             of
             the
             benefit
             of
             translations
             according
             to
             the
             rule
             ,
             for
             the
             cōtinuall
             vse
             of
             Analysis
             and
             Genesis
             .
          
           
             Three
             speciall
             parts
             both
             of
             Analysis
             and
             Genesis
             .
          
           
             Benefits
             of
             the
             translations
             and
             the
             rule
             set
             downe
             particularly
             .
          
           
             1.
             
             Resoluiug
             Grammatically
             
          
           
             2.
             
             Construing
             .
          
           
             3.
             
             Parsing
             .
          
           
             4.
             
             Making
             latine
             .
          
           
             5.
             
             Prouing
             ▪
             
          
           
             6.
             
             Composing
             .
          
           
             7.
             
             Vnderstanding
             .
          
           
             8.
             
             T●king
             lectures
             of
             themselues
             .
          
           
             9.
             
             Construing
             and
             parsing
             out
             of
             the
             English.
             
          
           
             10.
             
             Correcting
             their
             Authors
             .
          
           
             11.
             
             Keeping
             all
             learned
             in
             their
             Authors
             perfectly
             .
          
           
             12.
             
             Saue
             getting
             Authors
             without
             booke
             .
          
           
             Ten
             notes
             more
             〈◊〉
             .
          
           
             13.
             
             To
             proceed
             in
             English
             as
             in
             Latine
             .
          
           
             14.
             
             To
             learne
             the
             propriety
             of
             the
             latine
             tong
             ,
             to
             iustify
             words
             and
             phrases
             ,
             and
             also
             to
             attaine
             the
             purity
             of
             the
             latine
             tongue
             .
          
           
             15.
             
             To
             enter
             &
             traine
             vp
             schollars
             iu
             Poetrie
             with
             ease
             and
             delight
             without
             bodging
             .
          
           
             16.
             
             To
             be
             insteed
             of
             M●ster
             or
             Vsher
             amongst
             the
             schollars
             for
             giuing
             and
             preparing
             lectures
             .
          
           
             To
             free
             children
             from
             feare
             of
             so
             oft
             asking
             ,
             and
             the
             Masters
             from
             that
             trouble
             &
             hindrance
             .
          
           
             17.
             
             To
             be
             able
             to
             proceed
             in
             other
             Authors
             of
             themselues
             by
             some
             helpe
             of
             Master
             and
             Cōmentaries
             .
          
           
             18.
             
             A
             helpe
             to
             weaker
             masters
             .
          
           
             19.
             
             To
             helpe
             weaker
             schollars
             ,
             to
             proceed
             in
             latine
             in
             their
             priuate
             studies
             in
             the
             Vniuersities
             .
          
           
             20.
             
             So
             to
             helpe
             any
             who
             haue
             lost
             their
             latine
             or
             haue
             but
             a
             taste
             .
          
           
             21.
             
             To
             haue
             daily
             much
             practice
             of
             Analysis
             and
             Genesis
             ;
             which
             is
             all
             in
             all
             ,
             in
             getting
             all
             learning
             .
          
           
             Things
             obserued
             in
             the
             Translations
             of
             the
             Schoole
             Authours
             .
          
           
             1
             Naturall
             order
             .
          
           
             2
             English
             alone
             .
          
           
             3
             The
             English
             answering
             the
             Latine
             in
             propriety
             .
          
           
             Where
             any
             phrase
             is
             somewhat
             hard
             ,
             how
             it
             is
             expressed
             .
          
           
             Where
             any
             phrase
             seemes
             ouer
             harsh
             in
             our
             English
             tongue
             .
          
           
             Where
             there
             may
             be
             two
             senses
             .
          
           
             No
             varying
             but
             on
             necessity
             .
          
           
             The
             order
             of
             some
             wordes
             changed
             .
          
           
             Obseruation
             in
             the
             lowest
             Authours
             .
          
           
             The
             manner
             of
             vse
             of
             the
             Translations
             .
          
           
             1
             To
             see
             that
             euery
             one
             can
             giue
             the
             summe
             of
             the
             rule
             of
             construing
             .
          
           
             2
             In
             the
             lower
             fourmes
             one
             to
             reade
             ouer
             the
             translation
             ,
             to
             giue
             some
             light
             ,
             and
             look
             on
             the
             Translation
             .
          
           
             3
             To
             construe
             according
             to
             the
             rule
             ,
             of
             themselues
             .
          
           
             He
             who
             hath
             the
             Translation
             onely
             ,
             to
             direct
             where
             they
             goe
             false
             .
          
           
             To
             doe
             as
             the
             cunning
             Hunts-man
             .
          
           
             ☞
             
          
           
             The
             assistance
             of
             the
             Master
             or
             Vsher
             herein
             
          
           
             ☞
             
          
           
             To
             construe
             &
             parse
             out
             of
             the
             Translation
             ,
             is
             the
             surest
             and
             most
             profitable
             way
             .
          
           
             How
             to
             keepe
             all
             their
             Authors
             perfectly
             .
          
           
             ☞
             
          
           
             To
             construe
             or
             reade
             oft
             all
             which
             they
             haue
             learned
             ,
             out
             of
             the
             Translations
             ;
             to
             make
             and
             keepe
             all
             perfect
             ,
             by
             oft
             repetions
             .
          
           
             Manner
             hereof
             .
          
           
             ☜
             
          
           
             To
             reade
             ouer
             other
             Authours
             after
             the
             same
             manner
             .
          
           
             ☜
             
          
           
             So
             in
             higher
             Authours
             translated
             .
          
           
             Practice
             will
             make
             them
             very
             prompt
             ,
             both
             in
             English
             and
             Latine
             .
          
           
             The
             fruit
             hereof
             .
          
           
             These
             vses
             and
             benefits
             cannot
             be
             made
             of
             any
             other
             Translation
             of
             the
             Schoole
             Authors
             ,
             but
             the
             Grammatical
             ,
             and
             why
             .
          
           
             What
             the
             translator
             ,
             haue
             aymed
             at
             .
          
           
             The
             Translations
             of
             our
             Schoole
             Authors
             extant
             do
             perform●
             none
             of
             the
             benefites
             which
             these
             Grammaticall
             Translations
             doe
             aime
             at
             chiefly
             .
          
           
             Examples
             of
             the
             Translations
             extant
             ,
             to
             manifest
             the
             truth
             hereof
             .
          
           
             Try
             all
             to
             construe
             by
             these
             .
          
           
             Grammaticall
             translations
             separate
             from
             the
             Latine
             ,
             cannot
             indanger
             any
             to
             make
             them
             truants
             ,
             if
             they
             be
             rightly
             vsed
             .
          
           
             There
             is
             great
             difficulty
             to
             vse
             an
             interlineall
             translation
             ,
             or
             latine
             ioined
             to
             the
             English
             ▪
             
          
           
             How
             to
             preuēt
             idlenes
             or
             negligēce
             in
             the
             vse
             of
             the
             translations
             ,
             so
             that
             one
             cannot
             be
             idle
             while
             they
             are
             in
             hand
             with
             these
             .
          
           
             ☜
             
          
           
             These
             ,
             no
             means
             to
             make
             Masters
             idle
             ,
             but
             contrarily
             to
             incourage
             them
             to
             take
             all
             paines
             .
          
           
             The
             account
             to
             be
             made
             iustly
             of
             these
             translations
             .
          
           
             Triall
             to
             make
             all
             this
             euident
             .
          
           
             Schoole
             Authors
             translated
             Gramatically
             .
          
           
             Other
             bookes
             also
             translated
             Grammatically
             for
             continuall
             helpes
             in
             schooles
             .
          
           
             Translations
             as
             other
             things
             defectiue
             .
          
           
             What
             helpes
             to
             be
             vsed
             for
             higher
             Authors
             .
          
           
             Remembring
             euer
             to
             cast
             each
             sentence
             into
             the
             natural
             order
             .
          
           
             1.
             
             Commentaries
             of
             the
             hardest
             Authors
             .
          
           
             Bonde
             vpon
             Horace
             .
          
           
             Murmelius
             printed
             at
             Paris
             1531.
             
          
           
             Lubin
             on
             Persius
             and
             Iuvenal
             .
             Helps
             for
             Virg.
             Virg.
             with
             Melancht
             .
             annotations
             printed
             at
             Witeberg
             .
             1598.
             
          
           
             ☜
             
          
           
             2.
             
             Vnderstanding
             the
             Argument
             ,
             matter
             &
             drift
             in
             general
             .
          
           
             ☜
             
          
           
             3
             To
             consider
             the
             common
             cirrcumstances
             of
             places
             .
          
           
             This
             verse
             comprehending
             the
             chief
             circumstāces
             of
             places
             to
             be
             euer
             in
             mind
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             a
             principal
             rule
             for
             the
             vnderstanding
             of
             Authors
             or
             matter
             .
          
           
             4.
             
             To
             search
             out
             euery
             hard
             word
             &
             phrase
             .
          
           
             Or
             to
             haue
             each
             a
             little
             paper
             booke
             to
             note
             all
             n●w
             &
             hard
             words
             in
             .
          
           
             The
             sum
             of
             all
             ,
             for
             construing
             without
             Commentary
             or
             or
             helpe
             .
          
           
             ☞
             
          
           
             Seuerall
             kinds
             of
             construing
             or
             expounding
             .
          
           
             ☜
             
          
           
             A
             most
             profitable
             exercise
             ,
             to
             cause
             the
             Schollars
             ,
             daily
             to
             construe
             some
             things
             
               ex
               tempore
            
             ,
             besides
             their
             ordinary
             Lectures
             .
          
           
             The
             vsuall
             manner
             of
             Parsing
             .
          
           
             How
             to
             teach
             children
             to
             parse
             of
             themselues
             most
             surely
             and
             readily
             .
          
           
             The
             certaine
             direction
             for
             parsing
             .
          
           
             To
             parse
             as
             they
             construe
             ,
             euer
             marknig
             the
             last
             word
             .
          
           
             2
             To
             remember
             if
             they
             haue
             not
             learned
             the
             words
             before
             .
          
           
             3
             To
             marke
             in
             Nounes
             ,
             Verbs
             ,
             Participles
             ,
             what
             examples
             they
             are
             like
             ,
             The
             rest
             are
             in
             the
             booke
             .
          
           
             Paralleling
             by
             examples
             in
             the
             Syntax
             likewise
             An
             example
             of
             parsing
             set
             downe
             at
             large
             ,
             to
             direct
             the
             rudest
             .
          
           
             First
             construe
             truely
             .
          
           
             Parse
             as
             they
             construe
             .
          
           
             Examining
             in
             parsing
             .
          
           
             Puer
             .
          
           
             Qui.
             
          
           
             Es.
             
          
           
             Discipulus
             .
          
           
             Mihi
             ▪
             
          
           
             Atque
             .
          
           
             Cupis
             .
          
           
             Doceri
             .
          
           
             Ades
             .
          
           
             Huc
             .
          
           
             Concipe
             .
          
           
             Dicta
             .
          
           
             Haec
             .
          
           
             Animo
             .
          
           
             Tuo
             .
          
           
             Manner
             of
             hearing
             their
             Lectures
             .
          
           
             ☜
             
          
           
             How
             to
             know
             by
             the
             wordes
             what
             part
             of
             speech
             each
             word
             is
             .
          
           
             Substantiues
             ,
             and
             how
             to
             know
             them
             .
          
           
             How
             Adiectiues
             .
          
           
             By
             the
             Latine
             adioyned
             .
             In
             us
             or
             er
             like
             bonus
             ,
          
           
             In
             ans
             ,
             ens
             ,
             x
             ,
             rs
             ,
             like
             foelix
             .
          
           
             In
             is
             ,
             ior
             ,
             ius
             ,
             like
             tristis
             .
          
           
             How
             Verbes
             may
             be
             known
             .
          
           
             Gerunds
             .
          
           
             Supines
             .
          
           
             Participles
             .
          
           
             Present
             tense
             Preter
             tense
             .
          
           
             Future
             in
             rus
             .
          
           
             Future
             in
             dus
             .
          
           
             How
             to
             know
             other
             Aduerbes
             besides
             those
             in
             the
             bookes
             .
          
           
             Of
             Comparison
             .
          
           
             Qualitie
             .
          
           
             A
             child
             may
             know
             of
             what
             Coniugation
             any
             Verbe
             is
             .
          
           
             A
             direction
             to
             know
             the
             Coniugations
             of
             Verbs
             .
          
           
             Verbs
             of
             the
             second
             Coniugation
             easily
             knowen
             .
          
           
             Verbs
             of
             the
             4.
             
             Coniugation
             .
          
           
             Verbs
             of
             the
             3.
             
             Coniugation
             .
          
           
             This
             direction
             for
             finding
             out
             the
             Coniugation
             receiued
             frō
             M.
             Coot●
             ▪
             
          
           
             Much
             time
             and
             toile
             in
             parsing
             thorough
             examining
             each
             word
             by
             the
             Master
             ,
             how
             helped
             .
          
           
             The
             surest
             shortest
             and
             speediest
             way
             of
             parsing
             .
          
           
             Some
             account
             to
             be
             by
             pen
             and
             characters
             .
             put
             this
             will
             be
             found
             most
             short
             and
             easie
             .
          
           
             To
             parse
             euerie
             one
             his
             peece
             ,
             as
             reading
             a
             lecture
             .
          
           
             Example
             .
          
           
             ☜
             
          
           
             Example
             .
          
           
             ☜
             
          
           
             To
             help
             to
             prepare
             the
             children
             for
             parsing
             ,
             at
             taking
             lectures
             ▪
             
          
           
             To
             marke
             out
             hard
             words
             .
          
           
             See
             more
             of
             this
             marking
             before
             in
             the
             3.
             generall
             obseration
             .
          
           
             ☞
             
          
           
             To
             cause
             them
             to
             turne
             to
             the
             rules
             .
          
           
             Noting
             in
             the
             higher
             fourm
             .
          
           
             The
             ends
             of
             marking
             their
             bookes
             .
          
           
             Marking
             the
             hardest
             wordes
             for
             remembrance
             ,
             is
             no
             meanes
             to
             make
             them
             Truants
             ,
             but
             helpeth
             and
             preuenteth
             many
             inconueniences
             .
          
           
             Euils
             of
             the
             want
             hereof
             .
          
           
             How
             to
             appose
             so
             as
             the
             children
             may
             get
             both
             the
             matter
             ,
             words
             ,
             and
             phrase
             of
             each
             Lecture
             .
          
           
             Example
             .
          
           
             ☞
             
          
           
             Manner
             of
             propounding
             the
             questions
             .
          
           
             Example
             of
             examining
             English
             and
             Latine
             together
             .
          
           
             Examining
             for
             the
             vse
             in
             Cato
             .
          
           
             Examining
             the
             Fables
             in
             Esop
             for
             the
             vse
             .
          
           
             Making
             a
             report
             of
             their
             Fables
             .
          
           
             The
             vse
             according
             to
             the
             quality
             of
             the
             bookes
             .
          
           
             ☜
             
          
           
             The
             surest
             way
             to
             make
             both
             Latine
             and
             matter
             our
             owne
             .
          
           
             Vse
             in
             Tullies
             Offices
             ,
             and
             Ouids
             Metamorphosis
             .
          
           
             ☞
             
          
           
             Parsing
             in
             the
             higher
             fourms
             .
          
           
             ☞
             
          
           
             All
             in
             Latine
             in
             the
             higher
             fourmes
             .
          
           
             The
             summe
             of
             all
             ,
             principally
             necessary
             for
             parsing
             .
          
           
             To
             enter
             children
             to
             make
             Latine
             ,
             a
             matter
             ordinarily
             extremely
             difficult
             ,
             and
             full
             of
             toyle
             both
             to
             Master
             and
             schollar
             .
          
           
             The
             ordinary
             manner
             in
             countrey
             Schooles
             ,
             to
             enter
             Schollars
             to
             make
             Latin.
             
          
           
             The
             butcherly
             feare
             of
             making
             Latines
             .
          
           
             The
             shortest
             way
             to
             enter
             Schollars
             to
             make
             Latine
             easily
             and
             surely
             .
          
           
             1.
             
             To
             be
             exceeding
             perfect
             in
             their
             rules
             ;
             chiefly
             in
             Nownes
             and
             Verbes
             .
          
           
             2.
             
             Each
             day
             to
             make
             the
             Latine
             of
             their
             lectures
             ,
             and
             giue
             a
             reason
             why
             each
             word
             must
             be
             so
             .
          
           
             Example
             repeated
             .
          
           
             These
             insteede
             of
             all
             vulgars
             .
          
           
             3.
             
             Continuall
             reading
             lectures
             ,
             and
             repeating
             what
             they
             haue
             learned
             out
             of
             the
             Grammaticall
             translations
             ,
             is
             continuall
             making
             Latine
             ,
             to
             cause
             children
             to
             come
             on
             very
             fast
             .
          
           
             4.
             
             Shewing
             fit
             sentences
             to
             turne
             into
             Latine
             out
             of
             the
             booke
             which
             they
             learne
             ,
             or
             others
             .
          
           
             The
             manner
             of
             their
             entrance
             to
             write
             Latine
             ,
             to
             profit
             in
             English
             ,
             Latine
             ,
             writing
             faire
             ,
             &
             true
             ,
             and
             all
             vnder
             one
             .
          
           
             Their
             bookes
             how
             ruled
             .
          
           
             Manner
             of
             dictating
             the
             English
             which
             they
             are
             to
             turne
             into
             Latine
             .
          
           
             A
             principall
             practice
             for
             writing
             true
             Orthography
             both
             in
             English
             and
             Latine
             .
          
           
             Repeating
             or
             construing
             without
             booke
             that
             which
             they
             haue
             written
             .
          
           
             ☞
             
          
           
             Benefit
             heereof
             for
             certaine
             direction
             to
             Master
             and
             schollar
             ,
             and
             to
             get
             Writing
             ,
             English
             Latine
             ,
             all
             at
             once
             .
          
           
             To
             imprint
             it
             by
             repetition
             the
             next
             morning
             together
             with
             their
             euening
             exercise
             .
          
           
             How
             to
             enter
             young
             schollars
             for
             composing
             ,
             or
             right
             placing
             their
             Latine
             .
          
           
             Tullies
             sentences
             the
             fittest
             to
             dictate
             sentences
             out
             of
             .
          
           
             a
             Hath
             euer
             bin
             .
          
           
             b
             At
             any
             time
             
               (
               verb
            
             )
             inspiration
             some
             diuine
             
          
           
             c
             afflatus
             ,
             breathing
             into
             .
          
           
             d
             Bring
             to
             passe
             .
          
           
             e
             Ignoro
             .
          
           
             f
             In
             what
             mind
             or
             with
             what
             minde
             .
          
           
             ☜
             
          
           
             How
             to
             learne
             to
             compose
             the
             Latine
             otherwise
             .
          
           
             Translating
             into
             pure
             Latine
             ,
             and
             composing
             it
             of
             themselues
             ;
             trying
             who
             can
             come
             neerest
             vnto
             Tully
             .
          
           
             For
             preuenting
             stealing
             .
          
           
             And
             writing
             after
             one
             another
             .
          
           
             ☜
             
          
           
             How
             to
             go
             o●
             faster
             ,
             and
             dispatch
             more
             in
             making
             Latin.
             
          
           
             ☞
             
          
           
             Translating
             into
             English
             after
             M.
             Askams
             manner
             .
          
           
             Vse
             hereof
             .
          
           
             Here
             you
             must
             be
             sure
             that
             they
             haue
             no
             translation
             to
             help
             them
             secretly
             .
          
           
             ☞
             
          
           
             The
             most
             speedy
             and
             profitable
             way
             of
             translating
             and
             composing
             .
          
           
             For
             translating
             an
             Author
             into
             Latine
             .
          
           
             One
             good
             vse
             of
             Holyokes
             Dictionarie
             .
          
           
             Things
             to
             be
             considered
             in
             translating
             .
          
           
             Best
             direction
             for
             translating
             .
          
           
             Translation
             for
             the
             sense
             &
             meaning
             .
          
           
             This
             kinde
             of
             translating
             into
             Latine
             is
             for
             schollars
             well
             grounded
             .
          
           
             Summe
             of
             all
             .
          
           
             Composition
             a
             matter
             of
             difficulty
             .
          
           
             The
             error
             of
             young
             schollars
             in
             displacing
             sentences
             .
          
           
             Composition
             generally
             belonging
             to
             all
             Latine
             .
          
           
             Oblique
             case●
             first
             .
          
           
             Nominnatiue
             in
             the
             midst
             .
          
           
             Verb
             in
             the
             end
             
          
           
             Except
             in
             obliques
             of
             denying
             .
          
           
             Adiectiues
             before
             .
          
           
             Words
             placed
             between
             the
             Adiectiue
             and
             Substantiue
             .
             1.
             
             Genitiue
             case
             
          
           
             2.
             
             Word
             gouerning
             the
             Genitiue
             .
          
           
             Verbe
             .
          
           
             A●●erbe
             .
          
           
             Coniunction
             .
          
           
             Preposition
             .
          
           
             Aduerbes
             and
             Prepositions
             .
          
           
             1.
             
             Obseruation
             .
          
           
             Word
             gouerned
             first
             .
          
           
             2.
             
             Obseruation
             .
          
           
             Person
             doing
             first
             .
          
           
             The
             end
             of
             these
             precepts
             
          
           
             How
             to
             attain
             to
             right
             composition
             .
          
           
             Obseruation
             in
             placing
             and
             measuring
             sentences
             in
             prose
             .
             Butlers
             Rhetor.
             Chap.
             15.
             
          
           
             Prose
             must
             be
             vnlike
             verse
             .
          
           
             No
             verses
             to
             be
             made
             in
             prose
             .
          
           
             Verses
             cited
             in
             prose
             .
          
           
             Beginning
             and
             ending
             of
             sentences
             most
             obserued
             :
             endings
             chiefly
             ,
             not
             to
             to
             bee
             like
             a
             verse
             .
          
           
             Endings
             of
             sentences
             to
             be
             carefully
             waied
             .
          
           
             This
             neede
             not
             be
             aboue
             sixe
             syllables
             .
          
           
             The
             same
             feete
             not
             to
             be
             continued
             in
             the
             ends
             .
          
           
             Tempering
             cōmonly
             long
             &
             short
             syllables
             .
          
           
             The
             sweetest
             sentence
             ending
             in
             2.
             
             Trochees
             .
          
           
             Tullies
             ending
             .
          
           
             The
             art
             of
             placing
             to
             be
             hid
             .
          
           
             Sounds
             to
             be
             respected
             principally
             ,
             in
             words
             or
             letters
             .
          
           
             Words
             of
             the
             best
             sound
             .
          
           
             Insolent
             words
             to
             be
             ●uo●ded
             .
          
           
             That
             all
             words
             may
             〈…〉
             &
             distinct
             sound
             .
          
           
             ☞
             
          
           
             No
             〈◊〉
             to
             be
             pas●ed
             without
             some
             little
             exercise
             against
             mo●●ing
             .
          
           
             Of
             making
             Epistles
             .
          
           
             Difficulty
             of
             making
             Epistles
             ,
             purely
             and
             pithily
             .
          
           
             Inditing
             English
             Letters
             little
             exercised
             in
             Schooles
             .
          
           
             The
             ordinary
             meanes
             of
             directing
             Schollars
             to
             make
             Epistles
             
          
           
             Hard
             for
             children
             who
             haue
             no
             reading
             ,
             to
             inuent
             variety
             of
             matter
             of
             themselues
             .
          
           
             Helpes
             for
             making
             Epistles
             .
          
           
             1
             Reading
             Tullies
             Epistles
             ▪
             
          
           
             ☞
             
          
           
             2
             Making
             thē
             very
             perfect
             in
             euery
             Epistle
             .
          
           
             ☞
             
          
           
             3
             To
             cause
             them
             to
             make
             another
             Epistle
             in
             imitation
             thereof
             .
          
           
             To
             do
             this
             first
             in
             English
             ,
             then
             in
             Latine
             .
          
           
             To
             set
             the
             Epistles
             after
             the
             manner
             of
             the
             Translations
             .
          
           
             ☞
             
          
           
             4
             Making
             answers
             to
             Epistles
             .
          
           
             Examples
             of
             imitating
             Epistles
             .
          
           
             Tullies
             Epistles
             to
             be
             imitated
             .
          
           
             The
             manner
             of
             the
             report
             of
             the
             summe
             of
             the
             Letter
             .
          
           
             *
             Letter
             carriers
             .
          
           
             Tullies
             Epistle
             .
          
           
             The
             first
             example
             of
             imitation
             of
             the
             former
             Epistle
             .
          
           
             The
             second
             imitation
             .
          
           
             The
             rule
             in
             imitation
             .
          
           
             The
             ordinary
             manner
             of
             directing
             Schollars
             how
             to
             begin
             to
             make
             Theames
             .
             According
             to
             Apthonius
             rules
             .
          
           
             The
             inconueniences
             of
             this
             course
             .
          
           
             This
             way
             hard
             enough
             for
             many
             Schoolemasters
             .
          
           
             Difficulty
             in
             making
             Theams
             ,
             because
             schollars
             are
             not
             acquainted
             with
             the
             matter
             of
             them
             .
          
           
             The
             Master
             oft
             deserues
             to
             bee
             beaten
             rather
             thē
             the
             schollar
             .
          
           
             1.
             
             To
             consider
             the
             principall
             end
             of
             making
             Theams
             .
          
           
             The
             principall
             end
             of
             making
             Theams
             .
          
           
             The
             means
             to
             furnish
             them
             .
          
           
             1.
             
             Making
             them
             very
             perfect
             in
             all
             their
             first
             school
             Authors
             .
             Reasons
             .
          
           
             ☜
             
          
           
             2.
             
             Reading
             ouer
             &
             ouer
             Tullies
             sentences
             .
          
           
             3.
             
             Presidents
             or
             examples
             .
          
           
             Presidents
             for
             matter
             .
          
           
             ☞
             
          
           
             Reusneri
             Symbola
             .
          
           
             Reusner
             worthy
             to
             traine
             vp
             young
             Gentlemen
             ,
             and
             all
             of
             any
             good
             sort
             and
             condition
             .
          
           
             ☞
             
          
           
             How
             Schollars
             may
             vse
             Reusners
             Symbola
             for
             Theames
             .
          
           
             *
             The
             words
             or
             Mottoes
             .
          
           
             Pronouncing
             their
             Theam●
             .
          
           
             Benefit
             of
             Reusner
             so
             vsed
             ,
             &
             of
             daily
             Theams
             out
             of
             it
             .
          
           
             ☞
             
          
           
             These
             Theams
             to
             be
             limited
             according
             to
             leasure
             and
             oportunitie
             .
          
           
             The
             best
             and
             most
             easie
             direction
             for
             Theams
             to
             be
             written
             at
             large
             ,
             with
             iudgement
             according
             to
             the
             parts
             therof
             .
          
           
             To
             take
             the
             Theams
             out
             of
             Apthonius
             ,
             and
             how
             to
             make
             them
             to
             vnderstand
             them
             fully
             ,
             and
             prepare
             matter
             .
          
           
             Parts
             of
             the
             Theame
             .
          
           
             Exordium
             what
             one
             .
          
           
             If
             the
             Theame
             be
             of
             persons
             .
          
           
             Theame
             of
             some
             matter
             .
          
           
             Narration
             .
          
           
             Confirmation
             .
          
           
             Confutation
             .
          
           
             Conclusion
             .
          
           
             ☜
             
          
           
             Imitation
             of
             Exordiums
             and
             Conclusions
             .
          
           
             Authours
             for
             matter
             .
          
           
             Lycosthenes
             of
             the
             last
             Edition
             to
             be
             taken
             heed
             of
             ,
             as
             it
             is
             augmented
             and
             corrupted
             by
             the
             Iesuites
             ,
             printed
             
               Coloniae
               ,
               sumptibus
               Lazari
               Zetzueri
               An.
               M.
               D.C.III
               .
            
          
           
             Helpes
             for
             inuention
             of
             matter
             .
          
           
             The
             knowledg
             of
             the
             ten
             grounds
             of
             Inuention
             ,
             the
             readiest
             .
          
           
             ☜
             
          
           
             The
             arte
             of
             meditation
             most
             profitable
             for
             inuention
             .
          
           
             ☜
             
          
           
             Presidents
             for
             the
             manner
             of
             Theames
             ,
             and
             out
             of
             which
             to
             take
             their
             Theames
             first
             ;
             or
             out
             of
             Reusthner
             ,
             or
             others
             as
             we
             wil
             
          
           
             ☞
             
          
           
             ☞
             
          
           
             Tullies
             Paradoxes
             for
             more
             excellent
             patternes
             .
          
           
             Declamations
             and
             pattrnes
             for
             them
             .
          
           
             Examples
             of
             Inuectiues
             .
          
           
             Examples
             of
             praise
             and
             dispraise
             .
          
           
             Declamations
             fit
             for
             the
             Vniuersities
             ,
             or
             for
             principall
             schollars
             in
             the
             Grammar
             schooles
             .
             Manner
             of
             writing
             downe
             the
             Theames
             by
             Schollars
             of
             iudgement
             .
          
           
             ☜
             
          
           
             One
             Theame
             thus
             in
             the
             weeke
             may
             suffice
             ,
             and
             to
             spend
             their
             odd
             times
             in
             making
             Verses
             ,
             as
             more
             sharpening
             the
             wit.
             Making
             Theames
             
               ex
               tempore
            
             ,
             a
             matter
             of
             great
             commendations
             if
             it
             be
             don
             schollar-like
             .
          
           
             The
             way
             to
             make
             Theames
             
               ex
               tempore
            
             .
          
           
             A
             practice
             most
             easie
             and
             profitable
             to
             helpe
             to
             make
             Theames
             
               ex
               tempore
            
             .
          
           
             To
             follow
             a
             patterne
             of
             a
             Theame
             ,
             made
             familiar
             vnto
             them
             by
             the
             Grammaticall
             translations
             .
             To
             see
             how
             each
             is
             able
             to
             better
             his
             Authour
             ,
             in
             vttering
             euery
             part
             of
             themselues
             ,
             both
             English
             and
             Latine
             .
          
           
             ☞
             
          
           
             To
             practice
             to
             discourse
             of
             themselues
             .
          
           
             Where
             to
             be
             stored
             with
             matter
             :
             and
             wordes
             for
             all
             parts
             .
          
           
             Helpe
             for
             supplying
             wordes
             or
             phrases
             .
          
           
             1
             To
             think
             how
             to
             vtter
             it
             in
             other
             words
             in
             English.
             
          
           
             ☜
             
          
           
             2
             Helps
             of
             Dictionaries
             and
             bookes
             of
             phrases
             .
          
           
             To
             meditate
             the
             chiefe
             phrases
             before
             .
          
           
             Helpe
             by
             the
             Master
             .
          
           
             Common-place
             bookes
             a
             singular
             help
             .
          
           
             How
             to
             get
             store
             of
             phrases
             
          
           
             Other
             helps
             .
          
           
             Orations
             .
          
           
             Orations
             belong
             specially
             to
             the
             Vniuersities
             .
          
           
             Examples
             of
             Orations
             .
          
           
             Orations
             ex
             tempore
             .
          
           
             ☜
             
          
           
             Sum
             of
             all
             for
             Theames
             .
          
           
             ☜
             
          
           
             Poetry
             rather
             for
             ornament
             then
             for
             any
             necessity
             .
             Yet
             there
             may
             be
             commendable
             vse
             of
             it
             .
          
           
             The
             ordinary
             difficulty
             of
             this
             faculty
             .
          
           
             The
             folly
             of
             some
             in
             this
             kinde
             .
          
           
             The
             most
             plain
             way
             how
             to
             enter
             to
             make
             a
             verse
             without
             bodging
             .
          
           
             1.
             
             To
             write
             true
             Latine
             .
          
           
             2.
             
             To
             haue
             read
             some
             Poetry
             .
          
           
             ☞
             
          
           
             3.
             
             Practice
             of
             turning
             them
             out
             of
             the
             Grāmaticall
             translations
             into
             verse
             .
          
           
             ☞
             
          
           
             Giuing
             Poeticall
             phrase
             .
          
           
             4.
             
             To
             be
             very
             cunning
             in
             the
             rules
             of
             versifying
             .
          
           
             5.
             
             To
             be
             perfect
             in
             scanning
             .
          
           
             6.
             
             To
             keepe
             frō
             bodging
             in
             their
             entrance
             .
          
           
             ☜
             
          
           
             To
             vse
             the
             like
             practice
             in
             
               Flores
               Po●tarum
            
             for
             verse
             ,
             as
             in
             Tullies
             sentences
             for
             prose
             .
          
           
             To
             do
             this
             without
             pen.
             
          
           
             ☜
             
          
           
             The
             most
             easie
             way
             of
             turning
             verses
             out
             of
             
               Flores
               Poetarum
            
          
           
             To
             note
             hard
             words
             quātities
             Epithets
             .
          
           
             ☜
             
          
           
             7.
             
             To
             turne
             the
             verses
             of
             their
             lectures
             .
          
           
             ☞
             
          
           
             8.
             
             Contracting
             their
             lectures
             .
          
           
             The
             certaine
             benefit
             of
             this
             exercise
             .
          
           
             To
             expresse
             their
             Poet
             most
             liuely
             .
          
           
             Caueat
             in
             contracting
             .
          
           
             ☞
             
          
           
             To
             make
             verses
             of
             any
             ordinary
             Theam
             .
          
           
             ☜
             
          
           
             To
             versifie
             
               ex
               tempore
            
             .
          
           
             Benefits
             of
             this
             practice
             .
          
           
             The
             vse
             of
             versifying
             
               ex
               tempore
            
             .
          
           
             ☜
             
          
           
             Imitation
             surest
             
          
           
             Further
             helps
             for
             versifying
             .
          
           
             For
             store
             of
             m●tt●r
             to
             haue
             Cōmon
             place
             books
             or
             books
             of
             references
             to
             to
             the
             most
             excellent
             places
             in
             Poets
             .
          
           
             ☞
             
          
           
             2.
             〈…〉
             
          
           
             〈…〉
             
          
           
             3.
             
             For
             Epithets
             ,
             Textors
             Epithets
             of
             the
             last
             and
             largest
             .
          
           
             Abb●idgement
             of
             Textor
             .
          
           
             ☞
             
          
           
             4.
             
             
               For
               Qua●iti●s
               and
               Authorities
            
             Smet●●
             Prosodia
             〈…〉
             
          
           
             ☞
             
          
           
             〈…〉
             
          
           
             〈…〉
             
          
           
             6
             Figures
             of
             Rhetoricke
             .
          
           
             7
             For
             turning
             Verses
             Poetically
             :
             Stockewood
             his
             
               Progymnasma
               s●●olafticum
            
             .
          
           
             One
             Disticke
             varyed
             450.
             wayes
             .
          
           
             One
             Verse
             turned
             104.
             waies
             ,
             the
             same
             words
             being
             kept
             .
          
           
             8
             Practice
             still
             all
             in
             all
             .
          
           
             Daily
             and
             easie
             exercises
             .
          
           
             Examining
             exercises
             neuer
             to
             be
             omitted
             .
          
           
             Though
             tedious
             yet
             profitable
             .
          
           
             Neglect
             of
             exmining
             brings
             carelesnesse
             in
             schollars
             .
          
           
             1
             Masters
             to
             obs●rue
             generall
             faults
             .
          
           
             Wherein
             schollars
             do
             most
             commonly
             slip
             .
          
           
             Synchesis
             .
          
           
             Hyperbaton
             to
             be
             auoided
             .
          
           
             ☜
             
          
           
             2
             To
             reade
             ouer
             their
             exercises
             first
             in
             naturall
             order
             .
          
           
             ☜
             
          
           
             3.
             
             To
             parallele
             each
             thing
             by
             examples
             .
          
           
             ☜
             
          
           
             4
             To
             looke
             to
             elegancy
             and
             finenesse
             of
             Composition
             .
          
           
             Neuer
             to
             think
             any
             exercise
             laboured
             enough
             ▪
             
          
           
             ☜
             
          
           
             5
             Aduersaries
             to
             note
             faults
             in
             one
             anothers
             exercises
             .
          
           
             ☞
             
          
           
             6
             The
             maner
             of
             examining
             by
             the
             Master
             .
          
           
             ☞
             
          
           
             7
             Special
             faults
             in
             the
             youngest
             fourmes
             .
          
           
             ☞
             
          
           
             7
             Care
             that
             they
             do
             correct
             their
             exercises
             forthwith
             .
          
           
             8
             This
             to
             be
             ●o●e
             by
             others
             〈◊〉
             of
             
          
           
             ☜
             
          
           
             How
             to
             do
             for
             correcting
             where
             there
             are
             very
             many
             in
             a
             fourme
             ;
             and
             where
             time
             will
             not
             permit
             to
             correct
             all
             .
          
           
             In
             exercises
             of
             translations
             .
          
           
             Verses
             
               ex
               tempore
            
             .
          
           
             How
             to
             answer
             any
             difficult
             question
             of
             Grammar
             .
          
           
             1
             To
             be
             perfect
             in
             all
             ordinary
             questions
             of
             Accedence
             .
          
           
             2
             In
             those
             set
             together
             in
             the
             end
             of
             the
             Accedence
             questions
             .
          
           
             3
             In
             the
             Latine
             questions
             dispersed
             through
             the
             Grammar
             ,
             not
             learned
             vsually
             .
          
           
             Caueat
             .
          
           
             ☞
             
          
           
             4
             Stockwoods
             questions
             .
          
           
             ☜
             
          
           
             Most
             of
             the
             difficulties
             of
             the
             auncient
             Classicall
             Authors
             collected
             into
             one
             by
             M.
             Stockwoods
             last
             Edition
             ,
             printed
             Anno.
             1607.
             
          
           
             5
             Certaine
             generall
             Figures
             to
             answere
             many
             difficulties
             by
             .
          
           
             In
             Talaeus
             Rhetoricke
             to
             giue
             definitions
             ,
             diuisions
             and
             one
             short
             example
             .
          
           
             Talaeus
             examples
             would
             be
             noted
             as
             Grammar
             .
          
           
             Minos
             Commentary
             to
             helpe
             for
             vnderstanding
             Talaeus
             .
          
           
             ☜
             
          
           
             Butlars
             Rhetoricke
             ,
             a
             notable
             abbridgement
             of
             Talaeus
             ,
             and
             farre
             more
             easie
             and
             profitable
             .
          
           
             Brasbridges
             questions
             on
             Tullies
             offices
             .
          
           
             Generall
             want
             in
             the
             ignorance
             of
             the
             best
             helpes
             .
          
           
             Two
             to
             dispute
             each
             day
             insteed
             of
             their
             Theam
             or
             Verses
             .
          
           
             1.
             
             To
             follow
             M.
             Stockwood
             and
             to
             vse
             his
             very
             words
             .
          
           
             2.
             
             After
             to
             take
             only
             the
             substance
             of
             his
             disputations
             ,
             &
             go
             thorough
             a
             whole
             question
             at
             a
             time
             .
          
           
             Helpe
             for
             the
             vnderstanding
             of
             the
             disputations
             amongst
             the
             enterers
             .
          
           
             Benefits
             of
             such
             scholastical
             oppositions
             .
          
           
             Disputations
             of
             Morall
             Philosophy
             belong
             rather
             to
             the
             Vniuersitie
             .
          
           
             The
             priuiledges
             &
             prerogatiues
             of
             the
             Vniuersities
             by
             al
             means
             to
             bee
             preserued
             .
          
           
             ☜
             
          
           
             How
             these
             may
             be
             done
             and
             how
             farre
             .
          
           
             1.
             
             By
             practice
             in
             the
             Grāmaticall
             disputations
             .
          
           
             2.
             
             To
             bee
             acquainted
             with
             Tullies
             Offices
             and
             the
             questions
             of
             it
             .
          
           
             3.
             
             To
             oppose
             of
             som
             of
             those
             questiōs
             insteed
             of
             the
             Grammaticall
             .
          
           
             Som
             of
             Tullies
             Offices
             questions
             handled
             after
             the
             manner
             of
             M.
             Stockw
             ▪
             Grammaticall
             disputations
             worthy
             the
             labour
             ▪
             
          
           
             4.
             
             How
             to
             inuent
             reasons
             by
             the
             helpe
             of
             the
             places
             of
             Inuētion
             .
          
           
             ☞
             
          
           
             Helps
             for
             the
             answerer
             .
          
           
             ☞
             
          
           
             All
             the
             chiefe
             schollars
             are
             necessarily
             to
             be
             acquainted
             with
             the
             heads
             of
             Inuention
             .
          
           
             For
             Inuenting
             ,
             Resoluing
             ,
             Remembring
             .
          
           
             Continuall
             exercise
             all
             in
             all
             .
          
           
             Goclenius
             Problemes
             .
          
           
             Ob.
             That
             this
             may
             seem
             to
             make
             them
             truants
             to
             dispute
             out
             of
             the
             words
             of
             the
             booke
             .
          
           
             Necessity
             of
             being
             well
             acquainted
             with
             the
             best
             examples
             .
          
           
             The
             euils
             of
             in
             forcing
             schollars
             to
             exercises
             ,
             wherof
             they
             are
             not
             acquainted
             with
             the
             examples
             first
             .
          
           
             Benefits
             of
             the
             contrary
             ;
             viz
             of
             hauing
             the
             best
             patternes
             .
          
           
             Triall
             by
             experience
             .
          
           
             Following
             cōstantly
             〈◊〉
             excellent
             patterns
             doth
             〈…〉
             euery
             calling
             .
          
           
             The
             excellency
             of
             Pronuntiation
             .
          
           
             The
             necessity
             and
             estimation
             of
             being
             able
             to
             speake
             Latine
             readily
             and
             purely
             .
          
           
             Pronuntiation
             ordinarily
             hard
             to
             be
             attained
             in
             Schooles
             .
          
           
             How
             schollars
             may
             be
             broght
             to
             pronou●ce
             sweetly
             .
          
           
             ☞
             
          
           
             1.
             
             Children
             to
             be
             trained
             vp
             to
             pronoūce
             right
             from
             the
             first
             entrance
             .
          
           
             ☞
             
          
           
             To
             vtter
             euerie
             matter
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             nature
             of
             it
             .
          
           
             ☞
             
          
           
             What
             they
             can
             not
             vtter
             in
             Latine
             ,
             to
             learn
             to
             do
             it
             in
             English
             ,
             then
             after
             the
             same
             manner
             in
             Latine
             .
          
           
             4
             To
             cause
             sundry
             to
             pronounce
             the
             very
             same
             sentence
             in
             emulation
             .
          
           
             5
             In
             all
             Authors
             wherein
             persons
             are
             fained
             to
             speak
             to
             be
             carefull
             for
             this
             .
          
           
             ☜
             
          
           
             Poetry
             to
             be
             pronounced
             as
             prose
             ,
             except
             in
             scanning
             .
          
           
             6
             Further
             helpes
             as
             they
             proceede
             .
             Practice
             of
             oft
             pronouncing
             〈◊〉
             e●ically
             ,
             some
             speciall
             examples
             in
             T●l●us
             .
          
           
             To
             marke
             in
             each
             sentence
             in
             what
             word
             the
             Emphasis
             is
             .
          
           
             ☞
             
          
           
             Butlars
             Rhet.
             
               li.
               2.
               cap.
               2.
               de
               voce
               in
               singulis
               verbis
               .
            
             Care
             in
             pronouncing
             all
             exercises
             .
          
           
             The
             curious
             pronouncing
             some
             of
             Tullies
             Orations
             or
             the
             like
             .
          
           
             More
             exquisite
             knowledge
             hereof
             left
             to
             the
             Vniuersities
             
               Butleri
               Rhet.
               lib.
               2.
               de
               proment
               .
            
          
           
             Complaint
             of
             the
             trouble
             and
             difficulty
             to
             traine
             vp
             schollars
             to
             speake
             Latine
             .
          
           
             The
             generall
             errour
             for
             the
             time
             when
             schollars
             are
             to
             begin
             to
             speake
             Latine
             .
          
           
             To
             learne
             to
             speake
             Latine
             ,
             must
             be
             begun
             from
             the
             first
             entrance
             into
             construction
             .
          
           
             ☞
             
          
           
             The
             surest
             course
             for
             entring
             young
             schollars
             to
             speake
             Latine
             .
             1
             Examining
             and
             answering
             euery
             peece
             of
             a
             rule
             or
             sentence
             in
             Latine
             ,
             to
             make
             them
             their
             owne
             .
             So
             in
             their
             Authours
             .
          
           
             2
             To
             vtter
             before
             them
             what
             they
             cannot
             .
             How
             the
             Master
             himselfe
             may
             do
             it
             easily
             before
             them
             .
          
           
             3
             The
             daily
             practice
             of
             Grammaticall
             translations
             ;
             chiefly
             reading
             bookes
             of
             Dialogues
             out
             of
             English
             into
             Latine
             ,
             which
             is
             nothing
             but
             such
             talking
             .
          
           
             ☜
             
          
           
             4
             To
             talke
             together
             in
             the
             wordes
             of
             the
             Dialogues
             ,
             each
             sentence
             first
             in
             English
             ,
             then
             Latine
             .
          
           
             5
             Translating
             and
             vttering
             euery
             morning
             a
             peece
             of
             their
             Accedence
             in
             Latine
             .
          
           
             6
             Custome
             to
             parse
             wholly
             in
             Latine
             ,
             and
             how
             to
             doe
             it
             .
          
           
             Corderius
             lib.
             ●
             .
             Colloq
             .
             69
             70.
             71.
             72.
             73.
             74.
             75.
             
          
           
             7
             Daily
             practice
             of
             disputing
             .
          
           
             8
             Practice
             of
             varying
             a
             phrase
             into
             diue●s
             ●oimes
             .
          
           
             9
             Copie
             of
             Synonimaes
             ,
             &
             the
             ●urest
             phrases
             ,
             &
             how
             to
             get
             them
             .
             This
             noted
             before
             .
          
           
             ☞
             
          
           
             10
             Exercising
             the
             schollars
             oft
             to
             giue
             variety
             for
             euery
             difficult
             matter
             .
          
           
             11
             Holyokes
             Dictionary
             ,
             describing
             things
             by
             Periphrasis
             or
             circumlocution
             .
          
           
             12
             To
             giue
             dai●y
             certaine
             proper
             wordes
             ,
             and
             where
             they
             haue
             read
             them
             .
          
           
             13
             Reading
             ouer
             Erasmus
             Colloquium
             .
          
           
             14
             Continuall
             practice
             ,
             when
             they
             haue
             learned
             a
             pure
             phrase
             .
          
           
             Difficulty
             to
             cause
             schollar●
             to
             practice
             speaking
             Latine
             amongst
             themselues
             .
          
           
             ☜
             
          
           
             Inconueniences
             of
             Custode●
             .
          
           
             ☞
             
          
           
             Of
             one
             schollar
             smiting
             another
             with
             the
             Ferula
             .
          
           
             The
             best
             means
             
          
           
             ☞
             
          
           
             1
             Seniours
             of
             each
             fourme
             to
             looke
             to
             the
             whole
             .
          
           
             ☞
             
          
           
             2
             The
             Masters
             eye
             and
             eare
             .
          
           
             ☞
             
          
           
             3
             Parsing
             in
             Latine
             .
          
           
             4
             Weekely
             Monitours
             abroad
             .
          
           
             ☜
             
          
           
             How
             any
             one
             may
             by
             himself
             alone
             attaine
             to
             speake
             Latine
             of
             ordinary
             matters
             .
          
           
             ☞
             
          
           
             Goclenius
             his
             obseruations
             for
             them
             who
             seeke
             to
             come
             to
             puritie
             and
             ripenesse
             in
             the
             Latine
             tongue
             .
          
           
             The
             Greeke
             may
             be
             gotten
             with
             farre
             lesse
             labour
             the●
             the
             Latine
             .
          
           
             One
             benefit
             worth
             al
             our
             labour
             in
             the
             Greek
             .
          
           
             To
             go
             through
             the
             whol
             course
             of
             the
             Greek
             .
          
           
             M.
             Askams
             testimony
             concerning
             the
             Greeke
             tongue
             ▪
             Schoolemaster
             p.
             17.
             2.
             
          
           
             The
             way
             to
             the
             Greek
             the
             same
             with
             the
             Latine
             .
          
           
             Getting
             first
             the
             chiefe
             rules
             .
          
           
             ☜
             
          
           
             To
             be
             very
             perfect
             in
             Nownes
             and
             Verbs
             .
          
           
             ☞
             
          
           
             Terminating
             Nownes
             .
          
           
             Coniugating
             &
             terminating
             Verbs
             .
          
           
             To
             giue
             the
             first
             person
             in
             euery
             Moode
             &
             Tense
             in
             each
             voice
             together
             .
          
           
             To
             bee
             very
             perfect
             in
             Pronowns
             ,
             Aduerbes
             ,
             Coniunctions
             ,
             Prepositions
             .
          
           
             How
             schollars
             of
             vnderstanding
             &
             iudgement
             ,
             may
             take
             yet
             a
             shorter
             course
             .
          
           
             ☜
             
          
           
             
               To
               make
               it
               plai●e
            
             :
             Grammatica
             Graecapro
             Schola
             Argentinensi
             per
             Theophilum
             Golium
             .
          
           
             ☞
             
          
           
             To
             begin
             Construction
             with
             the
             Greek
             Testament
             .
             Reasons
             .
          
           
             1.
             
             For
             the
             familiarnesse
             of
             it
             .
          
           
             2.
             
             Because
             that
             booke
             with
             the
             Hebrew
             of
             the
             old
             Testament
             are
             the
             Books
             of
             books
             .
             Being
             only
             written
             by
             the
             Lord.
             Hauing
             life
             in
             the●
             .
          
           
             All
             who
             may
             ,
             are
             to
             labor
             to
             see
             with
             their
             owne
             eyes
             ,
             and
             why
             .
          
           
             ☜
             
          
           
             ☜
             
          
           
             To
             striue
             to
             haue
             these
             books
             as
             familiarly
             as
             the
             Iewes
             had
             the
             Hebrew
             .
          
           
             ☜
             
          
           
             If
             any
             purpose
             to
             haue
             but
             a
             smattering
             in
             the
             Greek
             ,
             to
             haue
             it
             here
             ,
             and
             why
             .
          
           
             ☜
             
          
           
             The
             Testament
             compared
             to
             other
             Greek
             w●●ters
             .
          
           
             This
             is
             a
             not●ble
             entrance
             to
             read
             all
             other
             Greek
             Authors
             
          
           
             ☞
             
          
           
             In
             the
             Testament
             to
             begin
             at
             the
             Gospell
             of
             Iohn
             .
          
           
             How
             schollars
             may
             be
             made
             most
             perfect
             in
             the
             Greeke
             Testament
             .
          
           
             ☞
             
          
           
             Meanes
             parti●ularly
             .
          
           
             1
             Why
             to
             haue
             the
             hard
             words
             written
             downe
             .
          
           
             ☞
             
          
           
             The
             speediest
             way
             ,
             to
             get
             the
             Greeke
             Ra●ices
             first
             .
          
           
             How
             it
             may
             be
             done
             easily
             ,
             without
             losse
             of
             time
             .
          
           
             Manner
             of
             learning
             them
             .
          
           
             Manner
             of
             examining
             them
             for
             speed
             and
             memory
             .
          
           
             Benefit
             hereof
             .
          
           
             Hauing
             Scapula
             in
             the
             school
             to
             run
             to
             ,
             they
             shall
             presently
             haue
             any
             thing
             .
          
           
             ☞
             
          
           
             How
             children
             may
             soone
             learne
             to
             reade
             the
             Greeke
             before
             they
             learn
             the
             Greeke
             Grammar
             .
          
           
             In
             learning
             the
             Radices
             to
             obserue
             right
             pronuntiation
             for
             accents
             and
             spirits
             .
          
           
             This
             booke
             laboured
             in
             for
             the
             common
             good
             .
          
           
             Helpe
             for
             committing
             wordes
             to
             memory
             .
          
           
             ●aueat
             in
             remembring
             .
          
           
             The
             Greeke
             Radices
             contriued
             into
             continued
             speeches
             .
          
           
             Strange
             Latine
             wordes
             .
          
           
             Learning
             the
             Greeke
             out
             of
             our
             translations
             
          
           
             ☞
             
          
           
             The
             readiest
             and
             surest
             way
             by
             a
             perfect
             verball
             translation
             ,
             or
             the
             verball●et
             in
             the
             Margent
             ▪
             where
             it
             differeth
             from
             that
             we
             vse
             .
          
           
             How
             to
             east
             the
             Greeke
             into
             the
             Grammaticall
             order
             .
          
           
             ☞
             
          
           
             How
             any
             who
             haue
             but
             a
             smatering
             may
             proceed
             of
             themselues
             in
             the
             Greeke
             Testament
             .
          
           
             This
             cannot
             be
             so
             well
             done
             ,
             by
             the
             Interlineall
             or
             hauing
             the
             Greeke
             and
             Latine
             together
             as
             by
             hauing
             them
             separate
             .
             Experience
             .
          
           
             The
             Interlineal
             is
             continually
             a
             prompt●
             to
             the
             schol●ar
             ,
             and
             a
             deceiuer
             of
             the
             mind
             insteed
             of
             a
             Master
             ,
             vnlesse
             it
             be
             vsed
             with
             great
             wisdome
             .
          
           
             This
             euill
             cannot
             be
             preuented
             amongst
             schollars
             .
          
           
             ☞
             
          
           
             How
             men
             of
             vnderstanding
             may
             vse
             the
             Interlineall
             .
          
           
             How
             the
             schollars
             may
             proceed
             in
             other
             Authors
             .
          
           
             The
             benefit
             of
             such
             translations
             of
             some
             of
             the
             purest
             Authors
             performed
             by
             skilfull
             Grecians
             .
          
           
             As
             the
             fables
             translated
             in
             the
             Strasburge
             Grammar
             .
          
           
             Parsing
             in
             Greek
             ▪
             
          
           
             ☞
             
          
           
             Helps
             ●or
             construing
             and
             pa●fing
             .
          
           
             Praxis
             praeceptorum
             Grammatices
             Antesignani
             .
          
           
             Berket
             on
             Stephens
             Catech
             ,
             printed
             by
             Wechelus
             an
             .
             1604
             
          
           
             ☞
             
          
           
             
               M
               ▪
               Stockw
            
             .
             Progimnasma
             scholasticum
             ex
             Anthologia
             Hē●ici
             Stephani
             .
          
           
             ☞
             
          
           
             The
             best
             &
             fittest
             Authors
             ●or
             Poetry
             ,
             &
             most
             easie
             :
          
           
             Theognis
             .
             Phocili●es
             .
             Hesiode
             with
             C●po●ine
             and
             M●lanchthon
             .
          
           
             Homer
             with
             Eustathius
             .
          
           
             To
             haue
             in
             readinesse
             a
             short
             briefe
             of
             all
             the
             dialects
             and
             figures
             ,
             a
             speedy
             help
             for
             the
             knowledge
             of
             the
             Poets
             .
          
           
             A
             principal
             help
             for
             all
             Anomalies
             and
             difficulties
             in
             Greeke
             .
          
           
             How
             to
             write
             purely
             in
             Greek
             
          
           
             ☜
             
          
           
             How
             to
             write
             faire
             .
          
           
             Versifying
             in
             Greek
             .
          
           
             ☞
             
          
           
             Theognis
             may
             be
             easily
             learned
             without
             booke
             by
             the
             helpe
             of
             the
             translation
             ▪
             
          
           
             ☞
             
          
           
             A
             Caueat
             for
             the
             time
             bestowed
             in
             such
             exercises
             of
             writing
             in
             Greek●
             .
          
           
             Summe
             of
             all
             .
          
           
             The
             knowledge
             of
             the
             Hebrew
             may
             be
             the
             soonest
             gotten
             and
             why
             
          
           
             1
             The
             Grammar
             to
             be
             gotten
             most
             exquisitely
             of
             them
             who
             desire
             to
             come
             to
             perfection
             in
             the
             Hebrew
             .
          
           
             Some
             chiefe
             parts
             for
             others
             who
             onely
             desire
             the
             vnderstanding
             .
          
           
             Grammars
             to
             be
             vsed
             .
          
           
             Martinius
             with
             his
             Technologia
             .
          
           
             Blebelius
             accounted
             most
             plaine
             and
             easie
             
          
           
             The
             seuerall
             points
             in
             Martinius
             you
             may
             finde
             in
             Blebelius
             by
             the
             table
             in
             the
             end
             of
             Blebelius
             .
          
           
             The
             second
             principall
             meanes
             ,
             the
             perfect
             getting
             of
             the
             Radices
             .
          
           
             Manner
             of
             committing
             the
             Radices
             to
             memorie
             .
          
           
             Examples
             of
             helping
             memorie
             in
             the
             Hebrew
             .
          
           
             ☜
             
          
           
             The
             Hebrew
             the
             mother
             tongue
             most
             auncient
             and
             worthy
             .
          
           
             Others
             deriued
             from
             it
             .
          
           
             The
             benefit
             of
             diligence
             in
             comparing
             the
             tongues
             .
          
           
             How
             other
             words
             may
             be
             remembred
             ,
             which
             cannot
             be
             so
             deriued
             .
          
           
             The
             hardest
             rootes
             which
             seeme
             to
             haue
             no
             affini●y
             .
          
           
             To
             marke
             out
             also
             the
             harder
             deriuatiues
             in
             the
             Hebrew
             .
          
           
             The
             best
             Epitome
             for
             getting
             the
             Radices
             .
          
           
             This
             is
             not
             fully
             finished
             .
          
           
             The
             way
             might
             be
             more
             compendious
             by
             the
             rootes
             reduced
             to
             Classes
             .
          
           
             By
             the
             Dictionary
             alone
             they
             might
             be
             gotten
             in
             a
             short
             time
             .
          
           
             The
             third
             help
             ,
             perfect
             verball
             translations
             ,
             and
             continuall
             practice
             of
             them
             .
          
           
             The
             manner
             of
             vsing
             these
             repeated
             .
          
           
             Experience
             of
             this
             for
             assurance
             .
          
           
             A
             Student
             cannot
             be
             better
             imployed
             then
             in
             thus
             imprinting
             the
             originals
             in
             his
             hart
             ,
             if
             he
             haue
             leasure
             .
          
           
             ☞
             
          
           
             It
             seemeth
             that
             any
             tong
             may
             be
             gotten
             thus
             .
          
           
             These
             tongues
             ,
             Latine
             ,
             Greeke
             ,
             and
             Hebrew
             may
             be
             gotten
             in
             each
             Nation
             ,
             by
             these
             means
             of
             translations
             in
             their
             owne
             ●ongues
             .
          
           
             Greeke
             or
             Hebrew
             most
             easily
             learned
             by
             perfect
             translations
             in
             each
             tongue
             .
          
           
             ☜
             
          
           
             Of
             the
             vse
             of
             perfect
             verball
             translations
             for
             getting
             the
             originals
             .
          
           
             Obseruation
             re●
             eated
             how
             much
             and
             what
             to
             learne
             in
             eu●ry
             booke
             ▪
             
          
           
             Schollars
             to
             be
             trained
             vp
             in
             Religion
             .
          
           
             This
             most
             neglected
             in
             schooles
             .
          
           
             The
             popish
             Schoolemasters
             shall
             rise
             vp
             against
             vs.
             
          
           
             ☞
             
          
           
             How
             to
             teach
             them
             the
             Catechisme
             and
             when
             .
          
           
             ☞
             
          
           
             Manner
             of
             examining
             Catechisme
             .
          
           
             Taking
             notes
             or
             writing
             sermons
             .
          
           
             2.
             
             All
             who
             can
             write
             to
             take
             notes
             .
          
           
             ☜
             
          
           
             Caueat
             of
             any
             noise
             or
             disorder
             in
             gathering
             notes
             .
          
           
             3.
             
             The
             higher
             to
             set
             downe
             parts
             of
             the
             sermon
             more
             o●derly
             .
          
           
             4.
             
             In
             all
             the
             highest
             fourm●
             to
             set
             downe
             the
             substance
             exactly
             .
          
           
             ☞
             
          
           
             Manner
             of
             noting
             for
             helping
             vnderstanding
             &
             memorie
             .
          
           
             ☞
             
          
           
             Helps
             for
             memory
             in
             the
             margent
             ,
             &
             for
             vnderstanding
             .
          
           
             ☞
             
          
           
             To
             leaue
             good
             margents
             .
          
           
             To
             set
             downe
             quotations
             as
             they
             are
             spoken
             .
          
           
             To
             set
             downe
             the
             heads
             of
             all
             in
             the
             margents
             after
             .
          
           
             Benefit
             of
             this
             .
          
           
             To
             turne
             it
             after
             into
             Latine
             for
             the
             next
             daies
             exercise
             .
          
           
             ☞
             
          
           
             Or
             to
             read
             it
             into
             Latine
             
               ex
               tempore
            
             .
          
           
             Experiēce
             how
             soone
             they
             will
             do
             this
             .
          
           
             Examining
             the
             sermons
             .
          
           
             One
             to
             make
             a
             short
             rehearsall
             of
             the
             whole
             first
             .
          
           
             To
             aske
             questions
             of
             all
             things
             difficult
             .
          
           
             To
             cause
             the
             least
             &
             all
             sorts
             to
             repeate
             their
             notes
             .
          
           
             Benefit
             of
             this
             strict
             examining
             .
          
           
             How
             they
             may
             be
             able
             to
             repeat
             the
             whole
             sermons
             without
             booke
             .
          
           
             Principall
             helps
             for
             it
             .
          
           
             ☞
             
          
           
             Helpe
             of
             notes
             for
             assurance
             .
          
           
             Euery
             night
             to
             go
             thorough
             a
             peece
             of
             the
             historie
             of
             the
             Bible
             .
          
           
             Manner
             of
             examining
             the
             history
             .
          
           
             Not
             to
             trouble
             them
             with
             euery
             question
             .
          
           
             Obiection
             ,
             cōcerning
             them
             who
             would
             not
             haue
             their
             children
             taught
             any
             religion
             .
          
           
             How
             to
             deale
             that
             this
             may
             not
             hinder
             any
             other
             learning
             
          
           
             How
             to
             teach
             the
             schollars
             ciuilitie
             .
          
           
             The
             Schoole
             of
             good
             manners
             ,
             or
             The
             new
             Schoole
             of
             vertue
             for
             ciuilitie
             .
          
           
             ☜
             
          
           
             How
             to
             teach
             Religion
             and
             Latine
             all
             vnder
             one
             ,
             by
             reading
             each
             night
             a
             peece
             of
             a
             Chapter
             .
             Practice
             this
             constantly
             and
             carefully
             ,
             and
             trie
             the
             experience
             of
             Gods
             blessing
             in
             it
             .
          
           
             When
             the
             History
             to
             be
             repeated
             .
          
           
             How
             all
             the
             least
             may
             profite
             by
             reading
             of
             the
             Chapters
             ▪
             
          
           
             A
             principall
             helpe
             of
             vnderstanding
             ,
             how
             to
             make
             children
             to
             vnderstand
             any
             thing
             and
             remember
             .
          
           
             Examples
             of
             asking
             questions
             ,
             to
             helpe
             vnderstanding
             .
          
           
             These
             short
             questions
             giue
             a
             great
             light
             to
             harder
             points
             ,
             how
             they
             are
             to
             be
             vnderstood
             .
          
           
             Helpe
             in
             priuate
             reading
             .
          
           
             How
             the
             Schoolemaster
             should
             be
             qualified
             .
          
           
             1
             Sufficient
             to
             direct
             his
             Schollars
             .
             Or
             tractable
             .
          
           
             2
             Painefull
             and
             constant
             ,
             of
             conscience
             to
             God.
             
          
           
             To
             cast
             off
             all
             other
             studies
             for
             schoole
             times
             .
          
           
             Not
             to
             post
             ouer
             the
             trust
             to
             others
             .
          
           
             3
             Of
             a
             louing
             disposition
             to
             incourage
             all
             by
             praise
             and
             rewards
             .
          
           
             4
             A
             godly
             man
             and
             of
             good
             carriage
             .
          
           
             To
             seeke
             to
             gain
             and
             maintaine
             his
             authothority
             ,
             &
             how
             .
          
           
             An
             Vsher
             necessarie
             in
             all
             greater
             schools
             .
          
           
             To
             diuide
             the
             burden
             .
          
           
             Euill
             of
             lacke
             of
             an
             Vsher.
             
          
           
             The
             Master
             burdened
             with
             all
             ,
             is
             as
             the
             husbandman
             ouercharged
             with
             more
             then
             hee
             can
             compasse
             .
          
           
             Supply
             by
             schollars
             not
             sufficient
             .
          
           
             Sufficiency
             of
             the
             Vsher.
             
          
           
             To
             be
             at
             the
             Masters
             command
             .
          
           
             To
             be
             vsed
             with
             respect
             .
          
           
             ☞
             
          
           
             Not
             to
             meddle
             with
             correcting
             the
             highest
             .
          
           
             It
             were
             the
             best
             if
             the
             Vsher
             medled
             with
             no
             correction
             at
             all
             ,
             vnlesse
             in
             the
             Masters
             absence
             .
          
           
             The
             Vshers
             principall
             imployment
             with
             the
             younger
             ,
             to
             traine
             them
             vp
             for
             the
             Master
             .
          
           
             To
             preuent
             all
             inconueniences
             by
             the
             Vsher.
             
          
           
             Helpes
             besides
             the
             Vsher.
             
          
           
             1.
             
             Helpe
             in
             Schooles
             ,
             fewnesse
             of
             the
             fourmes
             .
          
           
             2.
             
             Seniors
             in
             each
             fourme
             .
          
           
             3.
             
             Authority
             .
          
           
             Particular
             help
             .
          
           
             Subdoctor
             in
             place
             of
             the
             Vsher
             ,
             or
             where
             the
             Vsher
             is
             not
             sufficient
             .
          
           
             Sorting
             the
             fourmes
             so
             many
             together
             as
             may
             be
             .
          
           
             Choise
             &
             matching
             each
             fourme
             .
          
           
             ☞
             
          
           
             Benefits
             of
             this
             election
             .
          
           
             This
             a
             chiefe
             means
             to
             make
             the
             schoole
             
               Ludu●
               literari●●
            
          
           
             Gouernment
             the
             help
             of
             helpes
             .
          
           
             Authority
             the
             top
             of
             gouernment
             .
          
           
             Authority
             how
             to
             be
             maintained
             .
          
           
             1.
             
             By
             being
             a
             liuing
             lawe
             .
          
           
             2.
             
             By
             most
             strict
             execution
             of
             iustice
             in
             
               praemio
               .
               poena
            
             .
          
           
             Incouraging
             vertue
             .
          
           
             Discouraging
             vice
             .
          
           
             The
             euils
             of
             the
             contrary
             ,
             or
             of
             partialitie
             .
          
           
             Obserue
             this
             and
             be
             warned
             .
          
           
             3.
             
             By
             a
             demonstration
             of
             conscience
             and
             loue
             in
             all
             .
          
           
             4.
             
             By
             being
             presidents
             to
             the
             children
             ,
             of
             all
             vertue
             .
          
           
             Extreame
             seuerity
             and
             whipping
             to
             be
             auoyded
             in
             schooles
             ,
             and
             all
             meanes
             vsed
             to
             preuent
             it
             .
          
           
             1
             By
             the
             example
             of
             God.
             
          
           
             2
             By
             the
             generall
             desire
             of
             all
             wise
             parents
             ,
             hauing
             naturall
             affections
             .
          
           
             3
             By
             that
             which
             euery
             one
             of
             vs
             would
             haue
             done
             vnto
             our selues
             .
          
           
             4
             For
             the
             mischiefes
             which
             follow
             excesse
             of
             ●eare
             ,
             taking
             away
             all
             vnderst●nding
             and
             sense
             from
             the
             wisest
             .
          
           
             5
             For
             the
             schollars
             to
             worke
             in
             them
             a
             loue
             of
             learning
             .
          
           
             6
             In
             regard
             of
             the
             Masters
             ,
             to
             gaine
             hearts
             of
             children
             and
             parents
             .
          
           
             7
             That
             Masters
             may
             euer
             haue
             boldnesse
             and
             comfort
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             hard
             for
             the
             Master
             striuing
             to
             do
             good
             ,
             to
             moderate
             his
             passion
             .
          
           
             Incouragements
             to
             be
             by
             these
             meanes
             ;
          
           
             1
             Often
             elections
             and
             preferments
             therein
             .
          
           
             2
             Countenancing
             and
             gracing
             the
             Seniours
             ,
             and
             all
             the
             best
             and
             most
             painefull
             .
          
           
             3
             Putting
             vp
             into
             higher
             fourmes
             .
             Giuing
             places
             .
          
           
             4
             Commending
             euery
             thing
             wel
             done
             .
          
           
             Caueat
             in
             praysing
             .
          
           
             5
             Disputation
             for
             the
             victorship
             .
          
           
             Manner
             of
             the
             Disputation
             .
          
           
             Praemia
             giuen
             to
             the
             two
             victours
             .
          
           
             ☜
             
          
           
             Office
             of
             the
             victours
             for
             their
             Praemia
             .
          
           
             ☞
             
          
           
             Solemne
             examination
             to
             be
             made
             once
             euery
             yeare
             .
          
           
             Exercises
             to
             be
             prouided
             against
             that
             time
             .
          
           
             To
             keepe
             their
             daily
             exercises
             faire
             written
             in
             bookes
             for
             tryall
             then
             by
             comparing
             .
          
           
             A
             course
             of
             examination
             to
             be
             appointed
             ,
             and
             to
             be
             performed
             first
             by
             the
             Masters
             and
             Vshers
             .
          
           
             After
             by
             others
             not
             satisfied
             .
          
           
             All
             who
             do
             wel
             to
             be
             praised
             .
          
           
             The
             best
             specially
             graced
             .
          
           
             Some
             Praemia
             giuen
             .
          
           
             ☜
             
          
           
             Benefit
             of
             set
             and
             solemne
             examination
             .
          
           
             Something
             giuen
             to
             some
             painefull
             poore
             schollar
             to
             help
             the
             Vsher.
             
          
           
             All
             parents
             to
             haue
             notice
             before
             su●h
             examination
             .
          
           
             7
             To
             labour
             euer
             to
             worke
             conscience
             in
             al
             to
             do
             all
             of
             conscience
             to
             God.
             
          
           
             By
             calling
             on
             them
             to
             remember
             these
             things
             :
          
           
             1
             That
             in
             their
             calling
             they
             are
             Gods
             seruants
             .
          
           
             His
             eye
             is
             vpon
             them
             .
          
           
             2.
             
             To
             study
             to
             get
             le●rning
             to
             honor
             God
             with
             ,
             &
             do
             seruice
             to
             his
             Church
             .
          
           
             3.
             
             To
             put
             them
             in
             mind
             of
             the
             rewards
             which
             follow
             learning
             
          
           
             Excellent
             sentences
             to
             be
             oft
             incu●cated
             ,
             to
             worke
             in
             the
             schollars
             a
             loue
             of
             learning
             .
             Pro.
             3.
             13.
             
          
           
             To
             keepe
             groūds
             perfect
             .
          
           
             ☜
             
          
           
             To
             〈◊〉
             the
             nature
             of
             each
             〈◊〉
             ,
             and
             fra●●●
             our selues
             thereto
             accordingly
             .
          
           
             To
             punish
             vnwillingly
             .
          
           
             To
             proceed
             by
             degrees
             in
             punishing
             .
          
           
             1.
             
             Reproofes
             .
          
           
             2.
             
             Loss
             of
             place
             .
          
           
             3.
             
             Black
             Bill
             of
             principall
             vse
             &
             most
             auaileable
             
          
           
             Manner
             of
             the
             blacke
             Bill
             to
             depriue
             them
             of
             the
             play-daies
             .
          
           
             To
             make
             them
             all
             to
             knowe
             what
             to
             looke
             for
             .
          
           
             To
             view
             the
             fourmes
             before
             play
             ,
             and
             to
             separate
             all
             the
             disobedient
             and
             vnworthy
             to
             be
             left
             to
             their
             taskes
             .
          
           
             Care
             for
             their
             taskes
             to
             be
             performed
             faithfully
             in
             their
             restraint
             .
          
           
             Notorious
             offenders
             to
             sit
             vntill
             they
             shew
             geod
             tokens
             of
             amendment
             .
          
           
             Benefit
             of
             this
             punishment
             strictly
             obserued
             ,
             and
             why
             .
          
           
             To
             look
             to
             this
             strictly
             .
          
           
             4.
             
             Correction
             with
             rod
             more
             seldome
             ,
             and
             chiefly
             for
             terrour
             .
          
           
             Custome
             of
             some
             in
             the
             vse
             of
             the
             blacke
             Bill
             .
          
           
             C●ueats
             in
             correction
             .
          
           
             1.
             
             Manner
             of
             correction
             of
             the
             stubborne
             and
             vnbroken
             .
          
           
             To
             hold
             them
             fast
             .
          
           
             ☜
             
          
           
             Not
             to
             let
             any
             to
             goe
             awaie
             in
             their
             stubbornnesse
             .
          
           
             To
             be
             wary
             to
             auoide
             all
             smiting
             or
             hurting
             the
             children
             .
          
           
             Caueat
             of
             threatning
             .
          
           
             That
             the
             Master
             do
             not
             abase
             himselfe
             to
             struggle
             with
             any
             schollar
             .
          
           
             To
             auoide
             all
             furious
             anger
             .
          
           
             How
             correction
             ought
             euer
             to
             be
             giuen
             .
          
           
             Sparing
             the
             rod
             where
             necessitie
             requireth
             is
             to
             vndoe
             the
             children
             .
          
           
             Assurance
             of
             s●fety
             in
             correction
             when
             it
             is
             done
             ●right
             ,
             Such
             correctiō
             is
             no
             cruelty
             .
          
           
             ☞
             
          
           
             Anger
             necessary
             in
             Schoolemasters
             ,
             so
             it
             be
             tempered
             aright
             .
          
           
             Meanes
             to
             represse
             furious
             and
             raging
             anger
             .
          
           
             Places
             of
             scripture
             to
             be
             euer
             in
             our
             minds
             for
             repressing
             and
             moderating
             our
             anger
             .
          
           
             Eph.
             4.
             26.
             27
             
          
           
             Iam.
             1.
             20
             
          
           
             Psal.
             37.
             8.
             
          
           
             Pro.
             19
             19
             
          
           
             Mat.
             5.
             22
             
          
           
             Danger
             of
             rash
             anger
             when
             it
             exceedes
             .
          
           
             Occasions
             of
             anger
             left
             to
             our
             calling
             to
             humble
             and
             exercise
             vs.
             
          
           
             Three
             lessons
             for
             preuenting
             of
             anger
             .
          
           
             1
             Constancy
             in
             obseruing
             order
             ,
             and
             our
             eye
             euer
             on
             all
             .
          
           
             2
             Fatherly
             affections
             .
          
           
             3
             To
             walke
             i●
             our
             places
             with
             God
             as
             Enock
             .
          
           
             The
             danger
             of
             hauing
             the
             rod
             of
             ferula
             euer
             in
             our
             hand
             .
          
           
             Rather
             a
             little
             twigge
             if
             any
             thing
             at
             all
             .
          
           
             For
             the
             surest
             ,
             to
             haue
             nothing
             ordinarily
             ,
             but
             grauity
             and
             authority
             .
          
           
             The
             time
             of
             inflicting
             common
             punishments
             .
          
           
             Such
             as
             of
             whom
             is
             no
             hope
             of
             reformation
             to
             be
             sent
             from
             Schoole
             in
             time
             .
          
           
             Schoole
             time
             to
             begin
             at
             sixe
             .
          
           
             The
             Vsher
             to
             be
             present
             at
             sixe
             ,
             only
             to
             ouersee
             all
             .
          
           
             How
             to
             make
             all
             children
             to
             striue
             who
             shall
             be
             first
             at
             schoole
             without
             any
             correction
             .
          
           
             Intermission
             at
             nine
             and
             three
             for
             a
             quarter
             of
             an
             houre
             ,
             or
             more
             .
          
           
             To
             sing
             part
             of
             a
             Psalme
             before
             breaking
             vp
             at
             night
             ;
             and
             each
             to
             begin
             in
             order
             and
             giue
             the
             tune
             .
          
           
             Intermissions
             at
             nine
             and
             three
             a
             clocke
             not
             offensiue
             .
          
           
             Benefits
             of
             intermissions
             .
          
           
             1
             None
             ouer-toyled
             ,
             but
             wits
             euer
             fresh
             .
          
           
             The
             least
             will
             soone
             learne
             to
             sit
             two
             houres
             together
             .
          
           
             2
             Kept
             euer
             in
             their
             places
             at
             schoole
             time
             .
          
           
             Leaue
             to
             be
             graunted
             vpon
             vrgent
             occasions
             besides
             .
          
           
             3
             The
             time
             may
             be
             gained
             daily
             ,
             and
             sundry
             inconueniences
             preuented
             .
          
           
             Weekely
             recreations
             .
          
           
             Before
             breaking
             vp
             to
             play
             ,
             to
             make
             verses
             
               ex
               tempore
            
             .
          
           
             Or
             cap
             verses
             .
             The
             best
             manner
             of
             capping
             verses
             .
          
           
             Benefit
             of
             capping
             verses
             .
          
           
             The
             greatest
             commendation
             in
             these
             .
          
           
             Manner
             of
             their
             recreations
             .
          
           
             The
             recreatiōs
             of
             the
             studious
             to
             be
             regarded
             .
          
           
             Ouer
             much
             play
             to
             be
             carefully
             auoided
             .
          
           
             Inconuenience
             by
             diuersity
             of
             Grammars
             and
             courses
             of
             teaching
             .
          
           
             How
             helped
             .
          
           
             Euils
             by
             absence
             of
             schollars
             .
          
           
             How
             redressed
             .
          
           
             Discouragement
             of
             Schoolemasters
             by
             vnthankfulness
             of
             Parents
             .
          
           
             Thanks
             to
             be
             expected
             at
             Gods
             hands
             .
             Remedies
             against
             discouragements
             by
             vnthankfulness
             of
             Parents
             .
          
           
             ☞
             
          
           
             1.
             what
             schollars
             to
             be
             set
             to
             learning
             .
          
           
             Most
             apt
             &
             of
             greatest
             hope
             .
          
           
             2.
             
             What
             schollars
             to
             be
             sent
             to
             the
             Vniuersities
             .
          
           
             Ingenuous
             and
             louers
             of
             learning
             .
          
           
             Good
             Grammari●ns
             .
          
           
             Of
             discretion
             .
          
           
             None
             to
             be
             sent
             to
             the
             Vniuersities
             ,
             be●ore
             15.
             yeeres
             of
             age
             at
             least
             .
          
           
             To
             practice
             the
             most
             profitable
             
          
           
             A
             briefe
             rehearsall
             of
             the
             chief
             points
             mentioned
             in
             this
             booke
             .
          
           
             A
             rehearsall
             of
             the
             bookes
             and
             helps
             mentioned
             .
          
           
             The
             principall
             heads
             of
             those
             things
             which
             would
             be
             kept
             euer
             in
             memory
             ,
             to
             be
             put
             in
             practice
             by
             the
             Master
             continually
             .
          
           
             Master
             Askam
             his
             steps
             to
             learning
             .
          
           
             Philip
             Melanchtons
             direction
             .